See discussions, stats, and author profiles for this publication at: https://www.researchgate.

net/publication/336232430

Trends in implant dentistry: Implant systems, complications and barriers in

Riyadh, Saudi Arabia

Article  in  Dental and Medical Problems · September 2019

DOI: 10.17219/dmp/108659

CITATIONS READS

3 916

4 authors, including:

Rajaa Albugami Stephanus Smith

Ministry of Health Saudi Arabia Imam Abdulrahman Bin Faisal University
3 PUBLICATIONS   18 CITATIONS    25 PUBLICATIONS   56 CITATIONS   

SEE PROFILE SEE PROFILE

Khalid Almas
Imam Abdul Rahman bin Faisal University
27 PUBLICATIONS   738 CITATIONS   

SEE PROFILE

Some of the authors of this publication are also working on these related projects:

oral malodor & hygiene habits among dental students of IAU View project

Periodontics View project

All content following this page was uploaded by Rajaa Albugami on 07 December 2020.

The user has requested enhancement of the downloaded file.

Original papers

Trends in implant dentistry: Implant systems,

complications and barriers in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia
Trendy w implantologii stomatologicznej – systemy implantologiczne,
powikłania i ograniczenia w stolicy Arabii Saudyjskiej, Rijadzie
Rajaa Abdullah Albugami1,B,C,F, Steph Smith2,D–F, Mohammed Al-Sheikh Hassan3,C, Khalid Almas2,A,D–F
1
Department of Periodontics, Riyadh Dental Center, King Saud Medical City, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia
2
Division of Periodontology, Department of Preventive Dental Sciences, College of Dentistry, Imam Abdulrahman Bin Faisal University, Dammam, Saudi Arabia
3
Faculty of Health and Life Sciences, De Montfort University, Leicester, UK

A – research concept and design; B – collection and/or assembly of data; C – data analysis and interpretation;
D – writing the article; E – critical revision of the article; F – final approval of the article

Dental and Medical Problems, ISSN 1644-387X (print), ISSN 2300-9020 (online) Dent Med Probl. 2019;56(3):223–230

Address for correspondence

Khalid Almas
Abstract
E-mail: Kalmas@iau.edu.sa Background. Patients who are partially dentate or edentulous can receive both conventional and im-
plant-supported fixed prostheses, which leads to improvement in function, esthetics and self-esteem. Cur-
Funding sources rently, implant dentistry is one of the fastest-growing disciplines in dentistry.
None declared
Objectives. The aim of the study was to assess the education and training of dentists practicing implant
Conflict of interest therapy in the Riyadh region of Saudi Arabia, including their preferred dental implant systems, the clinical
None declared
complications experienced as well as the barriers to implant therapy they encounter.
Acknowledgements Material and methods. A self-administered questionnaire was distributed among dentists in Riyadh perform-
The authors would like to thank all the dentists/specialists
who participated in the study.
ing dental implants in both the state and private sectors. The questionnaire included demographic data, such as na-
tionality, the practitioner’s affiliated specialist category and their respective qualifications. Other data included their
main sources of education pertaining to implant dentistry, the most commonly used implant systems, common
Received on December 16, 2018
Reviewed on March 25, 2019 clinical complications, and barriers to implant therapy. A descriptive statistical analysis of the data was carried out.
Accepted on April 19, 2019
Results. A significant majority of non-Saudi dental practitioners were employed in the private sector (p = 0.001),
Published online on September 30, 2019 whereas a significant majority of Saudi dental practitioners were employed in the state sector (p = 0.001). The
largest group of practitioners performing implants were general dentists (48.1%). The 3iTM implant system was the
most widely utilized (35.4%). Failed osseointegration (12.6%) and peri-implantitis (12%) were the most com-
mon clinical complications. The biggest barrier to placing implants was the cost of implants to patients (59.1%).
Cite as Conclusions. Fundamental to implant practice is the clinical practitioner and patient selection. The utiliza-
Albugami RA, Smith S, Hassan MA, Almas K. Trends in implant
dentistry: Implant systems, complications and barriers in tion of implant systems should preferably be based on the chemical properties of implant surfaces which
Riyadh, Saudi Arabia. Dent Med Probl. 2019;56(3):223–230. promote early osseointegration. Comparative studies investigating the reasons for failed osseointegration and
doi:10.17219/dmp/108659 other clini­cal complications are needed locally and internationally. Further research, together with advanced
clinical specialist training, can lead to improvement in the quality of implant therapy for the benefit of patients.
DOI
10.17219/dmp/108659 Key words: implant practice survey, implant systems, implant complications, hydrophilic implants, hy-
drophobic implants
Copyright
© 2019 by Wroclaw Medical University Słowa kluczowe: przegląd praktyk implantologicznych, systemy implantologiczne, powikłania implan-
This is an article distributed under the terms of the tologiczne, implanty hydrofilowe, implanty hydrofobowe
Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Unported License (CC BY 3.0)
(https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/)
224
Introduction
The replacement of lost teeth is achievable by utilizing
removable partial dentures, complete dentures, overden-
tures, and fixed partial prostheses. Expanded treatment
options available to the general population suffering from
tooth loss include implant therapy.1 Partially dentate and
edentulous patients may significantly benefit from the
placement of  implants in terms of  both esthetics and
function.2
Male patients in Saudi Arabia complained that tooth
loss affected their profile as well as the chewing function.3
A study in Saudi Arabia reported that 61.5% of the par-
ticipants believed that the utilization of  dental implants
was the best treatment option for replacing missing
teeth.4 Another study in Riyadh revealed that 75.7% of the
respondents would willingly undergo implant therapy
again, and 79.3% would encourage others to consider im-
plant treatment.5
In both Saudi Arabia and elsewhere, few studies regard-
ing the practice of implant dentistry refer to the practitio-
ners’ level of education. There is every indication that the
majority of oral surgeons perform implants, followed by
periodontists and general dental practitioners (GDPs).6–8
Education and training in implant dentistry in different
countries can also vary, including undergraduate and for-
mal post-graduate training, fellowship/board training as
well as the attendance of courses and/or seminars.8
The choice of  implant system utilized also varies be-
tween studies and is determined by different factors.
Practicing dentists placing implants may be employed
either in the private sector or in state institutions, where
budget constraints may limit the choice of  implant sys-
tem to be used.8 Other factors may be the consideration
of  long-term implant success rates as well as the finan-
cial barriers experienced by patients.4,8 However, the cost
of implants has been given the lowest priority by practic-
ing dentists when choosing an implant system, especially
in the private sector.9
Implant therapy complications resulting in the loss or
failure of implants are attributed to inaccurate treatment
planning, surgical mistakes or improper prosthodontic
restoration.9 The reported complications include dehis-
cence/fenestration, gingival inflammation and fistulae.
Surgical complications such as hemorrhage and neuro-
sensory disturbances have also been reported.10 The pre­
valence of peri-implantitis as a complication varies from
study to study.8,11,12 This may be due to the inconsisten-
cies in the precise diagnoses of peri-implantitis and peri-
implant mucositis in different clinical settings.8 Implant
placement location, poor oral hygiene, the patient’s medi-
cal condition, and patient noncompliance are also reasons
that may underlie implant therapy complications.7,8,13
A recent study in the Eastern Province of Saudi Ara-
bia indicated that far more non-Saudis than Saudis
practiced implant dentistry.8 This was attributed to the
R.A. Albugami, et al. Dental implant practices in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia
recruitment of a large number of non-Saudi dentists into
the private sector due to an increased demand for im-
plant therapy. The study reported that the largest pro-
portion of  dentists performing implants were oral sur-
geons (44.7%), followed by GDPs (21.1%), periodontists
(18.4%), and prosthodontists (13.2%).8 It was therefore
the purpose of the pre­sent study to assess the education
and training of dentists practicing implant therapy in the
Riyadh region of Saudi Arabia, including their preferred
dental implant systems, the clinical complications expe-
rienced and the barriers to implant therapy they encoun-
ter. This would allow us to compare the practice of im-
plant therapy in the Riyadh region to that in the Eastern
Province of Saudi Arabia.
Material and methods
The study was conducted between May 2017 and March
2018. A self-administered English-language questionnaire
was distributed among practicing dental practitioners
currently placing dental implants. The practitioners were
working in state hospitals, and in various private centers
in and around the city of Riyadh. Access and permission
to distribute the questionnaires was obtained from both
the state and private institutions.
The questionnaire included demographic data to ascer-
tain the total number of  practicing dentists performing
both stage 1 and stage 2 of implant surgery. Their respec-
tive qualifications including their specialist category were
also noted. Saudi and non-Saudi practitioners were dif-
ferentiated, as were state and private sectors.
The questionnaire also referred to the practitioners’
main source of  education pertaining to implant dentist-
ry as well as the most commonly used implant systems.
The most common clinical complications experienced by
practitioners were investigated as well as the barriers to
implant therapy they encountered. A descriptive statisti-
cal analysis was carried out using IBM SPSS Statistics for
Windows, v. 22.0. (IBM Corp., Armonk, USA). Statistical
significance was set at 0.05.
Results
Out of  a  total of  248 questionnaires, 192 were com-
pleted, signifying a response rate of 77.4%. The majority
of the respondents were male (n = 127; 66.1%). Non-Saudi
dental practitioners were in the majority (56.6%), with
a  significant proportion employed in the private sector
(89.2%; p = 0.001). A significant majority of Saudi dental
practitioners, however, were employed in the state sector
(82.14%; p = 0.001).
Formal education regarding implant placement was re-
ported to consist mostly of post-graduate training during
the acquisition of a Master’s degree (43.2%), followed by
Dent Med Probl. 2019;56(3):223–230 225

the attendance of  courses and/or seminars (30.7%), un- The consideration of  costs (1.04%) and esthetics
dergraduate training (13%), fellowship/board training (1.04%) were given the lowest priority by the practitio-
(9.9%), and doctoral studies (8.3%). ners (Table 1).
Of a  total of  192 respondents placing implants, 48.1% Of the respondents, both state and private employees,
were GDPs, 30.8% periodontists, 11.9% oral surgeons, who reported performing implants every month (Fig. 3):
5.4% prosthodontists, and 3.8% restorative specialists. – 25.5% stated that they placed an average
The percentage distribution of  the qualifications held of 1–5 implants/month;
by the listed proportions of the practitioners is depicted – 31.2% – 6–10 implants/month;
in Fig. 1. The highest qualification held by the majority – 17.1% – 11–15 implants/month;
of GDPs was a Bachelor’s degree (90.9%), that held by the – 10.4% – 16–20 implants/month;
majority of  periodontists and oral surgeons was a  Mas- – 14.3% – >20 implants/month.
ter’s degree (57.9% and 61.9%, respectively), and that held The most common clinical situation for the place-
by the largest number of prosthodontists was a fellowship ment of  implants was single posterior tooth loss (89%),
(50%). The largest number of restorative specialists held followed by single anterior tooth loss (71%), edentulous
either a Master’s degree (42.86%) or a fellowship (42.86%).
Regarding the dental implant systems being used, it Table 1. Implant system selection criteria in terms of the percentage
was found that the 3iTM system was the most commonly of practicing dentists
used (35.4%), followed by Astra TechTM (22.4%), Osstem®
Percentage of practicing dentists
(10.4%), Noble BiocareTM (9.4%), Straumann® (7.8%), and Implant system selection criteria
[%]
Zimmer® (5.2%) (Fig. 2). Hospital/clinic administration 18.3
Regarding the criteria for selection when consider-
Popularity of the system 15.7
ing a specific implant system, 18.3% of the respondents
Easy handling 7.3
reported that the particular implant system was chosen
by the administration of  their hospital and/or clinic, Long-term prognosis 5.7

followed by the popularity of the system (15.7%), easy Cost 1.04

handling (7.3%) and the long-term prognosis (5.7%). Esthetics 1.04

Fig. 1. Percentage distribution of qualifications held by the percentage proportions of practitioners

GDP – general dental practitioner.
226 R.A. Albugami, et al. Dental implant practices in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia

Fig. 2. Percentage distribution of the implant systems used

Fig. 3. Percentage distribution of respondents placing n number of implants per month

Dent Med Probl. 2019;56(3):223–230 227

cases (56.5%), free-end saddles (42.4%), multiple tooth were periodontal diseases and infection (22.9%), followed
loss (39.8%), and abutments for either fixed partial den- by improper implant placement and the practitioner’s in-
tures (FPDs) or overdentures (26.9%) (Table 2). In this experience (20.8%).
study, the lower first molar was the most common pos- Regarding the referral of patients for the management
terior tooth to be replaced with an implant. The recom- of  unexpected complications, 74.3% of  all respondents
mendation of substituting missing teeth with implants as reported that they referred their patients for the appro-
the first choice of treatment was reported by 87.8% of the priate treatment of  any clinical complications. Of these,
respondents, in contrast to utilizing FPDs or removable the highest referral rate (91%) was reported among GDPs,
dentures. followed by restorative specialists (85.7%), oral surgeons
Common challenges encountered before the surgi- (63.6%) and periodontists (56.3%). Prosthodontists had
cal placement of implants were reported to be low sinus the lowest referral rate (40%).
levels (38.4%), smoking (15.6%), the patient’s medical con-
dition (15.1%), the severity of bone loss (11.9%), the pre­
sence of gingivitis/periodontal disease (7.8%), and a high Discussion
caries risk (6.2%) (Table 2).
The biggest barrier to performing implant surgery was The population of  Saudi Arabia was estimated to be
the cost of  implants to the patient, reported by 59.1% 33.5 million in 2018. The demand for implant therapy has
of the respondents, followed by the patient’s fear (9.9%), been increasing in the Saudi population.4 Al-Houtan et al.
a shortage of equipment (6.8%), and a lack of time report- in their study investigated implant therapy practices in
ed by the patient (1.6%). (Table 2). the Eastern Province of Saudi Arabia, which is the largest
The clinical complications most frequently encountered administrative area in the country.8 The Eastern Province
after implant surgery were reported to be failed osseoin- has an estimated population of  4.6 million, distributed
tegration (12.6%), peri-implantitis (12%) and peri-implant over 5 cities in the region. The total number of dentists
mucositis (9.3%). This was followed by dehiscence/fenes- placing implants in the Eastern Province is estimated to
tration (7.3%) and local infection (6.7%). The underlying be 55. The survey-based study in the Eastern Province
reasons for these clinical complications as perceived by had a response rate of 69% (n = 38), which was regarded as
the respondents were patient noncompliance, poor oral weak.8 On the other hand, the city of Riyadh – the capital
hygiene and smoking (24.5%). Other indicated reasons and the largest city in the country, situated in the central
part of Saudi Arabia – alone has an estimated population
Table 2. Clinical indications, pre-surgical challenges and barriers
of 4.21 million.14 The total number of dentists placing im-
encountered in terms of the percentage of practicing dentists plants in Riyadh is estimated to be 248. The response rate
in the present study was 77.4% (n = 192). Although the
Clinical indications, pre-surgical Percentage of practicing dentists
challenges and barriers [%]
response rates in these 2 studies may seem to be compa-
rable, the number of respondents in the present study is
Clinical indications
considered more acceptable.
Single posterior tooth loss 89.0
The prevalence of  clinical complications may vary
Single anterior tooth loss 71.0 between studies, both on a  local and international ba-
Edentulism 56.5 sis. In the present study, failed osseointegration was the
Free-end saddle 42.4 most commonly reported complication, along with peri-
Multiple tooth loss 39.8 implantitis. The Eastern Province study also reported
Abutment for FPD/overdenture 26.9 peri-implantitis as the main clinical complication.8 Other
Pre-surgical challenges
studies with larger population samples did not, however,
uphold this tendency.11,12,15 Patient noncompliance and
Low sinus levels 38.4
poor oral hygiene were identified as the main reasons
Smoking 15.6
underlying these clinical complications in both of  the
Patient’s medical condition 15.1 Saudi Arabian studies as well as in a study conducted in
Severity of bone loss 11.9 Sweden.7 Also, in the present study, periodontal diseases,
Gingivitis/periodontal disease 7.8 infection, improper implant placement, and the inexperi-
High caries risk 6.2 ence of practitioners were highlighted as causes of com-
Barriers plications.
Cost of implants to the patient 59.1
In this study, a high referral rate was reported by GDPs
for the treatment of the complications they encountered.
Patient’s fear 9.9
A  more thorough understanding and knowledge of  po-
Shortage of equipment 6.8
tential clinical complications is needed, which means that
Lack of time for the patient 1.6 further research regarding implant practices and compli-
FPD – fixed partial denture. cations, with larger sample sizes, both regionally and in-
228
ternationally, should be conducted. Furthermore, from an
educational perspective, in both the present study and the
Eastern Province study, the attendance of courses and/or
seminars was listed by a large proportion of the respon-
dents as part of their training in implant placement. The
increased popularity of  such courses was described in
another study.16 However, as the Eastern Province study
pointed out, the ideal practitioner to place implants is
a surgically trained periodontist or oral surgeon.8 There-
fore, it should be reiterated that such courses and semi-
nars should concentrate on considering the complexity
of  the various aspects of  implant planning and surgical
placement as well as the involved difficulties. This would
allow the future development of complications and com-
promises in the quality of implant therapy to be avoided
to a larger extent.8
Further comparisons between the present study in
Riyadh with the Eastern Province study reveal certain ma-
jor differences (Table 3). The predominant gender prac-
ticing implant dentistry in both studies was male; how-
ever, a larger pro rata percentage of males is evident in the
Eastern Province (81.6%).8 This may be attributed retro-
spectively to a larger number of dental schools in Riyadh,
qualifying more female students. These Riyadh schools
have been open significantly longer than dental schools in
the Eastern Province. Only recently have female students
been graduating from schools in the Eastern Pro­vince. It
may also be postulated that more male dentists are re-
cruited into the private sector in the Eastern Province.
Of all practicing dentists in Riyadh, a smaller percent-
age were in private practice (54.8%) as compared to the
Eastern Province (65.8%). However, due to the sample
sizes in the 2 studies (n = 192 and n = 38, respectively),
there was a much larger number of private practitioners
in Riyadh. This may possibly be ascribed to the Riyadh
region being more affluent than the Eastern Province.
The Riyadh region had a larger proportion of Saudi na-
tionals practicing implant dentistry as compared to the
Eastern Province. However, there is still a slightly higher
proportion of  non-Saudis practicing implant dentistry,
albeit fewer than in the Eastern Province. Riyadh has
a larger population, with more state and private teaching
dental hospitals than the Eastern Province. It is under-
Table 3. Comparison of implant practices between Riyadh and the Eastern Province of Saudi Arabia
Difference
Predominant gender of the practitioners placing implants
Employment sector
Percentage of non-Saudi practitioners
Number of practitioners placing 6–10 implants per month
Practitioners placing the most implants
Implant system mostly used
Clinical complication encountered most frequently
R.A. Albugami, et al. Dental implant practices in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia
standable that Saudis who are permanently resident and
educated in Riyadh would prefer to remain and practice
in Riyadh.
A larger number of  implants were being placed in
Riyadh as compared to the Eastern Province. Riyadh has
a far greater population than any of the 5 cities in the East-
ern Province, along with a  larger number of  practicing
dentists placing implants. The demand for implant thera-
py is therefore expected to be higher. A survey conducted
in Riyadh indicated the increased popularity of implants
as a  treatment option, with wide acceptance and a  high
level of satisfaction expressed after placement.4
The present study found that the majority of practitio-
ners placing implants in Riyadh were GDPs, whereas in
the Eastern Province, implants are mostly placed by oral
surgeons. The reasons for this tendency may be twofold.
Firstly, there is a greater number of both state and private
dental schools in the Riyadh region as compared to the
Eastern Province, so by implication, more Saudi GDPs are
being qualified. Secondly, this study showed that a  sig-
nificant majority of  non-Saudi dental practitioners were
employed in the private sector (89.2%), and the majority
of GDPs in Riyadh are non-Saudis. This may be ascribed
to a higher number of non-Saudi GDPs being recruited to
the private sector in Riyadh as compared to the Eastern
Province.
Both locally and internationally, the factors influencing
the choice of implant system may vary. A greater propor-
tion of practicing dentists in Riyadh utilize the 3i system,
whereas in the Eastern Province, the Straumann system is
more frequently used. The reasons for different implant
systems being preferred in these 2 regions in the same
country are not clear. In this study, the popularity of the
system, easy handling in use and the long-term prognosis
were among the reasons for the choice of implant system.
A limitation of this study regarding the choice of implant
system is the absence of any investigation of whether the
preferred use was based on published scientific literature
that included clinical data. Studies in other countries also
indicated the preferential use of  particular implant sys-
tems, such as Noble Biocare and Straumann.17,18 The use
of  a  particular implant system during the practitioner’s
specialist training, the influence of  aggressive commer-
Riyadh Eastern Province of Saudi Arabia
male (67.2%) male (81.6%)
private (54.8%) private (65.8%)
56.6% 68.4%
57 (342–570 implants) 13 (78–130 implants)
GDPs (48.1%) oral surgeons (44.7%)
3i (35.4%) Straumann (34.2%)
failed osseointegration (12.6%) peri-implantitis (23.7%)
Dent Med Probl. 2019;56(3):223–230
cial marketing, lower costs as well as personal preferences
for specific implant systems, for example due to resto­
rative convenience, may underlie this tendency. Glob-
ally, implant manufacturers profess that their various im-
plant systems have ‘the best’ physicochemical, biological
and clinical properties.19 However, the current basis for
implant treatment protocols is early osseointegration,
which comprises the immediate and early loading of im-
plants.19 The enhancement of  the bone-to-implant con-
tact (BIC) interface is an important parameter affecting
the speed of osseointegration.20 The modification of the
topographi­cal features of  dental implant surfaces at the
micro- and nanoscale can significantly improve BIC and
bone anchorage at the early stages of osseointegration.19
Hydrophili­city has been shown to positively affect the
initial stages of  wound healing during osseointegration,
whereby the adsorption of  plasma proteins essential for
the initial osteogenic interaction is accomplished.21 This
leads to bene­ficial gene expression, intense and rapid
osteogenesis, bone mineralization, and early osseointe-
gration.19,22 Various studies compared hydrophobic and
hydrophilic implant surfaces having the same microto-
pography. These studies concluded that osseointegration
was enhanced by super-hydrophilic surfaces, demonstrat-
ing a stronger bone response in comparison with hydro-
phobic surfaces with the same topographical features.20,23
Surface chemistry that promotes hydrophilicity, and not
micro-surface topography, has been shown to accelerate
implant osseointegration and increase BIC.19,20,23 Surface
chemistry potentially alters ionic interactions, protein
adsorption and cellular activity at the implant surface.24
Protein adsorption at the implant surface influences the
attachment and migration of cells. A higher affinity to in-
dividual protein molecules, which influences the bonding
strength and maintains the conformation, orientation and
function of these proteins, is exerted on hydrophilic sur-
faces than on hydrophobic ones.25,26 This is of consider­
able importance, since initial protein interactions with the
implant surface largely mediate the impact of hydrophilic-
ity on cellular and tissue reactions toward biomaterials.25
This includes biological signals activating and expressing
the receptors located on the membranes of cells, subse-
quently determining initial cellular attachment as well as
cell proliferation and differentiation.25 Hydrophobic sur-
faces, however, may induce the denaturation of proteins
by bringing about conformational changes.27,28
Various studies found that hydrophilic surfaces enhance
the early stages of cell adhesion, proliferation and differ-
entiation as well as bone mineralization as compared to
hydrophobic surfaces.29 This includes promoting the dif-
ferentiation and maturation of  osteoblasts, thereby con-
tributing to accelerated osseointegration, as well as initial-
izing the earlier onset of secondary implant stability.28,30
Furthermore, other studies described a significantly lower
overall early failure rate of hydrophilic implants as com-
pared to hydrophobic ones.31 The majority of  implant
229
surfaces currently being utilized in clinical practice are
hydrophobic.25,32,33 The examples of  hydrophobic im-
plants are 3i, Astra Tech, Straumann, and Dentsply Fri-
adent; the examples of  hydrophilic implants are Astra
Tech, Osstem, Nobel Biocare, and Straumann.25
Lastly, in the present study, failed osseointegration
was recorded as the most common clinical complication
(12.6%), as compared to the Eastern Province study, which
reported peri-implantitis to be more common. However,
due to the larger total number of  implants placed in
Riyadh (between 342 and 570 per month), along with
the similar reported prevalence of peri-implantitis (12%)
among the Riyadh patients, failed osseointegration may
be ascribed to poor patient compliance, smoking and bad
oral hygiene, as reported in this study.
Conclusions
The majority of  practitioners placing implants in
Riyadh were GDPs. Failed osseointegration and peri-im-
plantitis were the most common clinical complications.
The cost of implants to patients was the biggest barrier to
placing implants.
The practice of implant placement can differ from one
region to another, both locally and internationally. How-
ever, what is fundamental is the choice of implant system.
It should be based on factors that promote early osseoin-
tegration for the purpose of the immediate and early load-
ing of implants. Therefore, consideration should be given
to the advantages of  chemically modified surfaces that
promote hydrophilicity, rather than to the topographical
features alone. Implant placement, as practiced by various
qualified clinicians, also involves the aspects of  patient
selection and clinical complications. Studies with larger
sample sizes are needed to ascertain and compare the de-
mand and practice of implant placement in other regions
of Saudi Arabia.
Additional comparative research should be undertaken
on a  local as well as international basis. The research
should incorporate patient selection, restorative plan-
ning and the surgical placement of implants as well as the
prevalence and reasons for implant complications and
failures. Appropriate patient selection for implant thera-
py cannot be overemphasized. By this means, additional
knowledge, insight and expertise regarding proficiency in
clinical therapeutic guidelines may be further developed.
This knowledge, in addition to advanced clinical special-
ist training, will inevitably lead to the improvement in the
quality of implant therapy for the benefit of patients.
ORCID iDs
Rajaa Abdullah Albugami  https://orcid.org/0000-0003-3553-6385
Steph Smith  https://orcid.org/0000-0002-1093-8727
Mohammed Al-Sheikh Hassan  https://orcid.org/0000-0001-7020-1156
Khalid Almas  https://orcid.org/0000-0002-2552-587X
230 R.A. Albugami, et al. Dental implant practices in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia

References 23. Lang NP, Salvi GE, Huynh-Ba G, Ivanovski S, Donos N, Bosshardt DD.
Early osseointegration to hydrophilic and hydrophobic implant
 1. Amjad F, Aziz S. Trends, awareness, and attitudes of  patients
surfaces in humans. Clin Oral Implants Res. 2011;22(4):349–356.
towards replacement of missing teeth at University College of Den-
24. Schliephake H, Scharnweber D, Dard M, Sewing A, Aref A, Roess-
tistry. Pakistan Oral & Dental Journal. 2014;34(1):190–193.
ler S. Functionalization of dental implant surfaces using adhesion
  2. Nickenig HJ, Wichmann M, Terheyden H, Kreppel M. Oral health-
molecules. J Biomed Mater Res B Appl Biomater. 2005;73(1):88–96.
related quality of  life and implant therapy: A  prospective multi-
25. Gittens RA, Scheideler L, Rupp F, et al. A review on the wettability
center study of  preoperative, intermediate, and posttreatment
of  dental implant surfaces II: Biological and clinical aspects. Acta
assessment. J Craniomaxillofac Surg. 2016;44(6):753–757.
Biomater. 2014;10(7):2907–2918.
  3. Akeel R. Attitudes of Saudi male patients toward the replacement
26. Wilson CJ, Clegg RE, Leavesley DI, Pearcy MJ. Mediation of bioma-
of teeth. J Prosthet Dent. 2003;90(6):571–577.
terial-cell interactions by adsorbed proteins: A review. Tissue Eng.
 4. Al-Johany S, Al Zoman HA, Al Juhaini M, Al Refeai M. Dental
2005;11(1–2):1–18.
patients’ awareness and knowledge in using dental implants as an
27. Terheyden H, Lang NP, Bierbaum S, Stadlinger B. Osseointegration
option in replacing missing teeth: A survey in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia.
– communication of cells. Clin Oral Implants Res. 2012;23(10):1127–1135.
Saudi Dent J. 2010;22(4):183–188.
28. Smeets R, Stadlinger B, Schwarz F, et al. Impact of dental implant
  5. Al-Hamdan K, Meshrif H. Patient’s satisfaction with dental implants
surface modifications on osseointegration. Biomed Res Int.
in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia. Saudi Dent J. 2007;19(2):91–96.
2016;2016:6285620.
  6. Akeredolu PA, Adeyemo WL, Gbotolorun OM, James O, Olorunfemi BO,
29. Eriksson C, Nygren H, Ohlson K. Implantation of  hydrophilic
Arotiba GT. Knowledge, attitude and practice of dental implanto­
and hydrophobic titanium discs in rat tibia: Cellular reactions
logy in Nigeria. Implant Dent. 2007;16(1):110–118.
on the surfaces during the first 3 weeks in bone. Biomaterials.
  7. Derks J, Schaller D, Håkansson J, Wennström JL, Tomasi C, Berglundh T.
2004;25(19):4759–4766.
Effectiveness of  implant therapy analyzed in a  Swedish population:
30. Zhao G, Schwartz Z, Wieland M, et al. High surface energy enhances
Prevalence of peri-implantitis. J Dent Res. 2016;95(1):43–49.
cell response to titanium substrate microstructure. J Biomed Mater
  8. Al-Houtan T, Smith S, Almas K. Survey of dental implant practices
Res A. 2005;74(1):49–58.
in the Eastern Province of  Saudi Arabia. Odontostomatol Trop.
31. Le Gac O, Grunder U. Six-year survival and early failure rate of 2918
2018;41(163):31–41.
implants with hydrophobic and hydrophilic enossal surfaces. Dent J.
 9. Academy Report. Peri-implant mucositis and peri-implantitis:
(Basel). 2015;3(1):15–23.
A  current understanding of  their diagnoses and clinical implica-
32. Rupp F, Scheideler L, Eichler M, Geis-Gerstorfer J. Wetting behavior
tions. J Periodont. 2013;84(4):436–443.
of dental implants. Int J Oral Maxillofac Implants. 2011;26(6):1256–1266.
10. Goodacre CJ, Bernal G, Rungcharassaeng K, Kan JY. Clinical com-
33. Palmquist A, Engqvist H, Lausmaa J, Thomsen P. Commercially
plications with implants and implant prostheses. J Prosthet Dent.
available dental implants: Review of  their surface characteristics.
2003;90(2):121–132.
J Biomater Tissue Eng. 2012;2(2):112–124.
11. Mir-Mari J, Mir-Orfila P, Figueiredo R, Valmaseda-Castellón E, Gay-
Escoda C. Prevalence of  peri-implant diseases. A  cross-sectional
study based on a  private practice environment. J Clin Periodont.
2012;39(5):490–494.
12. Atieh MA, Alsabeeha NH, Faggion CM Jr, Duncan WJ. The frequen-
cy of peri-implant diseases: A systematic review and meta-analysis.
J Periodontol. 2013;84(11):1586–1598.
13. Vohra F, Habib R. Knowledge and attitude of  dentists toward
implant retained restorations in Saudi Arabia. Niger J Clin Pract.
2015;18(3):312–317.
14. Global Media Insight. Posted in Infographics, 2018. https://www.
globalmediainsight.com/blog/saudi-arabia-population-statistics/.
Accessed December 3, 2018.
15. Simonis P, Dufour T, Tenenbaum H. Long-term implant survival
and success: A  10–16-year follow-up of  non-submerged dental
implants. Clin Oral Implants Res. 2010;21(7):772–777.
16. Brandt RI, Fitzpatrick BJ, Moloney FB, Bartold PM. Continuing den-
tal education in osseointegrated implants. A survey. Austral Dent J.
2000;45(4):285–288.
17. Shah RJ, Shah SG, Patel GC. Trends in implant dentistry among
private dental practitioners of  Gujarat: A  survey. J Dent Imp.
2014;4(1):48–52.
18. Lambrecht JT, Cardone E, Kühl S. Status report on dental implan-
tology in Switzerland in 2006. A  cross-sectional survey. Eur J Oral
Implantol. 2010;3(1):71–74.
19. Sartoretto SC, Alves AT, Resende RF, Calasans-Maia J, Granjeiro
JM, Calasans-Maia MD. Early osseointegration driven by the sur-
face chemistry and wettability of  dental implants. J Appl Oral Sci.
2015;23(3):279–287.
20. Wennerberg A, Jimbo R, Stübinger S, Obrecht M, Dard M, Berner
S. Nanostructures and hydrophilicity influence osseointegration:
A  biomechanical study in the rabbit tibia. Clin Oral Implants Res.
2014;25(9):1041–1050.
21. Vasak C, Busenlechner D, Schwarze UY, et al. Early bone apposition
to hydrophilic and hydrophobic titanium implant surfaces: A histo-
logic and histomorphometric study in minipigs. Clin Oral Impl Res.
2014;25(12):1378–1385.
22. Donos N, Hamlet S, Lang NP, et al. Gene expression profile of osseo-
integration of a hydrophilic compared with a hydrophobic micro­
rough implant surface. Clin Oral Implants Res. 2011;22(4):365–372.

View publication stats

 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx

Available online at www.sciencedirect.com

journal homepage: www.elsevier.com/locate/dental

Characterization of silver diamine fluoride

cytotoxicity using microfluidic tooth-on-a-chip
and gingival equivalents

Shijia Hu a,1, Giridharan Muniraj a,2, Apurva Mishra a,3, Kanglun Hong b,
Jing Li Lum b, Catherine Hsu Ling Hong a,4, Vinicius Rosa a,c,5,
⁎
Gopu Sriram a,c, ,1,6
a
Faculty of Dentistry, National University of Singapore, Singapore
b
National University Centre for Oral Health Singapore, National University Hospital, Singapore
c
ORCHIDS: Oral Care Health Innovations and Designs Singapore, National University of Singapore, Singapore

a rt i cl e in fo ab strac t

Article history: Objective: This study aims to characterize the cytotoxicity potential of silver diamine
Received 20 February 2022 fluoride (SDF) on dental pulp stem cells (DPSC) and gingival equivalents.
Received in revised form 16 June Methods: DPSC cultured on 96-well plates was exposed directly to SDF (0.0001–0.01%) and
2022 cell viability (IC50) quantified. Effect of SDF on DPSC viability under flow (with dentin
Accepted 22 June 2022 barrier) conditions was evaluated using a custom-designed microfluidic "tooth-on-a-chip”.
Permeability of dentin discs (0.5–1.5 mm thickness) was evaluated using lucifer yellow
Keywords: permeation assay. Dentin discs were treated with 38% SDF (up to 3 h), and cell viability
Tooth-on-a-chip (live/dead assay) of the DPSC cultured in the inlet (unexposed) and outlet (exposed) regions
Microfluidics of the pulp channel was evaluated. To assess the mucosal corrosion potential, gingival
3D culture equivalents were treated with 38% SDF for 3 or 60 min (OECD test guideline 431) and
Silver diamine fluoride characterized by MTT assay and histomorphometric analysis.
Biocompatibility Results: DPSC exposed directly to SDF showed a dose-dependent reduction in cell viability
Dental pulp stem cells (IC50: 0.001%). Inlet channels (internal control) of the tooth-on-a-chip exposed to PBS and
Gingiva SDF-exposed dentin discs showed > 85% DPSC viability. In contrast, the outlet channels of
SDF-exposed dentin discs showed a decreased viability of < 31% and 0% (1.5 and ≤1.0 mm
thick dentin disc, respectively) (p < 0.01). The gingiva equivalents treated with SDF for 3

Abbreviations: SDF, Silver Diamine Fluoride; DPSC, Dental Pulp Stem Cells; DMEM, Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium; EDTA, Ethylene
Diamine Tetraacetic Acid; PMMA, Poly(methyl methacrylate); OECD, Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development; PBS,
Phosphate Buffered Solution; IC50, Half-maximal Inhibitory Concentration
⁎
Correspondence to: Faculty of Dentistry, National University of Singapore, 9 Lower Kent Ridge Road, Singapore 119085, Singapore.
E-mail addresses: denhus@nus.edu.sg (S. Hu), vini@nus.edu.sg (V. Rosa), sriram@nus.edu.sg (G. Sriram).
1
ORCID: 0000-0001-6136-9926
2
ORCID: 0000-0002-9441-3214
3
ORCID: 0000-0003-2841-1875
4
ORCID: 0000-0003-0174-0652
5
ORCID: 0000-0002-9203-7657
6
ORCID: 0000-0001-8423-5197

https://doi.org/10.1016/j.dental.2022.06.025
0109-5641/© 2022 The Academy of Dental Materials. Published by Elsevier Inc. All rights reserved.

Please cite this article as: S. Hu, G. Muniraj, A. Mishra et al., Characterization of silver diamine fluoride cytotoxicity using
microfluidic tooth-on-a-chip and gingival equivalents, Dental Materials, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.dental.2022.06.025i
2 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx
and 60 min demonstrated decreased epithelial integrity, loss of intercellular cohesion and
corneal layer detachment with significant reduction in intact epithelial thick­
ness (p < 0.05).
Significance: SDF penetrated the dentin (≤1 mm thick) inducing significant death of the
pulp cells. SDF also disrupted gingival epithelial integrity resulting in mucosal corrosion.
© 2022 The Academy of Dental Materials. Published by Elsevier Inc. All rights reserved.
1. Introduction
In recent years, silver diamine fluoride (SDF) has been in­
creasingly promoted as a biological method of managing
dental decay in children and patients with special needs for
its ability to arrest over 80% of active lesions [1,2]. A well-
documented side effect of SDF is staining of the carious tooth
structure after its application. However, this has not greatly
impacted the acceptability of SDF especially in the non-es­
thetic zone [3]. Other lesser-known potential complications
include the painful ulcerative lesions on the mucosa, gingival
swelling and gingival bleaching if SDF is accidentally applied
onto the oral mucosal tissue [4] and the induction of mild or
chronic inflammatory response in the pulp tissues in teeth
with deep carious lesions [5,6]. While the mucosal injury
from accidental SDF application is acute and self-resolving,
the effect on the pulp is less predictable especially in an al­
ready inflamed pulp of a carious tooth. Moreover, SDF has
also been shown to be able to penetrate deeply into dentin. Ex
vivo studies have demonstrated the detection of silver pre­
cipitates deeper than 2 mm in dentinal tubules of artificially
demineralized dentin [7] and deciduous teeth [8].
SDF is a alkaline (pH 9–10) solution with high fluoride
concentration, silver and ammonium ions [9,10]. It exerts its
anti-microbial and remineralizing properties through the ac­
tion of the fluoride and silver ions [10,11]. However, silver
ions can be toxic to human mesenchymal stem cells at con­
centrations as low as 0.5 ppm [12] and fluoride ions can be
toxic to human pulp cells at 200 ppm [13]. Additionally, the
high pH of SDF may result in damage to cells on direct con­
tact and reduce the proliferation of pulp cells [14]. In in vitro
studies, SDF was found to be 100% cytotoxic to human gin­
gival fibroblasts at 0.01% concentration [15] and severely af­
fected viability, mineralization ability and morphology of rat
pulp cells at 0.0038% [16]. These concentrations are far lower
than the 38% concentration that is used in the clinical set­
ting. In vivo animal studies have similarly found that direct
SDF application on pulp tissues resulted in necrosis in almost
100% of the time [17]. In a recent systematic review, the au­
thors concluded that direct application of SDF to pulpal tissue
resulted in necrosis, while indirect (on dentin) application
was generally biocompatible [18]. However, this conclusion
was based on 30 teeth examined over 3 studies without
controlling for dentin thickness. Despite the important con­
tributions of these studies, more studies are needed to eval­
uate how the presence of a dentin barrier of different
thicknesses would influence SDF’s toxicity on pulpal cells as
this more closely simulates the effect of SDF on the pulp
tissues in the clinical setting.
Recently, microfluidic organ-on-a-chip devices have been
developed to enable the culture of cells under dynamic flow
conditions [19], simulating physiological blood flow and the
pulp-dentin interface [20–22]. Advances in microfluidic de­
vices also enable the assessment of compound and bioma­
terial permeation through a barrier tissue under dynamic
flow conditions [19,23]. The dentin barrier test has been used
to examine the toxicity of dental materials with respect to
dentin penetration and effects on dental pulp cells [22,24,25].
This method closely replicates the clinical situations where
SDF is used and provides a more accurate reflection of what
happens in clinical settings. Hence, organ-on-a-chip devices
like tooth-on-a-chip can be designed to mimic the pulp-
dentin-biomaterial interface and used to assess the permea­
tion of SDF through the dentin to investigate the impact of
the dentin barrier and the permeated SDF on the cells that
are cultured beneath [26].
This study aimed to evaluate the effects of a commercially
available 38% SDF on human dental pulp and gingival cells
using a microfluidic tooth-on-a-chip device and full-thickness
human gingival equivalents, respectively.
2. Materials and methods
2.1. Cell culture
Human dental pulp stem cells (DPSC, passage 4–6; Allcells,
USA), primary gingival fibroblasts (passage 5–7), and im­
mortalized human oral keratinocytes (OKF6/TERT1, passage
35–45) were cultured in Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium
(DMEM) or keratinocyte serum-free medium (all consumables
from Invitrogen, USA) as previously described [27–29].
2.2. Cytotoxicity and IC50 estimation
The DPSC were seeded in 96-well plates (5 ×104/well) and
incubated at 37 °C for 24 h. Thereafter, the cells were treated
with 150 µL of commercially available 38% SDF (Advantage
Arrest, Elevate Oralcare, USA) diluted in basal growth media
at concentrations ranging from 0.0001% to 0.01%.
Subsequently, cells were subjected to MTS assay (CellTiter96
Aqueous One Solution, Promega, USA). Cell viability and half-
maximal inhibitory concentration (IC50) were calculated
using the absorbance at 490 nm from SDF-treated and control
(basal growth media) samples. All groups had four biological
samples and the experiments were performed in in­
dependent triplicates.
 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx 3

2.3. Tooth slice (dentin disc) preparation
The use of teeth was approved by the NHG Domain Specific
Review Board (DSRB ref: 2020/00147). Extracted permanent
molar teeth (free from caries and visible dentin defects,
subjects < 40 years old) were used for the fabrication of the
tooth-on-a-chip device. The teeth were disinfected in 1%
chloramine‑T solution (Sigma‑Aldrich, USA) and stored in
distilled water at 4 °C till use. Dentin slices (0.5, 1.0, and
1.5 mm thickness) adjacent to the roof of the pulp chamber
were cut using precision sectioning saw (IsoMet 1000,
Buehler, USA). The dentin discs were treated with 10% ethy­
lene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA, Sigma‑Aldrich, USA) for
1 min to remove smear layer, washed with phosphate-buf­
fered saline (PBS, Sigma-Aldrich, USA) under ultrasonic bath
for 5 min and stored at 4 °C and 100% relative humidity
till use.
within each PMMA sheet were microfabricated by computer
numerically controlled (CNC) micromilling.
Briefly, the device has a central cylindrical chamber
(dentin chamber) to house the dentin disc. The dentin disc is
clamped using silicone O-rings and a cylindrical hollow body
removable lid. The hollow (“cavity space” 4 mm diameter) in
the lid serves as the reservoir for loading of test substances.
Beneath the central chamber is a rhomboid-shaped perfu­
sable microchannel (“pulp channel”) with circular openings
at either end (inlet and outlet ports) for cell seeding and
perfusion of reagents using tubings connected to an
Ismatec® peristaltic pump (Cole-Parmer GmbH, Germany).
The microfluidic device was sterilized using low-energy X-ray
radiation as described previously [19].
2.5. Assessment of permeability of dentin discs on-chip

The permeability of dentin discs of different thicknesses was

2.4. Design and fabrication of microfluidic tooth-on-a-chip
The microfluidic tooth-on-a-chip device was designed using a
computer-aided design software (Autodesk Inventor,
Autodesk, USA, Fig. 1). The device was fabricated by ther­
mally bonding four microstructured poly(methyl methacry­
late) (PMMA, Whits Technologies, Singapore) sheets in
vacuum oven (Eyela, USA). The chambers and microchannels
quantified using the tooth-on-a-chip device. To this end, the
dentin discs (n = 5 for each thickness) were clamped between
two silicone O-rings placed within the central chamber of the
tooth-on-a-chip device and fastened with the lid. Afterwards,
100 µL of lucifer yellow (1 mg/mL, Sigma-Aldrich, USA) was
added on top of the dentin disc and allowed to permeate for
3 h. The pulp channel of the device was perfused with PBS
(8 µL/min), and the perfusate was collected every 30 min in
96-well plates.

Fig. 1 – Schematic illustration showing the features of the microfluidic tooth-on-a-chip device. The exploded view (A) and the
assembled device (B,C) show the different features of the device that includes an optically transparent base, pulp channels,
dentin chamber, removable lid and ports for inlet and outlet. (D) Sequence of phase-contrast images show the ability to
visualize the cells and the even distribution of the DPSC cultured across the pulp channel and under peristaltic flow
conditions. Scale bar: 1 mm.
4 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx
Table 1 – Prediction model for in vitro mucosal corrosion test based on OECD test guideline 431.
Viability measured after 3 and 60 min
Step-1
• < 50% after 3 min of exposure
• ≥ 50% after 3 min of exposure AND
< 15% after 60 min of exposure
• ≥ 50% after 3 min of exposure AND
≥ 15% after 60 min of exposure
Step-2 for substances/mixtures identified as Corrosive in step-1
• < 18% after 3 min of exposure
• ≥ 18% after 3 min of exposure
The amount of lucifer yellow in the perfusates was mea­
sured at 560 nm excitation and 590 nm emission using a
fluorometer (Fluoroskan FL, Thermo Scientific, USA). The
concentration of lucifer yellow was quantified using calibra­
tion plots from 11 serial dilutions over a range of 0.195 –
20 µg/mL (R2 = 0.9998). The cumulative permeation per unit
area of dentin disc was calculated using calibration plots
from 11 serial dilutions of lucifer yellow over a range of
0.195–20 µg/mL (R2 = 0.9998).
2.6. SDF treatment and on-chip assessment of DPSC
viability
DPSC were seeded (1 ×105 cells/cm2) on the pulp channel
through the inlet and left undisturbed overnight (Fig. 1D).
Dentin discs were sandwiched between two silicone O-rings,
placed within the microchamber and clamped using the lid
(n = 3 for each thickness). Culture medium was perfused
through the pulp channel at a flow rate of 1.5 µL/min.
Thereafter, 50 µL of SDF (38%) was added directly on top of
the dentin disc through the cavity space in the lid, and al­
lowed to permeate for 3 h. Afterward, the flow of basal cul­
ture medium was replaced with medium containing 1 µg/mL
calcein-AM (Thermo Fisher Scientific, USA) and 1 µg/mL pro­
pidium iodide (Thermo Fisher Scientific, USA) to stain the live
and dead cells, respectively. After 15 min, the cells were
gently washed with PBS and culture medium. The cells were
imaged using confocal laser scanning microscope (Olympus
FV1000, Olympus Corporation, Japan) at six regions of in­
terest along the pulp channel, and percentage of live and
dead cells were quantified (Image J, NIH, USA). The assays
were performed atleast three times for each dentin thick­
ness, and discs were discarded after being used once.
2.7. Fabrication of full-thickness gingival equivalents
Full-thickness gingival equivalents were fabricated using
gingival fibroblasts, and fibrin-based mucosal matrix [29].
Briefly, 3.5 × 105 oral keratinocytes were seeded on top of a 4-
day-old oral fibroblast-populated mucosal matrix and cul­
tured within culture insert (ThinCert™, Greiner Bio-one,
Austria) under submerged conditions for 2 days, followed by
the culture at air-liquid interface for an additional 14 days.
Classification prediction
Corrosive
Corrosive
Non-corrosive
Optional Sub-category 1A
Optional Sub-category 1B and 1C
2.8. Assessment of in vitro mucosal corrosion
In vitro mucosal corrosion test was performed following
Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
(OECD) test guideline 431 [30]. Briefly, the top epithelial sur­
face of the full-thickness gingival equivalents was exposed to
38% SDF for 3 min (room temperature) or 60 min (37 °C). Fol­
lowing the exposure period, the gingival equivalents were
washed thoroughly with PBS. The negative controls were
gingival equivalents exposed to PBS and eugenol (Pulp Canal
Sealer™ liquid containing 60–90% eugenol in solution, Kerr
Co, USA), and the positive control was 37% phosphoric acid
solution (prepared from 85 wt% solution in water, Sigma-Al­
drich, USA). Three independent gingival equivalents were
used for both histological analysis and MTT cell viability
assay.
2.9. MTT tissue viability assay
After exposure to the test substances from Section 2.8, the
gingival equivalents were washed with PBS, transferred to a
new plate with 300 µL of MTT solution (Promega, USA) and
incubated for 3 h at 37 °C. The purple formazan product was
extracted using 2 mL of isopropanol overnight in the dark at
room temperature. Subsequently, 150 µL of the extract was
transferred to a 96-well microplate, and absorbance values
were measured at 570 nm using a microplate reader (Mul­
tiskan GO). Tissue viability was calculated as a percentage of
the negative control. All data were expressed as mean ±
standard deviation (SD) of three independent biological tis­
sues. The mucosal corrosion potential of the applied sub­
stances was classified based on the prediction model
recommended in OECD test guideline 431 (Table 1, [30]).
2.10. Histology and analysis of epithelial thickness
Gingival equivalents exposed to the test substances were
fixed in 10% neutral buffered formalin (Sigma-Aldrich, USA),
processed for haematoxylin and eosin staining and images
captured using brightfield microscope (Eclipse E600, Nikon,
Japan). Thickness of the intact epithelium was quantified
using a line tool (NIS-Elements, Nikon, Japan) at five random
points in each image, and expressed as the mean ± SD of
three independent biological tissues.
 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx
Fig. 2 – Cellular viability of DPSC upon exposure to SDF. (A) Quantification of relative viability of DPSC exposed to SDF using
MTS assay. (B) Computation of IC50 of SDF. Data presented as mean ± SD, n = 4, *p < 0.05.
2.11. Statistical analysis
All data were represented as mean ± SD of three or more
independent biological replicates. Shapiro–Wilk and Lavene’s
tests were performed for checking normality and homo­
geneity. One-way ANOVA followed by Bonferroni-Holm post-
hoc analysis was used to compare the results among three or
more groups (GraphPad Prism, USA). A pre-set significance
level of 5% was considered for all tests.
3. Results
3.1. Effect of SDF on DPSC viability under static and direct
exposure conditions
DPSC exposed directly (without a dentin barrier) to media
containing SDF (0.0001–0.01%) under static culture conditions
showed a dose-dependent reduction in cell viability (Fig. 2).
The cellular viability was less than 50% for concentrations
above 0.001% (IC50 = 0.001%; 95% confidence intervals: 0.0009
– 0.0014).
3.2. Effect of SDF on DPSC cultured under flow and dentin
barrier conditions
A microfluidic tooth-on-a-chip device fitted with dentin discs
of varying thickness and peristaltic media flow conditions
was fabricated to mimic the microphysiological conditions of
dentin barrier (Fig. 1). Permeation kinetics of lucifer yellow
across the dentin barrier under peristaltic flow conditions is
presented in Fig. 3. Dentin discs of 0.5 mm thick exhibited
significantly higher cumulative permeation of lucifer yellow
over 3 h compared to dentin discs of 1 mm and 1.5 mm thick
(p < 0.05). Dentin discs of 1.5 mm thickness displayed the
least permeation. Correlation analysis showed a linear and
inverse relationship between dentin disc thickness and lu­
cifer yellow permeability (R2 = 0.89).
Next, we evaluated the impact of SDF permeability across
the dentin barrier on DPSC cultured under peristaltic flow
conditions. Phase-contrast images of the chip shows the
presence of DPSC that were evenly seeded throughout the
5
length of the pulp channel (Fig. 1D). Owing to the unilateral
flow within the tooth-on-a-chip device, the viability status of
cells in the inlet side of the pulp channel (unexposed to SDF)
was used as an internal control for comparison against the
viability of cells in the outlet side of the pulp channel (ex­
posed to SDF) (Fig. 4A,B). Further, dentin discs exposed to PBS
were used as the negative control. Fig. 4C shows the sequence
of on-chip fluorescent images (live/dead stained) captured on
the inlet and outlet sides of the pulp channel. The inlet and
outlet channels of chips with PBS-exposed dentin discs (ne­
gative control) exhibited > 80% live cells. There was no sig­
nificant difference in live and dead cells between the inlet
and outlet channels (Fig. 4E,F). For SDF-exposed dentin discs
of 0.5 mm and 1.0 mm thickness, there were no live cells
(100% cell death) in the outlet channel compared to > 90%
viability in the inlet channel (p < 0.01). In contrast, the
1.5 mm dentin discs exposed to SDF showed 30.6% ( ± 8.6)
cell viability in the outlet channels (p < 0.01). However, the
viable cells had a rounded morphology, compared to the
elongated spindle-shaped morphology of the DPSC in the
inlet channel or that of the control (PBS-exposed dentin
discs). Further, on-chip phase-contrast microscopy showed
the presence of cellular aggregation and rounded cells with
pyknotic nuclei (Fig. 4D).
3.3. Effect of SDF on gingival epithelium
The histology of the gingival equivalents following 3 and
60 min exposure to negative controls (PBS and eugenol), po­
sitive control (37% phosphoric acid) and SDF is presented in
Fig. 5A. Gingival equivalents treated with PBS and eugenol
were intact, with minimal disruption of the corneal layers. In
contrast, the tissues treated with phosphoric acid and SDF
exhibited signs of epithelial barrier disruption. Qualitative
analysis of epithelial integrity of the tissues exposed to SDF
for 3 min, showed detachment of the corneal layer char­
acterized by the wavy appearance and spaces (Fig. 5A,
Table 2). Furthermore, the tissues exhibited a loss of inter­
cellular cohesion in the basal layers of the epithelium. For the
tissues that were exposed to SDF for 60 min, the effects were
more substantial with desquamation of more layers and loss
6 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx
Fig. 3 – Assessment of permeability of dentin discs using tooth-on-a-chip device. (A) Line graphs show the kinetics of
permeation of lucifer yellow across dentin discs of different thickness (0.5, 1 and 1.5 mm) over 3 h period. (B) Graph
representing the correlation between dentin disc thickness and cumulative permeation of lucifer yellow at the end of 3 h
period. Data presented as mean ± SD, n = 5, *p < 0.05.
of intercellular adhesion in the basal and suprabasal com­
partments. Further, quantitative analysis of the thickness of
intact epithelium showed a significant reduction in intact
epithelial thickness (p < 0.05, Fig. 5B). These features of
desquamation, loss of intercellular cohesion, and reduced
thickness of intact epithelium were similar to those observed
on tissues exposed to phosphoric acid. Overall, these histo­
logical findings are suggestive of pH-induced chemical burn
or mucosal corrosion.
Next, we assessed the viability of the gingival equivalents
following 3 and 60 min exposure to SDF and controls
(Fig. 5C,D). The viability of the tissues exposed to SDF and
positive control for 3 min was less than the 50% threshold,
and significantly lower than the negative controls (p < 0.05).
Similarly, the tissue viability following 60 min exposure was
lower than the 15% threshold. Based on the prediction model
presented in Table 1, SDF exhibits the properties of a corro­
sive substance. Further, the viability of the tissues exposed to
SDF for 3 min was 4% ( ± 0.2), which is below the 18%
threshold for the subcategorization presented in Table 1. The
intense corrosive action of SDF is further validated by the
histological findings that demonstrated disruption of super­
ficial corneal layers and cell-cell contacts in the deeper basal
layers of the epithelium within the first 3 min of exposure
(Fig. 5A). Overall, these findings suggest that SDF exhibits
properties of a corrosive, sub-category 1 A.
4. Discussion
The present study examined the effects of SDF on dental pulp
and gingival cells. It was found that SDF was cytotoxic to
DPSC at extremely low concentrations (IC50 = 0.001%).
Additionally, 38% SDF penetrated dentin thickness of
≤ 1.0 mm resulting in complete death of DPSC cultured in a
microfluidic device under peristaltic flow conditions (Fig. 4).
When applied to a full-thickness human gingival equivalent,
38% SDF resulted in mucosal corrosion and epithelial des­
quamation even at exposure time as low as 3 min (Fig. 5).
The concentration (0.001%) whereby SDF was shown to be
cytotoxic is similar to previous studies that applied diluted
SDF directly on to human gingival fibroblasts [15] and rat
dental pulp cells [16]. Furthermore, the study by Fancher et.
al., [15] showed that this cytotoxic effect persisted even after
9 weeks of rinsing the dentin slices with artificial saliva.
Collectively, these findings suggest that the application of
highly concentrated SDF solution in deep cavity preparations
close to pulp may be a source of cytotoxicity, nonetheless,
this is yet to be confirmed by clinical studies.
Dentin is a semi-permeable barrier owing to the presence
of dentinal tubules and hence, only partially limits the dif­
fusion of biomaterial leachates into the pulp [31,32]. Dentin
permeability (a measure of barrier potential of dentin) varies
significantly (3–10 folds) across a few millimeters [33]. Hence,
prior to experiments with SDF, we characterized the perme­
ability of the dentin discs of different thickness. Using a lu­
cifer yellow permeation assay, it was found that dentin
permeability was inversely correlated with thickness up to a
certain thickness (< 1.5 mm), which corroborated with a
previous study [34]. However, due to the propensity for SDF
to precipitate in culture media, water, PBS and solutions with
pH < 8, it was not feasible to determine the absolute perme­
ability of SDF across dentin, which is a limitation of the
present study.
To understand the cytotoxicity of SDF on dental pulp in
vitro, it is essential to mimic dentinal barrier using models
like the dentin barrier models, in vitro pulp chamber, and
tooth-on-a-chip [20–22,24,25,32,35–38]. Herein, a microfluidic
tooth-on-a-chip device was used to examine the effect of 38%
SDF on human dental pulp cells across a dentin barrier of
various thicknesses. Furthermore, the device allowed direct
visualization of the effects of SDF on pulp cells and enabled
the flow of culture media. The pulp channel was designed
with narrow inlet and outlet ports to mimic the narrow apical
 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx 7

Fig. 4 – Effect of SDF on DPSC cultured under flow and dentin barrier conditions. Schematic illustration demonstrating the
working principle of the tooth-on-a-chip device as seen from the top (A) and side (B) views. Sequence of fluorescent (C) and
phase-contrast (D) images from the inlet and outlet sides of the pulp channel show the DPSC stained with calcein-AM (live,
cyan) and propidium iodide (dead, red). Scale bar in (D)− 200 µm, (D)− 500 µm. The bar graphs show the percentage of live (E)
and dead (F) cells within the inlet and outlet sides of the pulp channel upon exposure to SDF and different dentin disc
thickness. DD-dentin disc, Data presented as mean ± SD, n = 3, *p < 0.05 (inlet vs outlet), ‡p < 0.05 (PBS-exposed vs SDF
exposed dentin discs).
8 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx

Fig. 5 – Effect of SDF on gingival epithelium. (A) H-E-stained images show the integrity of the full-thickness gingival
equivalents upon exposure to SDF and control substances. scale bar: 50 µm (B) Quantification of epithelial integrity expressed
as thickness of intact epithelium upon 60 min exposure to SDF and control substances (mean ± SD, n = 5, *p < 0.05). (C, D)
Quantification of tissue viability upon 3 min and 60 min exposure to SDF and control substances (mean ± SD). Dotted
horizontal lines represent the viability threshold for 3 and 60 min exposure based on OECD TG431 guidelines.

foramen, and a rhomboid central segment to mimic the
wider pulp chamber (Fig. 1). The controlled flow of culture
media using a peristaltic pump mimicked the physiological
blood flow, providing constant supply of fresh nutrients and
washing away any potentially toxic compounds that pene­
trated the dentin barrier. Due to the unidirectional flow of
culture media from the inlet to outlet, the SDF permeating
through the dentin disc can affect only the cells in the outlet
channel. This permits the inlet channel to serve as an in­
ternal control for each technical and biological replicate, a
unique feature offered by the microfluidic design and active
control of fluid flow.
Using the tooth-on-a-chip device, this study found that
38% SDF was able to penetrate the dentin barrier ≤ 1.0 mm
and resulted in cellular aggregation, pyknotic nuclei and
100% cell death. This occurred despite a constant supply of
fresh media which may be attributed to higher permeability
of the dentin discs following removal of smear layer using
EDTA [39], long exposure period (3 h) compared to a brief
application clinically and/or the ability of SDF to maintain its
toxic effects even after multiple rinses [15]. The cytotoxic
effect cannot be attributed to potential remnants of lucifer
yellow in the dentin discs (after permeation assay), as the
PBS-exposed dentin discs (also exposed to lucifer yellow)

Table 2 – Qualitative analysis of the histological parameters of epithelial integrity of the gingival equivalents exposed to
the test substances.
Histological Parameters PBS Eugenol Phosphoric acid SDF
(Negative control) (Negative control) (Positive control)
3 min exposure
Desquamation – – + +
Cellular Vacuolization – ++ + +
Loss of intercellular Cohesion – – ++ ++
60 min exposure
Desquamation + – ++ ++
Cellular Vacuolization – ++ + +
Loss of intercellular Cohesion – – ++ ++
Note: -, no observable changes; +, mild (changes in few cells or few layers of the epithelium); ++, moderate-severe (changes observed in
majority of the cells or all layers of the epithelium).
 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx
showed > 85% viability in both inlet and outlet channels.
Furthermore, cell viability studies on DPSC showed > 95%
viability of DPSCs exposed to lucifer yellow (Fig. S1). The cy­
totoxic effect of SDF was found to be less pronounced at
dentin thickness of 1.5 mm, suggesting reduced permeability
at that thickness. Although previous studies concluded that
indirect application (on dentin) of SDF only resulted in mild
inflammation and tertiary dentin formation [5,6,40], a major
limitation of these studies were the failure to consider the
thickness of the dentin, which can have a major effect on SDF
penetration as shown in this study. Ex vivo studies on artifi­
cially demineralized dentin [7] and deciduous teeth [8] have
demonstrated the penetration of silver precipitates more
than 2 mm into the dentinal tubules. Similarly, different
tooth preparation approaches have been shown to impact
the depth of penetration of silver into the dentinal tubules
[41]. Though the permeation of substances through carious
dentin is lower than that through sound dentin [39,42],
questions remain on the penetration through deep carious
lesions with thin intact dentin. However, whether this would
lead to pulpal inflammation and eventual pulpal death is
uncertain, and further studies with the incorporation of im­
mune cells and/or in vivo studies are required.
The mechanism of SDF cytotoxicity is still uncertain at
this juncture. The cytotoxicity of SDF on human gingival
equivalents was compared to the cytotoxic response against
well-established positive and negative controls based on
OECD guidelines [30]. Histologically, it was found that the
process of cell death was similar to the effect of phosphoric
acid, with the human gingival equivalent showing wide­
spread desquamation, decreased thickness of intact epithe­
lium and loss of intercellular cohesion within 3 min of
exposure. This rapid effect suggests that the toxicity may be
due to the pH of the solution [43]. In a study on the effect of
pH on human cells, fibroblasts and keratinocytes were found
to have reduced viability at pH > 10, with keratinocytes being
more vulnerable exhibiting almost complete cell death at pH
of 11.5 [43]. The high pH of SDF solution can affect the in­
tegrity of corneodesmosomes [44,45], resulting in the loss of
adhesion between the corneocytes. Clinically, this may pre­
sent as desquamation of the corneal layer, and separation or
peeling of the whole epithelium from the underlying con­
nective tissue when accidentally applied to the gingiva.
5. Conclusion
SDF was found to be cytotoxic to DPSC at extremely low
concentrations (0.001%) and was able to penetrate dentin of
low thickness (≤1.0 mm) resulting in death of pulp cells in
vitro. It also disrupted the gingival epithelial integrity re­
sulting in mucosal corrosion.
Author Contributions
SH, CH, VR and GS conceived the idea and secured the
funding; GM, AM, KH and JLL participated in data collection;
GM, AM and GS conducted the data analysis and preparation
of figures; GS and SH led the manuscript writing; CH and VR
9
revised the manuscript for important intellectual content. All
authors gave final approval to the manuscript submitted.
Data availablity
The data that support the findings of this study are available
from the corresponding author, GS, upon reasonable request.
Acknowledgements
This research was partially supported by Singapore Dental
Association Endowment Fund Grant (A-0002957-00-00), NUS
StartUp grant (A-0002944-00-00, A-0002944-01-00) from
National University of Singapore, and Singapore Ministry of
Education Academic Research Fund Tier 1 (A-8000071-00-00).
GM and AM are supported by NUS Research Scholarship.
Appendix A. Supporting information
Supplementary data associated with this article can be found
in the online version at doi:10.1016/j.dental.2022.06.025.
references
[1] Gao SS, Zhao IS, Hiraishi N, Duangthip D, Mei ML, Lo ECM,
et al. Clinical trials of silver diamine fluoride in arresting
caries among children: a systematic review. JDR Clin Trans
Res 2016;1:201–10.
[2] Llodra JC, Rodriguez A, Ferrer B, Menardia V, Ramos T,
Morato M. Efficacy of silver diamine fluoride for caries
reduction in primary teeth and first permanent molars of
schoolchildren: 36-month clinical trial. J Dent Res
2005;84:721–4.
[3] Hu S, Meyer B, Lai BWP, Chay PL, Tong HJ. Parental
acceptance of silver diammine fluoride in children with
autism spectrum disorder. Int J Paediatr Dent 2020;30:514–22.
[4] Duangthip D, Fung MHT, Wong MCM, Chu CH, Lo ECM.
Adverse effects of silver diamine fluoride treatment among
preschool children. J Dent Res 2018;97:395–401.
[5] Bimstein E, Damm D. Human primary tooth histology six
months after treatment with silver diamine fluoride. J Clin
Pediatr Dent 2018;42:442–4.
[6] Rossi G, Squassi A, Mandalunis P, Kaplan A. Effect of silver
diamine fluoride (SDF) on the dentin-pulp complex: ex vivo
histological analysis on human primary teeth and rat
molars. Acta Odontol Latinoam 2017;30:5–12.
[7] Sayed M, Matsui N, Uo M, Nikaido T, Oikawa M, Burrow MF,
et al. Morphological and elemental analysis of silver
penetration into sound/demineralized dentin after SDF
application. Dent Mater 2019;35:1718–27.
[8] Li Y, Liu Y, Psoter WJ, Nguyen OM, Bromage TG, Walters MA,
et al. Assessment of the silver penetration and distribution
in carious lesions of deciduous teeth treated with silver
diamine fluoride. Caries Res 2019;53:431–40.
[9] Zhao IS, Gao SS, Hiraishi N, Burrow MF, Duangthip D, Mei
ML, et al. Mechanisms of silver diamine fluoride on arresting
caries: a literature review. Int Dent J 2018;68:67–76.
[10] Mei ML, Lo ECM, Chu CH. Arresting dentine caries with silver
diamine fluoride: what’s behind it? J Dent Res 2018;97:751–8.
[11] Hu S, Meyer B, Duggal M. A silver renaissance in dentistry.
Eur Arch Paediatr Dent 2018;19:221–7.
[12] Greulich C, Braun D, Peetsch A, Diendorf J, Siebers B, Epple
M, et al. The toxic effect of silver ions and silver
10 dental materials xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx
nanoparticles towards bacteria and human cells occurs in
the same concentration range. RSC Adv 2012;2:6981–7.
[13] Chang Y-C, Chou M-Y. Cytotoxicity of fluoride on human
pulp cell cultures in vitro. Oral Surg Oral Med Oral Pathol
Oral Radiol Endod 2001;91:230–4.
[14] Hirose Y, Yamaguchi M, Kawabata S, Murakami M,
Nakashima M, Gotoh M, et al. Effects of extracellular pH on
dental pulp cells in vitro. J Endod 2016;42:735–41.
[15] Fancher ME, Fournier S, Townsend J, Lallier TE. Cytotoxic
effects of silver diamine fluoride. Am J Dent 2019;32:152–6.
[16] Kim S, Nassar M, Tamura Y, Hiraishi N, Jamleh A, Nikaido T,
et al. The effect of reduced glutathione on the toxicity of
silver diamine fluoride in rat pulpal cells. J Appl Oral Sci
2021;29:e20200859.
[17] Hosoya Y, Aritomi K, Goto G. Pulpal response to diammine
silver fluoride. (2). Application on exposed pulps. Shoni
Shikagaku Zasshi 1990;28:327–37.
[18] Zaeneldin A, Yu OY, Chu CH. Effect of silver diamine fluoride
on vital dental pulp: a systematic review. J Dent 2022:104066.
[19] Sriram G, Alberti M, Dancik Y, Wu B, Wu R, Feng Z, et al. Full-
thickness human skin-on-chip with enhanced epidermal
morphogenesis and barrier function. Mater Today
2018;21:326–40.
[20] Franca CM, Tahayeri A, Rodrigues NS, Ferdosian S, Puppin
Rontani RM, Sereda G, et al. The tooth on-a-chip: a
microphysiologic model system mimicking the biologic
interface of the tooth with biomaterials. Lab Chip
2020;20:405–13.
[21] Rodrigues NS, Franca CM, Tahayeri A, Ren Z, Saboia VPA,
Smith AJ, et al. Biomaterial and biofilm interactions with the
pulp-dentin complex-on-a-chip. J Dent Res 2021;100:1136–43.
[22] Rosa V, Sriram G, McDonald N, Cavalcanti BN. A critical
analysis of research methods and biological experimental
models to study pulp regeneration. Int Endod J 2022;55(Suppl
2):446–55.
[23] Alberti M, Dancik Y, Sriram G, Wu B, Teo Y, Feng Z, et al.
Multi-chamber microfluidic platform for high-precision skin
permeation testing. Lab Chip 2017;17:1625–34.
[24] Jiang RD, Lin H, Zheng G, Zhang XM, Du Q, Yang M. In vitro
dentin barrier cytotoxicity testing of some dental restorative
materials. J Dent 2017;58:28–33.
[25] Hadjichristou C, About I, Koidis P, Bakopoulou A. Advanced
in vitro experimental models for tissue engineering-based
reconstruction of a 3D dentin/pulp complex: a literature
review. Stem Cell Rev Rep 2021;17:785–802.
[26] Modena KC, Casas-Apayco LC, Atta MT, Costa CA, Hebling J,
Sipert CR, et al. Cytotoxicity and biocompatibility of direct
and indirect pulp capping materials. J Appl Oral Sci
2009;17:544–54.
[27] Atkuru S, Muniraj G, Sudhaharan T, Chiam KH, Wright GD,
Sriram G. Cellular ageing of oral fibroblasts differentially
modulates extracellular matrix organization. J Periodontal
Res 2021;56:108–20.
[28] Xie H, Chua M, Islam I, Bentini R, Cao T, Viana-Gomes JC,
et al. CVD-grown monolayer graphene induces osteogenic
but not odontoblastic differentiation of dental pulp stem
cells. Dent Mater 2017;33:e13–21.
[29] Sriram G, Sudhaharan T, Wright GD. Multiphoton
microscopy for noninvasive and label-free imaging of human
skin and oral mucosa equivalents. Methods Mol Biol
2020;2150:195–212.
[30] OECD. Test No. 431: in vitro skin corrosion: reconstructed
human epidermis (RHE) test method, OECD Guidelines for
the Testing of Chemicals, Section 4, OECD Publishing, Paris.
〈https://doi.org/10.1787/9789264264618-en〉.
[31] Hamid A, Hume WR. The effect of dentine thickness on
diffusion of resin monomers in vitro. J Oral Rehabil
1997;24:20–5.
[32] Hanks CT, Craig RG, Diehl ML, Pashley DH. Cytotoxicity of
dental composites and other materials in a new in vitro
device. J Oral Pathol 1988;17:396–403.
[33] Pashley DH, Andringa H, Derkson G, Derkson M, Kalathoor S.
Regional variability in the permeability of human dentine.
Arch Oral Biol 1987;32:519–23.
[34] Hanks CT, Wataha JC, Parsell R, Strawn SE, Fat J. Permeability
of biological and synthetic molecules through dentine. J Oral
Rehabil 1994;21:475–87.
[35] Schmalz G, Schuster U, Nuetzel K, Schweikl H. An in vitro
pulp chamber with three-dimensional cell cultures. J Endod
1999;25:24–9.
[36] da Fonseca Roberti Garcia L, Pontes EC, Basso FG, Hebling J,
de Souza Costa CA, Soares DG. Transdentinal cytotoxicity of
resin-based luting cements to pulp cells. Clin Oral Investig
2016;20:1559–66.
[37] Hadjichristou C, Papachristou E, Bonovolias I, Bakopoulou A.
Three-dimensional tissue engineering-based Dentin/Pulp
tissue analogue as advanced biocompatibility evaluation
tool of dental restorative materials. Dent Mater
2020;36:229–48.
[38] Soares DG, Bordini EAF, Swanson WB, de Souza Costa CA,
Bottino MC. Platform technologies for regenerative
endodontics from multifunctional biomaterials to tooth-on-
a-chip strategies. Clin Oral Investig 2021;25:4749–79.
[39] Pashley EL, Talman R, Horner JA, Pashley DH. Permeability of
normal versus carious dentin. Endod Dent Traumatol
1991;7:207–11.
[40] Korwar A, Sharma S, Logani A, Shah N. Pulp response to high
fluoride releasing glass ionomer, silver diamine fluoride, and
calcium hydroxide used for indirect pulp treatment: an in-
vivo comparative study. Contemp Clin Dent 2015;6:288–92.
[41] Lau L, Quock RL, Wu DI, Harrington DA, Patel SA, Barros JA.
Effect of surface preparation and light curing on penetration
of silver particles from 38% silver diamine fluoride in dentin
of primary teeth: an in vitro evaluation. Am J Dent
2021;34:44–8.
[42] Puapichartdumrong P, Ikeda H, Suda H. Facilitation of
iontophoretic drug delivery through intact and caries-
affected dentine. Int Endod J 2003;36:674–81.
[43] Kruse CR, Singh M, Targosinski S, Sinha I, Sørensen JA,
Eriksson E, et al. The effect of pH on cell viability, cell
migration, cell proliferation, wound closure, and wound
reepithelialization: in vitro and in vivo study. Wound Repair
Regen 2017;25:260–9.
[44] Hachem JP, Crumrine D, Fluhr J, Brown BE, Feingold KR, Elias
PM. pH directly regulates epidermal permeability barrier
homeostasis, and stratum corneum integrity/cohesion. J
Invest Dermatol 2003;121:345–53.
[45] Ishida-Yamamoto A, Igawa S. The biology and regulation of
corneodesmosomes. Cell Tissue Res 2015;360:477–82.
See discussions, stats, and author profiles for this publication at: https://www.researchgate.net/publication/276501025

Overview of surgical guides for implant therapy

Article  in  Journal of Dental Implants · January 2015

DOI: 10.4103/0974-6781.154438

CITATIONS READS

9 2,509

4 authors, including:

Umapathy Thimmegowda Anila Bs

RajaRajeshwari Dental College and Hospital Sibar Institute of Dental Sciences
63 PUBLICATIONS   58 CITATIONS    1 PUBLICATION   9 CITATIONS   

SEE PROFILE SEE PROFILE

Cheranjeevi Jayam
All India Institute of Medical Sciences Mangalagiri
54 PUBLICATIONS   218 CITATIONS   

SEE PROFILE

Some of the authors of this publication are also working on these related projects:

kap conscious sedation View project

splint View project

All content following this page was uploaded by Umapathy Thimmegowda on 16 March 2018.

The user has requested enhancement of the downloaded file.

 PRACTITIONER SECTION

Overview of surgical guides for implant therapy

T Umapathy, Chirenjeevi Jayam1, BS Anila2, CP Ashwini3

ABSTRACT

Prosthetically driven implant prosthesis assures good aesthetics, function and more importantly hygiene
maintenance enabling long time success. Accuracy in treatment planning and implementation of
planned treatment is vital for this success. Following advancements that have occurred in treatment
planning (virtual software) for implant prosthesis; an equal rise is to be expected in transferring the
planned therapy to surgical fruition. In this regard, surgical templates have enabled clinician to deliver
predictable surgical & prosthetic rehabilitation. Surgical guides have not only decreased the chances
of iatrogenic damage of critical anatomic structures; they also increase the esthetic and functional
advantages of prosthodontic-driven implant. Within the constraints of this article, the authors describes
an over view of use of surgical guides in clinical situation. If clinician is considered a pilot, then surgical
guide is his navigator.

KEY WORDS: CAD‑CAM prosthesis, guided surgery, implants, planned guides, surgical guides

INTRODUCTION advantages of prosthodontic‑driven implant.[3] Manual

The use of medical imaging and software planning has
led to considerable improvement in treatment planning.[1]
Surgical guides now play an important role in transferring
this premapped plan to placing the implants at their
designated positions (angulation and depth).[2] There are
several explanations why one should use a surgical guide
for successful implant placement. Use of the surgical guide
is just not limited to placing implants in critical anatomical
situations but also for placing implants routinely at ideal
positions in the bone increasing the esthetic and functional
Department of Pedodontics and Preventive Dentistry,
Rajarajeswari Dental College and Hospital, Bengaluru, 2Department
of Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics, Himachal Dental
College,Sundernagar, 3Dental Surgeon, S.B. Patil Dental College
and Hospital, Bidar, Karnataka,  1Department of Pedodontics and
Preventive Dentistry, Himachal Pradesh Government Dental College,
Shimla, Himachal Pradesh, India
Address for correspondence: Dr. T Umapathy,
Department of Pedodontics and Preventive Dentistry,
Rajarajeswari Dental College and Hospital, No. 14, Ramohalli Cross,
Kumbalgudu, Mysore Road, Bengaluru ‑ 560 074, Karnataka, India.
E‑mail: umapathygowda@gmail.com
Access this article online
Quick Response Code:
Website:
www.jdionline.org
DOI:
10.4103/0974-6781.154438
48 Journal of Dental Implants | Jan - Jun 2015 | Vol 5 | Issue 1
errors of placement can be prevented.[4]
Glossary of prosthodontic terms‑8 defines surgical template
as a guide used to assist in proper surgical placement and
angulation of dental implants.[5] Surgical guide is the link
between what’s in mind (treatment planned) and what will
be executed (treatment). Predetermining the appropriate
osteotomy path for the clinician significantly helps the
surgical procedure. If the clinician is considered a pilot,
then surgical guide is his navigator.
USES OF SURGICAL GUIDE
• Guidance of osteotomy drills at correct position,
angulation and depth
• Guidance of implant fixtures at correct position,
angulation and depth
• Guidance of amount of bone reduction or bone
harvesting if necessary (both soft tissue and hard
tissue harvesting).[1,2,6]
Surgical guides feature several advantages
• Decreases manual errors associated with free hand
implant placement
• Minimally invasive procedure‑since surgical guides
allow minimal intervention, postoperative surgical
problems are minimized providing psychological
benefit to both patient and clinician
• Precision  ‑  Implants are prosthetically driven
components; any deviation can lead to abrupt
results in functioning. With surgical guides, implant
 Umapathy, et al.: Overview of surgical guides for implant therapy
placement has become more accurate
• Safety  ‑  Safety is the biggest factor when placing
implants in critical areas of the mouth. Even the
slightest error can lead to severe complications.
With guides, such deviations can be prevented. Vital
structure damage is easily prevented
• Predictability  ‑  Alertness throughout the whole
procedure cannot be maintained. Even experienced
hands are associated with decreased quality in
comparison to guided implantation technique
• Aesthetics ‑ It is seen that use of surgical guides to
transfer software planning to the actual placement
has shown good cosmetic results
• Hygiene  ‑  Maintenance of proper oral health is
ensured because of correct implant placement
• For best survival, implant supported prosthesis
should be placed in preplanned positions. Guides
can help such quality placements of implants
• Reduction of implant surgery time
• Ease in fabrication: Most implants have built‑in
software, which enables online shopping and
ordering with a single button
• Special surgical guide types, such as bone reduction
guides are available that can enable graft harvesting
• Guide itself can act as a temporary prosthesis for fully
edentulous cases
• Increased visibility of the surgical site and easy access
for flap exposure
• Accurate results for beginners
• Foresee the costs
• Reduce own costs because less implant surgery time
is necessary and the absence of failures.[1,7‑10]
Disadvantages
• Once if guides are fabricated, they do not allow any
change or modification from predetermined position
if required at the time of surgery
• Any tissue changes (e.g. Swelling, loss of abutment
teeth) between time of ordering and implant
installation can alter fit of the prosthesis ultimately
functioning of implant prosthesis
• Guide dislocation can occur during surgery if the
guide is not stabilized
• Drill lodgement in stents
• Guide dislocation also occurs when drilling is
intended to penetrate hard bone, producing torsional
forces on the sleeves, thus lifting off the guide
• Start‑up cost associated with software purchasing
• Greater learning curves.[7‑10]
Classification of surgical guides
Based on the area of operation
Guides for partially edentulous sites (tooth supported
or bone supported‑depending on amount of the
edentulous space) and Guides for completely edentulous
sites (mucosa or bone supported).
Journal of Dental Implants | Jan - Jun 2015 | Vol 5 | Issue 1 49
Based on the support the surgical guides derive
Tooth supported, Bone supported, and Mucosa
supported. Rules for planning usage of different types
of surgical guides:[6]
• Tooth supported guides  ‑  Minimum three stable
teeth should be present to support the guide during
surgery [Figure 1]
• Mucosa supported guides  ‑  It is used in fully
edentulous sites. Advantage‑less or no tissue reflection
is required, so less postoperative discomfort. Will
require scan prosthesis and surgical guides during
surgery [Figure 2]
• Bone supported guides ‑ They are used in partially
edentulous sites and completely edentulous sites.
When used in partially edentulous sites, it should
possess at least 3 cm of supporting bone or 3 teeth
would need replacement. Bone guides are especially
used when edentulous sites possess thin bone. Raised
flap should provide a good view to implant sites and
insertion of guides [Figure 3].
Based on the accessibility
Surgical guides can be open sleeve or closed
sleeve (increased accessibility).[6]
Base on utility
• Pilot guides  ‑  The sleeves only allow pilot drills.
Angulation control is achieved. Depth control is to be
obtained manually by assessing markings on drills.
Later, the surgical guide is removed, and osteotomy
site is expanded in the absence of surgical guide
• Complete drill guides ‑ It uses drill keys or sleeves.
Different sleeves for different diameters of drills,
which are changed concomitantly as osteotomy is
widened. Angulation as well size of osteotomy is
controlled by guide; depth is controlled manually
• Safe guides/easy guides ‑ Uses drill key or sleeves
as above with additional implant stopper that
controls the depth of drilling. Allows both osteotomy
Figure 1: Supported surgical guide
 Umapathy, et al.: Overview of surgical guides for implant therapy

preparations with surgical drills and installation of

implants.[6,11]

Based on material
Self/light cure acrylic resin, metal reinforced acrylic
templates; vacuum formed polymers, milling, CAD‑CAM
prosthesis, stereo lithographic models. The surgical
accuracy of manually processed resin and vacuum
formed guides is less in comparison to the latter
mentioned milling, CAD‑CAM prosthesis or stereo
lithographic models.[4,6,12]

Guided surgery kit

A standard guided surgical kit contains mucosal punch,
drill handle, c handle, template fixation pins, retentive
anchor driver, stop key for guided implants, T‑sleeve, Figure 2: Mucosa supported surgical guide
guide tubes.

Selection of retentive anchor pins

Different types of surgical guides require diverse
considerations for stabilizing the guide. Important rule
is – “If guide itself is not stable, then the whole implant
procedure goes haywire.” Considerations should be
decided regarding type of the surgical guide, implant
number, position of edentulous site, presence of any
anatomical limitations (maxillary sinus, mandibular
nerve), and length of fixation screws.

Ideally the fixation screws should be positioned

vertically because vertical position stabilizes the guide
the most and also the have the added advantage of easier Figure 3: Bone supported surgical guide
accessibility for placement.

Considerations for deciding retentive anchors for

tooth supported guides
If edentulous site is bound by teeth bilaterally, then
fixation anchor is positioned in the middle of the
edentulous site. If distal edentulous site: Fixation anchors
are positioned as distally as possible in the arch, not
necessarily adjacent to distal edentulous site.

Considerations for deciding retentive anchors for

mucosa supported guides
At least three in number. Two anchors positioned at
distal ends, and one anchor positioned in the center
of edentulous arch. The distal areas or posterior areas
usually contain important structures such as maxillary
sinus, mandibular nerves. In such conditions, we have
to take these structures into consideration and plan more
distally as possible. While using a mucosa supported
guides, the undercuts are relieved in the labial region
where the fixation anchors are attached. Screwing in these
areas can lift the guide away from the mucosal tissues.
Latter can be prevented by holding the guide initially
till at least positioning one screw in position [Figure 4].
Figure 4: Lifting off phenomenon
Considerations for deciding retentive anchors for
bone supported guides
Two fixation anchors are enough to rigidly fix the guide to
the bone. One on the right side and other to the left. In the
undercut area, tilting off or lift off of the guide can occur
on tightening the screw. Latter is prevented by holding the
guide while the second anchor is tightened. It is not a rule
that the whole of the guide should contact bony tissue.[6]

50 Journal of Dental Implants | Jan - Jun 2015 | Vol 5 | Issue 1

 Umapathy, et al.: Overview of surgical guides for implant therapy
Flow chart for surgical guide use
Step 1: Diagnosis and treatment planning.
Step 2: Virtual implant and prosthesis planning with
software.
Step 3: Selection of particular implant system and
components.
Step 4: Planning for the surgical guide compatible with
particular implant system.
Step 4a: If more than 3 teeth‑tooth borne, if less than 3
teeth‑mucosa or bone borne surgical guide.
Step 4b: Selection of anchors  (depending on the site,
implant number, angulation, anatomical limitation)
Step 5: Surgical guide fabrication  (online ordering is
possible with most soft wares)
Step 6: Disinfection of received surgical guides followed
by evaluation of guides.
Step 6a: For teeth supported‑evaluate on cast and
patients mouth.
Step 6b: For mucosa supported‑evaluate on cast and
patients mouth, for a mucosa‑supported guide, it is
recommended to make a surgical index to stabilize the
guide during fixation.
Step 6c: For bone supported‑evaluate on digital bone model.
Step 7: Verification of specific surgical drills and drill keys.
Step 8: Stabilization of guides in patient’s mouth using
anchor pins followed by verification of the guide stability.
Step 9: Drill sequence.
Step 10: Fixture installation (possible with safe guides).
DISCUSSION
Digital technology has proved an invaluable tool
in the way we diagnose the condition and plan the
treatment. However, even the bestest of plans seems
worthless if not properly executed. [1] Anatomical
limitation and better prosthetics demands the surgeon
to gain more precision in surgical positioning of
dental implants.[3,7] During oral implant placement,
the drill (position, depth and angulation) must be
guided by the surgeon according to the final form
of the prosthetics. Ideal placement facilitates the
establishment of favorable forces on the implants
and the prosthetic component. In this regard,
surgical guides have shown better predictability of
placement improving better prosthetic results. [2,3]
Several guides have been reported in the literature
such as self/light cure acrylic resin, metal reinforced
acrylic templates, vacuum formed polymers, milling,
CAD‑CAM prosthesis, stereo lithographic models.[6,13]
Journal of Dental Implants | Jan - Jun 2015 | Vol 5 | Issue 1 51
Out of these; Milling, CAD‑CAM prosthesis or stereo
lithographic models have provided good results.[4,14]
Care should be taken care in deciding type of surgical
guide and method of fabrication, selection of
anchors (depending on site, implant number,
angulation, and anatomical limitation).[6]
CONCLUSIONS
• Transferring of computed tomography plan
information to surgical field remains a critical point
in implantology, and surgical guide is proving its
worth
• Surgical guides enables clinician in establishing good
implant prosthetics, providing excellent esthetic,
function, and hygiene maintenance.
REFERENCES
1. Harris D, Buser D, Dula K, Grondahl K, Haris D, Jacobs R, et al.
E.A.O. guidelines of the use of diagnostic imaging in implant
dentistry. A consensus workshop organized by the European
Association for Osseointegration in Trinity College Dublin. Clin
Oral Implants Res 2002;13:566‑70.
2. Akça K, Iplikçioglu H, Cehreli MC. A surgical guide for accurate
mesiodistal paralleling of implants in the posterior edentulous
mandible. J Prosthet Dent 2002;87:233‑5.
3. Orentlicher G, Abboud M. Guided surgery for implant therapy.
Oral Maxillofac Surg Clin North Am 2011;23:239‑56, v.
4. Ramasamy M, Giri, Raja R, Subramonian, Karthik,
Narendrakumar R. Implant surgical guides: From the past to
the present. J Pharm Bioallied Sci 2013;5:S98‑102.
5. The glossary of prosthodontic terms. J Prosthet Dent
2005;94:10‑92.
6. Drill guides for every case scenario: Surgi Guide Cookbook.
Available from: http://www.materialisedental.com/materialise/
view/en/2395185.SurgiGuide+dental+drill+guide+Cookbo
ok.html. [Last cited on 2013 Aug 25].
7. El Askary, Abd El Salam. Reconstructive Aesthetic Implant Surgery.
Vol. 2. Ames, Iowa: Blackwell Munksgaard; 2003. p. 33‑4.
8. Fortin T, Champleboux G, Lormée J, Coudert JL. Precise
dental implant placement in bone using surgical guides in
conjunction with medical imaging techniques. J Oral Implantol
2000;26:300‑3.
9. Martins RJ, Lederman HM. Virtual planning and construction
of prototyped surgical guide in implant surgery with maxillary
sinus bone graft. Acta Cir Bras 2013;28:683‑90.
10. Huh YJ, Choi BR, Huh KH, Yi WJ, Heo MS, Lee SS, et al. In‑vitro
study on the accuracy of a simple‑design CT‑guided stent for
dental implants. Imaging Sci Dent 2012;42:139‑46.
11. Zitzmann NU, Marinello CP. Treatment plan for restoring
the edentulous maxilla with implant‑supported restorations:
Removable overdenture versus fixed partial denture design.
J Prosthet Dent 1999;82:188‑96.
12. Lal K, White GS, Morea DN, Wright RF. Use of stereolithographic
templates for surgical and prosthodontic implant planning
and placement. Part II. A clinical report. J Prosthodont
2006;15:117‑22.
13. Moslehifard E, Nokar S. Designing a custom made gauge device
for application in the access hole correction in the dental implant
surgical guide. J Indian Prosthodont Soc 2012;12:123‑9.
 Umapathy, et al.: Overview of surgical guides for implant therapy

14. Bulloch SE, Olsen RG, Bulloch B. Comparison of heat

How to cite this article: Umapathy T, Jayam C, Anila BS, Ashwini CP.
generation between internally guided (cannulated) single Overview of surgical guides for implant therapy.
drill and traditional sequential drilling with and without a J Dent Implant 2015;5:48-52.
drill guide for dental implants. Int J Oral Maxillofac Implants
Source of Support: Nil, Conflict of Interest: None.
2012;27:1456‑60.

52 Journal of Dental Implants | Jan - Jun 2015 | Vol 5 | Issue 1

View publication stats

Zimmer Biomet
Zimmer Biomet is a publicly traded medical device company. It
was founded in 1927 to produce aluminum splints. The firm is
Zimmer Biomet Holdings,
headquartered in Warsaw, Indiana, where it is part of the medical Inc.
devices business cluster.

In 2001, Zimmer was spun off from Bristol-Myers Squibb and

Type Public
began trading on the New York Stock Exchange, on August 7,
under the ticker symbol “ZMH”.[2] In November 2011, the Traded as NYSE: ZBH (http
company acquired ExtraOrtho, Inc. (ExtraOrtho). In January 2012, s://www.nyse.com/
the company acquired Reno, Nevada-based Synvasive quote/XNYS:ZBH)
Technology, Inc.[3] On June 29, 2015, the company changed the S&P 500
ticker symbol to "ZBH" to reflect its acquisition of Biomet.[4] component
Founded 1927
On January 12, 2017, Zimmer Biomet announced a resolution
with the DOJ and the SEC in which it agreed to pay a fine of Founder Justin O. Zimmer
approximately $30.5 million, an amount which would not affect its Headquarters Warsaw, Indiana,
2017 outlook.[5] U.S.
Key people Bryan C. Hanson
(CEO)
Contents Revenue US$ 7.824 billion
(2017)[1]
History
Number of 18,200 (2017)[1]
Products employees
Acquisition history
Website zimmerbiomet.com
Company data (http://zimmerbiom
Leadership et.com)
Recognition
Criticism
References
External links

History
Zimmer Biomet was established in 1927 by Justin O. Zimmer (1884-1951)[6] in Warsaw, Indiana.[7][8]

On April 24, 2014, it was announced that Zimmer had agreed to purchase Biomet Inc. for $13.4 billion.[9]
In October 2014, however, it was announced that the EU's antitrust regulators had opened an extensive
investigation into Zimmer's bid for Biomet due to concern that it would substantially lessen competition in
certain markets.[10] In March 2016, European Commission (“EC”) conditionally cleared Zimmer's
proposed acquisition of Biomet, Inc.[11][12] and on June 24, 2015, Zimmer completed its acquisition of
Biomet forming Zimmer Biomet Holdings.[4]
In October 2014, the company announced it would acquire
ETEX Holdings, Inc.[13][14]

In March 2016, Zimmer Biomet announced it would acquire

Ortho Transmission, LLC.[15] The company also announced it
would acquire sports medicine company, Cayenne Medical,
Inc.[16][17] Later in the same year the company acquired
medical device manufacturer, LDR Holding Corporation for
$37 per share ($1 billion in total),[18] merging it into their
Spine division.[19][20] In July, the company acquired French
surgical robotics company Medtech.[21] In August, the Exton, Pennsylvania office
company announced it was acquiring Delaware-based CD
Diagnostics,[22] a diagnostics company developing
immunoassays and biomarker testing.[23] In September,
Zimmer announced the acquisition of Clinical Graphics,
B.V.[24]

The Justin Zimmer House in Warsaw is listed on the National

Register of Historic Places.

Products EMEA-Office in Winterthur, Switzerland

Zimmer designs, develops, manufactures and markets

orthopedics products, including knee, hip, shoulder, elbow, foot and ankle artificial joints and dental
prostheses. Zimmer has operations in more than 40 countries around the world (US, Australia, Austria,
Belgium, Canada, China, Czech Republic, Finland, France, Germany, India, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Japan,
Latin America, Netherlands, Brasil, Poland, Portugal, Russia, South Africa, Spain etc.) and sells products
in more than 100 countries.[25]

Acquisition history

The following is an illustration of the company's major mergers, acquisitions and historical predecessors:

Zimmer Biomet             Zimmer, Inc  
       
               
      Zimmer
 
 
    Centerpulse AG[26]
      (Acq 2003)
 
 
      InCentive Capital AG[26]
      (Acq 2003)
 

    ORTHOsoft Inc[27]
    (Acq 2007)

    Medizin-Technik GmbH [28]

    (Acq 2013)
     Knee Creations, LLC [29]
 
  (Acq 2013)

    ETEX Holdings, Inc[30]

    (Acq 2014)

Merck KGaA[31]
 
  (Merck’s interest in Biomet Merck Joint Venture, Acq 2004
renamed Biomet Europe Group)

  Innovations, Inc[31]
  (Acq 1999)

  Kirschner Medical Corporation[31]

  (Acq 1994)

  W. Lorenz Surgical, Inc[31]

Biomet, Inc[32]   (1992)
 
 
 
    Arrow Surgical Technologies[31]
    (Acq 1990, renamed Biomet Sports Medicine)
 
 
    Electro-Biology, Inc[31]
    (Acq 1988)
 
 
    Orthopedic Equipment Company[31]
    (Acq 1984)

    Ortho Transmission, LLC

    (Acq 2016)

    Cayenne Medical, Inc.

    (Acq 2016)

    LDR Holding Corporation

    (Acq 2016)

    CD Diagnostics
    (Acq 2016)

   
    Clinical Graphics, B.V.
(Acq 2016)
Company data
Zimmer's 2017 sales were approximately $7.824 billion. The company has approximately 18,200
employees worldwide.[1]

Leadership
David C. Dvorak, was president and CEO[33] from May 1, 2007, to July 11, 2017.[34]
Dan Florin, Interim President and CEO from July 11, 2017, to December 19, 2017.[35]
Bryan C. Hanson, President and CEO from December 19, 2017[35] to present.

Recognition

In 2016, the company was recognized on the Fortune 500 list for the first time, ranking in position
#431.[36] Since then, it has been on the list for three straight years.[37] As of 2018, the company is ranked
361st on the list.[38]

Criticism
During the 2022 Russian invasion of Ukraine, Zimmer Biomet refused to join the international community
and withdraw from the Russian market. Research from Yale University updated on April 28, 2022
identifying how companies were reacting to Russia's invasion identified Zimmer Biomet in the worst
category of "Digging In", meaning Defying Demands for Exit: companies defying demands for
exit/reduction of activities. [39]

References
1. http://investor.zimmerbiomet.com/~/media/Files/Z/ZimmerBiomet-IR/documents/annual-
reports/2017-annual-report.pdf
2. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 10-12B/A, Filing Date Jul 6, 2001" (http://edgar.secdatabase.com/
1776/91205701522923/filing-main.htm). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25, 2018.
3. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 10-K, Annual Report, Filing Date Feb 27, 2013" (http://pdf.secdat
abase.com/1973/0001193125-13-079914.pdf) (PDF). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
4. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Jun 26, 2015" (http://edgar.secda
tabase.com/55/119312515237276/filing-main.htm). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
5. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Jan 18, 2017" (http://edgar.secda
tabase.com/2072/119312517011702/filing-main.htm). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
6. "justin o zimmer" (https://chicagonyeparty.com/blog/justin-o-zimmer-984774).
chicagonyeparty.com. Retrieved 2020-09-17.
7. Vaidya, Anuja. "15 things to know about Zimmer Biomet" (https://www.beckersspine.com/ort
hopedic-a-spine-device-a-implant-news/item/26099-15-things-to-know-about-zimmer-biome
t.html). www.beckersspine.com. Retrieved 2020-09-17.
 8. "Zimmer Biomet Holdings (ZBH) Receives a Buy from Leerink Partners" (https://www.market
s.co/zimmer-biomet-holdings-zbh-receives-a-buy-from-leerink-partners/254561/). Smarter
Analyst. 2020-05-12. Retrieved 2020-09-17.
9. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Apr 24, 2014" (http://pdf.secdatab
ase.com/1228/0001193125-14-155810.pdf) (PDF). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
10. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Oct 2, 2014" (http://edgar.secdata
base.com/492/119312514362005/filing-main.htm). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
11. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 425, Filing Date Mar 30, 2015" (http://pdf.secdatabase.com/2159/
0001193125-15-110423.pdf) (PDF). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25, 2018.
12. "EU regulators open extensive probe into Zimmer, Biomet deal" (https://www.reuters.com/arti
cle/us-biomet-m-a-zimmer-hldgs-eu-idUSKCN0HS19I20141003) (Press release). Reuters. 3
October 2014.
13. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 10-K, Annual Report, Filing Date Feb 23, 2015" (http://pdf.secdat
abase.com/1080/0001193125-15-058361.pdf) (PDF). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
14. "Zimmer Acquires ETEX Holdings, Inc" (http://investor.zimmerbiomet.com/news-and-events/
news/2014/01-10-2014-192141578). investor.zimmerbiomet.com.
15. "Zimmer Biomet Acquires Ortho Transmission, LLC and Assets for Pioneering Technology to
Restore Limb Amputee Patients" (http://investor.zimmerbiomet.com/news-and-events/news/
2016/01-03-2016-191753582). investor.zimmerbiomet.com.
16. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Apr 25, 2016" (http://edgar.secdat
abase.com/2332/119312516553115/filing-main.htm). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
17. "Zimmer Biomet Completes Acquisition of Cayenne Medical" (http://investor.zimmerbiomet.c
om/news-and-events/news/2016/16-05-2016-191728106). investor.zimmerbiomet.com.
18. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Jun 7, 2016" (http://pdf.secdatab
ase.com/898/0001193125-16-614660.pdf) (PDF). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
19. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Jul 13, 2016" (http://edgar.secdat
abase.com/184/119312516646935/filing-main.htm). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
20. "Zimmer Biomet To Acquire LDR To Enhance Innovation And Growth Of Spine Business" (ht
tp://investor.zimmerbiomet.com/news-and-events/news/2016/07-06-2016-191722319).
investor.zimmerbiomet.com.
21. "EX-99.1" (https://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1136869/000119312516649891/d2234
11dex991.htm). www.sec.gov. Retrieved 2019-01-23.
22. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Aug 15, 2016" (http://pdf.secdata
base.com/1634/0001193125-16-681374.pdf) (PDF). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
23. "Zimmer Biomet Strengthens Musculoskeletal Diagnostic Offering with Acquisition of CD
Diagnostics" (http://investor.zimmerbiomet.com/news-and-events/news/2016/15-08-2016-19
1641805). investor.zimmerbiomet.com.
24. "Zimmer Biomet Adds 3D Range-of-Motion Simulation Capability with Strategic Acquisition
of Clinical Graphics" (http://investor.zimmerbiomet.com/news-and-events/news/2016/15-09-
2016-191625846). investor.zimmerbiomet.com.
25. Simon, Hermann, Hidden Champions of the 21st Century: Success Strategies of unknown
World Market Leaders, London: Springer, 2009, ISBN 978-0-387-98147-5
26. "Zimmer Biomet -- Zimmer Launches Offers to Acquire Centerpulse AG and InCentive
Capital AG" (http://investor.zimmerbiomet.com/releasedetail.cfm?ReleaseID=111945).
zimmerbiomet.com.
27. "Zimmer Biomet -- Zimmer's Offer To Acquire ORTHOsoft Is Successful" (http://investor.zimm
erbiomet.com/releasedetail.cfm?releaseid=269235). zimmerbiomet.com.
28. "Zimmer Biomet -- Zimmer Acquires NORMED Medizin-Technik GmbH" (http://investor.zimm
erbiomet.com/releasedetail.cfm?releaseid=768910). zimmerbiomet.com.
29. "Zimmer Biomet -- Zimmer Acquires Knee Creations, LLC's Business" (http://investor.zimmer
biomet.com/releasedetail.cfm?releaseid=761649). zimmerbiomet.com.
30. "Zimmer Biomet -- Zimmer Acquires ETEX Holdings, Inc" (http://investor.zimmerbiomet.com/
releaseDetail.cfm?ReleaseID=874124&id=14). zimmerbiomet.com.
31. "Biomet UK - History of Biomet - A Heritage of Excellence" (http://www.biomet.co.uk/compan
y/history). biomet.co.uk.
32. "Zimmer Biomet -- Zimmer Completes Combination with Biomet" (http://investor.zimmerbiom
et.com/releasedetail.cfm?ReleaseID=919331). zimmerbiomet.com.
33. "Zimmer Biomet Leadership Team" (http://www.zimmerbiomet.com/leadership.html).
34. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Jul 11, 2017" (http://pdf.secdatab
ase.com/568/0001193125-17-226126.pdf) (PDF). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
35. "Zimmer Biomet Inc, Form 8-K, Current Report, Filing Date Dec 21, 2017" (http://edgar.secda
tabase.com/1116/119312517376624/filing-main.htm). secdatabase.com. Retrieved Apr 25,
2018.
36. "Here Are the 15 New Companies Joining the Fortune 500" (http://fortune.com/2016/06/06/fo
rtune-500-companies-making-debuts/). Fortune. Retrieved 2018-06-06.
37. "Zimmer Biomet Holdings" (http://fortune.com/fortune500/zimmer-biomet-holdings/). Fortune.
Retrieved 2018-06-06.
38. "Zimmer Biomet Holdings" (http://fortune.com/fortune500/zimmer-biomet-holdings/). Fortune.
Retrieved 2018-12-18.
39. "Over 750 Companies Have Curtailed Operations in Russia—But Some Remain" (https://so
m.yale.edu/story/2022/over-750-companies-have-curtailed-operations-russia-some-remain).
Yale School of Management. Retrieved 28 April 2022.

External links
Official website (http://www.zimmerbiomet.com/)
All Zimmer Biomet EDGAR Filings (https://research.secdatabase.com/CIK/1136869/Compa
ny-Name/ZIMMER-BIOMET-HOLDINGS-INC)
Business data for Zimmer Biomet: Bloomberg (https://www.bloomberg.com/quote/ZBH:US) ·
Google Finance (https://www.google.com/finance?q=ZBH) · SEC filings (https://www.sec.go
v/cgi-bin/browse-edgar?action=getcompany&CIK=ZBH) · Yahoo! Finance (https://finance.ya
hoo.com/q?s=ZBH)

Retrieved from "https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Zimmer_Biomet&oldid=1085970566"

This page was last edited on 3 May 2022, at 12:43 (UTC).

Text is available under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike License 3.0;

additional terms may apply. By
using this site, you agree to the Terms of Use and Privacy Policy. Wikipedia® is a registered trademark of the
Wikimedia Foundation, Inc., a non-profit organization.
Biomet
Biomet, Inc., was a medical device manufacturer located in the
Warsaw, Indiana, business cluster. The company specialized in
Biomet, Inc.
reconstructive products for orthopedic surgery, neurosurgery,
craniomaxillofacial surgery and operating room supplies. In 2015,
Biomet became part of the new company Zimmer Biomet.[1]
Type Private
Industry Health Care
Founded Warsaw, IN, USA
Contents (1977)
History Headquarters Warsaw, IN, USA
Products Key people Dane Miller,
Misconduct Founder
Products Oxford Partial
References
Knee, LactoSorb
External links
Owner Blackstone Group,
Goldman Sachs,
Kohlberg Kravis
History Roberts, TPG
Capital
Biomet was established in 1977 and delivered its first hip
Number of 9,200 (2007)
replacement in 1978. The four founders of Biomet were: Dane A. employees
Miller,[2] Ray Harroff, Niles Noblitt, and Jerry Ferguson.[3] In a
Website www.biomet.com
September 2007 club deal, the company was acquired by a
(http://www.biomet.
consortium of private equity firms consisting of The Blackstone
com/)
Group, Goldman Sachs, Kohlberg Kravis Roberts L.P. and TPG
Capital, after which Biomet ceased trading on NASDAQ.[4]

In April 2014, it was announced that Zimmer Holdings had succeeded in a bid to acquire Biomet for a fee
of $13.4 billion. However, in October 2014, EU antitrust regulators opened an investigation into Zimmer's
bid on the grounds that the deal may lead to substantial decreases in competition in certain markets.[5] The
verdict of the investigation into the deal that would make Zimmer the world's second-largest seller of
orthopaedic products behind Johnson & Johnson allowed the merger to take place in June 2015.[6]

Products
Biomet manufactured reconstructive products for orthopedic surgery, such as hips, knees and shoulders,
fixation devices, orthopedic support devices. It also made spinal implants, dental implants, and general
operating instruments.
Its subsidiary, Biomet Microfixation, manufactured mainly craniomaxillofacial and
neurosurgical products.[7] These included LactoSorb, a fixation system made of completely resorbable
material for guided bone regeneration, titanium plates and screws for craniomaxillofacial fixation,
instruments for craniomaxillofacial and orthopedic procedures and hard tissue replacements made out of
biocompatible polymers, as used in cranial defects. Biomet began using polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA)
beads, which are fused together with polyhydroxyethylmethacrylate (PHEMA) for cranial plates, in
1993.[8]: 4   The other material is polyetherketoneketone (PEKK), formed either by laser sintering or by 3D
printing.[9]

Misconduct
In 2012, Biomet paid more than $22 million to settle SEC and Department of Justice violations of the
Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA). From 2000 to August 2008 Biomet bribed publicly employed
doctors in Argentina, Brazil, and China with up to 15-20% of the sale. The four subsidiaries involved were
Biomet Argentina SA, U.S. subsidiary Biomet International, Biomet China and Scandimed AB.[10]

Incomplete section. In 2017 Biomet was again convicted. This second conviction was backed by another
violation of the FCPA that was discovered in 2013.[11]

These violations are also correlated with the first time a whistleblower received monetary compensation for
reporting an entity to the SEC that led to a successful conviction.

References
1. "Zimmer Biomet Makes Post-Merger Senior Management Changes", Wall Street Journal, 26
June 2015 (https://www.wsj.com/articles/zimmer-biomet-makes-post-merger-senior-manage
ment-changes-1435355604). Accessed 29 June 2015
2. "Biomet founder Dane Miller dies at 69" (https://www.wthr.com/article/biomet-founder-dane-
miller-dies-at-69). 13 WTHR Indianapolis. 2015-02-10. Retrieved 2018-04-30.
3. "The Passing of Dane Miller | Orthopedics This Week" (https://ryortho.com/2015/02/dane-mil
ler-ph-d-passes-away/). ryortho.com. Retrieved 2018-04-30.
4. Biomet acquired by Private Equity Consortium (http://www.biomet.com/corporate/investors/bi
ometAcquired.cfm) (Biomet) September 25, 2007
5. "EU regulators open extensive probe into Zimmer, Biomet deal" (https://www.reuters.com/arti
cle/us-biomet-m-a-zimmer-hldgs-eu-idUSKCN0HS19I20141003) (Press release). Reuters. 3
October 2014. Archived (https://web.archive.org/web/20150924205028/http://www.reuters.co
m/article/2014/10/03/us-biomet-m-a-zimmer-hldgs-eu-idUSKCN0HS19I20141003) from the
original on 24 September 2015. Retrieved 30 June 2017.
6. "EU regulators set new May 26 deadline for Zimmer's Biomet deal" (http://uk.reuters.com/arti
cle/biomet-ma-zimmer-eu-idUKL5N0VK56920150210) (Press release). Reuters. Feb 10,
2015.
7. Biomet Microfixation (http://www.biomet.com/microfixation/) (Biomet) n.d.
8. "HTR-PMMA Patient-Matched Implant" (http://www.biomet.com/microfixation/getFile.cfm?id=
3144&rt=inline). Biomet. August 2013. p. 12. Retrieved 23 February 2015.
9. "Neurosurgery Solutions: HTR-PEKK Patient-Matched Cranial Implant" (http://www.biomet.c
om/microfixation/products.cfm?pdid=9&majcid=31&prodid=402). Biomet. n.d. Retrieved
23 February 2015.
10. "SEC Charges Medical Device Company Biomet with Foreign Bribery" (https://www.sec.go
v/News/PressRelease/Detail/PressRelease/1365171487958#.VOsDayxcD2o) (press
release). SEC. March 26, 2012. Retrieved 23 February 2015.
11. "Mid-Year FCPA Enforcement Report" (https://www.wsj.com/articles/mid-year-fcpa-enforcem
ent-report-1500631813). Wall Street Journal. 2017-07-21. ISSN 0099-9660 (https://www.wor
ldcat.org/issn/0099-9660). Retrieved 2021-08-12.
External links
Biomet official website (http://www.biomet.com)
Biomet Spine Website (http://www.biomet.com/spine/)
Biomet Directory of orthopedic surgeons who use Biomet products (https://web.archive.org/w
eb/20090603202128/http://www.biomet.com/patients/findadoc/index.cfm)
Simon, Hermann: Hidden Champions of the 21st Century : Success Strategies of unknown
World Market Leaders. London: Springer, 2009. ISBN 978-0-387-98147-5. (mentions
company as an example of a "Hidden Champion")

Retrieved from "https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Biomet&oldid=1094256085"

This page was last edited on 21 June 2022, at 15:31 (UTC).

Text is available under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike License 3.0;

additional terms may apply. By
using this site, you agree to the Terms of Use and Privacy Policy. Wikipedia® is a registered trademark of the
Wikimedia Foundation, Inc., a non-profit organization.
 Product Catalog
For Restorative Technologies
 Important Product Information For
Instructions For Use:
For detailed information on the specific procedure for the
product you are using, please refer to the individual product
labels or the appropriate manual on the BIOMET 3i Website.
Description:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are manufactured from
biocompatible titanium, titanium alloy, gold, gold alloy,
zirconium, vanadium, stainless steel, polyetheretherketone
(PEEK), cobalt chromium alloy, and polyoxymethylene (Delrin).
Please refer to product guidelines for use/Surgical Manual for
additional device information.
Indications For Use:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are intended for use as
accessories to endosseous dental implants for placement in the
maxilla and mandible.
Provisional Abutments are intended for use as accessories to
endosseous dental implants to support a prosthetic device in a
partially or fully edentulous patient. They are intended for use
to support a prosthesis in the mandible or maxilla for up to
180 days during endosseous and gingival healing, and are for
non-occlusal loading of provisional restorations. The prostheses
will either be cement, mechanically or screw-retained to the
abutment system based on individual product design. For
compatibility of BellaTek® Patient Specific Abutments, please
refer to the compatibility table in the accompanying document.
Contraindications:
Placement of BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are precluded by
known patient hypersensitivity to any of the materials listed in
the Description section above.
Warnings:
Mishandling of small components inside the patient’s mouth
carries a risk of aspiration and/or swallowing. Fracture of a
restoration may occur when an abutment is loaded beyond its
functional capability. Reuse of BIOMET 3i Products that are
labeled for single-use may result in product contamination,
patient infection and/or failure of the device to perform as
intended.
PEEK components are intended for use to support single- or
multiple-unit provisional prostheses in the mandible or maxilla
for up to 180 days, at which time definitive prostheses should
be inserted.
Sterility:
Some BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are supplied sterile.
Refer to individual product labels for sterilization information;
all sterile products are labeled “STERILE”. All products sold
sterile are for single-use before the “use by” date printed on
the product label. Do not use sterile products if the packaging
has been damaged or previously opened. Products provided
non-sterile may need to be cleaned and sterilized prior to use.
Please refer to the individual product labels or Restorative
Manual for more information. For products provided non-sterile
Restorative Products
requiring sterilization prior to use, BIOMET 3i recommends the
following sterilization parameters for wrapped items:
Steam gravity sterilization method (gravity-displacement
cycle) - Minimum exposure of fifteen (15) minutes timing at a
temperature of 270ºF (132ºC)* or
Pre-vacuum sterilization method (dynamic-air-removal cycle) -
Minimum exposure of four (4) minutes, four (4) pulses timing at
a temperature of 270ºF (132ºC).*
*Post sterilization, devices should be thoroughly dried for 30 minutes. Please refer
to the Surgical and Restorative Manual or package insert for the remaining care
and cleaning instructions.
Do not re-sterilize or autoclave components except where
indicated on the individual product label, where instructions
have been provided in the Restorative Manual or in any
additional product literature for the given component.
MRI Statement:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products have not been evaluated
for safety, heating, migration, or compatibility in the Magnetic
Resonance Imaging (MRI) environment.
Precautions:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products should only be used by
trained professionals. The surgical and restorative techniques
required to properly utilize these products are highly specialized
and complex procedures. Improper technique can lead to
implant failure, loss of supporting bone, restoration fracture,
screw loosening and aspiration. Components made from PEEK
material are intended for use for up to 180 days.
Potential Adverse Events:
Potential adverse events associated with the use of restorative
products may include: failure to integrate; loss of integration;
dehiscence requiring bone grafting; infection as reported by:
abscess, fistula, suppuration, inflammation, radiolucency; gingival
hyperplasia; excessive bone loss requiring intervention; fracture;
and nerve injury.
Storage And Handling:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products should be stored at room
temperature. Refer to the Surgical Manual for special storage or
handling conditions.
Caution:
U.S. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order
of a licensed dentist or physician.
 Table Of Contents

Introduction Certain Internal Connection:

Company Overview
Implant & Abutment System Connections
Patient Specific Technologies Overview
BellaTek® Bars & Frameworks Design Options
Restorative Products Flowchart
Restorative Products
i External Hex Connection:
ii
Certain Internal and External
iv Hex Connections:
v
ICON KEY: These icons represent the connection
vii types of the BIOMET 3i Implant and Abutment
Systems for both internal and external connection
types represented throughout this catalog.

Certain® Internal Connection: External Hex Connection:

Provisional Restorations Provisional Restorations

PreFormance® Posts 1 PreFormance Posts 15
PreFormance Temporary Cylinders 2 PreFormance Temporary Cylinders 16
Titanium Temporary Cylinders 2 Titanium Temporary Cylinders 16

Cement-Retained Restorations Cement-Retained Restorations

GingiHue® Posts 3 GingiHue Posts 17
ZiReal® Posts 3 ZiReal Posts 17
GingiHue & ZiReal Post Components 4 GingiHue & ZiReal Post Components 18
UCLA Abutments 5 UCLA Abutments 19
UCLA Abutment Components 6 UCLA Abutment Components 20
Provide® Abutments 7
Provide Abutment Components 8 Screw-Retained Restorations
UCLA Abutments 21
Screw-Retained Restorations UCLA Abutment Components 22
UCLA Abutments 9 Low Profile Abutments 23
UCLA Abutment Components 10 Low Profile Abutment Components 24
Low Profile Abutments 11
Low Profile Abutment Components 12 Overdenture Restorations
LOCATOR Abutments 25
Overdenture Restorations LOCATOR Abutment Components 26
LOCATOR® Abutments 13
Continued on next page. ➤
LOCATOR Abutment Components 14

 Table Of Contents (Cont’d)

Screws
Certain® Internal Connection: External Hex Connection:
Abutment, Retaining, Waxing & Try-In Screws 27 Abutment, Retaining, Waxing & Try-In Screws 28

Miscellaneous Restorative Products Patient Education Products 34

Mechanical Driver Kits 29
Drivers & Driver Tips 30 Additional Information
Navigator System Instrumentation Overview
®
31 Index35
Tapered Navigator Laboratory Kit 32 Ordering Form 42
Parallel Walled Navigator Laboratory Kit 32 Ordering Information 44
Laboratory Tools 33
Miscellaneous Items 33
 Introduction

Company Overview
Providing Solutions – One Patient At A Time™

Mission Statement:
BIOMET 3i will be recognized as a global leader in the oral reconstruction marketplace.
We will achieve this through superior customer support and continuous product innovation.

Headquartered in Palm Beach Gardens, Florida, with
operations throughout the world, BIOMET 3i is one
of the leading companies in the oral reconstruction
market. Of equal importance, BIOMET 3i brings the
same innovation, high standards and comprehensive
approach to customer service, dental practice and
laboratory support and education.
BIOMET 3i pioneered the development of biologically
driven implants, winning worldwide acclaim for the
microtextured OSSEOTITE® surface and then the nano-
scaled, Bone Bonding® NanoTite™Surface Implants.
The tradition of implant innovation continues with the
introduction of the 3i T3® Implant, a contemporary
hybrid that is designed for sustainable aesthetics.

BIOMET 3i offers one of implant dentistry’s most This spirit of innovation continues with the introduction
comprehensive lines of implants and abutments, of DIEM®2, a protocol to enable clinicians to pursue
augmented by a growing line of site preparation, digital, immediate provisionalization options for full arch
restorative and regenerative products. patient cases.

i
 Introduction

Implant & Abutment System Connections

Certain® Internal Connection
The internal connection aspect of the implant and abutment are designed
for ease of use and simplicity.

• QuickSeat® Connection: It Clicks! The Certain Implant and Abutment

Systems feature the QuickSeat Connection. This unique connection
produces an audible and tactile “click” that confirms placement of
Impression Copings and Abutments.

• Abutment fingers cause the “click” and also provide r­ etention for the
prosthetic components in the implant before the screw is placed. A screw
is needed to fully seat the components when the restoration is being
tried in or definitively placed.

• The 6/12 hex inside the internal connection incorporates both a 6-point
single and a 12-point double hex. The 6-point single hex has two
functions: engaging the driver tip for mountless delivery during implant
placement and providing anti-rotation for all straight abutments.
The 12-point double hex provides 30º rotational positioning for pre-
angled abutments.

• Impression Copings: Pick-Up and Twist Lock™ Transfer Copings

are available in the Certain Internal Connection design, in three EP®
(Emergence Profile) diameters and a straight diameter to match the
corresponding Healing Abutment. The Impression Copings also “click”
when properly seated. These copings have a different finger design that
engages 2mm internally into the implant, as compared to the abutment’s
design that engages 4mm deep into the implant. This shorter engagement
into the implant is important because it allows off-axis draw for implant
impressions that are divergent.

• Color-Coding: Certain Implants and all interfacing c­ omponents are

(purple) (blue) (yellow) (green)
color-coded by restorative platform diameter for easy identification
and selection.
3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

ii
 Introduction

Implant & Abutment System Connections

External Hex Connection
The external hex connection implant and abutment designs have been
widely used in implant dentistry.

• Gold Standard ZR (Zero Rotation) is a patented design incorporating

machined microstops within the corners of the hex in the abutment.
The design reduces horizontal rotation between the implant and
abutment. Gold Standard ZR is available on UCLA, GingiHue® and
Conical Abutments.

• The 12-point double hex, which is machined in the 15º Pre-Angled

GingiHue Abutment, provides rotational positioning in 30º increments
on the implant hex.

• Precise Abutment Placement: The ASYST Abutment Placement Tool

provides fingertip control for fast and easy abutment delivery. The
patented packaging design makes abutment placement easier because the
abutment is delivered sterile from the package directly to the implant site.
The abutment and abutment screw are packaged inside the plastic ASYST
seating device. The plastic seating device facilitates precise placement of
the abutment on the implant, thus reducing chair time. The ASYST Tool
is packaged with Low Profile, Standard and Conical Abutments.

• Impression Copings: Pick-Up and Twist Lock™ Transfer Copings are

both available in the external connection design in three EP® (Emergence
Profile) diameters and a straight diameter to match the corresponding
healing abutment. The patented Twist Lock design provides a more
accurate transfer of the implant connection as compared to other
transfer (closed tray) techniques. This unique Twist Lock feature provides
a series of undercuts to guide the coping into the impression, giving
stability to the impression coping/analog prior to pouring the impression.
As a result, the copings lock into orientation grooves upon clockwise
rotation, thereby allowing for a tactile sensation of resistance that ensures
an accurate hex transfer.

iii
 Introduction
®

Patient Specific Technologies Overview

BellaTek® Encode® Impression System

The BellaTek Encode Impression System eliminates the need
for an implant-level impression while delivering a patient-specific
restoration that has the appropriate margin height and natural
emergence contours for the patient. This accuracy is achieved from
an impression of the BellaTek Encode Healing Abutment. Codes
embedded on the occlusal surface of the BellaTek Encode Healing
Abutment communicate the collar height, implant hex-orientation,
platform diameter and interface (the Certain® Internal Connection
or External Hex Connection) of the implant. Because the tissue is
healed at the time of impression, the margin is designed to have the
appropriate placement and contour. The result is a patient specific,
anatomically designed, final BellaTek Abutment. Available in titanium
with or without titanium nitride coating.

BellaTek Bars & Frameworks

BellaTek Bars and Frameworks are created with the technology to
achieve a truly passive fit. These are available in Hader and Dolder®
Designs for overdenture bars, primary bars and in fixed hybrid
designs. This technology does not require any wax or resin design
from the technician. The bars can be made on most major dental
implants and abutments. Because these are milled from one solid
piece of lightweight titanium, the potential for weakness caused by
soldering or laser welded joints is eliminated. You receive a
completed superstructure ready for prosthesis processing. No
polishing or retention creation necessary. can even
tap holes for attachments.

Copymilled Bars are also available for those who prefer to design a
bar or framework in a resin pattern to the patient’s specifications.

NOTE: Please ensure that as many implants as necessary are used for
a fully stable restoration.

iv
 Introduction
®

Bars & Frameworks Design Options

BellaTek® Bars and Frameworks are compatible with all major implant systems and match a wide variety of implant
and abutment connections. Please refer to the interface compatibility charts when placing your orders for bars and
frameworks with competitive connections. You can also find the BellaTek Bars and Frameworks Design Options
and Interface Compatibility Charts by visiting www.bellatek.biomet3i.com.

Hybrid Bar Design #1 Hybrid Bar Design #2

• Fixed prosthesis • Fixed prosthesis

• Metal lingual • Metal lingual
• Low buccal finish line • Low buccal finish line
• Titanium tissue surface • Titanium tissue surface

Wraparound Bar Freeform Bar

• Fixed prosthesis
•A crylic resin wraparound design
•A djustments possible to accommodate
for changing tissue contours • Fixed prosthesis
•E asy to repair and modify the acrylic resin • Acrylic resin wraparound design
portion of the prosthesis

Canada Bar Dolder ® Egg Shape Bar

• F ixed hybrid bar • Removable overdenture design

• Low lingual finish line • Anterior clips allow for anterior/posterior
• Titanium tissue surface rotation of the overdenture
• A
 crylic resin is processed to the bar • Provides lateral stability to the overdenture

v
 Introduction
®

Bars & Frameworks Design Options (Cont’d)

Dolder® U Shape Bar Hader Bar

• Removable overdenture design •R  emovable overdenture design with clips

•A  nterior clips allow for anterior/posterior that engage undercuts
rotation of the overdenture • Provides lateral stability to the overdenture
• P rovides lateral stability to the overdenture • 4mm between implants is needed for clips

Combination Primary Bar

Primary Bar With Hader Or Dolder Designs

•M ost secure removable overdenture design

•M ay be used with attachments or
secondary casting
•C  ombines a milled bar with Hader or
• Bar can be designed with a 2º – 6º taper
Dolder Designs
• Provides excellent lateral stability to
the overdenture
• Bar can be designed with a 2º – 6º taper
Design Features
Finish
Line

Copymilled Bar/Framework
Emergence
Profile

Implant Cylinder Extensions

• Ideal for both fixed and removable

prosthetic designs
•T
 echnician-fabricated resin pattern
for porcelain or acrylic resin bonded to
titanium

Stability Struts

Ask for these design features on the

BellaTek Bars & Frameworks Work Order Form (ART880).

vi
 Introduction

Restorative Products Flowchart

Cement-Retained Restorations
Is The Implant Angled?
No (Greater than 15º Divergence) Yes

GingiHue® ZiReal® 15º Pre-Angled GingiHue

UCLA UCLA
Provide® BellaTek

Interarch Space Interarch Space

Less than 7mm 7mm or more Less than 7mm 7mm or more
UCLA GingiHue UCLA 15º Pre-Angled GingiHue
BellaTek® UCLA BellaTek UCLA
ZiReal BellaTek
BellaTek
Provide Tissue Height

Tissue Height Less than 2mm 2mm or more

UCLA 15º Pre-Angled GingiHue
Less than 2mm 2mm or more BellaTek UCLA
UCLA GingiHue BellaTek
BellaTek UCLA Is the implant centered in the tooth site?
Provide ZiReal If the answer is no, UCLA is the best option.
BellaTek
Provide

Screw-Retained Restorations
Is The Implant Angled?
No (Greater than 15º Divergence) Yes

UCLA 17º Angled Low Profile

Low Profile 30º Angled Low Profile

Interarch Space Interarch Space

Less than 5mm 5mm or more Less than 9.5mm 9.5mm or more
UCLA UCLA UCLA UCLA
Low Profile 17º Angled Low Profile 17º Angled Low Profile
30º Angled Low Profile 30º Angled Low Profile
Tissue Height
Tissue Height Tissue Height
Less than 2mm 2mm or more
UCLA UCLA Less than 2mm 2mm or more Less than 2mm 2mm or more
Low Profile Low Profile UCLA 17º Angled Low Profile UCLA UCLA
30º Angled Low Profile 17º Angled Low Profile
30º Angled Low Profile
Is the implant centered in the tooth site?
If the answer is no, UCLA is the best option.

vii
 Provisional Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection
PreFormance® Posts
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional cement-retained restorations PEEK: Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multiple unit restorations will require an evaluation of occlusal forces in lateral and protrusive
excursions and masticatory forces to minimize the load on the provisional restorations
• Guided soft-tissue healing of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated implants

7 7

h h

profile profile

3.4mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

3.8mm 4mm IMPFP34 IMPAPF34

3.8mm 6mm IMPFP36 IMPAPF36
5mm 4mm IMPFP354 IMPAPF354
5mm 6mm IMPFP356 IMPAPF356
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 4mm IPFP454 IPAPF454

5mm 6mm IPFP456 IPAPF456
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 4mm IWPFP554 IPAPF554

5mm 6mm IWPFP556 IPAPF556
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

6mm 4mm IWPFP664 IPAPF664

6mm 6mm IWPFP666 IPAPF666

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
1
 Provisional Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection
PreFormance® Temporary Cylinders
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional screw-retained restorations PEEK: Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multiple unit restorations will require an evaluation of prosthesis support
to minimize the load on the provisional abutments
• Occlusal loading of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing

Certain Internal Connection

Description Item Numbers
3.4mm Seating Surface
Hexed IMPFTC34
Non-Hexed IMPFTC32
4.1mm Seating Surface
Hexed IPFTC41
12
Non-Hexed IPFTC42
5mm Seating Surface
Hexed IWPFTC51
Non-Hexed IWPFTC52
6mm Seating Surface
Hexed IWPFTC61
Non-Hexed IWPFTC62

Titanium Temporary Cylinders

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional screw-retained restorations Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multiple unit restorations will require an evaluation of prosthesis support
to minimize the load on the provisional abutments
• Occlusal loading of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Hexed IMMTCS1
Non-Hexed —
4.1mm Seating Surface
Hexed IITCS41
12
Non-Hexed IITCS42
5mm Seating Surface
All indicated measurements are in millimeters.
Hexed IWTCS51
Non-Hexed IWTCS52
6mm Seating Surface
Hexed IWTCS61
Non-Hexed IWTCS62

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU. 2
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection
GingiHue® Posts Material: Titanium Alloy

Indications:
• Single and multi-unit porcelain fused-to-metal restorations 7 7

• Areas of thin tissue where gingival discoloration is possible

• Preparable to follow gingival contours h h

• Conventional crown and bridge procedures

• Maximum angulation correction of 15º
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm profile profile

3.4mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

3.8mm 2mm IMAP32G IMPAP32G

3.8mm 4mm IMAP34G IMPAP34G
5mm 2mm IMAP352G IMPAP352G
5mm 4mm IMAP354G IMPAP354G
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 2mm IAPP452G IPAP452G

5mm 4mm IAPP454G IPAP454G
6mm 2mm IAPP462G IPAP462G
6mm 4mm IAPP464G IPAP464G
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 2mm IWPP552G IPAP552G

5mm 4mm IWPP554G IPAP554G
6mm 2mm IWPP562G IPAP562G
6mm 4mm IWPP564G IPAP564G
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

6mm 2mm IWPP662G IPAP662G

6mm 4mm IWPP664G IPAP664G

ZiReal® Posts
Indications: 7 Material: Zirconia Ceramic With A
• Single and multi-unit all ceramic restorations Titanium Alloy Interface
• Preparable to follow gingival contours h

• Minimum interarch space of 7mm

• Aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited
• Maximum angulation of 10° profile

4.1mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

5mm 4mm ICAP454*

6mm 4mm ICAP464*
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

6mm 4mm IWCAP564*

*Includes Certain ZiReal Gold-Tite® Screw (IZSHG) and ZiReal Try-In Screw (IZIRTS).

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich. All indicated measurements are in millimeters.
3
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection
GingiHue® & ZiReal® Post Components
Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Zirconia Abutment Screw Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw And Hexed Try-In Screw Holder

Certain Internal Connection

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.4 3.8 5.0 4.1 5.0 6.0 5.0 5.6 6.0 6.0 6.8

Pick-Up Impression Coping

IMIC30 IMIC33 IMIC35 IIIC41 IIIC12 IIIC60 IWIP50 IWIP55 IWIP56 IWIP60 IWIP66
IIIC42*
Twist Lock Impression Coping IMIT33 IMIT35 IIIC44 IIIC45 IIIC46 IWIT50 IWIT55 IWIT56 IWIT60 IWIT66
Laboratory Analog IMMILA IILA20 IILAW5 IILAW6
Abutment Screw I UNIHG**, IUNIHT
Zirconia Abutment Screw IZSHG (included with ZiReal Post)
Zirconia Try-In Screw IZIRTS (included with ZiReal Post)
Hexed Try-In Screw (5-pack) IUNITS
Laboratory Abutment Holder ILTAH57
*Non-Hexed
**Recommended

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
4
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

UCLA Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Laboratory fabricated custom abutments Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder With Plastic Unitube
• Single and multi-unit restorations
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited
• Maximum angulation correction of 30°

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IMUCG1C
4.1mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IGUCA1C
5mm Seating Surface 11

Gold (Hexed) IWGA51C 4

6mm Seating Surface

Gold (Hexed) IWGA61C
Hexed

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
5
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

UCLA Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

Certain Internal Connection

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.4 3.8 5.0 4.1 5.0 6.0 5.0 5.6 6.0 6.0 6.8

Pick-Up Impression Coping

IMIC30 IMIC33 IMIC35 IIIC41 IIIC12 IIIC60 IWIP50 IWIP55 IWIP56 IWIP60 IWIP66
IIIC42*
Twist Lock Impression Coping IMIT33 IMIT35 IIIC44 IIIC45 IIIC46 IWIT50 IWIT55 IWIT56 IWIT60 IWIT66
Laboratory Analog IMMILA IILA20 IILAW5 IILAW6
Abutment Screw I UNIHG**, IUNIHT
Hexed Try-In Screw (5-pack) IUNITS
Laboratory Abutment Holder ILTAH57
*Non-Hexed
**Recommended

Gold Alloy Cylinder Formulation

Melting Range 1400–1490°C (2550–2710°F)

Solidus 1400°C
Liquidus 1490°C
CTE 13.5 x 10-6 °K at 500°C

An alloy with a CTE of 10-6 °K at 500°C is recommended.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
6
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

Provide® Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit porcelain fused-to-metal restorations • Maximum angulation correction of 10° Titanium Alloy
• Fixed margin abutments • Minimum interarch space of 7mm
• Snap-on impression components
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Post Height Item Numbers
Abutment Abutment Abutment
Placement Kit Restorative Kit Only
4.8mm 1mm 4mm PAK4140* PRK484** IPA4140
4.8mm 2mm 4mm PAK4240* PRK484** IPA4240 post

4.8mm 3mm 4mm PAK4340* PRK484** IPA4340 collar

4.8mm 4mm 4mm PAK4440* PRK484** IPA4440 profile

4.8mm 1mm 5.5mm PAK4155* PRK485** IPA4155

4.8mm 2mm 5.5mm PAK4255* PRK485** IPA4255
4.8mm 3mm 5.5mm PAK4355* PRK485** IPA4355
4.8mm 4mm 5.5mm PAK4455* PRK485** IPA4455
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Post Height Item Numbers
Abutment Abutment Abutment
Placement Kit Restorative Kit Only
6.5mm 1mm 4mm PAK5140* PRK654** IPA5140
6.5mm 2mm 4mm PAK5240* PRK654** IPA5240
post
6.5mm 3mm 4mm PAK5340* PRK654** IPA5340 collar

6.5mm 4mm 4mm PAK5440* PRK654** IPA5440

profile
6.5mm 1mm 5.5mm PAK5155* PRK655** IPA5155
6.5mm 2mm 5.5mm PAK5255* PRK655** IPA5255
6.5mm 3mm 5.5mm PAK5355* PRK655** IPA5355
6.5mm 4mm 5.5mm PAK5455* PRK655** IPA5455
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Post Height Item Numbers
Abutment Abutment Abutment
Placement Kit Restorative Kit Only
6.5mm 1mm 4mm PAK6140* PRK654** IPA6140
6.5mm 2mm 4mm PAK6240* PRK654** IPA6240
post
6.5mm 3mm 4mm PAK6340* PRK654** IPA6340
collar
6.5mm 4mm 4mm PAK6440* PRK654** IPA6440
6.5mm 1mm 5.5mm PAK6155* PRK655** IPA6155 profile

6.5mm 2mm 5.5mm PAK6255* PRK655** IPA6255

6.5mm 3mm 5.5mm PAK6355* PRK655** IPA6355
6.5mm 4mm 5.5mm PAK6455* PRK655** IPA6455
*Abutment Placement Kit includes the Provide Abutment, Protection Cap and Certain® Gold-Tite® Hexed Screw IUNIHG.
**Abutment Restorative Kit includes Impression Coping, Impression Coping w/Holes, Waxing Sleeve (single-unit), Waxing Sleeve (multi-unit) and Non-Prepared Analog.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
7
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

Provide® Abutment Components

Analog Abutment And Impression Coping And
Protection Cap Analog Abutment W/Pin Waxing Sleeve Impression Coping W/Holes Temporary Cylinder

Certain Internal Connection

Description 4mm Post Height 5.5mm Post Height
Emergence Profile 4.8 6.5 4.8 6.5

Protection Cap PPC484 PPC654 PPC485 PPC655

Impression Coping (Unprepared) PIC484 PIC654 PIC485 PIC655
Impression Coping W/Holes (Prepared) PIC484H PIC654H PIC485H PIC655H
Abutment Analog (Unprepared) PAA484 PAA654 PAA485 PAA655
Abutment Analog W/Pin (Prepared) PAAP48 PAAP65 PAAP48 PAAP65
Abutment Screw IUNIHG*, IUNIHT
single-unit 〉 PWS48S PWS65S PWS48S PWS65S
Waxing Sleeve
multi-unit 〉 PWS48M PWS65M PWS48M PWS65M
single-unit 〉 PUA48S PUA65S PUA48S PUA65S
Temporary Cylinder multi-unit 〉 PUA48M PUA65M PUA48M PUA65M
*Recommended

Included With Each Placement Kit: Included With Each Restorative Kit:

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
8
 Screw-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

UCLA Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit restorations Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder With Plastic Unitube
• Minimum interarch space of 4mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IMUCG1C*
Gold (Non-Hexed) IMUCG2C
Gold (Non-Hexed) IMUCG2T
Castable (Non-Hexed) IMUCC2C
Castable (Non-Hexed) IMUCC2T
4.1mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IGUCA1C* 11

4
Gold (Non-Hexed) IGUCA2C
Gold (Non-Hexed) IGUCA2T
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) – Hexed

Castable (Hexed) –
Castable (Non-Hexed) IUNAB2C 11

Castable (Non-Hexed) IUNAB2T 4

Castable (Hexed) 25-pack –

Non-Hexed
Castable (Non-Hexed) 25-pack –
5mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IWGA51C*
Gold (Non-Hexed) IWGA52C
Gold (Non-Hexed) IWGA52T
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) –
Castable (Hexed) –
Castable (Non-Hexed) IWPC52C
Castable (Non-Hexed) IWPC52T
6mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IWGA61C*
QuickSeat®
Gold (Non-Hexed) IWGA62C Activator Tool
Gold (Non-Hexed) IWGA62T
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) –
Castable (Hexed) –
Castable (Non-Hexed) IWPC62C
All indicated measurements
Castable (Non-Hexed) are in millimeters. IWPC62T IQSA01

*UCLA Gold Hexed Abutments do not include the screw. The final Gold-Tite® Screw (IUNIHG) or the Titanium Screw (IUNIHT) must be
ordered separately.

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
9
 Screw-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

UCLA Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

Certain Internal Connection

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.4 3.8 5.0 4.1 5.0 6.0 5.0 5.6 6.0 6.0 6.8

Pick-Up Impression Coping

IMIC30 IMIC33 IMIC35 IIIC41 IIIC12 IIIC60 IWIP50 IWIP55 IWIP56 IWIP60 IWIP66
IIIC42*
Twist Lock Impression Coping IMIT33 IMIT35 IIIC44 IIIC45 IIIC46 IWIT50 IWIT55 IWIT56 IWIT60 IWIT66
Laboratory Analog IMMILA IILA20 IILAW5 IILAW6
Abutment Screw Hexed: IUNIHT, I UNIHG**, Non-Hexed: ILRGHG**, ILRGHT
Hexed Try-In Screw (5-pack) IUNITS (for hexed only)
Laboratory Abutment Holder ILTAH57
*Non-Hexed
**Recommended

Gold Alloy Cylinder Formulation

Melting Range 1400–1490°C (2550–2710°F)

Solidus 1400°C
Liquidus 1490°C
CTE 13.5 x 10-6 °K at 500°C

An alloy with a CTE of 10-6 °K at 500°C is recommended.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
10
 Screw-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

Low Profile Abutments

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit screw-retained restorations Titanium Alloy
• Minimum interarch space of 7.5mm
• Minimum tissue height of 1mm
• Angle correction up to 30°
2.2 2.2
2.2
2.2
h h h h

3.4mm Seating Surface

Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm ILPC341U ILPC341 – –

2mm ILPC342U ILPC342 ILPAC3217 –
3mm ILPC343U ILPC343 – ILPAC3330
4mm ILPC344U ILPC344 ILPAC3417 –
5mm – – – ILPAC3530
4.1mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm ILPC441U ILPC441 – –

2mm ILPC442U ILPC442 ILPAC4217 –
3mm ILPC443U ILPC443 – ILPAC4330
4mm ILPC444U ILPC444 ILPAC4417 –
5mm – – – ILPAC4530
5mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm ILPC541U ILPC541 – –

2mm ILPC542U ILPC542 ILPAC5217 –
3mm ILPC543U ILPC543 – ILPAC5330
4mm ILPC544U ILPC544 ILPAC5417 –
5mm – – – ILPAC5530

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
11
 Screw-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

Low Profile Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Healing Cap Gold And Castable Cylinder

Certain Internal Connection

QuickBridge® Temporary Cylinder Polishing Protector Retaining Screw Driver And Driver Tip

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Coping Driver ICD00

Description 4.8mm Restorative Platform

hexed Á LPCPIC1
Pick-Up
Impression Coping non-hexed Á LPCPIC2
LPCTIC1
hexed Á
Twist Lock Impression Coping
non-hexed Á LPCTIC2
QuickBridge Impression Coping LPCRIC
Laboratory Analog LPCLA
hexed Á LPCTC1
Temporary Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCTC2
Healing Cap LPCHC
hexed Á LPCPTC1
PreFormance® Temp. Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCPTC2
QuickBridge LPCQB
QuickBridge Replacement Cap LPCQBCAP
Distal Extension LPCDE
hexed Á LPCGC1
Gold Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCGC2
hexed Á LPCCC1
Castable Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCCC2
Laser Welded Cylinder LPCTUCA
Waxing Screw LPCWS Abutment Compatibility
Retaining Screw LPCGSH, LPCTSH Component Hexed Abutment Non-Hexed Abutment
Lapping Tool LPCAMI Hexed Yes No
Polishing Protector LPCPP Non-Hexed Yes Yes

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
12
 Overdenture Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

LOCATOR® Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Tissue supported removable overdentures on 2-4 implants Abutment: Titanium Alloy With Titanium Nitride Coating
• Partially edentulous overdentures with one or more implants Housing: Titanium Alloy
• Limited interarch distance Males: Nylon
• Angle correction with up to 40º between divergent implants

3.4mm Seating Surface

Collar Height Item Numbers

1mm IMLOA001 height

2mm IMLOA002
3mm IMLOA003
3.4
4mm IMLOA004
5mm IMLOA005
6mm IMLOA006
4.1mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

1mm ILOA001 height

2mm ILOA002
3mm ILOA003
4.1
4mm ILOA004
5mm ILOA005
6mm ILOA006

Included With Each Abutment:

{
{
{
{
{

Housing Final Male Light Extra White Spacer

and Black Retention Light Ring
Processing Male Retention
Male Male

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
13
 Overdenture Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

LOCATOR® Abutment Components

Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Retention Males Core Tool / Driver And Driver Tip

Certain Internal Connection

Description Item Numbers

Impression Coping LAIC1

Laboratory Analog LALA1
Extra Light Retention Males (4-pack) - Blue, 1.5lbs/680g LAELM
Extended Range Males (4-pack) - Green, 4lbs/1800g LAERM
*Included With LORHK
Extra Light Retention Extended Range Males - Red, 1.5lbs/680g LELARM
Replacement Housing Kit:
Replacement Males (4-pack) - White, 5lbs/2250g LARMS
Light Retention Replacement Males (4-pack) - Pink, 3lbs/1350g LLRMS
Replacement Housing LOAH
Replacement Housing Kit LORHK*

{
{
{
Core Tool/Abutment Driver LCTDR1 Housing & Black Final Male LOCATOR Light
Processing Male Retention Male
Driver Tip 24mm(L) LOADT4
Driver Tip 30mm(L) LOADT9
1.25mm/.050in. Driver Tip 24mm(L) - used with LCTDR1 RASH4

{
1.25mm/.050in. Driver Tip 30mm(L) - used with LCTDR1 RASH9
{Extra Light White Spacer
Retention Male Ring
LOCATOR Bar Attachment LOAB
LOCATOR Bar Attachment Tap LOAT
LOCATOR Bar Attachment Drill LOAD

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
14
 Provisional Restorations
External Hex Connection

PreFormance® Posts
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional cement-retained restorations PEEK: Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multi-unit restorations will require an evaluation of occlusal forces in lateral and protrusive
excursions and masticatory forces to minimize the load on the provisional restorations
• Guided soft-tissue healing of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated implants

7 7

h h

profile profile

3.4mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

3.8mm 4mm MPFP34 MPAPF34

3.8mm 6mm MPFP36 MPAPF36
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 4mm PFP454 PAPF454

5mm 6mm PFP456 PAPF456
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 4mm WPFP554 PAPF554

5mm 6mm WPFP556 PAPF556
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

6mm 4mm WPFP664 PAPF664

6mm 6mm WPFP666 PAPF666
All PreFormance Posts are packaged with a Titanium Hexed Screw (UNIHT).

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
15
 Provisional Restorations
External Hex Connection

PreFormance® Temporary Cylinders

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional screw-retained restorations PEEK: Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multi-unit restorations will require an evaluation of prosthesis support to
minimize the load on the provisional abutments
• Occlusal loading of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Hexed MPFTC34
Non-Hexed MPFTC32
4.1mm Seating Surface
Hexed PFTC41
Non-Hexed PFTC42 12
5mm Seating Surface
Hexed WPFTC51
Non-Hexed WPFTC52
6mm Seating Surface
Hexed WPFTC61
Non-Hexed WPFTC62

External Hex Connection

All PreFormance Cylinders are packaged with a Titanium Hexed Screw (UNIHT).

Titanium Temporary Cylinders

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional screw-retained restorations Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multi-unit restorations will require an evaluation of prosthesis support to
minimize the load on the provisional abutments
• Occlusal loading of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Hexed MMTCS1
Non-Hexed —
4.1mm Seating Surface
Hexed ITCS41
Non-Hexed ITCS42 12

5mm Seating Surface

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.
Hexed WTCS51
Non-Hexed WTCS52
6mm Seating Surface
Hexed WTCS61
Non-Hexed WTCS62

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States. 16
 Cement-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

GingiHue® Posts
Indications:
• Single and multi-unit porcelain fused-to-metal restorations
• Areas of thin tissue where gingival discoloration is possible
• Preparable to follow gingival contours
• Conventional crown and bridge procedures
• Maximum angulation correction of 15º
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm
Material:
Straight Post (Commercially Pure Titanium)
Pre-Angled Post (Titanium Alloy)
7 7
h h

profile profile

3.4mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

3.8mm 2mm MAP32G MPAP32G

3.8mm 4mm MAP34G MPAP34G
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 2mm APP452G PAP452G

5mm 4mm APP454G PAP454G
6mm 2mm APP462G PAP462G
6mm 4mm APP464G PAP464G
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 2mm WPP552G PAP552G

5mm 4mm WPP554G PAP554G
6mm 2mm WPP562G PAP562G
6mm 4mm WPP564G PAP564G
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

6mm 2mm WPP662G PAP662G

6mm 4mm WPP664G PAP664G

ZiReal® Posts
Indications: Material: Zirconia Ceramic With A
• Single and multi-unit all ceramic restorations 7
Titanium Alloy Interface
• Preparable to follow gingival contours
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm h
• Aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited
profile
• Maximum angulation of 10°
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

5mm 4mm CAP454

6mm 4mm CAP464
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

6mm 4mm WCAP564
All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
17
 Cement-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

GingiHue® & ZiReal® Post Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping = Requires the use of Square Driver PSQD0N,
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00 PSQD1N or Driver Tip RASQ3N, RASQ8N

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.8 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 6.0

Pick-Up Impression Coping MIC33 IIC12 IIC60 WIP55 WIP56 WIP66

Twist Lock Impression Coping — IIC45 IIC46 WIT55 WIT56 WIT66
Laboratory Analog MMILA ILA20 ILAW5 ILAW6
Abutment Screw UNISG*, UNIHG, UNIHT
Square Try-In Screw (5-pack) MUNITS UNITS

External Hex Connection

Laboratory Abutment Holder LTAH5 LTAH7
*Recommended

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
18
 Cement-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

UCLA Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Laboratory fabricated custom abutments Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder With Plastic Unitube
• Single and multi-unit restorations
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited
• Maximum angulation correction of 30°

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) MUCG1C
4.1mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) GUCA1C
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SGUCA1C 11

Castable (Hexed) UNAB1C 4

Castable (Hexed) 25-pack UNA125

Hexed
5mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) WGA51C
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SWGA51C
Castable (Hexed) WPC51C
6mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) WGA61C
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SWGA61C
Castable (Hexed) WPC61C

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
19
 Cement-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

UCLA Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping = Requires the use of Square Driver PSQD0N,
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00 PSQD1N or Driver Tip RASQ3N, RASQ8N

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.8 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 6.0

Pick-Up Impression Coping MIC33 IIC12 IIC60 WIP55 WIP56 WIP66

Twist Lock Impression Coping — IIC45 IIC46 WIT55 WIT56 WIT66
Laboratory Analog MMILA ILA20 ILAW5 ILAW6
Abutment Screw UNISG*, UNIHG, UNIHT
Square Try-In Screw (5-pack) MUNITS UNITS

External Hex Connection

Laboratory Abutment Holder LTAH5 LTAH7
*Recommended

Gold Alloy Cylinder Formulation

Melting Range 1400–1490°C (2550–2710°F)

Solidus 1400°C
Liquidus 1490°C
CTE 13.5 x 10-6 °K at 500°C

An alloy with a CTE of 10-6 °K at 500°C is recommended.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
20
 Screw-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

UCLA Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit restorations Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder With Plastic Unitube
• Minimum interarch space of 4mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) MUCG1C
Gold (Non-Hexed) MUCG2C
Gold (Non-Hexed) —
Castable (Hexed) MUCC1C
Castable (Non-Hexed) MUCC2C
Castable (Non-Hexed) —
4.1mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) GUCA1C 11

Gold (Non-Hexed) GUCA2C 4

Gold (Non-Hexed) —
Hexed
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SGUCA1C
Castable (Hexed) UNAB1C
Castable (Non-Hexed) UNAB2C 11

Castable (Non-Hexed) — 4

Castable (Hexed) 25-pack UNA125 Non-Hexed

Castable (Non-Hexed) 25-pack UNA225

5mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) WGA51C
Gold (Non-Hexed) WGA52C
Gold (Non-Hexed) —
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SWGA51C
Castable (Hexed) WPC51C
Castable (Non-Hexed) WPC52C
Castable (Non-Hexed) —
6mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) WGA61C
Gold (Non-Hexed) WGA62C
Gold (Non-Hexed) —
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SWGA61C
Castable (Hexed) WPC61C
Castable (Non-Hexed) WPC62C
All indicated measurements
Castable (Non-Hexed) are in millimeters. —

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
21
 Screw-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

UCLA Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping = Requires the use of Square Driver PSQD0N,
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00 PSQD1N or Driver Tip RASQ3N, RASQ8N

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.8 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 6.0

Pick-Up Impression Coping MIC33 IIC12 IIC60 WIP55 WIP56 WIP66

Twist Lock Impression Coping — IIC45 IIC46 WIT55 WIT56 WIT66
Laboratory Analog MMILA ILA20 ILAW5 ILAW6
Abutment Screw UNISG*, UNIHG, UNIHT
Square Try-In Screw (5-pack) MUNITS UNITS

External Hex Connection

Laboratory Abutment Holder LTAH5 LTAH7
*Recommended

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
22
 Screw-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

Low Profile Abutments

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit screw-retained restorations Titanium Alloy
• Minimum interarch space of 7.5mm
• Minimum tissue height of 1mm
• Angle correction up to 30°
• External hex connection 3.4mm(D) Low Profile Abutments
are limited for use in the anterior

2.2 2.2 2.2

h 2.2
h
h h

3.4mm Seating Surface

Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm LPC341U LPC341 — —

2mm LPC342U LPC342 LPAC3217 —
3mm LPC343U LPC343 — LPAC3330
4mm LPC344U LPC344 LPAC3417 —
5mm — — — LPAC3530
4.1mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm LPC441U LPC441 — —

2mm LPC442U LPC442 LPAC4217 —
3mm LPC443U LPC443 — LPAC4330
4mm LPC444U LPC444 LPAC4417 —
5mm — — — LPAC4530
5mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm LPC541U LPC541 — —

2mm LPC542U LPC542 LPAC5217 —
3mm LPC543U LPC543 — LPAC5330
4mm LPC544U LPC544 LPAC5417 —
5mm — — — LPAC5530

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
23
 Screw-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

Low Profile Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Healing Cap Gold And Castable Cylinder

QuickBridge® Temporary Cylinder Polishing Protector Retaining Screw Driver And Driver Tip

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Coping Driver ICD00

Description 4.8mm Restorative Platform

hexed Á LPCPIC1
Pick-Up
Impression Coping non-hexed Á LPCPIC2
LPCTIC1
hexed Á

External Hex Connection

Twist Lock Impression Coping
non-hexed Á LPCTIC2
QuickBridge Impression Coping LPCRIC
Laboratory Analog LPCLA
hexed Á LPCTC1
Temporary Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCTC2
Healing Cap LPCHC
hexed Á LPCPTC1
PreFormance® Temp. Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCPTC2
QuickBridge LPCQB
QuickBridge Replacement Cap LPCQBCAP
Distal Extension LPCDE
hexed Á LPCGC1
Gold Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCGC2
hexed Á LPCCC1
Castable Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCCC2
Laser Welded Cylinder LPCTUCA
Waxing Screw LPCWS Abutment Compatibility
Retaining Screw LPCGSH, LPCTSH Component Hexed Abutment Non-Hexed Abutment
Lapping Tool LPCAMI Hexed Yes No
Polishing Protector LPCPP Non-Hexed Yes Yes

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
24
 Overdenture Restorations
External Hex Connection

LOCATOR® Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Tissue supported removable overdentures on 2-4 implants Abutment: Titanium Alloy With Titanium Nitride Coating
• Partially edentulous overdentures with one or more implants Housing: Titanium Alloy
• Limited interarch distance Males: Nylon
• Angle correction with up to 40º between divergent implants

3.4mm Seating Surface

Collar Height Item Numbers

1mm MLOA001
height

2mm MLOA002
3mm MLOA003 3.4
4mm MLOA004
5mm MLOA005
6mm MLOA006
4.1mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

1mm LOA001
height
2mm LOA002
3mm LOA003 4.1

4mm LOA004
5mm LOA005
6mm LOA006

Included With Each Abutment:

Temporary Healing Retention Cylinder
Retains denture with soft-tissue liner.
{
{
{
{
{

Housing Final Male Light Extra White THRC4 THRC6

and Black Retention Light Spacer
Ring 4.1mm(D) x 4mm(H) 4.1mm(D) x 6mm(H)
Processing Male Retention
Male Male

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
25
 Overdenture Restorations
External Hex Connection

LOCATOR® Abutment Components

Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Retention Males Core Tool / Driver And Driver Tip

Description Item Numbers

Impression Coping LAIC1

Laboratory Analog LALA1
Extra Light Retention Males (4-pack) - Blue, 1.5lbs/680g LAELM
Extended Range Males (4-pack) - Green, 4lbs/1800g LAERM
Extra Light Retention Extended Range Males - Red, 1.5lbs/680g LELARM *Included With LORHK
Replacement Males (4-pack) - White, 5lbs/2250g LARMS Replacement Housing Kit:
Light Retention Replacement Males (4-pack) - Pink, 3lbs/1350g LLRMS
Replacement Housing LOAH
Replacement Housing Kit LORHK*

{
{
{

External Hex Connection

Core Tool/Abutment Driver LCTDR1 Housing & Black Final Male LOCATOR Light
Processing Male Retention Male
Driver Tip 24mm(L) LOADT4
Driver Tip 30mm(L) LOADT9
1.25mm/.050in. Driver Tip 24mm(L) - used with LCTDR1 RASH4

{
{
1.25mm/.050in. Driver Tip 30mm(L) - used with LCTDR1 RASH9
Extra Light White Spacer
LOCATOR Bar Attachment LOAB Retention Male Ring

LOCATOR Bar Attachment Tap LOAT

LOCATOR Bar Attachment Drill LOAD

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
26
 Screws
Certain® Internal Connection

Abutment Screws

®
Gold-Tite Screw Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Screw Large Gold-Tite Screw Large Titanium Screw
Screws IUNIHG IZSHG IUNIHT ILRGHG ILRGHT
Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
Torque 20Ncm 20Ncm 20Ncm 20Ncm 20Ncm

For Use With: UCLA Abutment, ZiReal® Post UCLA Abutment, Non-Hexed UCLA Abutment,
GingiHue® Post, GingiHue Post, Non-Hexed Temporary Cylinder,
GingiHue Post 15°, GingiHue Post 15°, BellaTek® Bars
Hexed Temporary Hexed Temporary
Cylinder, Provide® Cylinder, Provide

Retaining Screws

Low Profile Abutment Low Profile Abutment

Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Hexed Screw
Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Screw
Screws LPCGSH GSH20, GSH30, GSH70 LPCTSH TSH30
Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
Torque 10Ncm 10Ncm 10Ncm 10Ncm

For Use With: Low Profile Abutment

Standard, Conical GSH20 - Standard Abutment Low Profile Abutment
and IOL Abutments 6mm(D) X 2mm(H)
Conical Abutment
6mm(D) X 1mm(H)
GSH30 - Standard, Conical
and IOL® Abutments
GSH70 - Standard, Conical
and IOL Abutments

Waxing Screws
& Try-In Screws

Laboratory Waxing Screw Hexed Try-In Screw (5-pack)

Screws IWSU30 IUNITS

Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
For Use With: Pick-Up and Hexed UCLA Abutment,
Impression Copings, GingiHue® Post,
Implant Level GingiHue Post 15°,
Laboratory Procedures Provide Abutment

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
27
 Screws
External Hex Connection

Abutment Screws

Gold-Tite® Square Gold-Tite Hexed Titanium Hexed

Screws UNISG UNIHG UNIHT

Drivers PSQD0N, PSQD1N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASQ3N, RASQ8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
Torque 32–35Ncm 20Ncm 20Ncm
For Use With: UCLA Abutment, GingiHue Post, GingiHue Post 15°, ZiReal Post, Titanium Cylinder
® ®

Retaining Screws

Low Profile Abutment Low Profile Abutment

Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Hexed Screw
Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Screw
Screws LPCGSH GSH20, GSH30, GSH70 LPCTSH TSH30
Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
Torque 10Ncm 10Ncm 10Ncm 10Ncm

For Use With: Low Profile Abutment

Standard, Conical GSH20 - Standard Abutment Low Profile Abutment
and IOL Abutments 6mm(D) X 2mm(H)
Conical Abutment
6mm(D) X 1mm(H)
GSH30 - Standard, Conical
and IOL® Abutments
GSH70 - Standard, Conical
and IOL Abutments

Waxing Screws
& Try-In Screws

Abutment Waxing Screw/Guide Pin Laboratory Waxing Screw Square Try-In Screw (5-pack)

Screws WSK10, WSK15, WSK30 WSU30 UNITS, MUNITS

Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PSQD0N, PSQD1N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASQ3N, RASQ8N
For Use With: Standard and Implant Level UCLA Abutment, GingiHue Post,
Conical Abutments Laboratory Procedures GingiHue Post 15°, ZiReal Post

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
28
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products
Mechanical Driver Kits

NCATD0 Contra Angle Torque Driver Kit NPSDK0 Prosthetic Driver Kit

NCATD0C Contra Angle Torque Driver Kit L-TIRWK Low Torque Indicating Ratchet
Certain® Wrench Kit

NCATD0 NCATD0C NPSDK0 L-TIRWK

Contra Angle Contra Angle Prosthetic Driver Low Torque
Torque Kit Torque Kit Certain Kit Indicating Kit Description Item Numbers

• • • Narrow Posterior Hex Driver, 17mm(L) PHD02N

• • Narrow Posterior Square Driver, 17mm(L) PSQD0N
• • • Contra Angle Torque Driver Body HTD-C
• • • • Narrow Right Angle Hex Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASH3N
• • • Narrow Right Angle Hex Driver Tip, 30mm(L) RASH8N
• • • Narrow Right Angle Square Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASQ3N
• • Narrow Right Angle Square Driver Tip, 30mm(L) RASQ8N
• • • Right Angle Abutment Driver Tip - Steel RASA3
• Contra Angle Torque Controller, 10Ncm TD-10
• • • Contra Angle Torque Controller, 20Ncm TD-20
• • Contra Angle Torque Controller, 35Ncm TD-35
• • • Contra Pre-action Handle CATDH
• • • Prosthetic System Driver Tray PSDT1
• Narrow Impression Coping Driver ICD00
• Posterior Abutment Driver, 17mm(L) PAD00
• Standard Abutment Driver, 24mm(L) PAD24
• Posterior Slotted Screw Driver, 17mm(L) PSD00
• Standard Slotted Screw Driver, 24mm(L) PSD01
• Narrow Standard Slotted Square Driver, 24mm(L) PSQD1N
• Narrow Standard Hex Driver, 24mm(L) PHD03N
• Right Angle Slotted Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASD1
• Right Angle Slotted Driver Tip, 30mm(L) RASD6
• Low Torque Indicating Ratchet Wrench L-TIRW
• Restorative Torque Tray RTI2035TR

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
29
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products
Drivers & Driver Tips

Small Hex Large Hex Square

Length Driver Tip Driver Tip Driver Tip

17mm PHD00N — PHD02N — PSQD0N —

24mm PHD01N RASH2N PHD03N RASH3N PSQD1N RASQ3N
30mm — RASH7N — RASH8N — RASQ8N
For Use With: External Hex Healing Abutments, Square Gold-Tite® Abutment
Cover Screws Abutment Screws, Certain® Screws and Square
Cover Screws and Retaining Screws Try-in Screws

®
Abutment LOCATOR
Length Driver Tip Tip Only

17mm PAD00 — —
24mm PAD24 RASA3 LOADT4
30mm — — LOADT9

For Use With: Low Profile Abutments LOCATOR Abutments

Impression Coping .050” Hex

Length
Driver Only Tip Only MIDTH Manual
Interchangeable
17mm ICD00 — Driver Tip
24mm — RASH4 Handle

30mm — RASH9
For Use With: Twist Lock™ Transfer LOCATOR Abutments with
Impression Copings LOCATOR Core Tools

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
30
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products
Navigator® System Instrumentation Overview

The Navigator System For Guided

Surgery
The Navigator System helps clinicians transform computer-based
planning into practical implant placement with an opportunity for
immediate provisionalization.

The Navigator System features control of hex-orientation to fabricate

and deliver provisional restorations immediately following surgery.
Tapered Navigator Surgical Kit
This unique hex-orientation feature is especially beneficial when
immediately loading single tooth cases, cement-retained cases and
cases where angulation correction is required.

The Navigator System enables placement and restoration of

the following Tapered and Parallel Walled
Implant Systems:

• Tapered/Parallel Walled Certain® 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants

Tapered Navigator Laboratory Kit • Certain PREVAIL® 3/4/3, 4/3, 4/5/4 and 5/4 Implants

• Certain Tapered PREVAIL 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

An integral part of the Navigator System is the Navigator Laboratory

Kit, which contains easy-to-identify components needed to fabricate a
master cast and provisional prosthesis prior to the day of surgery. The
Navigator Laboratory Kit provides you with the opportunity to:

• Treat patients for immediate-load cases

• Be part of a collaborative approach to comprehensive patient
Parallel Walled Navigator Surgical Kit
treatment

• Embrace emerging technology with open architecture compatibility

that provides freedom to choose among leading planning software
solutions

Parallel Walled Navigator Laboratory Kit

31
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products
Tapered Navigator® SGTILKIT Tapered Navigator Laboratory Kit

Laboratory Kit
For Certain® Tapered Implants Including:
• Certain 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants
• Certain Tapered PREVAIL® 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

SGTILKIT
Surgical Kit Description Item Numbers

• Tapered Navigator Laboratory Tray SGTLTRAY

• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) - Short MSGIAMS
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) - Long MSGIAML
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) - Short SGIAM4S
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) - Long SGIAM4L
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) - Short SGIAM5S
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) - Long SGIAM5L

Parallel Walled Navigator SGLKIT Navigator Laboratory Kit

Laboratory Kit
For Certain Parallel Walled Implants Including:
• Certain 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants
• Certain Tapered PREVAIL 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

SGLKIT
Laboratory Kit Description Item Numbers

• Navigator Laboratory Tray SGLTRAY

• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 1(L) MSGIAM1
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 2(L) MSGIAM2
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 3(L) MSGIAM3
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 4(L) MSGIAM4
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 1(L) SGIAM41
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 2(L) SGIAM42
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 3(L) SGIAM43
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 4(L) SGIAM44
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 1(L) SGIAM51
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 2(L) SGIAM52
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 3(L) SGIAM53
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 4(L) SGIAM54

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
32
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products

Laboratory Tools
RH600 Reamer With Handle IQSA01 Certain QuickSeat ®
Lapping Tool For Castable UCLA Abutment
With Guide Activator Tool
IRH600
Certain®
IMLT150 MLT150 3.4mm(D)
ILT150 LT150 4.1mm(D)
ILT150 WLT10 5mm(D)

Polishing Protector, UCLA Abutment Laboratory Abutment Holder

IPPMM1 PPMM1 3.4mm(D) ILTAH57 LTAH5 3.4mm(D)

IPPIA3 PPIA3 4.1mm(D) ILTAH57 LTAH7 4.1mm(D)
IPPIA5 WPP50 5mm(D) ILTAH57 LTAH7 5mm(D)
IPPIA6 WPP60 6mm(D) ILTAH57 LTAH7 6mm(D)

Miscellaneous Items
L-TIRW AG900 TMP80 Tissue Measuring Post
Low Torque Indicating Ratchet Wrench Prosthetic Angle Guide Kit
L-TIRWK Low Torque Indicating Ratchet Wrench Kit
15°
C9980
Standard ISO
1797 Adapter
25°
8
C9981
6
Short ISO 4
1797 Adapter 2
35°

ISRT10 Certain Screw Removal Kit SRT10 Screw Removal Kit

ISRT01 ISRT06 ISRT07 IWSU30 SRT01 SRT02 SRT03 SRT04

ISRT05 SRT05

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
33
 Patient Education Products

Description Item Numbers

Patient Ed Model - DIEM 2 (4-unit)

®
DIEM2-4UNIT
Patient Ed Model - DIEM 2 (6-unit) DIEM2-6UNIT
Patient Ed Model - OSSEOTITE Implant
®
EXHEXMOD
Patient Ed Model - LOCATOR® PEMODLOC
Patient Ed Model - Single/Multiple Teeth PEMODSM
Patient Ed Brochure - Bone Loss (25-pack) ART885
Patient Ed Brochure - Multiple Teeth (25-pack) ART887
Patient Ed Brochure - Implant Retained, Fixed (25-pack) ART888
Patient Ed Brochure - Implant Retained, LOCATOR (25-pack) ART889
Patient Ed Brochure - Implant Retained, Bar (25-pack) ART890
Patient Ed Brochure - Immediate Teeth Replacement, DIEM (25-pack) ART929
Patient Ed Care Card (25-pack) ART930
Patient Ed Flip Chart ART943
Patient Ed DVD - Multilingual Version ART951EUR
Patient Ed Brochure - Bone Loss (Spanish Version) ART957S
Patient Ed Awareness and Education Poster ART962
Patient Ed Quad-fold Brochure with Holder (25-pack) ART1154
Patient Ed General Brochure (25-pack) ART1157
Patient Ed Regenerative Brochure ART1178

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
34
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#
AG900 PROSTHETIC ANGLE GUIDE KIT (9-PIECE SET) 33 IILAW5 CERTAIN IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 5MM(D) 4,6,10
APP452G GINGIHUE® POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 IILAW6 CERTAIN IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 6MM(D) 4,6,10
APP454G GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 IITCS41 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (HEXED) CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) W/HEXED SCREW 2
APP462G GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 IITCS42 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  2
APP464G GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 W/LARGE DIA. SCREW

ART1178 PATIENT ED REGENERATIVE BROCHURE 34 ILA20 IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 4.1MM(D) 18,20,22

ART885 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - BONE LOSS (25-PACK) 34 ILAW5 IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 5MM(D) 18,20,22

ART887 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - MULTIPLE TEETH (25-PACK) 34 ILAW6 IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 6MM(D) 18,20,22

ART888 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMPLANT RETAINED, FIXED (25-PACK) 34 ILOA001 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 13

ART889 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMPLANT RETAINED, LOCATOR (25-PACK)

®
34 ILOA002 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 13

ART890 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMPLANT RETAINED, BAR (25-PACK) 34 ILOA003 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 13

ART929 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMMEDIATE TEETH REPLACEMENT, DIEM (25-PACK)

®
34 ILOA004 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 13

ART930 PATIENT ED CARE CARD (25-PACK) 34 ILOA005 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(H) 13

ART943 PATIENT ED FLIP CHART 34 ILOA006 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(H) 13

ART951EUR PATIENT ED DVD - MULTILINGUAL VERSION 34 ILPAC3217 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11

ART957S PATIENT ED BROCHURE - BONE LOSS (SPANISH VERSION) 34 ILPAC3330 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11

ART962 PATIENT ED AWARENESS AND EDUCATION POSTER 34 ILPAC3417 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11

C9980 LOW TORQUE INDICATING RATCHET WRENCH 33 ILPAC3530 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(H) 11
STANDARD ISO 1797 ADAPTER ILPAC4217 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
C9981 LOW TORQUE INDICATING RATCHET WRENCH 33 ILPAC4330 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
SHORT ISO 1797 ADAPTER ILPAC4417 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
CAP454 ZIREAL® POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 ILPAC4530 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(H) 11
CAP464 ZIREAL POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 ILPAC5217 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
CATDH CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE DRIVER HANDLE 29 ILPAC5330 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
DIEM2-4UNIT PATIENT ED MODEL - DIEM 2 (4-UNIT) 34 ILPAC5417 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
DIEM2-6UNIT PATIENT ED MODEL - DIEM 2 (6-UNIT) 34 ILPAC5530 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 5MM(H) 11
EXHEXMOD PATIENT ED MODEL - OSSEOTITE® IMPLANT 34 ILPC341 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
GSH20 GOLD-TITE® (HEXED) RETAINING SCREW 2MM 27,28 ILPC341U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
GSH30 GOLD-TITE (HEXED) RETAINING SCREW 3MM 27,28 ILPC342 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
GSH70 GOLD-TITE (HEXED) RETAINING SCREW 7MM 27,28 ILPC342U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
GUCA1C UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 19,21 ILPC343 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
GUCA2C UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 21 ILPC343U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
HTD-C CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE DRIVER BODY 29 ILPC344 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IAPP452G CERTAIN® GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3 ILPC344U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IAPP454G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3 ILPC441 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
IAPP462G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3 ILPC441U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
IAPP464G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3 ILPC442 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
IAPP472G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3 ILPC442U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
IAPP474G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3 ILPC443 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
ICD00 NARROW IMPRESSION COPING DRIVER 29,30 ILPC443U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
IGUCA1C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 5,9 ILPC444 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IGUCA2C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  9 ILPC444U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IGUCA2T CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  9 ILPC541 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW
ILPC541U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
IIC12 IMPLANT EP® PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 18,20,22
ILPC542 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
IIC45 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK™ COPING 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 18,20,22
ILPC542U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
IIC46 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK COPING 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
ILPC543 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
IIC60 IMPLANT EP PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
ILPC543U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
IIIC12 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10
ILPC544 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IIIC41 CERTAIN STRAIGHT PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) 4,6,10
ILPC544U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IIIC42 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) 4,6,10
ILRGHG CERTAIN GOLD-TITE (HEXED) LARGE SCREW 10,27
IIIC44 CERTAIN STRAIGHT TWIST LOCK COPING 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) 4,6,10
ILRGHT CERTAIN TITANIUM (HEXED) LARGE SCREW 10,27
IIIC45 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10
ILT150 CERTAIN LAPPING TOOL FOR CASTABLE UCLA ABUTMENT 33
IIIC46 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10 W/GUIDE 4MM(D)
IIIC60 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10 ILTAH57 CERTAIN LABORATORY ABUTMENT HOLDER FOR ALL  4,6,10,33
IILA20 CERTAIN IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 4.1MM(D) 4,6,10 CERTAIN PLATFORMS

35
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

IMAP32G CERTAIN® GINGIHUE® POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3 IPA5255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7
IMAP34G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)

IMIC30 CERTAIN EP® PICK-UP COPING 3.4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) 4,6,10 IPA5340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7
X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMIC33 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) 4,6,10
IPA5355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7
IMIC35 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMIT33 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) 4,6,10 IPA5440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7
IMIT35 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10 X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMLOA001 CERTAIN LOCATOR® ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 13 IPA5455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7
IMLOA002 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 13 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)

IMLOA003 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 13 IPA6140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7
X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMLOA004 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 13
IPA6155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7
IMLOA005 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(H) 13 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMLOA006 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 6MM(H) 13 IPA6240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7
IMLT150 CERTAIN LAPPING TOOL FOR CASTABLE UCLA ABUTMENT  33 X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
W/GUIDE 3.4MM(D) IPA6255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7
IMMILA CERTAIN IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 3.4MM(D) 4,6,10 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMMTCS1 CERTAIN TEMPORARY HEXED CYLINDER  2 IPA6340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7
3.4MM(D) W/HEXED SCREW X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMPAP32G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 3 IPA6355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMPAP34G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 3 IPA6440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMPAPF34 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE® 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 1 IPA6455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMPAPF36 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 1 IPAP452G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H) 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IMPFP34 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST  1 IPAP454G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IMPFP36 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST  1 IPAP462G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H) 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IMPFTC32 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 3.4MM(D)  2 IPAP464G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
IMPFTC34 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 2 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)

IMUCC2C CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 9 IPAP472G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
4.1MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IMUCC2T CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 9
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW IPAP474G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
4.1MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IMUCG1C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 5,9
IPAP552G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
IMUCG2C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 9 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IMUCG2T CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 9 IPAP554G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA4140 PROVIDE® ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP562G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 4MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IPA4155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP564G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 5.5MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA4240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP572G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 4MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IPA4255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP574G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 5.5MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA4340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP662G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 4MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IPA4355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP664G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 5.5MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA4440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP672G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 4MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 6MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IPA4455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP674G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 5.5MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 6MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA5140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAPF454 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 1
X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE) 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA5155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAPF456 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1
X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE) 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H)
IPA5240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAPF554 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1
X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
36
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

IPAPF556 CERTAIN® PREFORMANCE® 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1 IWPFTC52 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 5MM(D)  2
5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) IWPFTC61 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 6MM(D) 2
IPAPF664 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1 IWPFTC62 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 6MM(D)  2
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IWPP552G CERTAIN GINGIHUE® POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3
IPAPF666 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) IWPP554G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IPFP454 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 1 IWPP562G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3

IPFP456 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 1 IWPP564G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IPFTC41 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 2 IWPP572G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3

IPFTC42 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  2 IWPP574G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IPPIA3 CERTAIN UCLA POLISHING PROTECTOR 4.1MM(D) 33 IWPP662G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3

IPPIA5 CERTAIN UCLA POLISHING PROTECTOR 5MM(D) 33 IWPP664G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IPPIA6 CERTAIN UCLA POLISHING PROTECTOR 6MM(D) 33 IWPP672G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3

IPPMM1 CERTAIN UCLA POLISHING PROTECTOR 3.4MM(D) 33 IWPP674G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IQSA01 CERTAIN QUICKSEAT ACTIVATOR TOOL

®
9,33 IWSU30 CERTAIN WAXING SCREW W/GUIDE PIN 27,33

IRH600 CERTAIN REAMER WITH HANDLE 33 IWTCS51 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (HEXED) CYLINDER 5MM(D) W/HEXED SCREW 2

ISRT01 CERTAIN HAND TAP 33 IWTCS52 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) CYLINDER 5MM(D)  2
W/LARGE DIA. SCREW
ISRT05 CERTAIN GUIDE HANDLE 33
IWTCS61 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (HEXED) CYLINDER 6MM(D) W/HEXED SCREW 2
ISRT06 CERTAIN SCREW REMOVAL TOOL 33
IWTCS62 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) CYLINDER 6MM(D)  2
ISRT07 MANUAL REVERSING TOOL 33 W/LARGE DIA. SCREW
ISRT10 CERTAIN SCREW REMOVAL KIT 33 IZIRTS CERTAIN ZIRCONIA TRY-IN (HEXED) SCREW 4
ITCS41 TEMPORARY (HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  16 IZSHG CERTAIN ZIREAL® GOLD-TITE (HEXED) SCREW 4,27
ITCS42 TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 16 LAELM LOCATOR® EXTRA LIGHT RETENTION MALES (4-PACK) 14,26
IUNAB2C CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  9 LAERM LOCATOR EXTENDED RANGE MALES - GREEN, 4LBS/1800G (4-PACK) 14,26
IUNAB2T CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  9 LAIC1 LOCATOR ABUTMENT IMPRESSION COPING 14,26
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW
LALA1 LOCATOR ABUTMENT LAB ANALOG 14,26
IUNIHG CERTAIN GOLD-TITE® (HEXED) SCREW 4,6,8,10,27
LARMS LOCATOR REPLACEMENT MALES - WHITE, 5LBS/2250G (4-PACK) 14,26
IUNIHT CERTAIN TITANIUM (HEXED) SCREW 4,6,8,10,27
LCTDR1 LOCATOR CORE TOOL/ABUTMENT DRIVER 14,26
IUNITS CERTAIN TRY-IN (HEXED) SCREW (5-PACK) 3.4, 4.1, 5, 6MM(D) 4.6.10,27
LELARM EXTRA LIGHT RETENTION EXTENDED RANGE MALES - 14,26
IWGA51C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 5,9 RED, 1.5LBS/680G
IWGA52C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D)  9 LLRMS LOCATOR LIGHT RETENTION REPLACEMENT MALES - 14,26
IWGA52T CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D)  9 PINK, 3LBS/1350G (4-PACK) 
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW LOA001 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 25
IWGA61C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 5,9 LOA002 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 25
IWGA62C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D)  9 LOA003 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 25
IWGA62T CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 9 LOA004 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 25
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW
LOA005 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(H) 25
IWIP50 CERTAIN STRAIGHT PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10
LOA006 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(H) 25
IWIP55 CERTAIN EP® PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 5.6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOAB LOCATOR BAR ATTACHMENT 14,26
IWIP56 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOAD LOCATOR BAR ATTACHMENT DRILL 14,26
IWIP60 CERTAIN STRAIGHT PICK-UP COPING 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOADT4 LOCATOR ABUTMENT DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 14,26,30
IWIP66 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 6MM(D) X 6.6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOADT9 LOCATOR ABUTMENT DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 14,26,30
IWIT50 CERTAIN STRAIGHT TRANSFER COPING 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10
LOAH LOCATOR REPLACEMENT HOUSING 14,26
IWIT55 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK™ COPING 5MM(D) X 5.6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOAT LOCATOR BAR ATTACHMENT TAP 14,26
IWIT56 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10
LORHK LOCATOR REPLACEMENT HOUSING KIT 14,26
IWIT60 CERTAIN STRAIGHT TRANSFER COPING 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10
LPAC3217 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23
IWIT66 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 6MM(D) X 6.6MM(P) 4,6,10
LPAC3330 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23
IWPC52C CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 9
LPAC3417 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23
IWPC52T CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 9
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW LPAC3530 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(H) 23

IWPC62C CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 9 LPAC4217 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23

IWPC62T CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D)  9 LPAC4330 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW LPAC4417 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23
IWPFP554 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 1 LPAC4530 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(H) 23
IWPFP556 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 1 LPAC5217 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23
IWPFP664 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 1 LPAC5330 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23
IWPFP666 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 1 LPAC5417 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23
IWPFTC51 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 5MM(D)  2 LPAC5530 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 5MM(H) 23
37
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

LPC341 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MAP34G GINGIHUE POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
LPC341U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MIC33 PICK-UP IMPRESSION COPING 3.4MM(D) 18,20,22
LPC342 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MIDTH MANUAL INTERCHANGEABLE DRIVER TIP HANDLE 30
LPC342U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MLOA001 LOCATOR® ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 25
LPC343 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 MLOA002 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 25
LPC343U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 MLOA003 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 25
LPC344 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 MLOA004 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 25
LPC344U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 MLOA005 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(H) 25
LPC441 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MLOA006 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 6MM(H) 25
LPC441U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MLT150 LAPPING TOOL FOR CASTABLE UCLA ABUTMENT W/GUIDE 3.4MM(D) 33
LPC442 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MMILA LAB ANALOG 3.4MM(D) 18,20,22
LPC442U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MMTCS1 TEMPORARY (HEXED) CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) W/RETENTION  16
LPC443 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 AND (HEXED) SCREW

LPC443U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 MPAP32G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  17
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H)
LPC444 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23
MPAP34G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  17
LPC444U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H)
LPC541 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MPAPF34 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  15
LPC542 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H)
LPC542U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MPAPF36 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  15
LPC543 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H)

LPC543U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 MPFP34 PREFORMANCE POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H)  15

LPC544 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 MPFP36 PREFORMANCE POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15

LPC544U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 MPFTC32 PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 3.4MM(D)  16

LPCAMI LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT LAPPING TOOL 12,24 MPFTC34 PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 3.4MM(D)  16

LPCCC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) CASTABLE CYLINDER 12,24 MSGIAM1 NAVIGATOR® CERTAIN® ANALOG MOUNT 3.4MM(D) X 1(L) 32

LPCCC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) CASTABLE CYLINDER 12,24 MSGIAM2 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 3.4MM(D) X 2(L) 32

LPCDE LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT DISTAL EXTENSION 12,24 MSGIAM3 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 3.4MM(D) X 3(L) 32

LPCGC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) GOLD CYLINDER 12,24 MSGIAM4 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 3.4MM(D) X 4(L) 32

LPCGC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) GOLD CYLINDER 12,24 MUCC1C UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 21

LPCGSH LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT GOLD-TITE® RETAINING SCREW 12,24,27,28 MUCC2C UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 21

LPCTSH LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT TITANIUM RETAINING SCREW 12,24,27,28 MUCG1C UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 19,21

LPCHC LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT HEALING CAP 12,24 MUCG2C UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 21

LPCLA LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT LAB ANALOG 12,24 MUNITS SQUARE TRY-IN SCREW (5-PACK), 3.4MM(D)  18,20,22,28

LPCPIC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) PICK-UP IMPRESSION COPING 12,24 NCATD0 CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE DRIVER KIT 29

LPCPIC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) PICK-UP IMPRESSION 12,24 NCATD0C CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE DRIVER KIT CERTAIN 29
COPING NPSDK0 PROSTHETIC DRIVER KIT 29
LPCPP LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT POLISHING PROTECTOR 12,24 PAA484 PROVIDE® ABUTMENT ANALOG 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
LPCPTC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) PREFORMANCE® TEMPORARY 12,24 PAA485 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG 4.8MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
CYLINDER PAA654 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG 6.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
LPCPTC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) PREFORMANCE TEMPORARY  12,24 PAA655 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG 6.5MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
CYLINDER
PAAP48 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG WITH PIN 4.8MM(P)  8
LPCQB LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT QUICKBRIDGE®12,24
PAAP65 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG WITH PIN 6.5MM(P) 8
LPCQBCAP LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT QUICKBRIDGE REPLACEMENT CAP 12,24
PAD00 POSTERIOR ABUTMENT DRIVER 17MM(L) 29,30
LPCRIC LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT QUICKBRIDGE IMPRESSION COPING 12,24
PAD24 STANDARD ABUTMENT DRIVER 24MM(L) 29,30
LPCTC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 12,24
PAK4140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 7
LPCTC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 12,24 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 1MM(H) - 4MM POST
LPCTIC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) TRANSFER IMPRESSION COPING 12,24 PAK4155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
LPCTIC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) TRANSFER 12,24 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 1MM(H) - 5.5MM POST
IMPRESSION COPING PAK4240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
LPCTSH LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT TITANIUM RETAINING SCREW 12,24 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) - 4MM POST
LPCTUCA LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT LASER WELDED CYLINDER 12,24 PAK4255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
LPCWS LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT WAXING SCREW 12,24 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) - 5.5MM POST

LT150 LAPPING TOOL FOR CASTABLE UCLA ABUTMENT W/GUIDE 4MM(D) 33 PAK4340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 7
4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 3MM(H) - 4MM POST
LTAH5 LABORATORY ABUTMENT HOLDER FOR 3.4MM(D) 18,20,22,33
PAK4355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
LTAH7 LABORATORY HOLDER FOR 4.1, 5, 6MM(D) 18,20,22,33 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 3MM(H) - 5.5MM POST
L-TIRW LOW TORQUE INDICATING RATCHET WRENCH 29,33 PAK4440 PROVIDE® ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
MAP32G GINGIHUE® POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) - 4MM POST
38
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

PAK4455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7 PIC484 PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PIC484H PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING WITH HOLES 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
PAK5140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PIC485 PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING 4.8MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
X 1MM(H) - 4MM POST
PIC485H PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING WITH HOLES 4.8MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
PAK5155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7
X 1MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PIC654 PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING 6.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8

PAK5240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PIC654H PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING WITH HOLES 6.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
X 2MM(H) - 4MM POST PIC655 PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING 6.5MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
PAK5255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PIC655H PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING WITH HOLES 6.5MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
X 2MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PPC484 PROVIDE PROTECTION CAP 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
PAK5340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 4.8MM(P)  7 PPC485 PROVIDE PROTECTION CAP 4.8MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
X 3MM(H) - 4MM POST

PAK5355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7
X 3MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PPC654 PROVIDE PROTECTION CAP 6.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8

PAK5440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 4.8MM(P)  7 PPC655 PROVIDE PROTECTION CAP 6.5MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
X 4MM(H) - 4MM POST PPIA3 POLISHING PROTECTOR UCLA ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) 33
PAK5455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 4.8MM(P)  7 PPMM1 POLISHING PROTECTOR UCLA 3.4MM(D) 33
X 4MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PRK484 PROVIDE ABUTMENT RESTORATIVE KIT 4.8MM(P) - 4MM POST 7
PAK6140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PRK485 PROVIDE ABUTMENT RESTORATIVE KIT 4.8MM(P) - 5.5MM POST 7
X 1MM(H) - 4MM POST
PRK654 PROVIDE ABUTMENT RESTORATIVE KIT 6.5MM(P) - 4MM POST 7
PAK6155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7
X 1MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PRK655 PROVIDE ABUTMENT RESTORATIVE KIT 6.5MM(P) - 5.5MM POST 7

PAK6240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PSD00 POSTERIOR SLOTTED SCREW DRIVER - SLOTTED 17MM(L) 29
X 2MM(H) - 4MM POST PSD01 STANDARD SLOTTED SCREW DRIVER - SLOTTED 24MM(L) 29
PAK6255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PSDT1 PROSTHETIC SYSTEM DRIVER TRAY 29
X 2MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PSQD0N NARROW POSTERIOR SQUARE DRIVER 17MM(L) 28,29,30
PAK6340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PSQD1N NARROW STANDARD SLOTTED SQUARE DRIVER 24MM(L) 28,29,30
X 3MM(H) - 4MM POST
PUA48M PROVIDE TEMPORARY CYLINDER MULTI-UNIT - 4.8MM PROFILE 8
PAK6355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7
X 3MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PUA48S PROVIDE TEMPORARY CYLINDER SINGLE-UNIT - 4.8MM PROFILE 8

PAK6440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PUA65M PROVIDE TEMPORARY CYLINDER MULTI-UNIT - 6.5MM PROFILE 8
X 4MM(H) - 4MM POST PUA65S PROVIDE TEMPORARY CYLINDER SINGLE-UNIT - 6.5MM PROFILE 8
PAK6455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PWS48M PROVIDE WAXING SLEEVE 4.8MM(P) MULTI-UNIT 8
X 4MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PWS48S PROVIDE WAXING SLEEVE 4.8MM(P) SINGLE-UNIT 8
PAP452G GINGIHUE® 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 PWS65M PROVIDE WAXING SLEEVE 6.5MM(P) MULTI-UNIT 8
PAP454G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 PWS65S PROVIDE WAXING SLEEVE 6.5MM(P) SINGLE-UNIT 8
PAP462G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 RASA3 RIGHT ANGLE ABUTMENT DRIVER TIP - STEEL 29,30
PAP464G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 RASD1 RIGHT ANGLE SLOTTED DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 29
PAP552G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 RASD6 RIGHT ANGLE SLOTTED DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 29
PAP554G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 RASH2N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE SMALL (HEXED) DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 30
PAP562G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 RASH3N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE LARGE (HEXED) DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 27,28,29,30
PAP564G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 RASH4 RIGHT ANGLE DRIVER TIP 50 IN. (HEXED) 24MM(L) 14,26,30
PAP662G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 RASH7N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE SMALL (HEXED) DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 30
PAP664G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 RASH8N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE LARGE (HEXED) DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 27,28,29,30
PAPF454 PREFORMANCE® 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15 RASH9 RIGHT ANGLE DRIVER TIP 50 IN. (HEXED) 30MM(L) 14,26,30
PAPF456 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15 RASQ3N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE SQUARE DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 28,29,30
PAPF554 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15 RASQ8N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE SQUARE DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 28,29,30
PAPF556 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15 RH600 REAMER/HANDLE FOR SGC34, UNAB1/2 33
PAPF664 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15 RTI2035TR RESTORATIVE TORQUE INDICATOR TRAY 29
PAPF666 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15 SGIAM41 NAVIGATOR® CERTAIN® ANALOG MOUNT 4.1MM(D) X 1(L) 32
PEMODLOC PATIENT ED MODEL - LOCATOR®34 SGIAM42 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 4.1MM(D) X 2(L) 32
PEMODSM PATIENT ED MODEL - SINGLE/MULTIPLE TEETH 34 SGIAM43 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 4.1MM(D) X 3(L) 32
PFP454 PREFORMANCE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15 SGIAM44 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 4.1MM(D) X 4(L) 32
PFP456 PREFORMANCE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15 SGIAM51 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 5MM(D) X 1(L) 32
PFTC41 PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  16 SGIAM52 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 5MM(D) X 2(L) 32
PFTC42 PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  16 SGIAM53 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 5MM(D) X 3(L) 32
PHD00N NARROW POSTERIOR SMALL HEX DRIVER 17MM(L) 30 SGIAM54 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 5MM(D) X 4(L) 32
PHD01N NARROW STANDARD SMALL HEX DRIVER 24MM(L) 30 SGLKIT NAVIGATOR LABORATORY KIT 32
PHD02N NARROW POSTERIOR LARGE HEX DRIVER 17MM(L) 27,28,29,30 SGLTRAY NAVIGATOR® LABORATORY TRAY 32
PHD03N NARROW STANDARD LARGE HEX DRIVER 24MM(L) 27,28,29,30 SGUCA1C UCLA GOLD STANDARD ZR (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  19,21
39
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

SRT01 HAND TAP FOR SRT10 33 WSK10 ABUTMENT WAXING SCREW/GUIDE PIN-KNURLED 10MM(L) 28
SRT02 HAND DRILL 14MM(D) BRONZE DRILL FOR SRT10 33 WSK15 ABUTMENT WAXING SCREW/GUIDE PIN-KNURLED 15MM(L) 28
SRT03 HAND DRILL 1.18MM(D) SILVER DRILL FOR SRT10 33 WSK30 ABUTMENT WAXING SCREW/GUIDE PIN-KNURLED 20MM(L) 28
SRT04 EXTRACTING DRILL - ISO LATCH FOR SRT10 33 WSU30 LABORATORY WAXING SCREW/GUIDE PIN-KNURLED 28
SRT05 GUIDE HANDLE FOR SRT10 33 WTCS51 TEMPORARY (HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 5MM(D)  16
SRT10 SCREW REMOVING KIT 33 WTCS52 TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 5MM(D)  16
SWGA51C UCLA GOLD STANDARD ZR (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 19,21 WTCS61 TEMPORARY (HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 6MM(D)  16
SWGA61C UCLA GOLD STANDARD ZR (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 19,21 WTCS62 TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 6MM(D)  16
TD-10 CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE CONTROLLER 10NCM 29
TD-20 CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE CONTROLLER 20NCM 29
TD-35 CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE CONTROLLER 32NCM 29
THRC4 TEMPORARY HEALING RETENTION CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 25
THRC6 TEMPORARY HEALING RETENTION CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(H) 25


TMP80 TISSUE MEASURING POST 33
UNA125 UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER (25-PACK) 19,21
UNA225 UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER (25-PACK) 21
UNAB1C UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 19,21
UNAB2C UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 21
UNIHG GOLD-TITE® (HEXED) SCREW 18,20,22,28
UNIHT TITANIUM (HEXED) SCREW 18,20,22,28
UNISG GOLD-TITE SQUARE SCREW 18,20,22,28
UNITS SQUARE TRY-IN SCREW (5-PACK) 4.1, 5, 6MM(D) 18,20,22,28
WCAP564 ZIREAL® POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
WGA51C UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 19,21
WGA52C UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 21
WGA61C UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 19,21
WGA62C UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 21
WIP55 IMPLANT EP® PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) 18,20,22
WIP56 IMPLANT EP PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
WIP66 IMPLANT EP PICK-UP COPING 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
WIT55 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK™ COPING 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) 18,20,22
WIT56 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK COPING 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
WIT66 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK COPING 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
WLT10 LAPPING TOOL FOR WIDE DIAMETER IMPLANTS 33
WPC51C UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 19,21
WPC52C UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 21
WPC61C UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 19,21
WPC62C UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 21
WPFP554 PREFORMANCE® POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15
WPFP556 PREFORMANCE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15
WPFP664 PREFORMANCE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15
WPFP666 PREFORMANCE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15
WPFTC51 PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 5MM  16
WPFTC52 PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 5MM  16
WPFTC61 PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 6MM  16
WPFTC62 PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 6MM  16
WPP50 POLISHING PROTECTOR 5MM(D) 33
WPP552G GINGIHUE® POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17
WPP554G GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
WPP562G GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17
WPP564G GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
WPP60 POLISHING PROTECTOR 6MM(D) 33
WPP662G GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17
WPP664G GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
40
41
 Ordering Form
Customer Account#
Date: ____/____/____

___________________________
Representative taking order
Customer Name: Specialty:

Bill To:________________________________________________ Customer P.O. #: _____________________________________

______________________________________________________
Method of Shipment: _____FedEx _____UPS
Phone #: ( )______________________________________
_____Next Day by 8:30am
Ship To:______________________________________________
_____Next Day by 10:30am
______________________________________________________
_____Next Day - Afternoon
______________________________________________________
_____Two Day
Phone #: ( )______________________________________ _____Ground
_____Other_____________
Would you like to receive information via email about
BIOMET 3i’s Products, Services and Events?
Yes No Method of Payment:
Credit Card: _____Visa _____MasterCard _____AMEX
Email Address:____________________________________
Card #:____________________________________________
Special Instructions: Expiration Date:_____________________________________

C.O.D.
Contact Name:
Bill - Net 30

Product No. Quantity Description Discount Unit Price Total

Date: Order Number: Order Total: Customer Service Representative:

BIOMET 3i
4555 Riverside Drive
Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33410 Thank you for your patronage!
Phone: 800-342-5454 • Fax: 561-776-1272
Website: www.biomet3i.com 42
43
Ordering Information

Some products may not be available outside the U.S.A. EXCHANGE POLICY. BIOMET 3i Products may be exchanged within
Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU. 180 days of the invoice date, without a re-stocking fee, for other
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis. BIOMET 3i Products of equal or lesser value within the same product
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich. family as determined by BIOMET 3i (ex. implant for implant, abutment
for abutment, membrane for membrane). BIOMET 3i Products may be
To Place an Order: exchanged within 180 days of the invoice date for other BIOMET 3i
Contact your local BIOMET 3i Representative or call: Products of greater value within the same product family as determined
BIOMET 3i Customer Service by BIOMET 3i (ex. implant for implant, abutment for abutment, membrane
for membrane), with the price differential paid by the Purchaser. In both
Monday–Thursday 8am–8pm (EST)
cases, the exchanged BIOMET 3i Product must be (1) returned in its original,
Friday 8am–6:30pm (EST) unopened package (including autoclavable products); (2) a currently offered
800-342-5454, Fax 561-776-1272 BIOMET 3i Product (discontinued product not included); and (3) returned
In Canada: 800-363-1980, Outside US: 561-776-6700 freight prepaid to 4555 Riverside Drive, Palm Beach Gardens, Florida
33410, (Attention: Returns Department) and accompanied by the BIOMET 3i
Products Return Authorization Number provided by the BIOMET 3i Customer
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE. The following are the terms and
Service Department.
conditions by which BIOMET 3i sells its products.
AVAILABILITY OF PRODUCTS. All products not available in all areas. Any
GOVERNING TERMS. Any shipment of products shall be deemed to be on
offer or product void where prohibited by law.
the terms and conditions stated herein. Any and all terms and conditions
submitted by Purchaser are hereby rejected.
EXPORT CONTROL. All products are subject to all applicable export control
and sanctions legislation.
TAXES. The prices set forth herein do not include any sales, use, excise, ad
valorem, property or other taxes applicable to the sale, use or delivery of the
FORCE MAJEURE. BIOMET 3i shall not be liable for any loss or damage due
products, all of which shall be paid by Purchaser separately or added to the
to failure or delay arising out of any cause beyond the reasonable control of
contract price and paid by Purchaser to BIOMET 3i.
BIOMET 3i. In the event of any failure or delay resulting from such causes,
an equitable adjustment of delivery and any other appropriate terms and
PRICES. The prices set forth for the products are in United States Dollars.
conditions shall be made. No such failure or delay shall be the basis for an
increase of obligation by BIOMET 3i nor any termination by the Purchaser.
DELIVERY. Products sold hereunder shall be delivered by BIOMET 3i, F.O.B.
Palm Beach Gardens, Florida.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Under no circumstances shall BIOMET 3i nor any
of its affiliates be liable for business interruption, loss of profits, special,
PAYMENT. Payment terms shall be as set forth under the Terms section on
indirect, incidental or consequential damages of any nature and from any
front of the invoice.
cause whether based in contract, warranty or tort (including negligence) or
other legal theory, even if BIOMET 3i has been advised of the possibility of
WARRANTY. BIOMET 3i nor any of its affiliates make any warranty, express
such damages.
or implied, except that its products shall be free from defects in material
and/or workmanship. This warranty applies only to the original Purchaser.
VALIDITY. If any provision of these Terms and Conditions is found to be
In the event of a product defect, immediately notify BIOMET 3i of the defect
illegal or unenforceable in any respect, such illegality or unenforcibility shall
prior to returning the product. Devices shall be sterilized prior to return.
not affect any other provision of these Terms and Conditions, all of which
As its sole obligation and as Purchaser’s sole remedy under this warranty,
shall remain enforceable in accordance with their terms.
BIOMET 3i will, at its option, either repair, replace or issue credit for such
products. Purchaser assumes all risks and liability resulting from the use
GENERAL PROVISIONS. The purchase of the products and these Terms
of these products, whether used separately or in combination with other
and Conditions are governed by the laws of Florida without regard to
products.
conflicts of law principles. This document incorporates all oral and written
representations between the parties and constitutes the entire agreement
Except for the warranty expressly described in the warranty paragraph
and understanding of the parties with respect to the subject matter
above, neither BIOMET 3i nor any of its affiliates makes any other warranty
hereof and supersedes any and all other agreements either oral or written
with respect to the BIOMET 3i Products, expressed or implied, written or
between the parties with respect to such subject matter. No amendment
oral, including, without limitation, any implied warranty of merchantability,
or modification may be made to this document unless made in writing and
or a warranty of fitness for a particular purpose.
duly executed by an authorized representative of BIOMET 3i.
EDUCATION; MODIFICATION OF PRODUCTS. BIOMET 3i reserves the right
CAUTION. Federal (U.S.) Law restricts these devices to sale by or on the
to modify products, discontinue products and change specifications of
order of a licensed healthcare practitioner. Devices labeled STERILE are
products.
certified to be sterile unless sterile package is opened or damaged.
RETURN POLICY. A Purchaser may return any BIOMET 3i Product within 90
EXPORT ORDERS. Require advance payment or letter of credit. Shipments
days of the invoice date. BIOMET 3i Products returned within 60 days of the
are made either by freight collect or paid by BIOMET 3i and added to the
invoice date will be accepted without any re-stocking fee to the Purchaser.
invoice. Unless special instructions are received with an order, the shipping
BIOMET 3i Products returned between 61 and 90 days of the invoice
method will be determined by BIOMET 3i, F.O.B. Palm Beach Gardens,
date will be subject to a 15% restocking fee. A BIOMET 3i Product will
Florida.
be accepted for return only if the BIOMET 3i Product is (1) returned in its
original, unopened package (including autoclavable products); (2) received
DUNS #: 186127825
by BIOMET 3i within 90 days after the invoice date for that product; and
BIOMET 3i is listed in the SAM (U.S. System for Award Management)
(3) returned freight prepaid to 4555 Riverside Drive, Palm Beach Gardens,
Database.
Florida 33410, (Attention: Returns Department) accompanied by the BIOMET
©2014 BIOMET 3i LLC.
3i Return Authorization Number provided by the BIOMET 3i Customer
Service Department. Purchaser should be advised that BIOMET 3i Products
not meeting the above criteria will not be accepted for return.

44
 Want More? Solutions Start Here!
Visit: www.biomet3i.com
or Check Out The BIOMET 3i Online Store at
www.shopbiomet3i.com (US Customers Only)

For More Information, Please Contact Your Local BIOMET 3i Sales Representative.

Global Headquarters EC REP BIOMET 3i

4555 Riverside Drive Dental Iberica S.L.
Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33410 WTC Almeda Park, Ed. 1, Planta 1ª
1-800-342-5454 Pl. de la Pau, s/n Join Follow Watch Download
Outside the U.S.: +1-561-776-6700 08940, Cornellà de Llobregat Us Us Us It
Fax: +1-561-776-1272 (Barcelona) Spain
www.biomet3i.com Phone: +34-93-470-55-00
www.shopbiomet3i.com Fax: +34-93-371-78-49

3i T3, BellaTek, BellaTek design, Certain, DIEM, Encode, EP, GingiHue, Gold-Tite, IOL, Navigator, OSSEOTITE, PreFormance, PREVAIL, Provide,
QuickBridge, QuickSeat and ZiReal are registered trademarks of BIOMET 3i LLC. NanoTite, Providing Solutions – One Patient At A Time and Twist
Lock are trademarks of BIOMET 3i LLC. DOLDER® is a registered trademark of Dr. Charlotte Fleischer-Dolder and Dr. Fritz Dolder of Switzerland.
LOCATOR is a registered trademark of Zest Anchors, Inc. ©2014 BIOMET 3i LLC.

All trademarks herein are the property of BIOMET 3i LLC unless otherwise indicated. This material is intended for clinicians only and is NOT
intended for patient distribution. This material is not to be redistributed, duplicated or disclosed without the express written consent of BIOMET 3i. INSTRES
For additional product information, including indications, contraindications, warnings, precautions and potential adverse effects, please visit the REV B 09/14
BIOMET 3i Website: www.ifu.biomet3i.com.
 Restorative Manual
Flexibility By Design
 Important Product Information For BIOMET 3i Restorative Products
Description: BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are
manufactured from biocompatible titanium, titanium
alloy, gold, gold alloy, zirconium, stainless steel,
polyetheretherketone (PEEK), cobalt chromium alloy,
and polyoxymethylene (Delrin). Please refer to product
Guidelines for Use/Surgical Manual for additional device
information.
Indications For Use: BIOMET 3i Restorative Products
are intended for use as an accessory to endosseous dental
implants for placement in the maxilla and mandible.
Provisional Abutments are intended for use as an
accessory to endosseous dental implants to support a
prosthetic device in a partially or fully edentulous patient.
They are intended for use to support a prosthesis
in the mandible or maxilla for up to 180 days during
endosseous and gingival healing, and are for non-occlusal
loading of provisional restorations. The prosthesis will
be either cement, mechanically or screw-retained to the
abutment system based on individual product design.
For compatibility of BellaTek Patient Specific Abutments,
please refer to the compatibility table in the accompanying
document.
Contraindications: Placement of BIOMET 3i
Restorative Products are precluded by known patient
hypersensitivity to any of the materials listed in the
Description Section of this document.
Warnings: Mishandling of small components inside the
patient’s mouth carries a risk of ingestion, aspiration and/
or swallowing. Fracture of a restoration may occur when
an abutment is loaded beyond its functional capability.
Reuse of BIOMET 3i products that are labeled for single-
use may result in product contamination, patient infection
and/or failure of the device to perform as intended.
PEEK components are intended for use to support single-
or multiple-unit provisional prostheses in the mandible
or maxilla for up to 180 days, at which time a definitive
prosthesis should be inserted.
Sterility: Some BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are
supplied sterile. Refer to individual product labels for
sterilization information; all sterile products are labeled
‘STERILE.’ All products sold sterile are for single-use
before the “use by” date printed on the product label.
Do not use sterile products if the packaging has been
damaged or previously opened. Products provided non-
sterile may need to be cleaned and sterilized prior to use.
Please refer to the individual product labels or Restorative
Manual for more information. For products provided non-
sterile requiring sterilization prior to use, BIOMET 3i
recommends the following sterilization parameters for
wrapped items:
Steam gravity sterilization method (gravity-displacement
cycle) - Minimum exposure of fifteen (15) minutes timing
at a temperature of 270-275°F (132-135°C)* or
Pre-vacuum sterilization method (dynamic-air-removal
cycle) - Minimum exposure of four (4) minutes, four
(4) pulses timing at a temperature of 270-275°F (132-
135°C)*
*Post sterilization, devices should be thoroughly dried for 30 minutes.
Please refer to the Surgical and Restorative Manual or package insert
for the remaining care and cleaning instructions.
Do not re-sterilize or autoclave components except
where indicated on the individual product label, where
instructions have been provided in the Restorative
Manual, or in any additional product literature for the
given component.
MRI Statement: BIOMET 3i Restorative Products
have not been evaluated for safety, heating, migration, or
compatibility in the Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI)
environment.
Precautions: BIOMET 3i Restorative Products should
only be used by trained professionals. The surgical and
restorative techniques required to properly utilize these
products are highly specialized and complex procedures.
Improper technique can lead to implant failure, loss of
supporting bone, restoration fracture, screw loosening,
ingestion and aspiration and/or swallowing. Components
made from PEEK material are intended for use for up to
180 days.
Potential Adverse Events: Potential adverse events
associated with the use of restorative products may
include: failure to integrate; loss of integration; dehiscence
requiring bone grafting; infection as reported by: abscess,
fistula, suppuration, inflammation, radiolucency; gingival
hyperplasia; excessive bone loss requiring intervention;
fracture; ingestion, aspiration and/or swallowing and
nerve injury.
Storage and Handling: BIOMET 3i Restorative
Products should be stored at room temperature. Refer
to the Surgical Manual for special storage or handling
conditions.
Caution: U.S. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by
or on the order of a licensed dentist or physician.
 Introduction
BIOMET 3i Implant Systems have been developed to
meet the diverse needs of patients and to offer clinicians a
choice of surgical and restorative techniques customized
to meet each individual’s requirements. This manual is
designed to serve as a reference guide for clinicians and
laboratories utilizing BIOMET 3i Restorative Components
and Instruments and does not address all situations or
considerations involved in treatment. The success of any
dental implant and abutment system depends upon proper
use of the components and instrumentation.
This manual is not intended for use as a substitute for
professional training and experience and does not comprise
clinical advice. The clinician should use medically sound
treatment planning and procedures appropriate for each
patient's individual case for predictable results.
BIOMET 3i offers unique implant and restorative
components designed to provide clinicians with a broad
range of restorative solutions, including support for single
crowns, fixed/removable prostheses and attachments for
securing overdentures. BIOMET 3i Implant and Abutment
Systems employ proven restorative designs and provide
clinicians and patients with predictable treatment options.
Treatment Planning Considerations:
Patient Evaluation And Selection
Several important factors must be considered when
evaluating a patient prior to implant surgery. The presurgical
evaluation must include a cautious and detailed assessment
of the patient’s general health, current medical status,
medical history, oral hygiene, motivation and expectations.
If the patient’s medical history reveals an existing condition
or signals a potential problem that may compromise
treatment and/or the patient’s well being, consultation with
a clinician is recommended.
An extensive intraoral examination should be performed
to evaluate the oral cavity for any potential bone or soft-
tissue pathology. The clinician should also determine the
periodontal status of the remaining teeth, the health of
the soft-tissue, the presence of occlusal abnormalities or
parafunctional habits, such as bruxism or crossbite and any
other conditions that could adversely affect the restorative
outcome.
Preoperative Planning Considerations:
During the presurgical restorative planning phase, it
is important for the surgeon, restorative dentist and
laboratory technician to participate in determining the
type of prosthesis and restorative components that will
be used. Such decision-making is critical for determining
the location of implants and should be finalized prior to
implant surgery. A top-down treatment planning approach
is recommended, whereby the definitive prosthesis is
designed, implant locations are determined and restorative
components are selected prior to initiating implant surgery.
Proper treatment planning, as well as the selection of the
proper implant length and diameter are crucial to the long-
term success of the implant and restoration. Before an
implant can be selected, the anatomical foundation available
to receive the implant must be carefully assessed.
Clinical information necessary for determining appropriate
treatment options includes but is not limited to: determining
vertical dimension, evaluating the space available between
the alveolar crest and the opposing dentition to confirm
that enough space exists to accommodate the proposed
abutment and final restoration, locating the position of
important anatomic structures and determining bone
dimensions where implants are to be placed. The height
required by the restorative components varies with each
type of abutment. Therefore, the surgeon and restorative
dentist should carefully evaluate abutment dimensions
relative to the available restorative space. Diagnostic casts
should be used to evaluate tooth and ridge positions,
occlusal relationships, amount of space available for implant
restorations, implant positioning and angulations. These
casts allow the clinician to evaluate the opposing dentition
and its effect on implant position. A surgical guide is helpful
in determining the precise ­intraoral position and angulation
of the implants and should be included in the preoperative
treatment plan.
By visualizing the final design of the prosthesis prior to
implant surgery, both restorative and surgical clinicians have
the opportunity to identify potential restorative problems.
They can then make the necessary ­modifications to implant
selection, location and the overall treatment plan prior
to actually placing the implants, thus improving ­treatment
predictability and success.
 Table Of Contents

Torque Matrix
Certain® Internal Connection...................................................................................................................1
External Hex Connection.........................................................................................................................2
Implant & Abutment System Connections
Certain Internal Connection.....................................................................................................................3
External Hex Connection.........................................................................................................................4
Certain QuickSeat® Activator Tool........................................................................................................5
Certain Hexed & Non-Hexed Pick-Up Impression Coping Draw Angles.........................................6
Certain UCLA Abutment..........................................................................................................................7
Certain Non-Hexed Abutments..............................................................................................................8
Implant & Abutment Level Impressions
How To Choose A Coping......................................................................................................................9
Pick-Up Impression Copings..................................................................................................................10
Twist Lock™ Transfer Impression Copings..............................................................................................13
Abutment Selection Guide...................................................................................................................16
Cement-Retained
PreFormance Post.......................................................................Indirect Technique.............................18
®

PreFormance Provisional Post.......................................................Direct Technique...............................20

15º Pre-Angled PreFormance Post................................................Indirect Technique.............................21
15º Pre-Angled PreFormance Post................................................Direct Technique...............................23
GingiHue Post.............................................................................Indirect Technique.............................33
®

GingiHue Post..............................................................................Direct Technique...............................35

UCLA Abutment - Single-Unit.......................................................Indirect Technique.............................38
UCLA Abutment - Multiple-Unit....................................................Indirect Technique.............................40
Screw-Retained
PreFormance Temporary Cylinder - Single-Unit............................Indirect Technique.............................24
PreFormance Temporary Cylinder - Single Unit............................Direct Technique...............................26
PreFormance Temporary Cylinder - Multiple-Unit.........................Indirect Technique.............................27
Titanium Temporary Cylinder - Single-Unit...................................Indirect Technique.............................29
Titanium Temporary Cylinder - Multiple-Unit................................Indirect Technique.............................31
UCLA Abutment - Single-Unit.......................................................Indirect Technique.............................43
UCLA Abutment - Multiple-Unit....................................................Indirect Technique.............................45
Low Profile Abutment - Single-Unit...............................................Indirect Technique.............................47
Low Profile Abutment - Multiple-Unit............................................Indirect Technique.............................50
Conical Abutment - Single-Unit.....................................................Indirect Technique.............................53
Conical Abutment - Multiple-Unit..................................................Indirect Technique.............................56
 Table Of Contents (Cont’d)
Denture Conversion To Fixed Prosthesis
QuickBridge® Provisional Components.........................................Direct Technique...............................59
Fabrication Of Provisional To FIxed Prosthesis
QuickBridge Provisional Restoration..............................................Indirect Technique.............................61
Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar..........................................................................................................................63
UCLA Abutment Bar..............................................................................................................................76
Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
Low Profile Abutment Fixed Hybrid.......................................................................................................72
Standard Abutment Fixed Hybrid............................................................................................................74
UCLA Abutment Fixed Hybrid...............................................................................................................79
IOL® Abutment Fixed Hybrid...................................................................................................................82
Tissue-Supported Overdenture
LOCATOR® Abutment.................................................................Indirect Technique............................. 84
LOCATOR Abutment...................................................................Direct Technique............................... 89
Dal-Ro Abutment.........................................................................Indirect Technique............................. 91
Dal-Ro Abutment.........................................................................Direct Technique............................... 96
Temporary Healing Retention Cylinder.........................................Indirect Technique............................. 98

Icon Key:

Certain® Internal Connection How To Use The Icon Key:

Implant System: The icons represent the connection types of
the BIOMET 3i Implant and Abutment Systems
External Hex Connection for both internal and external connection types
Implant System: represented in this manual. In the fully illustrated
protocols, each icon is present next to each step.
Certain Internal and External Hex
Connection Implant Systems:
 Torque Matrix – Certain Internal Connection ®

Please use the table below as a guide for which BIOMET 3i Drivers and Driver Tips must be used with BIOMET 3i threaded devices
(e.g. screws and abutments), as well as the recommended torque values for each.

Recommended Torque Matrix – Internal Connection

Recommended
BIOMET 3i Threaded Devices BIOMET 3i Drivers BIOMET 3i Driver Tips
Torque Value

Try-In Screws PHD02N

Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver 17 mm (L)
Finger-tighten N/A
PHD03N
Waxing Screws Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver 24 mm (L)

Healing Caps
PHD02N RASH3N
Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver17 mm (L) Narrow Right Angle Large Hex Driver Tip 24 mm (L)
Cover Screws 10 Ncm
PHD03N RASH8N
Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver 24 mm (L) Narrow Right Angle Large Hex Driver Tip 30 mm (L)
Abutment-level Gold or
Titanium Retaining Screws

PSD00 RASD1
Posterior Screw Driver 17 mm (L) Right Angle Slotted Driver Tip 24 mm (L)
Gold Slotted Screws 10 Ncm
PSD01 RASD6
Standard Screw Driver 24 mm (L) Right Angle Slotted Driver Tip 30 mm (L)

One-Piece Healing Abutments

PHD02N RASH3N
Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver 17 mm (L) Narrow Right Angle Large Hex Driver Tip 24 mm (L)
BellaTek Encode Healing Abutments
® ®
20 Ncm
PHD03N RASH8N
Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver 24 mm (L) Narrow Right Angle Large Hex Driver Tip 30 mm (L)
Implant-level Gold or
Titanium Retaining Screws

IOL Abutments

Low Profile Abutments PAD00

Posterior Abutment Driver 17 mm (L) RASA3
20 Ncm
PAD24 Right Angle Abutment Driver Tip Steel
Standard Abutments Standard Abutment Driver 24 mm (L)

Conical Abutments

LOADT4
LOCATOR Abutment Driver Tip 24 mm (L)
LOADT9
LCTDR1 LOCATOR Abutment Driver Tip 30 mm (L)
LOCATOR Abutments
®
20 Ncm
LOCATOR Core Tool/Abutment Driver RASH4
Right Angle Driver Tip 0.050" Hex 24 mm (L)
RASH9
Right Angle Driver Tip 0.050" Hex 30 mm (L)

Lab Designed Abutments for NobelActive ®

These threaded devices require a driver(s), driver tip(s) and other instrumentation not manufactured or
Lab Designed Abutments for NobelReplace ®
35 Ncm
sold by BIOMET 3i. Please refer to the original equipment manufacturer for instrumentation and indications.

Lab Designed Abutments for Straumann ®

Bone-level

1
 Torque Matrix – External Hex Connection
Please use the table below as a guide for which BIOMET 3i Drivers and Driver Tips must be used with BIOMET 3i threaded devices
(e.g. screws and abutments), as well as the recommended torque values for each.

Recommended Torque Matrix - External Connection

Recommended
BIOMET 3i Threaded Devices BIOMET 3i Drivers BIOMET 3i Driver Tips
Torque Value

Implant Mounts PHD02N

Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver 17 mm (L)
Finger-tighten N/A
PHD03N
Waxing Screws Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver 24 mm (L)

PSQD0N
Narrow Posterior Square Driver 17 mm (L)
Square Try-In Screws Finger-tighten N/A
PSQD1N
Narrow Posterior Square Driver 24 mm (L)

PHD00N RASH2N
Narrow Posterior Small Hex Driver 17 mm (L) Narrow Right Angle Small Hex Driver Tip 24 mm (L)
Cover Screws 10 Ncm
PHD01N RASH7N
Narrow Posterior Small Hex Driver-24 mm (L) Narrow Right Angle Small Hex Driver Tip 30 mm (L)

PSD00 RASD1
Posterior Screw Driver 17 mm (L) Right Angle Slotted Driver Tip 24 mm (L)
Gold Slotted Screws 10 Ncm
PSD01 RASD6
Standard Screw Driver 24 mm (L) Right Angle Slotted Driver Tip 30 mm (L)

One-Piece Healing Abutments

PHD02N RASH3N
BellaTek Encode Healing Abutments
® ® Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver 17 mm (L) Narrow Right Angle Large Hex Driver Tip 24 mm (L)
20 Ncm
PHD03N RASH8N
Hexed Implant-level Gold or Narrow Posterior Large Hex Driver 24 mm (L) Narrow Right Angle Large Hex Driver Tip 30 mm (L)
Titanium Retaining Screws
IOL Abutments
®

PAD00
Low Profile Abutments Posterior Abutment Driver 17 mm (L) RASA3
20 Ncm
Standard Abutments PAD24 Right Angle Abutment Drive Tip Steel
Standard Abutment Driver 24 mm (L)
Conical Abutments

LOADT4
LOCATOR Abutment Driver Tip 24 mm (L)
LOADT9
LCTDR1 LOCATOR Abutment Driver Tip 30 mm (L)
LOCATOR Abutments
®
20 Ncm
LOCATOR Core Tool/Abutment Driver RASH4
Right Angle Driver Tip 0.050" Hex 24 mm (L)
RASH9
Right Angle Driver Tip 0.050" Hex 30 mm (L)

PSQD0N
Square Implant-level Gold or Narrow Posterior Square Driver 17 mm (L)
32-35 Ncm
Titanium Retaining Screws PSQD1N
Narrow Posterior Square Driver 24 mm (L)
RASQ3N
Narrow Right Angle Square Driver Tip 24 mm (L)
RASQ8N
Narrow Right Angle Square Driver Tip 30 mm (L)

Lab Designed Abutments for NobelActive

®

These threaded devices require a driver(s), driver tip(s) and other instrumentation not
Lab Designed Abutments for NobelReplace ®

35 Ncm manufactured or sold by BIOMET 3i. Please refer to the original equipment manufacturer
Lab Designed Abutments for Straumann ®
for instrumentation and indications.
Bone-level
2
 Implant & Abutment System Connections

Certain® Internal Connection

The internal connection aspect of the implant and abutment are designed
for ease of use and simplicity.

• QuickSeat® Connection: It Clicks! The Certain Implant and Abutment

Systems feature the QuickSeat Connection. This unique connection
produces an audible and tactile “click” that confirms placement of
Impression Copings and Abutments.

• Abutment fingers cause the “click" and also provide r­ etention for the
prosthetic components in the implant before the screw is placed. A screw
is needed to fully seat the components when the restoration is being
tried in or definitively placed.

• The 6/12 hex inside the internal connection incorporates both a 6-point
single and a 12-point double hex. The 6-point single hex has two
functions: engaging the driver tip for mountless delivery during implant
placement and providing anti-rotation for all straight abutments.
The 12-point double hex provides 30º rotational positioning for pre-
angled abutments.

• Impression Copings: Pick-Up and Twist Lock™ Transfer Copings

are available in the Certain Internal Connection design, in three EP®
(Emergence Profile) diameters and a straight diameter to match the
corresponding Healing Abutment. The Impression Copings also “click”
when completely seated. These copings have a different finger design
that engages 2 mm internally into the implant, as compared to the
abutment’s design that engages 4 mm deep into the implant. This shorter
engagement into the implant is important because it allows off-axis draw
for implant impressions that are divergent.

• Color-Coding: Certain Implants and all interfacing c­ omponents are

(purple) (blue) (yellow) (green) color-coded by restorative platform diameter for easy identification
and selection.
3.4 mm 4.1 mm 5 mm 6 mm

3
Implant & Abutment System Connections (Cont’d)

External Hex Connection

The external hex connection implant and abutment designs have been
widely used in implant dentistry.

• Gold Standard ZR (Zero Rotation) is a proprietary design incorporating

machined microstops within the corners of the hex in the abutment.
The design reduces horizontal rotation between the implant and
abutment. Gold Standard ZR is available on UCLA, GingiHue® and
Conical Abutments.

• The 12-point double hex, which is machined in the 15º Pre-Angled

GingiHue Abutment, provides rotational positioning in 30º increments
on the implant hex.

• Precise Abutment Placement: The ASYST Abutment Placement Tool

provides fingertip control for fast and easy abutment delivery. The
proprietary packaging design makes abutment placement easier because the
abutment is delivered sterile from the package directly to the implant site.
The abutment and abutment screw are packaged inside the plastic ASYST
seating device. The plastic seating device facilitates precise placement of the
abutment onto the implant, thus reducing chair time. The ASYST Tool is
packaged with Low Profile, Standard and Conical Abutments.

• Impression Copings: Pick-Up and Twist Lock™ Transfer Copings are

available in both the external connection design in three EP® (Emergence
Profile) diameters and a straight diameter to match the corresponding
healing abutment. The proprietary Twist Lock design provides a more
accurate transfer of the implant connection as compared to other
transfer (closed tray) techniques. This unique Twist Lock feature provides
a series of undercuts to guide the coping into the impression, giving
stability to the impression coping/analog prior to pouring the impression.
As a result, the copings lock into orientation grooves upon clockwise
rotation, thereby allowing for a tactile sensation of resistance that ensures
an accurate hex transfer.

4
 Certain QuickSeat Activator Tool
® ®

The Certain QuickSeat Activator Tool is used to verify

that the fingers on impression copings and abutments
are in the proper position for proper retention when
placed into the implant (Figure 1).

The Certain QuickSeat Activator Tool is marked on

both sides to indicate impression coping activation or
abutment activation. Impression Coping QuickSeat Activation

Figure 2
To activate the Certain QuickSeat fingers, locate the
proper end for the component.

• Impression Copings: Insert the impression coping

onto the pin, fingers first and slide inward until the
fingers meet the tool (Figure 2).

• Abutments: Insert the abutment onto the pin,

fingers first and slide inward until the platform meets Abutment QuickSeat Activation
the tool (Figure 3).
Figure 3
Remove the component from the pin and insert it into
the implant.

In addition, there is an area indicated on the tool

for deactivating the fingers on a Hexed UCLA Cylinder
(Figure 4). This may be necessary during waxing,
finishing or porcelain application when laboratory
technicians prefer to insert and remove the abutment
from the analog without finger retention. After the
custom abutment or crown is completed, the UCLA
fingers must be reactivated (Figure 5).

UCLA Cylinder QuickSeat Deactivation

Figure 4

GingiHue and
®

Conical Abutment Impression Coping

Fingers Fingers UCLA Cylinder QuickSeat Activation

Figure 1 Figure 5

5
 Certain Hexed & Non-Hexed ®

Pick-Up Impression Coping Draw Angles

Maximum Draw Of Certain Hexed Pick-Up
Impression Copings

Certain Hexed Pick-Up Impression Copings are designed with a shallow

internal connection and a draft on the hex, which allows these to draw
from implants placed at divergent angles to a maximum of 30º per
implant. This maximum angulation is possible with individual or multiple
copings that are not rigidly splinted together before the impression is
made (Figure 1).

Maximum Draw Of Certain Hexed Pick-Up Impression

Copings And Non-Hexed Pick-Up Impression Copings
When Rigidly Splinted Together
Figure 1
Clinicians may desire to rigidly splint the Pick-Up Impression Copings 30º Per Implant
together prior to impressioning a multiple-implant, implant level
restoration. The Hexed Pick-Up Impression Copings will not draw
from multiple divergent implants when rigidly splinted together. This
impression technique may only be used on parallel implants (Figure 2).

The Non-Hexed Pick-Up Impression Copings have a maximum draw

angle of 40º between implants and will draw when rigidly splinted
together as impression copings. The Non-Hexed Pick-Up Impression
Copings have a shallow non-hex engaging internal connection that allows
up to 40º of draw (Figure 3).

When clinicians desire to splint the impression copings together before

making an impression of multiple divergent implants for a splinted implant
restoration, the Non-Hexed Pick-Up Impression Copings should be Figure 2
used in place of the Hexed Pick-Up Impression Copings (Figure 4). Pick-Up Impression Copings Rigidly Splinted
(Parallel Implants)

Figure 4 Figure 3
Non-Hexed Pick-Up Impression Copings 40º Divergence Between Splinted Implants
Rigidly Splinted (Non-Parallel Implants)

6
 Certain UCLA Abutment
®

The Certain Internal Connection line of restorative components

includes UCLA Abutments. This design provides greater predictability
and more flexibility for laboratory technicians when waxing
Waxing Sleeve
and casting implant-level restorations relative to conventional
prefabricated abutments.

• C
 ylinder Retention Design
The cylinder retention design incorporates machined vertical Cylinder
grooves that reduce the potential for miscasts due to the smoother Retention Design
alloy flow onto the gold alloy cylinder during casting. The vertical
4 mm
grooves provide mechanical retention for the alloy by stopping on Chamfer Margin
the horizontal retention instead of flowing to the margin (Figure 1). 0.25 mm
Collar Height

• C
 hamfer Margin
The chamfer margin design provides a smooth transition from
the gold alloy cylinder to the cast alloy at the junction of the two
metals. It also aids in preventing the alloy from flowing onto the
implant restorative platform of the gold alloy cylinder during casting Figure 1
Certain UCLA Abutment
(Figure 1).

• C
 ollar Height
The collar height is 0.25 mm to provide greater flexibility when 4.1 mm 5 mm 6 mm
fabricating restorations for implants with shallow tissue depths. This
allows the restoration to emerge from the implant platform more
quickly and to add porcelain closer to the implant platform on
screw-retained restorations (Figure 2).
4.1 mm 5 mm 6 mm
• C
 ollar Adjustment After Casting
The 0.25 mm collar height may cause an undercut laterally around 4.5 mm 5.5 mm 6.5 mm
the implant platform. The undercut should be removed after
casting by tapering the collar back (Figure 3). Figure 2
Certain UCLA Abutment Collar Diameter

Certain UCLA Cement-Retained Certain UCLA Screw-Retained

Abutment Custom Abutment Crown Abutment Crown Coping Crown

Figure 3
Certain UCLA Abutments Collar Adjustments After Casting

7
 Certain Non-Hexed Abutments
®

The Certain Non-hexed Abutments are designed to provide

flexibility for laboratory technicians when fabricating splinted
multiple-unit, screw-retained provisional restorations, as well as
bridge frameworks and bars for implant level restorations.

• I nternal Engagement
Non-hexed abutments have a 1 mm internal engagement Internal Engagement
feature to allow a greater degree of draw from multiple
divergent implants than other internal connection implant 1 mm Large Diameter
systems (Figure 1). 4 mm
Gold-Tite Abutment Screw

• Large Diameter Abutment Screw

Non-hexed abutments are retained on the implants with a
unique Large Diameter Gold-Tite or Titanium Abutment
®

Figure 1
Screw. The larger diameter screws provide lateral stability Certain Non-Hexed UCLA Abutment
to the restoration. It goes into the full depth of the internal
connection, replacing the 4 mm length of the hexed
abutment’s connection (Figure 1).

• M
 aximum Draw Of Non-Hexed Abutments
Non-hexed abutments have a maximum draw angle of 40º
between implants (Figure 2).

• Gold Alloy Cylinder Formulation

The formulation defines the melting temperatures for the gold
alloy cylinder which is to be considered during burnout and
casting procedures. Detailed formulation values are indicated
below (Figure 3).

Fahrenheit Celsius
Melting Range 2552 – 2732ºF 1400 –1500ºC Figure 2
40º Divergence Between Splinted
Solidus 2552 – 2579°F 1400–1415°C Implants
Liquidus 2714 – 2732°F 1490–1500°C
CTE 12.2 x 10 ºK at 932°F
-6
12.2 x 10-6 ºK at 500º C

Figure 3
Gold Alloy Cylinder Melting Temperatures

8
 Implant & Abutment Level Impressions
How To Choose A Coping

Choices
Pick-Up Impression Coping (open tray)
The Pick-Up Impression Coping transfers the position of an implant hex to a laboratory cast. The coping is picked up
inside the impression when the impression is removed from the mouth. An open impression tray is used with the
Pick-Up Impression Coping.

Note
• Pick-Up Impression Copings may be difficult to use in limited, interarch distance spaces.
• Pick-Up Impression Copings are ideal for use when an impression is made of multiple divergent implants
(see page 6).

Twist Lock™Transfer Coping (closed tray)

The Twist Lock Transfer Coping transfers the position of an implant hex to a laboratory cast. The coping is designed
to remain on the implant when the impression is removed from the mouth. The coping is then removed from the
implant, an implant analog is seated into the hex connection and the impression coping/analog assembly is seated into
the impression.

Note
• Twist Lock Impression Copings are ideal for use in limited, interarch spaces.
• Twist Lock Impression Copings are contraindicated for use when an impression is made of multiple divergent
implants. There is a risk of not being able to remove the impression tray from the copings once the impression
material has set.

Selecting The Proper Impression Coping

Select the proper platform diameter Pick-Up or Twist Lock Transfer Impression Coping by matching it to the implant
platform color. Also, match the diameter of the impression coping to the EP® (Emergence Profile) diameter of the
healing abutment. See healing abutment measurements:

EP (Emergence Profile)
Healing Abutment Measurements: Height
Restorative Platform

If using the Pick-Up Impression Coping, turn to page 10.

If using the Twist Lock Transfer Impression Coping, turn to page 13.

Components Needed
• Matching platform and EP diameter Pick-Up or Twist Lock Impression Coping(s).
• Matching implant laboratory analog(s).

Instruments Needed
• PHD02N or PHD03N - .048" Large Hexed Driver
• ICD00 - Impression Coping Driver (For Twist Lock Only).

9
 Implant & Abutment Level Impressions
Pick-Up Impression Copings
(Certain Internal Connection
®

System Is Illustrated)
1. Restorative Dentist
Select the proper Pick-Up Impression Coping by matching
the Emergence Profile (EP®) diameter of the healing abutment and
the restorative platform. To determine the restorative and implant
platform diameter, see below. Remove the healing abutment from
the implant using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).
To help prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver.

(purple) (blue) (yellow) (green)

3.4 mm 4.1 mm 5 mm 6 mm

2. Activate the coping fingers using the Certain QuickSeat® Activator

Tool (see page 5). Place the coping into the implant, line up the hex
and press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click.
Or

Place the coping onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread an impression coping screw into the implant and finger-

tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).
To help prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver.

3. Radiograph the interface to verify complete seating of the

coping on the implant. Place the film perpendicular to the interface of
the coping on the implant or abutment.
SEATED NOT SEATED

4. A custom or stock open top impression tray is used for the

Pick-Up Impression Technique. Cut a small hole into the tray so that
the clinician has access to the screw head.

10
 Implant & Abutment Level Impressions
Pick-Up Impression Copings (Cont’d)

(Certain Internal Connection

®

System Is Illustrated)
5. Medium or heavy viscosity impression material is
recommended for the impression material in the impression tray.
Syringe light viscosity impression material around the entire coping.

6. Load the impression tray and seat it in the mouth. Wipe

impression material off the top of the screw so that the screw hex
is visible and free of impression material before it sets. Allow the
impression material to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

7. After the impression material has set, unscrew and remove

the coping screw using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N). To help prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the spinner of the driver. Remove the impression from
the mouth.

8. Visually verify that the impression material has completely

adapted around the coping and that there is no impression material
on the impression coping’s restorative platform.

11
 Implant & Abutment Level Impressions
Pick-Up Impression Copings (Cont’d)

(Certain Internal Connection

®

System Is Illustrated)
9. Immediately replace the healing abutment back onto the
implant and torque to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip
(RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C).

Laboratory
10. Place the proper diameter implant analog onto the impression
coping, engaging the hex. Hold the analog in place while finger-
tightening the screw with a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N). Visually verify that the analog is completely seated on
the impression coping. If the clinician is sending the impression to a
commercial laboratory, do not attach the analogs.

11. Syringe soft-tissue material around the coping/analog interface.

Pour the cast in die stone. Articulate with the opposing cast.

12
 Implant & Abutment Level Impressions
Twist Lock™ Transfer Impression Copings

(External Connection Is Illustrated)

Restorative Dentist
1. Select the proper Twist Lock Transfer Impression Coping
by matching the Emergence Profile (EP®) diameter of the healing
abutment and the restorative platform. To determine the restorative
and implant platform diameter, see below. Remove the healing
abutment from the implant using a .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
(purple) (blue) (yellow) (green)

3.4 mm 4.1 mm 5 mm 6 mm

2. Activate the coping fingers using the Certain® QuickSeat® Activator

Tool (see page 5). Place the coping into the implant, line up the hex
and press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click.

Or

Place the coping onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread the coping screw into the implant and finger-tighten

using an Impression Coping Driver (ICD00).

3. Radiograph the interface to verify complete ­seating of the

coping on the implant. Place the film p­ erpendicular to the interface of
the coping on the implant or abutment.
NOT
SEATED SEATED

4. A custom or stock impression tray is used for the Twist Lock

Transfer Impression technique. Try in the tray to verify that there is no
contact with the coping.

13
 Implant & Abutment Level Impressions
Twist Lock™ Transfer Impression Copings (Cont’d)

(External Connection Is Illustrated)

5. Medium or heavy viscosity impression material is
recommended for the impression material in the impression tray.
Syringe light viscosity impression material around the entire coping.

6. Load the impression tray and seat it in the mouth. Allow the
impression material to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

7. After the impression material has set, remove the impression

from the mouth. The coping will remain on the implant. Visually
verify that the impression material has completely adapted around
the coping.

8. Loosen the Twist Lock™Impression Coping Screw from the

implant using the Impression Coping Driver (ICD00). Then remove
the Twist Lock Impression Coping from the implant.

14
 Implant & Abutment Level Impressions
Twist Lock™ Transfer Impression Copings (Cont’d)

(External Connection Is Illustrated)

9. Immediately replace the healing abutment back onto the

implant and torque to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip
(RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C).

Laboratory
10. Place the proper diameter implant analog onto the impression
coping, engaging the hex. Hold the components together and
finger-tighten the screw. Visually verify that the impression coping is
completely seated on the implant analog.

11. Re-index the impression coping/analog assembly into the

impression using firm pressure to its full depth. Slightly rotate the
coping/analog clockwise until feeling anti-rotational resistance. This
indicates that the orientation grooves are locked into place and the
implant hex is a­ ccurately transferred.

12. Syringe soft-tissue material around the coping/analog interface.

Pour the cast in die stone. Articulate with the opposing cast.

15
 Abutment Selection Guide

Restorative Dentist
1. Select the proper abutment size by matching it to the EP®
(Emergence Profile) and the restorative platform of the healing
abutment and the implant platform diameter. The restorative and
EP (Emergence Profile)
implant platform diameter is identified by the color anodized on the
Height
Restorative Platform implants and components (see below).

(purple) (blue) (yellow) (green)

3.4 mm 4.1 mm 5 mm 6 mm

2. Select the proper abutment collar height by measuring the

height of the healing abutment above the tissue on the buccal surface,
not including the domed portion. Subtract this measurement from
the total height of the healing abutment.

2 mm 4 mm 6 mm 3. Evaluate angulation by inserting a .048” Large Hex Driver

(PHD02N or PHD03N) into the healing abutment. To help prevent
15°
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
If the angle appears to be more than 10º, use the Prosthetic Angle
Guide Kit to determine the approximate angulation of the implant.
25°
This kit consists of 15, 25 and 35° guide pins in 2, 4 and 6 mm collar
heights. To use angled guides, healing abutments must be removed
from the implants.
35°

4. Place the guide pins into the implant to select the p­ roper
angled abutment. To help prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the hole of the Prosthetic Angle Guide. The correct angle
will have the guide pin in line with the central fossa of the adjacent
posterior teeth or the incisal line angle of the adjacent anterior teeth.

16
 Abutment Selection Guide (Cont'd)

Cement-Retained Restorations
Is The Implant Angled?
No (Greater than 15º Divergence) Yes

GingiHue® 15º Pre-Angled GingiHue

UCLA UCLA
BellaTek® BellaTek

Interarch Space Interarch Space

Less than 7 mm 7 mm or more Less than 7 mm 7 mm or more

UCLA GingiHue UCLA 15º Pre-Angled GingiHue
BellaTek® UCLA BellaTek UCLA
BellaTek BellaTek

Tissue Height Tissue Height

Less than 2 mm 2 mm or more Less than 2 mm 2 mm or more

UCLA GingiHue UCLA 15º Pre-Angled GingiHue
BellaTek UCLA BellaTek UCLA
BellaTek BellaTek

Is the implant centered in the tooth site?

If the answer is no, UCLA is the best option.

Screw-Retained Restorations
Is The Implant Angled?
No (Greater than 15º Divergence) Yes

UCLA 17º Angled Low Profile

Low Profile 30º Angled Low Profile
Conical 17º Angled Conical
IOL® 25º Angled Conical

Interarch Space Interarch Space

Less than 5 mm 5 mm or more Less than 9.5 mm 9.5 mm or more

UCLA UCLA UCLA UCLA
Low Profile 17º Angled Low Profile 17º Angled Low Profile
Conical 30º Angled Low Profile 30º Angled Low Profile
IOL 17º Angled Conical 17º Angled Conical
25º Angled Conical 25º Angled Conical
Tissue Height
Tissue Height Tissue Height
Less than 2 mm 2 mm or more
UCLA UCLA Less than 2 mm 2 mm or more Less than 2 mm 2 mm or more
Low Profile Low Profile UCLA 17º Angled Low Profile UCLA UCLA
Conical Conical 30º Angled Low Profile 17º Angled Low Profile
IOL 17º Angled Conical 30º Angled Low Profile
25º Angled Conical 17º Angled Conical
25º Angled Conical
Is the implant centered in the tooth site?
If the answer is no, UCLA is the best option.

17
 Cement-Retained
PreFormance Post - Indirect Technique
®

Material:
PEEK; Titanium Alloy Connection
Indications:
• S ingle and multiple-unit cement-
retained provisional restorations
•M  inimum interarch space of 7 mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate non-occlusal loading of
single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multiple-unit restorations will require
an evaluation of occlusal forces in
lateral and protrusive excursions and
masticatory forces to minimize the
load on the provisional restorations
•G  uided soft-tissue healing of single
and multiple-unit restorations of
­integrated implants

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Select the proper PreFormance Provisional Post with the
desired EP (Emergence Profile) diameter and collar height by
®

measuring the interproximal tissue heights and select a collar

height that can be prepared to follow the gingival contour. Match
the color to the implant platform.

Place the post into the implant a­ nalog, line up the hex and
press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click.

Or

Place the post onto the implant analog, engaging the hex.

Thread a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT)

into the implant analog and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex
Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Mark the post with a pencil to
areas requiring ­preparation.

3. Prepare the post in areas marked to the desired depth

using a carbide bur. Refine with a coarse diamond bur. Prepare
margins to 1 mm subgingival or following the gingival margins
according to fixed prosthodontic principles. The post can be
prepared on the cast or removed and placed on a Laboratory
Abutment Holder (ILTAH57, LTAH5, LTAH7). Maintain three
walls of the abutment and at least .5 mm of wall thickness
during preparation.

18
 Cement-Retained
PreFormance Post - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

4. Block out the screw access opening with wax. Fabricate the
provisional crown on the prepared post using the provisional material
of choice.

Restorative Dentist
5. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the PreFormance Provisional Post fingers using the

Certain® QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the prepared
post into the implant, line up the hex and press firmly until hearing
and feeling an audible and tactile click.

Or

Place the prepared post onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT) into

the implant and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

NOTE: The abutment should be placed in the same position as

it was prepared on the cast. A dimple on the facial surface guides
clinicians with accurate placement.

6. Try the provisional crown on the post and check the

interproximal contacts, marginal fit and occlusion.

Remove the provisional crown. Torque the screw to 20 Ncm using

a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque
device (L-TIRW, CATB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

7. Place protective material into the screw access opening. Seal

the access opening with temporary filling material. Cement the crown
to the post using temporary cement. Remove any excess cement.

When using PreFormance Provisional Posts in immediate non-occlusal

loading protocols for multiple-units, please follow these instructions:

• Do not splint to natural dentition.

• If splinting to other integrated implants, all lateral and centric
contacts should be eliminated. The restoration should be
completely out of occlusion. Masticatory contacts on the recently
placed implants should be minimized/eliminated. Dietary restrictions
and compliance are critical for success in these types of cases.
• If splinting to other immediately placed implants, no occlusion and a
soft diet should be recommended to the patient for six to eight weeks.

19
 Cement-Retained
PreFormance Post - Direct Technique
®

See page 18 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Select the proper PreFormance Provisional Post with the
desired EP® (Emergence Profile) diameter and collar height by
measuring the interproximal tissue heights and select a collar height
that can be prepared to follow the gingival contour. Match the color
to the implant platform.

Activate the PreFormance Provisional Post fingers using the

Certain® QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the post into
the implant, line up the hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling
an audible and tactile click.

Or
Place the post onto the implant, e­ ngaging the hex.

Thread a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT)

into the implant and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Mark the post with a
pencil to areas requiring ­preparation.

2. Prepare the post in areas marked using a high-speed

handpiece, carbide bur and irrigation. Refine with a coarse diamond
bur. Prepare margins to 1 mm subgingival or according to fixed
prosthodontic principles, following the gingival contours. The post
can be ­prepared intraorally or removed and placed on a Laboratory
Abutment Holder (ILTAH57, LTAH5, LTAH7). Maintain three walls of
the abutment and at least .5 mm of wall thickness during preparation.

3. Once abutment preparation is complete, secure the abutment

to the implant using a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT) and
torque to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or
RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

4. Place protective material into the screw access opening.

Seal the access opening with temporary filling material. Fabricate a
provisional crown on the post and cement it in place using temporary
cement. Remove any excess cement. Make any necessary occlusal
adjustments. For easier occlusal adjustments, the prosthesis should
be polished outside of the mouth prior to cementation.

When using PreFormance Provisional Posts in immediate n­ on-occlusal

loading protocols for multiple-units, please follow these instructions:

• Do not splint to natural dentition.

• If splinting to other integrated implants, all lateral and centric
contacts should be eliminated. The restoration should be
completely out of occlusion. Masticatory contacts on the recently
placed implants should be minimized/eliminated. Dietary restrictions
and compliance are critical for success in these types of cases.
• If splinting to other immediately placed implants, no occlusion and
a soft diet should be recommended to the patient for six to
eight weeks.

20
 Cement-Retained
15° Pre-Angled PreFormance Post - Indirect Technique ®

See page 18 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Select the proper 15° Pre-Angled PreFormance Provisional
Post with the desired EP® (Emergence Profile) diameter and collar
height by measuring the interproximal tissue heights and select a collar
height that can be prepared to follow the gingival contour. Match
it to the implant platform color. The post may be rotated in 30º
increments to ideally position it to correct the implant’s angulation.

Place the post into the implant analog, line up the hex in the 12-
point double hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible
and tactile click.

Or

Place the post onto the implant analog, engaging the hex.

3. Thread a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT) into

the implant analog and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). Mark the post with a pencil to areas
requiring ­preparation.

4. Prepare the post using a carbide bur. Refine with a coarse

diamond bur. Prepare margins to 1 mm subgingival or according
to fixed prosthodontic principles, following the gingival contours.
The post can be prepared on the cast or removed and placed on a
Laboratory Abutment Holder (ILTAH57, LTAH5, LTAH7). Maintain
three walls of the abutment and at least .5 mm of wall thickness
during preparation.

21
 Cement-Retained
15° Pre-Angled PreFormance Post - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

5. Fabricate the provisional crown on the prepared post using the

provisional material of choice.

Restorative Dentist
6. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the 15° Pre-Angled PreFormance Provisional Post fingers

using the Certain® QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5). Place
the prepared post into the implant, line up the hex in the 12-point
double hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible and
tactile click.
Or

Place the prepared post onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT) into

the implant and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

NOTE: The post should be placed in the same position as it

was prepared on the cast. A dimple on the facial surface guides
clinicians with accurate placement.

7. Try the provisional crown on the post and check the

interproximal contacts, marginal fit and occlusion.

Remove the provisional crown. Torque the Hexed Titanium Screw

(IUNIHT or UNIHT) to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver
Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C).

8. Place protective material into the screw access opening. Seal

the access opening with temporary filling material. Cement the crown
to the post using temporary cement. Remove any excess cement.

When using PreFormance Provisional Posts in immediate n­ on-occlusal

loading protocols for multiple-units, please follow these instructions:

• Do not splint to natural dentition.

• If splinting to other integrated implants, all lateral and centric contacts
should be eliminated. The restoration should be completely out
of occlusion. Masticatory contacts on the recently placed implants
should be minimized/eliminated. Dietary restrictions and compliance
are critical for success in these types of cases.
• If splinting to other immediately placed implants, no occlusion and
a soft diet should be recommended to the patient for six to
eight weeks.

22
 Cement-Retained
15° Pre-Angled PreFormance Post - Direct Technique ®

See page 18 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Select the proper 15° Pre-Angled PreFormance Provisional Post
with the desired EP® (Emergence Profile) diameter and collar height
by measuring the interproximal tissue heights and select a collar height
that can be prepared to follow the gingival contour. Match the color to
the implant platform.

Activate the post fingers using the Certain® QuickSeat® Activator

Tool (see page 5). Place the post into the implant, line up the hex in
the 12-point double hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an
audible and tactile click. The post may be rotated in 30º ­increments to
ideally position it to correct the implant angulation.

Or
Place the post onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT) into the

implant and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N
or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the spinner of the driver. Mark the post with a pencil to areas
requiring preparation.

2. Prepare the ­post in areas marked using a high speed handpiece,

carbide bur and ­irrigation. Refine with a coarse diamond bur. Prepare
margins to 1 mm subgingival or according to fixed prosthodontic
principles, following the gingival contours. The post can be prepared
intraorally or removed and placed on a Laboratory Abutment Holder
(ILTAH57, LTAH5, LTAH7). Maintain three walls of the abutment and
at least .5 mm of wall thickness during preparation.

3. Once abutment preparation is complete, screw the post to

the implant and torque to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver
Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C).

4. Place protective material into the screw access opening. Seal the
access opening with temporary filling material. Fabricate a provisional
crown on the post and cement it in place using temporary cement.
Remove any excess cement. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.
When using PreFormance Provisional Posts in immediate non-occlusal
loading protocols for multiple-units, please follow these instructions:
• Do not splint to natural dentition.
• If splinting to other integrated implants, all lateral and centric
contacts should be eliminated. The restoration should be
completely out of occlusion. Masticatory contacts on the recently
placed implants should be minimized/eliminated. Dietary restrictions
and compliance are critical for success in these types of cases.
• If splinting to other immediately placed implants, no occlusion
and a soft diet should be recommended to the patient for six to
eight weeks.

23
 Screw-Retained
PreFormance Temporary Cylinder - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique
®

Material:
PEEK; Titanium Alloy Connection
Indications:
• Single and multiple-unit screw-
retained provisional restorations
• Minimum interarch space of 6 mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of
single-unit provisional restorations
• Multiple-unit restorations will
require an evaluation of prosthesis
support to minimize the load on the
provisional abutments
• Occlusal loading of single and
multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Set a denture tooth in wax on the cast where the single tooth
is missing.

Make a vacuum-formed template over the denture tooth and the

adjacent teeth on the cast. Remove the template, denture tooth and
wax from the cast.

3. Select the proper diameter Hexed PreFormance Temporary

Cylinder by matching it to the implant platform color. Place it into
the implant analog, line up the hex and press firmly until hearing and
feeling an audible and tactile click (see page 5).

Or

Place the proper diameter Hexed PreFormance Temporary

Cylinder onto the implant analog, engaging the hex.

Thread a Waxing Screw (IWSU30 or WSU30) into the implant

analog and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N
or PHD03N). To help prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the spinner of the driver.

4. Reduce or adjust the cylinder as necessary. Block out any

undercuts apical to the contact points of the a­ djacent teeth.

24
 Screw-Retained
PreFormance Temporary Cylinder - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

5. Cut a hole in the template to accommodate the waxing screw

(IWSU30 or WSU30). Add acrylic resin to the cylinder and template
and place the template on the cast to form the provisional crown.
Allow the acrylic resin to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.
Remove the w ­ axing screw and template from the cast. Remove the
crown from the template. Place a matching laboratory analog onto
the restorative platform. Fill in any voids around the subgingival area.
Contour and polish the crown. Place the crown back onto the cast
and thread a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT) into the
laboratory analog and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N).

Restorative Dentist
6. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the PreFormance Temporary Cylinder fingers using

the Certain® QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the
provisional crown into the implant, line up the hex and press firmly
until hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click.

Or

Place the provisional crown onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT) into

the implant and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Check the ­interproximal
contacts. Torque the screw to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex
Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW,
CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place protective material into the screw
access opening. Seal the access opening with temporary filling material
and composite resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

25
 Screw-Retained
PreFormance Temporary Cylinder - Single-Unit - Direct Technique
®

See page 24 for indications and material.

Laboratory
1. Set a denture tooth in wax on the cast where the single
tooth is missing. Make a vacuum-formed template over the
denture tooth and adjacent teeth on the cast. Remove the
template, denture tooth and wax from the cast.

Restorative Dentist
2. Select the proper diameter Hexed PreFormance Temporary
Cylinder by matching it to the implant platform color. Place it into
the implant analog, line up the hex and press firmly until hearing
and feeling an audible and tactile click (see page 5).

Or

Place the Hexed PreFormance Temporary Cylinder onto the

implant analog, engaging the hex.

Thread a Waxing Screw (IWSU30 or WSU30) into the

implant analog and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Mark the cylinder
with a pencil to areas requiring ­preparation.

3. Prepare the cylinder intraorally or remove it and place it

on a Laboratory Abutment Holder (ILTAH57, LTAH5, LTAH7).
Reduce the cylinder with a high speed handpiece, a coarse
diamond bur with irrigation.

4. Cut a hole in the template to accommodate the waxing

screw. Add acrylic resin to the cylinder and ­template and place
the template over the cylinder. Allow the acrylic resin to set per
the manufacturer’s instructions. Remove the waxing screw and
template from the patient. Remove the crown from the template.
Fill any voids around the subgingival area. Contour and polish
the crown. Place the crown back onto the implant and thread a
Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT) torqued to 20 Ncm
using the .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N)
with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place
a protective material over the screw head and seal the access hole
with composite resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

26
 Screw-Retained
PreFormance Temporary Cylinder - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique
®

See page 24 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Set the denture teeth in wax on the cast where the teeth
are missing.

3. Make a vacuum-formed template over the denture teeth and

adjacent teeth. Remove the template, denture teeth and wax from
the cast.

4. Select and place the proper diameter Non-Hexed

PreFormance Temporary Cylinders onto the implant analogs.
Thread Waxing Screws (IWSU30 or WSU30) into the implant
analogs and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N
or PHD03N).

27
 Screw-Retained
PreFormance Temporary Cylinder - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

5. Reduce or adjust the cylinders as necessary. The cylinders may

be connected with orthodontic wire or a framework may be waxed
and cast to support a pontic. Block out any undercuts apical to the
contact points of the a­ djacent teeth.

6. Cut holes in the template for the waxing screws to come

through. Add acrylic resin to the cylinders and inside the template to
form the provisional prosthesis. Place the template on the cast.
Allow the acrylic resin to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.
Remove the waxing screws and the template from the cast.
Remove the provisional prosthesis from the template. Place matching
laboratory analogs onto the restorative platforms. Fill in any voids
around the subgingival areas. Contour and polish the prosthesis.
Place the prosthesis back on the cast. Thread Hexed Titanium Screws
(IUNIHT or UNIHT) into the laboratory analogs and finger-tighten
using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Make any
necessary occlusal adjustments.

Restorative Dentist
7. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the p­ rovisional restoration onto the implants. Thread Hexed
Titanium Screws (IUNIHT or UNIHT) into the implants and finger-
tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver.

Check the interproximal and occlusal contacts. Torque the screws to

20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N)
with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place
protective material into the screw access opening. Seal the access
openings with temporary filling m­ aterial and composite resin. Make
any necessary occlusal adjustments.

28

Titanium Temporary Cylinder - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique
Material:
Titanium Alloy Connection
Screw-Retained
Indications:
• S ingle and multiple-unit screw- •M
 ultiple-unit restorations will
retained provisional restorations require an evaluation of prosthesis
• Minimum interarch space of 6 mm support to minimize the load on the
• Maximum angulation of 15° provisional abutments
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of •O
 cclusal loading of single and
single-unit provisional restorations multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing
Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.
Laboratory
2. Set a denture tooth in wax on the cast where the single tooth
is missing.
3. Make a vacuum-formed template over the denture tooth and
adjacent teeth on the cast. Remove the template, denture tooth and
wax from the cast.
4. Select the proper diameter Hexed Titanium Temporary Cylinder
by matching it to the implant platform color. Place it into the implant
analog, line up the hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an
audible and tactile click (see page 5).
Or
Place the proper diameter Hexed Titanium Temporary Cylinder
onto the implant analog, engaging the hex.
Thread a Waxing Screw (IWSU30 or WSU30) into the implant
analog and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N
or PHD03N). To help prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the spinner of the driver.
29
 Screw-Retained
Titanium Temporary Cylinder - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

5. Reduce or adjust the cylinder as necessary. Block out any

undercuts apical to the contact points of the a­ djacent teeth.

6. Cut a hole in the template to accommodate the waxing screw.

Add acrylic resin to the cylinder and ­template and place the template
on the cast to form the provisional crown. Allow the acrylic resin to
set per the manufacturer’s instructions. Remove the waxing screw
and template from the cast. Remove the crown from the template.
Place a matching laboratory analog onto the restorative platform. Fill
any voids around the ­subgingival area. Contour and polish the crown.
Place the crown back onto the cast, thread a Hexed Titanium Screw
(IUNIHT or UNIHT) into the analog and finger-tighten using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Make any necessary
occlusal adjustments.

Restorative Dentist
7. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the Titanium Temporary Cylinder fingers using the

Certain® QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the
provisional crown into the implant, line up the hex and press firmly
until hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click.

Or
Place the provisional crown onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread a Hexed Titanium Screw (IUNIHT or UNIHT) into

the implant and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Radiograph the
interface to verify an accurate fit. Check the interproximal and occlusal
contacts. Torque the screw to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex
Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW,
CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place protective material into the screw
access opening. Seal the access opening with temporary filling material
and composite resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

30
 Screw-Retained
Titanium Temporary Cylinder - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique
See page 29 for indications and material.
Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Set the denture teeth in wax on the cast where the teeth
are missing.

3. Make a vacuum-formed template over the denture teeth and

adjacent teeth. Remove the template, denture teeth and wax from
the cast.

4. Select and place the proper diameter Non-Hexed Titanium

Temporary Cylinders onto the implant analogs. Thread Waxing Screws
(IWSU30, WSK10 or WSK15) into the implant analogs and finger-
tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).

31
 Screw-Retained
Titanium Temporary Cylinder - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

5. Reduce or adjust the cylinders as necessary The cylinders may

be connected with orthodontic wire or a framework may be waxed
and cast to support a pontic. Block out any undercuts apical to the
contact points of the adjacent teeth.

6. Cut holes in the template for the waxing screws to come

through. Add acrylic resin to the cylinders and inside the template
to form the provisional prosthesis. Place the template on the cast.
Allow the acrylic resin to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.
Remove the waxing screws and template from the cast. Remove the
­provisional prosthesis from the template. Place matching laboratory
analogs onto the restorative platforms. Fill in any voids around
the subgingival areas. Contour and polish the prosthesis. Place
the prosthesis back on the cast, thread Hexed Titanium Screws
(IUNIHT or UNIHT) into the laboratory analogs and finger-tighten
using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Make any
necessary occlusal adjustments.

Restorative Dentist
7. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the provisional restoration onto the implants. Thread Hexed
Titanium Screws (IUNIHT or UNIHT) into the implants and finger-
tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).
To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver.

Radiograph the interface to verify an accurate fit. Check the

interproximal and occlusal contacts. Torqe the screws to 20 Ncm
using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a
torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place protective
material into the screw access openings. Seal the access openings
with temporary filling material and composite resin. Make any
necessary occlusal adjustments.

32
 Cement-Retained
GingiHue Post - Indirect Technique
®

Material: Indications:
Titanium Alloy (Certain Straight Posts
® • Single and multiple-unit porcelain- • Conventional crown and bridge
and all 15º Pre-Angled Posts) fused-to-metal restorations procedures
Commercially Pure Titanium (External • Areas of thin labial tissue where gingival • Maximum angulation correction of 15º
discoloration is possible • Minimum interarch space of 7 mm
Hex Straight Posts)
• Preparable to follow gingival contours

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Select the proper GingiHue Post by matching it to the EP®
(Emergence Profile) and the restorative platform of the healing
abutment and the implant platform diameter.

Place the post into the implant analog, line up the hex and press
firmly until hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click.

Or

Straight Pre-Angled Place the post onto the implant analog, engaging the hex.

Thread a Try-in Screw (MUNITS, IUNITS or UNITS) into

the implant analog and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex
Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N) or a Square Driver (PSQD0N or
PSQD1N). Mark the post with a pencil to areas requiring preparation.

3. Prepare the post in areas marked using a high-speed handpiece

and an aggressive carbide bur. Prepare margins to 1 mm subgingival
or according to fixed prosthodontic principles, following the gingival
contours. The post can be prepared on the cast or removed and
placed on a Laboratory Abutment Holder (ILTAH57, LTAH5, LTAH7).

4. Wax the crown coping on the p­ repared abutment. Invest,

burnout and cast the coping in a low, medium or high noble alloy.
Opaque, build porcelain stain and glaze the crown.

33
 Cement-Retained
GingiHue Post - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

Restorative Dentist
5. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the GingiHue Post fingers using the Certain® QuickSeat®

Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the prepared post into the
implant, line up the hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an
audible and tactile click. Thread a Certain Gold-Tite® Hexed Screw
Straight Pre-Angled
(IUNIHG) into the implant and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex
Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).

Or

Place the prepared GingiHue Post onto the implant, engaging the
hex. Thread a Gold-Tite Square Screw (UNISG) into the implant and
finger-tighten using a Square Driver (PSQD0N or PSQD1N). To help
­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of
the driver.

Radiograph the interface to verify an accurate fit.

6. Try the crown on the Post and check the interproximal

contacts, marginal fit and occlusion.

Torque the Certain Gold-Tite Hexed Screw (IUNIHG) to

20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N)
with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

Or

Torque the Gold-Tite Square Screw (UNISG) to 32-35 Ncm

using a Square Driver Tip (RASQ3N or RASQ8N) with a torque
device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

Place protective material into the screw access opening. Seal

the access opening with temporary filling material. Cement the crown
to the post using temporary or p­ ermanent cement.

34
 Cement-Retained
GingiHue Post - Direct Technique
®

See page 33 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Select the proper GingiHue Post by matching it to the EP®
(Emergence Profile) and the restorative platform of the healing
abutment and the implant platform diameter. Remove the healing
­abutment from the implants using a .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the post fingers using the Certain® QuickSeat® Activator

Straight Pre-Angled
Tool (see page 5). Place the post into the implant, line up the hex and
press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click.

Or

Place the post onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread a Try-in Screw (MUNITS, IUNITS or UNITS)

into the implant and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex
Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N) or a Square Driver (PSQD0N or
PSQD1N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the spinner of the driver. Radiograph the interface to verify
an accurate fit. Mark the post with a pencil to areas
requiring preparation.

2. Prepare the post in areas marked using a high-speed

handpiece, aggressive carbide bur and irrigation. Prepare margins
to 1 mm subgingival or according to fixed prosthodontic principles,
following the gingival contours. The post can be prepared intraorally
or removed and placed on a Laboratory Abutment Holder (ILTAH57,
LTAH5, LTAH7).

3. Once abutment preparation is complete, replace the try-in

screw with a:

Certain Gold-Tite® Hexed Screw (IUNIHG) torqued to 20 Ncm

using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a
torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

Or

Gold-Tite Square Screw (UNISG) torqued to 32-35 Ncm using

Straight Pre-Angled
the Square Driver Tip (RASQ3N or RASQ8N) with a torque device
(L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

35
 Cement-Retained
GingiHue Post - Direct Technique (Cont’d)
®

4. Place protective material into the screw access opening. Seal

the access opening with temporary filling material. Place a retraction
cord subgingivally to retract the gingiva from the margin prepared on
the GingiHue Post. Syringe light viscosity impression material around
the abutment post. Load the impression tray with medium or heavy
viscosity impression material and seat it in the mouth. Allow the
impression material to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

NOTE: Placing a retraction cord around implant abutments is

typically more difficult than placing a retraction cord around
natural teeth.

5. Remove the impression. Verify the marginal integrity of

the impression.

6. Fabricate a provisional crown on the GingiHue Post using

conventional fixed prosthodontic techniques and materials. Block out
the screw access opening with wax prior to cementing the crown.

Laboratory
7. Pour the cast in die stone, pin, section and a­ rticulate with the
opposing cast.

36
 Cement-Retained
GingiHue Post - Direct Technique (Cont’d)
®

8. Wax the crown coping on the die. Invest, burnout and cast the
coping in a low, medium or high noble alloy. Opaque, build porcelain,
stain and glaze the crown.

Restorative Dentist
9. Remove the provisional crown from the GingiHue Post and
remove all cement. Try the crown on the abutment and check the
interproximal contacts, marginal fit and occlusion. Cement the crown
to the post using temporary or permanent cement. Remove any
excess cement.

37
 Cement-Retained
UCLA Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique
Material: Indications:
Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder • Single and multiple-unit cement-retained restorations
With Plastic Unitube • Laboratory fabricated custom abutments
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited
• Maximum angulation correction of 30°

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Deactivate the fingers of the Certain® Hexed Gold UCLA
Cylinder using the Certain QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5).
Place the proper diameter cylinder into the implant analog.
Or
Place the proper diameter Hexed Gold UCLA Cylinder or Hexed
Castable UCLA Cylinder onto the implant analog, engaging the hex.

Thread a Try-in Screw (MUNITS, IUNITS or UNITS)

or Waxing Screw (IWSU30 or WSU30) into the implant analog
and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N). Reduce or adjust the plastic sleeve as necessary. Add
wax to the waxing sleeve to form the custom abutment with ideal
emergence, a­ ngulation and crown margins.

3. Carefully remove the waxed custom abutment from the

implant analog. Invest, burnout and cast the ­custom abutment using
a low, medium or high noble alloy (see page 8 for casting alloy
­specifications). Chemically divest and finish the custom abutment.
Polish the Hexed Gold UCLA Cylinder and entire subgingival portions
of the abutment with a polishing protector in place.

4. Place the finished custom abutment back onto the implant

analog in the cast, thread a try-in screw into the implant analog
and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N). Cover the access opening with wax. Wax the porcelain-
fused-to-metal (PFM) crown coping on the custom abutment.
Invest, burnout and cast the coping in a low, medium or high noble
alloy. Opaque, build porcelain, stain and glaze the crown. Similar
procedures can be used for all-metal implant restorations.

38
 Cement-Retained
UCLA Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
5. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the fingers of the custom-made UCLA Abutment using

the Certain® QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the
custom abutment into the implant, line up the hex and press firmly
until hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click. Thread a Certain
Gold-Tite® Hexed Screw (IUNIHG) into the implant and finger-
tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).
To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver.

Or

Place the custom abutment onto the implant, engaging the hex.
Thread a Gold-Tite Square Screw (UNISG) into the implant and
finger-tighten using a Square Driver (PSQD0N or PSQD1N).
To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver.

Radiograph the interface to verify an accurate fit.

NOTE: The abutment should be placed in the same position as

it was prepared on the cast. A dimple on the facial surface guides
clinicians with accurate placement.

6. Try the crown on the custom abutment. Check the

interproximal contacts, marginal fit and occlusion. Remove the crown.

Torque the Certain screw to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver
Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C).

Or

Torque the square screw to 32-35 Ncm using the Square Driver
Tip (RASQ3N or RASQ8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C).

Place protective material into the screw access opening. Seal the
access opening with temporary filling material. Cement the crown
to the custom abutment using temporary or permanent cement.
Remove any excess cement.

39
 Cement-Retained
UCLA Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique
See page 38 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Deactivate the fingers of the Certain® Hexed Gold UCLA
Cylinders using the Certain QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5).
Place the proper diameter cylinders into the implant analogs.
Or
Place the proper diameter Hexed Gold or Hexed Castable UCLA
Cylinders onto the implant analogs, engaging the hex.

Thread Try-in Screws (MUNITS, ILRGHT or UNITS) or

Waxing Screws (IWSU30 or WSU30) into the implant analogs
and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N). Reduce or adjust the plastic sleeves as necessary. Add
wax to the waxing sleeves to form the custom abutments with ideal
emergence, angulation, parallelism and crown margins.

3. Carefully remove the wax custom abutments from the

implant analogs. Invest, burnout and cast the custom abutments
using a low, medium or high noble alloy (see page 8 for casting alloy
specifications). Chemically divest and finish the custom abutments.
Polish the cylinders and entire subgingival portions of the abutments
with polishing protectors in place.

4. Place the finished custom abutments back onto the implant

analogs in the cast, thread try-in screws into the implant analogs
and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N
or PHD03N). Cover the access openings with wax. Wax the
framework on the custom abutments. Invest, burnout and cast the
framework in a low, medium or high noble alloy. Return to the
restorative dentist for the metal framework try in.

40
 Cement-Retained
UCLA Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist (framework try in)

5. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the Certain® Hexed Gold UCLA Cylinder fingers using

the Certain QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the custom
abutments into the implants, line up the hex and press firmly until
hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click.

Or

Place the custom abutments onto the implants, engaging the hex.

Thread a try-in screw into each abutment and finger-tighten

using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help
­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of
the driver.

6. Radiograph the interfaces to verify an accurate fit. Place the

framework on the custom abutments and verify a complete fit.
A complete fit is indicated with the framework accurately fitting the
margins of the abutments. Radiographs are sometimes necessary with
subgingival margins. Cut and index the framework intraorally if a fit
discrepancy is found. Immediately replace the healing abutments back
onto the implants.

NOTE: The abutments should be placed in the same position as

they were prepared on the cast. A dimple on the facial surface
guides clinicians with accurate placement.

Return the framework to the laboratory for soldering or

welding. Another framework try in may be necessary to
verify a complete fit.

Laboratory
7. Place the custom abutments back onto the implant analogs
in the cast and attach them using try-in screws. Opaque and build
porcelain on the framework. Stain and glaze the porcelain.

41
 Cement-Retained
UCLA Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
8. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the Hexed Gold UCLA Cylinder fingers using the

Certain® QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the custom
abutments into the implants, line up the hex and press firmly until
hearing and feeling an audible and tactile click. Thread a Certain
Gold-Tite® Hexed Screw (IUNIHG) and finger-tighten using the
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help prevent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Or

Place the custom abutments onto the implants, engaging the hex.
Thread Gold-Tite Square Screws (UNISG) into the implants and
finger-tighten using a Square Driver (PSQD0N or PSQD1N).
To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver.

Radiograph the interface to verify an accurate fit.

NOTE: The abutments should be placed in the same position as

they were prepared on the cast. A dimple on the facial surface
guides clinicians with accurate placement.

9. Try the prosthesis onto the custom abutments. Check the

interproximal contacts, marginal fit and occlusion.

Torque the Certain screws to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex

Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW,
CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

Or

Torque the square screws to 32-35 Ncm using the Square Driver
Tip (RASQ3N or RASQ8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C).

10. Place protective material into the screw access openings.

Seal the access openings with temporary filling material and
composite resin. Cement the prosthesis to the abutments using
temporary or permanent cement. Remove any excess cement.
Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

NOTE: The prosthesis should be polished outside of the mouth

prior to cementation.

42
 Screw-Retained
UCLA Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique
Material: Indications:
Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder • S ingle and multiple-unit screw-retained restorations
With Plastic Unitube • Minimum interarch space of 4 mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Deactivate the fingers of the Certain® Hexed Gold UCLA
Cylinder using the Certain QuickSeat® Activator Tool (see page 5).
Place the proper diameter cylinder into the implant analog.

Or

Place the proper diameter Hexed Gold UCLA Cylinder or Hexed

Castable UCLA Cylinder onto the implant analog, engaging the hex.

Thread a Try-in Screw (MUNITS, IUNITS or UNITS)

or Waxing Screw (IWSU30 or WSU30) into the implant analog
and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N). Reduce or adjust the plastic sleeve as necessary. Add wax
to the waxing sleeve to form the custom metal framework contours.

3. Remove the try-in or waxing screw and carefully remove the

waxed framework from the analog. Invest, burnout and cast the
framework using a low, medium or high noble alloy (see page 8 for
casting alloy ­specifications). Chemically divest and finish the
metal framework.

43
 Screw-Retained
UCLA Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

4. Place the metal framework back onto the ­analog in the cast,
and thread a try-in or waxing screw into the analog and finger-tighten.
Opaque and build ­porcelain on the metal framework. Stain and
glaze the porcelain. Polish the Gold UCLA Cylinder with a polishing
protector in place.

Restorative Dentist
5. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Activate the UCLA Abutment fingers using the Certain®

QuickSeat Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the crown into the
®

implant, line up the hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an
audible and tactile click. Thread a Certain Gold-Tite® Hexed Screw
(IUNIHG) into the implant and finger-tighten using a .048” Large
Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).

Or

Place the crown onto the implant, engaging the hex. Thread a
Gold-Tite Square Screw (UNISG) into the implant and finger-tighten
using a Square Driver (PSQD0N or PSQD1N). To help ­prevent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Radiograph the interface to verify an accurate fit. Adjust the

occlusion, marginal fit and interproximal contacts as necessary.

6. Torque the Certain screw to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex

Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW,
CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

Or

Torque the square screw to 32-35 Ncm using a Square Driver

Tip (RASQ3N or RASQ8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C).

7. Place protective material into the screw access opening.

Seal the access opening with temporary filling material and
composite resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

44
 Screw-Retained
UCLA Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique
See page 43 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for implant level impressions on pages 10-12
for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist Lock™
Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Place the proper diameter Non-Hexed Gold UCLA Cylinder or
Non-Hexed Castable UCLA Clylinder into the implant analogs.

Thread Certain® Large Titanium Hexed Screws (ILRGHT) or

Waxing Screw (IWSU30) into the implant analogs and finger-tighten
using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).

Or

Thread Try-in Screws (MUNITS or UNITS) or Waxing Screws

(WSU30) into the implant analogs and finger-tighten using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).

Reduce or adjust the plastic sleeves as necessary. Wax the

framework to the waxing sleeves.

3. Remove the try-in or waxing screws and then carefully

remove the wax framework from the implant analogs. Invest,
burnout and cast the porcelain-fused-to-metal (PFM) framework
using a low, medium or high noble alloy (see page 8 for casting alloy
specifications). Chemically divest and finish the framework. Return to
the restorative dentist for the metal framework try in.

Restorative Dentist - One Screw Test

4. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the framework onto the implants. Place a try-in screw into the
anterior-most abutment and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex
Driver. Radiograph the interfaces of the implants/abutments. The
framework fits completely if no space is visible between the seating
surface of the frameworks and implants. Remove the anterior screw
and repeat this procedure on the posterior implant. Take a new
radiograph and evaluate it for implant/framework fit. If there is a misfit,
section the framework into individual pieces (extraorally), place all of
the segments back onto the implants with try-in screws and index/
splint the individual segments together with autopolymerizing resin
or plaster. Return the framework to the laboratory for soldering or
welding. Repeat the metal framework try in to make sure that an
accurate and complete fit has been obtained post soldering/welding.
Immediately replace the healing abutments back onto the implants.

45
 Screw-Retained
UCLA Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

Laboratory
5. Place the verified metal framework back onto the implant
analogs in the cast and thread try-in or waxing screws into the
implant analogs and finger-tighten. Opaque and build porcelain on
the framework. Stain and glaze the porcelain. Polish the Gold UCLA
Cylinders with polishing protectors in place.

Restorative Dentist
6. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the prosthesis onto the implants.

Thread Certain® Gold-Tite® Large Hexed Screws (ILRGHG)

into the implants and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Or

Thread Gold-Tite Square Screws (UNISG) into the implants and

finger-tighten using a Square Driver (PSQD0N or PSQD1N). To help
­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of
the driver.

Radiograph the interface of the prosthesis on the implants to

verify an accurate fit. Adjust the interproximal occlusal contacts as
necessary. Polish and insert the definitive prosthesis.

7. Torque the Certain screws to 20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex

Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW,
CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

Or

Torque the square screws to 32-35 Ncm using the Square Driver
Tip (RASQ3N or RASQ8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C).

8. Place protective material into the screw access openings.

Seal the access openings with composite resin. Make any necessary
occlusal adjustments.

46
 Screw-Retained
Low Profile Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique
Material: Indications:
Titanium Alloy • Single and multiple-unit screw-retained restorations
• Minimum interarch space of 7.5 mm
• Minimum tissue height of 1 mm
• Angle correction up to 30º
• E xternal hex 3.4 mm(D) Low Profile Abutments are limited for use in the anterior

Surgeon or Restorative Dentist

1. Select the proper Low Profile Abutment by matching it to the
EP® (Emergence Profile) and the restorative platform of the healing
abutment and the implant platform diameter. Select the abutment
collar height and angle (0º, 17º or 30º) by measuring the height of the
healing abutment above the tissue on the buccal surface, not including
the domed portion. Subtract this measurement from the total height
of the healing abutment and then subtract an additional 2 mm. See
page 17 for the Abutment Selection Guide.

2. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a

.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help prevent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

3. Activate the abutment fingers using the Certain® QuickSeat®

Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the abutment into the implant,
line up the hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible
and tactile click.

Or

Place the abutment onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread a Low Profile Abutment Screw into the implant by

turning the spindle of the ASYST Tool and finger-tighten. Remove the
ASYST Tool.

If correcting an angle using the Low Profile 17° or 30° Angled

Abutment, place the abutment in or on the implant hex to correct
angulation while holding onto the delivery tool. Insert the driver tip
into the screw and finger-tighten into the implant.

4. Radiograph the interface to verify complete seating of the

NOT SEATED SEATED abutment on the implant. Place the film perpendicular to the interface
of the abutment on the implant.

47
 Screw-Retained
Low Profile Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

5. Straight Abutments: Torque the abutment screw to

20 Ncm using an Abutment Driver Tip (RASA3) with a torque device
(L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).
Or
Angled Abutments: Torque the abutment screw to
20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N)
with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

If the surgeon places the abutment, a Low Profile Abutment Healing

Cap (LPCHC) is threaded onto the abutment and finger-tightened
using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help
­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of
the driver.

Restorative Dentist
6. Follow the steps for abutment level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

NOTE: Low Profile Abutment Impression Copings do not require

activation, as there are no fingers on the copings.

Laboratory
7. Place a Low Profile Abutment Hexed Gold Cylinder or Hexed
Castable Cylinder onto the Low Profile Abutment Analog. Thread
a Low Profile Titanium Retaining Screw (LPCTSH) or Low Profile
Waxing Screw (LPCWS) into the implant analog and finger-tighten
using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Reduce or
adjust the plastic sleeve as necessary. Wax the porcelain-fused-to-
metal framework (PFM) to the waxing sleeve.

8. Remove the retaining or waxing screw and then carefully

remove the wax framework from the analog. Invest, burnout and cast
the framework using a low, medium or high noble alloy (see page 8
for casting alloy specifications). Chemically divest and finish
the restoration.

48
 Screw-Retained
Low Profile Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

9. Place the metal framework back onto the ­analog in the cast,
and thread a Low Profile Titanium Retaining Screw (LPCTSH) or Low
Profile Waxing Screw (LPCWS) into the analog and finger-tighten
using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Opaque
and build ­porcelain on the metal framework. Stain and glaze the
porcelain. Polish the Gold UCLA Cylinder with a polishing
protector in place.

Restorative Dentist
10. Remove the healing cap from the abutment using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the crown on the abutment, engaging the hex. Thread a Low
Profile Gold-Tite® Retaining Screw (LPCGSH) into the abutment
and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver. Radiograph
the interface to verify an accurate fit. Check the interproximal
and occlusal contacts. Torque the screw to 10 Ncm using a .048”
Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device
(L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

11. Place protective material into the screw access opening.

Seal the access opening with temporary filling material and
composite resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

49
 Screw-Retained
Low Profile Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique

See page 47 for indications and material.

Surgeon or Restorative Dentist
1. Select the proper Low Profile Abutment by matching it to the
EP® (Emergence Profile) and the restorative platform of the healing
abutment and the implant platform diameter. Select the abutment
collar height and angle (0º, 17º or 30º) by measuring the height of the
healing abutment above the tissue on the buccal surface, not including
the domed portion. Subtract this measurement from the total height
of the healing abutment and then subtract an additional 2 mm. See
page 17 for the Abutment Selection Guide.

2. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a

.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help prevent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

3. Activate the abutment fingers using the Certain® QuickSeat®

Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the abutment into the implant, line
up the hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible and
tactile click.
Or
Place the abutment onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread an abutment screw into the implant by turning the

spindle on the ASYST Tool and finger-tighten. Remove the
ASYST Tool.

If correcting an angle using the Low Profile 17° or 30° Angled

Abutment, place the abutment in or on the implant hex to correct
SEATED NOT SEATED angulation while holding onto the delivery tool. Insert the driver tip
into the abutment screw and finger-tighten into the implant.

4. Radiograph the interface to verify complete seating of the

abutment on the implant. Place the film perpendicular to the interface
of the abutment on the implant.

50
 Screw-Retained
Low Profile Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

5. Straight Abutments: Torque the abutment screws to

20 Ncm using an Abutment Driver Tip (RASA3) with a torque device
(L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

Or

Angled Abutments: Torque the abutment screws to

20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N)
with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).
If the surgeon places the abutments, a Low Profile Abutment Healing
Cap (LPCHC) is threaded onto the abutments and finger-tightened
using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help
­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of
the driver.

Restorative Dentist
6. Follow the steps for abutment level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

NOTE: Low Profile Abutment Impression Copings do not require

activation, as there are no fingers on the copings.

Laboratory
7. Place a Non-Hexed Low Profile Gold Cylinder or Non-Hexed
Castable Cylinder onto the Low Profile Analogs. Thread Low Profile
Titanium Retaining Screws (LPCTSH) or Low Profile Waxing Screws
(LPCWS) into the implant analogs and finger-tighten using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Reduce or adjust the
plastic sleeves as necessary. Wax the porcelain-fused-to-metal (PFM)
framework to the waxing sleeves.

8. Remove the retaining or waxing screw and then carefully

remove the wax framework from the analogs. Invest, burnout and
cast the framework using a low, medium or high noble alloy (see
page 8 for casting alloy specifications). Chemically divest and finish
the metal framework. Return to the restorative dentist for the metal
framework try in.

51
 Screw-Retained
Low Profile Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
9. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the framework onto the abutments. Thread a Low Profile Gold-
Tite Retaining Screw (LPCGSH) into the posterior-most abutment
®

and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver. Radiograph the
interface to verify an accurate fit. Repeat after removing the screw
and placing it into the anterior-most abutment. If the framework
does not fit the abutments; cut and index the framework. Return the
framework to the laboratory for soldering or welding. Repeat the
metal framework try in to make sure an accurate and complete fit
is obtained. Take another radiograph to access the fit between the
framework and abutments. Immediately replace the healing caps back
onto the abutments.

Laboratory
10. Place the verified framework back onto the analogs in the
cast and thread Low Profile Titanium Retaining Screws (LPCTSH)
or Low Profile Abutment Waxing Screws (LPCWS) into the implant
analogs and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N
or PHD03N). Opaque and build porcelain on the framework. Stain
and glaze the porcelain. Polish the Gold Cylinders with polishing
protectors in place.

Restorative Dentist
11. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent accidental
swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Place
the prosthesis onto the abutments. Thread Low Profile Gold-Tite
Retaining Screws (LPCGSH) into the abutments and finger-tighten
using the .048” Large Hex Driver. Radiograph the interface on the
abutments to verify an accurate fit. Verify the interproximal contacts
and the occlusion. Torque the screws to 10 Ncm using a .048” Large
Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW,
RTI2035, HTD-C). Place protective material into the screw access
openings. Seal the access openings with temporary filling material and
composite resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

52

Conical Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique
Material:
Titanium Alloy (Certain Straight
®
Abutments and all 15º Pre-Angled
Abutments)
Commercially Pure Titanium (External
Hex Straight Abutments)
Screw-Retained
Indications:
• Single and multiple-unit porcelain-fused-to-metal, screw-retained restorations
• Minimum interarch space of 7 mm
• Minimum tissue height of 2 mm
• Angle correction up to 25º

Surgeon or Restorative Dentist

1. Select the proper Conical Abutment by matching it to the
EP® (Emergence Profile) and the restorative platform of the healing
abutment and the implant platform diameter. Select the abutment
collar height and angle (0º, 17º or 30º) by measuring the height of the
healing abutment above the tissue on the buccal surface, not including
the domed portion. Subtract this measurement from the total height
of the healing abutment and then subtract an additional 2 mm. See
page 17 for the Abutment Selection Guide.

2. Remove the healing abutment from the implant using a

.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help prevent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

3. Activate the abutment fingers using the Certain® QuickSeat®

Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the abutment into the implant, line
up the hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible and
tactile click.

Or

Place the abutment onto the implant, engaging the hex.

Thread the Conical Abutment Screw into the implant by

turning the spindle on the ASYST Tool and finger-tighten. Remove the
ASYST Tool.

If correcting an angle using a Conical 17° or 25° Angled Abutment,

place the abutment in or on the implant hex to correct angulation
while holding onto the delivery tool. Insert the driver tip into the
NOT
SEATED
SEATED
abutment screw and finger-tighten into the implant.

4. Radiograph the interface to verify complete seating of the

abutment on the implant. Place the film perpendicular to the interface
of the abutment on the implant.

53
 Screw-Retained
Conical Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

5. Straight Abutments: Torque the abutment screw to

20 Ncm using an Abutment Driver Tip (RASA3) with a torque device
(L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

Or

Angled Abutments: Torque the abutment screw to

20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N)
with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

If the surgeon places the abutment, a Conical Abutment Healing

Cap (MHC33 or CS2x0) is threaded onto the abutment and finger-
tightened using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).
To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver.

Restorative Dentist
6. Follow the steps for abutment level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

NOTE: Conical Abutment Impression Copings do not require

activation, as there are no fingers on the copings.

Laboratory
7. Place a Gold Hexed Conical Cylinder onto the ­Conical Analog.
Thread a Titanium Hexed Retaining Screw (TSH30) or Waxing Screw
(WSU30, WSK10 or WSK15) into the analog and finger-tighten using
a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Reduce or adjust
the plastic sleeve as necessary. Wax the porcelain-fused-to-metal
framework (PFM) to the waxing sleeve.

8. Remove the retaining or waxing screw and then carefully

remove the waxed framework from the analog. Invest, burnout and
cast the waxed framework using a low, medium or high noble alloy
(see page 8 for casting alloy specifications). Chemically divest and
finish the restoration.

54
 Screw-Retained
Conical Abutment - Single-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

9. Place the metal framework onto the analog in the cast, thread
the retaining or waxing screw into the analog and finger-tighten.
Opaque and build porcelain on the metal framework. Stain and glaze
the porcelain. Polish the Gold Castable Cylinder with a polishing
protector in place.

Restorative Dentist
10. Remove the healing cap from the abutment using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the crown on the abutment, engaging the hex. Thread a Hexed
Gold-Tite® Retaining Screw (GSHx0) into the abutment and finger-
tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver. Radiograph the interface to
verify an accurate fit. Check the interproximal contacts, marginal fit
and occlusion. Torque the screw to 10 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex
Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW,
CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

11. Place protective material into the screw access opening.

Seal the access opening with temporary filling material and
composite resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

55
 Screw-Retained
Conical Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique

See page 53 for indications and material.

Surgeon or Restorative Dentist
1. Select the proper Conical Abutment by matching it to the
EP® (Emergence Profile) and the restorative platform of the healing
abutment and the implant platform diameter. Select the abutment
collar height and angle (0º, 17º or 30º) by measuring the height of the
healing abutment above the tissue on the buccal surface, not including
the domed portion. Subtract this measurement from the total height
of the healing abutment and then subtract an additional 2 mm. See
page 17 for the Abutment Selection Guide.

2. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a

.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

3. Activate the abutment fingers using the Certain® QuickSeat ®

Activator Tool (see page 5). Place the abutments into the implants,
line up the hex and press firmly until hearing and feeling an audible
and tactile click.

Or

Place the abutment onto the implants, engaging the hex.

Thread Conical Abutment Screws into the implants by turning

the spindle on the ASYST Tool and finger-tighten. Remove the
ASYST Tool.

SEATED NOT SEATED If correcting an angle using the Conical 17° or 25° Angled Abutment,
place the abutment in or on the implant hex to correct angulation
while holding onto the delivery tool. Insert the driver tip into the
abutment screw and finger-tighten into the implant.

4. Radiograph the interfaces to verify complete ­seating of the

abutments on all of the implants. Place the film perpendicular to the
interface of the abutments on the implants.

56
 Screw-Retained
Conical Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

5. Straight Abutments: Torque the abutment screws to

20 Ncm using an Abutment Driver Tip (RASA3) with a torque
device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

Or

Angled Abutments: Torque the abutment screws to

20 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N)
with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).
If the surgeon places the abutments, a Conical Abutment Healing
Cap (MHC33 or CS2x0) is threaded onto the abutments and
finger-tightened using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the spinner of the driver.

Restorative Dentist
6. Follow the steps for abutment level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

NOTE: Conical Abutment Impression Copings do not require

activation, as there are no fingers on the copings.

Laboratory
7. Place the Non-Hexed Conical Gold Cylinders onto the
Conical Analogs. Thread Titanium Hexed Retaining Screws (TSH30)
or Waxing Screws (WSK10 or WSK15) into the analogs and finger-
tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).
Reduce or adjust the plastic sleeves as necessary. Wax the porcelain-
fused-to-metal (PFM) framework to the waxing sleeves.

8. Remove the retaining or waxing screws and then carefully

remove the wax framework from the analogs. Invest, burnout and
cast the framework using a low, medium or high noble alloy (see
page 8 for casting alloy specifications). Chemically divest and finish
the metal framework. Return to the restorative dentist for the metal
framework try in.

57
 Screw-Retained
Conical Abutment - Multiple-Unit - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
9. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the framework onto the abutments. Thread a Hexed Gold-
Tite® Retaining Screw (GSHx0) into the posterior-most a­ butment
using the .048” Large Hex Driver. Radiograph the i­nterface to verify
an accurate fit. Repeat after removing the screw and placing it into the
anterior-most ­abutment. If the framework does not fit the abutments;
cut and index the framework. Return the framework to the
laboratory for soldering or welding. Repeat the metal framework try
in to make sure an accurate is obtained. Take additional radiographs
as necessary to verify an accurate fit. Immediately replace the healing
caps back onto the abutments.

Laboratory
10. Place the verified framework back onto the Conical Analogs
in the cast, thread retaining or waxing screws into the analogs and
finger-tighten. Opaque and build porcelain on the framework. Stain
and glaze the porcelain. Polish the Gold Cylinders with polishing
protectors in place.

Restorative Dentist
11. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the prosthesis onto the abutments. Thread Hexed Gold-Tite
Retaining Screws (GSHx0) into the abutments and finger-tighten
using the .048” Large Hex Driver. Radiograph the interface to verify
an accurate fit. Verify the interproximal contacts and the occlusion.
Torque the screws to 10 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip
(RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C). Place protective material into the screw access
openings. Seal the access openings with temporary filling material and
composite resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

58
 Denture Conversion To Fixed Prosthesis
QuickBridge Provisional Components - Direct Technique
®

Restorative Dentist
1. Prior to placing the abutments, make an interocclusal
registration with the patient in centric occlusion. This is made with the
patient’s existing denture.

NOTE: One piece interocclusal registrations (one U-shaped

interocclusal record) are easier to handle than two individual
(right and left segments) interocclusal registrations. Two
interocclusal registrations can be mixed up (right and left; up and
down). One piece interocclusal registrations are much easier to
align correctly in the mouth.

2. The Low Profile Abutments should be torqued to 20 Ncm

using an Abutment Driver Tip (RASA3) with a torque device (L-TIRW,
CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place a QuickBridge Titanium Cylinder
onto each of the abutments and finger-tighten the QuickBridge
Screws using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).
To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver. Torque the cylinder retaining screws to 10 Ncm
using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a
torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place quick-
setting impression material onto the intaglio surface of the denture,
insert it in the mouth and press lightly over the cylinder assembly to
mark their locations. Allow the impression material to set per the
manufacturer’s instructions. The patient should be in centric occlusion
during this step; the midline should be consistent with the facial
midline; the occlusal plane should be horizontal.

3. Remove the denture from the mouth. The locations of

the cylinders will be identified in the impression material. Using
the indentation in the impression material as a guide, drill holes
completely through the denture base and denture teeth with a
large round bur. Enlarge the holes with an acrylic bur so that the
QuickBridge Components do not interfere with the denture base
when the denture is seated intraorally. Make sure the vertical
dimension of occlusion has not been changed.

59
 Denture Conversion To Fixed Prosthesis
QuickBridge Provisional Components - Direct Technique (Cont’d)
®

4. Snap the QuickBridge Caps onto the QuickBridge Titanium

Cylinders. Try in the denture over the QuickBridge Caps to verify
that there are no interferences when it is completely seated.
Place self-curing acrylic resin into the retention facets of the
QuickBridge Caps and fill the relieved areas of the denture with
acrylic resin. Seat the denture over the QuickBridge Caps and have
the patient close lightly into centric occlusion using the interocclusal
registration. Verify that the denture is completely seated and that
the vertical dimension of occlusion has not been changed. Allow the
acrylic resin to set per the manufacturer’s instructions. The maxillary
midline should be consistent with the facial midline.

NOTE: If this is performed immediately following implant

placement for immediate occlusal loading, cut and place a rubber
dam around the QuickBridge Titanium Cylinders prior to relining
the denture with acrylic resin.

5. Remove the denture from the mouth. The QuickBridge

Caps will remain inside the denture. Remove the palate and flanges
from the denture using an acrylic bur. Fill in any voids around the
QuickBridge Caps with self-curing acrylic resin. Be careful not to
let any resin flow into the QuickBridge Caps which will interfere
with seating over the QuickBridge Titanium Cylinders. Finish and
polish the denture. Place a small amount of temporary cement into
the QuickBridge Caps and seat the provisional prosthesis onto the
QuickBridge Titanium Cylinders. Have the patient close lightly into
centric occlusion. Remove excess cement from around the margin
areas of each cap. Allow the cement to set per the manufacturer’s
instructions. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

60
Fabrication Of Provisional To Fixed Prosthesis
QuickBridge Provisional Restoration - Indirect Technique
®

Restorative Dentist
1. Make an impression of the patient’s existing denture and
the opposing arch. Make an occlusal registration with quick-setting
polyvinyl siloxane impression material.

Laboratory
2. Pour stone casts of the impressions. Articulate the stone casts
using the interocclusal registration.

3. Make a vacuum-formed template over the stone cast.

A 2 mm thick flexible vacuum-formed material is recommended.
Remove the template from the stone cast and trim away excess
material. Leave the palate and flanges on the template. Make an
interocclusal registration between the template and the opposing cast
using the articulator.

Restorative Dentist
4. Fill the tooth portion of the vacuum-formed template with
impression material and place it in the mouth over the Low Profile
Abutments. Have the patient close lightly into the interocclusal
registration and allow the impression material to set. Remove the
impression material from the template. Place the impression material
replica of the teeth in the mouth and verify the occlusion and tooth
position. Set aside the replica of the teeth for the laboratory to use as
a guide when fabricating the definitive restoration.

5. The Low Profile Abutments should be torqued to 20 Ncm

using an Abutment Driver Tip (RASA3) with a torque device (L-TIRW,
CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place a QuickBridge Titanium Cylinder
onto each of the abutments and finger-tighten the QuickBridge
Screws using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).
To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver. Torque the cylinder retaining screws to 10 Ncm
using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a
torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place quick-
setting impression material onto the intaglio surface of the denture,
insert it in the mouth and press lightly over the cylinder assembly to
mark their locations. Allow the impression material to set per the
manufacturer’s instructions. The patient should be in centric occlusion
during this step; the midline should be consistent with the facial
midline; the occlusal plane should be horizontal.

61
 Fabrication Of Provisional To Fixed Prosthesis
QuickBridge Provisional Restoration - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

6. Add self-curing acrylic resin into the retention facets of the

QuickBridge Caps and into the tooth portion of the template. Place
the template into the mouth over the QuickBridge Caps and have the
patient close lightly into the interocclusal registration. Allow the acrylic
resin to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

NOTE: Irrigate with water during polymerization. Be aware of

the amount of heat generated by the acrylic resin during setting
and polymerization.

7. Remove the template from the mouth. The caps will remain in
the acrylic resin. Be careful to not let any resin flow into the caps that
will interfere with seating over the cylinders. Remove the provisional
prosthesis from the template. Remove the excess acrylic resin from
around the margin areas and fill in any voids. Finish the provisional
restoration to the desired contour and polish.

8. Place the provisional restoration into the mouth and snap

the caps onto the cylinders. Verify the fit and aesthetics. Make any
necessary occlusal adjustments. Remove the provisional restoration.
Place a small amount of temporary cement into the caps and seat
the provisional prosthesis on the cylinders and have the patient close
lightly into occlusion. Remove excess cement from around the margin
areas of each cap. Allow the cement to set per the manufacturer’s
instructions. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments.

NOTE: If this is performed immediately following implant

placement for immediate occlusal loading, cut and place a rubber
dam around the cylinders.

62
 Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar
Material: Indications:
Titanium Alloy • Multiple implant, bar-retained and removable overdentures
Commercially Pure Titanium • Minimum space for bar construction is 9-11 mm
• Maximum divergence of 30°

Surgeon or Restorative Dentist

1. Select the proper Standard Abutment collar height by
measuring the height of the healing abutment above the tissue on
the buccal surface, not including the domed portion. Subtract this
measurement from the total height of the healing abutment and then
add 1 mm. The Standard Abutment seating surface should match the
implant platform. See page 17 for the Abutment Selection Guide.

2. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a

.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

3. Place the Standard Abutment into the implant, thread into place
and finger-tighten.

Or

Place the Standard Abutment onto the implant engaging the hex,
thread the Standard Abutment Screw into the implant by turning the
spindle on the ASYST Tool and finger-tighten. Remove the
ASYST Tool.

4. Radiograph the interfaces to verify complete ­seating of the

abutments on all of the implants. Place the film perpendicular to the
SEATED NOT SEATED
interface of the abutment on the implant.

63
Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

5. Torque the Standard Abutment Screws into the implants to

20 Ncm using an Abutment Driver Tip (RASA3) with a torque
device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). If the surgeon places
the abutments, Standard Abutment Healing Caps are threaded
onto the abutments using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N
or PHD03N). To help p­ revent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the spinner of the driver. The patient’s existing denture
is then relieved to be supported by the abutments. A tissue
conditioning material is sometimes necessary for retention and
support of the overdenture. The healing caps are not designed to
provide retention for the overdenture.

Pick-Up Impression Technique

(See page 66 for Transfer Impression Technique)

Restorative Dentist Pick-Up Technique

6a. Place the Standard Abutment Pick-Up Impression Copings
onto the abutments. Thread coping screws into the abutments
and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the spinner of the driver. Visually verify all copings are
completely seated on the abutments. Impression copings may be
splinted prior to the definitive impression. Radiograph the interface to
verify complete s­ eating of the copings on the abutments.

7a. A custom or stock open top impression tray is used for the
Pick-Up Impression Technique. Cut small holes into the tray for the
screws to protrude through. Try in the tray to verify that the screw
heads are visible through the openings.

NOTE: If the impression is to be used to fabricate the

overdenture, a custom impression tray should be made.

8a. Syringe light viscosity impression material around the

impression copings.

64
Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

9a. Load the impression tray with medium or heavy viscosity

impression material and seat it in the mouth. Wipe impression
material off the top of the screws before it sets. Allow the
impression material to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

10a. After the impression material has set, unscrew and remove
the Pick-Up Impression Coping Screws using the .048” Large
Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental
swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Remove
the impression from the mouth.

11a. Verify that the impression material has completely adapted

around each of the copings and that the copings are not mobile
within the impression. If any copings are loose or the impression
material is on the seating surface of the copings, the impression
should be repeated.

12a. Immediately replace the healing caps back onto the

abutments using the .048” Large Hex Driver using the .048” Large
Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental
swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Reline
the patient’s existing denture with a soft reline material over the
abutments and healing caps.

65
Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

Laboratory
13a. Place the Standard Abutment Laboratory Analogs into the
impression copings and hold them in position while t­ightening the
screws. Verify that the analogs are completely seated.

NOTE: In some cases, it may be necessary to place soft-tissue

replication material around the impression coping/analogs
prior to pouring the stone cast. Check with your laboratory for
specific procedures.

14a. Pour the cast in die stone. After the stone has set, loosen the
screws until these disengage from the analogs using a .048” Large
Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Remove the impression from
the stone cast. Go to Step 15.

Transfer Impression Technique

Restorative Dentist
6b. Thread Standard Abutment Transfer Copings into the
abutments and finger-tighten using a Transfer Impression Coping
Driver (ICD00). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss
through the spinner of the driver. Visually verify that all copings are
completely seated on the abutments.

7b. A custom or stock closed top impression tray is used for the
transfer impression technique. Allow for approximately 2 mm of
space between the tray and the top of the copings. The copings are
9 mm in height.

NOTE: If the impression is to be used to fabricate the

overdenture, a custom impression tray should be made.

66
Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

8b. Syringe light viscosity impression material around the

impression copings. Allow the impression material to set per the
manufacturer’s instructions.

9b. Load the impression tray with medium or heavy viscosity

impression material and seat it in the mouth. Allow the impression
material to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

10b. After the impression material has set, remove the impression
from the mouth. The transfer impression copings will remain on
the abutments in the mouth. Verify that the material has completely
adapted around each of the copings.

11b. Remove the copings from the abutments with an Impression

Coping Driver (ICD00). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

67
Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

12b. Immediately replace the healing caps back onto the

abutments using the .048” Large Hex Driver using the .048” Large
Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental
swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Reline
the patient’s existing denture with a soft reline material over the
abutments and healing caps.

Laboratory
13b. Screw the Transfer Impression Copings onto the Standard
Abutment Analogs and verify that these are completely seated.
Holding on to the analog, press each transfer coping firmly into the
impression. The coping is completely seated when the retentive
groove engages.

14b. Pour the cast in die stone. After the stone has set, remove
the impression from the cast. Unscrew the Transfer Impression
Copings from the analogs. Go to Step 15.

NOTE: In some cases, it may be necessary to place soft-tissue

replication material around the impression coping/analogs
prior to pouring the stone cast. Check with your laboratory for
specific procedures.

15. Place the Standard Abutment Gold Cylinder or Non-Hexed

Castable Cylinders onto the Standard Abutment Analogs. Thread
Waxing Screws (WSK10 or WSK15) into the analogs and finger-
tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N).
Non-Hexed Pick-up Impression Copings may also be used for
this step. Fabricate a ­verification index by luting the plastic sleeves
together using a low expansion light cure composite resin or
autopolymerizing acrylic resin. It is often helpful to fabricate a record
base and occlusion rim at this step to facilitate jaw relation records.

NOTE: If using autopolymerizing acrylic resin, allow at least 24

hours to polymerize prior to using.

68
Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
16. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the record base and occlusion rim in the mouth, over the
abutments. Make the ­interocclusal records. Place the verification
index onto the abutments. Place a Hexed Gold-Tite® Retaining
Screw (GSHx0) or Waxing Screw (WSK10 or WSK15) into one
posterior-most cylinder and finger-tighten. Visually ­verify that all
cylinders are completely seated on the a­ butments. Remove the
screw and place it into the opposite posterior-most c­ ylinder and
repeat. If a fit d­ iscrepancy is found, section the index into individual
segments and reassemble intraorally. Splint the segments together
with autopolymerizing acrylic resin and allow it to set. Remove the
index and return it to the laboratory for re-fitting of the master cast.
Immediately replace the healing caps back onto the abutments.

Laboratory
17. Verify that the analog positions on the cast are accurate using
a verification index. Articulate casts using the interocclusal record.
Set the denture teeth on the record base and wax for try in. If the
verification index was corrected, the corrected index is used to
identify inaccurate analogs in the cast. Take this index back to the
cast and identify the inaccurate analog(s). Remove the inaccurate
analog(s) from the cast and attach it to the verification index. Re-seat
the index on the other remaining analogs into the cast. Verify that
the analogs does not touch the stone of the cast. Inject a mix of die
stone to re-attach the analogs back into the cast.

Restorative Dentist
18. Place the wax denture into the mouth. Verify the occlusion,
aesthetics and phonetics. Make any necessary adjustments. If major
adjustments are necessary, make a new interocclusal record and
return it to the laboratory for a new articulator mounting, wax
denture set-up and try in.

Laboratory
19. For a cast bar, make a plaster or silicone matrix of the
verified wax denture. This will facilitate setting the teeth in their
proper positions after the casting has been made.

Or

If the clinician and/or laboratory technician would like to use CAD/

CAM technology, request a BellaTek® Bar. See the BellaTek Bars &
Frameworks Manual (INST868).

69
Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

20. Carefully remove the Standard Abutment Gold Cylinders or

Non-Hexed Castable Cylinders from the verification index. Place
the cylinders onto the analogs, thread Waxing Screws ( WSK10 or
WSK15) into the analogs and finger-tighten. Adjust the height of the
sleeves as necessary. Wax the bar patterns (and ­attachments, if used)
to the waxing sleeves. Use the matrix on the cast to position the bar
within the confines of the wax denture teeth.

NOTE: Adequate space is required for the bar, attachments,

denture base and denture teeth.

21. Remove the bar wax pattern from the cast. Invest, burnout
and cast the bar in a low, medium or high noble alloy (see page 8 for
casting alloy specifications). Chemically divest, finish and polish the bar
with polishing ­protectors in place. Return the bar to the restorative
­dentist for try in and fit verification.

Restorative Dentist
22. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the bar onto the abutments. Thread a Hexed Gold-Tite®
Retaining Screw (GSHx0) into one posterior-most cylinder and
finger-tighten. Visually verify that the bar is completely seated on all
of the implants. Remove the screw and place it into the opposite
posterior-most ­cylinder and repeat. If a fit discrepancy is found,
cut and index the bar intraorally and return the framework to the
laboratory for soldering or welding. Immediately replace the healing
caps back onto the abutments.

Laboratory
23. Transfer the denture teeth back onto the cast using the matrix
and wax the denture for processing. Flask the waxed denture and boil
out. Separate the flask and attach the bar to the analogs in the cast
using retaining screws. Block out all undercuts and access openings
with wax. Place the clips and/or other attachments onto the bar.
Process and finish the denture following conventional procedures.

70
Bar-Supported Overdenture
Standard Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
24. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the bar onto the abutments. Thread Hexed Gold-Tite®
Retaining Screws (GSHx0) into the abutments and torqued to
10 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N)
with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

25. Place the overdenture onto the bar in the mouth and engage
the retentive attachments. Make any necessary occlusal or tissue
adjustments. Instruct the patient on insertion, removal, maintenance
of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

71
Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
Low Profile Abutment Fixed Hybrid

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for abutment level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Follow the steps on pages 69-70 for fabrication of the
verification index, record base and wax occlusion rim, wax try-in and
plaster or silicone matrix.

Or

If the clinician and/or laboratory technician would like to use CAD/

CAM technology, request a BellaTek® Bar. See the BellaTek Bars &
Frameworks Manual (INST868).

3. Carefully remove the Low Profile Gold Cylinders or Castable

Cylinders from the verification index. Place the cylinders onto the
analogs and attach with Low Profile Waxing Screws (LPCWS) using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Adjust the height
of the sleeves as necessary. Wax the hybrid bar pattern to the waxing
sleeves and add loops or acrylic retention features to the occlusal
surface of the wax pattern. Use the tooth matrix on the cast to
position the bar within the confines of the wax denture.

4. Remove the hybrid bar wax pattern from the cast. Invest,
burnout and cast the bar in a low, medium or high noble alloy (see
page 8 for casting alloy specifications). Chemically divest, finish and
polish the tissue surface of the bar with polishing protectors in place.
Return the bar to the restorative dentist for try in and fit verification.

72
Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
Low Profile Abutment Fixed Hybrid (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
5. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the bar onto the abutments. Thread a Low Profile Abutment
Gold-Tite® Retaining Screw (LPCGSH) into one posterior-most
cylinder and finger-tighten using the 048” Large Hex Driver. Visually
verify that the bar is completely seated on all of the implants. Remove
the screw and place it into the opposite posterior-most c­ ylinder and
repeat. If a fit discrepancy is found, cut and index the bar intraorally
and return the framework to the laboratory for soldering or welding.
Immediately replace the healing caps back onto the abutments.

Laboratory
6. Attach the bar to the Low Profile Analogs with waxing screws
using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Transfer
the denture teeth from the matrix onto the bar on the cast and wax
the hybrid prosthesis for processing. Flask the waxed ­prothesis and
boil out. Separate the flask. Opaque the bar in areas where the
acrylic resin will be processed to it. Block out all undercuts between
the framework and cast with plaster. Process and finish the hybrid
prosthesis in a conventional manner. Polishing protectors should be in
place during all finishing and polishing p­ rocedures.

NOTE: A wax/framework try in appointment may be necessary

for optimal results.

Restorative Dentist
7. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the fixed hybrid prosthesis onto the abutments. Screw the
Low Profile Gold-Tite Retaining Screws (LPCGSH) into the Low
Profile Abutments and verify fit. Adjust occlusion, remove and polish.
Replace the prosthesis and torque the screws to 10 Ncm using a
.048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque
device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place protective
material into the screw access openings. Seal the access openings
with acrylic resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments. Instruct
the patient on maintenance of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

73
 Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
Standard Abutment Fixed Hybrid

See page 59 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for abutment level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Follow the steps on pages 69-70 for fabrication of the
verification index, record base and wax occlusal rim, wax try-in and
plaster or silicone matrix.

Or

If the clinician and/or laboratory technician would like to use CAD/

CAM technology, request a BellaTek® Bar. See the BellaTek Bars &
Frameworks Manual (INST868).

3. Carefully remove the Standard Abutment Gold Cylinders or

Castable Cylinders from the verification index. Place the cylinders onto
the analogs and attach with Waxing Screws (WSK10 or WSK15) using
a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Adjust the height
of the sleeves as necessary. Wax the hybrid bar pattern to the waxing
sleeves and add loops or acrylic retention features to the occlusal
surface of the wax pattern. Use the tooth matrix on the cast to position
the bar within the confines of the wax denture.

4. Remove the hybrid bar wax pattern from the cast. Invest,
burnout and cast the bar in a low, medium or high noble alloy (see
page 8 for casting alloy specifications). Chemically divest, finish and
polish the tissue surface of the bar with polishing protectors in place.
Return the bar to the restorative dentist for try in and fit verification.

74
Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
Standard Abutment Fixed Hybrid (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
5. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the bar onto the abutments. Thread a Hexed Gold-Tite®
Retaining Screw (GSHx0) into one posterior-most cylinder and finger-
tighten using the 048” Large Hex Driver. Visually verify that the bar
is completely seated on all of the implants. Remove the screw and
place it into the opposite posterior-most c­ ylinder and repeat. If a fit
discrepancy is found, cut and index the bar intraorally and return the
framework to the laboratory for soldering or welding. Immediately
replace the healing caps back onto the abutments.

Laboratory
6. Attach the bar to the Standard Abutment Analogs with waxing
screws using a Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Transfer
the denture teeth from the matrix onto the bar on the cast and wax
the hybrid prosthesis for processing. Flask the waxed ­prothesis and
boil out. Separate the flask. Opaque the bar in areas where the
acrylic resin will be processed to it. Block out all undercuts between
the framework and cast with plaster. Process and finish the hybrid
prosthesis in a conventional manner. Polishing protectors should be in
place during all finishing and polishing p­ rocedures.

NOTE: A wax/framework try in appointment may be necessary

for optimal results.

Restorative Dentist
7. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental
swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Place the
fixed hybrid prosthesis onto the abutments. Screw the Hexed Gold-
Tite Retaining Screws (GSHx0) into the Standard Abutments using
the 048” Large Hex Driver and verify fit. Adjust occlusion, remove
and polish. Replace the prosthesis and torque the screws to 10 Ncm
using a .048” Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a
torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place protective
material into the screw access openings. Seal the access openings with
acrylic resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments. Instruct the
patient on maintenance of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

75
 Bar-Supported Overdenture
UCLA Abutment Bar
Material: Indications:
Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder • Multiple implant bar-retained and removable overdentures
With Plastic Unitube • Minimum space for bar construction is 9-11 mm
• Maximum angulation correction of 30°

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for abutment level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Place the Non-Hexed Gold UCLA Abutments or Castable
UCLA Abutments onto the implant analogs. Thread Try-in Screws
(MUNITS, ILRGHT or UNITS) or Waxing Screws (IWSU30 or
WSU30) into the implant analogs and finger-tighten using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Fabricate a v­ erification
index by luting the plastic sleeves together using a low expansion light
cure ­composite resin or autopolymerizing acrylic resin. Also, ­fabricate
a record base and occlusion rim.

Restorative Dentist
3. Place the record base and occlusion rim over the UCLA
Abutments. Make the interocclusal records. Remove the healing
abutments from the implants using a .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver. Place the verification
index onto the implants. Place a Try-in Screw (MUNITS, ILRGHT or
UNITS) or Waxing Screw (IWSU30 or WSU30) into one posterior-
most UCLA Abutment and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex
Driver. Visually verify that all cylinders are completely seated onto the
implants. Remove the screw and place it into the opposite posterior-
most UCLA Abutment and repeat. If a fit discrepancy is found, section
the index into individual segments and reassemble intraorally. Splint
the segments together with autopolymerizing acrylic resin and allow it
to set. Remove the index and return it to the laboratory for re-fitting
of the master cast. Immediately replace the healing abutments back
onto the implants.

Laboratory
4. Verify that the analog positions on the cast are accurate using
a verification index. Articulate casts using the interocclusal record.
Set the denture teeth on the record base and wax for try in. If the
verification index was corrected, the corrected index is used to
identify inaccurate analogs in the cast. Take this index back to the
cast and identify the inaccurate analog(s). Remove the inaccurate
analog(s) from the cast and attach it to the verification index. Re-seat
the index on the other remaining analogs into the cast. Verify that
the analog does not touch the stone of the cast. Inject a mix of die
stone to re-attach the analog to the cast.

76
Bar-Supported Overdenture
UCLA Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
5. Place the wax denture into the mouth. Verify the occlusion,
aesthetics and phonetics. Make any adjustments necessary. If major
adjustments are necessary, make a new interocclusal record and
return it to the laboratory for a new articulator mounting, wax
denture set-up and try in.

Laboratory
6. Make a plaster or silicone matrix of the verified wax try-in
and remove the denture teeth inside it. Wax and cast the
framework consistent with fixed and removable prosthodontic
design parameters.
Or

If the clinician and/or laboratory technician would like to use CAD/

CAM technology, request a BellaTek® Bar. See the BellaTek Bars &
Frameworks Manual (INST868).

7. Carefully remove the UCLA Abutments from the verification

index. Place the UCLA Abutments onto the implant analogs. Thread
­waxing screws into the implant analogs and finger-tighten using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Adjust the height
of the sleeves as necessary. Wax the bar patterns (and attachments,
if used) to the waxing sleeves. Use the matrix on the cast to position
the bar within the confines of the wax try-in.

NOTE: Adequate space (9-11 mm) is required for the implant

restorative components, denture base and denture teeth.

8. Remove the bar wax-up from the cast. Invest, burnout and
cast the bar in a low, medium or high noble alloy (see page 8 for
casting alloy ­specifications). Chemically divest, finish and polish the bar
with ­polishing protectors in place. Return the bar to the restorative
dentist for try in and fit verification.

77
Bar-Supported Overdenture
UCLA Abutment Bar (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
9. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the bar onto the implants. Thread a Try-in Screw (MUNITS,
ILRGHT or UNITS) into one posterior-most implant. Radiograph
the interfaces to verify that the bar is completely seated on all of the
implants. Repeat radiograph after removing the screw and placing it
into the opposite posterior-most implant. If a fit discrepancy is found,
cut and index the bar intraorally for soldering or welding. Immediately
replace the healing abutments back onto the implants.
Laboratory
10. Transfer the denture teeth back onto the cast using the matrix
and wax the denture for processing. Flask the waxed denture and
boil out. Separate the flask and attach the bar to the analogs in the
cast using try-in screws. Block out all undercuts and access openings
with plaster. Place the clips and/or other attachments onto the bar.
Process and finish the denture following conventional procedures.

Restorative Dentist
11. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the bar onto the implants.

Thread a Certain® Gold-Tite® Large Hexed Screw (ILRGHG)

into the implants and finger-tighten using the .048” Large Hex Driver
(PHD02N or PHD03N). To help ­prevent accidental swallowing,
thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

Or

Thread a Gold-Tite Square Screw (UNISG) into the implants and

finger-tighten using a Square Driver (PSQD0N or PSQD1N).
To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver.

Radiograph the interface of the implants to verify an accurate fit.

Torque the Certain Gold-Tite Hexed Large Screws to 20 Ncm and
Square Gold-Tite Screws to 32-35 Ncm using the proper driver tip with
a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

12. Place the overdenture onto the bar in the mouth and engage
the retentive attachments. Make any necessary occlusal or tissue
adjustments. Instruct the patient on insertion, removal, maintenance
of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

78
 Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
UCLA Abutment Fixed Hybrid
See page 76 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for abutment level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Place the Non-Hexed Gold UCLA Abutments or Castable
UCLA Abutments onto the implant analogs. Thread ­Try-in Screws
(MUNITS, ILRGHT or UNITS) or Waxing Screws (IWSU30, WSK10
or WSK15) into the implant analogs and finger-tighten using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Fabricate a verification
index by luting the plastic sleeves together using a low expansion light
cure composite resin or autopolymerizing acrylic resin. Also, fabricate
a record base and wax occlusion rim.

Restorative Dentist
3. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the
driver. Place the occlusion rim in the mouth. Make the interocclusal
records. Place the verification index onto the implants. Thread a
Try-in Screw (MUNITS, ILRGHT or UNITS) or Waxing Screw
(IWSU30 or WSU30) into one posterior-most UCLA Abutment and
finger-tighten. Radiograph the ­interfaces to verify that all cylinders
are completely seated on all of the implants. Remove the screw
and place it into the opposite posterior-most UCLA Abutment and
repeat radiograph. If a fit ­discrepancy is found, section the index and
reassemble intraorally. Remove the index. Immediately replace the
healing abutments back onto the implants.

Laboratory
4. Verify that the analog positions on the cast are accurate using
a verification index. Articulate casts using the interocclusal record.
Set the denture teeth on the record base and wax for try in. If the
verification index was corrected, the corrected index is used to
identify inaccurate analogs in the cast. Take this index back to the cast
and identify the inaccurate analog(s). Remove the inaccurate analog(s)
from the cast and attach it to the verification index. Re-seat the index
on the other remaining analogs into the cast. Verify that the analog
does not touch the stone of the cast. Inject a mix of die stone to re-
attach the analog to the cast.

79
Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
UCLA Abutment Fixed Hybrid (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
5. Place the wax try-in in the mouth. Verify the occlusion,
aesthetics and phonetics. Make any adjustments necessary. If major
adjustments are necessary, make a new interocclusal record and
return to the laboratory for a new set up and try in.

Laboratory
6. Make a plaster or silicone matrix of the verified wax try-in and
remove the denture teeth inside it. Wax and cast the framework
consistent with fixed and removable prosthodontic design parameters.

Or

If the clinician and/or laboratory technician would like to use CAD/

CAM technology, request a BellaTek® Bar. See the BellaTek Bars &
Frameworks Manual (INST868).

7. Carefully remove the UCLA Abutments from the verification

index. Place the Non-Hexed UCLA Abutments onto the implant
analogs. Thread Try-in Screws (MUNITS, ILRGHT or UNITS)
or Waxing Screws (IWSU30 or WSU30) into the implant analogs
and finger-tighten using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N). Adjust the height of the plastic sleeves as necessary.
Wax the hybrid bar patterns to the waxing sleeves and add loops or
acrylic retention features on the top. Use the matrix on the cast to
position the bar within the confines of the wax try-in.

8. Remove the hybrid bar wax pattern from the cast. Invest,
burnout and cast the bar in a low, medium or high noble alloy (see
page 8 for casting alloy specifications). Chemically divest, finish and
polish the tissue surface of the bar with polishing protectors in place.
Return the bar to the restorative dentist for try in and fit verification.

80
Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
UCLA Abutment Fixed Hybrid (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
9. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the bar onto the implants. Thread a Try-in Screw (MUNITS,
ILRGHT or UNITS) into one posterior-most implant. Radiograph
the interfaces to verify that the bar is completely seated on all of the
implants. Repeat radiograph after removing the screw and placing it
into the opposite posterior-most implant. If a fit discrepancy is found,
cut and index the bar intraorally for soldering or welding. Immediately
replace the healing abutments back onto the implants.

Laboratory
10. Attach the bar to the implant analogs with ­waxing screws
using a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Transfer
the ­denture teeth from the matrix onto the bar on the cast and wax
the hybrid prosthesis for processing. Flask the waxed prosthesis
and boil out. Separate the flask. Opaque the bar in areas where the
acrylic resin will be processed to it. Block out all undercuts between
the framework and cast with plaster. Process and finish the hybrid
prosthesis in a conventional manner. Polishing protectors should be in
place during all finishing and polishing p­ rocedures.

Restorative Dentist
11. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a
.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the Fixed Hybrid prosthesis onto the implants.

Thread a Certain® Gold-Tite® Large Hexed Screw (ILRGHG)

into the implants using the .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or
PHD03N) and finger-tighten.

Or

Thread a Gold-Tite Square Screw (UNISG) into the implants

using a Square Driver (PSQD0N or PSQD1N) and finger-tighten.
To help ­prevent accidental swallowing, thread floss through the
spinner of the driver.

Radiograph the interface to verify an accurate fit. Torque the

Certain Gold-Tite Hexed Large Screws to 20 Ncm and Square
Gold-Tite Screws to 32-35 Ncm using the proper driver tip with a
torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). Place protective
material into the screw access openings. Seal the access openings
with acrylic resin. Make any necessary occlusal adjustments. Instruct
the patient on maintenance of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

81
 Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
IOL Abutment Fixed Hybrid
®

Material: Indications:
Titanium Alloy • Multiple implant bar-retained and fixed • Minimum interarch space of 9.2 mm
removable overdentures • Minimum tissue height of 2 mm
• M ulltiple-unit porcelain fused to metal • Maximum angulation correction of 30°
restorations

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow the steps for abutment level impressions on pages
10-12 for the Pick-Up Technique and pages 13-15 for the Twist
Lock™ Transfer Technique.

Laboratory
2. Follow the steps on pages 69-70 for fabrication of the
verification index, record base and wax occlusion rim, wax try-in and
plaster or silicone matrix.

Or

If the clinician and/or laboratory technician would like to use CAD/

CAM technology, request a BellaTek® Bar. See the BellaTek Bars &
Frameworks Manual (INST868).

3. Carefully remove the IOL® Abutment Gold Cylinders or IOL

Abutment Castable Cylinders from the verification index. Place the
cylinders onto the analogs and attach with IOL Waxing Screws using
a .048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Adjust the height
of the sleeves as necessary. Wax the hybrid bar pattern to the waxing
sleeves and add loops or acrylic retention features to the occlusal
surface of the wax pattern. Use the matrix on the cast to position the
bar within the confines of the wax denture.

4. Remove the hybrid bar wax pattern from the cast. Invest,
burnout and cast the bar in a low, medium or high noble alloy (see
page 8 for casting alloy specifications). Chemically divest, finish and
polish the tissue surface of the bar with polishing protectors in place.
Return the bar to the restorative dentist for try in and fit verification.

82
Implant-Retained Fixed Prosthesis
IOL Abutment Fixed Hybrid (Cont’d)
®

Restorative Dentist
5. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the bar onto the abutments. Thread a Hexed Gold-Tite®
Retaining Screw (GSHx0) into one posterior-most cylinder and
finger-tighten using the 048” Large Hex Driver. Visually verify that the
bar is completely seated on all of the implants. Remove the screw
and place it into the opposite posterior-most c­ ylinder and repeat.
If a fit discrepancy is found, cut and index the bar intraorally and
return the framework to the laboratory for soldering or welding.
Immediately replace the healing caps back onto the abutments.

Laboratory
6. Attach the bar to the analogs with waxing screws using a
.048" Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). Transfer the
denture teeth from the matrix onto the bar on the cast and wax
the hybrid prosthesis for processing. Flask the waxed ­prothesis and
boil out. Separate the flask. Opaque the bar in areas where the
acrylic resin will be processed to it. Block out all undercuts between
the framework and cast with plaster. Process and finish the hybrid
prosthesis in a conventional manner. Polishing protectors should be in
place during all finishing and polishing p­ rocedures.

NOTE: A wax/framework try in appointment may be necessary

for optimal results.

Restorative Dentist
7. Remove the healing caps from the abutments using a .048”
Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.
Place the fixed hybrid prosthesis onto the abutments. Screw the
Hexed Gold-Tite Retaining Screws (GSHx0) into the abutments and
verify fit. Adjust occlusion, remove and polish. Replace the prosthesis
and torque the screws to 10 Ncm using a .048” Large Hex Driver
Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB,
RTI2035, HTD-C). Place protective material into the screw access
openings. Seal the access openings with acrylic resin. Make any
necessary occlusal adjustments. Instruct the patient on maintenance
of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

83
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
LOCATOR Abutment - Indirect Technique
®

Material:
Abutment: Titanium Alloy With
Gold Colored Titanium Nitride Coating
Housing: Titanium Alloy Males: Nylon
Indications:
• Tissue-supported removable overdentures on 2-4 implants
• Partially edentulous overdentures with 1 or more implants
• Limited interarch distance
• Angle correction with up to 40º between divergent implants

Surgeon or Restorative Dentist

1. Select the proper LOCATOR Abutment collar height by
measuring the height of the healing abutment above the tissue on
the buccal surface, not including the domed portion. Subtract this
measurement from the total height of the healing abutment and then
add 1 mm. The LOCATOR Abutment seating surface should match
the implant platform. See page 17 for the Abutment Selection Guide.

2. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a

.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

3. Thread the LOCATOR Abutment into the implant using

the plastic delivery tool packaged with the abutment. Use the
LOCATOR Core Tool/Abutment Driver (LCTDR1) and finger-tighten.

4. Radiograph the interfaces to verify complete ­seating of the

SEATED NOT SEATED abutments on all of the implants. Place the film perpendicular to the
interface of the abutment on the implant.

84
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
LOCATOR Abutment - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

5. Torque the LOCATOR Abutments into the implants to

20 Ncm, using the LOCATOR Core Tool/Abutment Driver
(LCTDR1) and a .050 inch Hexed Driver Tip (RASH4 or RASH9)
with a torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). If the
surgeon places the abutments, the patient’s existing denture will be
relieved to allow for space around the abutments.
Or
Place the LOCATOR Driver Tip (LOADT4 or LOADT9) into the
torque device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C) and torque the
abutments to 20 Ncm.

Restorative Dentist
6. A custom or stock closed top impression tray may be used.
Provide relief for the height of the LOCATOR Abutments and
impression copings plus 2 mm. The impression copings are 4.5 mm
in height.

NOTE: If the impression is to be used to fabricate the

overdenture, a custom impression tray should be made.

7. Place the LOCATOR Impression Copings (LAIC1) on the

abutments and verify complete seating. Syringe light viscosity
impression material around the impression copings. Use medium or
heavy viscosity impression material for the tray.

NOTE: Sometimes it is helpful to place impression adhesive on

the impression copings to ensure their removal in the impression.

8. Load the impression tray and seat it in the mouth. Allow the

impression material to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

85
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
LOCATOR Abutment - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

9. Remove the impression from the mouth and verify that the
impression material completely adapted around each impression
coping. The impression copings should remain inside the impression.
Relieve the patient’s existing d­ enture to allow for the LOCATOR
Abutments. Place a chairside soft liner into the denture where
space has been made and then seat the denture. Have the patient
close lightly into centric occlusion. Allow the soft liner to set per the
manufacturer’s instructions.

Laboratory
10. Insert the LOCATOR Laboratory Analogs (LALA1) into the
impression copings using firm pressure until fully engaged.

11. Pour the cast in die stone, being careful to not dislodge the
analogs. Fabricate a record base and wax occlusion rim.

Restorative Dentist
12. Place the occlusion rim in the mouth. Make the
interocclusal records.

86
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
LOCATOR Abutment - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

Laboratory
13. Articulate casts using the interocclusal record. Set the denture
teeth on the record base for the wax try-in.

Restorative Dentist
14. Place the wax denture in the mouth. Verify o
­ cclusion,
aesthetics and phonetics. Make any adjustments necessary. If major
adjustments are necessary, make a new interocclusal record and
return it to the laboratory for a new articulator mounting, wax
denture set-up and try in.

Laboratory
15. After the wax try-in is verified, flask the denture on the cast.
Boil out the wax and separate the flask. Place the LOCATOR White
Spacer Rings over the analogs to prevent acrylic resin from flowing
under the housings. Place the Housing/Black Processing Male
Attachment assembly onto the analogs.

16. Process and finish the denture with the LOCATOR Housings in
place following conventional procedures. Remove the Black Processing
Males and replace with Final Male Attachments (see step 17).

87
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
LOCATOR Abutment - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)
®

Restorative Dentist
17. Remove the Black Processing Male by placing the Removal Tip
end of the LOCATOR Core Tool/Abutment Driver (LCTDR1) into
the Housing/Black Processing Male assembly and turning the handle
three rotations counter-clockwise. Place the Final Male Attachment
on the ­attachment insertion end of the Core Tool and press it firmly
into the housing. The attachment retention on the a­ butment may
be reduced by placing the pink Light
Retention Male or the blue Extra Light Male Attachments:
Retention Male rather than the clear Final 1 lb. of retention
Male. The male attachments are replaced (LAELM)
after normal wear by inserting the
3 lb. of retention
Removal Tip straight into the bottom of (LLRMS)
the nylon male. Tilt the tool so the sharp
5 lb. of retention
edge will grab hold of the male and pull it (LARMS)
out of the cap.

18. Place the overdenture onto the LOCATOR Abutments in

the mouth, engaging the attachments. Make any necessary occlusal
or tissue adjustments. Instruct the patient on insertion, removal,
maintenance of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

88
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
LOCATOR Abutment - Direct Technique
®

See page 84 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow steps 1-5 on pages 84-85 for LOCATOR Abutment
Indirect Technique selection and placement.

2. A direct chairside processing technique may be used for a

patient’s existing denture or a new denture by cutting relief and
lingual vent windows in the acrylic resin denture base over the
abutment areas.

3. Cut two small pieces of rubber dam and place a hole in

the center of each. Place these over the abutments to protect the
tissue. Place the White Spacer Rings over the LOCATOR Abutments
to prevent acrylic resin from flowing into undercuts around the
housings. Place the Housing/Black Processing Male Attachment
assembly onto the LOCATOR Abutments in the mouth. Try in the
denture over the housings to verify that it is completely seated on the
ridge and the housings are not in contact with the denture. Eliminate
all contacts between the LOCATOR Abutments and denture base.

4. Place autopolymerizing acrylic resin or light cure composite

resin over the LOCATOR Housings and into relief areas of the
denture. Place and position the denture in the mouth and have the
patient close lightly into centric occlusion. Allow the acrylic resin to
set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

89
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
LOCATOR Abutment - Direct Technique (Cont’d)
®

5. Remove the Black Processing Male by placing the Removal

Tip end of the LOCATOR Core Tool/Abutment Driver (LCTDR1)
into the Housing/Black Processing Male assembly and turning the
handle three rotations counter clockwise. Place the Final Male
Attachment on the a­ ttachment insertion end of the Core Tool and
press it firmly into the housing. The
attachment retention on the ­abutment Male Attachments:
may be reduced by placing the pink Light
Retention Male or the blue Extra Light 1 lb. of retention
(LAELM)
Retention Male rather than the clear
Final Male. The male attachments are 3 lb. of retention
replaced after normal wear by inserting (LLRMS)
the Removal Tip straight into the bottom
5 lb. of retention
of the nylon male. Tilt the tool so the (LARMS)
sharp edge will grab hold of the male
and pull it out of the cap.

6. Remove the denture, fill any voids with a new mix of acrylic or
composite resin around the housings and polish. Remove the Black
Processing Males and replace these with the Final Male Attachments
(see step 5). Place the overdenture onto the LOCATOR Abutments
in the mouth, engaging the attachments. Make any necessary occlusal
or tissue adjustments. Instruct the patient on insertion, removal,
maintenance of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

90
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
Dal-Ro Abutment - Indirect Technique
Material: Indications:
Abutment: Titanium Alloy • Tissue-supported overdentures • Recommended for parallel-walled
Housing: Titanium • Overdentures with 1 or more implants implants; (see Castable Dal-Ro system
Females: Gold Alloy • Rigid retention for divergent implants)
• Minimum interarch space of 5 mm • 250–1000 grams of retention; may be
• Maximum tissue height of 6 mm adjusted

Surgeon or Restorative Dentist

1. Select the proper Dal-Ro Abutment collar height by measuring
the height of the healing abutment above the tissue on the buccal
surface, not including the domed portion. Subtract this measurement
from the total height of the healing abutment and then add 1 mm.

2. Remove the healing abutments from the implants using a

.048” Large Hex Driver (PHD02N or PHD03N). To help p­ revent
accidental swallowing, thread floss through the spinner of the driver.

3. Place the Dal-Ro Abutment onto the implant, engaging the hex
below the ball with the O-Ring/Dal-Ro Abutment Driver (PAD01)
and finger-tighten.

4. Radiograph the interfaces to verify complete seating of the

SEATED NOT SEATED abutments on all of the implants. Place the film perpendicular to the
interface of the abutment on the implant.

91
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
Dal-Ro Abutment - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

5. Torque the Dal-Ro Abutment into the implants to 20 Ncm

using the O-Ring/Dal-Ro Driver Tip (RAOR1) with a torque device
(L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C). If the surgeon places the
abutments, the patient’s existing denture will be relieved to allow for
space around the abutments.

Restorative Dentist
6. A custom or stock closed top impression tray may be used.
Provide relief for the height of the Dal-Ro Abutments plus 2 mm.

NOTE: If the impression is to be used to fabricate the

overdenture, a custom impression tray should be made.

7. Syringe impression material around each Dal-Ro Abutment.

Use light viscosity impression material to inject the material
around the attachments intraorally. Use medium or heavy viscosity
impression material for the tray.

NOTE: There are no impression copings for Dal-Ro Abutments.

8. Seat the impression tray in the mouth. Allow the impression

material to set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

92
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
Dal-Ro Abutment - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

9. Remove the impression from the mouth and verify that the
impression material has completely adapted around each abutment.
Relieve the patient’s existing denture to allow for the Dal-Ro
Abutments. Place a chairside soft liner into the patient’s existing
denture around the abutments and seat the denture. Have the
patient close lightly into centric occlusion. Allow the soft liner to set
per the manufacturer’s instructions.

Laboratory
10. Insert the Dal-Ro Laboratory Analogs (DRLAU) into the
impression using firm pressure until the ball portion fully engages
the undercut.

11. Pour the cast in die stone, being careful to not d­ islodge the
analogs. Fabricate a record base and wax occlusion rim.

Restorative Dentist
12. Place the occlusion rim in the mouth. Make the
interocclusal records.

93
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
Dal-Ro Abutment - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

Laboratory
13. Articulate the casts using the interocclusal record. Set the
denture teeth on the record base for the wax try-in.

Restorative Dentist
14. Place the wax denture in the mouth. Verify occlusion, aesthetics
and phonetics. Make any necessary adjustments. If major adjustments
are necessary, make a new interocclusal record and return it to the
laboratory for a new articulator mounting, wax denture set-up and
try in.

Laboratory
15. After the wax denture is verified, flask the denture on the cast.
Boil out the wax and separate the flask. Place the Dal-Ro Spacer
Rings over the ball portion of the analogs and conform to the ridges.
Screw the Gold Female Attachments into the Dal-Ro Housings
(DRTH) using the Female Driver Tool (DRFAT1).
Place the housing/attachment assembly onto the analogs.

16. Process and finish the denture with the Dal-Ro Housings
in place following conventional procedures.

94
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
Dal-Ro Abutment - Indirect Technique (Cont’d)

Restorative Dentist
17. Place the overdenture onto the Dal-Ro Abutments in the mouth,
engaging the attachments. Make any necessary occlusal or tissue
adjustments. Instruct the patient on insertion, removal, maintenance
of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

18. The Gold Female Attachment (DRTH) retention on the abutment

may be adjusted by tightening the housing for more retention and
loosening for less retention (by using the Female Attachment Tool).
The Gold Females may be replaced using the same technique.

95
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
Dal-Ro Abutment - Direct Technique
See page 91 for indications and material.

Restorative Dentist
1. Follow steps 1-5 on pages 91-92 for Dal-Ro Abutment selection
and placement.

2. A direct chairside processing technique may be used for a patient’s

existing or new denture by cutting relief and lingual vent windows in
the acrylic resin denture base over the abutment areas.

3. Cut two small pieces of rubber dam and place a hole in the
center. Place these over the abutments to protect the tissue.
Screw the Gold Female Attachments into the Dal-Ro Housings
(DRTH) using the Female Driver Tool (DRFAT1). Place the housing/
attachment assembly onto the Dal-Ro Abutments in the mouth. Block
out the undercuts with wax to prevent acrylic resin from flowing
under the Housings (DRTH). Try in the denture over the housings to
verify that it is completely seated on the ridge and the housings are
not in contact with the denture.

4. Place autopolymerizing acrylic resin or light cure composite

resin over the Dal-Ro Housings and into relief areas of the denture.
Place and position the denture in the mouth having patient close
lightly into centric occlusion. Allow the acrylic resin to set per the
manufacturer’s instructions.

96
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
Dal-Ro Abutment - Direct Technique (Cont’d)

5. Remove the denture, fill any voids around the housings and polish.
Place the overdenture onto the Dal-Ro Abutments in the mouth,
engaging the attachments. Make any necessary occlusal or tissue
adjustments. Instruct the patient on insertion, removal, maintenance
of the prosthesis and oral hygiene.

6. The Gold Female Attachment (DRTH) retention on the abutment

may be adjusted by tightening the housing for more retention and
loosening for less retention by using the Female Attachment Tool.
The Gold Females may be replaced using the same technique.

97
 Tissue-Supported Overdenture
Temporary Healing Retention Cylinder - Indirect Technique

Surgeon or Restorative Dentist (post implant placement)

1. Place the Temporary Healing Retention Cylinders (THRC4 or
THRC6) onto the implants. Torque to 20 Ncm using a .048”
Large Hex Driver Tip (RASH3N or RASH8N) with a torque
device (L-TIRW, CATDB, RTI2035, HTD-C).

2. A direct chairside processing technique may be used for a

patient’s existing or new denture by cutting relief and lingual vent
windows in the acrylic resin denture base over the Temporary
Healing Retention Cylinder area.

3. Reline the patient’s existing denture with a soft reline material over
the Temporary Healing Retention Cylinders (THRC4 or THRC6).

98
 BIOMET 3i offers a family of synergistic system
solutions to help you and your patients achieve
beautiful, confident and healthy smiles.

n Smile Beautifully n Smile Confidently n Smile Healthy

For more information regarding Smile Therapy™ System Solutions,
please contact your local BIOMET 3i Sales Representative.

Check Out The BIOMET 3i Online Store at www.shopbiomet3i.com

(Available for Spain & US Customers Only)

Global Headquarters BIOMET 3i Dental Ibérica S.L.

4555 Riverside Drive EMEA Headquarters
Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33410 WTC Almeda Park, Ed. 4, Planta 2
Toll Free: 1-800-342-5454 C/Tirso de Molina, 40
Phone: +1-561-776-6700 08940, Cornellà de Llobregat (Barcelona) Spain
Fax: +1-561-776-1272 Phone: +34-93-470-55-00
www.biomet3i.com Fax: +34-93-371-78-49
www.biomet3i.com

All trademarks herein are the property of BIOMET 3i LLC unless otherwise indicated. LOCATOR is a registered trademark of Zest
IP Holdings, LLC. Straumann is a registered trademark of Straumann Holding AG. NobelActive and NobelReplace are registered
trademarks of the Nobel Biocare group. ©2015 BIOMET 3i LLC. All rights reserved.

This material is intended for clinicians and laboratories only and is NOT intended for patient distribution. This material is
not to be redistributed, duplicated or disclosed without the express written consent of BIOMET 3i. For additional product INSTRM
information, including indications, contraindications, warnings, precautions and potential adverse effects, please visit the REV B 10/15
BIOMET 3i Website: www.ifu.biomet3i.com. Please note that not all products are registered or available in every country/
region. Please check with a Biomet 3i representative for availability and additional information.
 Product Catalog
For Restorative Technologies
 Important Product Information For
Instructions For Use:
For detailed information on the specific procedure for the
product you are using, please refer to the individual product
labels or the appropriate manual on the BIOMET 3i Website.
Description:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are manufactured from
biocompatible titanium, titanium alloy, gold, gold alloy,
zirconium, vanadium, stainless steel, polyetheretherketone
(PEEK), cobalt chromium alloy, and polyoxymethylene (Delrin).
Please refer to product guidelines for use/Surgical Manual for
additional device information.
Indications For Use:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are intended for use as
accessories to endosseous dental implants for placement in the
maxilla and mandible.
Provisional Abutments are intended for use as accessories to
endosseous dental implants to support a prosthetic device in a
partially or fully edentulous patient. They are intended for use
to support a prosthesis in the mandible or maxilla for up to
180 days during endosseous and gingival healing, and are for
non-occlusal loading of provisional restorations. The prostheses
will either be cement, mechanically or screw-retained to the
abutment system based on individual product design. For
compatibility of BellaTek® Patient Specific Abutments, please
refer to the compatibility table in the accompanying document.
Contraindications:
Placement of BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are precluded by
known patient hypersensitivity to any of the materials listed in
the Description section above.
Warnings:
Mishandling of small components inside the patient’s mouth
carries a risk of aspiration and/or swallowing. Fracture of a
restoration may occur when an abutment is loaded beyond its
functional capability. Reuse of BIOMET 3i Products that are
labeled for single-use may result in product contamination,
patient infection and/or failure of the device to perform as
intended.
PEEK components are intended for use to support single- or
multiple-unit provisional prostheses in the mandible or maxilla
for up to 180 days, at which time definitive prostheses should
be inserted.
Sterility:
Some BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are supplied sterile.
Refer to individual product labels for sterilization information;
all sterile products are labeled “STERILE”. All products sold
sterile are for single-use before the “use by” date printed on
the product label. Do not use sterile products if the packaging
has been damaged or previously opened. Products provided
non-sterile may need to be cleaned and sterilized prior to use.
Please refer to the individual product labels or Restorative
Manual for more information. For products provided non-sterile
Restorative Products
requiring sterilization prior to use, BIOMET 3i recommends the
following sterilization parameters for wrapped items:
Steam gravity sterilization method (gravity-displacement
cycle) - Minimum exposure of fifteen (15) minutes timing at a
temperature of 270ºF (132ºC)* or
Pre-vacuum sterilization method (dynamic-air-removal cycle) -
Minimum exposure of four (4) minutes, four (4) pulses timing at
a temperature of 270ºF (132ºC).*
*Post sterilization, devices should be thoroughly dried for 30 minutes. Please refer
to the Surgical and Restorative Manual or package insert for the remaining care
and cleaning instructions.
Do not re-sterilize or autoclave components except where
indicated on the individual product label, where instructions
have been provided in the Restorative Manual or in any
additional product literature for the given component.
MRI Statement:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products have not been evaluated
for safety, heating, migration, or compatibility in the Magnetic
Resonance Imaging (MRI) environment.
Precautions:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products should only be used by
trained professionals. The surgical and restorative techniques
required to properly utilize these products are highly specialized
and complex procedures. Improper technique can lead to
implant failure, loss of supporting bone, restoration fracture,
screw loosening and aspiration. Components made from PEEK
material are intended for use for up to 180 days.
Potential Adverse Events:
Potential adverse events associated with the use of restorative
products may include: failure to integrate; loss of integration;
dehiscence requiring bone grafting; infection as reported by:
abscess, fistula, suppuration, inflammation, radiolucency; gingival
hyperplasia; excessive bone loss requiring intervention; fracture;
and nerve injury.
Storage And Handling:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products should be stored at room
temperature. Refer to the Surgical Manual for special storage or
handling conditions.
Caution:
U.S. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order
of a licensed dentist or physician.
 Table Of Contents

Introduction Certain Internal Connection:

Company Overview
Implant & Abutment System Connections
Patient Specific Technologies Overview
BellaTek® Bars & Frameworks Design Options
Restorative Products Flowchart
Restorative Products
i External Hex Connection:
ii
Certain Internal and External
iv Hex Connections:
v
ICON KEY: These icons represent the connection
vii types of the BIOMET 3i Implant and Abutment
Systems for both internal and external connection
types represented throughout this catalog.

Certain® Internal Connection: External Hex Connection:

Provisional Restorations Provisional Restorations

PreFormance® Posts 1 PreFormance Posts 15
PreFormance Temporary Cylinders 2 PreFormance Temporary Cylinders 16
Titanium Temporary Cylinders 2 Titanium Temporary Cylinders 16

Cement-Retained Restorations Cement-Retained Restorations

GingiHue® Posts 3 GingiHue Posts 17
ZiReal® Posts 3 ZiReal Posts 17
GingiHue & ZiReal Post Components 4 GingiHue & ZiReal Post Components 18
UCLA Abutments 5 UCLA Abutments 19
UCLA Abutment Components 6 UCLA Abutment Components 20
Provide® Abutments 7
Provide Abutment Components 8 Screw-Retained Restorations
UCLA Abutments 21
Screw-Retained Restorations UCLA Abutment Components 22
UCLA Abutments 9 Low Profile Abutments 23
UCLA Abutment Components 10 Low Profile Abutment Components 24
Low Profile Abutments 11
Low Profile Abutment Components 12 Overdenture Restorations
LOCATOR Abutments 25
Overdenture Restorations LOCATOR Abutment Components 26
LOCATOR® Abutments 13
Continued on next page. ➤
LOCATOR Abutment Components 14

 Table Of Contents (Cont’d)

Screws
Certain® Internal Connection: External Hex Connection:
Abutment, Retaining, Waxing & Try-In Screws 27 Abutment, Retaining, Waxing & Try-In Screws 28

Miscellaneous Restorative Products Patient Education Products 34

Mechanical Driver Kits 29
Drivers & Driver Tips 30 Additional Information
Navigator System Instrumentation Overview
®
31 Index35
Tapered Navigator Laboratory Kit 32 Ordering Form 42
Parallel Walled Navigator Laboratory Kit 32 Ordering Information 44
Laboratory Tools 33
Miscellaneous Items 33
 Introduction

Company Overview
Providing Solutions – One Patient At A Time™

Mission Statement:
BIOMET 3i will be recognized as a global leader in the oral reconstruction marketplace.
We will achieve this through superior customer support and continuous product innovation.

Headquartered in Palm Beach Gardens, Florida, with
operations throughout the world, BIOMET 3i is one
of the leading companies in the oral reconstruction
market. Of equal importance, BIOMET 3i brings the
same innovation, high standards and comprehensive
approach to customer service, dental practice and
laboratory support and education.
BIOMET 3i pioneered the development of biologically
driven implants, winning worldwide acclaim for the
microtextured OSSEOTITE® surface and then the nano-
scaled, Bone Bonding® NanoTite™Surface Implants.
The tradition of implant innovation continues with the
introduction of the 3i T3® Implant, a contemporary
hybrid that is designed for sustainable aesthetics.

BIOMET 3i offers one of implant dentistry’s most This spirit of innovation continues with the introduction
comprehensive lines of implants and abutments, of DIEM®2, a protocol to enable clinicians to pursue
augmented by a growing line of site preparation, digital, immediate provisionalization options for full arch
restorative and regenerative products. patient cases.

i
 Introduction

Implant & Abutment System Connections

Certain® Internal Connection
The internal connection aspect of the implant and abutment are designed
for ease of use and simplicity.

• QuickSeat® Connection: It Clicks! The Certain Implant and Abutment

Systems feature the QuickSeat Connection. This unique connection
produces an audible and tactile “click” that confirms placement of
Impression Copings and Abutments.

• Abutment fingers cause the “click” and also provide r­ etention for the
prosthetic components in the implant before the screw is placed. A screw
is needed to fully seat the components when the restoration is being
tried in or definitively placed.

• The 6/12 hex inside the internal connection incorporates both a 6-point
single and a 12-point double hex. The 6-point single hex has two
functions: engaging the driver tip for mountless delivery during implant
placement and providing anti-rotation for all straight abutments.
The 12-point double hex provides 30º rotational positioning for pre-
angled abutments.

• Impression Copings: Pick-Up and Twist Lock™ Transfer Copings

are available in the Certain Internal Connection design, in three EP®
(Emergence Profile) diameters and a straight diameter to match the
corresponding Healing Abutment. The Impression Copings also “click”
when properly seated. These copings have a different finger design that
engages 2mm internally into the implant, as compared to the abutment’s
design that engages 4mm deep into the implant. This shorter engagement
into the implant is important because it allows off-axis draw for implant
impressions that are divergent.

• Color-Coding: Certain Implants and all interfacing c­ omponents are

(purple) (blue) (yellow) (green)
color-coded by restorative platform diameter for easy identification
and selection.
3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

ii
 Introduction

Implant & Abutment System Connections

External Hex Connection
The external hex connection implant and abutment designs have been
widely used in implant dentistry.

• Gold Standard ZR (Zero Rotation) is a patented design incorporating

machined microstops within the corners of the hex in the abutment.
The design reduces horizontal rotation between the implant and
abutment. Gold Standard ZR is available on UCLA, GingiHue® and
Conical Abutments.

• The 12-point double hex, which is machined in the 15º Pre-Angled

GingiHue Abutment, provides rotational positioning in 30º increments
on the implant hex.

• Precise Abutment Placement: The ASYST Abutment Placement Tool

provides fingertip control for fast and easy abutment delivery. The
patented packaging design makes abutment placement easier because the
abutment is delivered sterile from the package directly to the implant site.
The abutment and abutment screw are packaged inside the plastic ASYST
seating device. The plastic seating device facilitates precise placement of
the abutment on the implant, thus reducing chair time. The ASYST Tool
is packaged with Low Profile, Standard and Conical Abutments.

• Impression Copings: Pick-Up and Twist Lock™ Transfer Copings are

both available in the external connection design in three EP® (Emergence
Profile) diameters and a straight diameter to match the corresponding
healing abutment. The patented Twist Lock design provides a more
accurate transfer of the implant connection as compared to other
transfer (closed tray) techniques. This unique Twist Lock feature provides
a series of undercuts to guide the coping into the impression, giving
stability to the impression coping/analog prior to pouring the impression.
As a result, the copings lock into orientation grooves upon clockwise
rotation, thereby allowing for a tactile sensation of resistance that ensures
an accurate hex transfer.

iii
 Introduction
®

Patient Specific Technologies Overview

BellaTek® Encode® Impression System

The BellaTek Encode Impression System eliminates the need
for an implant-level impression while delivering a patient-specific
restoration that has the appropriate margin height and natural
emergence contours for the patient. This accuracy is achieved from
an impression of the BellaTek Encode Healing Abutment. Codes
embedded on the occlusal surface of the BellaTek Encode Healing
Abutment communicate the collar height, implant hex-orientation,
platform diameter and interface (the Certain® Internal Connection
or External Hex Connection) of the implant. Because the tissue is
healed at the time of impression, the margin is designed to have the
appropriate placement and contour. The result is a patient specific,
anatomically designed, final BellaTek Abutment. Available in titanium
with or without titanium nitride coating.

BellaTek Bars & Frameworks

BellaTek Bars and Frameworks are created with the technology to
achieve a truly passive fit. These are available in Hader and Dolder®
Designs for overdenture bars, primary bars and in fixed hybrid
designs. This technology does not require any wax or resin design
from the technician. The bars can be made on most major dental
implants and abutments. Because these are milled from one solid
piece of lightweight titanium, the potential for weakness caused by
soldering or laser welded joints is eliminated. You receive a
completed superstructure ready for prosthesis processing. No
polishing or retention creation necessary. can even
tap holes for attachments.

Copymilled Bars are also available for those who prefer to design a
bar or framework in a resin pattern to the patient’s specifications.

NOTE: Please ensure that as many implants as necessary are used for
a fully stable restoration.

iv
 Introduction
®

Bars & Frameworks Design Options

BellaTek® Bars and Frameworks are compatible with all major implant systems and match a wide variety of implant
and abutment connections. Please refer to the interface compatibility charts when placing your orders for bars and
frameworks with competitive connections. You can also find the BellaTek Bars and Frameworks Design Options
and Interface Compatibility Charts by visiting www.bellatek.biomet3i.com.

Hybrid Bar Design #1 Hybrid Bar Design #2

• Fixed prosthesis • Fixed prosthesis

• Metal lingual • Metal lingual
• Low buccal finish line • Low buccal finish line
• Titanium tissue surface • Titanium tissue surface

Wraparound Bar Freeform Bar

• Fixed prosthesis
•A crylic resin wraparound design
•A djustments possible to accommodate
for changing tissue contours • Fixed prosthesis
•E asy to repair and modify the acrylic resin • Acrylic resin wraparound design
portion of the prosthesis

Canada Bar Dolder ® Egg Shape Bar

• F ixed hybrid bar • Removable overdenture design

• Low lingual finish line • Anterior clips allow for anterior/posterior
• Titanium tissue surface rotation of the overdenture
• A
 crylic resin is processed to the bar • Provides lateral stability to the overdenture

v
 Introduction
®

Bars & Frameworks Design Options (Cont’d)

Dolder® U Shape Bar Hader Bar

• Removable overdenture design •R  emovable overdenture design with clips

•A  nterior clips allow for anterior/posterior that engage undercuts
rotation of the overdenture • Provides lateral stability to the overdenture
• P rovides lateral stability to the overdenture • 4mm between implants is needed for clips

Combination Primary Bar

Primary Bar With Hader Or Dolder Designs

•M ost secure removable overdenture design

•M ay be used with attachments or
secondary casting
•C  ombines a milled bar with Hader or
• Bar can be designed with a 2º – 6º taper
Dolder Designs
• Provides excellent lateral stability to
the overdenture
• Bar can be designed with a 2º – 6º taper
Design Features
Finish
Line

Copymilled Bar/Framework
Emergence
Profile

Implant Cylinder Extensions

• Ideal for both fixed and removable

prosthetic designs
•T
 echnician-fabricated resin pattern
for porcelain or acrylic resin bonded to
titanium

Stability Struts

Ask for these design features on the

BellaTek Bars & Frameworks Work Order Form (ART880).

vi
 Introduction

Restorative Products Flowchart

Cement-Retained Restorations
Is The Implant Angled?
No (Greater than 15º Divergence) Yes

GingiHue® ZiReal® 15º Pre-Angled GingiHue

UCLA UCLA
Provide® BellaTek

Interarch Space Interarch Space

Less than 7mm 7mm or more Less than 7mm 7mm or more
UCLA GingiHue UCLA 15º Pre-Angled GingiHue
BellaTek® UCLA BellaTek UCLA
ZiReal BellaTek
BellaTek
Provide Tissue Height

Tissue Height Less than 2mm 2mm or more

UCLA 15º Pre-Angled GingiHue
Less than 2mm 2mm or more BellaTek UCLA
UCLA GingiHue BellaTek
BellaTek UCLA Is the implant centered in the tooth site?
Provide ZiReal If the answer is no, UCLA is the best option.
BellaTek
Provide

Screw-Retained Restorations
Is The Implant Angled?
No (Greater than 15º Divergence) Yes

UCLA 17º Angled Low Profile

Low Profile 30º Angled Low Profile

Interarch Space Interarch Space

Less than 5mm 5mm or more Less than 9.5mm 9.5mm or more
UCLA UCLA UCLA UCLA
Low Profile 17º Angled Low Profile 17º Angled Low Profile
30º Angled Low Profile 30º Angled Low Profile
Tissue Height
Tissue Height Tissue Height
Less than 2mm 2mm or more
UCLA UCLA Less than 2mm 2mm or more Less than 2mm 2mm or more
Low Profile Low Profile UCLA 17º Angled Low Profile UCLA UCLA
30º Angled Low Profile 17º Angled Low Profile
30º Angled Low Profile
Is the implant centered in the tooth site?
If the answer is no, UCLA is the best option.

vii
 Provisional Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection
PreFormance® Posts
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional cement-retained restorations PEEK: Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multiple unit restorations will require an evaluation of occlusal forces in lateral and protrusive
excursions and masticatory forces to minimize the load on the provisional restorations
• Guided soft-tissue healing of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated implants

7 7

h h

profile profile

3.4mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

3.8mm 4mm IMPFP34 IMPAPF34

3.8mm 6mm IMPFP36 IMPAPF36
5mm 4mm IMPFP354 IMPAPF354
5mm 6mm IMPFP356 IMPAPF356
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 4mm IPFP454 IPAPF454

5mm 6mm IPFP456 IPAPF456
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 4mm IWPFP554 IPAPF554

5mm 6mm IWPFP556 IPAPF556
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

6mm 4mm IWPFP664 IPAPF664

6mm 6mm IWPFP666 IPAPF666

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
1
 Provisional Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection
PreFormance® Temporary Cylinders
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional screw-retained restorations PEEK: Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multiple unit restorations will require an evaluation of prosthesis support
to minimize the load on the provisional abutments
• Occlusal loading of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing

Certain Internal Connection

Description Item Numbers
3.4mm Seating Surface
Hexed IMPFTC34
Non-Hexed IMPFTC32
4.1mm Seating Surface
Hexed IPFTC41
12
Non-Hexed IPFTC42
5mm Seating Surface
Hexed IWPFTC51
Non-Hexed IWPFTC52
6mm Seating Surface
Hexed IWPFTC61
Non-Hexed IWPFTC62

Titanium Temporary Cylinders

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional screw-retained restorations Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multiple unit restorations will require an evaluation of prosthesis support
to minimize the load on the provisional abutments
• Occlusal loading of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Hexed IMMTCS1
Non-Hexed —
4.1mm Seating Surface
Hexed IITCS41
12
Non-Hexed IITCS42
5mm Seating Surface
All indicated measurements are in millimeters.
Hexed IWTCS51
Non-Hexed IWTCS52
6mm Seating Surface
Hexed IWTCS61
Non-Hexed IWTCS62

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU. 2
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection
GingiHue® Posts Material: Titanium Alloy

Indications:
• Single and multi-unit porcelain fused-to-metal restorations 7 7

• Areas of thin tissue where gingival discoloration is possible

• Preparable to follow gingival contours h h

• Conventional crown and bridge procedures

• Maximum angulation correction of 15º
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm profile profile

3.4mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

3.8mm 2mm IMAP32G IMPAP32G

3.8mm 4mm IMAP34G IMPAP34G
5mm 2mm IMAP352G IMPAP352G
5mm 4mm IMAP354G IMPAP354G
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 2mm IAPP452G IPAP452G

5mm 4mm IAPP454G IPAP454G
6mm 2mm IAPP462G IPAP462G
6mm 4mm IAPP464G IPAP464G
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 2mm IWPP552G IPAP552G

5mm 4mm IWPP554G IPAP554G
6mm 2mm IWPP562G IPAP562G
6mm 4mm IWPP564G IPAP564G
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

6mm 2mm IWPP662G IPAP662G

6mm 4mm IWPP664G IPAP664G

ZiReal® Posts
Indications: 7 Material: Zirconia Ceramic With A
• Single and multi-unit all ceramic restorations Titanium Alloy Interface
• Preparable to follow gingival contours h

• Minimum interarch space of 7mm

• Aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited
• Maximum angulation of 10° profile

4.1mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

5mm 4mm ICAP454*

6mm 4mm ICAP464*
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

6mm 4mm IWCAP564*

*Includes Certain ZiReal Gold-Tite® Screw (IZSHG) and ZiReal Try-In Screw (IZIRTS).

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich. All indicated measurements are in millimeters.
3
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection
GingiHue® & ZiReal® Post Components
Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Zirconia Abutment Screw Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw And Hexed Try-In Screw Holder

Certain Internal Connection

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.4 3.8 5.0 4.1 5.0 6.0 5.0 5.6 6.0 6.0 6.8

Pick-Up Impression Coping

IMIC30 IMIC33 IMIC35 IIIC41 IIIC12 IIIC60 IWIP50 IWIP55 IWIP56 IWIP60 IWIP66
IIIC42*
Twist Lock Impression Coping IMIT33 IMIT35 IIIC44 IIIC45 IIIC46 IWIT50 IWIT55 IWIT56 IWIT60 IWIT66
Laboratory Analog IMMILA IILA20 IILAW5 IILAW6
Abutment Screw I UNIHG**, IUNIHT
Zirconia Abutment Screw IZSHG (included with ZiReal Post)
Zirconia Try-In Screw IZIRTS (included with ZiReal Post)
Hexed Try-In Screw (5-pack) IUNITS
Laboratory Abutment Holder ILTAH57
*Non-Hexed
**Recommended

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
4
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

UCLA Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Laboratory fabricated custom abutments Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder With Plastic Unitube
• Single and multi-unit restorations
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited
• Maximum angulation correction of 30°

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IMUCG1C
4.1mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IGUCA1C
5mm Seating Surface 11

Gold (Hexed) IWGA51C 4

6mm Seating Surface

Gold (Hexed) IWGA61C
Hexed

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
5
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

UCLA Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

Certain Internal Connection

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.4 3.8 5.0 4.1 5.0 6.0 5.0 5.6 6.0 6.0 6.8

Pick-Up Impression Coping

IMIC30 IMIC33 IMIC35 IIIC41 IIIC12 IIIC60 IWIP50 IWIP55 IWIP56 IWIP60 IWIP66
IIIC42*
Twist Lock Impression Coping IMIT33 IMIT35 IIIC44 IIIC45 IIIC46 IWIT50 IWIT55 IWIT56 IWIT60 IWIT66
Laboratory Analog IMMILA IILA20 IILAW5 IILAW6
Abutment Screw I UNIHG**, IUNIHT
Hexed Try-In Screw (5-pack) IUNITS
Laboratory Abutment Holder ILTAH57
*Non-Hexed
**Recommended

Gold Alloy Cylinder Formulation

Melting Range 1400–1490°C (2550–2710°F)

Solidus 1400°C
Liquidus 1490°C
CTE 13.5 x 10-6 °K at 500°C

An alloy with a CTE of 10-6 °K at 500°C is recommended.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
6
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

Provide® Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit porcelain fused-to-metal restorations • Maximum angulation correction of 10° Titanium Alloy
• Fixed margin abutments • Minimum interarch space of 7mm
• Snap-on impression components
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Post Height Item Numbers
Abutment Abutment Abutment
Placement Kit Restorative Kit Only
4.8mm 1mm 4mm PAK4140* PRK484** IPA4140
4.8mm 2mm 4mm PAK4240* PRK484** IPA4240 post

4.8mm 3mm 4mm PAK4340* PRK484** IPA4340 collar

4.8mm 4mm 4mm PAK4440* PRK484** IPA4440 profile

4.8mm 1mm 5.5mm PAK4155* PRK485** IPA4155

4.8mm 2mm 5.5mm PAK4255* PRK485** IPA4255
4.8mm 3mm 5.5mm PAK4355* PRK485** IPA4355
4.8mm 4mm 5.5mm PAK4455* PRK485** IPA4455
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Post Height Item Numbers
Abutment Abutment Abutment
Placement Kit Restorative Kit Only
6.5mm 1mm 4mm PAK5140* PRK654** IPA5140
6.5mm 2mm 4mm PAK5240* PRK654** IPA5240
post
6.5mm 3mm 4mm PAK5340* PRK654** IPA5340 collar

6.5mm 4mm 4mm PAK5440* PRK654** IPA5440

profile
6.5mm 1mm 5.5mm PAK5155* PRK655** IPA5155
6.5mm 2mm 5.5mm PAK5255* PRK655** IPA5255
6.5mm 3mm 5.5mm PAK5355* PRK655** IPA5355
6.5mm 4mm 5.5mm PAK5455* PRK655** IPA5455
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Post Height Item Numbers
Abutment Abutment Abutment
Placement Kit Restorative Kit Only
6.5mm 1mm 4mm PAK6140* PRK654** IPA6140
6.5mm 2mm 4mm PAK6240* PRK654** IPA6240
post
6.5mm 3mm 4mm PAK6340* PRK654** IPA6340
collar
6.5mm 4mm 4mm PAK6440* PRK654** IPA6440
6.5mm 1mm 5.5mm PAK6155* PRK655** IPA6155 profile

6.5mm 2mm 5.5mm PAK6255* PRK655** IPA6255

6.5mm 3mm 5.5mm PAK6355* PRK655** IPA6355
6.5mm 4mm 5.5mm PAK6455* PRK655** IPA6455
*Abutment Placement Kit includes the Provide Abutment, Protection Cap and Certain® Gold-Tite® Hexed Screw IUNIHG.
**Abutment Restorative Kit includes Impression Coping, Impression Coping w/Holes, Waxing Sleeve (single-unit), Waxing Sleeve (multi-unit) and Non-Prepared Analog.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
7
 Cement-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

Provide® Abutment Components

Analog Abutment And Impression Coping And
Protection Cap Analog Abutment W/Pin Waxing Sleeve Impression Coping W/Holes Temporary Cylinder

Certain Internal Connection

Description 4mm Post Height 5.5mm Post Height
Emergence Profile 4.8 6.5 4.8 6.5

Protection Cap PPC484 PPC654 PPC485 PPC655

Impression Coping (Unprepared) PIC484 PIC654 PIC485 PIC655
Impression Coping W/Holes (Prepared) PIC484H PIC654H PIC485H PIC655H
Abutment Analog (Unprepared) PAA484 PAA654 PAA485 PAA655
Abutment Analog W/Pin (Prepared) PAAP48 PAAP65 PAAP48 PAAP65
Abutment Screw IUNIHG*, IUNIHT
single-unit 〉 PWS48S PWS65S PWS48S PWS65S
Waxing Sleeve
multi-unit 〉 PWS48M PWS65M PWS48M PWS65M
single-unit 〉 PUA48S PUA65S PUA48S PUA65S
Temporary Cylinder multi-unit 〉 PUA48M PUA65M PUA48M PUA65M
*Recommended

Included With Each Placement Kit: Included With Each Restorative Kit:

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
8
 Screw-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

UCLA Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit restorations Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder With Plastic Unitube
• Minimum interarch space of 4mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IMUCG1C*
Gold (Non-Hexed) IMUCG2C
Gold (Non-Hexed) IMUCG2T
Castable (Non-Hexed) IMUCC2C
Castable (Non-Hexed) IMUCC2T
4.1mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IGUCA1C* 11

4
Gold (Non-Hexed) IGUCA2C
Gold (Non-Hexed) IGUCA2T
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) – Hexed

Castable (Hexed) –
Castable (Non-Hexed) IUNAB2C 11

Castable (Non-Hexed) IUNAB2T 4

Castable (Hexed) 25-pack –

Non-Hexed
Castable (Non-Hexed) 25-pack –
5mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IWGA51C*
Gold (Non-Hexed) IWGA52C
Gold (Non-Hexed) IWGA52T
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) –
Castable (Hexed) –
Castable (Non-Hexed) IWPC52C
Castable (Non-Hexed) IWPC52T
6mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) IWGA61C*
QuickSeat®
Gold (Non-Hexed) IWGA62C Activator Tool
Gold (Non-Hexed) IWGA62T
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) –
Castable (Hexed) –
Castable (Non-Hexed) IWPC62C
All indicated measurements
Castable (Non-Hexed) are in millimeters. IWPC62T IQSA01

*UCLA Gold Hexed Abutments do not include the screw. The final Gold-Tite® Screw (IUNIHG) or the Titanium Screw (IUNIHT) must be
ordered separately.

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
9
 Screw-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

UCLA Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

Certain Internal Connection

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.4 3.8 5.0 4.1 5.0 6.0 5.0 5.6 6.0 6.0 6.8

Pick-Up Impression Coping

IMIC30 IMIC33 IMIC35 IIIC41 IIIC12 IIIC60 IWIP50 IWIP55 IWIP56 IWIP60 IWIP66
IIIC42*
Twist Lock Impression Coping IMIT33 IMIT35 IIIC44 IIIC45 IIIC46 IWIT50 IWIT55 IWIT56 IWIT60 IWIT66
Laboratory Analog IMMILA IILA20 IILAW5 IILAW6
Abutment Screw Hexed: IUNIHT, I UNIHG**, Non-Hexed: ILRGHG**, ILRGHT
Hexed Try-In Screw (5-pack) IUNITS (for hexed only)
Laboratory Abutment Holder ILTAH57
*Non-Hexed
**Recommended

Gold Alloy Cylinder Formulation

Melting Range 1400–1490°C (2550–2710°F)

Solidus 1400°C
Liquidus 1490°C
CTE 13.5 x 10-6 °K at 500°C

An alloy with a CTE of 10-6 °K at 500°C is recommended.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
10
 Screw-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

Low Profile Abutments

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit screw-retained restorations Titanium Alloy
• Minimum interarch space of 7.5mm
• Minimum tissue height of 1mm
• Angle correction up to 30°
2.2 2.2
2.2
2.2
h h h h

3.4mm Seating Surface

Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm ILPC341U ILPC341 – –

2mm ILPC342U ILPC342 ILPAC3217 –
3mm ILPC343U ILPC343 – ILPAC3330
4mm ILPC344U ILPC344 ILPAC3417 –
5mm – – – ILPAC3530
4.1mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm ILPC441U ILPC441 – –

2mm ILPC442U ILPC442 ILPAC4217 –
3mm ILPC443U ILPC443 – ILPAC4330
4mm ILPC444U ILPC444 ILPAC4417 –
5mm – – – ILPAC4530
5mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm ILPC541U ILPC541 – –

2mm ILPC542U ILPC542 ILPAC5217 –
3mm ILPC543U ILPC543 – ILPAC5330
4mm ILPC544U ILPC544 ILPAC5417 –
5mm – – – ILPAC5530

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
11
 Screw-Retained Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

Low Profile Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Healing Cap Gold And Castable Cylinder

Certain Internal Connection

QuickBridge® Temporary Cylinder Polishing Protector Retaining Screw Driver And Driver Tip

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Coping Driver ICD00

Description 4.8mm Restorative Platform

hexed Á LPCPIC1
Pick-Up
Impression Coping non-hexed Á LPCPIC2
LPCTIC1
hexed Á
Twist Lock Impression Coping
non-hexed Á LPCTIC2
QuickBridge Impression Coping LPCRIC
Laboratory Analog LPCLA
hexed Á LPCTC1
Temporary Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCTC2
Healing Cap LPCHC
hexed Á LPCPTC1
PreFormance® Temp. Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCPTC2
QuickBridge LPCQB
QuickBridge Replacement Cap LPCQBCAP
Distal Extension LPCDE
hexed Á LPCGC1
Gold Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCGC2
hexed Á LPCCC1
Castable Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCCC2
Laser Welded Cylinder LPCTUCA
Waxing Screw LPCWS Abutment Compatibility
Retaining Screw LPCGSH, LPCTSH Component Hexed Abutment Non-Hexed Abutment
Lapping Tool LPCAMI Hexed Yes No
Polishing Protector LPCPP Non-Hexed Yes Yes

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
12
 Overdenture Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

LOCATOR® Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Tissue supported removable overdentures on 2-4 implants Abutment: Titanium Alloy With Titanium Nitride Coating
• Partially edentulous overdentures with one or more implants Housing: Titanium Alloy
• Limited interarch distance Males: Nylon
• Angle correction with up to 40º between divergent implants

3.4mm Seating Surface

Collar Height Item Numbers

1mm IMLOA001 height

2mm IMLOA002
3mm IMLOA003
3.4
4mm IMLOA004
5mm IMLOA005
6mm IMLOA006
4.1mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

1mm ILOA001 height

2mm ILOA002
3mm ILOA003
4.1
4mm ILOA004
5mm ILOA005
6mm ILOA006

Included With Each Abutment:

{
{
{
{
{

Housing Final Male Light Extra White Spacer

and Black Retention Light Ring
Processing Male Retention
Male Male

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
13
 Overdenture Restorations
Certain® Internal Connection

LOCATOR® Abutment Components

Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Retention Males Core Tool / Driver And Driver Tip

Certain Internal Connection

Description Item Numbers

Impression Coping LAIC1

Laboratory Analog LALA1
Extra Light Retention Males (4-pack) - Blue, 1.5lbs/680g LAELM
Extended Range Males (4-pack) - Green, 4lbs/1800g LAERM
*Included With LORHK
Extra Light Retention Extended Range Males - Red, 1.5lbs/680g LELARM
Replacement Housing Kit:
Replacement Males (4-pack) - White, 5lbs/2250g LARMS
Light Retention Replacement Males (4-pack) - Pink, 3lbs/1350g LLRMS
Replacement Housing LOAH
Replacement Housing Kit LORHK*

{
{
{
Core Tool/Abutment Driver LCTDR1 Housing & Black Final Male LOCATOR Light
Processing Male Retention Male
Driver Tip 24mm(L) LOADT4
Driver Tip 30mm(L) LOADT9
1.25mm/.050in. Driver Tip 24mm(L) - used with LCTDR1 RASH4

{
1.25mm/.050in. Driver Tip 30mm(L) - used with LCTDR1 RASH9
{Extra Light White Spacer
Retention Male Ring
LOCATOR Bar Attachment LOAB
LOCATOR Bar Attachment Tap LOAT
LOCATOR Bar Attachment Drill LOAD

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
14
 Provisional Restorations
External Hex Connection

PreFormance® Posts
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional cement-retained restorations PEEK: Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multi-unit restorations will require an evaluation of occlusal forces in lateral and protrusive
excursions and masticatory forces to minimize the load on the provisional restorations
• Guided soft-tissue healing of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated implants

7 7

h h

profile profile

3.4mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

3.8mm 4mm MPFP34 MPAPF34

3.8mm 6mm MPFP36 MPAPF36
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 4mm PFP454 PAPF454

5mm 6mm PFP456 PAPF456
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 4mm WPFP554 PAPF554

5mm 6mm WPFP556 PAPF556
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

6mm 4mm WPFP664 PAPF664

6mm 6mm WPFP666 PAPF666
All PreFormance Posts are packaged with a Titanium Hexed Screw (UNIHT).

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
15
 Provisional Restorations
External Hex Connection

PreFormance® Temporary Cylinders

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional screw-retained restorations PEEK: Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Intraoral use limited to 180 days
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multi-unit restorations will require an evaluation of prosthesis support to
minimize the load on the provisional abutments
• Occlusal loading of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Hexed MPFTC34
Non-Hexed MPFTC32
4.1mm Seating Surface
Hexed PFTC41
Non-Hexed PFTC42 12
5mm Seating Surface
Hexed WPFTC51
Non-Hexed WPFTC52
6mm Seating Surface
Hexed WPFTC61
Non-Hexed WPFTC62

External Hex Connection

All PreFormance Cylinders are packaged with a Titanium Hexed Screw (UNIHT).

Titanium Temporary Cylinders

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit provisional screw-retained restorations Titanium Alloy Connection
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• Maximum angulation of 15°
• Immediate nonocclusal loading of single-unit provisional r­ estorations
• Multi-unit restorations will require an evaluation of prosthesis support to
minimize the load on the provisional abutments
• Occlusal loading of single and multi-unit restorations of integrated
implants for guided tissue healing

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Hexed MMTCS1
Non-Hexed —
4.1mm Seating Surface
Hexed ITCS41
Non-Hexed ITCS42 12

5mm Seating Surface

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.
Hexed WTCS51
Non-Hexed WTCS52
6mm Seating Surface
Hexed WTCS61
Non-Hexed WTCS62

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States. 16
 Cement-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

GingiHue® Posts
Indications:
• Single and multi-unit porcelain fused-to-metal restorations
• Areas of thin tissue where gingival discoloration is possible
• Preparable to follow gingival contours
• Conventional crown and bridge procedures
• Maximum angulation correction of 15º
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm
Material:
Straight Post (Commercially Pure Titanium)
Pre-Angled Post (Titanium Alloy)
7 7
h h

profile profile

3.4mm Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

3.8mm 2mm MAP32G MPAP32G

3.8mm 4mm MAP34G MPAP34G
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 2mm APP452G PAP452G

5mm 4mm APP454G PAP454G
6mm 2mm APP462G PAP462G
6mm 4mm APP464G PAP464G
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

5mm 2mm WPP552G PAP552G

5mm 4mm WPP554G PAP554G
6mm 2mm WPP562G PAP562G
6mm 4mm WPP564G PAP564G
6mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers (Straight) Item Numbers (15° Pre-Angled)

6mm 2mm WPP662G PAP662G

6mm 4mm WPP664G PAP664G

ZiReal® Posts
Indications: Material: Zirconia Ceramic With A
• Single and multi-unit all ceramic restorations 7
Titanium Alloy Interface
• Preparable to follow gingival contours
• Minimum interarch space of 7mm h
• Aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited
profile
• Maximum angulation of 10°
4.1mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

5mm 4mm CAP454

6mm 4mm CAP464
5mm Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

6mm 4mm WCAP564
All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
17
 Cement-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

GingiHue® & ZiReal® Post Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping = Requires the use of Square Driver PSQD0N,
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00 PSQD1N or Driver Tip RASQ3N, RASQ8N

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.8 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 6.0

Pick-Up Impression Coping MIC33 IIC12 IIC60 WIP55 WIP56 WIP66

Twist Lock Impression Coping — IIC45 IIC46 WIT55 WIT56 WIT66
Laboratory Analog MMILA ILA20 ILAW5 ILAW6
Abutment Screw UNISG*, UNIHG, UNIHT
Square Try-In Screw (5-pack) MUNITS UNITS

External Hex Connection

Laboratory Abutment Holder LTAH5 LTAH7
*Recommended

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
18
 Cement-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

UCLA Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Laboratory fabricated custom abutments Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder With Plastic Unitube
• Single and multi-unit restorations
• Minimum interarch space of 6mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited
• Maximum angulation correction of 30°

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) MUCG1C
4.1mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) GUCA1C
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SGUCA1C 11

Castable (Hexed) UNAB1C 4

Castable (Hexed) 25-pack UNA125

Hexed
5mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) WGA51C
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SWGA51C
Castable (Hexed) WPC51C
6mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) WGA61C
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SWGA61C
Castable (Hexed) WPC61C

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
19
 Cement-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

UCLA Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping = Requires the use of Square Driver PSQD0N,
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00 PSQD1N or Driver Tip RASQ3N, RASQ8N

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.8 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 6.0

Pick-Up Impression Coping MIC33 IIC12 IIC60 WIP55 WIP56 WIP66

Twist Lock Impression Coping — IIC45 IIC46 WIT55 WIT56 WIT66
Laboratory Analog MMILA ILA20 ILAW5 ILAW6
Abutment Screw UNISG*, UNIHG, UNIHT
Square Try-In Screw (5-pack) MUNITS UNITS

External Hex Connection

Laboratory Abutment Holder LTAH5 LTAH7
*Recommended

Gold Alloy Cylinder Formulation

Melting Range 1400–1490°C (2550–2710°F)

Solidus 1400°C
Liquidus 1490°C
CTE 13.5 x 10-6 °K at 500°C

An alloy with a CTE of 10-6 °K at 500°C is recommended.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
20
 Screw-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

UCLA Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit restorations Machined Gold Alloy Cylinder With Plastic Unitube
• Minimum interarch space of 4mm
• For aesthetic restorations when tissue is limited

Description Item Numbers

3.4mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) MUCG1C
Gold (Non-Hexed) MUCG2C
Gold (Non-Hexed) —
Castable (Hexed) MUCC1C
Castable (Non-Hexed) MUCC2C
Castable (Non-Hexed) —
4.1mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) GUCA1C 11

Gold (Non-Hexed) GUCA2C 4

Gold (Non-Hexed) —
Hexed
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SGUCA1C
Castable (Hexed) UNAB1C
Castable (Non-Hexed) UNAB2C 11

Castable (Non-Hexed) — 4

Castable (Hexed) 25-pack UNA125 Non-Hexed

Castable (Non-Hexed) 25-pack UNA225

5mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) WGA51C
Gold (Non-Hexed) WGA52C
Gold (Non-Hexed) —
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SWGA51C
Castable (Hexed) WPC51C
Castable (Non-Hexed) WPC52C
Castable (Non-Hexed) —
6mm Seating Surface
Gold (Hexed) WGA61C
Gold (Non-Hexed) WGA62C
Gold (Non-Hexed) —
Gold Standard ZR (Hexed) SWGA61C
Castable (Hexed) WPC61C
Castable (Non-Hexed) WPC62C
All indicated measurements
Castable (Non-Hexed) are in millimeters. —

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
21
 Screw-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

UCLA Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™ Laboratory Abutment
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Abutment Screw Holder

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression Coping = Requires the use of Square Driver PSQD0N,
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Driver ICD00 PSQD1N or Driver Tip RASQ3N, RASQ8N

Description 3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

Emergence Profile 3.8 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 6.0

Pick-Up Impression Coping MIC33 IIC12 IIC60 WIP55 WIP56 WIP66

Twist Lock Impression Coping — IIC45 IIC46 WIT55 WIT56 WIT66
Laboratory Analog MMILA ILA20 ILAW5 ILAW6
Abutment Screw UNISG*, UNIHG, UNIHT
Square Try-In Screw (5-pack) MUNITS UNITS

External Hex Connection

Laboratory Abutment Holder LTAH5 LTAH7
*Recommended

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
22
 Screw-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

Low Profile Abutments

Indications: Material:
• Single and multi-unit screw-retained restorations Titanium Alloy
• Minimum interarch space of 7.5mm
• Minimum tissue height of 1mm
• Angle correction up to 30°
• External hex connection 3.4mm(D) Low Profile Abutments
are limited for use in the anterior

2.2 2.2 2.2

h 2.2
h
h h

3.4mm Seating Surface

Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm LPC341U LPC341 — —

2mm LPC342U LPC342 LPAC3217 —
3mm LPC343U LPC343 — LPAC3330
4mm LPC344U LPC344 LPAC3417 —
5mm — — — LPAC3530
4.1mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm LPC441U LPC441 — —

2mm LPC442U LPC442 LPAC4217 —
3mm LPC443U LPC443 — LPAC4330
4mm LPC444U LPC444 LPAC4417 —
5mm — — — LPAC4530
5mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

Straight (Non-Hexed) Straight (Hexed) 17° Pre-Angled (Hexed) 30° Pre-Angled (Hexed)

1mm LPC541U LPC541 — —

2mm LPC542U LPC542 LPAC5217 —
3mm LPC543U LPC543 — LPAC5330
4mm LPC544U LPC544 LPAC5417 —
5mm — — — LPAC5530

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
23
 Screw-Retained Restorations
External Hex Connection

Low Profile Abutment Components

Pick-Up Twist Lock™
Impression Coping Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Healing Cap Gold And Castable Cylinder

QuickBridge® Temporary Cylinder Polishing Protector Retaining Screw Driver And Driver Tip

= Requires the use of Hex Driver PHD02N, = Requires the use of Impression
PHD03N or Driver Tip RASH3N, RASH8N Coping Driver ICD00

Description 4.8mm Restorative Platform

hexed Á LPCPIC1
Pick-Up
Impression Coping non-hexed Á LPCPIC2
LPCTIC1
hexed Á

External Hex Connection

Twist Lock Impression Coping
non-hexed Á LPCTIC2
QuickBridge Impression Coping LPCRIC
Laboratory Analog LPCLA
hexed Á LPCTC1
Temporary Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCTC2
Healing Cap LPCHC
hexed Á LPCPTC1
PreFormance® Temp. Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCPTC2
QuickBridge LPCQB
QuickBridge Replacement Cap LPCQBCAP
Distal Extension LPCDE
hexed Á LPCGC1
Gold Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCGC2
hexed Á LPCCC1
Castable Cylinder
non-hexed Á LPCCC2
Laser Welded Cylinder LPCTUCA
Waxing Screw LPCWS Abutment Compatibility
Retaining Screw LPCGSH, LPCTSH Component Hexed Abutment Non-Hexed Abutment
Lapping Tool LPCAMI Hexed Yes No
Polishing Protector LPCPP Non-Hexed Yes Yes

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
24
 Overdenture Restorations
External Hex Connection

LOCATOR® Abutments
Indications: Material:
• Tissue supported removable overdentures on 2-4 implants Abutment: Titanium Alloy With Titanium Nitride Coating
• Partially edentulous overdentures with one or more implants Housing: Titanium Alloy
• Limited interarch distance Males: Nylon
• Angle correction with up to 40º between divergent implants

3.4mm Seating Surface

Collar Height Item Numbers

1mm MLOA001
height

2mm MLOA002
3mm MLOA003 3.4
4mm MLOA004
5mm MLOA005
6mm MLOA006
4.1mm Seating Surface
Collar Height Item Numbers

1mm LOA001
height
2mm LOA002
3mm LOA003 4.1

4mm LOA004
5mm LOA005
6mm LOA006

Included With Each Abutment:

Temporary Healing Retention Cylinder
Retains denture with soft-tissue liner.
{
{
{
{
{

Housing Final Male Light Extra White THRC4 THRC6

and Black Retention Light Spacer
Ring 4.1mm(D) x 4mm(H) 4.1mm(D) x 6mm(H)
Processing Male Retention
Male Male

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
25
 Overdenture Restorations
External Hex Connection

LOCATOR® Abutment Components

Impression Coping Laboratory Analog Retention Males Core Tool / Driver And Driver Tip

Description Item Numbers

Impression Coping LAIC1

Laboratory Analog LALA1
Extra Light Retention Males (4-pack) - Blue, 1.5lbs/680g LAELM
Extended Range Males (4-pack) - Green, 4lbs/1800g LAERM
Extra Light Retention Extended Range Males - Red, 1.5lbs/680g LELARM *Included With LORHK
Replacement Males (4-pack) - White, 5lbs/2250g LARMS Replacement Housing Kit:
Light Retention Replacement Males (4-pack) - Pink, 3lbs/1350g LLRMS
Replacement Housing LOAH
Replacement Housing Kit LORHK*

{
{
{

External Hex Connection

Core Tool/Abutment Driver LCTDR1 Housing & Black Final Male LOCATOR Light
Processing Male Retention Male
Driver Tip 24mm(L) LOADT4
Driver Tip 30mm(L) LOADT9
1.25mm/.050in. Driver Tip 24mm(L) - used with LCTDR1 RASH4

{
{
1.25mm/.050in. Driver Tip 30mm(L) - used with LCTDR1 RASH9
Extra Light White Spacer
LOCATOR Bar Attachment LOAB Retention Male Ring

LOCATOR Bar Attachment Tap LOAT

LOCATOR Bar Attachment Drill LOAD

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
26
 Screws
Certain® Internal Connection

Abutment Screws

®
Gold-Tite Screw Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Screw Large Gold-Tite Screw Large Titanium Screw
Screws IUNIHG IZSHG IUNIHT ILRGHG ILRGHT
Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
Torque 20Ncm 20Ncm 20Ncm 20Ncm 20Ncm

For Use With: UCLA Abutment, ZiReal® Post UCLA Abutment, Non-Hexed UCLA Abutment,
GingiHue® Post, GingiHue Post, Non-Hexed Temporary Cylinder,
GingiHue Post 15°, GingiHue Post 15°, BellaTek® Bars
Hexed Temporary Hexed Temporary
Cylinder, Provide® Cylinder, Provide

Retaining Screws

Low Profile Abutment Low Profile Abutment

Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Hexed Screw
Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Screw
Screws LPCGSH GSH20, GSH30, GSH70 LPCTSH TSH30
Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
Torque 10Ncm 10Ncm 10Ncm 10Ncm

For Use With: Low Profile Abutment

Standard, Conical GSH20 - Standard Abutment Low Profile Abutment
and IOL Abutments 6mm(D) X 2mm(H)
Conical Abutment
6mm(D) X 1mm(H)
GSH30 - Standard, Conical
and IOL® Abutments
GSH70 - Standard, Conical
and IOL Abutments

Waxing Screws
& Try-In Screws

Laboratory Waxing Screw Hexed Try-In Screw (5-pack)

Screws IWSU30 IUNITS

Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
For Use With: Pick-Up and Hexed UCLA Abutment,
Impression Copings, GingiHue® Post,
Implant Level GingiHue Post 15°,
Laboratory Procedures Provide Abutment

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
27
 Screws
External Hex Connection

Abutment Screws

Gold-Tite® Square Gold-Tite Hexed Titanium Hexed

Screws UNISG UNIHG UNIHT

Drivers PSQD0N, PSQD1N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASQ3N, RASQ8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
Torque 32–35Ncm 20Ncm 20Ncm
For Use With: UCLA Abutment, GingiHue Post, GingiHue Post 15°, ZiReal Post, Titanium Cylinder
® ®

Retaining Screws

Low Profile Abutment Low Profile Abutment

Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Hexed Screw
Gold-Tite Screw Titanium Screw
Screws LPCGSH GSH20, GSH30, GSH70 LPCTSH TSH30
Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N
Torque 10Ncm 10Ncm 10Ncm 10Ncm

For Use With: Low Profile Abutment

Standard, Conical GSH20 - Standard Abutment Low Profile Abutment
and IOL Abutments 6mm(D) X 2mm(H)
Conical Abutment
6mm(D) X 1mm(H)
GSH30 - Standard, Conical
and IOL® Abutments
GSH70 - Standard, Conical
and IOL Abutments

Waxing Screws
& Try-In Screws

Abutment Waxing Screw/Guide Pin Laboratory Waxing Screw Square Try-In Screw (5-pack)

Screws WSK10, WSK15, WSK30 WSU30 UNITS, MUNITS

Drivers PHD02N, PHD03N PHD02N, PHD03N PSQD0N, PSQD1N
Driver Tips RASH3N, RASH8N RASH3N, RASH8N RASQ3N, RASQ8N
For Use With: Standard and Implant Level UCLA Abutment, GingiHue Post,
Conical Abutments Laboratory Procedures GingiHue Post 15°, ZiReal Post

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
28
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products
Mechanical Driver Kits

NCATD0 Contra Angle Torque Driver Kit NPSDK0 Prosthetic Driver Kit

NCATD0C Contra Angle Torque Driver Kit L-TIRWK Low Torque Indicating Ratchet
Certain® Wrench Kit

NCATD0 NCATD0C NPSDK0 L-TIRWK

Contra Angle Contra Angle Prosthetic Driver Low Torque
Torque Kit Torque Kit Certain Kit Indicating Kit Description Item Numbers

• • • Narrow Posterior Hex Driver, 17mm(L) PHD02N

• • Narrow Posterior Square Driver, 17mm(L) PSQD0N
• • • Contra Angle Torque Driver Body HTD-C
• • • • Narrow Right Angle Hex Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASH3N
• • • Narrow Right Angle Hex Driver Tip, 30mm(L) RASH8N
• • • Narrow Right Angle Square Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASQ3N
• • Narrow Right Angle Square Driver Tip, 30mm(L) RASQ8N
• • • Right Angle Abutment Driver Tip - Steel RASA3
• Contra Angle Torque Controller, 10Ncm TD-10
• • • Contra Angle Torque Controller, 20Ncm TD-20
• • Contra Angle Torque Controller, 35Ncm TD-35
• • • Contra Pre-action Handle CATDH
• • • Prosthetic System Driver Tray PSDT1
• Narrow Impression Coping Driver ICD00
• Posterior Abutment Driver, 17mm(L) PAD00
• Standard Abutment Driver, 24mm(L) PAD24
• Posterior Slotted Screw Driver, 17mm(L) PSD00
• Standard Slotted Screw Driver, 24mm(L) PSD01
• Narrow Standard Slotted Square Driver, 24mm(L) PSQD1N
• Narrow Standard Hex Driver, 24mm(L) PHD03N
• Right Angle Slotted Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASD1
• Right Angle Slotted Driver Tip, 30mm(L) RASD6
• Low Torque Indicating Ratchet Wrench L-TIRW
• Restorative Torque Tray RTI2035TR

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
29
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products
Drivers & Driver Tips

Small Hex Large Hex Square

Length Driver Tip Driver Tip Driver Tip

17mm PHD00N — PHD02N — PSQD0N —

24mm PHD01N RASH2N PHD03N RASH3N PSQD1N RASQ3N
30mm — RASH7N — RASH8N — RASQ8N
For Use With: External Hex Healing Abutments, Square Gold-Tite® Abutment
Cover Screws Abutment Screws, Certain® Screws and Square
Cover Screws and Retaining Screws Try-in Screws

®
Abutment LOCATOR
Length Driver Tip Tip Only

17mm PAD00 — —
24mm PAD24 RASA3 LOADT4
30mm — — LOADT9

For Use With: Low Profile Abutments LOCATOR Abutments

Impression Coping .050” Hex

Length
Driver Only Tip Only MIDTH Manual
Interchangeable
17mm ICD00 — Driver Tip
24mm — RASH4 Handle

30mm — RASH9
For Use With: Twist Lock™ Transfer LOCATOR Abutments with
Impression Copings LOCATOR Core Tools

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
30
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products
Navigator® System Instrumentation Overview

The Navigator System For Guided

Surgery
The Navigator System helps clinicians transform computer-based
planning into practical implant placement with an opportunity for
immediate provisionalization.

The Navigator System features control of hex-orientation to fabricate

and deliver provisional restorations immediately following surgery.
Tapered Navigator Surgical Kit
This unique hex-orientation feature is especially beneficial when
immediately loading single tooth cases, cement-retained cases and
cases where angulation correction is required.

The Navigator System enables placement and restoration of

the following Tapered and Parallel Walled
Implant Systems:

• Tapered/Parallel Walled Certain® 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants

Tapered Navigator Laboratory Kit • Certain PREVAIL® 3/4/3, 4/3, 4/5/4 and 5/4 Implants

• Certain Tapered PREVAIL 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

An integral part of the Navigator System is the Navigator Laboratory

Kit, which contains easy-to-identify components needed to fabricate a
master cast and provisional prosthesis prior to the day of surgery. The
Navigator Laboratory Kit provides you with the opportunity to:

• Treat patients for immediate-load cases

• Be part of a collaborative approach to comprehensive patient
Parallel Walled Navigator Surgical Kit
treatment

• Embrace emerging technology with open architecture compatibility

that provides freedom to choose among leading planning software
solutions

Parallel Walled Navigator Laboratory Kit

31
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products
Tapered Navigator® SGTILKIT Tapered Navigator Laboratory Kit

Laboratory Kit
For Certain® Tapered Implants Including:
• Certain 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants
• Certain Tapered PREVAIL® 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

SGTILKIT
Surgical Kit Description Item Numbers

• Tapered Navigator Laboratory Tray SGTLTRAY

• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) - Short MSGIAMS
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) - Long MSGIAML
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) - Short SGIAM4S
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) - Long SGIAM4L
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) - Short SGIAM5S
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) - Long SGIAM5L

Parallel Walled Navigator SGLKIT Navigator Laboratory Kit

Laboratory Kit
For Certain Parallel Walled Implants Including:
• Certain 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants
• Certain Tapered PREVAIL 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

SGLKIT
Laboratory Kit Description Item Numbers

• Navigator Laboratory Tray SGLTRAY

• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 1(L) MSGIAM1
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 2(L) MSGIAM2
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 3(L) MSGIAM3
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 4(L) MSGIAM4
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 1(L) SGIAM41
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 2(L) SGIAM42
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 3(L) SGIAM43
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 4(L) SGIAM44
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 1(L) SGIAM51
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 2(L) SGIAM52
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 3(L) SGIAM53
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 4(L) SGIAM54

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
32
 Miscellaneous Restorative Products

Laboratory Tools
RH600 Reamer With Handle IQSA01 Certain QuickSeat ®
Lapping Tool For Castable UCLA Abutment
With Guide Activator Tool
IRH600
Certain®
IMLT150 MLT150 3.4mm(D)
ILT150 LT150 4.1mm(D)
ILT150 WLT10 5mm(D)

Polishing Protector, UCLA Abutment Laboratory Abutment Holder

IPPMM1 PPMM1 3.4mm(D) ILTAH57 LTAH5 3.4mm(D)

IPPIA3 PPIA3 4.1mm(D) ILTAH57 LTAH7 4.1mm(D)
IPPIA5 WPP50 5mm(D) ILTAH57 LTAH7 5mm(D)
IPPIA6 WPP60 6mm(D) ILTAH57 LTAH7 6mm(D)

Miscellaneous Items
L-TIRW AG900 TMP80 Tissue Measuring Post
Low Torque Indicating Ratchet Wrench Prosthetic Angle Guide Kit
L-TIRWK Low Torque Indicating Ratchet Wrench Kit
15°
C9980
Standard ISO
1797 Adapter
25°
8
C9981
6
Short ISO 4
1797 Adapter 2
35°

ISRT10 Certain Screw Removal Kit SRT10 Screw Removal Kit

ISRT01 ISRT06 ISRT07 IWSU30 SRT01 SRT02 SRT03 SRT04

ISRT05 SRT05

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
33
 Patient Education Products

Description Item Numbers

Patient Ed Model - DIEM 2 (4-unit)

®
DIEM2-4UNIT
Patient Ed Model - DIEM 2 (6-unit) DIEM2-6UNIT
Patient Ed Model - OSSEOTITE Implant
®
EXHEXMOD
Patient Ed Model - LOCATOR® PEMODLOC
Patient Ed Model - Single/Multiple Teeth PEMODSM
Patient Ed Brochure - Bone Loss (25-pack) ART885
Patient Ed Brochure - Multiple Teeth (25-pack) ART887
Patient Ed Brochure - Implant Retained, Fixed (25-pack) ART888
Patient Ed Brochure - Implant Retained, LOCATOR (25-pack) ART889
Patient Ed Brochure - Implant Retained, Bar (25-pack) ART890
Patient Ed Brochure - Immediate Teeth Replacement, DIEM (25-pack) ART929
Patient Ed Care Card (25-pack) ART930
Patient Ed Flip Chart ART943
Patient Ed DVD - Multilingual Version ART951EUR
Patient Ed Brochure - Bone Loss (Spanish Version) ART957S
Patient Ed Awareness and Education Poster ART962
Patient Ed Quad-fold Brochure with Holder (25-pack) ART1154
Patient Ed General Brochure (25-pack) ART1157
Patient Ed Regenerative Brochure ART1178

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
34
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#
AG900 PROSTHETIC ANGLE GUIDE KIT (9-PIECE SET) 33 IILAW5 CERTAIN IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 5MM(D) 4,6,10
APP452G GINGIHUE® POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 IILAW6 CERTAIN IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 6MM(D) 4,6,10
APP454G GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 IITCS41 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (HEXED) CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) W/HEXED SCREW 2
APP462G GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 IITCS42 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  2
APP464G GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 W/LARGE DIA. SCREW

ART1178 PATIENT ED REGENERATIVE BROCHURE 34 ILA20 IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 4.1MM(D) 18,20,22

ART885 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - BONE LOSS (25-PACK) 34 ILAW5 IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 5MM(D) 18,20,22

ART887 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - MULTIPLE TEETH (25-PACK) 34 ILAW6 IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 6MM(D) 18,20,22

ART888 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMPLANT RETAINED, FIXED (25-PACK) 34 ILOA001 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 13

ART889 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMPLANT RETAINED, LOCATOR (25-PACK)

®
34 ILOA002 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 13

ART890 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMPLANT RETAINED, BAR (25-PACK) 34 ILOA003 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 13

ART929 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMMEDIATE TEETH REPLACEMENT, DIEM (25-PACK)

®
34 ILOA004 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 13

ART930 PATIENT ED CARE CARD (25-PACK) 34 ILOA005 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(H) 13

ART943 PATIENT ED FLIP CHART 34 ILOA006 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(H) 13

ART951EUR PATIENT ED DVD - MULTILINGUAL VERSION 34 ILPAC3217 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11

ART957S PATIENT ED BROCHURE - BONE LOSS (SPANISH VERSION) 34 ILPAC3330 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11

ART962 PATIENT ED AWARENESS AND EDUCATION POSTER 34 ILPAC3417 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11

C9980 LOW TORQUE INDICATING RATCHET WRENCH 33 ILPAC3530 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(H) 11
STANDARD ISO 1797 ADAPTER ILPAC4217 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
C9981 LOW TORQUE INDICATING RATCHET WRENCH 33 ILPAC4330 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
SHORT ISO 1797 ADAPTER ILPAC4417 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
CAP454 ZIREAL® POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 ILPAC4530 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(H) 11
CAP464 ZIREAL POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 ILPAC5217 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
CATDH CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE DRIVER HANDLE 29 ILPAC5330 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
DIEM2-4UNIT PATIENT ED MODEL - DIEM 2 (4-UNIT) 34 ILPAC5417 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
DIEM2-6UNIT PATIENT ED MODEL - DIEM 2 (6-UNIT) 34 ILPAC5530 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 5MM(H) 11
EXHEXMOD PATIENT ED MODEL - OSSEOTITE® IMPLANT 34 ILPC341 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
GSH20 GOLD-TITE® (HEXED) RETAINING SCREW 2MM 27,28 ILPC341U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
GSH30 GOLD-TITE (HEXED) RETAINING SCREW 3MM 27,28 ILPC342 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
GSH70 GOLD-TITE (HEXED) RETAINING SCREW 7MM 27,28 ILPC342U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
GUCA1C UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 19,21 ILPC343 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
GUCA2C UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 21 ILPC343U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
HTD-C CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE DRIVER BODY 29 ILPC344 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IAPP452G CERTAIN® GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3 ILPC344U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IAPP454G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3 ILPC441 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
IAPP462G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3 ILPC441U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
IAPP464G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3 ILPC442 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
IAPP472G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3 ILPC442U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
IAPP474G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 4.1MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3 ILPC443 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
ICD00 NARROW IMPRESSION COPING DRIVER 29,30 ILPC443U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
IGUCA1C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 5,9 ILPC444 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IGUCA2C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  9 ILPC444U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IGUCA2T CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  9 ILPC541 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW
ILPC541U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 1MM(H) 11
IIC12 IMPLANT EP® PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 18,20,22
ILPC542 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
IIC45 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK™ COPING 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 18,20,22
ILPC542U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 11
IIC46 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK COPING 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
ILPC543 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
IIC60 IMPLANT EP PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
ILPC543U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 11
IIIC12 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10
ILPC544 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE TWO-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IIIC41 CERTAIN STRAIGHT PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) 4,6,10
ILPC544U CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 11
IIIC42 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) 4,6,10
ILRGHG CERTAIN GOLD-TITE (HEXED) LARGE SCREW 10,27
IIIC44 CERTAIN STRAIGHT TWIST LOCK COPING 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) 4,6,10
ILRGHT CERTAIN TITANIUM (HEXED) LARGE SCREW 10,27
IIIC45 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10
ILT150 CERTAIN LAPPING TOOL FOR CASTABLE UCLA ABUTMENT 33
IIIC46 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10 W/GUIDE 4MM(D)
IIIC60 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10 ILTAH57 CERTAIN LABORATORY ABUTMENT HOLDER FOR ALL  4,6,10,33
IILA20 CERTAIN IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 4.1MM(D) 4,6,10 CERTAIN PLATFORMS

35
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

IMAP32G CERTAIN® GINGIHUE® POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3 IPA5255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7
IMAP34G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)

IMIC30 CERTAIN EP® PICK-UP COPING 3.4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) 4,6,10 IPA5340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7
X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMIC33 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) 4,6,10
IPA5355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7
IMIC35 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMIT33 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) 4,6,10 IPA5440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7
IMIT35 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10 X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMLOA001 CERTAIN LOCATOR® ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 13 IPA5455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7
IMLOA002 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 13 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)

IMLOA003 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 13 IPA6140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7
X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMLOA004 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 13
IPA6155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7
IMLOA005 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(H) 13 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMLOA006 CERTAIN LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 6MM(H) 13 IPA6240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7
IMLT150 CERTAIN LAPPING TOOL FOR CASTABLE UCLA ABUTMENT  33 X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
W/GUIDE 3.4MM(D) IPA6255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7
IMMILA CERTAIN IMPLANT LAB ANALOG 3.4MM(D) 4,6,10 X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMMTCS1 CERTAIN TEMPORARY HEXED CYLINDER  2 IPA6340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7
3.4MM(D) W/HEXED SCREW X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMPAP32G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 3 IPA6355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMPAP34G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 3 IPA6440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMPAPF34 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE® 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 1 IPA6455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 6MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE)
IMPAPF36 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 1 IPAP452G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H) 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IMPFP34 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST  1 IPAP454G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IMPFP36 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST  1 IPAP462G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H) 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IMPFTC32 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 3.4MM(D)  2 IPAP464G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
IMPFTC34 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 2 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)

IMUCC2C CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 9 IPAP472G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
4.1MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IMUCC2T CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 9
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW IPAP474G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
4.1MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IMUCG1C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 5,9
IPAP552G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
IMUCG2C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 9 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IMUCG2T CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 9 IPAP554G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA4140 PROVIDE® ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP562G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 4MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IPA4155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP564G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 5.5MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA4240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP572G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 4MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IPA4255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP574G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 5.5MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA4340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP662G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 4MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IPA4355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 3MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP664G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 5.5MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA4440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP672G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 4MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 6MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H)
IPA4455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 4.1MM(PLATFORM) X 4MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAP674G CERTAIN GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  3
X 5.5MM(POST) X 4.8MM(PROFILE) 6MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA5140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAPF454 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 1
X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE) 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IPA5155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 1MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAPF456 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1
X 5.5MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE) 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H)
IPA5240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT - 5MM(PLATFORM) X 2MM(COLLAR)  7 IPAPF554 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1
X 4MM(POST) X 6.5MM(PROFILE) 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
36
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

IPAPF556 CERTAIN® PREFORMANCE® 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1 IWPFTC52 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 5MM(D)  2
5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) IWPFTC61 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 6MM(D) 2
IPAPF664 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1 IWPFTC62 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 6MM(D)  2
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IWPP552G CERTAIN GINGIHUE® POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3
IPAPF666 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  1
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) IWPP554G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IPFP454 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 1 IWPP562G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3

IPFP456 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 1 IWPP564G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IPFTC41 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 2 IWPP572G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3

IPFTC42 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  2 IWPP574G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IPPIA3 CERTAIN UCLA POLISHING PROTECTOR 4.1MM(D) 33 IWPP662G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3

IPPIA5 CERTAIN UCLA POLISHING PROTECTOR 5MM(D) 33 IWPP664G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IPPIA6 CERTAIN UCLA POLISHING PROTECTOR 6MM(D) 33 IWPP672G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 3

IPPMM1 CERTAIN UCLA POLISHING PROTECTOR 3.4MM(D) 33 IWPP674G CERTAIN GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 3

IQSA01 CERTAIN QUICKSEAT ACTIVATOR TOOL

®
9,33 IWSU30 CERTAIN WAXING SCREW W/GUIDE PIN 27,33

IRH600 CERTAIN REAMER WITH HANDLE 33 IWTCS51 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (HEXED) CYLINDER 5MM(D) W/HEXED SCREW 2

ISRT01 CERTAIN HAND TAP 33 IWTCS52 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) CYLINDER 5MM(D)  2
W/LARGE DIA. SCREW
ISRT05 CERTAIN GUIDE HANDLE 33
IWTCS61 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (HEXED) CYLINDER 6MM(D) W/HEXED SCREW 2
ISRT06 CERTAIN SCREW REMOVAL TOOL 33
IWTCS62 CERTAIN TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) CYLINDER 6MM(D)  2
ISRT07 MANUAL REVERSING TOOL 33 W/LARGE DIA. SCREW
ISRT10 CERTAIN SCREW REMOVAL KIT 33 IZIRTS CERTAIN ZIRCONIA TRY-IN (HEXED) SCREW 4
ITCS41 TEMPORARY (HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  16 IZSHG CERTAIN ZIREAL® GOLD-TITE (HEXED) SCREW 4,27
ITCS42 TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) 16 LAELM LOCATOR® EXTRA LIGHT RETENTION MALES (4-PACK) 14,26
IUNAB2C CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  9 LAERM LOCATOR EXTENDED RANGE MALES - GREEN, 4LBS/1800G (4-PACK) 14,26
IUNAB2T CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  9 LAIC1 LOCATOR ABUTMENT IMPRESSION COPING 14,26
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW
LALA1 LOCATOR ABUTMENT LAB ANALOG 14,26
IUNIHG CERTAIN GOLD-TITE® (HEXED) SCREW 4,6,8,10,27
LARMS LOCATOR REPLACEMENT MALES - WHITE, 5LBS/2250G (4-PACK) 14,26
IUNIHT CERTAIN TITANIUM (HEXED) SCREW 4,6,8,10,27
LCTDR1 LOCATOR CORE TOOL/ABUTMENT DRIVER 14,26
IUNITS CERTAIN TRY-IN (HEXED) SCREW (5-PACK) 3.4, 4.1, 5, 6MM(D) 4.6.10,27
LELARM EXTRA LIGHT RETENTION EXTENDED RANGE MALES - 14,26
IWGA51C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 5,9 RED, 1.5LBS/680G
IWGA52C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D)  9 LLRMS LOCATOR LIGHT RETENTION REPLACEMENT MALES - 14,26
IWGA52T CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D)  9 PINK, 3LBS/1350G (4-PACK) 
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW LOA001 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 25
IWGA61C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 5,9 LOA002 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 25
IWGA62C CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D)  9 LOA003 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 25
IWGA62T CERTAIN UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 9 LOA004 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 25
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW
LOA005 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(H) 25
IWIP50 CERTAIN STRAIGHT PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10
LOA006 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(H) 25
IWIP55 CERTAIN EP® PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 5.6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOAB LOCATOR BAR ATTACHMENT 14,26
IWIP56 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOAD LOCATOR BAR ATTACHMENT DRILL 14,26
IWIP60 CERTAIN STRAIGHT PICK-UP COPING 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOADT4 LOCATOR ABUTMENT DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 14,26,30
IWIP66 CERTAIN EP PICK-UP COPING 6MM(D) X 6.6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOADT9 LOCATOR ABUTMENT DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 14,26,30
IWIT50 CERTAIN STRAIGHT TRANSFER COPING 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) 4,6,10
LOAH LOCATOR REPLACEMENT HOUSING 14,26
IWIT55 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK™ COPING 5MM(D) X 5.6MM(P) 4,6,10
LOAT LOCATOR BAR ATTACHMENT TAP 14,26
IWIT56 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10
LORHK LOCATOR REPLACEMENT HOUSING KIT 14,26
IWIT60 CERTAIN STRAIGHT TRANSFER COPING 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) 4,6,10
LPAC3217 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23
IWIT66 CERTAIN EP TWIST LOCK COPING 6MM(D) X 6.6MM(P) 4,6,10
LPAC3330 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23
IWPC52C CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 9
LPAC3417 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23
IWPC52T CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 9
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW LPAC3530 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(H) 23

IWPC62C CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 9 LPAC4217 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23

IWPC62T CERTAIN UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D)  9 LPAC4330 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23
W/LARGE DIAMETER TITANIUM SCREW LPAC4417 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23
IWPFP554 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 1 LPAC4530 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(H) 23
IWPFP556 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 1 LPAC5217 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23
IWPFP664 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 1 LPAC5330 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23
IWPFP666 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 1 LPAC5417 LOW PROFILE 17° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23
IWPFTC51 CERTAIN PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 5MM(D)  2 LPAC5530 LOW PROFILE 30° PRE-ANGLED ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 5MM(H) 23
37
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

LPC341 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MAP34G GINGIHUE POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
LPC341U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MIC33 PICK-UP IMPRESSION COPING 3.4MM(D) 18,20,22
LPC342 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MIDTH MANUAL INTERCHANGEABLE DRIVER TIP HANDLE 30
LPC342U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MLOA001 LOCATOR® ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 25
LPC343 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 MLOA002 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 2MM(H) 25
LPC343U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 MLOA003 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(H) 25
LPC344 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 MLOA004 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 25
LPC344U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 MLOA005 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(H) 25
LPC441 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MLOA006 LOCATOR ABUTMENT 3.4MM(D) X 6MM(H) 25
LPC441U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MLT150 LAPPING TOOL FOR CASTABLE UCLA ABUTMENT W/GUIDE 3.4MM(D) 33
LPC442 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MMILA LAB ANALOG 3.4MM(D) 18,20,22
LPC442U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MMTCS1 TEMPORARY (HEXED) CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) W/RETENTION  16
LPC443 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 AND (HEXED) SCREW

LPC443U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 MPAP32G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  17
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H)
LPC444 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23
MPAP34G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  17
LPC444U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H)
LPC541 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 1MM(H) 23 MPAPF34 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  15
LPC542 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H)
LPC542U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 2MM(H) 23 MPAPF36 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST  15
LPC543 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H)

LPC543U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 3MM(H) 23 MPFP34 PREFORMANCE POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H)  15

LPC544 LOW PROFILE TW0-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 MPFP36 PREFORMANCE POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15

LPC544U LOW PROFILE ONE-PIECE ABUTMENT 5MM(D) X 4MM(H) 23 MPFTC32 PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 3.4MM(D)  16

LPCAMI LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT LAPPING TOOL 12,24 MPFTC34 PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 3.4MM(D)  16

LPCCC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) CASTABLE CYLINDER 12,24 MSGIAM1 NAVIGATOR® CERTAIN® ANALOG MOUNT 3.4MM(D) X 1(L) 32

LPCCC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) CASTABLE CYLINDER 12,24 MSGIAM2 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 3.4MM(D) X 2(L) 32

LPCDE LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT DISTAL EXTENSION 12,24 MSGIAM3 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 3.4MM(D) X 3(L) 32

LPCGC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) GOLD CYLINDER 12,24 MSGIAM4 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 3.4MM(D) X 4(L) 32

LPCGC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) GOLD CYLINDER 12,24 MUCC1C UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 21

LPCGSH LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT GOLD-TITE® RETAINING SCREW 12,24,27,28 MUCC2C UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 21

LPCTSH LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT TITANIUM RETAINING SCREW 12,24,27,28 MUCG1C UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 19,21

LPCHC LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT HEALING CAP 12,24 MUCG2C UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 3.4MM(D) 21

LPCLA LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT LAB ANALOG 12,24 MUNITS SQUARE TRY-IN SCREW (5-PACK), 3.4MM(D)  18,20,22,28

LPCPIC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) PICK-UP IMPRESSION COPING 12,24 NCATD0 CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE DRIVER KIT 29

LPCPIC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) PICK-UP IMPRESSION 12,24 NCATD0C CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE DRIVER KIT CERTAIN 29
COPING NPSDK0 PROSTHETIC DRIVER KIT 29
LPCPP LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT POLISHING PROTECTOR 12,24 PAA484 PROVIDE® ABUTMENT ANALOG 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
LPCPTC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) PREFORMANCE® TEMPORARY 12,24 PAA485 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG 4.8MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
CYLINDER PAA654 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG 6.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
LPCPTC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) PREFORMANCE TEMPORARY  12,24 PAA655 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG 6.5MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
CYLINDER
PAAP48 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG WITH PIN 4.8MM(P)  8
LPCQB LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT QUICKBRIDGE®12,24
PAAP65 PROVIDE ABUTMENT ANALOG WITH PIN 6.5MM(P) 8
LPCQBCAP LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT QUICKBRIDGE REPLACEMENT CAP 12,24
PAD00 POSTERIOR ABUTMENT DRIVER 17MM(L) 29,30
LPCRIC LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT QUICKBRIDGE IMPRESSION COPING 12,24
PAD24 STANDARD ABUTMENT DRIVER 24MM(L) 29,30
LPCTC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 12,24
PAK4140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 7
LPCTC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 12,24 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 1MM(H) - 4MM POST
LPCTIC1 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (HEXED) TRANSFER IMPRESSION COPING 12,24 PAK4155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
LPCTIC2 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT (NON-HEXED) TRANSFER 12,24 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 1MM(H) - 5.5MM POST
IMPRESSION COPING PAK4240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
LPCTSH LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT TITANIUM RETAINING SCREW 12,24 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) - 4MM POST
LPCTUCA LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT LASER WELDED CYLINDER 12,24 PAK4255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
LPCWS LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT WAXING SCREW 12,24 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) - 5.5MM POST

LT150 LAPPING TOOL FOR CASTABLE UCLA ABUTMENT W/GUIDE 4MM(D) 33 PAK4340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 7
4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 3MM(H) - 4MM POST
LTAH5 LABORATORY ABUTMENT HOLDER FOR 3.4MM(D) 18,20,22,33
PAK4355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
LTAH7 LABORATORY HOLDER FOR 4.1, 5, 6MM(D) 18,20,22,33 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 3MM(H) - 5.5MM POST
L-TIRW LOW TORQUE INDICATING RATCHET WRENCH 29,33 PAK4440 PROVIDE® ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7
MAP32G GINGIHUE® POST 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) - 4MM POST
38
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

PAK4455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT  7 PIC484 PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
4.1MM(D) X 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PIC484H PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING WITH HOLES 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
PAK5140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PIC485 PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING 4.8MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
X 1MM(H) - 4MM POST
PIC485H PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING WITH HOLES 4.8MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
PAK5155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7
X 1MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PIC654 PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING 6.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8

PAK5240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PIC654H PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING WITH HOLES 6.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
X 2MM(H) - 4MM POST PIC655 PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING 6.5MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
PAK5255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PIC655H PROVIDE IMPRESSION COPING WITH HOLES 6.5MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
X 2MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PPC484 PROVIDE PROTECTION CAP 4.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8
PAK5340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 4.8MM(P)  7 PPC485 PROVIDE PROTECTION CAP 4.8MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
X 3MM(H) - 4MM POST

PAK5355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7
X 3MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PPC654 PROVIDE PROTECTION CAP 6.5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 8

PAK5440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 4.8MM(P)  7 PPC655 PROVIDE PROTECTION CAP 6.5MM(P) X 5.5MM(H) 8
X 4MM(H) - 4MM POST PPIA3 POLISHING PROTECTOR UCLA ABUTMENT 4.1MM(D) 33
PAK5455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 5MM(D) X 4.8MM(P)  7 PPMM1 POLISHING PROTECTOR UCLA 3.4MM(D) 33
X 4MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PRK484 PROVIDE ABUTMENT RESTORATIVE KIT 4.8MM(P) - 4MM POST 7
PAK6140 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PRK485 PROVIDE ABUTMENT RESTORATIVE KIT 4.8MM(P) - 5.5MM POST 7
X 1MM(H) - 4MM POST
PRK654 PROVIDE ABUTMENT RESTORATIVE KIT 6.5MM(P) - 4MM POST 7
PAK6155 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7
X 1MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PRK655 PROVIDE ABUTMENT RESTORATIVE KIT 6.5MM(P) - 5.5MM POST 7

PAK6240 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PSD00 POSTERIOR SLOTTED SCREW DRIVER - SLOTTED 17MM(L) 29
X 2MM(H) - 4MM POST PSD01 STANDARD SLOTTED SCREW DRIVER - SLOTTED 24MM(L) 29
PAK6255 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PSDT1 PROSTHETIC SYSTEM DRIVER TRAY 29
X 2MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PSQD0N NARROW POSTERIOR SQUARE DRIVER 17MM(L) 28,29,30
PAK6340 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PSQD1N NARROW STANDARD SLOTTED SQUARE DRIVER 24MM(L) 28,29,30
X 3MM(H) - 4MM POST
PUA48M PROVIDE TEMPORARY CYLINDER MULTI-UNIT - 4.8MM PROFILE 8
PAK6355 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7
X 3MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PUA48S PROVIDE TEMPORARY CYLINDER SINGLE-UNIT - 4.8MM PROFILE 8

PAK6440 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PUA65M PROVIDE TEMPORARY CYLINDER MULTI-UNIT - 6.5MM PROFILE 8
X 4MM(H) - 4MM POST PUA65S PROVIDE TEMPORARY CYLINDER SINGLE-UNIT - 6.5MM PROFILE 8
PAK6455 PROVIDE ABUTMENT PLACEMENT KIT 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(P)  7 PWS48M PROVIDE WAXING SLEEVE 4.8MM(P) MULTI-UNIT 8
X 4MM(H) - 5.5MM POST PWS48S PROVIDE WAXING SLEEVE 4.8MM(P) SINGLE-UNIT 8
PAP452G GINGIHUE® 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 PWS65M PROVIDE WAXING SLEEVE 6.5MM(P) MULTI-UNIT 8
PAP454G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 PWS65S PROVIDE WAXING SLEEVE 6.5MM(P) SINGLE-UNIT 8
PAP462G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 RASA3 RIGHT ANGLE ABUTMENT DRIVER TIP - STEEL 29,30
PAP464G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 RASD1 RIGHT ANGLE SLOTTED DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 29
PAP552G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 RASD6 RIGHT ANGLE SLOTTED DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 29
PAP554G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 RASH2N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE SMALL (HEXED) DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 30
PAP562G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 RASH3N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE LARGE (HEXED) DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 27,28,29,30
PAP564G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 RASH4 RIGHT ANGLE DRIVER TIP 50 IN. (HEXED) 24MM(L) 14,26,30
PAP662G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17 RASH7N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE SMALL (HEXED) DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 30
PAP664G GINGIHUE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17 RASH8N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE LARGE (HEXED) DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 27,28,29,30
PAPF454 PREFORMANCE® 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15 RASH9 RIGHT ANGLE DRIVER TIP 50 IN. (HEXED) 30MM(L) 14,26,30
PAPF456 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15 RASQ3N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE SQUARE DRIVER TIP 24MM(L) 28,29,30
PAPF554 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15 RASQ8N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE SQUARE DRIVER TIP 30MM(L) 28,29,30
PAPF556 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15 RH600 REAMER/HANDLE FOR SGC34, UNAB1/2 33
PAPF664 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15 RTI2035TR RESTORATIVE TORQUE INDICATOR TRAY 29
PAPF666 PREFORMANCE 15° PRE-ANGLED POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15 SGIAM41 NAVIGATOR® CERTAIN® ANALOG MOUNT 4.1MM(D) X 1(L) 32
PEMODLOC PATIENT ED MODEL - LOCATOR®34 SGIAM42 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 4.1MM(D) X 2(L) 32
PEMODSM PATIENT ED MODEL - SINGLE/MULTIPLE TEETH 34 SGIAM43 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 4.1MM(D) X 3(L) 32
PFP454 PREFORMANCE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15 SGIAM44 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 4.1MM(D) X 4(L) 32
PFP456 PREFORMANCE POST 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15 SGIAM51 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 5MM(D) X 1(L) 32
PFTC41 PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  16 SGIAM52 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 5MM(D) X 2(L) 32
PFTC42 PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  16 SGIAM53 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 5MM(D) X 3(L) 32
PHD00N NARROW POSTERIOR SMALL HEX DRIVER 17MM(L) 30 SGIAM54 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT 5MM(D) X 4(L) 32
PHD01N NARROW STANDARD SMALL HEX DRIVER 24MM(L) 30 SGLKIT NAVIGATOR LABORATORY KIT 32
PHD02N NARROW POSTERIOR LARGE HEX DRIVER 17MM(L) 27,28,29,30 SGLTRAY NAVIGATOR® LABORATORY TRAY 32
PHD03N NARROW STANDARD LARGE HEX DRIVER 24MM(L) 27,28,29,30 SGUCA1C UCLA GOLD STANDARD ZR (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 4.1MM(D)  19,21
39
Index
Cat.# DescriptionPage# Cat.# DescriptionPage#

SRT01 HAND TAP FOR SRT10 33 WSK10 ABUTMENT WAXING SCREW/GUIDE PIN-KNURLED 10MM(L) 28
SRT02 HAND DRILL 14MM(D) BRONZE DRILL FOR SRT10 33 WSK15 ABUTMENT WAXING SCREW/GUIDE PIN-KNURLED 15MM(L) 28
SRT03 HAND DRILL 1.18MM(D) SILVER DRILL FOR SRT10 33 WSK30 ABUTMENT WAXING SCREW/GUIDE PIN-KNURLED 20MM(L) 28
SRT04 EXTRACTING DRILL - ISO LATCH FOR SRT10 33 WSU30 LABORATORY WAXING SCREW/GUIDE PIN-KNURLED 28
SRT05 GUIDE HANDLE FOR SRT10 33 WTCS51 TEMPORARY (HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 5MM(D)  16
SRT10 SCREW REMOVING KIT 33 WTCS52 TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 5MM(D)  16
SWGA51C UCLA GOLD STANDARD ZR (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 19,21 WTCS61 TEMPORARY (HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 6MM(D)  16
SWGA61C UCLA GOLD STANDARD ZR (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 19,21 WTCS62 TEMPORARY (NON-HEXED) IMPLANT CYLINDER 6MM(D)  16
TD-10 CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE CONTROLLER 10NCM 29
TD-20 CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE CONTROLLER 20NCM 29
TD-35 CONTRA ANGLE TORQUE CONTROLLER 32NCM 29
THRC4 TEMPORARY HEALING RETENTION CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 25
THRC6 TEMPORARY HEALING RETENTION CYLINDER 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(H) 25


TMP80 TISSUE MEASURING POST 33
UNA125 UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER (25-PACK) 19,21
UNA225 UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER (25-PACK) 21
UNAB1C UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 19,21
UNAB2C UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 21
UNIHG GOLD-TITE® (HEXED) SCREW 18,20,22,28
UNIHT TITANIUM (HEXED) SCREW 18,20,22,28
UNISG GOLD-TITE SQUARE SCREW 18,20,22,28
UNITS SQUARE TRY-IN SCREW (5-PACK) 4.1, 5, 6MM(D) 18,20,22,28
WCAP564 ZIREAL® POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
WGA51C UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 19,21
WGA52C UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 21
WGA61C UCLA GOLD (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 19,21
WGA62C UCLA GOLD (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 21
WIP55 IMPLANT EP® PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) 18,20,22
WIP56 IMPLANT EP PICK-UP COPING 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
WIP66 IMPLANT EP PICK-UP COPING 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
WIT55 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK™ COPING 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) 18,20,22
WIT56 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK COPING 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
WIT66 IMPLANT EP TWIST LOCK COPING 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) 18,20,22
WLT10 LAPPING TOOL FOR WIDE DIAMETER IMPLANTS 33
WPC51C UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 19,21
WPC52C UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 5MM(D) 21
WPC61C UCLA CASTABLE (HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 19,21
WPC62C UCLA CASTABLE (NON-HEXED) ABUTMENT CYLINDER 6MM(D) 21
WPFP554 PREFORMANCE® POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15
WPFP556 PREFORMANCE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15
WPFP664 PREFORMANCE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 15
WPFP666 PREFORMANCE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 15
WPFTC51 PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 5MM  16
WPFTC52 PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 5MM  16
WPFTC61 PREFORMANCE (HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 6MM  16
WPFTC62 PREFORMANCE (NON-HEXED) TEMPORARY CYLINDER 6MM  16
WPP50 POLISHING PROTECTOR 5MM(D) 33
WPP552G GINGIHUE® POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17
WPP554G GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
WPP562G GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17
WPP564G GINGIHUE POST 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
WPP60 POLISHING PROTECTOR 6MM(D) 33
WPP662G GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 17
WPP664G GINGIHUE POST 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 17
40
41
 Ordering Form
Customer Account#
Date: ____/____/____

___________________________
Representative taking order
Customer Name: Specialty:

Bill To:________________________________________________ Customer P.O. #: _____________________________________

______________________________________________________
Method of Shipment: _____FedEx _____UPS
Phone #: ( )______________________________________
_____Next Day by 8:30am
Ship To:______________________________________________
_____Next Day by 10:30am
______________________________________________________
_____Next Day - Afternoon
______________________________________________________
_____Two Day
Phone #: ( )______________________________________ _____Ground
_____Other_____________
Would you like to receive information via email about
BIOMET 3i’s Products, Services and Events?
Yes No Method of Payment:
Credit Card: _____Visa _____MasterCard _____AMEX
Email Address:____________________________________
Card #:____________________________________________
Special Instructions: Expiration Date:_____________________________________

C.O.D.
Contact Name:
Bill - Net 30

Product No. Quantity Description Discount Unit Price Total

Date: Order Number: Order Total: Customer Service Representative:

BIOMET 3i
4555 Riverside Drive
Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33410 Thank you for your patronage!
Phone: 800-342-5454 • Fax: 561-776-1272
Website: www.biomet3i.com 42
43
Ordering Information

Some products may not be available outside the U.S.A. EXCHANGE POLICY. BIOMET 3i Products may be exchanged within
Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU. 180 days of the invoice date, without a re-stocking fee, for other
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis. BIOMET 3i Products of equal or lesser value within the same product
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich. family as determined by BIOMET 3i (ex. implant for implant, abutment
for abutment, membrane for membrane). BIOMET 3i Products may be
To Place an Order: exchanged within 180 days of the invoice date for other BIOMET 3i
Contact your local BIOMET 3i Representative or call: Products of greater value within the same product family as determined
BIOMET 3i Customer Service by BIOMET 3i (ex. implant for implant, abutment for abutment, membrane
for membrane), with the price differential paid by the Purchaser. In both
Monday–Thursday 8am–8pm (EST)
cases, the exchanged BIOMET 3i Product must be (1) returned in its original,
Friday 8am–6:30pm (EST) unopened package (including autoclavable products); (2) a currently offered
800-342-5454, Fax 561-776-1272 BIOMET 3i Product (discontinued product not included); and (3) returned
In Canada: 800-363-1980, Outside US: 561-776-6700 freight prepaid to 4555 Riverside Drive, Palm Beach Gardens, Florida
33410, (Attention: Returns Department) and accompanied by the BIOMET 3i
Products Return Authorization Number provided by the BIOMET 3i Customer
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE. The following are the terms and
Service Department.
conditions by which BIOMET 3i sells its products.
AVAILABILITY OF PRODUCTS. All products not available in all areas. Any
GOVERNING TERMS. Any shipment of products shall be deemed to be on
offer or product void where prohibited by law.
the terms and conditions stated herein. Any and all terms and conditions
submitted by Purchaser are hereby rejected.
EXPORT CONTROL. All products are subject to all applicable export control
and sanctions legislation.
TAXES. The prices set forth herein do not include any sales, use, excise, ad
valorem, property or other taxes applicable to the sale, use or delivery of the
FORCE MAJEURE. BIOMET 3i shall not be liable for any loss or damage due
products, all of which shall be paid by Purchaser separately or added to the
to failure or delay arising out of any cause beyond the reasonable control of
contract price and paid by Purchaser to BIOMET 3i.
BIOMET 3i. In the event of any failure or delay resulting from such causes,
an equitable adjustment of delivery and any other appropriate terms and
PRICES. The prices set forth for the products are in United States Dollars.
conditions shall be made. No such failure or delay shall be the basis for an
increase of obligation by BIOMET 3i nor any termination by the Purchaser.
DELIVERY. Products sold hereunder shall be delivered by BIOMET 3i, F.O.B.
Palm Beach Gardens, Florida.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Under no circumstances shall BIOMET 3i nor any
of its affiliates be liable for business interruption, loss of profits, special,
PAYMENT. Payment terms shall be as set forth under the Terms section on
indirect, incidental or consequential damages of any nature and from any
front of the invoice.
cause whether based in contract, warranty or tort (including negligence) or
other legal theory, even if BIOMET 3i has been advised of the possibility of
WARRANTY. BIOMET 3i nor any of its affiliates make any warranty, express
such damages.
or implied, except that its products shall be free from defects in material
and/or workmanship. This warranty applies only to the original Purchaser.
VALIDITY. If any provision of these Terms and Conditions is found to be
In the event of a product defect, immediately notify BIOMET 3i of the defect
illegal or unenforceable in any respect, such illegality or unenforcibility shall
prior to returning the product. Devices shall be sterilized prior to return.
not affect any other provision of these Terms and Conditions, all of which
As its sole obligation and as Purchaser’s sole remedy under this warranty,
shall remain enforceable in accordance with their terms.
BIOMET 3i will, at its option, either repair, replace or issue credit for such
products. Purchaser assumes all risks and liability resulting from the use
GENERAL PROVISIONS. The purchase of the products and these Terms
of these products, whether used separately or in combination with other
and Conditions are governed by the laws of Florida without regard to
products.
conflicts of law principles. This document incorporates all oral and written
representations between the parties and constitutes the entire agreement
Except for the warranty expressly described in the warranty paragraph
and understanding of the parties with respect to the subject matter
above, neither BIOMET 3i nor any of its affiliates makes any other warranty
hereof and supersedes any and all other agreements either oral or written
with respect to the BIOMET 3i Products, expressed or implied, written or
between the parties with respect to such subject matter. No amendment
oral, including, without limitation, any implied warranty of merchantability,
or modification may be made to this document unless made in writing and
or a warranty of fitness for a particular purpose.
duly executed by an authorized representative of BIOMET 3i.
EDUCATION; MODIFICATION OF PRODUCTS. BIOMET 3i reserves the right
CAUTION. Federal (U.S.) Law restricts these devices to sale by or on the
to modify products, discontinue products and change specifications of
order of a licensed healthcare practitioner. Devices labeled STERILE are
products.
certified to be sterile unless sterile package is opened or damaged.
RETURN POLICY. A Purchaser may return any BIOMET 3i Product within 90
EXPORT ORDERS. Require advance payment or letter of credit. Shipments
days of the invoice date. BIOMET 3i Products returned within 60 days of the
are made either by freight collect or paid by BIOMET 3i and added to the
invoice date will be accepted without any re-stocking fee to the Purchaser.
invoice. Unless special instructions are received with an order, the shipping
BIOMET 3i Products returned between 61 and 90 days of the invoice
method will be determined by BIOMET 3i, F.O.B. Palm Beach Gardens,
date will be subject to a 15% restocking fee. A BIOMET 3i Product will
Florida.
be accepted for return only if the BIOMET 3i Product is (1) returned in its
original, unopened package (including autoclavable products); (2) received
DUNS #: 186127825
by BIOMET 3i within 90 days after the invoice date for that product; and
BIOMET 3i is listed in the SAM (U.S. System for Award Management)
(3) returned freight prepaid to 4555 Riverside Drive, Palm Beach Gardens,
Database.
Florida 33410, (Attention: Returns Department) accompanied by the BIOMET
©2014 BIOMET 3i LLC.
3i Return Authorization Number provided by the BIOMET 3i Customer
Service Department. Purchaser should be advised that BIOMET 3i Products
not meeting the above criteria will not be accepted for return.

44
 Want More? Solutions Start Here!
Visit: www.biomet3i.com
or Check Out The BIOMET 3i Online Store at
www.shopbiomet3i.com (US Customers Only)

For More Information, Please Contact Your Local BIOMET 3i Sales Representative.

Global Headquarters EC REP BIOMET 3i

4555 Riverside Drive Dental Iberica S.L.
Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33410 WTC Almeda Park, Ed. 1, Planta 1ª
1-800-342-5454 Pl. de la Pau, s/n Join Follow Watch Download
Outside the U.S.: +1-561-776-6700 08940, Cornellà de Llobregat Us Us Us It
Fax: +1-561-776-1272 (Barcelona) Spain
www.biomet3i.com Phone: +34-93-470-55-00
www.shopbiomet3i.com Fax: +34-93-371-78-49

3i T3, BellaTek, BellaTek design, Certain, DIEM, Encode, EP, GingiHue, Gold-Tite, IOL, Navigator, OSSEOTITE, PreFormance, PREVAIL, Provide,
QuickBridge, QuickSeat and ZiReal are registered trademarks of BIOMET 3i LLC. NanoTite, Providing Solutions – One Patient At A Time and Twist
Lock are trademarks of BIOMET 3i LLC. DOLDER® is a registered trademark of Dr. Charlotte Fleischer-Dolder and Dr. Fritz Dolder of Switzerland.
LOCATOR is a registered trademark of Zest Anchors, Inc. ©2014 BIOMET 3i LLC.

All trademarks herein are the property of BIOMET 3i LLC unless otherwise indicated. This material is intended for clinicians only and is NOT
intended for patient distribution. This material is not to be redistributed, duplicated or disclosed without the express written consent of BIOMET 3i. INSTRES
For additional product information, including indications, contraindications, warnings, precautions and potential adverse effects, please visit the REV B 09/14
BIOMET 3i Website: www.ifu.biomet3i.com.
IMPLANTOLOGY
product catalogue

2015
eighth Italian edition
seventh English edition

LEONE S.p.a.
ORTHODONTICS and IMPLANTOLOGY

Via P. a Quaracchi, 50
50019 Sesto Fiorentino
Firenze Italy
Phone +39.055.30.44.620
Fax +39.055.30.44.05
info@leone.it
www.leone.it
 LEONE COMPANY
In 1934 the history of Leone originated from a small handicraft activity and today it is an industrial reality of high technological and
commercial level. The productive and industrial area spreads out over a surface of around 10.000 sq. m., where 125 people operate.

RESEARCH PRODUCTION QUALITY

PRODUCT CONTROL

Most of the remarkable investments of
the company are reserved to the Centre
for Biotechnological Research “Marco
Pozzi”, which is located inside the com-
pany. Studies on materials, surfaces
and technical analysis for new products
are carried out here. The collaboration
with either Italian or foreign Universities
and the Faculties of Engineering and
Medicine and Surgery in Florence is very
close. Training stages and scientifical
research are developed for the prepara-
tion of graduation thesis.
Engineers, mechanical and technical The high quality of the Leone products
experts are making part of the manu- is the result of sophisticated manufac-
facturing staff. Working side by side turing techniques and accurate quality
with the Centre for Biotechnological control conforming to UNI EN ISO 9001,
Research “Marco Pozzi” and making use ISO 13485, USA-FDA 21 CFR Part 820
of the most advanced technology, they rules and Japanese Ministerial Ordinance
are able to carry out the components of MHLW no. 169.
the two product ranges: orthodontics
and implantology. All the innovations
introduced in the production steps and
the features of finished products are the
result of consistent and in-depth studies
as well as of remarkable investments.

TECHNICAL AND COMMERCIAL ASSISTANCE

Contact your dealer in your country as a reference. You will find the
comprehensive list under the section “distributors” in our website

2
www.leone.it
 LEONE S.p.a.
ORTHODONTICS and IMPLANTOLOGY

CUSTOMER WAREHOUSE EDUCATION, TRAINING

SERVICE UPGRADING

LEONE is working non stop to satisfy the
customer’s expectations and is repre-
sented with dealers in 60 countries. A
careful pre-sale and post-sale customer
assistance is provided by qualified tech-
nical and commercial staff to meet any
requirement.
Finished and semi-finished products are
stocked and organized by vertical lift
automatic cabinets allowing a rationali-
zation of the space and a fully computer
based processing of the orders.
Standard orders are shipped within 24
hours in Italy and 5-6 working days in the
foreign country.
Equipped with every multimedia device,
the facility of 1000 sq.m is entirely dedi-
cated to lectures and to the spreading
of new therapeutic techniques. Training
course, live demonstrations and cultural
events are being held for either Italian or
foreign specialists.

COMPETENCE AND RELIABILITY

The Leone dealers worldwide are under constant professional improvement

thanks to the technical assistance received by engineers and technical
experts at Leone to get specific information on the products and solve any
eventual problems from the customers.
3
 summary www.leone.it

LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM

PRODUCT CATALOGUE 6..50

ALPHABETICAL INDEX 122-123

SURGICAL PROCEDURE
DISCLAIMER AND
TREATMENT PLANNING 52-53

IMPLANT PACKAGING 54

LEONE IMPLANTS Ø 3,3, Ø 4,1 AND Ø 4,8:

1. preparation of the implant site 55..57
2. placement of the implant 58..60

LEONE 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT:

3. preparation of the implant site 61-62
4. placement of the implant 63-64

TWO-STAGE SURGICAL PROCEDURE:

5. first stage 65
6. second stage 66

CONDITIONING OF THE SOFT TISSUES:

7. for standard and large platform 66-67
8. for slim platform 67-68

ONE-STAGE SURGICAL PROCEDURE:

9. for standard and large platform 68-69

LOW SELF-LOCKING CAP:

10. instructions for use and procedure 70-71

OVERDENTURE:
11. two-stage surgical procedure for standard platform 71-72

LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANTS Ø 3,75 AND Ø 4,5:

selection of the Max Stability implant 73
1. preparation of the implant site 74..77
2. placement of the implant 78..80

MULTIMEDIA
In the following pages you can find QR codes storing multimedia contents of the LEONE Implant System which can be downloaded directly on
your smartphone and through the online version of our product catalogue. You can download free QR reader applications (e.g. www.i-nigma.com).
Videos are also available on our web-site: www.leone.it/english/implantology/qr-code/

4
www.leone.it summary

PROSTHETIC PROCEDURE

DISCLAIMER AND PREMISE 82

INDIRECT TECHNIQUE:
1. impression taking 83
2. preparation of the dental cast 84-85
3. preparation of the abutment 85..87
4. selection, use and positioning of LEONE 360° anatomical abutments 87..89
5. final positioning for standard and large platform 90-91
6. final positioning for slim platform 91

DIRECT TECHNIQUE:
7. positioning and preparation of the abutment,
impression taking for standard and large platform 92-93

OTHER PROSTHETIC SOLUTIONS:

8. ball head abutments for overdenture 93..97
9. bar-retained overdenture and screw-retained prosthesis 98..102
10. MultiTech abutments: directions for use 103-104
11. intraoral scanning and use of Ti-Base abutments (CAD-CAM solutions) 105
12. temporary abutments: application procedure 106..108

Instructions for the removal of LEONE abutments 109-110

LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING

SURGICAL AND PROSTHETIC PROCEDURE

DISCLAIMER AND
TREATMENT PLANNING 112-113

1. Preparation of the implant site 114-115

2. Monoimplant packaging 116
3. Insertion of the monoimplant 117-118
4. Preparation of the removable prosthesis 119-120

- Dr. Salvatore Belcastro, Gubbio, Perugia, Italy - Mr. Massimiliano Pisa, Firenze, Italy
Photos courtesy of: - Dr. Irene Frezzato and Dr. Alberto Frezzato, Rovigo, Italy - Dr. Leonardo Targetti, Firenze, Italy
- Dr. Roberto Meli, Firenze, Italy - Dr. Renato Turrini, Lucca, Italy

5
 Leone dental implant system www.leone.it

LEONE DENTAL IMPLANT SYSTEM

The LEONE implant system offers a wide range of products that allows to choose the most
adequate solution for the planned rehabilitation depending on the clinical situation and the
prosthetic requirements.

The distinctive feature of the system is the LEONE implant-abutment connection, a combination
of two geometries: self-locking Morse taper and internal hexagon.
The Morse taper ensures a remarkable mechanical stability, total absence of micro movements,
a perfect bacterial seal and optimal distribution of masticatory loading. The hexagon enhances
the resistance to torsional loading and guarantees the precise transfer of the angular position
of the abutment between the dental office and the laboratory.
The LEONE Implant System is characterized by Platform Switching as a natural consequence of
the taper connection.
LASER MARKED
to guarantee
Regarding the implant macro-design, the LEONE implant system includes three different types the original product
of fixtures: the LEONE implants, featuring a cylindrical geometry, with a thread design in
accordance with ISO standard and a hemispherical apex; the Max Stability implants, having a
root-form geometry, a more aggressive thread design and a conical apex, suitable for poor bone
density and fresh extraction sockets; the LEONE 6.5 short implant, with a minimised length, a
thread with an even increased height and a flat apex, ideal for cases with limited vertical bone
availability.

HRS surface
All LEONE implants are manufactured from medical grade 5 titanium and feature the HRS (High
Rutile Surface) surface, obtained through an exclusive sandblasting process which produces
a roughness Ra = 2.5 µm on the implant, favouring the activity of osteoblasts and ensuring a
rapid osseointegration.

Due to the Morse taper implant-abutment connection, the LEONE abutments do not need a retai-
ning screw, they are solid, with no cavities. This feature, combined with the particular quality
of the titanium used, allows the abutment to be easily customized either in the laboratory or
directly in the oral cavity of the patient.

A colour code is associated with each implant diameter and helps the user choose the relevant
accessories and necessary tools for the following work phases.

KEY TO DENTAL IMPLANTS

For implant: For implant: For implant:

GREEN YELLOW RED
Ø 3,3 mm Ø 4,1 mm Ø 4,8 mm

DARK For implant: DARK For implant: For implant:

Max Stability Ø 3,75 mm FUCHSIA short 6.5
GREEN YELLOW Max Stability Ø 4,5 mm

6
www.leone.it
Leone implants
LEONE IMPLANTS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium, cylindrical screw shaped. HRS surface and LEONE connection.
Mounted on a carrier, with an included biopolymer sealing cover cap, and packed in gamma-ray sterile
glass vial. Cap removal from the inner holder and placement into the implant requires instrument Cat.
156-1003-00.
Pack content: 1 implant and 1 cover cap

LEONE IMPLANT Ø 3.3 mm with cover cap

Ø 3,3 mm

length 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm TOP LID

110-3308-02 110-3310-02 110-3312-02 110-3314-02

SEALING CAP

LEONE IMPLANT Ø 4.1 mm with cover cap

CARRIER

IMPLANT

Ø 4,1 mm
INNER HOLDER
length 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm

110-4108-02 110-4110-02 110-4112-02 110-4114-02

COVER CAP

LEONE IMPLANT Ø 4.8 mm with cover cap

GLASS VIAL
Ø 4,8 mm
length 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm

110-4808-02 110-4810-02 110-4812-02 110-4814-02

7
 Leone 6.5 short implant www.leone.it

LEONE 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT

• Ideal for cases with limited vertical bone availability

• To avoid complex bone grafting procedures
• To minimize advanced surgical interventions
(sinus lift, inferior alveolar nerve transposition)
• To avoid sensitive anatomical structures with a high degree of safety
• To increase patient’s acceptance due to reduced treatment time and costs

LEONE 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT with cover cap

Made of medical grade 5 titanium, cylindrical screw shaped. HRS surface and LEONE connection. Mounted on a carrier, with an included biopolymer
sealing cover cap, and packed in gamma-ray sterile glass vial. Cap removal from the inner holder and placement into the implant requires instrument
Cat. 156-1003-00.
Pack content: 1 implant and 1 cover cap

The cover cap supplied with the implant is yellow since it has the same
internal connection as the standard 4,1 mm-diameter LEONE implant. This
ensures absolute stability and mechanical resistance: extremely important
issues in this particular case as the crown-implant ratio results to be incre-
Ø 5 mm ased. There is no need for special accessories: healing caps, transfers and
length 6,5 mm abutments for the 4.1 mm connection with yellow colour code are to be used.
110-5065-02

• LENGTH reduced to 6.5 mm

• INCREMENTAL THREADS
• FLAT APEX
• IMPLANT THREAD
with diameter up to 5 mm
for additional decrease of the implant’s length
in comparison to LEONE standard implants the height of the implant
thread is increased by 125%, the bone contact surface is comparable to
the surface of an implant 4,1 mm in diameter and 8 mm long.

The LEONE 6.5 short implant and the whole range of specific surgical
instruments are featured by a FUCHSIA COLOUR-CODE.

8
www.leone.it
Leone Max Stability implants
LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANTS

Max Stability implants feature an innovative external macro-design, formulated to obtain a high pri-
mary stability in cases where the implant site offers poor stability for fixtures with a classical design.
The implant primary stability is evaluated by measuring the insertion torque values. In medium to
poor bone quality they have over 50% higher insertion torque values compared to cylindrical implants
with the same length and connection size.

Max Stability implants Ø3,75 and Ø4,5 mm have the same internal connection as the Ø3,3 and
Ø4,1 mm implants. The surgical procedure for the preparation of the implant site is also the same.
Accordingly, the colour codes are also identical: GREEN for the Ø3,75 implants - YELLOW for the Ø4,5
implants.
Made of medical grade 5 titanium. HRS surface and LEONE connection. Mounted on a carrier, with an
included biopolymer sealing cover cap, and packed in gamma-ray sterile glass vial. Cap removal from
the inner holder and placement into the implant requires instrument Cat. 156-1003-00.
Pack content: 1 implant and 1 cover cap

LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANT Ø 3.75 mm with cover cap

new The cover cap supplied with the implant is

green since it has the same internal con-
nection as the standard 3.3 mm-diameter
Ø 3,75 mm LEONE implant.
length 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm Healing caps, transfers, and abutments for
the 3.3 mm connection with green colour
110-3808-02 110-3810-02 110-3812-02 110-3814-02 code are to be used.

LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANT Ø 4.5 mm with cover cap

new The cover cap supplied with the implant is

yellow since it has the same internal con-
nection as the standard 4,1 mm-diameter
Ø 4,5 mm LEONE implant.
length 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm
Healing caps, transfers, and abutments for
the 4.1 mm connection with yellow colour
110-4508-02 110-4510-02 110-4512-02 110-4514-02 code are to be used.

ROOT-FORM WHEN TO USE A LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANT

with conical apex facilitating the insertion process
INCREMENTAL APICAL THREADS
with increasing height
THREAD DESIGN
results in an over a 50% increase in thread height compared to
cylindrical implants, leading to a considerable increase in primary
stability as well as a gain in bone-implant contact surface area
compared to cylindrical implants with the same length and connection
size
In case of implant placement with poor bone quality
The thread design and the apex profile allow good anchorage, even in
the presence of reduced bone density.
NOT FOR INSERTION IN D1 BONE
In case of implant placement into fresh extraction sockets
The geometry of the implant is ideal for the insertion in post-extraction
sockets.
In case of some advanced surgical interventions
The implant apex, featuring a conical profile and incremental threads,
facilitates the insertion process by reducing the risk of fractures and
fenestrations.

9
 platform switching and platforms of the Leone implant system www.leone.it

PLATFORM SWITCHING

The emergence profile of the LEONE abutments features a smaller diameter than the maxi-
mum diameter of the implant neck. The “Platform Switching” concept involves several
advantages like the shift of the area of the inflammatory infiltrate inwards (away from the
crestal bone), a reduced perimeter to protect against the external agents, a larger amount of
periimplant gingival soft tissue and therefore a better mucosa seal to protect the crestal bone.

THE MEANING OF PROSTHETIC PLATFORM

After the placement of the implant, thanks to the Platform

Switching concept, the LEONE Implant System offers the possi-
bility to select the diameter of the most appropriate abutment
to the clinical situation. Specific healing caps and transfer
are available for each platform that allow the achievement
of excellent results in the conditioning of the soft tissues and
impression taking.

1 2
3

1 2 3
STANDARD PLATFORM LARGE PLATFORM SLIM PLATFORM

The diameter is the SAME as the The diameter is LARGER than the diameter of the The diameter is SMALLER than the
diameter of the implant neck. implant neck. Indicated when the tooth to be replaced diameter of the implant neck. Indicated
Indicated for standard treatments. is noticeably larger in comparison to the inserted in aesthetic areas with low gingival
Featured by Platform Switching. implant. The aim is to enhance functionality and thickness. It allows the manufacture of
aesthetics. Featured by Platform Switching. a crown closing on the implant neck.

KEY TO PROSTHETIC PRODUCTS

Since the following groups of implants have the same implant-abutment connection size,
the colour code for the choice of the prosthetic products is the following:

for implants: for implants: for implants:

GREEN Ø 3,3 mm YELLOW Ø 4,1 mm RED Ø 4,8 mm
Max Stability Ø 3,75 mm Max Stability Ø 4,5 mm
short 6.5

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and
10 Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
www.leone.it
standard platform
SELF-LOCKING CAPS, LOW

Made of medical grade 5 titanium.

Single supplied on carrier and packed in gamma-ray sterilized glass
vials. The caps are locked into the implant through the application of for implant
an impulsive force that activates the locking-taper connection. They are Ø platform 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm
used in place of the cover caps in cases of subcrestal implant place-
ment or in place of the healing caps in cases of low gingival thickness gingival height 1,5 mm 1,5 mm 1,5 mm
(pages 70, 71). Use the special hex head extractor Cat. 156-1006-00 to
133-3301-33 133-4101-41 133-4801-48
unlock the connection. Use the instrument for cover cap Cat. 156-1003-00
for removal.
Pack of 1

STANDARD HEALING CAPS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium.

Single supplied ready on carrier, packed in gamma-ray sterile glass vial.
for implant
Healing caps are locked in the implants by means of an impulsive force
which activates the locking-taper connection. Use the special hex head Ø platform 3,3 mm 3,3 mm 3,3 mm
extractor Cat. 156-1006-00 to unlock the connection.
Pack of 1 gingival height 3 mm 5 mm 7 mm

131-3303-33 131-3305-33 131-3307-33

for implant for implant

Ø platform 4,1 mm 4,1 mm 4,1 mm Ø platform 4,8 mm 4,8 mm 4,8 mm

gingival height 3 mm 5 mm 7 mm gingival height 3 mm 5 mm 7 mm

131-4103-41 131-4105-41 131-4107-41 131-4803-48 131-4805-48 131-4807-48

STANDARD TRANSFERS

Made of stainless steel.

They are used for taking and sending the impression to the laboratory to
reproduce the exact position of the implant on the dental cast.
Pack of 1 for implant

Ø platform 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm

gingival height 5 mm 5 mm 5 mm

141-3305-33 141-4105-41 141-4805-48

11
 standard platform www.leone.it

TEMPORARY ABUTMENTS

The LEONE temporary abutments are used for provisional restorations

(they have the emergence profile of the Standard platform). They are
connected to the implants in the same way as the titanium abutments,
using the same instruments. The Morse taper connection guarantees a
suitable tightness for use over a limited period of time allowing an easy
removal of the abutment whenever advisable. Made of a special ultra-
polymer - a PEEK polymer featuring very high mechanical properties - for implant
highly biocompatible, easily prepable and radiotransparent. They are
height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm
seated into the implants through the LEONE connection. Sterilizable in
autoclave. STRAIGHT 161-3310-00 161-4110-00 161-4810-00
Pack of 1
15° ANGLED 161-3310-15 161-4110-15 161-4810-15

STANDARD ABUTMENTS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. The abutments are seated into the implants through the LEONE connection.
Pack of 1

CYLINDER ABUTMENTS 15° PRE-INCLINED ABUTMENTS

for implant for implant

Ø platform 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm Ø platform 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm

height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

120-3310-33 120-4110-41 120-4810-48 124-3303-01 124-4103-01 124-4803-01

25° PRE-INCLINED ABUTMENTS 25° ANGLED ABUTMENTS

for implant for implant

Ø platform 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm Ø platform 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm

height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

124-3303-02 124-4103-02 124-4803-02 125-3303-33 125-4103-41 125-4803-48

A try-in abutment in plastic material is available associated with each abutment herewith indicated (page 28)

12
www.leone.it
Leone 360° anatomical abutments
LEONE 360° ANATOMICAL ABUTMENTS

LEONE 360° anatomical abutments have got the ideal features to facilitate the prosthetic
procedure during the customizing phase in the laboratory and the clinical procedures
afterwards.

The main innovation of this product, protected by an international patent, is the apical
hexagon separated from the rest of the abutment: the free positioning to 360° on the dental
cast makes it easy to achieve parallelism while taking advantage of the anatomical form of
the abutments. Afterwards, through the activation of the self-locking conical connection, the
abutment will join the hexagon directed in the selected position which will drive the clinician
in the positioning on the patient with the maximum precision (pages 87..89).

• LEONE 360° anatomical abutments are available either straight or angled at 15°or 25°
to meet all demands for the prosthetic rehabilitation.
A step on the angled abutment allows the activation of the connection by exerting a force
arranged coaxially to the implant axis. A special flat tip (Cat. 156-1008-06) may be joi-
ned to the multi-purpose handle or the abutment beater thus assuring a stable support.

15° 25°

• The morphologic shape of the abutment portion to be cemented features an

optimal inclination and two opposite plain faces to improve the position and
the retention of the copings.

• The preformed shoulder may be further customized. The angled anatomical

abutments show the vestibular portion, the part with the higher aesthetical
value, with a height lower than lingual.

• The transmucousal portion is available in four heights for a precise adaptation to the thickness of the soft
tissues. The height of the platform switching of the LEONE 360° anatomical abutments zero shoulder has
been reduced as much as possible for cases with low gingival thickness.

• LEONE 360° special try-in abutments are associated with this innovative product.
They facilitate the choice of the most appropriate abutment in the laboratory thus avoiding the necessity of
goods storage and the possibilities of mistake.
The try-in abutments are manufactured from a plastic material, autoclavable and may also be used to test
the transmucousal portion on the patient.

13
 Leone 360° anatomical abutments www.leone.it

LEONE 360° ANATOMICAL ABUTMENTS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. They are seated into the implants through the LEONE 360° connection.
Pack of 1 abutment and 1 hexagon

3 3 3

for implant
abutment shoulder
new
0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm
minimum height
STRAIGHT 129-3300-03 129-3301-00 129-3302-00 129-3303-00

15° ANGLED 129-3300-01 129-3301-01 129-3302-01 129-3303-01

25° ANGLED 129-3300-02 129-3301-02 129-3302-02 129-3303-02

3 3 3

for implant
abutment shoulder new
0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm
minimum height
STRAIGHT 129-4100-03 129-4101-00 129-4102-00 129-4103-00

15° ANGLED 129-4100-01 129-4101-01 129-4102-01 129-4103-01

25° ANGLED 129-4100-02 129-4101-02 129-4102-02 129-4103-02

3 3 3

for implant

abutment shoulder
1 mm 2 mm 3 mm
minimum height
STRAIGHT 129-4801-00 129-4802-00 129-4803-00
15° ANGLED 129-4801-01 129-4802-01 129-4803-01
25° ANGLED 129-4801-02 129-4802-02 129-4803-02

3 3 3

HEXAGON FOR LEONE 360° ABUTMENTS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium.

Pack of 2 for implant

129-3300-00 129-4100-00 129-4800-00

A try-in abutment in plastic material is available associated with each abutment herewith indicated (page 15)

14
www.leone.it
try-in kit for Leone 360° anatomical abutments
new
160-0001-03
TRY-IN KIT FOR LEONE 360°
ANATOMICAL ABUTMENTS

Manufactured from plastic material, autoclavable, in three

colour-codes: green, yellow and red, to allow the immediate iden-
tification of the corresponding implant diameter.
They are the exact replica of the LEONE 360° anatomical
abutments but without the apical hexagon to test the most appro-
priate position for each specific case.
Each try-in abutment is marked with a number useful for the
placement in the proper space into the kit. A transparent template
over the plastic case, shows the outlines and the catalogue code
numbers of each corresponding titanium anatomical abutment to
facilitate the ordering of the selected type.
4 plastic try-in abutments for each type are contained in the kit
to allow the choice in complex prosthetic rehabilitations. Only the
inner tray is autoclavable.

Kit content:
4 try-in abutments each implant diameter and each shape:
straight, angled at 15°and 25° and each shoulder height availa-
ble (page 14), total 132 pcs

160-0033-03 new
REFILL - LEONE 360° ANATOMICAL TRY-IN ABUTMENTS
FOR IMPLANTS 3,3 AND MAX STABILITY 3,75

Content:
4 sets of try-in abutments for implant 3.3 and Max Stability 3,75, each type:
straight, angled at 15°and 25° and each shoulder height available,
total 48 pcs

160-0041-03 new
REFILL - LEONE 360° ANATOMICAL TRY-IN ABUTMENTS
FOR IMPLANTS 4,1, SHORT 6.5 AND MAX STABILITY 4,5

Content:
4 sets of try-in abutments for implant 4.1, LEONE 6.5 short implant and Max Stability 4,5, each type:
straight, angled at 15°and 25° and each shoulder height available,
total 48 pcs

160-0048-01
REFILL - LEONE 360° ANATOMICAL TRY-IN ABUTMENTS
FOR IMPLANTS 4,8

Content: 4 sets of try-in abutments for implant 4.8 each type:

straight, angled at 15°and 25° and each shoulder height available,
total 36 pcs

15
 large platform www.leone.it

LARGE HEALING CAPS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium.

Single supplied on carrier, packed in gamma-ray sterile glass vial.
Healing caps are locked into the implants by means of an impulsive force
which activates the locking-taper connection. Use the specific hex-head
extractor Cat. 156-1006-00 to unlock the connection. for implant
Pack of 1 Ø platform 4,5 mm 4,5 mm 4,5 mm
gingival
3 mm 5 mm 7 mm
height

131-3303-45 131-3305-45 131-3307-45

for implant for implant

Ø platform 5,5 mm 5,5 mm 5,5 mm Ø platform 6,0 mm 6,0 mm 6,0 mm

gingival gingival
3 mm 5 mm 7 mm 3 mm 5 mm 7 mm
height height

131-4103-55 131-4105-55 131-4107-55 131-4803-60 131-4805-60 131-4807-60

LARGE TRANSFERS

Made of stainless steel.

They are used for taking and sending the impression to the laboratory to
reproduce the exact position of the implant on the dental cast.
Pack of 1
for implant

Ø platform 4,5 mm 5,5 mm 6,0 mm

gingival
height 5 mm 5 mm 5 mm

141-3305-45 141-4105-55 141-4805-60

16
www.leone.it
large platform
LARGE ABUTMENTS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. CYLINDER ABUTMENTS

They are seated into the implants through the LEONE connection.
Pack of 1

for implant

Ø platform 4,5 mm 5,5 mm 6,0 mm

height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

120-3310-45 120-4110-55 120-4810-60

15° PRE-INCLINED ABUTMENTS 25° PRE-INCLINED ABUTMENTS

for implant for implant

Ø platform 4,5 mm 5,5 mm 6 mm Ø platform 4,5 mm 5,5 mm 6 mm

height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

124-3303-03 124-4103-03 124-4803-03 124-3303-04 124-4103-04 124-4803-04

25° ANGLED ABUTMENTS

for implant

Ø platform 4,5 mm 5,5 mm 6,0 mm

height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

125-3303-45 125-4103-55 125-4803-60

A try-in abutment in plastic material is available associated with each abutment herewith indicated (page 28)

17
 slim platform www.leone.it

SLIM HEALING CAPS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium.

Single supplied on carrier, packed in gamma-ray sterile glass vial.
Healing caps are locked into the implants by means of a pressure exerted
on the cap once the internal hexagon is correctly engaged.
Use instrument Cat. 156-1003-00 for removal of the caps. for implant
Pack of 1 transmucosal Ø 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm
gingival
height 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm

132-3303-33 132-4103-41 132-4803-48

SLIM TRANSFERS

Made of stainless steel.

They are used for taking and sending the impression to the laboratory to
duplicate the exact position of the implant on the dental cast.
Pack of 1
for implant

transmucosal Ø 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm

gingival
height 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm

143-3303-33 143-4103-41 143-4803-48

SLIM ABUTMENTS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. The abutments are seated into the implants through the LEONE connection.
Pack of 1

CYLINDER ABUTMENTS 10° ANGLED DOUBLE ABUTMENTS

for implant for implant

transmucosal Ø 2,2 mm 3,0 mm 3,7 mm transmucosal Ø 2,2 mm 3,0 mm 3,7 mm

height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

120-3310-22 120-4110-30 120-4810-37 127-3301-10 127-4101-10 127-4801-10

18
www.leone.it
multitech abutments
MULTITECH ABUTMENTS

MultiTech abutments are used to fabricate a fully patient-customized abutment through the creation of a customized part to be bonded on the central
portion of the abutment. Recommended bonding materials: NIMETIC CEM (3M Espe), MULTILINK HYBRID ABUTMENT (Ivoclar Vivadent).
The customized abutment portion can be performed as follows (pages 103-104):
• with CAD-CAM technology by taking a scan of the seated abutment on the dental cast and modelling of the customized abutment portion with a
specific software. The fabrication is performed in the laboratory with a specific Computer-Assisted Machine or by a specialized production centre
upon the receipt of the data file;
• with the traditional method by using a pre-fabricated burn-out coping placed on the abutment, adjustment and modelling with wax and/or acrylic
and fabrication of the customized abutment portion through casting.

Burn-out coping HYBRID

TITANIUM/ZIRCONIA
ABUTMENT
Sandblasted bonding portion for the anchorage
of the customized abutment to enhance the bond
retention

Platform Switching

TITANIUM/METAL
Self-locking Morse taper connection ABUTMENT
and internal hexagon

ne
w
MULTITECH ABUTMENTS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium, they are seated into the implants through the LEONE connection (straight abutments) or through the LEONE 360°
connection (angled abutments). Also available 15° angled to help achieve parallelism. The bonding portion of the abutment is entirely sandblasted.
Pack content: 1 abutment, 1 hexagon (for the angled abutments only), 2 burn-out copings

for implant for implant

bonding bonding
6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm
portion portion
STRAIGHT 121-3306-00 121-4106-00 121-4806-00 15° ANGLED 121-3306-15 121-4106-15 121-4806-15

19
 intraoral scanning and CAD-CAM solutions
www.leone.it

ne
w
TI-BASE ABUTMENTS 4,5 4,5 4,5

The Ti-Base abutment allows the fabrication of a fully patient-

customized abutment through the creation of a customized part to be
bonded on the bonding portion. It has been developed for a completely for implant
digital workflow, from impression taking to CAD-CAM fabrication of the
bonding
restoration. Its geometry allows the use of specific blocks for a rapid and 4,5 mm 4,5 mm 4,5 mm
portion
precise CAM milling of the customized portion. Recommended bonding
materials: NIMETIC CEM (3M Espe), MULTILINK HYBRID ABUTMENT 121-3305-51 121-4105-51 121-4805-51
(Ivoclar Vivadent).
Made of medical grade 5 titanium, they are seated into the implants
through the LEONE connection.
Pack of 1

ne
w
SCAN POST AND SCAN BODY

The scan post coupled with the scan body permit precise acquisition
of the implant position through a digital impression taking procedure
chairside in the mouth or by digitization of the dental cast. The digital
acquisition allows CAD planning and the use of the Ti-Base abutment
for implant
during the following prosthetic steps.
The scan post, made of stainless steel, is connected to the implant transmucosal Ø 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm
through the transfer-like split hex connection. The scan body, a plastic gingival 6 mm 6 mm 5 mm
cap to be mounted on the scan post, has a specific geometry for digital height
capture by means of a dedicated software. The scan body is available 141-3313-51 141-4113-51 141-4813-51
in two colours, white and grey, to optimize acquisition depending on the
intraoral scanner type.
Pack content: 1 scan post, 3 white scan bodies, 3 grey scan bodies

141-0000-51
REFILL – PLASTIC SCAN BODIES
Content: 5 white scan bodies, 5 grey scan bodies

ne
w
SCAN POST POSITIONER

Made of stainless steel. It is used to place the scan post into the implant.
With a hole for the placement of a safety leash.
Pack of 1

141-0001-51

The continuous and rapid evolution of digital technology implies a constant updating of the procedures as well as of the associated components.
Please refer to the online catalogue for the relevant updates.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and
20 Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
www.leone.it
ball head abutments for overdenture
new BALL HEAD ABUTMENTS FOR OVERDENTURE

The ball head abutments for overdenture represent an evolution of the O-ring overdenture abutment product line. The abutments feature a perfectly ball-
shaped head with a titanium nitride coating to increase its wear resistance. The angled abutments are characterized by the LEONE 360° connection, pro-
tected by an international patent, having an apical hexagon separated from the rest of the abutment. The free positioning to 360° of the abutment on the
dental cast makes it easy to achieve parallelism, whereas the permanent connection of the hexagon in the selected position allows an accurate placement
of the abutment in the mouth. The ball head abutments for overdenture are available with the Standard prosthetic platform only for 3,3 mm and 3,75
mm implants (green connection size) and for 4,1 mm, 4,5 mm and LEONE 6.5 implants (yellow connection size), in straight and 15° angled version, in 3
different gingival heights, 1,5 – 3 – 5 mm.

In conjunction with these abutments, elastomer retentive inserts with ball anchorage in different SOFT
types of rigidity have been developed to provide a method of stabilization for overdentures that
is alternative to the traditional O-ring system. MEDIUM
The inserts are available in three different types of rigidity, identifiable by the following colour
code: white (soft insert), orange (medium insert), violet (rigid insert). RIGID

The inserts are contained within specific metal housings: the housings are made of pink anodized titanium for better aesthetics within the removable
denture; from a dimensional point of view they take up very little space, less than the micro housings with O-ring.
The retentive inserts are compatible with the abutments for O-ring overdenture which are available until stocks are exhausted; therefore they can
also be used in conjunction with them for already restored cases.

To complete components related to ball head abutments, spacer rings have been developed, i.e. rings made of plastic material to place on the abutment
when incorporating the housings into the removable denture, in order to obtain a supporting surface for the housings. In this way a correct degree of
penetration of the housing on the ball head is ensured, holding it in place, along the head axis or with a preset angulation, preventing, in any case,
unwanted inclinations.

When replacing the insert, remove the worn-out insert and press the new one into the housing by means of the specific instrument Cat. 156-1004-00.

The LOW spacer ring is used to incorporate
the housing with O-ring or the micro housing
with O-ring into the denture.
The HIGH spacer ring is used to incorporate
the micro housing with insert into the den-
ture along the head axis of the abutment.
The HIGH ANGLED spacer ring, easily reco-
gnisable due to a protrusion at its maximum
thickness, is used to incorporate the micro
housing with insert into the denture with
an angle increased by 10° in respect to the
abutments head.

micro housing
with insert 10°
LOW HIGH
SPACER micro housing SPACER
housing or
RING with insert RING
micro housing ANGLED
with O-ring
SPACER
RING

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and
Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature. 21
 ball head abutments for overdenture and accessories www.leone.it

new BALL HEAD ABUTMENTS FOR OVERDENTURE

Made of medical grade 5 titanium, they are seated into the implants through the LEONE 360° connection.
Pack content:
- 1 abutment,
- 1 hexagon (for the angled abutments only),
- 1 housing with O-Ring
- 1 micro housing with O-Ring,
- 1 micro housing with orange medium insert,
- 1 low spacer ring,
- 1 high spacer ring,
- 1 high angled spacer ring

for implant
gingival
1,5 mm 3 mm 5 mm 1,5 mm 3 mm 5 mm
height
STRAIGHT 123-3300-01 123-3300-03 123-3300-05 123-4100-01 123-4100-03 123-4100-05
15° ANGLED 123-3315-01 123-3315-03 123-3315-05 123-4115-01 123-4115-03 123-4115-05

The abutments for O-ring overdenture listed in the previous edition of this catalogue are available until stocks are exhausted.

HOUSING WITH O-RING

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Outer diameter: 5,4 mm, height: 3,1 mm.
Pack content:
- 1 housing with O-ring, 123-0002-00
- 1 low spacer ring for abutments
w
ne

MICRO HOUSING WITH O-RING

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Outer diameter: 4,2 mm, height: 2,8 mm.
Pack content:
- 1 micro housing with O-ring, 123-0003-00
- 1 low spacer ring for abutments (grey),
w - 1 spacer ring for monoimplants (white)
ne

A try-in abutment in plastic material is available associated with each abutment herewith indicated (page 28)

22
 www.leone.it
accessories for ball head abutments for overdenture

ELASTOMERIC O-RING ELASTOMERIC

MICRO O-RING
Pack of 2
Pack of 2
123-0001-00 123-0001-01

new
OVERDENTURE MICRO HOUSING WITH WHITE SOFT INSERT

Made of medical grade 5 titanium, outer diameter 4 mm, height 2 mm.

With pre-mounted white soft insert.
Pack content: 2 overdenture micro housings, 2 high spacer rings, 2 high angled spacer rings 123-0004-02

123-0001-02
REFILL - WHITE SOFT MICRO INSERTS
Pack of 6

new
OVERDENTURE MICRO HOUSING WITH ORANGE MEDIUM INSERT

Made of medical grade 5 titanium, outer diameter 4 mm, height 2 mm.

With pre-mounted orange medium insert.
Pack content: 2 overdenture micro housings, 2 high spacer rings, 2 high angled spacer rings 123-0004-03

123-0001-03
REFILL - ORANGE MEDIUM MICRO INSERTS
Pack of 6

new
OVERDENTURE MICRO HOUSING WITH VIOLET RIGID INSERT

Made of medical grade 5 titanium, outer diameter 4 mm, height 2 mm.

With pre-mounted violet rigid insert.
Pack content: 2 overdenture micro housings, 2 high spacer rings, 2 high angled spacer rings 123-0004-04

123-0001-04
REFILL - VIOLET RIGID MICRO INSERTS
Pack of 6

new
OVERDENTURE INSERT SEATING TOOL

Made of stainless steel.

It is used to place the insert for overdenture inside its housing.

156-1004-00

23
 standard abutments for screw-retained prosthesis www.leone.it

STANDARD ABUTMENTS FOR SCREW-RETAINED PROSTHESIS

The abutments for screw-retained prosthesis have a tapered top with an internal thread allowing
the connection of a prosthesis by screw retention. They are indicated for screw-retained prosthe-
sis (hybrid prosthesis or screw-retained bridges) as well as for bar-retained overdentures.
The abutments for screw-retained prosthesis are available in straight versions as well as in 15°,
25° and 35° angled versions to help achieve parallelism for non-parallel implants.

The angled abutments are characterized by the LEONE 360° connection, protected by an inter-
national patent, having an apical hexagon separated from the rest of the abutment. The free
positioning to 360° of the abutment on the dental cast makes it easy to achieve parallelism,
whereas the permanent connection of the hexagon in the selected position allows an accurate
positioning of the abutment in the mouth.

The package of all abutments for screw-retained prosthesis includes two different burn-out
copings, a standard burn-out coping and a high burn-out coping. This simplifies the preparation
of the definite metallic framework which can be obtained by a casting process using a metallic
alloy at technician’s option. In this way the dental casting phase with waxes at the abutment’s
interface is avoided ensuring a higher precision of the final restoration.

• The standard burn-out coping (height: 4 mm)

is designed for the realization of traditional bar-retained overdentures.

• The high burn-out coping (height: 10 mm)

is suitable for the realization of milled bars or screw-retained prosthesis. Its height can be cut
back: a step on the external surface shows the shortening limit.

• The standard connecting screw

is designed for the standard burn-out coping.

• The high head connecting screw

is designed for the high burn-out coping or, in general, for high frameworks.

24
www.leone.it
standard abutments for screw-retained prosthesis

STANDARD ABUTMENTS FOR SCREW-RETAINED PROSTHESIS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. They are seated into the implants through the LEONE 360° connection.
Pack content: 1 abutment, 1 hexagon (for the angled abutments only), 1 standard burn-out coping, 1 standard connecting screw, 1 high burn-out coping,
1 high head connecting screw

for implant

gingival height 1,5 mm 3 mm 5 mm 7 mm

STRAIGHT 126-3301-01 126-3303-01 126-3305-01 126-3307-01

15° ANGLED 126-3301-15 126-3303-15 126-3305-15

new
25° ANGLED 126-3301-25 126-3303-25 126-3305-25

new 35° ANGLED 126-3303-35 126-3305-35

for implant

gingival height 1,5 mm 3 mm 5 mm 7 mm

STRAIGHT 126-4101-01 126-4103-01 126-4105-01 126-4107-01

15° ANGLED 126-4101-15 126-4103-15 126-4105-15

new
25° ANGLED 126-4101-25 126-4103-25 126-4105-25

35° ANGLED
new
126-4103-35 126-4105-35

for implant

gingival height 1,5 mm 3 mm 5 mm 7 mm

STRAIGHT 126-4801-01 126-4803-01 126-4805-01 126-4807-01

15° ANGLED 126-4803-15 126-4805-15

25° ANGLED 126-4803-25 126-4805-25

A try-in abutment in plastic material is available associated with each abutment herewith indicated (page 28)

25
 accessories for abutments for screw-retained prosthesis www.leone.it

STANDARD CONNECTING SCREW

FOR SCREW-RETAINED PROSTHESIS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Diameter: 2 mm; length: 4,5 mm.

Pack of 1 126-0001-00

HIGH HEAD CONNECTING SCREW

FOR SCREW-RETAINED PROSTHESIS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Diameter: 2 mm; length: 6 mm.

Pack of 1 126-0001-06

ADAPTER FOR CONNECTING SCREW

Made of stainless steel. It is used joined to the large hand screwdriver Cat.
156-1001-01 to connect the bar or the screw-retained prosthesis to the
abutment. Length: 15 mm.
Pack of 1 126-0002-00

TRANSFERS FOR ABUTMENTS FOR SCREW-RETAINED PROSTHESIS

Made of stainless steel. They are used for impression taking on the abutments for screw-retained prosthesis already fixed to the implants to precisely
reproduce the final position of the abutments on the dental cast.

TRANSFERS
new PICK-UP TRANSFERS

Pack content: 1 transfer, 1 protective cap, 1 standard connecting screw Pack content: 1 pick-up transfer, 1 pick-up screw, 1 protective
cap, 1 standard connecting screw

for implant for implant

height 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm height 8 mm 8 mm

144-3310-00 144-4110-00 144-4810-00 144-3308-01 144-4108-01

new
REFILL – SCREW FOR PICK-UP TRANSFER

Made of stainless steel. It is used together with the pick-up transfer for open-tray impression
technique. Length: 12 mm.
Pack of 1
126-0012-01

new
SHORT SCREWDRIVER FOR CONNECTING SCREW

Made of stainless steel. It is used to tighten pick-up or connecting screws. Length: 13 mm.
Pack of 1
126-0002-01

26
 accessories for abutments for screw-retained prosthesis and prosthetic instruments
www.leone.it

TITANIUM COPINGS
FOR ABUTMENTS FOR SCREW-RETAINED PROSTHESIS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. They allow the fixing of provisional

for implant
and definitive screw-retained prosthesis to the abutments. They are also
used for intraoral and extraoral welding techniques. Height: 10 mm. 126-0010-33 126-0010-41 126-0010-48
Pack of 2

ANALOGS FOR ABUTMENTS

FOR SCREW-RETAINED PROSTHESIS

Made of stainless steel, colour-coded for easy identification.

They are used in the dental cast to precisely reproduce the final position
of the abutments for screw-retained prosthesis.
for implant
Pack of 1
length 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm

STRAIGHT 146-3315-00 146-4115-00 146-4815-00

15° ANGLED 146-3315-15 146-4115-15 146-4815-15

LONG WAXING SCREW

Made of stainless steel. During wax modelling on the abutment for

screw-retained prosthesis, it allows the preparation of a channel of
adequate dimensions for the seating of the connecting screw.
Length: 20 mm
Pack of 5 126-0020-05

156-0015-00
ORGANIZER WITH BURS FG FOR ABUTMENTS

Kit content:
2 burs FG tungsten short tip Ø 1.2 mm Cat. 153-1221-02
2 burs FG tungsten long tip Ø 1.2 mm Cat. 153-1235-02
2 burs FG diamond-cut Ø 1.6 mm Cat. 153-1610-01
2 burs FG diamond-cut Ø 1.8 mm Cat. 153-1810-01

BURS FG FOR ABUTMENTS BUR FG TUNGSTEN BUR FG DIAMOND-CUT

They are used in combination with a turbine for milling the short tip long tip
abutments in the mouth.
Pack of 1

Ø 1,2 Ø 1,2 Ø 1,6 Ø 1,8

153-1221-02 153-1235-02 153-1610-01 153-1810-01

27
 try-in abutments
try www.leone.it

160-0001-04 new
TRY-IN KIT FOR STANDARD
AND LARGE ABUTMENTS

Manufactured from plastic material, autoclavable, in three

colour-codes: green, yellow and red, to allow the immediate iden-
tification of the corresponding implant diameter.
They are the exact replica of all the LEONE abutments, with
exception for the 360° anatomical abutments for which a special
kit has been reserved (page 15).
Each try-in abutment is marked with a number useful for the pla-
cement in the proper space into the kit. A transparent template
over the plastic case, shows the outlines and the catalogue code
numbers of each corresponding titanium abutment to facilitate
the ordering of the selected type.
Only the inner tray is autoclavable.

Kit content:
4 try-in abutments each implant diameter for the different types,
total 272 pcs

160-0033-04
new
REFILL - TRY-IN ABUTMENTS STANDARD AND LARGE
FOR IMPLANT 3.3 AND MAX STABILITY IMPLANT 3,75

Content:
4 sets of try-in abutments, 26 shapes each set, for implant 3.3 and Max Stability implants diameter 3,75
Total 104 pcs

160-0041-04
new
REFILL - TRY-IN ABUTMENTS STANDARD AND LARGE
FOR IMPLANT 4.1, LEONE 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT AND MAX STABILITY IMPLANT 4,5

Content:
4 sets of try-in abutments, 26 shapes each set, for implant 4.1 mm in diameter,
LEONE 6.5 short implant and Max Stability implants diameter 4,5.
Total 104 pcs

160-0048-04
new
REFILL - TRY-IN ABUTMENTS STANDARD AND LARGE FOR IMPLANT 4.8

Content:
4 sets of try-in abutments, 16 shapes each set, for implant 4.8.
Total 64 pcs

28
www.leone.it
prosthetic accessories
ANALOGS

Made of stainless steel. Designed to be used in the laboratory on dental casts to faithfully duplicate the position of the implant. With colour-code marking
for easy identification. Available in two versions: standard and long (more retentive).
Pack content: 1 analog, 1 pin, 1 bar for the extraction of the abutment

new

for implant

Ø 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm

length 9 mm 9 mm 9 mm

142-3309-00 142-4109-00 142-4809-00

new

for implant

Ø 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm

length 13 mm 13 mm 13 mm

142-3313-00 142-4113-00 142-4813-00

HANDLE FOR ABUTMENTS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. It is used for the milling of the abutment either in the laboratory or in the dental office.

for implant

inner cone Ø 2,2 mm 3,0 mm 3,7 mm

156-1007-33 156-1007-41 156-1007-48

29
 surgical instruments www.leone.it

KEY TO SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS

for implants: for implants: for implants:

GREEN YELLOW RED
Ø 3,3 mm Ø 4,1 mm Ø 4,8 mm

DARK for implants: DARK for implants: for implants:

Max Stability Ø 3,75 mm FUCHSIA short 6.5
GREEN YELLOW Max Stability Ø 4,5 mm

Stands for GENERAL-PURPOSE.

BLUE
Instruments and products suitable for all dental implant diameters

MUCOSA PUNCH FOR CONTRA ANGLE

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. The corresponding implant diameter is laser marked on the body. Intended for use with a contra angle set at a low
speed, it allows to punch the mucosa according to the selected implant diameter. The instruments are supplied non sterile and must be sterilised in
the autoclave before use.
Pack of 1

for implant

154-3315-20 154-3815-20 154-4115-20 154-4515-20 154-4815-20 154-5015-20

151-0001-00
POSITIONER FOR DEPTH INDICATOR

Made of anodized aluminium. Designed to be used during the preparation of the

implant site, it allows the right placement of the depth indicator on the drills.
Supplied non sterile, sterilise in autoclave before use.
Pack content: 1 positioner and 4 packs depth indicators (one for each diameter
available)

DEPTH INDICATORS for drill

The elastomer ringlets are to be applied on the drill to better visualize the dril- Ø 2,2 mm 151-0000-01
ling depth. Supplied non sterile, the ringlets must be sterilised in the autoclave
before use. Single use. Ø 2,8 mm 151-0000-02
Pack of 10
Ø 3,5 mm 151-0000-03

Ø 4,2 mm 151-0000-04

30
www.leone.it
surgical instruments
BURS AND DRILLS

Made of stainless steel. Diameter, length and depth marks are indicated on the body. Supplied non-sterile, burs and drills must be sterilised in autoclave
before use. Replace drills used more than 20 times or in case of worn out cutting edges.
Pack of 1

new
ROUND BUR LANCE DRILL PILOT DRILL

Designed to mark the cortical bone for It is used as an alternative to the round Indicated to drill the implant site. The 5 depth marks on
the subsequent drills. bur, to mark the cortical bone for the the drill corresponding to the implant lengths (6,5-8-
subsequent drills. Particularly suitable in 10-12-14 mm) enable the clinician to reach the relevant
case of narrow knife-edged ridges. depth. Max speed: 800 rpm.

short long

for implant for implant for implant

Ø 1,9 mm max Ø 1,9 mm Ø 2,2 mm 2,2 mm

length 34 mm length 30 mm length 33 mm 39 mm

151-1934-01 151-1930-02 151-2233-12 151-2241-12

TWIST DRILL

These drills are used in progression to allow the widening of the implant site up to the relevant size. The 5 depth marks on the drill corresponding to the
implant lengths (6,5-8-10-12-14 mm) enable the clinician to reach the relevant depth.
Max speed: diameter 2.8 mm 600 rpm; diameter 3.5 mm 500 rpm; diameter 4.2 mm 400 rpm.

short long short long short long

for implant

Ø 2,8 mm 2,8 mm 3,5 mm 3,5 mm 4,2 mm 4,2 mm

length 33 mm 39 mm 33 mm 39 mm 33 mm 39 mm

151-2833-13 151-2841-13 151-3533-13 151-3541-13 151-4233-13 151-4241-13

31
 surgical instruments www.leone.it

COUNTERSINK

Suitable to shape the osteotomy for the implant neck at the end of the surgical
sequence. Thanks to its self-centering multi-blade geometry, it performs a
perfectly coaxial and precise countersinking hole.
Maximum speed: 300 rpm.

for implant

Ø 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm

length 33 mm 33 mm 33 mm

151-3333-24 151-4133-24 151-4833-24

DRILLS WITH DEPTH STOP PILOT TWIST

FOR LEONE 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT

With integrated depth stop at 6.5 mm. The 3,5 mm twist drill has got the crestal
countersink integrated. These drills are used in progression to allow the wide-
ning of the implant site up to the LEONE 6.5 short implant diameter.
Max speed:
PILOT - diameter 2.2 mm 800 rpm;
TWIST - diameter 2.8 mm 600 rpm;
TWIST - diameter 3.5 mm 500 rpm.
for implant

Ø 2,2 mm 2,8 mm 3,5 mm

length 33 mm 33 mm 33 mm

151-2233-65 151-2833-65 151-3533-65

TWIST DRILLS FOR HARD BONE

Specifically developed for LEONE Max Stability implants, these twist drills are to be used at the end of the surgical sequence only with hard bone, in order to
avoid excessive insertion torque forces. Made of stainless steel. The 5 depth marks (6.5-8-10-12-14 mm) on the drilling body enable the clinician to reach
the desired depth. Two colour-coded marks, rather than one single mark, are visible on the drill’s stem and clearly distinguish them from other twist drills.
Max speed: 500 rpm for implant Ø 3,75 mm; 400 rpm for implant Ø 4,5 mm.
Supplied non-sterile.

short long short long

for implant

length 33 mm 39 mm 33 mm 39 mm

151-3133-13 151-3141-13 151-3833-13 151-3841-13

32
www.leone.it
surgical instruments
DRILLS WITH DEPTH STOP

A drill system with depth stops, specific for the LEONE implant system. The system provides accu- STOP
rate drilling with depth control during the preparation of the implant site, especially in case of
reduced visibility of the surgical area or proximity to sensitive anatomical structures.

The drills present a depth stop, which is an integral part of the drill, stopping the osteotomy at the
level of the bone crest.

The integrated depth stop determines, for each drill diameter, one specific drill for each implant
length.

Besides the cylindrical cutting portion, each twist drill has the crestal countersink integrated in
order to shape the coronal portion of the osteotomy for the implant neck.
The drills are available only in the short version. A drill extension for situations where longer instru-
ments are needed is available.

The drills with depth stop are made of stainless steel. The corresponding drilling depth is indicated
on the stem. Supplied non-sterile, they must be sterilised in autoclave before use.
Replace drills used more than 20 times or in case of worn out cutting edges.
Pack of 1

DRILL EXTENSION

Made of stainless steel. Allows to extend the total length of the drill.
Supplied non-sterile, sterilise in autoclave before use.

156-1019-00

PILOT DRILL WITH DEPTH STOP

Max speed: 800 rpm.

for implant

Ø 2,2 mm 2,2 mm 2,2 mm 2,2 mm

drilling
depth 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm

151-2208-12 151-2210-12 151-2212-12 151-2214-12

33
 surgical instruments www.leone.it

TWIST DRILLS WITH DEPTH STOP

These drills are used in progression to allow the widening of the implant site up to the relevant size. There is a colour-coded mark on the stem to allow
the identification of the drill diameter. Each drill has the crestal countersink integrated.
Max speed:
- diameter 2,8 mm 600 rpm
- diameter 3,5 mm 500 rpm
- diameter 4,2 mm 400 rpm

TWIST DRILL
WITH DEPTH STOP Ø 2,8

for implant

Ø 2,8 mm 2,8 mm 2,8 mm 2,8 mm

drilling
8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm
depth

151-2808-13 151-2810-13 151-2812-13 151-2814-13

TWIST DRILL
WITH DEPTH STOP Ø 3,5

for implant

Ø 3,5 mm 3,5 mm 3,5 mm 3,5 mm

drilling
8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm
depth

151-3508-13 151-3510-13 151-3512-13 151-3514-13

TWIST DRILL
WITH DEPTH STOP Ø 4,2

for implant

Ø 4,2 mm 4,2 mm 4,2 mm 4,2 mm

drilling
8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm
depth

151-4208-13 151-4210-13 151-4212-13 151-4214-13

34
www.leone.it
surgical instruments
TAPS FOR LEONE DENTAL IMPLANTS Ø 3,3 - Ø 4,1 - Ø 4,8

Made of stainless steel. Designed for the preparation of the implant site with high bone density. The elastomer ring on the octagonal basis allows the
connection with the instruments. Supplied non sterile. Sterilise in the autoclave before use.

short long short long short long

for implant

Ø 3,3 mm 3,3 mm 4,1 mm 4,1 mm 4,8 mm 4,8 mm

length 21 mm 28 mm 21 mm 28 mm 21 mm 28 mm

152-3321-00 152-3328-00 152-4121-00 152-4128-00 152-4821-00 152-4828-00

TAPS FOR LEONE 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT Tap A Tap B

Made of stainless steel. The use of the tap “A” is essential with any kind of bone for the
placement of the short implant 6.5. The bone tap “B” is suitable with high bone density and
essential to be used after tapping with bone tap “A”. The elastomer ring on the octagonal
basis allows the connection with the instruments. Two fuchsia colour-coded marks are
present on the tap “B“’s stem to differentiate it from the bone tap “A”.
Supplied non sterile. Sterilise in the autoclave before use.

for implant

Ø 5 mm 5 mm

length 21 mm 21 mm

152-5021-01 152-5021-02

CONNECTING RINGS
152-0000-01

Replacement part for taps and instruments. 152-0000-02

Made of elastomer material. 152-0000-03
Pack of 5
152-0000-04

156-1002-02

RATCHET

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. The ratchet is designed to be used with the tap to thread
the implant site and being a two-way instrument, it may be utilized whether to screw in or
unscrew implants. With circular revolution in 24 “releases”, this ratchet is a specific versa-
tile device even in small spaces where a “reload” of the instrument is needed.
Use the ratchet in connection with the tap, the implant carrier or with the specially provi-
156-1014-00
ded extension Cat. 156-1002-00. Suitable for all types of implants. Supplied non-sterile.
Sterilise in the autoclave before use. Do not disassemble the instrument.

35
 surgical instruments www.leone.it

MEASURING PIN FOR GINGIVAL HEIGHT

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. 2,2 mm in diameter. With a hole for the placement of a safety leash. It is used to measure
the height of the soft tissues and ascertain parallelism, during the preparation of the implant site, immediately after the
application of the pilot drill. For monoimplants and implants. Supplied non sterile. Sterilise in the autoclave before use. 156-2004-00

PARALLELING PIN

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Dimensions of the two ends: 2.2 mm and 2.8 mm in diameter.
With a hole for the placement of a safety leash. Designed to be used during the preparation of the implant site to ascertain
parallelism with natural teeth and/or with adjacent implant sites. For monoimplants and implants. Supplied non sterile. 156-2001-00
Sterilise in the autoclave before use.

DEPTH GAUGE

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. 2,2 mm in diameter. With a hole for the placement of a safety leash.
Designed to be used during the preparation of the implant site to verify the depth. For monoimplants and
implants. Supplied non sterile. Sterilise in the autoclave before use. 156-2002-00

HAND SCREWDRIVER
standard large

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Designed for use with the tap to create a thread in the implant site and
afterwards to screw the implant into the bone. It fits over the tap or the implant carrier and it can be used
with the specially provided extension. With a hole for the placement of a safety leash. Supplied non sterile.
Sterilise in the autoclave before use.
156-1001-00 156-1001-01

EXTENSION

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. It is used to connect the hand screwdriver or the ratchet with other instruments like tap,
carrier etc. The elastomer ring on the octagonal basis allows the connection with the hand instruments. Supplied non sterile.
Sterilise in the autoclave before use.
156-1002-00

DRIVER FOR IMPLANT

new new new
Made of tempered stainless steel. Designed to be used during
the placement of the implant into the implant site when the car-
rier supplied together with the implant is not strong enough to
transmit the force applied. Max torque resistance 140 Ncm. The
elastomer ring on the octagonal basis allows the connection with
the hand instruments. Replace drivers used more than 50 times.
Available as universal version, suitable for all types of implants for implant
and as specific version for each connection size, identified by the
156-1013-00 156-1033-00 156-1041-00 156-1048-00
colour code, more resistant to accidental application of bending
forces. Supplied non sterile. Sterilise in the autoclave before use.

new
SUPPORT RING FOR DRIVER
156-3300-00
Replacement part for driver for implant. Made of elastomer material. 156-4100-00
Pack of 5
156-4800-00

36
www.leone.it
surgical instruments
HANDPIECE ADAPTER

Made of tempered stainless steel. Supplied non-sterile, sterilise in the autoclave before use.
Do not use with a torque value higher than 50 Ncm.

156-1002-01
156-1008-00
THREADED HANDLE

Made of stainless steel. Seating tip is screwed into the threaded handle to beat the abutment for the definitive connection to the implant.
Suitable also for surgical tips. Supplied non-sterile, sterilise in the autoclave before use.

OFFSET ADAPTER FOR THREADED HANDLE

Made of stainless steel. By screwing it into the threaded handle, the execution of special sur-
gical techniques is allowed in difficult access areas with sinus lift tips. Supplied non sterile.
Sterilise in the autoclave before use.
156-1008-05

TIP WRENCH

Manufactured in stainless steel.

It is used for screwing and unscrewing the tips into the threaded handle.

156-1008-07

INSTRUMENTS FOR SURGERY

Tips are made of medical grade 5 titanium. Screwed into the threaded handle, they allow the execution of special surgical techniques. With depth marks
at 6,5-8-10-12-14-16-18 mm and colour-codes for easy identification. Supplied non-sterile, the tips must be sterilised in the autoclave before use.

156-1010-33

SINUS LIFT TIP for implant 156-1010-41

156-1010-48

156-1011-33

BONE CONDENSER TIP for implant 156-1011-41

156-1011-48

156-1012-33

BONE GRAFT TIP for implant 156-1012-41

156-1012-48

37
 surgical instruments www.leone.it

ABUTMENT BEATER

Made of stainless steel and medical grade 5 titanium. Supplied with an inner spring, it provides the right beating force to engage the healing cap and
definitely connect the abutment to the implant. Every seating tip may be mounted on the abutment beater.

156-1008-03
ABUTMENT BEATER
WITH STRAIGHT TIP

156-1008-04
ABUTMENT BEATER
WITH OFFSET TIP

The abutment beater with offset tip may only be used for the percussion of the abutments in the
posterior region. The offset tip reduces the beating force by 30%.

SEATING TIPS FOR ABUTMENTS

STRAIGHT TIP 156-1008-01
Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Designed to be screwed onto the
threaded handle or the abutment beater. The flat tip is most suitable for
the angled abutments. Suitable for all the abutments and healing caps. OFFSET TIP 156-1008-02

FLAT TIP 156-1008-06

new
REMOVAL TOOL FOR ABUTMENTS

Made of stainless steel. Acting on the transmucosal portion of the abutment, it allows the application of the extraction force necessary to remove a defi-
nitively seated abutment from the implant. Two different instruments are available specific for the prosthetic platform. Both are universal instruments
in regard to the three different connection sizes.

156-1022-01
FOR ABUTMENTS OF THE
STANDARD PROSTHETIC PLATFORM

156-1022-02
FOR ABUTMENTS OF THE
LARGE PROSTHETIC PLATFORM

INSTRUMENT FOR COVER CAPS

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Designed for placement and removal of the cover cap from the
implant. Suitable for extraction of the healing cap with Slim platform and for removal of the low
self-locking cap. With a hole for the insertion of a safety leash. Suitable for all types of implants.
Supplied non sterile. Sterilise in the autoclave before use. 156-1003-00

HEX HEAD EXTRACTOR FOR HEALING CAPS

Made of stainless steel. To unlock the healing cap with either Standard or Large platforms and
the low self-locking cap. With a hole for the insertion of a safety leash. Suitable for all types of
implants. Supplied non sterile. Sterilise in the autoclave before use. If the hexagon is worn out,
replace the instrument.
156-1006-00

38
www.leone.it
surgical instruments
156-0018-00
OSTEOTOMY INSTRUMENT KIT

Entirely autoclavable, it contains all the surgical accessories for the execu-
tion of special osteotomy interventions related to the placement of LEONE
implants.

Kit content:
1 round bur Cat. 151-1934-01
1 pilot drill long Cat. 151-2241-12
3 threaded handles Cat. 156-1008-00
1 sinus lift tip 3.3 Cat. 156-1010-33
1 sinus lift tip 4.1 Cat. 156-1010-41
1 sinus lift tip 4.8 Cat. 156-1010-48
1 bone condenser tip 3.3 Cat. 156-1011-33
1 bone condenser tip 4.1 Cat. 156-1011-41
1 bone condenser tip 4.8 Cat. 156-1011-48
1 bone graft tip 3.3 Cat. 156-1012-33
1 bone graft tip 4.1 Cat. 156-1012-41
1 bone graft tip 4.8 Cat. 156-1012-48
1 offset adapter for threaded handle Cat. 156-1008-05
1 tip wrench Cat. 156-1008-07
1 surgical mallet Cat. 156-1018-00
1 titanium basin Cat.156-1009-00

156-1018-00
SURGICAL MALLET

Manufactured in stainless steel and Teflon. Designed for

osteotomy techniques, to strike the threaded handle. Supplied
non sterile. Sterilise in the autoclave before use.

156-1009-00
TITANIUM BASIN

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Useful in surgery to place instruments or titanium products on it, to avoid
contamination risks.

TEMPLATE

The template helps the surgeon in selecting the right implant to be inserted. The whole range of LEONE implants in three scales is illustrated: actual
dimensions, dimensions increased by 10% and dimensions increased by 25%, it takes into account the distortions due to the diagnostic instruments.
Pack of 1

SISTEMA IMPLANTARE IMPLANT SYSTEM

156-2003-00
TEMPLATE FOR
LEONE IMPLANTS

156-2003-02
TEMPLATE FOR
LEONE 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT

156-2003-04 new
TEMPLATE FOR
LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANTS

39
 surgical kit www.leone.it

SURGICAL KIT

Suitable for full sterilisation in the autoclave, it includes all the surgical accessories required for treatment with the LEONE implant system.
The package includes an explanatory card as a guide for a working sequence of the instruments.

156-0065-04
COMPREHENSIVE SURGICAL KIT

Kit content: 1 round bur, 2 pilot drills Ø 2.2 mm, both long and short, 6 twist drills Ø 2.8-3.5-4.2 mm, both long and short, 3 countersinks Ø 3.3-4.1-4.8
mm, 6 taps Ø 3.3-4.1-4.8 mm, both long and short, 1 pilot drill Ø 2.2 with integrated stop for LEONE 6.5 short implant, 2 twist drills Ø 2.8-3.5 with
integrated stop for LEONE 6.5 short implant, 2 taps Ø 5 mm for LEONE 6.5 short implant, 3 paralleling pins Ø 2.2 mm, 1 depth gauge Ø 2.2 mm, 1 hand
screwdriver large, 1 extension, 1 instrument for caps, 1 ratchet, 1 hex head extractor, 1 titanium basin, 1 driver for implant, 1 hand piece adapter, 14
depth indicators for drills Ø 2.2-2.8-3.5-4.2 mm

156-0065-03
SURGICAL KIT FOR LEONE IMPLANTS Ø 3,3-4,1-4.8 WITH LONG AND SHORT INSTRUMENTS

156-0065-02
SURGICAL KIT FOR LEONE IMPLANTS Ø 3,3-4,1-4.8 WITH LONG INSTRUMENTS

156-0065-01
SURGICAL KIT FOR LEONE IMPLANTS Ø 3,3-4,1-4.8 WITH SHORT INSTRUMENTS

156-0065-00
EMPTY SURGICAL KIT

4
3
2

7
5
6

10

40
www.leone.it
surgical kit

WIDER FIELD TITANIUM BASIN

OF VISION useful for implants
1 the instruments are 6 and instruments
organized in a horizontal to reduce
sense into special niches contamination risks

CALIBRATED HOLES DEPTH INDICATORS

for the control of drill AND POSITIONER
2 diameter 7 are ready available
in the kit

SAFE HOLD SMOOTH SURFACES

OF CUTTING WITHOUT UNDERCUTS
3 INSTRUMENTS 8 for rapid cleaning
due to ergonomically without damage
designed niches of the gloves

EASY REPLACEMENT FREE SPACE

OF INSTRUMENTS to customize the kit
4 WITHOUT MISTAKE 9 with additional
each instrument surgical instruments
shape is designed
near each niche

RELIABLE AND SAFE REDUCED SIZES

LOCK SYSTEM only 3 cm thick
5 prevents from any 10
accidental opening

41
 organizer www.leone.it

ORGANIZER

Suitable for full sterilisation in the autoclave. It contains the necessary instruments for
the preparation of the implant site positioned on the special colour-coded support.
The package includes an explanatory card as a guide for a working sequence of the
instruments on the basis of the selected implant diameter. The organizer is also available
empty to give the possibility for the user to customize it.

ORGANIZER 156-0022-33 156-0023-33

FOR IMPLANT Ø 3,3 SHORT INSTRUMENTS LONG INSTRUMENTS

151-1934-01 round bur 151-1934-01 round bur

151-2233-12 pilot drill 151-2241-12 pilot drill
151-2833-13 twist drill 2,8 151-2841-13 twist drill 2,8
151-3333-24 countersink 3,3 151-3333-24 countersink 3,3

152-3321-00 tap 3,3 152-3328-00 tap 3,3

ORGANIZER 156-0020-41 156-0021-41

FOR IMPLANT Ø 4,1 SHORT INSTRUMENTS LONG INSTRUMENTS

151-1934-01 round bur 151-1934-01 round bur

151-2233-12 pilot drill 151-2241-12 pilot drill
151-2833-13 twist drill 2,8 151-2841-13 twist drill 2,8
151-3533-13 twist drill 3,5 151-3541-13 twist drill 3,5
151-4133-24 countersink 4,1 151-4133-24 countersink 4,1

152-4121-00 tap 4,1 152-4128-00 tap 4,1

ORGANIZER 156-0024-48 156-0025-48

FOR IMPLANT Ø 4,8 SHORT INSTRUMENTS LONG INSTRUMENTS

151-1934-01 round bur 151-1934-01 round bur

151-2233-12 pilot drill 151-2241-12 pilot drill
151-2833-13 twist drill 2,8 151-2841-13 twist drill 2,8
151-3533-13 twist drill 3,5 151-3541-13 twist drill 3,5
151-4233-13 twist drill 4,2 151-4241-13 twist drill 4,2

151-4833-24 countersink 4,8 151-4833-24 countersink 4,8

152-4821-00 tap 4,8 152-4828-00 tap 4,8

42
www.leone.it
ORGANIZER 156-0019-00
FOR 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT
151-1934-01 round bur
151-2233-65 pilot drill with stop
151-2833-65 twist drill 2,8 with stop
151-3533-65 twist drill 3,5 with stop
152-5021-01 tap “A”
152-5021-02 tap “B”
156-1013-00 driver for implant
156-1002-01 handpiece adapter
ORGANIZER 156-0026-00
SHORT INSTRUMENTS
FOR IMPLANTS Ø 3,3 - 4,1 - 4,8
151-1934-01 round bur
151-2233-12 pilot drill
151-2833-13 twist drill 2,8
151-3533-13 twist drill 3,5
151-4233-13 twist drill 4,2
151-3333-24 countersink 3,3
151-4133-24 countersink 4,1
151-4833-24 countersink 4,8
156-0028-38
SHORT INSTRUMENTS
ORGANIZER 151-1934-01 round bur
FOR MAX STABILITY Ø 3,75
151-2233-12 pilot drill
151-2833-13 twist drill 2,8
151-3333-24 countersink 3,3
151-3133-13 for hard bone imp. 3,75
156-1002-01 handpiece adapter
156-1013-00 driver for implant
156-0030-45
SHORT INSTRUMENTS
ORGANIZER 151-1934-01 round bur
FOR MAX STABILITY Ø 4,5
151-2233-12 pilot drill
151-2833-13 twist drill 2,8
151-3533-13 twist drill 3,5
151-4133-24 countersink 4,1
151-3833-13 for hard bone imp. 4,5
156-1002-01 handpiece adapter
156-1013-00 driver for implant
organizer
156-0027-00
LONG INSTRUMENTS
151-1934-01 round bur
151-2241-12 pilot drill
151-2841-13 twist drill 2,8
151-3541-13 twist drill 3,5
151-4241-13 twist drill 4,2
151-3333-24 countersink 3,3
151-4133-24 countersink 4,1
151-4833-24 countersink 4,8
156-0029-38
LONG INSTRUMENTS
151-1934-01 round bur
151-2241-12 pilot drill
151-2841-13 twist drill 2,8
151-3333-24 countersink 3,3
151-3141-13 for hard bone imp. 3,75
156-1002-01 handpiece adapter
156-1013-00 driver for implant
156-0031-45
LONG INSTRUMENTS
151-1934-01 round bur
151-2241-12 pilot drill
151-2841-13 twist drill 2,8
151-3541-13 twist drill 3,5
151-4133-24 countersink 4,1
151-3841-13 for hard bone imp. 4,5
156-1002-01 handpiece adapter
156-1013-00 driver for implant
43
 organizer www.leone.it

ORGANIZER WITH DRILLS 156-0032-08 156-0033-10

WITH DEPTH STOP ORGANIZER WITH DRILLS WITH DEPTH STOP AT 8 mm ORGANIZER WITH DRILLS WITH DEPTH STOP AT 10 mm

151-2208-12 pilot drill Ø 2,2 with stop at 8 mm
151-2808-13 twist drill Ø 2,8 with stop at 8 mm
151-3508-13 twist drill Ø 3,5 with stop at 8 mm
151-4208-13 twist drill Ø 4,2 with stop at 8 mm
156-1019-00 drill extension
151-2210-12 pilot drill Ø 2,2 with stop at 10 mm
151-2810-13 twist drill Ø 2,8 with stop at 10 mm
151-3510-13 twist drill Ø 3,5 with stop at 10 mm
151-4210-13 twist drill Ø 4,2 with stop at 10 mm
156-1019-00 drill extension

156-0034-12 156-0035-14
ORGANIZER WITH DRILLS WITH DEPTH STOP AT 12 mm ORGANIZER WITH DRILLS WITH DEPTH STOP AT 14 mm

151-2212-12 pilot drill Ø 2,2 with stop at 12 mm 151-2214-12 pilot drill Ø 2,2 with stop at 14 mm
151-2812-13 twist drill Ø 2,8 with stop at 12 mm 151-2814-13 twist drill Ø 2,8 with stop at 14 mm
151-3512-13 twist drill Ø 3,5 with stop at 12 mm 151-3514-13 twist drill Ø 3,5 with stop at 14 mm
151-4212-13 twist drill Ø 4,2 with stop at 12 mm 151-4214-13 twist drill Ø 4,2 with stop at 14 mm
156-1019-00 drill extension 156-1019-00 drill extension

156-0044-00
SET OF 4 ORGANIZERS
156-0032-08 1 organizer with drills with stop at 8 mm 152-3321-00 1 short tap 3,3
WITH DRILLS WITH
DEPTH STOP AND TAPS 156-0033-10 1 organizer with drills with stop at 10 mm 152-4121-00 1 short tap 4,1

156-0034-12 1 organizer with drills with stop at 12 mm 152-4821-00 1 short tap 4,8
156-0035-14 1 organizer with drills with stop at 14 mm 151-1934-01 2 round burs

ORGANIZER
WITH TAPS
156-0011-00 156-0012-00
SHORT INSTRUMENTS LONG INSTRUMENTS

152-3321-00 tap 3,3 152-3328-00 tap 3,3

152-4121-00 tap 4,1 152-4128-00 tap 4,1
152-4821-00 tap 4,8 152-4828-00 tap 4,8

ORGANIZER 156-0013-00
WITH INSTRUMENTS
156-1002-00 extension 156-1002-01 hand piece adapter

156-1001-01 hand screwdriver large 156-2002-00 depth gauge

156-1006-00 hex-head extractor 156-2001-00 paralleling pin

156-1003-00 instrument for cover caps 156-1013-00 driver for implant

156-0010-00
EMPTY ORGANIZER
Composed of base, cover and explanatory card

44
www.leone.it
demonstration anatomical models
DEMONSTRATION ANATOMICAL MODELS

Made of resin, two materials: transparent and white. Demonstration models with the bone in transparent resin and the sensitive dental structures (roots,
impacted teeth, mandibular nerve) highlighted in white resin.

106-0004-00
DEMONSTRATION ANATOMICAL MODEL – UPPER ARCH

Anatomical model of the complete upper arch; within the bone are clearly visible two
impacted canines and the roots of the natural teeth.

106-0005-00
DEMONSTRATION ANATOMICAL MODEL – LOWER ARCH

Anatomical model of a complete lower arch; within the bone are clearly visible the mandi-
bular nerve, the roots of the natural teeth and an impacted tooth.

106-0006-00
DEMONSTRATION ANATOMICAL MODEL – SEGMENT

Anatomical model of a segment of the lower arch; within the bone are clearly visible the
mandibular nerve and the roots of the natural teeth.

45
 accessories www.leone.it

106-0002-00
DEMONSTRATION SURGICAL KIT

Designed to be used by the clinician to simulate the most relevant surgical phases of
the LEONE Implant System. The content of the kit is intended for demonstration use
only and must not be used on patient.
Kit content:
- 1 hemi-mandible,
- 1 non sterile implant Ø 4.1, 10 mm long with cover cap
and 5 cover caps Ø 4.1 refills,
- 1 instrument for cover caps,
- 1 standard transfer Ø 4.1,
- 1 standard healing cap Ø 4.1 mm GH 3 mm,
- 1 standard hand screwdriver,
- 1 hex-head extractor,
- 1 standard cylinder abutment Ø 4.1 mm

106-0001-00
HEMI-MANDIBLE

Made of polyurethane. The hemi-mandible presents a hole for the placement of a

implant Ø 4.1 mm, 10 mm long.

106-0003-00
DEMONSTRATION JUMBO DENTAL IMPLANT

Made of aluminium. It is a scale 5:1 reproduction of LEONE implant Ø 4.1, 10 mm

long and standard cylinder abutment Ø 4.1. Use the rod included in the package
for removal of the abutment from the jumbo implant which presents a hole in the
posterior part just for this operation.

DENTAL IMPLANT IDENTITY CARD

Each LEONE implant is supplied with this important document including the general
information of the implant both for the patient and for the doctor where to take note
of the features of the seated implants. These information will be essential in case of
need for dental assistance later.

PATIENT INFORMATIVE BROCHURE

Available in Italian or Spanish only.

46
LEONE
MONOIMPLANTS
for overdenture O-ring

Leone monoimplants for O-ring overdenture are made of medical grade 5 titanium.
Self-tapping shaped, with thread in accordance with ISO standard and designed to obtain an excellent
primary stability.
The body of Leone monoimplant for O-ring overdenture is treated with a sandblasting process producing
a roughness Ra = 1 µm purposely designed to ensure a rapid osteointegration.
The smooth, transmucosal tapered neck enhances gingival healing.

diameter
2,7 mm 2 gingival
heights

HRS SURFACE

with
endosseous
portion in
4 lenghts

Leone monoimplants for O-ring overdenture are available:

• 2.7 mm in diameter
• with endosseous portion in four lengths: 10 mm - 12 mm - 14 mm - 16 mm
• in two gingival heights: 3 mm - 5 mm

The micro housing is made of medical grade 5 titanium as well. Outer diameter of 4,2 mm, height: 2,8 mm

The package includes a spacer ring for monoimplants to facilitate the correct incorporation of the micro
housing with O-ring into the removable denture. The spacer ring can also be used for the incorporation of
the housing with O-ring into the denture when used in combination with monoimplants.

Only a few instruments are necessary for the placement of the Leone monoimplants, the complete range
is illustrated in the following pages.

47
 monoimplants for O-ring overdenture www.leone.it

MONOIMPLANTS FOR O-RING OVERDENTURE

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Single supplied mounted on a monoimplant

carrier, and packed in gamma-ray sterile glass vial. A non sterile micro housing is
supplied in a plastic vial. TOP LID
Pack content:
1 monoimplant,
1 micro housing with O-ring,
SEALING CAP
1 spacer ring for monoimplants (white),
n ew 1 low spacer ring for abutments (grey)
MONOIMPLANT
CARRIER

MONOIMPLANT

gingival
3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm
height

Ø 2,7 mm 2,7 mm 2,7 mm 2,7 mm MONOIMPLANT

10 mm 12 mm 14 mm 16 mm VIAL
length

111-2710-13 111-2712-13 111-2714-13 111-2716-13

gingival
5 mm 5 mm 5 mm 5 mm
GLASS VIAL
height

Ø 2,7 mm 2,7 mm 2,7 mm 2,7 mm

length 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm 16 mm

111-2710-15 111-2712-15 111-2714-15 111-2716-15

HOUSING WITH O-RING

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Outer diameter: 5,4 mm, height: 3,1 mm.
Pack content:
new - 1 housing with O-ring, 123-0002-00
- 1 low spacer ring for abutments

MICRO HOUSING WITH O-RING

Made of medical grade 5 titanium. Outer diameter: 4,2 mm, height: 2,8 mm.
Pack content:
new - 1 micro housing with O-ring, 123-0003-00
- 1 low spacer ring for abutments (grey),
- 1 spacer ring for monoimplants (white)

ELASTOMERIC ELASTOMERIC
O-RING MICRO O-RING

Pack of 2 123-0001-00 Pack of 2 123-0001-01

48
www.leone.it
monoimplants for O-ring overdenture
156-0017-00
ORGANIZER
FOR MONOIMPLANTS FOR O-RING OVERDENTURE

Designed to sterilize and hold the instruments necessary for the planned intervention
on the operating table. It holds up 8 instruments mounted on the special supports
and it can be sterilised in the autoclave.
Composition:
1 round bur Cat. 151-1934-01
1 pilot drill, long Ø 2.2 mm Cat. 151-2241-12
1 mucosa punch for handpiece Cat. 151-2215-20
1 depth gauge Ø 2.2 mm Cat. 156-2002-00
1 fan-type wrench for monoimplants Cat. 156-1015-00
2 measuring pin for gingival height Cat. 156-2004-00
1 adapter for handpiece Cat. 156-1017-00

MUCOSA PUNCH FOR HANDPIECE

Circular mucosa punch of titanium, 2.7 mm in diameter, to be seated into the

handpiece. It allows to perform an adequate operculum in the flapless procedure.
With 3 marks at 3, 5 and 7 mm starting from the bone crest and useful for the mea-
surement of the gingival thickness. Supplied non sterile, sterilise in the autoclave
before use.
Pack of 1

151-2215-20

MEASURING PIN FOR GINGIVAL HEIGHT

Made of medical grade 5 titanium, 2.2 mm in diameter, with a hole for the placement
of a safety leash. To be employed immediately afterwards the use of the pilot drill to
detect the height of soft tissues and parallelism of the implant sites. Supplied non
156-2004-00
sterile, sterilise in the autoclave before use.
Pack of 1

DEPTH GAUGE

Made of medical grade 5 titanium, 2.2 mm in diameter, with a hole for the placement
of a safety leash. To be employed during the preparation of the implant site to verify
the depth and parallelism of the implant sites. For monoimplants and implants.
156-2002-00
Supplied non sterile, sterilise in the autoclave before use.
Pack of 1

49
 monoimplants for O-ring overdenture www.leone.it

FAN-TYPE WRENCH FOR MONOIMPLANTS

Made of stainless steel and anodized aluminium. With hexagonal hole matching with
the monoimplant head. Sidewise presents a hole for the placement of a safety leash.
It is necessary for the placement of the monoimplant into the implant site. Supplied
non sterile, sterilise in the autoclave before use.
Pack of 1
156-1015-00

ADAPTER FOR RATCHET

It allows the use of the ratchet Cat. 156-1014-00 for the placement of the monoim-
plants. Supplied non sterile, sterilise in the autoclave before use.
Pack of 1

156-1016-00

ADAPTER FOR HANDPIECE

It allows the use of the handpiece during the placement of the monoimplants.
Supplied non sterile, sterilise in the autoclave before use.
Pack of 1

156-1017-00

156-2003-01
TEMPLATE FOR MONOIMPLANT

The template helps the surgeon in selecting the right monoimplant to be seated.
The whole range of LEONE monoimplants GH3 in three scales is illustrated: actual
dimensions, dimensions increased by 10% and dimensions increased by 25% for
possible distortions due to the diagnostic instruments.
Pack of 1

50
SURGICAL
procedure

2015
for

implant system

Proc. 01/10-12 May 01, 2015

 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

DISCLAIMER

The Surgical Procedure and the use of the products of the LEONE Implant System described in the following pages are intended for Professionals
experienced in dental implant techniques.
In case of lack of basic notions, we suggest to attend specific courses in order to reach a high level of knowledge and practice in the use of implants.
The rules on the use of the products described below represent a group of standard instructions that must be adjusted to the single needs and to the par-
ticular situations that may occur according to the manual ability, to the experience and to the diagnosis made by the legally qualified medical operator.
It is not ascribed to the manufacturer the duty of monitoring the procedures of use of the product. A correct and appropriate use of the instruments
and products related to the LEONE Implant System shall completely be reverted to the clinician. The surgical procedure hereunder described is merely
indicative as any single treatment case is assigned to the experience of the operator. As every medical operator well knows, a correct procedure and a
perfect manufacture of the prosthesis may sometimes be followed by not satisfactory results owing to particular situations not imputable to responsi-
bility of the dental operator or the manufacturer.

TREATMENT PLANNING

Indications
Implant therapy is indicated in the treatment of the following conditions:
SINGLE-TOOTH EDENTULISM, DISTAL EDENTULISM, MULTIPLE EDENTULISM, TOTAL EDENTULISM.

Contraindications
For contraindications and side effects read the instructions for use enclosed in the package of each product and available in our web site www.leone.it.

PREOPERATIVE EXAMS

Before starting the surgical intervention, the patients have to be subjected to a series of exams; single cases have to be evaluated in the opinion of the
clinician.

Anamnesis
It is the first approach to the patient and it represents a fundamental tool to recognize both risk factors and contraindications. Moreover, anamnesis
allows for the evaluation of patient’s expectations and priorities and of patient’s degree of compliance and motivation. Anamnesis can help in evaluating
the need for extra exams in addition to the routine ones (when the presence of pathologies that were not reported by the patient is suspected) and when
particular situations drive to deem a complete medico-surgical exam necessary.

Objective exam
It consists of:
• inspection of the periodontal tissues, of the oral mucosa and of the teeth along with an initial evaluation of the occlusal relationships (skeletal Class,
characteristics of the opposing arch and related potential problems, type of occlusion, interarch distance), of the presence of parafunctions, of the degree
of oral hygiene, of the aesthetic conditions, of the morphology of the edentulous crest and the space available for the replacement of the prosthesis.
• palpation of the soft tissues and implant sites with a first evaluation of the bone morphology and thickness.
• a complete periodontal probing for the appraisal of the absence of both gengivitis and pockets.
• Examination of the dental casts mounted in an articulator for a comparison with the information derived from previous exams, creation of a diagnostic
set-up, and, if necessary, the implementation of a surgical template.

Radiographic exams
PANORAMIC RADIOGRAPH: frequently, this radiograph enables to appraise bone height and the relationships between implant site and adjacent structu-
res, such as maxillary sinuses, nasal cavities, and mandibular canal. It is also possible to identify concavities and ossification defects due to previous
tooth extractions.

INTRAORAL RADIOGRAPH: it is very helpful for the determination of the mesio-distal distance between the roots, and the apico-coronal availability of
bone.

LATERAL CEPHALOGRAM: it is useful when interventions on the mandibular symphysis are planned.

COMPUTERIZED TOMOGRAPHY: it is advisable to remind that previous radiographic exams provide two-dimensional images which do not give informa-
tion on bone thickness. In order to obtain this useful information a computerized tomography is necessary: it provides three-dimensional images, thus
allowing for an accurate evaluation of bone morphology and, sometimes, bone density.

Instrumental or laboratory exams or medical advices

When necessary, in cases where a pathology is suspected on the basis of anamnesis or clinical records.

52
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

IMPLANT SELECTION

The number and dimensions (diameter and length) of the implants to be seated are determined by the following factors:
1. amount of bone available
2. characteristics of the implant site
3. masticatory load
4. aesthetic results
5. type of the prosthetic restoration
6. type of the surgical procedure followed

Further and particular single situations must be evaluated by the clinician.

Templates (page 39) are available showing all LEONE implants in actual dimensions, with dimensions increased by 10% and increased by 25%, to
match possible distortions created by the instrument for radiographic examinations (CT, panoramic radiograph, standard and digital cephalograms).
Superimpose the template to the radiograph in order to select the implant in relation to the quantity of bone available.

Do not seat a single Ø 3.3 mm implant in molar position.

The Ø 3.3 mm implant, length 8 mm, must be used as a supplementary implant in the prosthesis composed of two or more implants of any diameter
and length.
The LEONE 6.5 short implant is intended for use only in cases with limited vertical bone availability. It is not intended to be associated with sinus lift
procedures.
Do not place the LEONE implants above the level of the alveolar crest.

The LEONE implant system is characterized by a high mechanical resistance validated through fatigue strength testing according to the ISO 14801 inter-
national standard, which indicates to perform testing with a cyclic loading at an angle of 30° with respect to the implant-abutment axis. For the LEONE
implants of minor diameter, and thus the most relevant ones, the results are: Ø3,3 mm and Ø3,75 mm implant fatigue strength: 240 N; Ø4,1 mm, Ø4,5
mm and LEONE 6.5 short implant fatigue strength: 392 N.[1,2]
In the literature, in comparison, it is reported that the average force generated during mastication is 145 N with inclinations up to 10°.[3 4] It should also
be underlined that very high masticatory forces[5] can be generated due to many individual and prosthetic factors, such as crown height, cantilever and
restoration type, which locally can exceed the strength limit of the implants, especially in case of single or unsplinted implants.
[1] ISO 14801:2007 (E), Dentistry - Implants - Dynamic fatigue test for endosseous dental implants, International Organization for Standardization, Geneva, 2007
[2] Barlattani A, Sannino G, Mechanical evaluation of an implant-abutment self-locking taper connection: finite element analysis and experimental tests, Int J Oral Maxillofac Implants 2013; 28:e17-e26
[3] Carlsson GE, Haraldson T. Functional response. In: Branemark P-1. Zarb GA, Albrektsson T. Eds. Tissue integrated prostheses. Osseointegration in clinical dentistry. Chicago: Quintessence, 1985:155-63
[4] Graf H. Occlusal forces during function. In: Proceedings of Symposium on Occlusion: Research on Form and Function. University of Michigan School of Dentistry, Ann Arbor: Rowe NH (Ed.), 1975:90–111
[5] Craig RG. Restorative dental material. 6th ed. St. Louis, C.V. Mosby, 1980

SURGICAL KIT AND ORGANIZER

The surgical kit, (page 40), completely autoclavable, contains all the necessary surgical instruments for the implant treatments with the LEONE Implant
System.

To simplify the surgical operation, a surgical kit with reduced dimensions, an organizer (pages 42-44) was conceived by LEONE to sterilize and hold the
necessary instruments on the operation field.
The organizer is fully autoclavable and it can contain up to 8 instruments on colour coded special supports.

Either the organizer or the surgical kit must be wrapped and sterilized before use.
The sterilization must be done as follows:
• wrap the organizer or the kit into a sterilization bag as requested by the manufacturer of the sterilizing machine;
• autoclave at 121° (250°F) for 20 minutes;
• remove the organizer from the autoclave and leave it cool inside the bag;
• leave the organizer or the kit inside the bag to preserve sterility.

The Surgical Procedure and the Prosthetic Procedure reported were conceived with the invaluable contribution of Dr. Leonardo Targetti, whom we thank sincerely.

53
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

LEONE IMPLANT PACKAGING

THE PACKAGING
The packaging features a double protection to preserve the sterility
of the implant subjected to a certified gamma x-ray process. A
removable part of the label showing the information of the implant
(see label symbols at page 125) is to be applied on the “Identity
card” of the implant or on the clinical case sheet of the patient. A
sterility indicator is present on the glass vial.

THE GLASS VIAL

TOP LID: with safety ring

an intact top lid guarantees that the product is intact and sterile.
The diameter with the colour code of the implant is indicated on the cap.

SEALING CAP: it ensures the vial is stored airtight.

CARRIER

IMPLANT

INNER HOLDER: it allows a correct support for the implant and an easy hold
for the clinician.

COVER CAP

GLASS VIAL

54
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

1) LEONE IMPLANTS Ø 3,3 - 4,1 - 4,8: PREPARATION OF THE IMPLANT SITE

The typology and the access to the surgical site shall be selected by the professional according to the clinical-morphological
parameters. Schematically and with illustrative purpose only, the following steps for the preparation of the implant site are
illustrated.

1.1a Make full-thickness incision of the soft tissues and detach-

ment of the gingival flaps to have access to the bone ridge.

1.1b If flapless procedure is followed, use the mucosa punch

for contra-angle of the same diameter of the implant. Set the
handpiece to low speed (approx. 40 rpm). Use until bony tissue
is met. To determine the gingival thickness around the implant
area, the three black lines clearly visible around the mucosa
punch, at the heights of 3-5-7 mm, starting from the crest bone,
may be used. Remove the tissue plug by using a small periosteal
elevator.

1.2 Use of the round bur Cat. 151-1934-01 to mark the cortical
bone for the subsequent drills. Alternatively, it is possible to use
the lance drill Cat. 151-1930-02, which is particularly suitable
in case of narrow knife-edged ridges.
14 14
12 12
10 10
8 8 1.3 Prior to using any pilot or twist drill, it is important to check
6.5 the number of the marks on the body of each drill:
- drills with 4 marks: 8 – 10 – 12 – 14 mm
- drills with 5 marks: 6.5 – 8 - 10 – 12 – 14 mm

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
55
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

The use of the depth indicators is recommended to better visualize the drilling depth. The depth indicators are made of elastomer, for single use, manu-
factured in the colour code related to each implant diameter.
The depth indicators and the special positioner (Cat. 151-0001-00 page 30), available either in the kit or single supplied, must be sterilized in the
autoclave before use. Choose the elastomer ringlet matching the diameter of the drill to be used (Ø 2.2 mm pilot drill, blue colour, Ø 2.8 mm twist drill,
green colour, Ø 3.5 mm twist drill, yellow colour, Ø 4.2 mm twist drill, red colour).

1.4 Seat the ringlet on the tip of 1.5 Placement of the drill into the 1.6 Push the drill all the way to the 1.7 In this way the depth indicator
the drill. hole corresponding to the diameter stop. will be driven into position with the
of the instrument and the selected corresponding mark for the selected
depth. depth.

1.8 Use of the Ø 2,2 mm pilot drill: drill
up to the depth mark corresponding to
the length of the selected implant.
(Max speed: 800 rpm with adequate
irrigation)
1.9a Use of paralleling pins for the control 1.9b With flapless procedure, use of
of parallelism with natural teeth and/or other measuring pin for gingival height for the
adjacent implant sites. A radiographic exam can control of the mucosa height and paral-
be performed to increase accuracy in the eva- lelism with natural teeth and/or other
luation of parallelism. The paralleling pin can adjacent implant sites. Measuring pins
also be utilized after the application of a Ø 2.8 for gingival height present a hole for the
mm twist drill, taking care to seat the pin in the placement of a safety leash.
implant site from the side with larger diameter.
Paralleling pins present a hole for the placement
of a safety leash.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
56
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

1.10 Use of the depth gauge to check the
depth of the newly-created implant site.
The depth gauge presents a hole for the
placement of a safety leash.
1.11 Widening of the diameter of the implant site with the 1.12 At the end of the widening opera-
progressive use of drills with increasing diameter. The drills tions of the implant site with the twist
have to be used up to the depth mark which corresponds to drills, the use of a countersink with the
the length of the selected implant: same diameter as the selected implant
• for Ø 3.3 mm implants: use Ø 2.8 mm drill. is recommended, by inserting it up to
Max speed: 600 rpm. the reference mark. (Max speed: 300 rpm
• for Ø 4,1 mm implants: after Ø 2.8 mm drill, use the Ø 3,5 with adequate irrigation)
mm drill for the final resizing of the site. Max speed: 500 rpm.
• for Ø 4,8 mm implants: after using Ø 2.8 mm and Ø 3.5
mm drills, use the Ø 4.2 mm drill for the final resizing of the
site. Max speed: 400 rpm.
Reminder: use adequate irrigation.

1.13 In case of high bone density, the 1.14 The tap can be connected either to the hand screwdriver or to the ratchet.
use of the tap is recommended. When the space for the direct connection between the tap and the instruments is insufficient, the
With medium/low bone quality the extension Cat. 156-1002-00 can be utilized. Tapping operations may be also performed by means of
LEONE implant is self-tapping. a handpiece for implantology connecting the tap to the special adapter Cat. 156-1002-01. Set the
handpiece to a max speed value of 30 rpm and a max torque value of 50 Ncm.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
57
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

2) LEONE IMPLANTS Ø 3,3 - 4,1 - 4,8: PLACEMENT OF THE IMPLANT

2.1 Unscrew the glass vial’s top lid. 2.2 Remove the sealing cap. 2.3 Extraction of the holder containing the
implant and the cover cap on a sterile pad. The
implant can be placed either with the handpiece
or manually.

2.4a Connection of the handpiece adapter 2.5a Extraction of the implant from the holder by exerting a pressure on the open side in order to
Cat. 156-1002-01 to the carrier of the implant. detach the implant and make the holder fall down.
The use of the handpiece ensures the mainte-
nance of the implant site axis.

2.4b Connection of the hand screwdriver to the 2.5b Extraction of the implant from the open side of the holder by means of the hand screwdriver.
carrier of the implant. The hand screwdriver pre- Take care to exert the extraction parallel to the longitudinal plan of the holder. A force applied in a
sents a hole for the placement of a safety leash. different direction could cause difficulty in removing the carrier from the package and a possible
contact with the surface of the implant.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
58
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

2.6 Initial seating of the implant into the implant site without irrigation. 2.7 While driving the implant into the implant site, the rubber ring slides
In case of using a handpiece, set a micromotor’s maximum speed to 20 up along the carrier.
rpm and a maximum torque value to 50 Ncm.
If there is not enough space for a direct connection between the carrier
and the handpiece adapter or the hand screwdriver, the extension Cat.
156-1002-00 may be used.

2.8 When the carrier’s rubber ring has reached the reference line, the 2.9 Removal of the carrier from the implant.
implant is exactly positioned at the level of the alveolar crest. Now the
carrier can be easily disconnected from the implant. 2.10 Rinsing and drying of the implant’s inner side before placing the cap.

At this stage, either a “Two-stage surgical procedure” or a “One-stage surgical procedure” may be followed.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
59
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
2.11 Should a ratchet be utilized, the forces
exerted on the implant and on the cor-
respondent periimplant bone can become
excessive.
2.14a Replace the carrier with the driver for
implant (Cat. 156-1013-00 available either
in the surgical kit or in the organizer for
instruments) withstanding up to a torque
applied of 140 Ncm and allowing the remo-
val of the implant.
The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
60
www.leone.it
2.12 In this eventuality, should a value of 60 2.13 Removal of the fractured carrier.
Ncm be overcome, a torque limiting device
makes the carrier break above the connec-
tion with the implant; now the carrier can
be removed.
Note that carrier fracture is not always
visible, but it is detectable by a sudden loss
of functionality of the insertion instrument
accompanied by a sharp crack.
2.14b It is possible to use special drivers 2.15 Removal of the implant from the
specific for each connection size, which are implant site.
more stable thanks to the conical support Tapping and reinsertion of the implant.
ring and thus more resistant to the applica-
tion of bending forces.
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

3) LEONE 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT: PREPARATION OF THE IMPLANT SITE

The LEONE 6.5 short implant is intended for use in cases with limited vertical bone availability. The typology and the access to
the surgical site shall be selected by the professional according to the clinical-morphological parameters. Schematically and
with illustrative purpose only, the following steps for the preparation of the implant site are illustrated.

3.1 Full-thickness incision of the soft tissues and detachment of the gingival flaps to have access 3.2 Use of the round bur Cat. 151-1934-01
to the bone ridge. to mark the cortical bone for the subsequent
drills. Alternatively, it is possible to use the
lance drill Cat. 151-1930-02, which is parti-
cularly suitable in case of narrow knife-edged
ridges.

3.3 Use of the Ø 2,2 mm pilot drill with 3.4 Use of paralleling pins as an aid for 3.5 Use of the Ø 2,8 mm twist drill with
integrated stop, Cat. 151-2233-65: insert proper alignment with natural teeth and/or integrated stop, Cat. 151-2833-65: insert
the drill up to the stop. (Max speed: 800 rpm other adjacent implant sites. A radiographic the drill up to the stop. (Max speed: 600 rpm
with adequate irrigation). exam can be performed to increase accu- with adequate irrigation).
racy in the evaluation of parallelism. The
paralleling pin can also be utilized after the
application of a Ø 2.8 mm twist drill with
integrated stop, Cat. 151-2833-65, taking
care to seat the pin in the implant site from
the side with the larger diameter. Paralleling
pins present a hole for the placement of a
safety leash.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
61
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

3.6 Use of the Ø 3.5 mm twist drill with integrated stop and crestal
countersink, Cat. 151-3533-65: insert the drill up to the stop, (Max speed
500 rpm with adequate irrigation).
The drill’s geometry allows also the shaping of the conical region of the
implant bed.
3.7a Use of the bone tap “A” Cat. 152-5021-01 in combination with
the specific handpiece adapter Cat.156-1002-01: attach the tap to the
handpiece, then tap the implant site until the tap’s threaded portion is
totally inside the bone; the use of the handpiece ensures the maintenance
of the implant site axis.
Set a micromotor’s maximum speed of 30 rpm and a maximum torque
value of 50 Ncm.

3.7b If the maximum torque value of 50 Ncm is not enough to complete
the tapping operation, remove the handpiece adapter from the bone tap
and attach the ratchet Cat.156-1014-00. Complete the tapping operation
until the tap’s threaded portion is totally inside the bone.
If the space for a direct connection between the bone tap and the instru-
ments is not enough, the extension Cat. 156-1002-00 may be used.
3.8 In case of high bone density, the bone tap “B” Cat. 152-5021-02 has
to be necessarily used after tapping with bone tap “A”: steps 3.7a and
3.7b. shall be repeated.
The bone tap “B” can easily be distinguished from bone tap “A” by two
fuchsia-coded marks on the instrument.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
62
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

4) LEONE 6.5 SHORT IMPLANT: PLACEMENT OF THE IMPLANT

For the extraction of the implant holder from the LEONE 6.5 short implant package, follow the instructions illustrated at points
2.1-2.2-2.3:

4.1 Connection of the handpiece adapter to the carrier of the 4.2 Extraction of the implant from the holder by exerting a pressure on the open side in
implant; the use of the handpiece ensures the maintenance order to detach the implant and make the holder fall down.
of the implant site axis.

4.3 Initial seating of the implant in the
implant site. If there is not enough space for
a direct connection between the carrier and
the handpiece adapter, the extension
Cat. 156-1002-00 may be used.
4.4 Seating of the implant with a micromotor 4.5 If the maximum torque value of 50 Ncm
for implants. Set a micromotor’s maximum is not enough to complete the insertion of
speed of 20 rpm and a maximum torque the implant, remove the handpiece adapter
value of 50 Ncm. Do not irrigate while pla- from the carrier and attach the ratchet
cing the implant. Cat.156-1014-00. Be sure the instrument is
directed in the long axis by gentle pressing
the head of the instrument with a finger.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
63
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
4.6 When using a ratchet, the forces exerted
on the implant and on the correspondent
periimplant bone can become excessive.
In this eventuality, should the value of 60
Ncm be overcome, a torque limiting device
makes the carrier break above the connec-
tion with the implant; now the carrier can
be removed. Note that carrier fracture is
not always visible, but it is detectable by a
sudden loss of functionality of the insertion
instrument accompanied by a sharp crack.
4.9 Attach the ratchet to the driver and
remove the implant from the implant site.
Tapping of the site with bone tap “B”.
The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
64
www.leone.it
4.7 Removal of the fractured carrier. 4.8 Replace it with the implant driver Cat.
156-1013-00 available either in the surgical
kit or in the organizer Cat. 156-0019-00. It
withstands a torque value applied up to 140
Ncm and allows the removal of the implant.
It is possible to use the implant driver Cat.
156-1041-00, which is more stable thanks
to the conical support ring and thus more
resistant to the application of bending for-
ces.
4.11 Rinsing and drying of the implant’s
inner side before placing the cover cap.
4.10 Place again the implant by means
of the implant micromotor with the driver
attached to the handpiece adapter. Set a
micromotor’s maximum speed of 20 rpm 4.12 In order to complete the placement
and a maximum torque value of 50 Ncm. of the implant, follow the steps for “Two
If the maximum torque pre-set value is stage surgical procedure” (see point 5 “Two
not enough to complete the insertion of the stage surgical procedure: first stage”) and
implant, remove the hand piece adapter instructions at points 6, 7 or 8 for the condi-
from the driver and attach the ratchet. tioning of soft tissues.
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

5) TWO-STAGE SURGICAL PROCEDURE: FIRST STAGE

5.1 Take the holder that previously contained the implant. Screw the instrument for cover 5.2 In case of positioning of several implants, the colour
caps, Cat. 156-1003-00, onto the head of the cover cap. Do not screw the instrument all of the cover cap allows an immediate recognition of the
the way in, but only half way the length of the threaded part. The instrument for cover cap correct connection size for the subsequent prosthesis
presents a hole for the insertion of a safety leash. Removal of the biopolymer sealing cap component.
from the holder by exerting a gentle extraction.

5.3 Rinsing and drying of the implant’s 5.4 Removal of the instrument for cover cap 5.5 The gingival flaps are sutured for total
inner side. Positioning of the cover cap on by unscrewing in an anti-clockwise direction coverage of the implant.
the implant: push the cap home inside the while holding the cover cap in place with an
implant. instrument. Push now the cover cap inside to
its final position with a non sharp tool to get
a perfect sealing of the implant.

The average period for the attainment of a good osseointegration, which is facilitated by the HRS surface that covers all LEONE implants, is about 3
months. This period may however vary up to 8 months depending on the type of surgical intervention, the quality of the bone and the individual patient
response. Clinical check-ups and instrumental exams are absolutely necessary.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
65
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

6) TWO-STAGE SURGICAL PROCEDURE: SECOND STAGE

6.1 Once osseointegration has occurred, 6.2 Removal of the cover cap with the specific instrument Cat. 156-1003-00 that is supplied either
the position of the implant is identified and in the surgical kit or in the instrument organizer. The instrument for cover cap has to be screwed
an incision of the soft tissue covering the into the head of the cover cap to be able to practice enough traction to remove the cap.
implant is performed.

6.3 Accurate rinsing and drying of the implant’s inner part.

Follow the steps described at chapters 7 or 8 according to the selected platform.

7) TWO-STAGE SURGICAL PROCEDURE:

CONDITIONING OF THE SOFT TISSUES
FOR STANDARD AND LARGE PLATFORM

7.1 Place the appropriate healing cap
(supplied sterile) onto the implant by
means of the carrier. Exert a pressure
on the carrier.
7.2 Removal of the carrier with a gentle
side bending and pull.
7.3 Percussion on the healing cap by means of the specific
beater (page 38) to activate the locking-taper connection.
One percussion is advisable.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
66
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

7.4 Suture of the soft tissues around the 7.5 When the healing process has occurred, the healing cap is unlocked by means of the specific
healing cap. hex-head extractor, Cat. 156-1006-00. The extractor, with a hole for the placement of a safety leash,
is seated into the hexagon on the head of the healing cap and rotated subsequently, either clockwise
or anti-clockwise, in order to unlock the healing cap. By using tweezers, the cap is removed from the
implant. The implant is now ready for the prosthetic phase.

For the impression taking, the preparation of the abutment and the fabrication of the final prosthesis, refer to the “Prosthetic Procedure of the LEONE
Implant System”.

8) TWO-STAGE SURGICAL PROCEDURE:

CONDITIONING OF THE SOFT TISSUES FOR SLIM PLATFORM

8.1 Positioning of the healing cap (supplied 8.2 Removal of the carrier by unscrewing in 8.3 The soft tissues are sutured around the
sterile) on the implant by means of the spe- an anti-clockwise direction. healing cap.
cial carrier eventually connected to a hand The operation can be facilitated by connec-
screwdriver to facilitate its taking. ting the carrier to a hand screwdriver.
When its hexagonal shape is engaged, exert
a pressure on the healing cap to get a per-
fect closure of the implant.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
67
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

8.4 When the healing process has occurred, the healing cap is removed by means of the instrument for
cover cap Cat. 156-1003-00 which is provided in the surgical kit or in the organizer for instruments. The
instrument for cover cap has to be screwed into the head of the healing cap to be able to practice enough
traction to remove the cap.
For the impression taking, the preparation of the abutment and the fabrication of the final prosthesis, refer to the “Prosthetic Procedure of the LEONE
Implant System”.

9) ONE-STAGE SURGICAL PROCEDURE

FOR STANDARD AND LARGE PLATFORM

For previous steps refer to chapters 1) and 2).

9.1 Rinsing and drying of the implant’s
inner side.
Sealing of the implant with the healing
cap (supplied sterile) by means of the
carrier. Exert a pressure on the carrier.
In case of flapless procedure and
subcrestal implant placement, do not
use Large healing caps.
9.2 Removal of the carrier with a gentle
side bending and pull.
9.3 Percussion on the healing cap by means of the specific
beater to activate the locking-taper connection. One percus-
sion is advisable.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
68
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

9.4 Suture of the soft tissues around the healing cap.

The average period for the attainment of a good osseointegration, which is facilitated by the HRS surface that covers all LEONE implants, is about 3
months. This period may however vary up to 8 months depending on the type of surgical intervention, the quality of the bone and the individual patient
response. Clinical check-ups and instrumental exams are absolutely necessary.

9.5 When osseointegration has occurred unlock the healing cap by means of the specific hex head extractor
Cat. 156-1006-00. The extractor is seated into the hexagon which is present on the head of the healing cap
and rotated either clockwise or anti-clockwise, in order to unlock the healing cap. The extractor presents
a hole for the placement of a safety leash. The cap is removed from the implant with the use of tweezers.
The implant is now ready for the prosthetic procedure.

For the impression taking, the preparation of the abutment and the fabrication of the final prosthesis, refer to the “Prosthetic Procedure of the LEONE
Implant System”

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
69
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

10) LOW SELF-LOCKING CAPS: INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AND PROCEDURE

Premise
The low self-locking caps shall be used:
a) during the two-stage (see point 5) surgical technique in place of the cover caps in case of post-extraction or subcrestal positioning of the implant
b) during either the two-stage (see point 7) or one-stage (see point 9) surgical technique in place of the healing caps in case of low gingival thickness.

a) USE IN PLACE OF COVER CAPS

10.1a First surgical stage: the implant is
seated below the alveolar crest level.
10.2a Positioning of the low self-locking cap 10.3a The gingival flaps are sutured for
(supplied sterile) on the implant with the total coverage of the implant.
carrier. Follow steps 7.2 and 7.3 to activate When osseointegration has occurred, after
the locking-taper connection. flap re-opening follow steps 10.4b and
10.5b.

b) USE IN PLACE OF HEALING CAPS

10.1b The implant is at the alveolar crest 10.2b Positioning of the low self-locking 10.3b Removal of the carrier with a gentle
level. Rinsing and drying of the implant’s cap (supplied sterile) on the implant with side bending and pull. Follow steps 7.3 and
inner side. the carrier. 7.4 to activate the locking-taper connection
and to suture the soft tissues.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
70
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

10.4b When osseointegration and healing of 10.5b Screw the instrument for cover caps, Cat. 156-1003-00, onto the head of the low self-locking cap.
the soft tissues have occurred, unlock the Remove the cap with a gentle pull. Now the implant is ready for the prosthetic stage.
low self-locking cap by means of the specific
hex head extractor Cat. 156-1006-00. The For the impression taking, the preparation of the abutment and the fabrication of the final prosthesis,
extractor is seated into the hexagon which is refer to the “Prosthetic Procedure of the LEONE Implant System”.
present on the head of the cap and rotated
either into a clockwise or anti-clockwise
direction.

11) OVERDENTURE: TWO-STAGE SURGICAL PROCEDURE FOR STANDARD PLATFORM

Premise
Abutments for attachment-retained overdenture (O-ring or insert) and for bar-retained overdenture are available. In order to manufacture an overdentu-
re, a perfect parallelism among the implants is necessary. To support an overdenture in the lower jaw a minimum of 2 implants is required and in the
upper jaw a minimum of 4 implants. The two-stage surgical procedure, as described at steps 5), 6) and 7), is recommended.
It is possible to fabricate an overdenture with a new or a pre-existing prosthesis, the second case must be evaluated by the clinician.

The herewith graphical illustrations refer to the placement of two implants in the mandible.

11.1 Preparation of the implant sites, with a special care for 11.2 Placement of the implants and cover caps.
parallelism.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
71
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

11.3 The gingival flaps are sutured for total coverage of the
implants. It is recommended to wait several days before
using a temporary prosthesis or the pre-existing prosthesis
of the patient. The resin of the prosthesis, however, must be
removed in the area of the implants and rebased with soft
resin.
11.4 After the attainment of a good osseointegration of the
implants, the implants are exposed and the cover caps are
removed.
11.5 Placement of the Standard healing caps for the condi-
tioning of the soft tissues. One percussion is advisable.

11.7 After the healing of the soft tissues, the final overden-
ture is fabricated.

For the fabrication of the final prosthesis, refer to the

“Prosthetic Procedure of the LEONE Implant System”.

11.6 Adjustment of the temporary or pre-existing prosthesis

with removal of the acrylic in the areas corresponding to the
healing caps.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
72
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • Max Stability implant surgical procedure
www.leone.it

LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANT SURGICAL PROCEDURE

Please consult Disclaimer, Treatment planning and preoperative exams (page 52).

MAX STABILITY IMPLANT SELECTION

Max Stability implants are indicated for use in cases of poor bone density or when performing immediate implant placement.
Do NOT use Max Stability Implants in thick cortical bone, equivalent to D1 bone density according to the Misch Classification.[1]

The number and dimensions (diameter and length) of the implants to be seated are determined by the following factors:
1. amount of bone available
2. characteristics of the implant site
3. masticatory load
4. aesthetic results
5. type of the prosthetic restoration
6. type of the surgical procedure followed

Further and particular single situations must be evaluated by the clinician.

A template, Cat 156-2003-04, is available showing Max Stability implants in actual dimensions, with dimensions increased by 10% and increased by
25%, to match possible distortions created by the instrument for radiographic examinations (CT, panoramic radiograph, standard and digital cepha-
lograms).
Superimpose the template to the radiograph in order to select the implant in relation to the quantity of bone available.

Do not insert a single Max Stability Ø3.75 mm implant in the molar position.

The Max Stability Ø3.75 mm implant, 8 mm in length, must be used as a supplementary implant in the prosthesis composed of two or more implants
of any diameter and length.

Do not place the implants above the level of the alveolar crest.

The LEONE implant system is characterized by a high mechanical resistance validated through fatigue strength testing according to the ISO 14801
international standard, which indicates to perform testing with a cyclic loading at an angle of 30° with respect to the implant-abutment axis. For the
LEONE implants of minor diameter, and thus the most relevant ones, the results are: Ø3,3 mm and Ø3,75 mm implant fatigue strength: 240 N; Ø4,1
mm, Ø4,5 mm and LEONE 6.5 short implant fatigue strength: 392 N.[2,3]
In the literature, in comparison, it is reported that the average force generated during mastication is 145 N with inclinations up to 10°.[4,5] It should also
be underlined that very high masticatory forces[6] can be generated due to many individual and prosthetic factors, such as crown height, cantilever and
restoration type, which locally can exceed the strength limit of the implants, especially in case of single or unsplinted implants.

ORGANIZER FOR LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANTS

Organizers are available for sterilizing and clearly arranging all the instruments necessary for the planned surgical intervention.
The organizer is fully autoclavable and can hold up to 8 instruments using a colour coded positioning system.
The organizer must be wrapped and sterilized before every use.
The sterilization must be done as follows:
• wrap the organizer into a sterilization bag as requested by the manufacturer of the sterilizing machine;
• autoclave at 121° (250°F) for 20 minutes;
• remove the organizer from the autoclave and leave it cool inside the bag;
• leave the organizer inside the bag to preserve sterility.

[1] Misch CE, Density of bone: effect on treatment plans, surgical approach, healing and progressive bone loading, Int J Oral Implant 1990; 6:23-31
[2] ISO 14801:2007 (E), Dentistry - Implants - Dynamic fatigue test for endosseous dental implants, International Organization for Standardization, Geneva, 2007
[3] Barlattani A, Sannino G, Mechanical evaluation of an implant-abutment self-locking taper connection: finite element analysis and experimental tests, Int J Oral Maxillofac Implants 2013; 28:e17-e26
[4] Carlsson GE, Haraldson T. Functional response. In: Branemark P-1. Zarb GA, Albrektsson T. Eds. Tissue integrated prostheses. Osseointegration in clinical dentistry. Chicago: Quintessence, 1985:155-63
[5] Graf H. Occlusal forces during function. In: Proceedings of Symposium on Occlusion: Research on Form and Function. University of Michigan School of Dentistry, Ann Arbor: Rowe NH (Ed.), 1975:90–111
[6] Craig RG. Restorative dental material. 6th ed. St. Louis, C.V. Mosby, 1980

(Proc. 05/10-12 May 01, 2015

73
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • Max Stability implant surgical procedure
www.leone.it

1) LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANTS Ø3,75 - 4,5:

PREPARATION OF THE IMPLANT SITE

Max Stability implants feature an innovative design developed to increase primary stability in cases where the implant site does not offer adequate initial
stability. In particular, these implants are indicated for application in cases of poor bone density or placement in fresh extraction sockets.
In the case of immediate implant placement, subcrestal placement is suggested. The planned level of implant placement should be taken into account
when calculating the drilling depth.
In cases of very poor bone density, it is possible to substitute the standard drilling procedure with a bone condensing procedure, using the appropriate
bone condenser tips.

CAUTION: do NOT use Max Stability Implants in thick cortical bone, equivalent to D1 bone density according to the Misch Classification.[1]

The typology and the access to the surgical site shall be selected by the professional according to the clinical-morphological parameters. Schematically
and with illustrative purpose only, the following steps for the preparation of the implant site are illustrated.

1.1a Make full-thickness incision of the soft tissues and detachment of the 1.1b If flapless procedure is followed, use the proper mucosa punch for
gingival flaps to have access to the bone ridge. contra-angle. Set the handpiece to low speed (approx. 40 rpm). Use until
bony tissue is met. To determine the gingival thickness around the implant
area, the three black lines clearly visible around the mucosa punch, at the
heights of 3-5-7 mm, starting from the crest bone, may be used.
For Ø3.75 mm implants: use mucosa punch for Ø3.75 mm implants Cat.
154-3815-20.
For Ø4.5 mm implants: use mucosa punch for Ø4.5 mm implants Cat.
154-4515-20.
Remove the tissue plug by using a small periosteal elevator.

[1]
Misch CE, Density of bone: effect on treatment plans, surgical approach, healing and progressive bone loading, Int J Oral Implant 1990; 6:23-31

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
74
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • Max Stability implant surgical procedure
www.leone.it

14 14
12 12
10 10
8 8
6.5

1.2 Use of the round bur Cat. 151-1934-01 to mark the cortical bone for the subsequent
drills. Alternatively, it is possible to use the lance drill Cat. 151-1930-02, which is particularly
suitable in case of narrow knife-edged ridges.

1.3 Prior to using any pilot or twist drill, it is important to check the number of the marks on
the body of each drill:
- drills with 4 marks: 8 – 10 – 12 – 14 mm
- drills with 5 marks: 6.5 – 8 - 10 – 12 – 14 mm

The use of the depth indicators is recommended to better visualize the drilling depth.
The depth indicators are made of elastomer, for single use, manufactured in the colour code corresponding with implant diameter.
The depth indicators and the special positioner, available either in the surgical kit or single supplied (Cat. 151-0001-00 page 30), must be sterilized in
the autoclave before use.

Choose the elastomer ringlet matching the diameter of the drill to be used (Ø2.2 mm pilot drill, blue colour; Ø2.8 mm twist drill, green colour; Ø3.5 mm
twist drill, yellow colour; Ø4,2 mm twist drill, red colour).

1.4 Seat the ringlet on the tip of 1.5 Placement of the drill into the 1.6 Push the drill all the way to the 1.7 In this way the depth indicator
the drill. hole corresponding to the diameter stop. will be driven into position with the
of the instrument and the selected corresponding mark for the selected
depth. depth.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
75
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • Max Stability implant surgical procedure
1.8 Use of the Ø2.2 mm pilot drill: drill up to
the depth mark corresponding to the length
of the selected implant (max speed: 800 rpm
with adequate irrigation).
In the case of subcrestal positioning, the
planned level of implant placement should
be taken into account when calculating the
drilling depth.
1.10 Use of the depth gauge to check the
depth of the newly-created implant site.
The depth gauge presents a hole for the
placement of a safety leash.
The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
76
www.leone.it
1.9a Use of paralleling pins for the control of 1.9b With flapless procedure, use a gingival
parallelism with natural teeth and/or other height measuring pin to check the mucosa
adjacent implant sites. A radiographic exam height and parallelism with natural teeth
can be performed to increase accuracy in the and/or other adjacent implant sites.
evaluation of parallelism. The paralleling pin Gingival height measuring pins present a
can also be utilized after the application of a hole for the placement of a safety leash.
Ø2.8 mm twist drill, taking care to seat the
pin in the implant site using the side with
larger diameter. Paralleling pins present a
hole for the placement of a safety leash.
1.11 Widening of the diameter of the implant site with the progressive use of drills with increasing
diameter. The drills have to be used up to the depth mark which corresponds with the length of
the selected implant:
for Ø3.75 mm implants: use a Ø2.8 mm twist drill (short Cat. 151-2833-13 or long Cat. 151-2841-13)
(max speed: 600 rpm)
for Ø4.5 mm implants: after Ø2.8 mm twist drill, use a Ø3,5 mm drill (short Cat. 151-3533-13 or
long Cat. 151-3541-13) for the final resizing of the site (max speed: 500 rpm).
Reminder: use adequate irrigation. In the case of subcrestal positioning, the planned level of
implant placement should be taken into account when calculating the drilling depth.
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • Max Stability implant surgical procedure
www.leone.it

1.12 At the end of the widening operations of the implant 1.13 In the case of medium-to-high type D2 bone density,
site with the twist drills, use the countersink by inserting it is necessary to use a twist drill with a larger diameter
it up to the reference mark: than the one previously used, easily distinguishable by
for Ø3.75 mm implants: use the Ø3.3 mm countersink the two colour-coded marks on the drill’s stem:
drill (Cat. 151-3333-24) (max. speed: 300 rpm with for Ø3.75 mm implants: use a twist drill for hard bone
adequate irrigation) for implant Ø3.75 (short Cat. 151-3133-13 or long Cat.
for Ø4.5 mm implants: use the Ø4.1 mm countersink drill 151-3141-13) (max speed: 500 rpm)
(Cat. 151-4133-24) (max. speed: 300 rpm with adequate for Ø4.5 mm implants: use a twist drill for hard bone
irrigation). for implant Ø4.5 (short Cat. 151-3833-13 or long Cat.
151-3841-13) (max speed: 400 rpm).
The drill must be used up to the depth mark which corre-
sponds with the length of the selected implant.
Reminder: use adequate irrigation.

CAUTION:
In case of placement of a 14mm-long Max Stability implant in mature bone, for the final widening of the implant site always use the proper twist
drill for hard bone up to the depth mark of 14 mm.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
77
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • Max Stability implant surgical procedure
www.leone.it

2) LEONE MAX STABILITY IMPLANTS Ø 3.75 - 4.5:

PLACEMENT OF THE IMPLANT

2.1 Unscrew the glass vial’s top lid. 2.2 Remove the sealing cap. 2.3 Extraction of the holder containing the
implant and the cover cap on a sterile pad.

Ø4.5

Ø4.1

2.4 The connecting ring and the carrier’s rubber ring are produced in a 2.5 Connection of the handpiece adapter Cat. 156-1002-01 to the carrier
darker colour in order to distinguish the LEONE Max Stability implants of the implant. The use of the handpiece ensures maintenance of the
from the cylindrical LEONE implants with the same length and connection implant site axis during the implant insertion in the prepared site.
size.

2.6 Extraction of the implant from the holder by exerting a pressure on the open side in order to 2.7 Initial seating of the implant into the
detach the implant and make the holder fall down. implant site. If there is not enough space for
a direct connection between the carrier and
the handpiece adapter, the extension
Cat. 156-1002-00 may be used.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
78
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • Max Stability implant surgical procedure
www.leone.it

2.8 Insertion of the implant with a dental 2.9 While driving the implant into the 2.10 When the carrier’s rubber ring has
micromotor. Set a micromotor’s maximum implant site, the rubber ring slides up along reached the reference line, the implant is
speed to 20 rpm and a maximum torque the carrier. exactly positioned at the level of the alveolar
value to 50 Ncm. Insert the implant without crest. Now the carrier can be easily discon-
irrigation. nected from the implant.

CAUTION: the geometry of the LEONE Max Stability implant apex allows the implant to be inserted beyond the depth of the prepared site. Therefore,
special attention should be paid to reaching the planned placement level related to the bone crest.

2.11 Removal of the carrier from the implant. 2.13 If the maximum torque value of 50 Ncm 2.14 Should a ratchet be utilized, the forces
is not enough to complete the insertion of exerted on the implant and on the corre-
2.12 Rinsing and drying of the implant’s the implant, remove the handpiece adapter spondent peri-implant bone can become
inner side before placing the cap. from the carrier and attach the ratchet Cat. excessive. In this eventuality, should a value
156-1014-00. Be sure the instrument is of 60 Ncm be exceeded, a torque limiting
directed in the long axis by gentle pressing device will cause a fracture above the con-
the head of the instrument with a finger. nection with the implant; now the carrier
can be removed. Note that carrier fracture
is not always visually perceptible, but is
detectable by a sudden loss of functionality
of the insertion instrument accompanied by
a sharp crack.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
79
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • Max Stability implant surgical procedure
www.leone.it

2.15 Removal of the fractured carrier. 2.16a Replace the carrier with the implant
driver (Cat. 156-1013-00 available either in
the surgical kit or in the specific organizers)
withstanding an applied torque of up to 140 Ncm.

2.16b It is possible to use special drivers 2.17 Attach the ratchet to the driver and
specific for each connection size, which are remove the implant from the implant site.
more stable thanks to the conical support
ring and thus more resistant to the applica-
tion of bending forces.

2.18 Use the twist drill for hard bone of the diameter corresponding to the implant (see point 1.13). Then reinsert the implant using the micromotor,
repeating steps 2.7-2.11.

CAUTION: Should it still be difficult to insert the implant after the use of the twist drill for hard bone, do not use the LEONE Max Stability implant
because the bone density of the implant site is too high and does not comply with the indications for use of this implant.
We recommend placing a cylindrical LEONE implant with the same length and connection size.

For the following steps: Implant closure, Second stage surgery, Soft tissue conditioning, Prosthetic procedure, refer to the indications for the LEONE
Implant System (pages 63..70 and 79), taking into consideration the following implant connection sizes:
Ø3.75 mm implant: same connection as the Ø3.3 mm LEONE implant (colour code: GREEN)
Ø4.5 mm implant: same connection as the Ø4.1 mm LEONE implant (colour code: YELLOW).

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
80
PROSTHETIC
procedure

2015
for

implant system

Proc. 02/10-12 May 01, 2015

 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

DISCLAIMER

The Prosthetic Procedure and the use of the products of the LEONE Implant System described in the following pages are intended for Professionals
experienced in dental implant techniques.
In case of lack of basic notions, we suggest to attend specific courses in order to reach a high level of knowledge and practice in the use of implants.
The rules on the use of the products described below represent a group of standard instructions that must be adjusted to the single needs and to the par-
ticular situations that may occur according to the manual ability, to the experience and to the diagnosis made by the legally qualified medical operator.
It is not ascribed to the manufacturer the duty of monitoring the procedures of use of the product. A correct and appropriate use of the instruments and
products related to the LEONE Implant System shall completely be reverted to the clinician.
The prosthetic procedure hereunder described is merely indicative as any single treatment case is assigned to the experience of the operator. As every
medical operator well knows, a correct procedure and a perfect manufacture of the prosthesis may sometimes be followed by not satisfactory results
owing to particular situations not imputable to responsibility of the dental operator or the manufacturer.

PREMISE

The prosthetic procedure of the LEONE Implant System is similar to that used for the natural teeth.

For the preparation of the abutment and the realization of the definitive prosthesis on implants is possible to follow a “Direct Technique” or an “Indirect
Technique.”

The Direct Technique consists in the placement of the abutment directly in the mouth of the patient and in its preparation in situ.
The impression taking and the preparation of the prosthesis follow the same method used for the abutments of natural teeth.

The Indirect Technique consists in the impression taking with the placement of the transfer inside the implants to reproduce on the cast the exact posi-
tion. Both impression and transfer are sent to the dental laboratory where the abutments, the definitive prosthesis or the temporary prosthesis (if the
clinician decides to favour a further conditioning of the soft tissues and for the application of a progressive load) are manufactured.

CAUTION: in case of corrections of notable problems of lack of parallelism among implants and whenever the use of special abutments is required, the
use of the indirect technique is recommended.

For the fabrication of provisional prosthesis, temporary abutments are available.

For every implant platform (Standard, Large and Slim) various types of abutments are available: cylinder and/or for the correction of possible lack of
parallelism.
For Standard platform straight or angled anatomical abutments are available.
For the manufacture of removable prosthesis, ball head abutments for overdenture and abutments for screw-retained prosthesis suitable for bar-retained
overdenture are available.
For the realisation of screw-retained prosthesis, specific abutments are available.
For selecting the most appropriate abutment for the specific case two kits of try-in abutments are available: one for the anatomical LEONE 360°
abutments, one for all the other LEONE abutments.

CAUTION: the patient should be informed about the precautions for the period after installation of the implant restoration in order to prevent complica-
tions and variations in the efficiency of the device: a good level of oral hygiene and periodical check-ups should be performed.

The Surgical Procedure and the Prosthetic Procedure reported were conceived with invaluable contribution of Dr. Leonardo Targetti, whom we thank sincerely.

82
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

1) INDIRECT TECHNIQUE: IMPRESSION TAKING

1.1 After having removed the healing cap,
place the transfer related to the implant and
the selected platform. After having found the
engagement in the internal hexagon, exert
pressure on the transfer to get a perfect
connection.
1.2 Impression taking with one or two mate-
rials using either a one-step impression
technique or a two-step impression techni-
que. In case of two-step impression techni-
que, after having taken the first impression,
without the transfer, an adequate space in
the material is created to take the second
precision impression with a light body.

1.3 The transfer is kept in the impression
due to the retentions. If this does not hap-
pen, it will be quite easy to reposition it in
the impression, thanks to the particular
shape of the transfer.
1.4 The impression is sent to the dental
laboratory and a healing cap is positioned on
the implant following the previous described
steps.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
83
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

2) INDIRECT TECHNIQUE: PREPARATION OF THE DENTAL CAST

2.1 Check for correct position of the transfer on the impression or, if necessary, reposition the transfer.

2.2 Verify the correspondence of the dimen- 2.3 CAUTION: the analog must be seated 2.4 Placement of the pin on the analog.
sions and the colour code on the surface of completely in order to avoid errors in the The connection among the two elements
both analog and transfer. For the realization fabrication of the dental cast. happens through a conic interference with
of dental casts with silicon gingiva, the no need of further fixing methods.
use of the long analog is recommended.
Placement of the analog on the transfer
through the positioning hexagon which is
present on the transfer. Exert a slight pres-
sure on the analog until its complete pla-
cement.

2.5 Placement of a small ball of wax on the 2.6 The plaster is poured making sure that 2.7 After curing of the plaster, the cast is
top of the pin. The position of the ball will the position of the pin is not modified. removed from the impression carefully and
indicate the presence of the pin in case it is checked for imperfections. Due to its
the pin would not come out of the dental retentive design, the transfer is kept in the
cast. During this phase, non-rigid soft resin impression.
material can be used on the cast to mimic
the presence of soft tissues. Pouring of the
material that simulates the gingiva around
the area of the analog.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
84
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

2.8 The cast is trimmed until the wax over the 2.9 The opening on the plaster of the cast is widened when the gap
pin gets exposed. created by the wax ball is not sufficient for the extraction of the pin.

2.10 The pin is extracted from the cast with a laboratory plier. In this way, a 2.11 Final result: cast with analog seated in the correct position with
posterior access canal to the analog is created. regard to implant position in patient’s mouth.

3) INDIRECT TECHNIQUE: PREPARATION OF THE ABUTMENT

3.1 With the use of try-in abutments (pages 15 and 28) select the ideal 3.2 Placement of the specific bar for removal of the abutment into the
abutment, seat it on the analog engaging the internal hexagon and applying access canal previously created on the base of the cast.
an impulsive force (beat gently on the top of the abutment with a mallet).
Control of the dimension and planning of subsequent modifications.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
85
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
3.3 Percussion with a mallet and extraction of
the abutment from the analog.
3.6 Removal of the abutment from the
handle. The handle has a special push-but-
ton that allows a simple and rapid ejection
of the abutment.
The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
86
www.leone.it
3.4 Placement of the abutment onto the 3.5 First phase of the reduction of the
specific handle for abutments, engaging the abutment seated on the handle.
internal hexagon and applying an impulsive The abutments of the LEONE Implant System
force. The handle facilitates the reduction of allow an easy preparation both in the labo-
the abutment and prevents any damages to ratory and in the patient’s mouth, due to
the abutment. It also avoids problems due to the particular quality of the titanium utili-
overheating and unstable grips. zed and to their design (solid abutments).
Separation disks and cross cut tungsten
carbide burs are particularly indicated for
this type of preparation.
3.7 Placement of the semi-finished abutment 3.8 Placement of the specific bar for remo-
in the analog and application of an impulsive val of the abutment in the access canal
force. If necessary, the abutment can be created previously on the base of the cast.
finished on the cast with a milling paralle- Percussion with a small mallet and extrac-
lometer. tion of the abutment from the analog.
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

CAUTION: in case of angled abutments, create a step parallel

to the axis of the cone. The abutment beater with the specific
flat tip will be placed on the step for a correct percussion of the
abutment on the implant. The anatomical abutments already
show a step parallel to the axis. Percussion on the angled and
pre-inclined abutments must be performed with the special
flat seating tip Cat. 156-1008-06 placed on the step and by
aligning the instruments along the implant axis. On the con-
trary, the seating tip might not find the correct support on the
step and slip sideways. In order to get a permanent connection,
at least 2 consecutive percussions are advisable.

3.9 Waxing, casting and try-in of the coping or of the fra-

mework on the abutments that will be marked with numbers
indicating their position and with a sign on the vestibular side.
Manufacture of a temporary prosthesis.
Sending of abutments and copings or frameworks and tempo-
rary prosthesis to the dental office.

4) INDIRECT TECHNIQUE:
SELECTION, USE AND POSITIONING OF LEONE 360° ANATOMICAL ABUTMENTS

4.1 Highlight the different implant inclination by seating the bars (included in the package) or the 4.2 Selection of the most appropriate
related try-in abutments on the analogs. abutment from the try-in kit for LEONE 360°
anatomical abutments (Cat. 160-0001-03).
It is now possible to order the correct
selected abutment.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
87
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

4.3 The apical hexagon is only seated but not locked in the 360° anatomical abutment: this 4.4 Engage the internal hexagon and gently press the
allows a free positioning to 360° on the dental cast. When supplied, the conical locking-taper abutment on the corresponding analog on the dental
connection between the hexagon and the abutment is not activated, therefore the hexagon cast.
can rotate on the abutment.

CAUTION:
do not place the LEONE 360° anatomical abutment without the hexagon into the dental cast.

4.5 The angular position of the hexagon is casual and accordingly the 4.6 Take the LEONE 360° anatomical abutment and rotate it to its correct
abutment emergence. angular position. Eventually use universal pliers.

4.7 In this way the best parallelism among abutments has been set and 4.8 Fix the position through an impulsive force on abutments.
the placement axis has been selected.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
88

www.leone.it
4.9 Placement of the special bar for the
abutment removal into the access channel
on the bottom of the dental cast.
4.11 Extraction of the abutment from the dental cast.
The hexagon is now fixed in the most favourable position for the pros-
thetic restoration and has been pushed all the way down up to the end
stop on the abutment body. Finishing of the abutment, if necessary, and
manufacturing of the framework making reference to points 3.4-3.9.
CAUTION: before doing any finishing or try-in of the framework, always
secure the abutments with an impulsive force in order to prevent unwanted
movements of the hexagon.
The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
SEPARATED
HEXAGON
ANALOG
1
DENTAL CAST
ABUTMENT
4.10 Application of an impulsive force on the pin. The hexagon is permanently fixed to the abutment
and at the same time the abutment is being removed from the analog.
4.12 Once activated the self-locking conical connection ensures the sta-
bility of the hexagon and the positioning of the abutment in the mouth is
only one-way. For the final positioning of the abutment, follow the general
instructions indicated at points 5.1-5.6.
In case of choice of a LEONE 360° anatomical abutment either angled at
15° or 25°, the activation of the connection must be performed on the
special step with the flat tip Cat. 156-1008-06.
89
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

5) INDIRECT TECHNIQUE:
FINAL POSITIONING FOR STANDARD AND LARGE PLATFORM

The prosthetic technique of LEONE Implant System is similar to the one always used on natural teeth.
The dental office receives the prepared abutments, the cap or the metal framework and the temporary prosthesis from the laboratory.
For the fabrication of provisional prosthesis with temporary abutments see paragraph 12.

5.1 Unlock the healing cap with the specific hex head extractor Cat.
156-1006-00. The extractor, which presents a hole for the placement of
a safety leash, is seated into the hexagon on the head of the healing cap
and rotated subsequently, either clockwise or anti-clockwise indifferen-
tly, in order to unlock the healing cap. The removal of the cap from the
implant is completed with the aid of tweezers.
Accurate rinsing and drying of the inside of the implant.
5.2 For the abutment try-in, the abutments are placed inside the
implants paying attention to the corresponding numbers. The hexago-
nal engagement is found and a light finger pressure is exerted on the
abutments. By doing so, the abutments will be sufficiently retained
inside the implants and, if necessary, at the end of the try-in procedure,
the abutments can be easily removed either manually or with the help of
Weingart style pliers (LEONE Orthodontic Cat. No. P2104-00).

5.3 Try-in of the coping or of the framework on the abutments. [1]

Once the perfect fit of the metal structure and the abutments has been
checked, the copings or the framework are sent to the laboratory for the
completion of the manufacturing process.[1]
In the event of an imperfect fit of the framework, it may be cut and repositio-
ned on the abutments if suggested by the clinician. The fit of the framework is
checked in the mouth of the patient and the framework is fixed with self-curing
resin. Once the final set of the self-curing resin has occurred, an impression is
taken with the framework still in place. The framework kept in the impression is
sent to the laboratory for final soldering the technique is the same as the one
on natural teeth.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
90
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

5.4 The clinician may decide for the final pla-

cement of abutments inside the implants by
placing a temporary prosthesis. In this case,
the placement of the abutments is performed
by applying an impulsive force along the lon-
gitudinal axis of the implants with the special
abutment beater. In order to get a permanent
connection, 2 consecutive percussions are advi-
sable. In case of seating an abutment in the
posterior region, use the specific offset tip Cat.
156-1008-02. In that case we recommend to
perform 3 consecutive percussions. In case of
seating an angled abutment, please refer to the
indications on page 87.
5.5 Application of a temporary prosthesis 5.6 Once the prosthodontist has decided to apply
may promote further conditioning of the soft the final manufacture, the temporary prosthesis
tissues and application of a progressive is removed. After final touches and polishing,
loading. As an alternative, the abutments the final prosthesis is positioned and cemented.
can be removed with a pliers and the hea-
ling caps are repositioned. Once the final
prosthesis is ready, the healing caps are
removed, the abutments are definitively sea-
ted and the prosthesis is applied.

6) INDIRECT TECHNIQUE: FINAL POSITIONING FOR SLIM PLATFORM

6.1 Removal of the healing cap with the special
instrument for cover caps Cat. 156-1003-00.
The instrument for cover caps has to be
screwed in the head of the healing cap to be
able to practice enough traction to remove
the cap.
6.2 Final placement of the abutment in the 6.3 Cementation of the crown closing on the
implant through the application of an impul- neck of the implant.
sive force along the longitudinal axis of the
implant with the special abutment beater.
To get a permanent connection, 2 consecuti-
ve percussions are advisable.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
91
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

7) DIRECT TECHNIQUE:
POSITIONING AND PREPARATION OF THE ABUTMENT,
IMPRESSION TAKING FOR STANDARD AND LARGE PLATFORM

7.1 Unlock of the healing cap with the spe-
cific hex head extractor Cat. 156-1006-00.
The removal of the cap from the implant is
completed with the aid of tweezers. Accurate
rinsing and drying of the inside of the
implant.
7.2 Selection of the most appropriate abutment with the use of the try-in kit for Standard and Large
abutments (Cat. 160-0001-04). Try the abutment in the mouth of the patient. Placement of the
abutment in the implant engaging the internal hexagon. Use finger pressure to get a retention of
the abutment inside the implant. Highlighting of possible parts to be trimmed. Hand removal of the
abutment or with the help of Weingart style pliers (LEONE Orthodontic Cat. No. P2104-00).

7.3 Eventual rough shaping of the abutment,
especially in height, with the aid of the spe-
cial handle for abutment.
7.4 When rough shaping is finished, place-
ment of the abutment in the implant enga-
ging the internal hexagon.
7.5 Percussion of the abutment with the specific
abutment beater on the longitudinal axis of the
implant. To get a permanent connection, 2 conse-
cutive percussions are advisable. In case of seating
an abutment in the posterior region, use the specific
offset tip Cat 156-1008-02. In that case we recom-
mend to perform 3 consecutive percussions. In case
of seating an angled abutment, please refer to the
indications on page 87.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
92
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

7.6 Milling of the abutment directly in the patient’s mouth under profuse irrigation. The abutments of the LEONE Implant System allow an easy prepara-
tion both in the laboratory and in the patient’s mouth thanks to the low thermic conductivity coefficient of the titanium with which they are manufactured.

7.6a For important cuts in height and rough shaping, the use of a cross 7.6b For the final finishing use a coarse-cut diamond bur Cat. 153-1610-01
cut tungsten carbide bur Cat. 153-1221-02 or Cat. 153-1235-02 (inclu- or Cat. 153-1810-01 included in the specific organizer.
ded in the specific organizer) is recommended. We advise to prepare the
abutment as a chamfer.

7.7 Impression taking with classical technique as on the natural teeth and dispatch of the same to the dental laboratory for the preparation of the
prosthesis. The application of a temporary prosthesis is advisable to get a conditioning of the soft tissues.

8) BALL HEAD ABUTMENTS FOR OVERDENTURE

8.1 After the healing of soft tissues, take the impression 8.2 In case of 360° angled ball head abutments, the procedure for perma-
with the conventional indirect technique using Standard nently fixing the hexagon to the abutment body is like the one for LEONE 360°
transfers, send the impression to the lab and pour the anatomical abutments (points 4.3 – 4.11 of the prosthetic procedure). Deliver
dental cast (par. 1 and 2 of the prosthetic procedure). the dental cast and the selected abutments to the dental office.
Select the appropriate ball head abutments according
to the thickness of gingival tissues and inclination of
implants, using the try-in abutments kit Cat. 160-0001-04.
The abutment must protrude from the gingiva by at least
1 mm to avoid a possible impingement of the housing on
the patient’s soft tissues.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
93
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

1 2 3
123-0002-00 123-0003-00 123-0004-03

8.3 After the removal of the healing caps (point 7.5 of the surgi- 8.4 Choose one attachment type of the following options:
cal procedure), rinse and dry the implant’s inner side, seat the 1) housing with O-ring
ball head abutments into the implants and apply an impulsive 2) micro housing with O-ring
force onto the abutments’ heads. To get a permanent connection 3) micro housing with insert.
of straight ball head abutments 2 consecutive percussions All attachments, which will be incorporated into the prosthesis,
with the proper abutment beater are recommended; on angled must belong to the same type.
abutments perform 4 consecutive percussions.

8.5 Place the chosen housings on the abutments’ heads. Take an 8.6 Check the final prosthesis, particularly in relation to the
impression and send it to the lab. In this way, the manufacturing space left for the housings.
of the definitive prosthesis can occur with an adequate space
for the housings. Remove the housings and adapt the temporary
prosthesis, if necessary.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
94
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

8.7 If necessary, relieve the prosthesis in the areas for the hou-
sings, in order to obtain a perfect tissue borne prosthesis without
any friction on the housings.

CAUTION: It is recommended to deliver the final prosthesis in the

initial phase without housings to the patient to allow for ade-
quate tissue adaptation and to correct possible impingements.
The clinician will determine the length of the adaptation period.

8.8 After adaptation, place over each abutment the proper spacer ring suitable for the selected housing. The spacer rings allow a precise incorporation
of the housings into the prosthesis without displacements, promote a correct resilient retention of the prosthesis and protect the undercuts of the
abutments’ heads from acrylic.

micro housing
with insert
10°
housing or micro housing
micro housing with insert
with O-ring HIGH ANGLED
LOW
SPACER SPACER
SPACER
RING RING
RING

8.8a The LOW spacer ring is used to incorporate
the housing with O-ring or the micro housing
with micro O-ring into the prosthesis.
8.8b The HIGH spacer ring is used to incorporate
the micro housing with insert into the prosthesis
along the head axis of the abutment.
8.8c The HIGH ANGLED spacer ring, easily reco-
gnisable due to a protrusion at its maximum
thickness, is used to incorporate the micro
housing with insert into the prosthesis with
an angle increased by 10° in respect to the
abutments head.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
95
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

8.9 Place squared pieces of rubber dam over each abutment to 8.10 Place the housings onto the abutments’ heads. Please
avoid a direct contact between the soft tissue and the acrylic. remember that all housings should be incorporated at the same
time into the prosthesis and not at different moments.

8.11 Apply acrylic to the housings. 8.12 Place acrylic into the relief areas of the prosthesis.

8.13 Place the prosthesis into position in the mouth. 8.14 Have the patient close into proper occlusion.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
96
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

8.15 After the polymerization of the acrylic has been comple-
ted, the prosthesis is removed from the patient’s mouth. The
housings, due to their highly retentive surface, are kept in the
prosthesis. Remove the rubber dams and the spacer rings from
the abutments.
8.16 Remove excess acrylic until the lower border of the housings
is fully uncovered. Remove acrylic that could create impingement
problems close to the implants. After polishing, the prosthesis is
delivered to the patient.

REPLACING AN O-RING

When replacing an O-ring, remove the old O-ring from the metal housing and lubricate the new O-ring with silicone
spray or Vaseline to facilitate placement within the metal housing. Insert the new O-ring into the housing by using
plastic forceps. Use a round-shaped instrument which can enter into the hole of the O-ring to push it into its seat with
small circular movements. To improve visibility we recommend to work using a magnifier with a magnification of at
least 4x.

REPLACING AN INSERT

When replacing an insert, remove the old insert from the metal housing and insert a new one by means of the specific
insert seating tool Cat. 156-1004-00. Place the insert onto the tip of this tool. Use the seating tool to push the insert
all the way into the housing, until you hear a click indicating that it is properly locked into place. Check whether the
insert is fully seated into the housing and that the border of the insert is flush with the border of the housing.

PROSTHESIS MAINTENANCE

Patients should be reviewed at least once every six months. Review should include assessment of prosthesis retention,
replacement of damaged females (O-rings or inserts) or change of insert type, if the patient needs a different level
of retention. In case of prosthesis relining, at the end of the procedure always replace the O-rings or the inserts. If a
simple prosthesis relining procedure is insufficient and it is necessary to reincorporate the metal housings into the
prosthesis, remove the housings with a small bur and replace them with new housings following the above-mentioned
indications (points 8.8 – 8.16). Please remember that all the housings within the prosthesis should always be reincor-
porated together into the prosthesis and not only one or part of them.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
97
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

9) BAR-RETAINED OVERDENTURE AND SCREW-RETAINED PROSTHESIS

9.1 After the healing of soft tissues, take the impression
with the conventional indirect technique using Standard
transfers, send the impression to the lab and pour the
dental cast (par. 1 and 2 of the prosthetic procedure).
Plan the prosthetic restoration and select the appropriate
abutments for screw-retained prosthesis according to the
thickness of gingival tissues and inclination of implants,
using the try-in abutments kit Cat. 160-0001-04.
9.2 In case of 360° angled abutments for screw-retained prosthesis, the
procedure for permanently fixing the hexagon to the abutment body is like
the one for LEONE 360° anatomical abutments (points 4.3 - 4.11 of the
prosthetic procedure). Please remember that the abutments need to be
secured on the dental cast by applying a sufficient number of percussions.
Deliver the dental cast and the selected abutments to the dental office.

9.3 After the removal of the healing caps (point
7.5 of the surgical procedure), rinse and dry the
implant’s inner side, seat the abutments into the
implants and apply an impulsive force onto the
abutments’ heads. To get a permanent connec-
tion of straight abutments 2 consecutive per-
cussions with the proper abutment beater are
recommended; on angled abutments perform 5
consecutive percussions.
9.4 IMPRESSION TAKING ON ABUTMENT LEVEL
Hand-tighten the proper transfers for abutments
onto the corresponding abutments all the way
down.
9.5 Take one-stage impression by using
proper material and technique (a polyether
material is recommended). The transfer’s
shape allows an easy removal of the impres-
sion. The transfers remain on the abutments,
while the negative reproduction of their
shape is created in the impression material.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
98
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

9.6 Unscrew the transfers by hand from the

abutments, deliver the impression and the tran-
sfers to the lab and place the protective caps
onto the abutments. The caps, included in the
package of the transfers, are connected to the
abutments with the standard connecting screws 9.7 After checking the correct colour coding, 9.8 Reposition the transfer coupled with the
using the specific adapter Cat. 126-0002-00 screw the abutment analog into the relevant analog into its seating inside the impression.
mounted onto the hand screwdriver Cat. 156-1001-01. transfer all the way down. The specific shape of the transfer allows to
In case of pre-existing prosthesis, relieve it ade- easily perceive when a complete insertion is
quately corresponding to the abutments, so that it achieved.
may be put in place with no pre-contacts.

MASTER CAST

ABUTMENT
ANALOG

TRANSFER
IMPRESSION

9.9 In case of angled abutment analog, the symmetrical geometry of the transfer 9.10 Pour a new master cast with the embedded
allows to rotate the ensemble analog+transfer inside the impression; this way it is abutment analogs. The use of a class 4 hard plaster
possible to determine the best angular position for pouring the cast. is recommended.
Rotate clockwise to prevent parts from unscrewing.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
99
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

a) RESTORATION WITH A TRADITIONAL BAR

9.11a In case of restoration with a traditional bar (i.e. Dolder bar), standard burn-out copings may be used.

9.12a Connect the copings to the abutment analogs
with the standard connecting screws using the
specific adapter Cat. 126-0002-00 mounted onto
the hand screwdriver Cat. 156-1001-01. Do not
overtighten the screws on the standard burn-out
copings.
9.13a Fabrication of the bar with different options:
1) use of standard burn-out copings;
2) CAD-CAM procedures.
When the bar is ready, make a new denture with a
proper seating and proper attachments for the bar
or adapt the pre-existing one. Send the prosthesis to
the dental office.

9.14a After the removal of the protective caps, seat the bar 9.15a Clasp the prosthesis to the bar with the proper attach-
and fix it onto the abutments with the connecting screws. ments.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
100
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

b) RESTORATION WITH A SCREW-RETAINED PROSTHESIS

9.11b In case of restoration with a milled bar or a screw-retained bridge, high burn-out copings, titanium copings or long waxing
screws Cat. 126-0020-05 may be used, which allow during framework’s modelling, the preparation of a channel of adequate
dimensions for the seating of the connecting screws.

9.12b In case of high burn-out copings, connect 9.13b Fabrication of the framework with a traditio- 9.14b After the removal of the protec-
the copings to the abutment analogs with the nal technique or CAD-CAM technique. It is possible tive caps, seat the prosthesis and fix it
high head connecting screws, using the specific to choose among different accessories: onto the abutments with the connecting
adapter Cat. 126-0002-00 mounted onto the 1) use of high and/or standard burn-out copings; screws.
hand screwdriver Cat. 156-1001-01. 2) use of titanium copings;
3) use of long waxing screws.
Prepare the final restoration. Send the prosthesis to
the dental office.

Use of titanium copings

There follows an example for the use of the titanium copings: fabrication of a screw-retained provisional prosthesis for an immediate loading procedure.

Titanium copings screwed onto the abutments seated Provisional prosthesis relieved in the area of the Provisional prosthesis seated on the dental cast: if
on the dental cast and wax-up of the reinforcing copings. necessary the height of the copings can be reduced
framework. accordingly.

In the mouth: fixing of the prosthesis to the titanium Titanium copings bonded to the finished provisional Screw-retained provisional prosthesis in the mouth.
copings screwed onto the abutments in order to prosthesis.
achieve a passive fit of the structure.
The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
101
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

Use of welding units (syncrystallization technique)

The titanium copings, due to their adequate thickness, can be splinted together with a titanium wire through a welding process which can be performed
intraorally or on the dental cast. Intraoral welding, performed with specific welding units using a technique called “syncrystallization”, allows rigid
splinting of implants with no risk of overheating of the peri-implant tissue and ensures a perfect passive fit of the structure. By rigidly splinting the
implants together, this technique improves the predictability of immediate loading procedures.

ALL-ON-FOUR OR ALL-ON-SIX PROSTHESIS

In case of severely atrophic edentulous jaws, in order to avoid complex surgical procedures, there exists the possibility to reduce the number of implants
– usually to 4 or 6 – by tilting the two distal implants so that their implant heads emerge as posterior as possible. In this way a fixed, screw-retained
prosthesis is produced, and if the preconditions are met, it may be associated with an immediate loading procedure.
The high stability of the Morse taper connection and the availability of angled abutments with high inclination make the LEONE implant system ideal
for this type of solution.
To facilitate impression taking on not perfectly parallel abutments, specific transfers for pick-up technique have been developed.
Using pick-up transfers, the points 9.4. – 9.8 of the prosthetic procedure need to be replaced by the following steps:

IMPRESSION TAKING ON ABUTMENT LEVEL WITH PICK-UP TECHNIQUE Use a custom open top impression tray and verify that the screw heads
Place the proper diameter pick-up transfers onto the abutments and protrude through the openings or expose the screw heads before the
tighten the pick-up screws Cat.126-0012-01 all the way down using the impression material has set.
specific short screwdriver Cat.126-0002-01.

One-step impression taking using suitable
materials and techniques. After the impres-
sion material has set, unscrew the pick-up
screws and remove them from the transfers.
Remove the tray from the mouth: the pick-up Place the proper diameter abutment analog
transfers are kept in the impression. Deliver onto each transfer and tighten the pick-up
the impression and the pick-up screws to the screws. Verify that the abutment analogs are
laboratory. Place the protective caps onto the completely seated onto the transfers.
abutments (see point 9.6).

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
102
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

10) MULTITECH ABUTMENTS: DIRECTIONS FOR USE

Always verify that the soft tissue conditioning allows for correct seating of the customized
abutment into the implant. If the burn-out coping is used for the wax-up of the customized
portion, use the healing cap of the Large prosthetic platform for soft tissue conditioning.

CAUTION: in case the platform of the customized abutment is wider than the Large healing cap, a specific conditioning of
the soft tissue shall be provided.

In case of 360° angled MultiTech abutments, the procedure for permanently fixing the hexagon to the abutment body
is like the one for LEONE 360° anatomical abutments (points 4.3 – 4.11 of the prosthetic procedure).

Fabrication of the customized abutment portion:

WITH CAD-CAM technology by taking a scan of the seated abutment on the dental cast and modelling of the customized abutment portion with a specific
software. The fabrication is performed in the laboratory with a specific Computer-Assisted Machine or by a specialized production centre upon the receipt
of the data file.

Dental cast and MultiTech Scanning Design

Milling with the CAM unit A sintering process is required when zirconia is used Bonding of the customized portion onto the MultiTech
abutment. In case of zirconia, NIMETIC CEM (3M
Espe) or MULTILINK HYBRID ABUTMENT (Ivoclar
Vivadent) is recommended

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
103
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

Dental cast and MultiTech Scanning Design

Delivery of the project to the milling center Receipt of the customized portion Bonding of the customized work onto the MultiTech
abutment. In case of metal, NIMETIC CEM (3M Espe)
or transparent composite cement is recommended

WITH THE TRADITIONAL METHOD by using a pre-fabricated burn-out coping placed on the abutment, adjustment of the coping, modelling with wax and/
or acrylic and fabrication of one customized abutment portion through casting.

Dental cast and MultiTech Seating of the burn-out coping on the MultiTech Adjustment of the burn-out coping
abutment

Waxing Casting Bonding of the customized portion onto the MultiTech

abutment. In case of metal, NIMETIC CEM (3M Espe)
or transparent composite cement is recommended

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
104
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

11) INTRAORAL SCANNING AND USE OF THE TI-BASE ABUTMENTS

Digital impression taking

11.1 Connect the specific positioner to the top 11.2 Place the scan post into the implant using 11.3 Remove the scan post positioner.
of the scan post. the positioner: engage the hexagon and exert
pressure on the scan post in order to verify
complete seating.

11.4 Select the proper scan body (white or grey)
depending on the intraoral scanner type. Place
the scan body onto the scan post by aligning
the markings and pushing it all the way down.
Verify complete seating and that the markings
on the scan body and the scan post line up.
11.5 Take the digital impression with the intraoral scanner. The procedure can also be carried out on
the dental cast, by seating the scan post coupled with the scan body into the analog and digitizing
the dental cast with a specific laboratory scanner. For further details on the procedure, please refer
to the instructions associated with the QR code.

Fabrication of the prosthetic restoration

For information about the fabrication of the restoration using Ti-Base abutments, please refer to the instructions associated with the QR code.

CAUTION: if a 3,3 mm diameter Ti-Base abutment is used, use the healing cap of the Large prosthetic platform for soft tissue conditioning.

The continuous and rapid evolution of digital technology implies a constant updating of the procedures as well as of the associated components.
Please refer to the online version of the prosthetic procedure and to the associated explainer videos for the relevant updates.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
105
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

12) TEMPORARY ABUTMENTS: APPLICATION PROCEDURE

LEONE temporary abutments are prosthetic accessories designed to support an implant-retained temporary prosthesis.
The abutments are designed to be held in the oral cavity for a limited period of time, no longer than 6 months.
LEONE temporary abutments are made of an ultra-polymer - a polymer with extremely high mechanical characteristics - highly biocompatible
and easily prepable. This material is radiotransparent and can be sterilized in the autoclave at 135°C (275°F).
The abutments can be utilized with both the direct and indirect techniques and, therefore, can be prepared directly in mouth or in the laboratory.
The temporary prosthetics must always be out of occlusion in order to reduce the effect of the masticatory load.
We do not suggest using Ø3,3 temporary abutments for single prosthetic rehabilitations.

POSITIONING OF THE TEMPORARY ABUTMENT

12.1 Cylindrical temporary abutment made of PEEK. 12.2a Connection of the abutment to the appropriate abutment handle,
Notice that it has the same implant-abutment connection design as the paying special attention to engage the internal hexagon.
definitive titanium abutments. Subsequent preparation of the abutment. We suggest to use coarse-grai-
ned diamond burs; we also suggest to use the burs at a low speed and
with little pressure. Alternatively, it is possible to prepare the abutment
directly in the patient’s mouth.

Removal of the abutment from the handle by using the special

push-button. Any refinement to the abutment can be made on
the dental cast or directly in the patient’s mouth.
If preparing the abutment on the dental cast, please refer to
the paragraph in the Prosthetic Procedure entitled “Indirect
technique: preparation of the abutment”.

12.2b When using an angled temporary abutment, it is necessary to create a step paral-
lel to the axis of the cone. The specific beater will be placed on the step for a correct
percussion of the abutment on the implant.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
106
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

12.3 Insert the temporary abutment in the implant, 12.4a Apply an impulsive force on the abutment along
paying special attention to engage the internal hexagon. the longitudinal axis of the implant with the special
abutment beater. We advice using two consecutive
percussions.

12.4b CAUTION: due to the nature of the material, the
seating tip of the abutment beater may tend to slide
during the application of force.
We suggest, in this case, to support the tip with your
fingers during the operation.
12.4c When using an angled temporary abutment, tap-
ping must be performed with the special flat seating tip,
Cat. 156-1008-06, taking care to incline the instrument
along the implant axis.

We recommend using temporary cement to secure the temporary prosthesis to the abutment.

CAUTION: do not cement the temporary crown extra-orally, but always attach it to the abutment after the abutment has been connected to the implant.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
107
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

REMOVAL OF THE TEMPORARY ABUTMENT

If you intend to reposition the abutment after removing it from the implant, pay special care to avoid distortion during removal.
First, remove the temporary prosthesis from the abutment with a crown-removal instrument.

12.5a Using extraction pliers or other pliers with curved and gripping 12.5b When using an angled temporary abutment, the pulling force
jaws, grasp the emergence of the abutment as close as possible to the should be applied along the implant axis and not along the emergence
gingival margin and apply a pulling force. We suggest to protect the of the abutment.
opposing jaw by placing a finger between it and the abutment.

CAUTION: it is important to avoid any twisting motion, even slight, in

order to avoid damaging the apical hexagon.

As an alternative to the procedure above, after removing the temporary restoration, you can remove the abutment by simply rotating or bending it.
In both cases however, the abutment will be permanently distorted and impossible to reuse.
To better illustrate, the following is the removal procedure with bending.

12.6a Using the extraction pliers, grasp the emergence of the abutment 12.6b Once the abutment is sufficiently bent, remove it with a simple
as close as possible to the gingival margin and bend continuously. pull. We suggest to protect the opposing jaw by placing a finger between
Deform the abutment until you can appreciate a loss of tightness of the it and the abutment.
conical connection.

CAUTION: it is important that the abutment is bent with a continuous

movement and not with an alternate movement.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
108
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • removal of abutments
www.leone.it

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE REMOVAL OF LEONE ABUTMENTS

The Leone abutments are characterized by a self-locking taper connection that, fully seated, determines a very strong connection with the dental implant
(cold welding). Occasionally there may be cases where you want to replace an abutment fixed to the implant with a new one of a different geometry, basi-
cally because of the necessity to change the type of prosthetic restoration. For use exclusively in cases like these an instrument for the removal of LEONE
abutments has been developed, consisting in specifically modified extraction forceps. The instrument is based on the so-called “wedge effect”, whereby
an extraction force is developed as a result of the abutment’s geometry, in particular its transmucosal portion.

CAUTION:
for the proper functioning of the instrument the transmucosal portion of the abutment needs to be totally intact and not modified by the prosthetic
preparation.

Two different instruments are available, one for abutments of the Standard prosthetic platform and one for the abutments of the Large prosthetic platform.
Both are universal instruments in regard to the connection size, i.e. they can be used indifferently for Ø3,3 – Ø4,1 – Ø4,8 mm abutments.

13.1 In order to use the instrument expose the top of the implant collar, preferably by means of a full-thickness flap. This
way the device may get in contact with the top of the implant collar. This also allows for perfect visibility of the area and
overcomes any potential obstacle associated with the soft tissue. For the proper functioning of the instrument remove, if
present, the crown from the abutment, to avoid that it may prevent the beaks of the forceps from closing properly.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
109
 LEONE IMPLANT SYSTEM • removal of abutments
www.leone.it

13.2a, b Place the beaks of the instrument at the level of the transmucosal portion of the abutment and in contact with
the top of the implant collar; then, by closing the beaks, an extraction force is applied on the abutment. The abutment is
pushed outward due to the “wedge effect”, thanks to the specific angulation of the inner surface of the beaks.

CLICK!

13.3 Once established a firm grasp, continue to compress the forceps and push down towards the top of the implant collar:
in this way the abutment is released from the implant with a clicking sound, due to the “wedge effect”.
If this procedure is unsuccessful, once the beaks are in contact with the top of the implant collar, use a simultaneous
pulling and twisting motion to promote removal.
During this procedure it is essential to ensure adequate protection for the opposing jaw, as the unlocking and removal of
the abutment occur quite suddenly and the instrument could crash onto the opposing teeth.

CAUTION: the described procedure causes damage to the abutment’s taper connection which can no longer be used.
The abutment needs to be replaced by a new one.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
110
SURGICAL
and

PROSTHETIC
procedure

for 2015

monoimplants
for overdenture O-ring

Proc. 04/10-12 May 01, 2015

 LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING
www.leone.it

DISCLAIMER

The Surgical and Prosthetic Procedures related to the use of the Leone products for Monoimplants for O-ring overdenture described in the fol-
lowing pages are intended for Professionals experienced in dental implant techniques.
In case of lack of basic notions, we suggest to attend specific courses in order to reach a high level of knowledge and practice in the use of implants. The
instructions for use of the products described below represent a sort of standard instructions that have to be adjusted to the individual needs and to the
particular situations that may occur on the basis of the manual ability, the experience and diagnosis effected by the legally qualified medical operator.
It is not ascribed to the manufacturer the duty of monitoring the procedures of use of the product. A correct and appropriate use of the instruments
and products related to the LEONE Monoimplants for O-ring overdenture shall completely be reverted to the clinician. The surgical procedure hereunder
described is merely indicative as any single treatment case is assigned to the experience of the operator. As every medical operator well knows, a correct
procedure and a perfect manufacture of the prosthesis may sometimes be followed by not satisfactory results owing to particular situations not impu-
table to responsibility of the dental operator or the manufacturer.

TREATMENT PLANNING

Indications
The Leone Monoimplant for O-ring overdenture therapy is indicated in the treatment of the TOTAL LOWER EDENTULISM.

Contraindications
For contraindications and side effects read the instructions for use enclosed in the package of each product and available in our web site www.leone.it.

PREOPERATIVE EXAMS

Before starting the surgical intervention, the patients have to be subjected to a series of exams; any single case has to be evaluated by the clinician.

Anamnesis
It is the first approach to the patient and it represents a fundamental tool to recognize both risk factors and contraindications. Moreover, anamnesis
allows for the evaluation of patient’s expectations, priorities, degree of compliance and motivation.
Anamnesis can help in evaluating the need for extra exams in addition to the routine ones (when the presence of pathologies that were not reported by
the patient is suspected) and when particular situations drive to deem a complete medico-surgical exam necessary.

Objective exam
It consists of:
• inspection of the periodontal tissues, of the oral mucosa and of the teeth along with an initial evaluation of the occlusal relationships (skeletal Class,
characteristics of the opposing arch and related potential problems, type of occlusion, interarch distance), of the presence of parafunctions, of the
degree of oral hygiene, of the aesthetic conditions, of the morphology of the edentulous crest and the space available for the replacement of the
prosthesis.
• palpation of the soft tissues and implant sites with a first evaluation of the bone morphology and thickness.
• a complete periodontal probing for the appraisal of the absence of both gengivitis and pockets.

Radiographic exams
PANORAMIC RADIOGRAPH: frequently, this radiograph enables to appraise bone height and the relationships between implant site and adjacent struc-
tures, such as mandibular canal, etc.
It is also possible to identify concavities and ossification defects due to previous tooth extractions.

INTRAORAL RADIOGRAPH: it is very helpful for the determination of the apico-coronal availability of bone.

LATERAL CEPHALOGRAM: it is useful for the determination of the mandibular symphysis.

The Surgical Procedure and the Prosthetic Procedure reported were conceived with the invaluable contribution of Dr. Leonardo Targetti, whom we thank sincerely.

112
 LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING
www.leone.it

COMPUTERIZED TOMOGRAPHY: it is advisable to remind that previous radiographic exams provide two-dimensional images which do not give informa-
tion on bone thickness. In order to obtain this useful information a computerized tomography is necessary: it provides three-dimensional images, thus
allowing for an accurate evaluation of bone morphology and, sometimes, bone density.

Instrumental or laboratory exams

When necessary, in cases where a pathology is suspected on the basis of anamnesis or clinical records.

MONOIMPLANT SELECTION

The dimensions (implant length and transmucosal neck height) of the monoimplants to be seated are determined by the following factors:
1. amount of bone available
2. characteristics of the implant site
3. thickness of the soft tissues in the areas involved.
Further and particular individual situations must be evaluated by the Dentist or the Dental Surgeon.
Do not place monoimplants in the upper arch.

A template Cat. 156-2003-01 (page 50) is available that shows all Leone monoimplants
GH3 in actual dimensions, with dimensions increased by 10% and increased by 25%, to
match possible distortions created by the instrument for radiographic examinations (CT and
panoramic radiograph). Superimpose the template to the radiograph in order to select the
monoimplant in relation to the quantity of bone available.

To simplify the surgical operation, an instrument organizer Cat. 156-0017-00 (page 49) was
conceived by LEONE to sterilize and hold the necessary instruments on the operating table. The
organizer must be sterilized before use.

The sterilization must be performed as follows:

• wrap the organizer into a sterilization bag as requested by the
manufacturer of the sterilizing machine.
• autoclave at 121° (250°F) for 20 minutes.
• remove the organizer from the autoclave and leave it cool inside the bag.
• leave the organizer inside the bag to preserve sterility.

113
 LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

1) PREPARATION OF THE IMPLANT SITE

The typology and the access to the surgical site shall be selected by the professional according to the clinical-morphological
parameters. Schematically and with illustrative purpose only, the following steps for the preparation of the implant site are
illustrated.

1.1 After adequate treatment planning, clearly mark the locations where the monoimplants must be
inserted with a marker pen or a surgical template.
The Leone monoimplants must only be inserted in the mandible, at the level of the mandibular sym-
physis, located in the area between the two foramina.
The number of monoimplants required to adequately support a removable prosthesis is 4. The
minimum required space between each implant and the next is 6 mm. This will allow the correct
positioning of the micro housings.
The eventual inclination of every single implant shall not have to overcome 8° to the axis of parallelism.
Make sure that the prosthesis is tissue borne and only implant retained. Avoid any implant-prosthetic
minimum 6 mm load on the monoimplants since they have to act exclusively as a retentive element.

1.2a Flapless procedure 1.2b Flapping procedure

Punch the mucosa with the use of the special mucosa punch for handpiece (Cat. 151-2215-20) In case there are uncertainties on the con-
included in the organizer. Use the mucosa punch with the handpiece set to low speed (approx. dition of the crestal bone or the quantity
40 rpm). Use until bony tissue is met. For visual reference, as well as to determine the gingival of bone available, the use of the flapping
thickness around the implant area, the three black lines clearly visible around the mucosa procedure is advisable. Start with a scal-
punch, at the heights of 3-5-7 mm, starting from the crest bone, may be used. Remove the pel incision of the soft tissues, then open
mucosa punch and remove the tissue plug by using a small periosteal elevator. the gingival flap for a clearer vision of the
crestal bone: the osteotomy can now be
performed.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning of the
Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
114
 LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

1.3 Once the gingival tunnel has been obtai- 1.4 Place the Ø 2.2 mm pilot drill Cat. 151-2241-12, included in the organizer, in the track made
ned, use the round bur Cat. 151-1934-01 by the round bur and drill the bone until the length of the desired monoimplant has been reached.
included in the organizer, to mark the The handpiece must be set to a limited speed of 800 rpm. Irrigate abundantly while using the pilot
cortical bone for the subsequent pilot drill. Pay attention to the length of the monoimplant, to which the height of the soft tissues has to
drill. Alternatively, it is possible to use be added. The drilling depth can be checked on the depth marks on the drill:
the lance drill Cat. 151-1930-02, which - drills with 4 marks: 8-10-12-14 mm
is particularly suitable in case of narrow - drills with 5 marks: 6.5-8-10-12-14 mm
knife-edged ridges. Care must be taken to the length of the monoimplant to which the height of the soft tissues shall
be added.

minimum
1 mm

1.5 Insert the depth gauge Cat. 156-2002-00,
included in the organizer, into the newly crea-
ted implant site to check its depth, considering
also the height of the soft tissues.
1.6 Repeat points 1.2 – 1.5 for the remaining 1.7 It is now time to choose the transmuco-
three monoimplants, ensuring the maximum sal neck height of the monoimplant.
degree of parallelism among the surgical The head of the monoimplant must protrude
sites. Check the parallelism of the monoim- from the gingiva by at least 1 mm to avoid a
plants using the measuring pins for gingi- possible impingement of the micro housing
val height Cat. 156-2004-00 and the depth on the patient’s soft tissues.
gauge both included in the organizer; these
may be inserted in the implant sites just dril-
led. The measuring pins may also be used at
any other time to check soft tissue thickness.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning of the
Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
115
 LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

2) LEONE MONOIMPLANT PACKAGING

The monoimplant is supplied with the micro housing in a sealed

envelope that also carries the relevant product information.

2.1 THE PACKAGING

The packaging features a double protection to preserve the steri-
lity of the implant subjected to a certified gamma x-ray process.
A removable part of the label showing the information of the
implant (see label symbols at page 125) is to be applied on the
“Identity card” of the implant or on the clinical case sheet of the
patient. A sterility indicator is present on the glass vial.

THE GLASS VIAL

TOP LID with safety ring.

An intact top lid guarantees that the product is intact and sterile.

SEALING CAP:
it ensures the vial is stored airtight.

MONOIMPLANT CARRIER: it allows a correct support for the monoimplant and an

easy hold for the clinician. It is used to start screwing the monoimplant into the prepared
implant site.

MONOIMPLANT

VIAL: this contains the monoimplant, protecting it from any contact with the outside.

GLASS VIAL

116
 LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

3) INSERTION OF THE MONOIMPLANT

3.1 Unscrew the glass vial’s top lid. 3.2 Remove the sealing cap. 3.3 Extract the vial containing the monoim-
plant from the glass vial then lay it gently
onto the sterile pad.

3.4 Hold the vial with one hand while gently 3.5 Still holding the monoimplant by the 3.6 Remove the monoimplant carrier by
pulling out the monoimplant with the other. monoimplant carrier, insert it into the pulling up.
Hold the monoimplant by the monoimplant implant site with clockwise movement, while
carrier. exerting a light downward pressure.
Leone monoimplants are self-tapping.

3.7 Position the fan-type wrench (Cat. 156-1015-00), included in the 3.8a Screw the monoimplant with clockwise action in, until insertion is
organizer. Its opening is engineered to fit the hexagonal head of the complete.
monoimplant with precision. This wrench presents a hole sidewise for the
insertion of a safety leash.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning of the
Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
117
 LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING • surgical procedure
www.leone.it

3.8b Alternatively, the monoimplant may be inserted with a contra-angle,
using the special adapter (Cat. 156-1017-00) included in the organizer as
well. Set a micromotor’s maximum speed to 20 rpm and a maximum torque
value to 50 Ncm.
3.9 In case of particularly hard bone, the monoimplant can be inserted
with the ratchet Cat. 156-1014-00, using the appropriate adapter Cat.
156-1016-00.
N.B.: Should a ratchet be used to complete the insertion, it is recommended
that the clinician should lightly press the head of the instrument with a
finger during action, to keep the head perpendicular with the implant.

3.10 Once the monoimplant is in place, 3.11 Repeat steps 3.1 – 3.10 for the remaining three monoimplants.
the base of the tapered section of the head Should a flapping technique be used, suture soft tissues around the
should sit level with the crestal bone, while monoimplants and load implants after healing has taken place. In
the head should stick out of the gum. the meantime relieve the existing prosthesis in correspondence of
the spherical heads of the monoimplants and fill the holes with soft
acrylic.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning of the
Dental Surgeon and the Dentist regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
118
 LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

4) PREPARATION OF THE REMOVABLE PROSTHESIS

During relining of the pre-existing prosthesis or manufacture of a new one, provide a wide tissue support for the prosthesis.
Particular care has to be paid also to the correct tissue support of the prosthesis during the subsequent periodical checks,
carrying out prosthesis relining, if necessary.

CAUTION: it is recommended to deliver the final prosthesis in the initial phase without housings to the patient to allow for adequate tissue adaptation
and to correct possible impingements. The clinician will determine the length of the adaptation period.

4.1 Once the prosthesis is ready apply
some soft wax on the inside surface of the
prosthesis or dab the spherical heads of the
monoimplants with a marker pen to reveal
their location in the prosthesis.
4.2 Use the marks thus obtained in the prosthesis as 4.3 Place the micro housings on the spheri-
reference; create the cavities with adequate diame- cal heads of the implants then press down
ter to receive the micro housings. until home. Slight lack of parallelism can
be overcome by using the housings Cat.
CAUTION: if you are not sure whether the monoim-
123-0002-00.
plants have achieved adequate primary stability, we
recommend relining the prosthesis with soft acrylic
and waiting for a minimum of 3 months for osseoin-
tegration before incorporating the housings into the
prosthesis.

micro MONOIMPLANTS
housing SPACER RING
with
micro O-ring

4.4 Insert the prosthesis in the patient’s
mouth for the final check. Occlusion should
at this point be free from friction and
unwanted contacts. The prosthesis may be
relieved in correspondence of the micro hou-
sings’ cavities in order to obtain a perfect
tissue borne prosthesis without any friction
on the housings.
4.5 Remove the prosthesis and micro hou- 4.6 Place over each monoimplant the specific
sings from the implants. white spacer ring. Please remember that this
white spacer ring is used to incorporate the
micro housing with O-ring Cat. 123-0003-00
or the housing with O-ring Cat. 123-0002-00
into the prosthesis. The spacer rings allow
a precise incorporation of the housings
into the prosthesis without displacements,
promote a correct resilient retention of the
prosthesis and protect the undercuts of the
spherical heads from acrylic.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
119
 LEONE MONOIMPLANTS FOR OVERDENTURE O-RING • prosthetic procedure
www.leone.it

4.7 Place squared pieces of rubber dam over
each monoimplant to avoid a direct contact
between the soft tissue and the acrylic.
4.8 Place the micro housings onto the 4.9 Fill the 4 cavities in the prosthesis with
monoimplants. Please remember that all self-curing acrylic and as may be the case
housings should be incorporated at the same put the acrylic also on the micro housings.
time into the prosthesis and not at different
moments.

4.11 After the polymerization of the acrylic

has been completed, the prosthesis is remo-
ved from the patient’s mouth. The micro
housings, due to their highly retentive sur-
face, are kept in the prosthesis. Remove the
rubber dams and the spacer rings from the
monoimplants’ heads.
4.10 Fit the prosthesis in the mouth of the 4.12 Remove any acrylic excess until the
patient looking for adequate occlusal con- edges of the micro housings are completely
tact. The patient at this stage should not try exposed. Correct any discrepancies that may
to close his/her mouth too tightly. cause impingement problems.
Finish and polish the prosthesis.

For replacing an O-ring and prosthesis maintenance, please refer to the indications on page 97.

The pictures and indications illustrated in this literature have informative purpose only and they are not intended to replace the methods or procedures for diagnosis and treatment planning
of the Dental Surgeon, Dentist and Dental Technician regarding the needs of each patient. Leone Spa disclaims any liability or any other obligation expressed or implied in this literature.
120
www.leone.it
quality and service
QUALITY FOR THE SATISFACTION OF THE CUSTOMER

The secret to guarantee a good quality of the product is that of meeting or even exceeding the customer’s expectations: the awareness of such expec-
tations is the first step, perhaps the most important step, to furnish a quality product as a standard. The manufacture of superior quality products in
respect of the expectations and the demands of the customer and in attendance of the legally binding directives has always been the philosophy of
Leone. It implies that any company department, at any level, is called to share such goals supporting the Management in the fulfilment of the necessary
operational strategies. The Leone management quality system is conforming to UNI EN ISO 9001, additional requirements of ISO 13485, according to
Annex II of the Directive 93/42EEC, USA FDA 21 CFR Part 820 rules and Japanese Ministerial Ordinance MHLW no. 169.

CUSTOMER SERVICE

COMPETENCE AND RELIABILITY PROMPTNESS

The Leone dealers worldwide are under constant professional impro- By providing a careful management and a “state-of-the-art” logistic
vement thanks to the technical assistance received by engineers and system, we are able to deliver standard orders with the best precision
technical experts at Leone to get specific information on the products and ship the goods very quickly.
and solve any eventual problems from the customers.
In our website www.leone.it, under the section “Distributors”, you will
find the information to contact the Leone dealer in your country.

LEONE NEWSLIST

Keep yourself updated with the latest news of our products: click on “Services” in our website www.leone.it and fill in the registration form.

TECHNICAL AND COMMERCIAL ASSISTANCE

Contact your dealer in your country as a reference. You will find the comprehensive list under
the section “distributors” in our website www.leone.it

121
 alphabetical index of products www.leone.it

A
Abutments:
C
CAD-CAM 19-20
anatomical - LEONE 360° 13..15 Connecting rings - elastomer 35
angled 14-19-22-25 Connecting screws for screw-retained prosthesis 26
angled double - 10° 18 Coping for abutments for screw-retained prosthesis 27
ball head for overdenture 21..23 Cover caps 7
cylinder 12-17-18
for Large platform 17
for Slim platform 18
for Standard platform
MultiTech
pre-inclined
12..14-21..23
19
12-17
D
Demonstration anatomical models 45
standard for screw-retained prosthesis 24..26 Demonstration hemi-mandible 46
temporary 12 Demonstration jumbo dental implant 46
Ti-Base 20 Demonstration surgical kit 46
try-in - LEONE 360° anatomical type 15 Dental implants 6..10
try-in - Standard, Large type 28 Depth gauge 36-49
Abutment beater 38 Depth indicators 30
Abutment seating tips 38 Driver for implant 36
Accessories for abutments for screw-retained prosthesis 26
Accessories for ball head abutment for overdenture 23
Accessories for screw-retained prosthesis 24-26-27
Adapter for connecting screw
Adapter for handpiece
Adapter for handpiece for monoimplants
26
37
50
E
Extension 33-36
Adapter for ratchet for monoimplants 50
Analogs 29
Analogs for abutments for screw-retained prosthesis 27

H
B
Hand screwdriver for implants 36
Hand screwdriver for monoimplants 50
Handle for abutments 29
Basin - titanium 39 Healing caps:
Bone condenser tip 37 Large 16
Bone graft tip 37 Slim 18
Burs and drills: Standard 11
countersink 32 Hex head extractor for healing caps 38
FG diamond-cut 27 Hexagon for LEONE 360° abutment 14
FG tungsten 27 Housing with O-ring 22-48
for abutments 27
for hard bone 32
for short implant LEONE 6.5 32
lance
pilot
pilot with depth stop
31
31
33
I
Identity card for LEONE dental implant 46
round 31 Implant system - LEONE 6..10
twist 31 Instrument for cover caps 38
twist with depth stop 34

122
www.leone.it
alphabetical index of products

M
for ball head abutment for overdenture 23
hexagon for LEONE 360° abutment 14
plastic scan body 20
Max Stability LEONE dental implant 9 support ring for driver 36
Measuring pin for gingival height 36-49 try-in abutments 15-28
Micro housing with insert 23 Removal tool for abutments 36
Micro housing with O-ring 22-48
Micro insert 23
Micro O-ring 23-48
Monoimplants for O-ring overdenture
Mucosa punches for implants
Mucosa punch for monoimplants
47..50
30
49
S
Scan body 20
MultiTech - abutment 19 Scan post 20
Scan post positioner 20
Screwdriver for connecting screw - short 26
Screws:

O
Offset adapter for threaded handle 37
high head connecting screw
pick-up screw
standard connecting screw
26
26
26
Organizer: Seating tips for abutments 38
for implants Ø 3,3-4,1-4,8 42-43 Self-locking caps, low 11
for Max Stability LEONE implant 43 Short implant LEONE 6.5 8
for monoimplants for O-ring overdenture 49 Sinus lift tip 37
for short implant LEONE 6.5 43 Support ring for driver 36
with burs FG for abutments 27 Surgical instruments 30..39
with drills with depth stop 44 Surgical kit 40-41
with drills with depth stop and taps 44 Surgical mallet 39
with instruments 44
with taps 44
O-ring, elastomer 23-48
Osteotome instruments
Overdenture insert seating tool
Overdenture micro housing
39
23
21..23
T
Taps 35
Template for implants 39
Template for monoimplants 50

P
Tip change wrench 37
Tip for angled abutments 38
Threaded handle 37
Paralleling pin 36 Transfer:
Patient informative brochure 46 for abutments for screw-retained prosthesis 26
Platform switching 10 Large 16
Platforms: pick-up for abutments for screw-retained prosthesis 26
Large 10-16-17 Slim 18
Slim 10-18 Standard 11
Standard 10..14 Try-in abutments, LEONE 360° anatomical type 15
Positioner for depth indicators 30 Try-in abutments, Standard, Large type 28
Prosthetic instruments and accessories 27-29

R W
Waxing screw - long 27
Ratchet 35
Refills:
accessories for abutments for screw-retained prosthesis 26

123
 II S TSI T UO
®

TO
STUDI
ODONTOIATRICI

EDUCATION, TRAINING, UPGRADING

Since 1982, the ISO, Istituto Studi Odontoiatrici, has been operating with the purpose to promote
new therapeutic techniques and to divulge dentistry and implant dentistry to ever higher stan-
dards. The Leone’s teaching facility is spread out over two floors with a total surface area of 1000
square meters. During the last 30 years of activity, the ISO training center has taken lectures to
more than 43.000 attendees. ISO offers a comprehensive program of courses for dental surgeons,
dentists, specialists in dentistry and orthodontics.
Hands-on courses for dental technicians and commercial training in orthodontics and implant
dentistry for Italian and foreign traders are also available.

STATE-OF-THE ART FACILITY

With the exception of the reception area, the first floor of the building is dedicated to the lecture
rooms: a dental operatory equipped with 2 dental units for live demonstrations of both ortho-
dontic and implantological interventions. A lecture hall seating up to 40 participants, allows the
doctors to visually participate in the interventions.
Endoral and extraoral cameras film the procedures which are wired in to big screens in the
various lecture halls at a real time.
A 18-bench dental laboratory fully equipped.
A multi-purpose lecture hall for 80 trainees has been recently endowed with the interactive
learning Active Classroom environment, providing an interactive multi-media board and learners’
active response tools which enable the attendees to become active participants in the course.
On the second floor is our “Marco Pozzi” lecture hall seating up to 250 participants.
The didactic tools available at the ISO and the high qualified lecturers make each event a profi-
table and memorable one for every participant.

For detailed information on courses and events

visit our website: www.leone.it/corsi
or contact the ISO reception office: Follow us on Facebook
Phone +39.055.304458 - Fax +39.055.304455 - iso@leone.it

124
www.leone.it
symbols and information for distributors

PRODUCT LABEL SYMBOLS

The label on the package of any medical device set on the market will show the symbols in compliance with the harmonized standards.
The symbols marked with a single (*) are based on the ISO 21531, ISO 15223-1, EN 980 European Standard and on the 93/42EEC Directive.
The symbols marked with double (**) have instead been performed by us.

manufacturer’s catalogue
manufacturer’s
code number and product description bar code
trade name and address
in different languages
CE mark (made in compliance (*) (*) (*)
expiry date,
with 93/42EEC Directive on class storage temperature
if the product is perishable (year/month)
IIA or IIB medical devices) 2030-12

(*) (**) (*)

lot number
for professional use only single use only
(indicated by LOT mark)

(*) (**) (*)

this product contains Nickel-Chromium:
keep dry keep away from sunlight
possible allergic reactions

CE mark (made in compliance (*) (*)

(*)
with 93/42EEC Directive on refer to instructions for use gamma-ray sterilized
class I medical devices)
(*) (*) (**)
this product contains Chromium:
titanium surgical steel
possible allergic reactions

(*) (*) (*)

autoclavable
polyethylene non-sterile
at temperature indicated

(*)
polyetheretherketone

INFORMATION FOR DISTRIBUTORS OF DENTAL IMPLANTS:

INTENDED USE, RESPONSIBILITY, SURVEILLANCE

The 93/42EEC Directive on medical devices is the official reference that dictates the regulations for marketing medical devices. The directive provides
indications for all the phases of existence for the device (from the project phase through the traceability system, and surveillance), and it identifies all
the characters who have to comply with the directive itself, which includes not only the manufactures, but also the distributors, the buyers, and even the
users. As for the responsibilities of the single competence, Leone S.p.A. recommends to its direct clients, dental depots and exclusive dealers to follow
and maintain the indications, warnings, and information for the univocal identification of the medical devices, as provided by the manufacturer on the
labels, during all the marketing phases. With specific regard to Class IIB implantable products, all dental depots and exclusive dealers of Leone S.p.A.
are required to keep records of the distribution of medical devices as of traceability available for verification, in case of need to trace back a product or
its user in a univocal way.

125
 information and contacts www.leone.it

HOW TO REACH LEONE

BY AIRPLANE
from the Peretola airport “A. Vespucci”, five minutes by taxi.

BY CAR
- from the highway “Autostrada del Sole”, exit Firenze Nord, in the
direction of Florence,
- along the highway A11, exit Sesto Fiorentino, on your right side
the Novotel and IBIS Hotel can be seen.
- At the second traffic circle, turn on the first exit on the right
(McDonald’s).
Coordinate GPS: +43° 48’ 4.85” N, +11° 11’ 0.23” E

BY TRAIN
from the central station “Santa Maria Novella”, take bus no. 30,
get off in Via Pratese near the car dealer Volkswagen.
Via Ponte a Quaracchi 50

Call +39.055.3044620 or send an e-mail message to

info@leone.it for further information on Leone products
or a visit to our factory.
You can also visit our web-site: www. leone.it

Leone s.p.a. does not assume risk and liability resulting from the use of the products listed in this catalogue. Since they are intended for implanto-prosthetic use only, their use has to be restricted
to skilled and licensed professionals, who will be held the sole responsible for the construction or the application of any implanto-prosthetic appliance partially or fully manufactured
with the above mentioned products. All Leone products are designed and manufactured for single use and once removed from the patient’s mouth, must be disposed of properly.
Leone s.p.a. disclaims any liability for the spread of disease or personal injury caused by reuse.

All rights reserved. No part of this catalogue may be reproduced in any form.
Due to continuing product improvements, Leone s.p.a. reserves the right to discontinue products or change the design and materials of products without notice.

Layout and realization by: Graphic department of Leone S.p.a - Printed by: ABC TIPOGRAFIA s.r.l. Sesto Fiorentino

126
www.leone.it

127
 www.leone.it

128
PRODUCT CATALOG
TEAMWORK...

YOUR SUCCESS IS OUR SUCCESS

TABLE OF CONTENTS...
OUR STORY 4 CAD/CAM DIGITAL WORKFLOW 36
Message from the Founder Dr. Ole T. Jensen .......................................... 5 Digital Scan Body(s) & Analogs ..................................................................... 38
Step into a World of Precision ....................................................................... 6 Ti-Blanks & Imagine USA Milling Center...................................................... 39
Precision Manufacturing Workflow .............................................................. 9 Standard & Multi-Unit Ti-Bases ...................................................................... 40
An Implant System that Checks All the Boxes ....................................... 10 Mini & Slim Ti-Bases ............................................................................................ 41
Doctor-Driven Company .................................................................................. 11
SURGICAL KITS, DRILLS & INSTRUMENTS 42
DENTAL IMPLANTS 12 Full Surgical Kit .................................................................................................... 44
Ultimate Precision Implant ULT™ Drill Sequence ................................... 14 Mini Surgical Kit ................................................................................................... 45
Ultimate Precision Implant ULT™ Diameters & Lengths ...................... 15 Full Drill Stopper Kit ........................................................................................... 46
Molecular Precision Implant MPI™ Drill Sequence .................................. 16 Drill Stopper Tube & Surgical Tube .............................................................. 47
Molecular Precision Implant MPI™ Diameters & Lengths ..................... 17 Drills .......................................................................................................................... 48
One-Piece Implant OPI™ Drill Sequence .................................................... 18 Drills .......................................................................................................................... 49
One-Piece Implant OPI™ Diameters & Lengths ....................................... 19 Surgical Instruments ........................................................................................... 50
Prosthetic Instruments ..................... ................................................................. 51
PROSTHETIC COMPONENTS 20
CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE 52
Healing Abutments ............................................................................................. 22
Temporary Abutments ...................................................................................... 24 Packaging ............................................................................................................... 54
Impression Copings & Analogs ...................................................................... 25 Customer Service.................................................................................................. 55
Straight Lab Prepable & Pre-Machined Anatomic Abutments ......... 26
Angulated Lab Prepable & Pre-Machined Anatomic Abutments .... 27
Straight Casting Abutments: CrCo, Plastic & Ti-Alloy .......................... 28
Angled Casting Abutments: Plastic ............................................................. 29
Straight Multi-Unit Abutments ....................................................................... 30
Angled Multi-Unit Abutments ....................................................................... 31
Overdenture Abutments: Liberator® ........................................................... 32
Overdenture Abutments: Ball ........................................................................ 33
3
“Legacy” Straight Abutments ....................................................................... 34
 OUR STORY

4
 “What Ditron does...they make the most accurate machined
parts in the world, for aerospace, for high performance cars
such as Tesla, Maserati, BMW, Mercedes Benz, F-1 Race Cars
AND they make the most accurate, well-fitting dental implants.
As the first doctor-driven dental company, with a world-class
advisory board, we are here to listen and provide you with
products and solutions that deliver consistent results, are easy
to use and backed by over 50 years of global precision research
and manufacturing. All this so you can achieve your practice
goals, whatever they may be, and provide your patients with
safe and reliable solutions to improve their quality of life.”

Ole T. Jensen, DDS, MS

Founder, Ditron Dental USA

5
STEP INTO OUR WORLD OF PRECISION...
Ditron Precision Ltd., a precision machining world leader and the parent company for Ditron
Dental and Ditron Dental USA was established in Israel in 1968.
The result of over 50 years of experience in the design, production and delivery of ultra-precise
mission critical products for the aerospace, aeronautical and automotive industries has now been
applied to dental implants.

Our products have been installed in some of the most extreme and challenging environments in
which failure is unacceptable, including Tesla, Daimler, Jaguar, F-1 Race Cars, Robert Bosch Corp,
BMW and Mercedes-Benz. With state-of-the-art technology and in-depth process control, we
attain production at single micron level accuracies and have been one of the leading companies
in the design, production and JIT “Just in Time” delivery of ultra-precise mission critical products.

The Ditron Dental USA dental implant system was designed as a 3rd generation system,
providing a unique combination of outstanding precision with unequaled clinical versatility.
The implant system includes the Molecular Precision Implant MPITM, the One-Piece Implant OPITM
and our flagship Ultimate Precision Implant ULTTM with the patented reverse concave neck and
micro-threads that together with the MolecuLockTM implant-abutment connection mitigate
component micro-movement and marginal bone loss associated with peri-implant disease.
The MolecuLockTM implant-abutment connection incorporates tight manufacturing tolerances in
three critical parameters: Mating Tolerances, Roundness and Surface Roughness.

The Ditron Dental USA dental implant system is the clinician’s choice for dentists who demand
LIFETIME WARRANTY exceptional PRECISION, DESIGN, QUALITY, VERSATILITY and INNOVATION (PDQVI) at a
Responsible price with a Lifetime Warranty.

6
MULTI-DISCIPLINARY TEAMWORK
We believe a multi-disciplinary approach is the best catalyst for innovation and have teamed
engineers, micro-machining specialists and top-notch clinicians to drive our research and
development of high-end dental implant-based solutions.
The long-term success of our dental implant system, allows the dental team to reconstruct a
patient’s teeth as close as possible to their natural dentition. We provide patients with a safe and
reliable solution to improve their well-being and quality of life, both functionally and esthetically
“same day”.

MILLING, SURFACE, INSPECTION, CLEANROOM & CERTIFICATION

All implant system components are made of biocompatible medical Grade 23 Ti-Alloy (Ti6Al4V
ELI). The specific Ti-Alloy used by Ditron Dental was chosen due to its superior properties i.e.,
high strength to weight ratio, very high corrosion resistance, high modulus of elasticity and
its excellent osseointegration capabilities. The properties include Tensile Strength (860 MPa
Minimum), Elongation (10%), O2 Content (0.13% Maximum) and Excellent Biocompatibility.

All dental implants are Al3O2 blasted and double thermally acid-etched, creating a micro-macro
morphology for assisted and accelerated osseointegration. High-purity cleaning is introduced to
ensure no foreign particles remain on the dental implant surface. The success or failure of new
bone growth is directly linked to the surface morphology and surface chemistry together with
the effective removal of contaminants.

All dental implants, prosthetic components and instruments undergo a comprehensive

internal testing and inspection process. This advanced quality assurance system aims to assure a
Zero-PPM “Zero Defects per Million Parts”. Outstanding precision and exceptional quality are an
essential part of our corporate DNA.
The dental implants, prosthetic components and instruments are then sent to our ISO 14644-1
“Class 7” compliant cleanroom facilities for packaging. The cleanroom has particle counts of less
than 1 per million/m3.
Ditron Dental is certified under EN ISO 9001:2008, SN EN ISO 13485:2012 MDD 93/42/EEC
Annex II and is authorized to use the CE mark on all Ditron Dental products. All products are 510
(k) cleared by the FDA. All rights are reserved. Warning: Only a licensed dentist should use these
products. 7
 “BUT QUALITY OF WORK CAN BE EXPECTED ONLY THROUGH
PERSONAL SATISFACTION, DEDICATION AND ENJOYMENT. IN OUR
PROFESSION, PRECISION AND PERFECTION ARE NOT A DISPENSABLE
LUXURY, BUT A SIMPLE NECESSITY.”
NIKLAUS WIRTH

8
PRECISION MANUFACTURING WORKFLOW...

9
AN IMPLANT SYSTEM THAT CHECKS ALL THE BOXES...

PRECISION
Art & Science Intersect with Aerospace Accuracy for Integrated Biomechanical Excellence
• Born from over 50-years of In-house Experience: Aerospace and automotive precision engineering, where failure
is not an option.
• MolecuLockTM Implant-Abutment Connection: Minimize micromovement under mechanical load reducing
microgaps, microleakage and the colonization of bacteria, that can lead to marginal bone loss and peri-implant
disease
• Single Micron Accuracy: Delivering Zero-PPM “Zero Defects per Million Parts”

DESIGN
Ongoing Commitment to Research and Development is Paramount to Provide Revolutionary Innovation while
Raising the Clinical Standard of Excellence
• Reverse Concave Neck (RCN): Preserves marginal bone and peri-implant soft tissue
• Double Stressless Sharp Threads (DSST): Enhanced initial stability regardless the bone type
• Helico Apical-Coronal Slots: Accelerated and assisted osseointegration
• Single 2.45 mm Internal Hex Connection: Shared across ALL implant diameters and lengths. NO NP, RP or WP

10
THE FIRST DOCTOR-DRIVEN DENTAL IMPLANT COMPANY...

Bernee Dunson, DDS Brett L. Ferguson, DDS Jeffrey Ganeles, DMD Curtis E. Jansen, DDS John C. Kois, DMD, MSD

Pamela Maragliano-Muniz, DMD Robert Margeas, DMD Robert J. Miller, DDS Simon Oh, DDS Grant Olson, DDS

Stephen Parel, DDS Lou Shuman, DMD Dennis P. Tarnow, DDS Ervin Weiss, DMD
11
 DENTAL IMPLANTS

12
ULTTM MPITM OPITM

13
ULTIMATE PRECISION IMPLANT ULTTM...

Ø 3.75 mm Ø 4.2 mm Ø 5.0 mm Ø 6.0 mm

DRILLING PROTOCOL: Bone Type I & II RPM Bone Type III & IV RPM
• Use sharp drills with sufficient irrigation and Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
an in-and-out drilling motion. Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
Ø 3.75 mm
• Use the drills in successively increasing sizes. Ø 2.8 mm 500-700 Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
• Drilling procedures should be performed Ø 3.2 mm 200-400
at a maximum 800-1300 RPM. The RPM Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
values for each drill are the manufactures Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
suggestions. Ø 4.2 mm Ø 2.8 mm 500-700 Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
• An additional 1 mm must be added to the drill Ø 3.2 mm 400-700 Ø 3.2 mm 400-700
length to account for the angled cutting tip. Ø 3.8 mm 200-400
• A countersink should be used if the Type Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
I/II Bone protocol is not adequate to Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
fully seat the implant without exceeding the Ø 2.8 mm 500-700 Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
recommended insertion torque. Ø 5.0 mm
Ø 3.2 mm 400-700 Ø 3.2 mm 400-700
INSERTION TORQUE: Ø 3.8 mm 400-600 Ø 3.8 mm 400-600
• 60 Ncm for implants diameter 3.75 mm and Ø 4.5 mm 200-400
above. Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
Ø 2.8 mm 500-700 Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
Ø 3.2 mm 400-700 Ø 3.2 mm 400-700
Ø 6.0 mm
Ø 3.8 mm 400-600 Ø 3.8 mm 400-600
Ø 4.5 mm 400-600 Ø 4.5 mm 400-600
Ø 5 mm 300-500 Ø 5 mm 300-500
Ø 5.5 mm 200-400
14
15
MOLECULAR PRECISION IMPLANT MPITM...

Ø 3.3 mm Ø 3.5 mm Ø 3.75 mm Ø 4.2 mm Ø 5.0 mm Ø 6.0 mm

MECHANICAL STRESS TESTING: Ø 3.3 mm Bone Type I & II RPM Bone Type III & IV RPM
• Static: Average of 773 N Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
Ø 3.3 mm Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
• Dynamic: 5 Million Cycles with Fatigue Limit Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
of 320 N Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
• Maximum: Max Endured Load of 1,072 N Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
Ø 3.5 mm Ø 2.8 mm 500-700 Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
DRILLING PROTOCOL:
Ø 3.2 mm 200-400
• Use sharp drills with sufficient irrigation and Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
an in-and-out drilling motion. Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
• Use the drills in successively increasing sizes. Ø 3.75 mm Ø 2.8 mm 500-700 Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
• Drilling procedures should be performed Ø 3.2 mm 200-400
Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
at a maximum 800-1300 RPM. The RPM Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
values for each drill are the manufactures Ø 4.2 mm Ø 2.8 mm 500-700 Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
suggestions. Ø 3.2 mm 400-700 Ø 3.2 mm 400-700
• An additional 1 mm must be added to the drill Ø 3.8 mm 200-400
length to account for the angled cutting tip. Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
• A countersink should be used if the Type Ø 2.8 mm 500-700 Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
I/II Bone protocol is not adequate to Ø 5.0 mm Ø 3.2 mm 400-700 Ø 3.2 mm 400-700
fully seat the implant without exceeding the Ø 3.8 mm 400-600 Ø 3.8 mm 400-600
recommended insertion torque. Ø 4.5 mm 200-400
Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
INSERTION TORQUE: Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
• 60 Ncm for implants diameter 3.75 mm and Ø 2.8 mm 500-700 Ø 2.8 mm 500-700
above. Ø 3.2 mm 400-700 Ø 3.2 mm 400-700
Ø 6.0 mm Ø 3.8 mm 400-600 Ø 3.8 mm 400-600
• 45 Ncm for implants diameter 3.3 and 3.5
Ø 4.5 mm 400-600 Ø 4.5 mm 400-600
mm. Ø 5 mm 300-500 Ø 5 mm 300-500
16 Ø 5.5 mm 200-400
17
ONE-PIECE IMPLANT OPITM...
DRILLING PROTOCOL:
• Use sharp drills with sufficient irrigation
and an in-and-out drilling motion.
• Use the drills in successively increasing
sizes.
• Drilling procedures should be performed
at a maximum 800-1300 RPM. The RPM
values for each drill are the manufactures
suggestions.
• An additional 1 mm must be added to
the drill length to account for the angled TSQK-200340
cutting tip.
• A countersink should be used if the Type
I/II Bone protocol is not adequate to
fully seat the implant without exceeding
Every OPI implant is provided with a plastic carrier for easy
the recommended insertion torque.
handling and removal from the titanium sleeve.
INSERTION TORQUE:
A TSQK-200340 OPI Short Hand & Rachet Key Driver (21
• 45 Ncm for implants diameter 3.0 and 3.3 Ø 3.0 mm Ø 3.3 mm
mm long) is required for final implant placement.
mm.

Bone Type I & II RPM Bone Type III & IV RPM

Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
Ø 3.0 mm Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
Ø 2.5 mm 700-900
Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500 Ø 1.9 mm 1200-1500
Ø 2 mm 900-1200 Ø 2 mm 900-1200
Ø 3.3 mm
Ø 2.5 mm 700-900 Ø 2.5 mm 700-900
Ø 2.8 mm 400-700

18
19
PROSTHETIC COMPONENTS

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

CrCo BURNOUT INSTRUCTIONS
• Burnout material: Polyoxymethylene
• Set the burnout temperature per
the instructions of the casting metal
supplier
• Keep the ring mold at burnout
temperature for a minimum of 1 hour
• Do not overheat metal casting by
staying in the range of the casting
metal company to avoid porosity
• Use CrCo Metal Alloy
• Cast as you would normally with a
room temperature cool down
28
PLASTIC BURNOUT
INSTRUCTIONS
• Set the burnout temperature
per the instructions of the
casting metal supplier
• Keep the ring mold at burnout
temperature for a minimum of
1 hour
• Cast as you would normally
with a room temperature cool
down
TI-ALLOY BURNOUT INSTRUCTIONS
• Burnout material: Polyoxymethylene
• Set the burnout temperature per the
instructions of the casting metal supplier
• Keep the ring mold at burnout temperature
for a minimum of 1 hour
• Do not overheat metal casting by staying in
the range of the casting metal company to
avoid porosity
• Use Ti-Alloy
• Cast as you would normally with a room
temperature cool down
 PLASTIC BURNOUT INSTRUCTIONS
• Set the burnout temperature per the
instructions of the casting metal supplier
• Keep the ring mold at burnout temperature
for a minimum of 1 hour
• Cast as you would normally with a room
temperature cool down

29
 PLASTIC BURNOUT INSTRUCTIONS
• Set the burnout temperature per
the instructions of the casting metal
supplier
• Keep the ring mold at burnout
temperature for a minimum of 1 hour
• Cast as you would normally with a
room temperature cool down
30
 PLASTIC BURNOUT INSTRUCTIONS
• Set the burnout temperature per
the instructions of the casting metal
supplier
• Keep the ring mold at burnout
temperature for a minimum of 1 hour
• Cast as you would normally with a
room temperature cool down

31
32
33
 PLASTIC BURNOUT INSTRUCTIONS
• Set the burnout temperature per
the instructions of the casting metal
supplier
• Keep the ring mold at burnout
temperature for a minimum of 1 hour
• Cast as you would normally with a
room temperature cool down

34
GREAT FOR AEROSPACE...

EVEN BETTER FOR YOUR PATIENTS 35

CAD/CAM DIGITAL WORKFLOW

36
SCAN DESIGN CREATE

37
38
39
40
41
 SURGICAL KITS, DRILLS
& INSTRUMENTS

42
43
 SURGICAL KITS
FULL SURGICAL KIT

FULL SURGICAL KIT: FSBOX001

FULL SURGICAL CARBON DRILL KIT: FSBOX-001C

STAINLESS STEEL DRILLS STAINLESS STEEL INSTRUMENTS IMPLANT INSERTION

• MARKING DRILL Ø 1.9 mm L 16 mm: DRM19-300419 COUNTERSINK
• PILOT DRILL Ø 2 mm L 16 mm: DRP20-300420
• TWIST DRILL Ø 2.5 mm L 16 mm: DRT25-300425
• TWIST DRILL Ø 2.8 mm L 16 mm: DRT28-300428
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.2 mm L 16 mm: DRT32-300432
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.8 mm L 16 mm: DRT38-300438
• TWIST DRILL Ø 4.5 mm L 16 mm: DRT45-300445
• TWIST DRILL Ø 5.0 mm L 16 mm: DRT50-300450
CARBON COATED DRILLS
• PILOT DRILL Ø 2 mm L 16 mm: PD200L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 2.5 mm L 16 mm: TD250L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 2.8 mm L 16 mm: TD280L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.2 mm L 16 mm: TD320L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.8 mm L 16 mm: TD380L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 4.5 mm L 16 mm: TD450L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 5.0 mm L 16 mm: TD500L16C
44
• SHORT HAND & RACHET KEY 2.45 mm HEX/1.25 mm CONICAL HEX L 26 mm: THKS-200290
• Ø 3.75/4.2 mm: • LONG HAND & RACHET KEY 2.45 mm HEX/1.25 mm CONICAL HEX L 29 mm: THKL-200300
DRCS-300510 • SHORT MOTOR INSERTION INSTRUMENT 2.45 mm HEX/1.25 mm CONICAL HEX L 23 mm: TMAS-200250
• Ø 5-6 mm: • LONG MOTOR INSERTION INSTRUMENT 2.45 mm HEX/1.25 mm CONICAL HEX L 26.5 mm: TMAL-200260
DRCW-300520
INSTRUMENTS ABUTMENT INSERTION
CARBON COATED • SHORT HAND KEY 1.25 mm HEX L 22 mm: THSS-200210
COUNTERSINK • LONG HAND KEY 1.25 mm HEX L 28 mm: THSL-200220
• Ø 3.75/4.2 mm: • SHORT HAND & RACHET KEY 1.25 mm HEX: TRAS-200230
• LONG HAND & RACHET KEY 1.25 mm HEX: TRAL-200240
CD3.75X4.2C
• SHORT MOTOR ADAPTER FOR 1.25 mm HEX L 22 mm: TMAS-200270
• Ø 5-6 mm:
• LONG MOTOR ADAPTER FOR 1.25 mm HEX L 30 mm: TMAL-200280
CD5.0X6.0C
INSTRUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS
• PARALLEL PINS Ø 2-3 mm L 24 mm: TPP-200330
• DRILL EXTENDER L 29 mm: DREX-300500
• DEPTH PROBE: TDP-200320
• RACHET WRENCH: RW-200311
 SURGICAL KITS
MINI SURGICAL KIT

MINI SURGICAL KIT: MSBOX002

MINI SURGICAL CARBON DRILL KIT: MSBOX002C

STAINLESS STEEL DRILLS STAINLESS STEEL INSTRUMENTS IMPLANT INSERTION

• MARKING DRILL Ø 1.9 mm L 16 mm: DRM19-300419 COUNTERSINK
• PILOT DRILL Ø 2 mm L 16 mm: DRP20-300420
• TWIST DRILL Ø 2.5 mm L 16 mm: DRT25-300425
• TWIST DRILL Ø 2.8 mm L 16 mm: DRT28-300428
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.2 mm L 16 mm: DRT32-300432
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.8 mm L 16 mm: DRT38-300438
CARBON COATED DRILLS
• PILOT DRILL Ø 2 mm L 16 mm: PD200L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 2.5 mm L 16 mm: TD250L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 2.8 mm L 16 mm: TD280L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.2 mm L 16 mm: TD320L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.8 mm L 16 mm: TD380L16C
• SHORT HAND & RACHET KEY 2.45 mm HEX/1.25 mm CONICAL HEX L 26 mm: THKS-200290
• Ø 3.75/4.2 mm: • LONG HAND & RACHET KEY 2.45 mm HEX/1.25 mm CONICAL HEX L 29 mm: THKL-200300
DRCS-300510 • SHORT MOTOR INSERTION INSTRUMENT 2.45 mm HEX/1.25 mm CONICAL HEX L 23 mm: TMAS-200250
• LONG MOTOR INSERTION INSTRUMENT 2.45 mm HEX/1.25 mm CONICAL HEX L 26.5 mm: TMAL-200260
CARBON COATED
COUNTERSINK INSTRUMENTS ABUTMENT INSERTION
• Ø 3.75/4.2 mm: • SHORT HAND & RACHET KEY 1.25 mm HEX: TRAS-200230
• LONG HAND & RACHET KEY 1.25 mm HEX: TRAL-200240
CD3.75X4.2C
• SHORT MOTOR ADAPTER FOR 1.25 mm HEX L 22 mm: TMAS-200270
• LONG MOTOR ADAPTER FOR 1.25 mm HEX L 30 mm: TMAL-200280
INSTRUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS
• DRILL EXTENDER L 29 mm: DREX-300500
• RACHET WRENCH (LOCATED IN THE BOTTOM OF THE TRAY): RW-200311 45
 SURGICAL KITS
FULL DRILL STOPPER KIT

FULL DRILL STOPPER KIT: DISKIT

FULL CARBON DRILL STOPPER KIT: DISKIT-C

STAINLESS STEEL DRILLS STAINLESS STEEL DRILLS CONTINUED CARBON COATED CONTINUED
• MARKING DRILL Ø 1.9 mm L 16 mm: DRM19-300419 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 11.5mm: DRIS-280L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 8 mm: TD380L8SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 6 mm: DPIS-200L06 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 11.5 mm: DRIS-320L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 8 mm: TD450L8SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 6 mm: DRIS-250L06 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 11.5 mm: DRIS-380L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 10 mm: PD200L10SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 6 mm: DRIS-280L06 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 11.5 mm: DRIS-450L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 10 mm: TD250L10SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 6 mm: DRIS-320L06 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 13 mm: DPIS-200L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 10 mm: TD280L10SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 6 mm: DRIS-380L06 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 13 mm: DRIS-250L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 10 mm: TD320L10SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 6 mm: DRIS-450L06 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 13 mm: DRIS-280L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 10 mm: TD380L10SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 8 mm: DPIS-200L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 13 mm: DRIS-320L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 10 mm: TD450L10SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 8 mm: DRIS-250L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 13 mm: DRIS-380L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 11.5 mm: PD200L11.5SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 8 mm: DRIS-280L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 13 mm: DRIS-450L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 11.5 mm: TD250L11.5SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 8 mm: DRIS-320L08 CARBON COATED • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 11.5mm: TD280L11.5SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 8 mm: DRIS-380L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 11.5 mm: TD320L11.5SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 6 mm: PD200L6SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 8 mm: DRIS-450L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 11.5 mm: TD380L11.5SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 6 mm: TD250L6SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 10 mm: DPIS-200L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 11.5 mm: TD450L11.5SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 6 mm: TD280L6SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 10 mm: DRIS-250L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 6 mm: TD320L6SC • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 13 mm: PD200L13SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 10 mm: DRIS-280L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 6 mm: TD380L6SC • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 13 mm: TD250L13SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 10 mm: DRIS-320L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 6 mm: TD450L6SC • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 13 mm: TD280L13SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 10 mm: DRIS-380L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 13 mm: TD320L13SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 8 mm: PD200L8SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 10 mm: DRIS-450L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 13 mm: TD380L13SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 8 mm: TD250L8SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 11.5 mm: DPIS-200L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 4.5 mm L 13 mm: TD450L13SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 8 mm: TD280L8SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 11.5 mm: DRIS-250L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 8 mm: TD320L8SC

46
 SURGICAL KITS
D-TUBE & SURGICAL TUBE

SURGICAL TUBE: MMBOX-003

STAINLESS STEEL DRILLS: D-TUBE
SURGICAL CARBON DRILL TUBE: MMBOX-003C
CARBON COATED DRILLS: DC-TUBE

STAINLESS STEEL DRILLS CARBON COATED INSTRUMENTS

• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 8 mm: DPIS-200L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 8 mm: PD200L8SC • LONG HAND & RACHET KEY 2.45 mm HEX/1.25 mm CONICAL HEX
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 8 mm: DRIS-250L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 8 mm: TD250L8SC (IMPLANT INSERTION): THKL-200300
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 8 mm: DRIS-280L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 8 mm: TD280L8SC • LONG HAND & RACHET KEY 1.25 mm HEX
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 8 mm: DRIS-320L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 8 mm: TD320L8SC (ABUTMENT INSERTION): TRAL-200240
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 8 mm: DRIS-380L08 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 8 mm: TD380L8SC • SHORT RACHET WRENCH: SRW-200312
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 10 mm: DPIS-200L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 10 mm: PD200L10SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 10 mm: DRIS-250L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 10 mm: TD250L10SC
STAINLESS STEEL DRILLS
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 10 mm: DRIS-280L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 10 mm: TD280L10SC • MARKING DRILL Ø 1.9 mm L 16 mm: DRM19-300419
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 10 mm: DRIS-320L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 10 mm: TD320L10SC • PILOT DRILL Ø 2 mm L 16 mm: DRP20-300420
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 10 mm: DRIS-380L10 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 10 mm: TD380L10SC • TWIST DRILL Ø 2.8 mm L 16 mm: DRT28-300428
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.2 mm L 16 mm: DRT32-300432
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 11.5 mm: DPIS-200L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 11.5 mm: PD200L11.5SC
• TWIST DRILL Ø 3.8 mm L 16 mm: DRT38-300438
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 11.5 mm: DRIS-250L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 11.5 mm: TD250L11.5SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 11.5mm: DRIS-280L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 11.5mm: TD280L11.5SC CARBON COATED DRILLS
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 11.5 mm: DRIS-320L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 11.5 mm: TD320L11.5SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 11.5 mm: DRIS-380L11 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 11.5 mm: TD380L11.5SC • PILOT DRILL Ø 2 mm L 16 mm: PD200L16C
• TWIST DRILL Ø 2.8 mm L 16 mm: TD280L16C
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 13 mm: DPIS-200L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2 mm L 13 mm: PD200L13SC • TWIST DRILL Ø 3.2 mm L 16 mm: TD320L16C
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 13 mm: DRIS-250L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.5 mm L 13 mm: TD250L13SC • TWIST DRILL Ø 3.8 mm L 16 mm: TD380L16C
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 13 mm: DRIS-280L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 2.8 mm L 13 mm: TD280L13SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 13 mm: DRIS-320L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.2 mm L 13 mm: TD320L13SC
• DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 13 mm: DRIS-380L13 • DRILL WITH INTEGRAL STOPPER Ø 3.8 mm L 13 mm: TD380L13SC 47
48
49
50
51
 CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE

52
53
PACKAGING...

Implant Type
SKU/Catalog Number
Implant Diameter & Length

Sterilized Using Irradiation

Batch Code
Manufacture Date Expiration Date
Ditron Dental Products Do Not Use if Sterile
with the CE Mark fulfill Package is Compromised
the Requirements of the
Medical Device Directive
93/42/EEC
The dental implants are packaged in an ISO “Class
7” Clean Room in rectangular boxes allowing for
convenient storage.
The color-coded seal on the top of each box
allows for quick identification of the dental implant IMPLANT
diameter and length. COLOR
The back label on the box includes the Implant CODING
Type, Catalog Number, Diameter & Length, Batch
Code, Manufacture Date, Expiration Date and CE
Mark. Each dental implant and cover screw are
supplied in a sealed vial inside the rectangular box.
54
CUSTOMER SUPPORT...
WELCOME TO OUR WORLD OF PRECISION
Ditron Dental USA is a “doctor driven” company with guidance provided by our unparalleled group of advisory board members. We offer
customer-centered service and support through our experienced team of sales professionals, customer service concierges and a website for
dental professionals including our online store. We offer a broad range of educational and training events including our Clinical Champion
mentoring program.
CUSTOMER SERVICE
Our customer service concierges are ready to help you Monday
through Friday from 8 AM to 5 PM PST. They can assist you with
a variety of services from answering product questions, taking your
order or assist you with registering and navigating the online store.
You can reach our customer service concierges two ways:
• 844.4DI.TRON (434.8766)
• info@ditrondentalusa.com
We look forward to assisting you and welcoming you to our Ditron
Dental USA family.
RETURN POLICY & COMPREHENSIVE LIFETIME WARRANTY
Ditron Dental USA provides the Buyer, listed on the Order Form,
with a 30-day product exchange on any unmarked and unopened
items. Proof of purchase is required and the item must be returned
in the original packaging. Return-Exchanges are subject to a 20%
restocking fee.
Ditron Dental USA provides a lifetime warranty for all its dental
implants and prosthetic components when used in accordance with
the supplied Instructions for Use (IFU) and the company’s protocols.
For more detailed information regarding these policies, visit the online
store or ask your sales professional or customer service concierge for
a copy.
844.4DI.TRON (434.8766)
ONLINE STORE
All Ditron Dental USA dental implants, prosthetic components,
surgical kits, drills and instruments can be ordered online 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week. Products are organized by category with
filters to help you quickly locate the product(s) you require. There
is a search tool if you aren’t search where to look. Easily add the
products to your shopping cart including the quantities of each and
check out. We provide 2-day standard shipping unless you need
something next day for which there is an up-charge.
All orders are archived for easy lookup, review and printing while you
are visiting the online store.
Not ready to place an order yet? Register online and one of our sales
professionals and/or customer service concierges will contact you
within 24 hours.
Visit: https://order.ditrondentalusa.com/
TRAINING & EDUCATION
We offer a variety of informational online webinars together with
virtual and live hands-on courses.
Our Clinical Champions are located throughout the US and are ready
to mentor you with product information, case planning and other
clinical questions.
Visit: https://ditrondentalusa.com/
55
DITRON DENTAL USA
555 Corporate Drive, Suite 160
Ladera Ranch, CA 92694
P: 844.4DI.TRON (434.8766)
E: info@ditrondentalusa.com
Online Store: www.order.ditrondentalusa.com/login
W: www.ditrondentalusa.com
DITRON DENTAL
Division of Ditron Precision Ltd.
2 Haofe St. South Ind. Zone
POB 5010 Ashkelon 78150 Israel
P: 972.8.6711884
E: info@ditrondental.com
W: www.ditrondental.com
Ditron Dental is certified under EN ISO 9001:2008, SN EN ISO 13485:2012
MDD 93/42/EEC Annex II and is authorized to use the CE mark on all Ditron
Dental products. All products are 510 (k) cleared by the FDA. All rights are
reserved. Warning: Only a licensed dentist should use these products.
© DITRON DENTAL USA 2021
Rev. B 210801
 Product Catalog
For Site Preparation & Surgical Technologies
 Table Of Contents
Introduction Site Preparation Technologies
Company Overview i Product Overview 17
Implant & Abutment System Connections ii DU1000 Surgical Drilling Unit 19
Implant Body & Connection Types iv OSSEOCISION® Surgical Drilling Unit 20
Certain® Platform Switching Implants v Tapered Navigator® System For Guided Surgery 21
Surface Technologies Parallel Walled Navigator System For Guided Surgery 25
The 3i T3® Implant Family vi Tapered Implant Surgical Kits 28
The NanoTite™ Implant Family vii Parallel Walled Surgical Kits 31
The OSSEOTITE® Implant Family vii ACT® Non-Irrigated Reusable Twist Drills 35
Top-Down Treatment Planning viii Surgical Drills
Drills, Quad Shaping Drills For Tapered Implants 35
Certain Internal Connection Implants Surgical Components
Handpiece Bone Profilers 36
Tapered Low Profile Abutment Bone Profilers 36
3i T3 With DCD® Platform Switched 1
Certain Manual Bone Profilers 36
3i T3 With DCD Non-Platform Switched 1
Bone Profiler Guide Pins 36
3i T3 Platform Switched 1
Bone Profiler Organizers & Kits 36
3i T3 Non-Platform Switched 1
Bone Taps, Dense Bone Taps For Tapered Implants 37
NanoTite Tapered Certain PREVAIL® 3
Depth/Direction Indicators For Tapered Implants,
NanoTite Tapered Certain 3
Direction Indicators, Mounts 38
OSSEOTITE Tapered Certain PREVAIL 4
Miscellaneous Instrumentation 39
Full OSSEOTITE Tapered Certain 4
Site Preparation Components
Parallel Walled Straight And Angled Osteotomes,
3i T3 With DCD Platform Switched 2 Summer Osteotomes 41
3i T3 With DCD Non-Platform Switched 2 Sinus Elevation, Trephine Burs 42
3i T3 Platform Switched 2
3i T3 Non-Platform Switched 2 Regenerative Technologies
NanoTite Certain PREVAIL 5 Product Overview 43
OSSEOTITE 2 Certain PREVAIL 5 Allografts
NanoTite Parallel Walled Certain 6 RegenerOss® Allograft 45
OSSEOTITE 2 Parallel Walled Certain 6 RegenerOss Allograft Putty 46
RegenerOss Allograft Putty Plus 46
External Hex Connection Implants Xenografts
Tapered Implants Endobon® Xenograft Granules 47
3i T3 Tapered With DCD 7 GBR Barriers
3i T3 Tapered 7 OsseoGuard® & OsseoGuard Flex® Membranes 47
NanoTite Tapered 7 Alloplasts
Full OSSEOTITE Tapered 8 Biogran® 47
OSSEOTITE Tapered 8 Autogenous
Safescraper® TWIST, R. Quétin Bone-Mill 47
Parallel Walled
3i T3 Parallel Walled With DCD 7
3i T3 Parallel Walled 7 Patient Education Products 48
NanoTite Parallel Walled 9
OSSEOTITE 2 Parallel Walled 9 Additional Information
Full OSSEOTITE Parallel Walled 10 Important Product Information For Dental Implants 49
OSSEOTITE Parallel Walled 10 Important Product Information For Restorative Products 50
Index 51
Healing Abutments Ordering Form 64
Ordering Information 66
Certain Internal Connection
Encode® Two-Piece 12
EP One-Piece
®
13
External Hex Connection
BellaTek® Encode Two-Piece 15
EP One-Piece 16
 Introduction

Company Overview
Providing Solutions – One Patient At A Time™

Mission Statement:
BIOMET 3i will be recognized as a global leader in the oral reconstruction marketplace.
We will achieve this through superior customer support and continuous product innovation.

Headquartered in Palm Beach Gardens, Florida, with
operations throughout the world, BIOMET 3i is one of
the leading companies in the oral reconstruction
market. Of equal importance, BIOMET 3i brings the
same innovation, high standards and comprehensive
approach to customer service, dental practice and
laboratory support and education.
BIOMET 3i pioneered the development of biologically
driven implants, winning worldwide acclaim for the
micro-textured OSSEOTITE® surface and then the nano-
scaled, Bone Bonding® NanoTite™Surface Implants.
The tradition of implant innovation continues with the
introduction of the 3i T3® Implant, a contemporary
hybrid that is designed for sustainable aesthetics.

BIOMET 3i offers one of implant dentistry’s most This spirit of innovation continues with the introduction
comprehensive lines of implants and abutments, of DIEM®2, a protocol to enable clinicians to pursue
augmented by a growing line of site preparation, digital, immediate provisionalization options for full arch
restorative and regenerative products. patient cases.

i
 Introduction
Implant & Abutment System Connections
Certain® Internal Connection
The internal connection aspect of the implant and abutment are designed
for ease of use and simplicity.

• QuickSeat® Connection: It Clicks! The Certain Implant and Abutment

Systems feature the QuickSeat Connection. This unique connection
produces an audible and tactile “click” that confirms placement of
Impression Copings and Abutments.

• Abutment fingers cause the “click” and also provide retention for the
prosthetic components in the implant before the screw is placed. A screw
is needed to fully seat the components when the restoration is being
tried in or definitively placed.

• The 6/12 hex inside the internal connection incorporates both a 6-point
single and a 12-point double hex. The 6-point single hex has two
functions: engaging the driver tip for mountless delivery during implant
placement and providing anti-rotation for all straight abutments.
The 12-point double hex provides 30º rotational positioning for pre-
angled abutments.

• Impression Copings: Pick-Up and Twist Lock™Transfer Copings are

available in the Certain Internal Connection design, in three EP®
(Emergence Profile) diameters and a straight diameter to match the
corresponding Healing Abutment. The Impression Copings also “click”
when properly seated. These copings have a different finger design that
engages 2mm internally into the implant, as compared to the abutment’s
design that engages 4mm deep into the implant. This shorter engagement
into the implant is important because it allows off-axis draw for implant
impressions that are divergent.

• Color-Coding: Certain Implants and all interfacing components are

(purple) (blue) (yellow) (green)
color-coded by restorative platform diameter for easy identification
and selection.
3.4mm 4.1mm 5mm 6mm

ii
 Introduction

Implant & Abutment System Connections

External Hex Connection
The external hex connection implant and abutment designs have been
widely used in implant dentistry.

• Gold Standard ZR (Zero Rotation) is a patented design incorporating

machined microstops within the corners of the hex in the abutment.
The design reduces horizontal rotation between the implant and
abutment. Gold Standard ZR is available on UCLA, GingiHue® and
Conical Abutments.

• The 12-point double hex, which is machined in the 15º Pre-Angled

GingiHue Abutment, provides rotational positioning in 30º increments
on the implant hex.

• Precise Abutment Placement: The ASYST Abutment Placement Tool

provides fingertip control for fast and easy abutment delivery. The
patented packaging design makes abutment placement easier because the
abutment is delivered sterile from the package directly to the implant site.
The abutment and abutment screw are packaged inside the plastic ASYST
seating device. The plastic seating device facilitates precise placement of
the abutment on the implant, thus reducing chair time. The ASYST Tool is
packaged with Low Profile, Standard and Conical Abutments.

• Impression Copings: Pick-Up and Twist Lock™ Transfer Copings are both
available in the external connection design in three EP® (Emergence
Profile) diameters and a straight diameter to match the corresponding
healing abutment. The patented Twist Lock design provides a more
accurate transfer of the implant connection as compared to other
transfer (closed tray) techniques. This unique Twist Lock feature provides
a series of undercuts to guide the coping into the impression, giving
stability to the impression coping/analog prior to pouring the impression.
As a result, the copings lock into orientation grooves upon clockwise
rotation, thereby allowing for a tactile sensation of resistance that ensures
an accurate hex transfer.

iii
 Introduction
Icon Descriptions:
The following icons are used to represent
Implant Body & Connection Types the connection type of the implant system:
Internal External

Internal Connection External Connection Certain® Internal Connection Tapered

Implants & External Hex Connection
Tapered Implants
Tapered Implants closely approximate the shape of a natural tooth root
with a thread design that produces an anchoring “bite in bone”
response. These implants are available in the 3i T3® Contemporary
Hybrid, NanoTite™and OSSEOTITE® Surface configurations.

Internal Connection External Connection

Certain Internal Connection Implants &
External Hex Connection Parallel Walled
Implants
Parallel Walled Implants feature a unique ICE™Self-Tapping Design.
These implants are available in the 3i T3 Contemporary Hybrid,
NanoTite and OSSEOTITE Surface configurations.

iv
 Introduction

Certain® Platform Switching Implant

Centralized IAJ:
Moves microgap in from shoulder
and centralizes occlusal forces.
Full Surface Treatment:
Elevates the bone loading
surface for maximum BIC.
Overview
created an implant system that is designed to help
clinicians in the pursuit of crestal bone preservation. The Certain
Platform Switching Implant features integrated platform switching,
which incorporates a coronal bevel design that medializes the
Implant Abutment Junction (IAJ). This feature is available on 3i T3®,
OSSEOTITE® and NanoTite™ Implants unless otherwise noted.
The surface extends to the top of the collar where the
medialization of the implant begins, creating a continuous
bone loading surface.

The Certain Platform Switching Implant offers the Certain

QuickSeat® Connection. This provides the clinician with an
Abutment QuickSeat
audible and tactile click that confirms the abutment is properly
Connection
seated. The double hex allows for as many as 12 rotational
positions, which is ideal for angled abutments.

The Certain Platform Switching Implant’s prosthetic table is

.45mm ‚ appropriately color-coded to ensure proper matching of the
4.1mm
‚
15°
‚
‚
‚ 5mm
‚ ˜
Angle corresponding BIOMET 3i Abutments.

The Certain Platform Switching Implant is offered in two

different implant configurations:
Tapered
Tapered Certain Platform Switching
Implant
Incorporates all of the design features of a platform switching
implant with a tapered design, which approximates the shape of
a natural tooth root. The innovative thread angle, depth and
pitch produce an anchoring “bite in bone” response for
establishing primary stability.
Parallel Walled

Parallel Walled Certain Platform

Switching Implant
The straight collar design incorporates platform switching using a
parallel walled implant.

v
 Introduction

Surface Technologies
The 3i T3® Implant Family
Fine micron features The 3i T3 Implant represents the most recent advanced dental implant
on the implant collar surface technology since the introduction of the NanoTite™Implant in
(1 - 3 microns) via dual
2007. This latest surface technology is designed to deliver aesthetic
acid-etching (DAE)
results through tissue preservation.

A contemporary hybrid surface is provided by complex multi-surface

topography. In preclinical studies*, the 3i T3 with DCD® Surface
demonstrated increased integration strength throughout the healing
phase as compared to less complex surface topographies.1

Osseointegration is achieved with initial bone-to-implant contact, a

major contributor to the implant’s stability.2 The specifications of the
3i T3 Implant and surgical instrumentation are held to rigorous
tolerances to provide a closely integrated implant-to-osteotomy fit,
creating a dental implant system designed for primary stability.
Coarse micron feature:
(10+ microns) via resorbable
calcium phosphate media blast The seal integrity is provided by a stable, tight implant/abutment
interface that can minimize abutment micromotion and reduce the
potential for microleakage.3 The seal strength is designed to reduce
Fine micron feature:
(1 - 3 microns) via dual microleakage through exacting interface tolerances and maximized
acid-etching (DAE) on top clamping forces.
of the blasted surface
The Gold-Tite® Screw increases implant/abutment
Option for nano-scale features along the full
length of the implant. clamping force by 113% as compared to a non-coated screw with the
Certain® Implant.4 The patented Gold-Tite Surface lubrication allows the
screw to rotate further, increasing clamping force and maximizing
abutment stability.5 Implants with integrated platform switching medialize
the implant/abutment junction (IAJ) inward, creating a biologic width
between connective tissue and the IAJ, helping to maintain bone levels.6

1. Davies JE†, Ajami E, Moineddin R, et al. The role of different scale ranges of surface implant topography on the stability of the bone/implant interface.
Biomaterials 2013;34(14):3535-3546. Epub 2013 Feb 14.
2. Meredith N. Assessment of implant stability as a prognostic determinant. Int J Prosthodont. 1998 Sep-Oct;11(5):491-501.
3. Gubbi P†, Suttin Z†, Towse R†. Microgap analysis at the implant-abutment interface of various dental implant systems. Poster Presentation (P-98): Academy of
Osseointegration 28th Annual Meeting, March 2013, Tampa, Florida, USA.
4. Suttin Z††, Towse R††. Effect of abutment screw design on implant system seal performance. Presented at the European Association for Osseointegration, 20th
Annual Scientific Meeting; October 2012; Copenhagen, Denmark. http://biomet3i.com/Pdf/Posters/P-450_Effect_of_Screw_Design_on_Implant_Seal.pdf
5. Byrne D, Jacobs S, O’Connell B, Houston F, Claffey N. Preloads generated with repeated tightening in three types of screws used in dental implant assemblies.
J. Prosthodont. 2006 May–Jun;15(3):164-171.
6. Lazzara R†, Porter SS. Platform switching: A new concept in implant dentistry for controlling post-restorative crestal bone levels. Int J Perio Rest Dent.
2006;26:9-17.
† JE Davies and R. Lazzara have financial relationships with BIOMET 3i LLC resulting from speaking engagements, consulting engagements and other retained
services.
†† Mr. Gubbi, Mr. Suttin and Mr. Towse contributed to the above research while employed by BIOMET 3i.
*Pre-clinical studies are not necessarily indicative of clinical results.

vi
 Introduction

Surface Technologies
The NanoTite™Implant Family
The NanoTite Implant is the patented OSSEOTITE® dual-acid-etched surface,
which is then further treated with a deposition of nanometer scale crystals of
calcium phosphate. This is known as the Discrete Crystalline Deposition or
DCD® Process. The surface treatment is a discrete crystalline deposition on the
OSSEOTITE Surface, not a plasma sprayed coating.

The synergistic effect of these two technologies, the OSSEOTITE Surface and the
NanoTite Surface at 20,000x DCD Process has demonstrated promising results in animal studies.* Because of
magnification this synergistic effect, a more complex micro-surface is created. Preclinical
studies* demonstrated that the NanoTite Surface treatment, when compared to
OSSEOTITE Control Implants, significantly improved the rate and extent of
bone-to-implant contact, resulting in statistically significant enhanced integration.1,2

For all NanoTite Configurations, wherever there is the dual-acid-etched

OSSEOTITE Surface, the DCD nano-scale calcium phosphate has been applied.

1. Mendes VC, Davies JE†. Discrete calcium phosphate nanocrystals enhance osteoconduction on titanium-based implant surfaces. Canadian Biomaterials Society.
25th Annual Meeting. May 26-28, 2006. Calgary, Alberta, Canada.
2. Mendes VC, Davies JE†. Discrete calcium phosphate nanocrystals render titanium surfaces bone-bonding. Int J Oral Maxillofac Implant. 2007;22:484.
*Pre-clinical studies are not necessarily indicative of clinical results.

The OSSEOTITE® Implant Family

The OSSEOTITE Implant features the patented dual-acid-etched
surface that is optimal for improving the clot/implant attachment, which may
increase platelet activation and red blood cell (rbc) agglomeration.1

For more than 15 years, with documentation from numerous global multicenter
clinical evaluations,2-9 the OSSEOTITE Surface has proven to be one of the most
predictable and well-researched surfaces ever. Clinical studies on the OSSEOTITE
OSSEOTITE Surface at 20,000x Surface document the benefits of increased contact osteogenesis, especially in poor
magnification quality bone.10

1. Park JY, Davies JE†. Red Blood Cell and Platelet Interactions with Titanium Implant Surfaces. Clinical Oral Implants Research. 2000:11:530-539.
2. Sullivan DY, Sherwood RL, Porter SS. Long-Term Performance of OSSEOTITE Implants: A 6-Year Clinical Follow-up. Compendium. April 2001; Vol. 22, No. 4.
3. Davarpanah M, Martinez H, Etienne D, Zabalegui I, Mattout P, Chiche F†, Michel J. A Prospective Multicenter Evaluation of 1,538 3i Implants: 1 to 5-year
Data. The International Journal of Oral & Maxillofacial Implants. 2002; Vol. 17, No. 6.
4. Feldman S, Boitel N, Weng D, Kohles SS, Stach RM†. Five-Year Survival Distributions of Short-Length (10mm or less) Machined-Surfaced and OSSEOTITE
Implants. Clinical Implant Dentistry and Related Research. 2004; Vol. 6, No. 1.
5. Sullivan D, Vincenzi G, Feldman S. Early Loading of OSSEOTITE Implants 2 Months After Placement in the Maxilla and Mandible: A 5-year Report. The
International Journal of Oral & Maxillofacial Implants. 2006; Vol. 20, No. 6.
6. Stach RM†, Kohles SS. A Meta-Analysis Examining the Clinical Survivability of Machined-Surfaced and OSSEOTITE Implants in Poor-Quality Bone. Implant
Dentistry. 2003; Vol. 12, No.1.
7. Testori T†, Wiseman L, Woolfe S, Porter SS. A Prospective Multicenter Clinical Study of the OSSEOTITE Implant: Four-Year Interim Report. The International
Journal of Oral & Maxillofacial Implants. 2001;16:193-200.
8. Gaucher H, Bentley K, Roy S, Head T, Blomfield J, Blondeau F, Nicholson L, Chehade A, Tardif N, Emery R†. A Multi-Centre Study of OSSEOTITE Implants
Supporting Mandibular Restorations: A 3-Year Report. Journal of the Canadian Dental Association. October 2001; Vol. 67, No. 9.
9. Testori T†, Fabbro MD, Feldman S, Vincenzi G, Sullivan D, Rossi R, Anitua E, Bianchi F, Francetti L, Weinstein RL. A Multicenter Prospective Evaluation of 2-
months Loaded OSSEOTITE Implants Placed in the Posterior Jaws: 3-year Follow-up Results. Clinical Oral Implants Research. 2002;13:154-161.
10. Stach RM††, Kohles SS. A Meta-Analysis Examining the Clinical Survivability of Machined-Surfaced and OSSEOTITE Implants In Poor Quality Bone. Implant
Dent 2003;12:87-96.

† F Chiche, JE Davies, R Emory and T Testori have financial relationships with BIOMET 3i LLC resulting from speaking engagements, consulting engagements and
other retained services.

†† RM Stach contributed to the above research while employed by BIOMET 3i.

vii
 Top-Down Treatment Planning
In its simplest form, top-down treatment planning
refers to a guideline whereby the desired restorative
result is considered first, leading to consideration of the
appropriate prosthetic platform and subsequent implant
selection based on bony anatomy and the size of the
missing tooth.
A top-down treatment planning methodology will provide
maximum biomechanical stability and allow for soft-tissue
flaring by utilizing an implant with a prosthetic platform
slightly smaller in diameter than the emergence diameter
of the tooth being replaced. The wide selection of
Implants allows clinicians to match the size
of the prosthetic platform to the restoration it will
eventually support, while allowing for different bone
volumes and anatomical features at the implant site.
Implant and healing abutment selections are based upon
the relationship of several key measurements:
• The emerging dimension of the crown in relation to
the diameter of the prosthetic platform of the implant
• The height and diameter of the intended restoration
at the tissue exit point
• The bone volume at the implant site in relation to the
diameter of the implant body
The Emergence Profile (EP®) Healing Abutment System
consists of healing abutments of various diameters and
heights for shaping the soft tissue to replicate the
geometry and gingival contours of natural dentition.

Implant Indications: Include both straight and pre-angled restorative components.

4mm(D) X 5mm(D) X 6mm(D) X
3.25mm(D) 3.75mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D) 3.4mm(P) 4.1mm(P) 5mm(P)
Anterior 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Posterior 4 4 4 4 4 4
NOTE: It is recommended that implants less than 4mm diameter not be placed in the posterior regions.

viii
 Top-Down Treatment Planning

6mm 6mm 4mm 4mm 5mm 3.25mm 5mm

8 8 5 5 5.5 5 7.5

Crown
Implant
Diameter Diameter Tapered
Implants

8 9 5 5 5.5 4 3.5

6mm 6mm 4mm 5mm 4mm 3.25mm 3.25mm

6mm 6mm 4mm 3.75mm 5mm 3.25mm 5mm

8 8 5 5 5.5 5 7.5

Implant
Diameter
Crown
Diameter Parallel Walled
Implants
8 9 5 5 5.5 4 3.5

6mm 6mm 4mm 5mm 4mm 3.25mm 3.25mm

ix
 Certain® Internal Connection Implants
Tapered
New!

3i T3® With DCD® Platform Switched 3i T3 With DCD Non-Platform Switched

Commercially Pure Titanium Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 5

Contemporary 4.1 5 6 3.4 4.1 5 6

Hybrid 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Surface

2.4 3.2 3.9 1.9 2.4 3.2 3.9

4mm(D) X 5mm(D) X 6mm(D) X

Length 3.4mm(P) 4mm(P) 5mm(P) 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)
8.5mm BNPT4385 BNPT5485 BNPT6585 BNST3285 BNST485 BNST585 BNST685
10mm BNPT4310 BNPT5410 BNPT6510 BNST3210 BNST410 BNST510 BNST610
11.5mm BNPT4311 BNPT5411 BNPT6511 BNST3211 BNST411 BNST511 BNST611
13mm BNPT4313 BNPT5413 BNPT6513 BNST3213 BNST413 BNST513 BNST613
15mm BNPT4315 BNPT5415 BNPT6515 BNST3215 BNST415 BNST515 BNST615

3i T3 Platform Switched 3i T3 Non-Platform Switched

Commercially Pure Titanium Commercially Pure Titanium
Length
8.5mm BOPT4385 BOPT5485 BOPT6585 BOST3285 BOST485 BOST585 BOST685
10mm BOPT4310 BOPT5410 BOPT6510 BOST3210 BOST410 BOST510 BOST610
11.5mm BOPT4311 BOPT5411 BOPT6511 BOST3211 BOST411 BOST511 BOST611
13mm BOPT4313 BOPT5413 BOPT6513 BOST3213 BOST413 BOST513 BOST613
15mm BOPT4315 BOPT5415 BOPT6515 BOST3215 BOST415 BOST515 BOST615

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50 IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50 ICSF60

Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500 IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500 ICS600

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
1
 Certain® Internal Connection Implants
Parallel Walled
New!

3i T3® With DCD® Platform Switched 3i T3 With DCD Non-Platform Switched

Commercially Pure Titanium Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 5

Contemporary 5 6 3.4 5 6
4.1 4.1
Hybrid
.5 .5 .5 1.15 1 1.25 1.25
Surface

2.8 3.1 4.1 2.5 2.8 3.1 4.1

4mm(D) X 5mm(D) X 6mm(D) X

Length 3.4mm(P) 4mm(P) 5mm(P) 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)
8.5mm BNPS4385 BNPS5485 BNPS6585 BNSS385 BNSS485 BNSS585 BNSS685
10mm BNPS4310 BNPS5410 BNPS6510 BNSS310 BNSS410 BNSS510 BNSS610
11.5mm BNPS4311 BNPS5411 BNPS6511 BNSS311 BNSS411 BNSS511 BNSS611
13mm BNPS4313 BNPS5413 BNPS6513 BNSS313 BNSS413 BNSS513 BNSS613
15mm BNPS4315 BNPS5415 BNPS6515 BNSS315 BNSS415 BNSS515 BNSS615
18mm — — — BNSS318 BNSS418 — —

3i T3 Platform Switched 3i T3 Non-Platform Switched

Commercially Pure Titanium Commercially Pure Titanium
Length
8.5mm BOPS4385 BOPS5485 BOPS6585 BOSS385 BOSS485 BOSS585 BOSS685
10mm BOPS4310 BOPS5410 BOPS6510 BOSS310 BOSS410 BOSS510 BOSS610
11.5mm BOPS4311 BOPS5411 BOPS6511 BOSS311 BOSS411 BOSS511 BOSS611
13mm BOPS4313 BOPS5413 BOPS6513 BOSS313 BOSS413 BOSS513 BOSS613
15mm BOPS4315 BOPS5415 BOPS6515 BOSS315 BOSS415 BOSS515 BOSS615
18mm — — — BOSS318 BOSS418 — —

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50 IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50 ICSF60

Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500 IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500 ICS600

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
2
 Certain® Internal Connection Implants
Tapered

NanoTite™ Tapered Certain PREVAIL®

Titanium Alloy
3.4 4.1 5

Full 4.1 5 6
NanoTite 1.25 1.25 1.25
Surface

2.4 3.2 3.9

Length 4/3mm(P) 5/4mm(P) 6/5mm(P)

8.5mm NIITP4385 NIITP5485 NIITP6585
10mm NIITP4310 NIITP5410 NIITP6510
11.5mm NIITP4311 NIITP5411 NIITP6511
13mm NIITP4313 NIITP5413 NIITP6513
15mm NIITP4315 NIITP5415 NIITP6515

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50

Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

NanoTite Tapered Certain

Titanium Alloy
3.4 4.1 5 6
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Modified
Hybrid
NanoTite
Surface 1.9 2.4 3.2 3.9

Length 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

8.5mm NINT3285 NINT485 NINT585 NINT685
10mm NINT3210 NINT410 NINT510 NINT610
11.5mm NINT3211 NINT411 NINT511 NINT611
13mm NINT3213 NINT413 NINT513 NINT613
15mm NINT3215 NINT415 NINT515 NINT615

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50 ICSF60

Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500 ICS600

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
3
 Certain® Internal Connection Implants
Tapered

OSSEOTITE® Tapered Certain PREVAIL®

Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 5

Full 4.1 5 6
OSSEOTITE 1.25 1.25 1.25
Surface

2.4 3.2 3.9

Length 4/3mm(P) 5/4mm(P) 6/5mm(P)

8.5mm XIITP4385 XIITP5485 XIITP6585
10mm XIITP4310 XIITP5410 XIITP6510
11.5mm XIITP4311 XIITP5411 XIITP6511
13mm XIITP4313 XIITP5413 XIITP6513
15mm XIITP4315 XIITP5415 XIITP6515

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50

Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

Full OSSEOTITE Tapered Certain

Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 5 6
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25

Full
OSSEOTITE
Surface
1.9 2.4 3.2 3.9

Length 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

8.5mm XIFNT3285 XIFNT485 XIFNT585 XIFNT685
10mm XIFNT3210 XIFNT410 XIFNT510 XIFNT610
11.5mm XIFNT3211 XIFNT411 XIFNT511 XIFNT611
13mm XIFNT3213 XIFNT413 XIFNT513 XIFNT613
15mm XIFNT3215 XIFNT415 XIFNT515 XIFNT615

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50 ICSF60

Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500 ICS600

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
4
 Certain® Internal Connection Implants
Parallel Walled

NanoTite™ Certain PREVAIL®

Titanium Alloy
3.4 4.1

Full 4.1 5
NanoTite .5 .5
Surface

2.6 3.1

Length 4/3mm(P) 5/4mm(P)

8.5mm NIIOS4385 NIIOS5485
10mm NIIOS4310 NIIOS5410
11.5mm NIIOS4311 NIIOS5411
13mm NIIOS4313 NIIOS5413
15mm NIIOS4315 NIIOS5415

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41
Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375*

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

Certain PREVAIL
Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 5

Full 4.1 5 6
OSSEOTITE .5 .5 .5
Surface

2.8 3.1 4.1

Length 4/3mm(P) 5/4mm(P) 6/5mm(P)

8.5mm XIIOS4385 XIIOS5485 XIIOS6585
10mm XIIOS4310 XIIOS5410 XIIOS6510
11.5mm XIIOS4311 XIIOS5411 XIIOS6511
13mm XIIOS4313 XIIOS5413 XIIOS6513
15mm XIIOS4315 XIIOS5415 XIIOS6515

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50

Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
5
 Certain® Internal Connection Implants
Parallel Walled

NanoTite™Parallel Walled Certain

Titanium Alloy

3.4 4.1 5 6
1.15 1 1.25 1.25
Modified
Hybrid
NanoTite
Surface
2.4 2.6 3.1 4.1

Length 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

8.5mm NIOSM385 NIOSS485 NIOSS585 NIOSS685
10mm NIOSM310 NIOSS410 NIOSS510 NIOSS610
11.5mm NIOSM311 NIOSS411 NIOSS511 NIOSS611
13mm NIOSM313 NIOSS413 NIOSS513 NIOSS613
15mm NIOSM315 NIOSS415 NIOSS515 NIOSS615
18mm NIOSM318 NIOSS418 N/A N/A

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50 ICSF60

Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500 ICS600

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

Parallel Walled Certain

Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 5 6
1.15 1 1.25 1.25
Full
OSSEOTITE
Surface

2.5 2.8 3.1 4.1

Length 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

8.5mm XIFOSM385 XIFOSS485 XIFOSS585 XIFOSS685
10mm XIFOSM310 XIFOSS410 XIFOSS510 XIFOSS610
11.5mm XIFOSM311 XIFOSS411 XIFOSS511 XIFOSS611
13mm XIFOSM313 XIFOSS413 XIFOSS513 XIFOSS613
15mm XIFOSM315 XIFOSS415 XIFOSS515 XIFOSS615

Cover Screw Flat

(included)

IMCSF34 ICSF41 ICSF50 ICSF60

Cover Screw 1mm(H) IMMCS1 ICS375* ICS500 ICS600

*Non-Flared 4.1mm(P) Cover Screw ICS400 is also available.

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
6
 External Hex Connection Implants
New! Tapered & Parallel Walled

3i T3® Tapered With DCD® 3i T3 Parallel Walled With DCD

Commercially Pure Titanium Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 5 6 4.1 4.1 5 6
3.4
2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7
.7 .7 .7 .7 .7
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
.7
1.15 .75 .7 .75
.7
.5
.7
.5
Contemporary
Hybrid
Surface

1.9 2.4 3.2 3.9 2.5 2.8 2.8 3.1 4.1

Length 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D) 3.25mm(D) 3.75mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)
6.5mm — — — — BNES365 BNES3765 BNES465 BNES565 BNES665
8.5mm BNET3285 BNET485 BNET585 BNET685 BNES385 BNES3785 BNES485 BNES585 BNES685
10mm BNET3210 BNET410 BNET510 BNET610 BNES310 BNES3710 BNES410 BNES510 BNES610
11.5mm BNET3211 BNET411 BNET511 BNET611 BNES311 BNES3711 BNES411 BNES511 BNES611
13mm BNET3213 BNET413 BNET513 BNET613 BNES313 BNES3713 BNES413 BNES513 BNES613
15mm BNET3215 BNET415 BNET515 BNET615 BNES315 BNES3715 BNES415 BNES515 BNES615
18mm — — — — BNES318 BNES3718 BNES418 BNES518 BNES618
3i T3 Tapered 3i T3 Parallel Walled
Commercially Pure Titanium Commercially Pure Titanium

6.5mm — — — — BOES365 BOES3765 BOES465 BOES565 BOES665

8.5mm BOET3285 BOET485 BOET585 BOET685 BOES385 BOES3785 BOES485 BOES585 BOES685
10mm BOET3210 BOET410 BOET510 BOET610 BOES310 BOES3710 BOES410 BOES510 BOES610
11.5mm BOET3211 BOET411 BOET511 BOET611 BOES311 BOES3711 BOES411 BOES511 BOES611
13mm BOET3213 BOET413 BOET513 BOET613 BOES313 BOES3713 BOES413 BOES513 BOES613
15mm BOET3215 BOET415 BOET515 BOET615 BOES315 BOES3715 BOES415 BOES515 BOES615
18mm — — — — BOES318 BOES3718 BOES418 BOES518 BOES618

Cover Screw 1mm(H)

(included)
MMCS1 CS375 CS500 CS600 MMCS1 CS375 CS375 CS500 CS600
Cover Screw Headless CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275

NanoTite™Tapered
Titanium Alloy
3.4 4.1 5 6
2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7
.7 .7 .7 .7
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Modified
Hybrid
NanoTite
Surface
1.9 2.4 3.2 3.9

Length 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

8.5mm NNT3285 NNT485 NNT585 NNT685
10mm NNT3210 NNT410 NNT510 NNT610
11.5mm NNT3211 NNT411 NNT511 NNT611
13mm NNT3213 NNT413 NNT513 NNT613
15mm NNT3215 NNT415 NNT515 NNT615

Cover Screw 1mm(H) All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

(included)
Some products may not be available outside of the United States.
MMCS1 CS375 CS500 CS600 Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Cover Screw Headless CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275 Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
7
 External Hex Connection Implants
Tapered

Full OSSEOTITE® Tapered

Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 5 6
2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7
.7 .7 .7 .7
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Full
OSSEOTITE
Surface

1.9 2.4 3.2 3.9

Length 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

8.5mm FNT3285 FNT485 FNT585 FNT685
10mm FNT3210 FNT410 FNT510 FNT610
11.5mm FNT3211 FNT411 FNT511 FNT611
13mm FNT3213 FNT413 FNT513 FNT613
15mm FNT3215 FNT415 FNT515 FNT615

Cover Screw 1mm(H)

(included)

MMCS1 CS375 CS500 CS600

Cover Screw Headless CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275

OSSEOTITE Tapered
Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 5 6
2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7
.7 .7 .7 .7
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Modified
Hybrid
OSSEOTITE
Surface
1.9 2.4 3.2 3.9

Length 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D) D)

8.5mm NT3285 NT485 NT585 NT685
10mm NT3210 NT410 NT510 NT610
11.5mm NT3211 NT411 NT511 NT611
13mm NT3213 NT413 NT513 NT613
15mm NT3215 NT415 NT515 NT615

Cover Screw 1mm(H)

(included)
MMCS1 CS375 CS500 CS600
Cover Screw Headless CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
8
 External Hex Connection Implants
Parallel Walled

NanoTite™Parallel Walled
Titanium Alloy
3.4 4.1 5 6
2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7
.7 .7 .7 .7
1.15 .75 .5 .5
Modified
Hybrid
NanoTite
Surface
2.4 2.6 3.1 4.1

Length 3.25mm(D)
2.4 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)
7mm N/A NOSS407 NOSS507 NOSS607
8.5mm NOSM385 NOSS485 NOSS585 NOSS685
10mm NOSM310 NOSS410 NOSS510 NOSS610
11.5mm NOSM311 NOSS411 NOSS511 NOSS611
13mm NOSM313 NOSS413 NOSS513 NOSS613
15mm NOSM315 NOSS415 NOSS515 NOSS615
18mm NOSM318 NOSS418 NOSS518 NOSS618

Cover Screw 1mm(H)

(included)

MMCS1 CS375 CS500 CS600

Cover Screw Headless CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275

Parallel Walled
Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 4.1 5 6
2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7
.7 .7 .75 .7 .7 .7
1.15 .75 .5 .5
Full
OSSEOTITE
Surface

2.5 2.8 2.8 3.1 4.1

Length 3.25mm(D) 3.75mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

6.5mm XFOSM365 XFOS365 XFOS465 XFOS565 XFOS665
8.5mm XFOSM385 XFOS385 XFOS485 XFOS585 XFOS685
10mm XFOSM310 XFOS310 XFOS410 XFOS510 XFOS610
11.5mm XFOSM311 XFOS311 XFOS411 XFOS511 XFOS611
13mm XFOSM313 XFOS313 XFOS413 XFOS513 XFOS613
15mm XFOSM315 XFOS315 XFOS415 XFOS515 XFOS615

Cover Screw 1mm(H)

(included)

MMCS1 CS375 CS375 CS500 CS600

Cover Screw Headless CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
9
 External Hex Connection Implants
Parallel Walled

Full OSSEOTITE® Parallel Walled

Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 4.1 5 6
2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7
.7 .7 .7 .7 .7
1.15 .75 .75 .5 .5
Full
OSSEOTITE
Surface

2.4 2.3 2.6 3.1 4.1

Length 3.25mm(D) 3.75mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

7mm FOSM307 FOS307 FOS407 FOS507 FOS607
8.5mm FOSM385 FOS385 FOS485 FOS585 FOS685
10mm FOSM310 FOS310 FOS410 FOS510 FOS610
11.5mm FOSM311 FOS311 FOS411 FOS511 FOS611
13mm FOSM313 FOS313 FOS413 FOS513 FOS613
15mm FOSM315 FOS315 FOS415 FOS515 FOS615

Cover Screw 1mm(H)

(included)

MMCS1 CS375 CS375 CS500 CS600

Cover Screw Headless CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275

OSSEOTITE Parallel Walled

Commercially Pure Titanium
3.4 4.1 4.1 5 6
2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7
.7 .7 .7 .7 .7
Hybrid 1.15 .75 .75 .5 .5

OSSEOTITE
Surface

2.4 2.3 2.6 3.1 4.1

Length 3.25mm(D) 3.75mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

7mm N/A N/A N/A OSS507 OSS607
8.5mm OSM385 OSS385 OSS485 OSS585 OSS685
10mm OSM310 OSS310 OSS410 OSS510 OSS610
11.5mm OSM311 OSS311 OSS411 OSS511 OSS611
13mm OSM313 OSS313 OSS413 OSS513 OSS613
15mm OSM315 OSS315 OSS415 OSS515 OSS615
18mm OSM318 OSS318 OSS418 OSS518 0SS618
20mm N/A OSS320 OSS420 N/A N/A

Cover Screw 1mm(H)

(included)

MMCS1 CS375 CS375 CS500 CS600

Cover Screw Headless CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275 CS275

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
10
 Healing Abutments
Certain® Internal Connection

The BellaTek® Encode® Impression System
eliminates the need for an implant-level
impression while delivering a patient specific
restoration with appropriate margin height
and natural emergence contours for the
patient. This accuracy is achieved from an
impression of the BellaTek Encode
Healing Abutment.
Codes embedded on the occlusal surface of
the BellaTek Encode Healing Abutment
communicate the collar height, implant hex
orientation, platform diameter and interface
(the Certain Internal Connection or External
Hex Connection) of the implant.
Because the tissue is healed at the time of
impression, the margin should have the
appropriate placement and contour. The result
is a patient specific, anatomically designed,
final BellaTek Encode Abutment. Available in
titanium or with titanium nitride coating.
Optimization Is Key To Bellatek
Digital Dentistry Solutions
• Hard- And Soft-Tissue Maintenance
• Customized Treatment Solutions
• Practice Growth

11
 Healing Abutments
Certain® Internal Connection
®

Occlusal markings provide scanner

information for abutment design.
Encode® Two-Piece
3.4mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

3.8mm 3mm IEHA343

3.8mm 4mm IEHA344
3.8mm 6mm IEHA346
3.8mm 8mm IEHA348
5mm 3mm IEHA353
5mm 4mm IEHA354
5mm 6mm IEHA356 5

5mm 8mm IEHA358 h

55°
4.1mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers 3.4

4.1mm 3mm IEHA443

4.1mm 4mm IEHA444
4.1mm 6mm IEHA446
4.1mm 8mm IEHA448
5mm 3mm IEHA453
5mm 4mm IEHA454
5mm 6mm IEHA456 5

5mm 8mm IEHA458 h

68°
6mm 3mm IEHA463
4.1
6mm 4mm IEHA464
6mm 6mm IEHA466
6mm 8mm IEHA468
5mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

5.6mm 3mm IEHA553

5.6mm 4mm IEHA554
5.6
5.6mm 6mm IEHA556
h
5.6mm 8mm IEHA558 45°

6mm 3mm IEHA563

5
6mm 4mm IEHA564
6mm 6mm IEHA566
6mm 8mm IEHA568
6mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

6.8mm 3mm IEHA663

6.8mm 4mm IEHA664
6.8
6.8mm 6mm IEHA666
h
6.8mm 8mm IEHA668 35°

6
All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
12
 Healing Abutments
Certain® Internal Connection
EP (Emergence Profile)
Height
Restorative Platform
EP® One-Piece
3.4mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers
3.4
3.4mm 2mm ISMHA32
h
3.4mm 3mm ISMHA33 90°

3.4mm 4mm ISMHA34

3.4mm 6mm ISMHA36
3.4
3.8mm 2mm IMHA32
3.8
3.8mm 3mm IMHA33
h
3.8mm 4mm IMHA34 45°

3.8mm 6mm IMHA36

5mm 2mm IMHA352
3.4
5mm 3mm IMHA353
5
5mm 4mm IMHA354
h
5mm 6mm IMHA356 63°

4.1mm(D) Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers
3.4

4.1mm 2mm ISHA42

4.1mm 3mm ISHA43 4.1

4.1mm 4mm ISHA44 90°

h

4.1mm 6mm ISHA46

4.1mm 8mm ISHA48
4.1
5mm 2mm ITHA52
5mm 3mm ITHA53 5

5mm 4mm ITHA54 h

65°
5mm 6mm ITHA56
5mm 8mm ITHA58
4.1
6mm 3mm ITHA63
6mm 4mm ITHA64 6

6mm 6mm ITHA66 h

60°
6mm 8mm ITHA68

4.1

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
13
 Healing Abutments
Certain® Internal Connection

EP® One-Piece
5mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

5mm 2mm ISWHA52 5

5mm 3mm ISWHA53 h

90°
5mm 4mm ISWHA54
5mm 6mm ISWHA56
5mm 8mm ISWHA58 5

5.6mm 2mm IWTH52 5.6

5.6mm 3mm IWTH53 h

45°
5.6mm 4mm IWTH54
5.6mm 6mm IWTH56
5.6mm 8mm IWTH58 5

6mm 2mm IWTH562

6
6mm 3mm IWTH563
h
6mm 4mm IWTH564 35°

6mm 6mm IWTH566

6mm 8mm IWTH568 5
6mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

6mm 2mm ISWHA62

6
6mm 3mm ISWHA63
h
6mm 4mm ISWHA64 90°

6mm 6mm ISWHA66

6mm 8mm ISWHA68 6

6.8mm 2mm IWTH62

6.8
6.8mm 3mm IWTH63
h
6.8mm 4mm IWTH64 35°

6.8mm 6mm IWTH66

6.8mm 8mm IWTH68 6

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
14
 Healing Abutments
External Hex Connection
®

Occlusal markings provide scanner

information for abutment design.
Encode® Two-Piece
3.4mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

3.8mm 3mm EHA343

3.8mm 4mm EHA344
3.8mm 6mm EHA346
3.8mm 8mm EHA348
5mm 3mm EHA353
5mm 4mm EHA354
5mm 6mm EHA356 5

5mm 8mm EHA358 h

55°
4.1mm(D) Seating Surface 3.4
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

4.1mm 3mm EHA443

4.1mm 4mm EHA444
4.1mm 6mm EHA446
4.1mm 8mm EHA448
5mm 3mm EHA453
5mm 4mm EHA454
5mm 6mm EHA456 5

5mm 8mm EHA458 h

68°
6mm 3mm EHA463 4.1

6mm 4mm EHA464

6mm 6mm EHA466
6mm 8mm EHA468
5mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

5.6mm 3mm EHA553

5.6mm 4mm EHA554
5.6mm 6mm EHA556 5.6

5.6mm 8mm EHA558 h

45°
6mm 3mm EHA563 5

6mm 4mm EHA564

6mm 6mm EHA566
6mm 8mm EHA568
6mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

6.8mm 3mm EHA663

6.8mm 4mm EHA664
6.8mm 6mm EHA666 6.8

h
6.8mm 8mm EHA668 35°
6

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
15
 Healing Abutments
External Hex Connection
EP (Emergence Profile)
Height
Restorative Platform
EP® One-Piece
3.4mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers
Temporary Healing Retention Cylinder
3.8mm 2mm MHA32 Retains denture with soft tissue liner.

3.8mm 3mm MHA33 3.8

3.8mm 4mm MHA34 h

45°
3.8mm 6mm MHA36
4.1mm(D) Seating Surface 3.4
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers THRC4 THRC6
4.1mm(D) x 4mm(H) 4.1mm(D) x 6mm(H)
4.1mm 2mm THA42
4.1mm 3mm THA43 4.1

4.1mm 4mm THA44 h

90°
4.1mm 6mm THA46
4.1mm 8mm THA48 4.1

5mm 2mm THA52

5mm 3mm THA53 5

5mm 4mm THA54 h

65°
5mm 6mm THA56
5mm 8mm THA58 4.1

6mm 3mm THA63 6

6mm 4mm THA64

h
60°
6mm 6mm THA66
6mm 8mm THA68 4.1
5mm(D) Seating Surface
Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers
5.6mm 2mm WTH52
5.6mm 3mm WTH53 5.6

5.6mm 4mm WTH54 h

45°
5.6mm 6mm WTH56
5.6mm 8mm WTH58 5

6mm 2mm WTH562

6mm 3mm WTH563 6

6mm 4mm WTH564 h

35°
6mm 6mm WTH566
6mm 8mm WTH568 5

6mm(D) Seating Surface

Emergence Profile Collar Height Item Numbers

6.8mm 2mm WTH62

6.8mm 3mm WTH63 6.8

6.8mm 4mm WTH64 h

35°
6.8mm 6mm WTH66
6.8mm 8mm WTH68 6

All indicated measurements are in millimeters.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
16
 Site Preparation Technologies
Product Overview
The Navigator® System For Guided
Surgery
The Navigator System helps clinicians transform computer-based
planning into practical implant placement with an opportunity for
immediate provisionalization.

The Navigator System enables placement and restoration of the

Tapered Navigator Surgical Kit following Tapered and Parallel Walled Implant Systems:

• Tapered/Parallel Walled Certain® 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants

• Certain PREVAIL® 3/4/3, 4/3, 4/5/4 and 5/4 Implants
• Certain Tapered PREVAIL 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

Features specific to the Navigator System include:

• Depth-specific instrumentation for preparation and implant placement
• Control of hex-orientation to fabricate and deliver provisional
Parallel Walled Navigator Surgical Kit restorations immediately following implant placement
• Open architecture compatibility that provides freedom to choose
among leading planning software solutions

DU1000 & OSSEOCISION® Surgical

Drilling Units
Both DU1000 and OSSEOCISION Surgical Drilling Units accept twist
drills, shaping drills and implant drivers. The units power these
instruments in order to create the osteotomy for implant placement.
DU1000 Surgical Drilling Unit
• Ergonomic handpiece design
• Customized programs for every stage of dental implant surgical
procedures
• Foot control for hands-free program and setting selections

DU1000 is manufactured by W&H Dentalwerk Bürmoos GmbH .

OSSEOCISION is manufactured by NSK Nakanishi Inc.

OSSEOCISION Surgical Drilling Unit

17
 Site Preparation Technologies
Product Overview
Advanced Cutting Technology® (ACT ®)
Drills
• Two-flute design for efficient cutting
• Alternating lines and bands enhance depth mark visibility and drill
orientation in the osteotomy
• Matte finish to reduce glare

Tapered Implant Depth Indicators

& Quad Shaping Drills
• Tapered Implant Depth Indicators (NTDIs) verify the position of the
implant platform prior to placement
• Quad Shaping Drills (QSDs) use stepped depth marks for accuracy
in creating the osteotomy
• QSDs have end cutting ability
• Both QSDs and NTDIs are color-coded for platform recognition

Summers Osteotomes & Tapered

Osteotomes
• Summers Osteotomes for use with parallel walled implants
• Tapered Osteotomes available in straight and angled designs for use
with tapered implants
• Matte finished tip surface to reduce glare
• Ball striking end to facilitate use of a mallet

High Torque Indicating Ratchet Wrench

(H-TIRW)
• The H-TIRW doubles as a conventional ratchet wrench to place
implants and as a torque indicator to provided a visual assessment
of torque.
• Clearly indicates forward and reverse torque of 50-90Ncm without
the need for additional components.
• Does not require lubrication or periodic re-calibration. Calibration
may be checked by verifying that the arrow is positioned at the first
scale mark (0Ncm).
• Consisting of only two parts, the H-TIRW is easy to prepare for
sterilization.

18
 Site Preparation Technologies

DU1000 Surgical Drilling Unit

Description Item Numbers

DU1000 Surgical Drilling Unit

115 volt DU1000US
230 volt DU1000EU*
All accessories listed are compatible with both the DU900 and
Accessories Included With The DU1000: DU1000 except for DU1KMC, DU1KHS, DU1KFC and DU1KH1.

Micromotor With Cable - 1.8m/5.9ft motor cable plugs into console and attaches to handpiece DU1KMC

Motor/Handpiece Support - Drill unit attachment for resting handpiece DU1KHS

Foot Control - Ergonomic design, variable speed and connects to console to provide foot activation DU1KFC

Handle For Foot Control - Foot control attachment allowing for repositioning of foot control DU1KH1

Irrigation Bag Stand - Stand for irrigation solution bag DU9IBS

Circuit Fuse - Fuse for console, T1.25AH (250 volt) DU9F

Motor Protective Cover - Component placed over the end of a DU1KMC before cleaning and
disinfection and for sterilization in sterilizers without a drying program DU9SP

Locking Pin - Prevents handpiece on the motor attachment from turning during transmission DU9LP

Disposable Irrigation Tubing Set (6-piece) - For the supply of irrigation fluid DU1KIT

Spray Cap With Nozzle - Spray cap for service oil DU9SC

Bur Testing Gauge - Verifies bur/drill shank diameter DU9BG

Irrigation Tube Clamps (5-pack) - Clamps holding irrigation tubing to motor cable (DU9MC) DU9CL

Electrical Power Cord (United States, Canada, Japan) - Connects to console and appropriate wall outlet DU9PCUS

Electrical Power Cord (European Union) - Connects to console and appropriate wall outlet DU9PCEU*

Electrical Power Cord (Switzerland) - Connects to console and appropriate wall outlet DU1KPCCH*
Electrical Power Cord (Denmark) - Connects to console and appropriate wall outlet DU1KPCDK*

Electrical Power Cord (United Kingdom, Ireland) - Connects to console and appropriate wall outlet DU9PCUK*

Electrical Power Cord (Australia, New Zealand) - Connects to console and appropriate wall outlet DU9PCAU*

The following items are not included with the DU1000 Surgical Drilling Unit, but can be ordered separately through
Customer Service.

20:1 Handpiece - WS-75 E/KM Gear reduction handpiece DU9WS75

20:1 Handpiece - WI-75 LED G Gear reduction handpiece with built-in LED light DU9WI75L

Nozzle Cleaner - Cleans coolant outlets of handpieces; included with handpiece DU9NC
Y-Connector (3-pack) - Used to bifurcate irrigate flow from irrigation tube, DU1KIT, to provide both
internal and external irrigation; included with handpiece DU9YC
*Not available in the United States.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
19
 Site Preparation Technologies

OSSEOCISION® Surgical Drilling Unit

Description Item Numbers

OSSEOCISION Surgical Drilling Unit

120 volt DS100US
100 volt DS100J*
230 volt DS100RW*

Accessories Included With The OSSEOCISION Surgical Drilling Unit:

Tube Clamp - Holds irrigation tubing to motor cord C202-750
Internal Irrigation Tube - “L” shaped tube that fits through the handpiece head and connects the
irrigation tubing and an internally irrigated component C293-025
Y-Connector - Used to bifurcate irrigate flow from irrigation tube to provide both internal
and external irrigation C823-752
Micromotor With Cord - Plugs into DS100 Console and attaches to handpiece E211-001
Autoclave Plug For Motor - Used to keep moisture from entering micromotor during sterilization E211-701
20:1 Handpiece - 20:1 Gear Reduction Handpiece for the drilling unit SGQ-ER20H
Fuse (100V/120V) - Circuit fuse for DS100 Console (110–130 volt) U195-152
Fuse (230V) - Circuit fuse for DS100 Console (230 volt) U197-152*
Coolant Solution Hanger Post - Suspends irrigation bag or bottle from console U370-152
Control Unit (100V) - DS100J Console U370-003*
Control Unit (120V) - DS100US Console U371-003
Control Unit (230V) - DS100RW Console U372-003*
Electrical Power Cord (100V) - Plugs into DS100J Console and appropriate wall outlet U389-013*
Electrical Power Cord (120V) - Plugs into DS100US Console and appropriate wall outlet U371-550
Electrical Power Cord (230V Europe) - Plugs into DS100RW Console and appropriate wall outlet U260-414*
Electrical Power Cord (230V Australia) - Plugs into DS100RW Console and appropriate wall outlet U198-013*
Irrigation Tube Holder - Holds irrigation tubing to handpiece Y900-083
Irrigation Tubing, Disposable/Clear (5-pack) - Connects between irrigation bag or bottle and For re-ordering,
handpiece to provide irrigation flow refer to Y900-114.
Motor Cradle - Supports handpiece when not in use Z095-102
Handpiece Wench - Used to disassemble handpiece Z103-101
Spray Lubricant Nozzle - Attaches to lubricant to lubricate handpiece Z114-090
Nozzle Cleaning Fine Wire - Used to clean handpiece irrigation tube Z144-095
Foot Control (3.5m) - Connects to DS100 Console to provide foot activation Z272-004

The following items are not included in the OSSEOCISION Surgical Drilling Unit, but can be ordered separately through
Customer Service.

Motor Cord - Plugs into DS100 Console and attaches to handpiece E211-051
Irrigation Tubing, Disposable/Clear (10-pack) - Connects between irrigation bag or bottle and
handpiece to provide irrigation flow Y900-114
*Not available in the United States. Refer to ART984 for the OSSEOCISION Warranty.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
20
 Site Preparation Technologies

Tapered Navigator® System SGTIKIT Tapered Navigator Surgical Kit

For Guided Surgery

For Tapered Implants Including:
• Tapered Certain® 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants
• Tapered PREVAIL® 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

SGTIKIT
Surgical Kit Description Item Numbers

• Tapered Navigator Surgical Tray SGTTRAY

• Tapered Navigator Tissue Punch, 4.1mm(D) SGTTP4
• Tapered Navigator Tissue Punch, 5mm(D) SGTTP5
• Tapered Navigator Cortical Perforator, 4.1mm(D) - Short SGTCP4S
• Tapered Navigator Cortical Perforator, 4.1mm(D) - Long SGTCP4L
• Tapered Navigator Cortical Perforator, 5mm(D) - Short SGTCP5S
• Tapered Navigator Cortical Perforator, 5mm(D) - Long SGTCP5L
• Tapered Navigator Twist Drill, 1.9mm(D) x A(L) SGTD19A
• Tapered Navigator Twist Drill, 1.9mm(D) x B(L) SGTD19B
• Tapered Navigator Twist Drill, 1.9mm(D) x C(L) SGTD19C
• Tapered Navigator Twist Drill, 1.9mm(D) x D(L) SGTD19D
• Tapered Navigator Twist Drill, 1.9mm(D) x E(L) SGTD19E
• Tapered Navigator Twist Drill, 1.9mm(D) x F(L) SGTD19F
• Tapered Navigator Twist Drill, 1.9mm(D) x G(L) SGTD19G
• Tapered Navigator Countersink Drill, 3.4mm(D) - Short MSGTCDS
• Tapered Navigator Countersink Drill, 4.1mm(D) - Short SGTCD4S
• Tapered Navigator Countersink Drill, 5mm(D) - Short SGTCD5S
• Tapered Navigator Countersink Drill, 3.4mm(D) - Long MSGTCDL
• Tapered Navigator Countersink Drill, 4.1mm(D) - Long SGTCD4L
• Tapered Navigator Countersink Drill, 5mm(D) - Long SGTCD5L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Short MSGTD85S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Short MSGTD10S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Short MSGTD11S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Short MSGTD13S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Short MSGTD15S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Short SGTD485S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Short SGTD410S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Short SGTD411S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Short SGTD413S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Short SGTD415S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Short SGTD585S

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
21
 Site Preparation Technologies
Surgical Kit Cont’d

SGTIKIT
Surgical Kit Description Item Numbers

• Tapered Navigator® Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Short SGTD510S

• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Short SGTD511S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Short SGTD513S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Short SGTD515S
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Long MSGTD85L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Long MSGTD10L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Long MSGTD11L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Long MSGTD13L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Long MSGTD15L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Long SGTD485L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Long SGTD410L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Long SGTD411L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Long SGTD413L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 4.1mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Long SGTD415L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Long SGTD585L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Long SGTD510L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Long SGTD511L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Long SGTD513L
• Tapered Navigator Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Long SGTD515L
• Tapered Navigator Twist Drill Positioning Handle SGTDPHT
• Tapered Navigator Reduction Drill Positioning Handle SGTDPHR
• Handpiece Connector MDR10
• Narrow Right Angle Large Hexed Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASH3N
• Posterior Large Hexed Driver, 17mm(L) PHD02N
• Ratchet Extension, 6mm(L) - Short RE100
• Ratchet Extension, 15mm(L) - Long RE200
• Ratchet Wrench WR150
• Open End Wrench CW100
• Navigator Certain® Implant Mount, 3.4mm(D) - Short MSGIIMS
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 3.4mm(D) - Long MSGIIML
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 4.1mm(D) - Short SGIIM4S
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 4.1mm(D) - Long SGIIM4L
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 5mm(D) - Short SGIIM5S
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 5mm(D) - Long SGIIM5L
• Certain Manual Bone Profiler, 3.4mm(D) x 4.1mm(P) IMMBP
• Certain Manual Bone Profiler, 4.1mm(D) x 5mm(P) IMBP4
• Certain Manual Bone Profiler, 5mm(D) x 6mm(P) IMBP5

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
22
 Site Preparation Technologies

Tapered Navigator® System Tapered Navigator Tap Kit

(Included under SGTIKIT)
For Guided Surgery
For Tapered Implants Including:
• Certain® 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants
• Tapered PREVAIL® 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

SGTIKIT
Surgical Kit Description Item Numbers

• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap Tray SGTTAPT

• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Short MSGTT85S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Short MSGTT10S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Short MSGTT11S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Short MSGTT13S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Short MSGTT15S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Short SGTT485S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Short SGTT410S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Short SGTT411S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Short SGTT413S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Short SGTT415S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Short SGTT585S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Short SGTT510S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Short SGTT511S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Short SGTT513S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Short SGTT515S
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Long MSGTT85L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Long MSGTT10L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Long MSGTT11L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Long MSGTT13L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Long MSGTT15L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Long SGTT485L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Long SGTT410L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Long SGTT411L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Long SGTT413L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Long SGTT415L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) - Long SGTT585L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 10mm(L) - Long SGTT510L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) - Long SGTT511L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 13mm(L) - Long SGTT513L
• Tapered Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 15mm(L) - Long SGTT515L

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
23
 Site Preparation Technologies

Tapered Navigator® System SGTILKIT Tapered Navigator Laboratory Kit

For Guided Surgery

For Tapered Implants Including:
• Certain® 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants
• Tapered PREVAIL® 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

SGTILKIT
Surgical Kit Description Item Numbers

• Tapered Navigator Laboratory Tray SGTLTRAY

• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) - Short MSGIAMS
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) - Short SGIAM4S
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) - Short SGIAM5S
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) - Long MSGIAML
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) - Long SGIAM4L
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) - Long SGIAM5L

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
24
 Site Preparation Technologies
Parallel Walled
Navigator® System SGKIT Navigator Parallel Walled Surgical Kit
For Guided Surgery
For Parallel Walled Implants Including:
• Certain® 3.25, 4 and 5mm Implants
• PREVAIL® 3/4/3 and 4/5/4 Implants
• OSSEOTITE XP® 4/5 Implants
• Straight PREVAIL 4/3 and 5/4 Implants

SGKIT
Surgical Kit Description Item Numbers

• Navigator Surgical Tray SGTRAY

• Navigator Tissue Punch, 4.1mm(D) SGTP4
• Navigator Tissue Punch, 5mm(D) SGTP5
• Navigator Starter Drill, 3.4mm(D) MSGSD
• Navigator Starter Drill, 3/4mm(D) SGSD34
• Navigator Starter Drill, 4.1mm(D) SGSD4
• Navigator Starter Drill, 4/5mm(D) SGSD45
• Navigator Certain Starter Drill, 5mm(D) SGISD5
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x A(L) SGD2A
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x B(L) SGD2B
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x C(L) SGD2C
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x D(L) SGD2D
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x E(L) SGD2E
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x A(L) SGD275A
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x B(L) SGD275B
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x C(L) SGD275C
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x D(L) SGD275D
• Navigator Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x E(L) SGD275E
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x A(L) SGD3A
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x B(L) SGD3B
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x C(L) SGD3C
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x D(L) SGD3D
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x E(L) SGD3E
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x A(L) SGD325A
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x B(L) SGD325B
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x C(L) SGD325C
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x D(L) SGD325D
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x E(L) SGD325E
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3.85mm(D) x A(L) SGD385A
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3.85mm(D) x B(L) SGD385B
• Navigator Twist Drill, 3.85mm(D) x C(L) SGD385C
• Navigator Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x A(L) SGD425A

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
25
 Site Preparation Technologies
Surgical Kit Cont’d

SGKIT
Surgical Kit Description Item Numbers

• ®
Navigator Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x B(L) SGD425B
• Navigator Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x C(L) SGD425C
• Navigator Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) MSGTAP
• Navigator Bone Tap, 4.1mm(D) SGTAP4
• Navigator Bone Tap, 4/5mm(D) SGTAP45
• Navigator Bone Tap, 5mm(D) SGTAP5
• Navigator Drill Positioning Handle 1 SGDPH1
• Navigator Drill Positioning Handle 2 SGDPH2
• Navigator Drill Positioning Handle 3 SGDPH3
• Navigator Drill Positioning Handle 4 SGDPH4
• Navigator Drill Positioning Handle 5 SGDPH5
• Certain® Manual Bone Profiler, 3.4mm(D) x 4.1mm(P) IMMBP
• Certain Manual Bone Profiler, 4.1mm(D) x 5mm(P) IMBP4
• Certain Manual Bone Profiler, 5mm(D) x 6mm(P) IMBP5
• Narrow Right Angle Large Hexed Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASH3N
• Open End Wrench CW100
• Ratchet Wrench WR150
• Handpiece Connector MDR10
• Posterior Large Hexed Driver, 17mm(L) PHD02N
• Ratchet Extension - Short, 6mm(L) RE100
• Ratchet Extension - Long, 15mm(L) RE200
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 1(L) MSGIIM1
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 2(L) MSGIIM2
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 3(L) MSGIIM3
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 4(L) MSGIIM4
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 1(L) SGIIM41
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 2(L) SGIIM42
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 3(L) SGIIM43
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 4(L) SGIIM44
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 5mm(D) x 1(L) SGIIM51
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 5mm(D) x 2(L) SGIIM52
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 5mm(D) x 3(L) SGIIM53
• Navigator Certain Implant Mount, 5mm(D) x 4(L) SGIIM54
The following items are not included in the Navigator Surgical Kit, but can be ordered separately, as needed, through
Customer Service.
Description Item Numbers Description Item Numbers

Navigator Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x Y(L) SGD2Y Navigator Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x Y(L) SGD325Y
Navigator Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x Z(L) SGD2Z Navigator Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x Z(L) SGD325Z
Navigator Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x Y(L) SGD275Y Navigator Twist Drill, 3.85mm(D) x Y(L) SGD385Y
Navigator Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x Z(L) SGD275Z Navigator Twist Drill, 3.85mm(D) x Z(L) SGD385Z
Navigator Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x Y(L) SGD3Y Navigator Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x Y(L) SGD425Y
Navigator Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x Z(L) SGD3Z Navigator Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x Z(L) SGD425Z

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
26
 Site Preparation Technologies

Parallel Walled SGLKIT Navigator Parallel Walled Laboratory Kit

Navigator® System
For Guided Surgery

SGLKIT
Laboratory Kit Description Item Numbers

• Navigator Laboratory Tray SGLTRAY

• Navigator Certain® Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 1(L) MSGIAM1
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 2(L) MSGIAM2
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 3(L) MSGIAM3
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 4(L) MSGIAM4
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 1(L) SGIAM41
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 2(L) SGIAM42
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 3(L) SGIAM43
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 4.1mm(D) x 4(L) SGIAM44
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 1(L) SGIAM51
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 2(L) SGIAM52
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 3(L) SGIAM53
• Navigator Certain Analog Mount, 5mm(D) x 4(L) SGIAM54

31-3100 BIOMET 2mm Fixation System

To order, call 1-800-874-7711
www.BiometMicrofixation.com

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
27

Tapered Implant Surgical Kits
SLIMKT Slim Kit - Certain ®
SLIMKTE Slim Kit - Certain
& External Hex
(pictured)
SLIMKT SLIMKTE
Certain Certain/External Hex
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
Some products may not be available outside of the United States.
Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
Site Preparation Technologies
QNTSK40 Premium Kit
New!
QNTSK20 QNTSK40U QNTSK40
Starter (Basic) Kit Upgrade Kit Premium Kit Description Item Numbers
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) QSD3285
• • • Quad Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 10mm(L) QSD3210
• • • Quad Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) QSD3211
• • • Quad Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) QSD3213
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 15mm(L) QSD3215
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 4mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) QSD485
• • • Quad Shaping Drill, 4mm(D) x 10mm(L) QSD410
• • • Quad Shaping Drill, 4mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) QSD411
• • • Quad Shaping Drill, 4mm(D) x 13mm(L) QSD413
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 4mm(D) x 15mm(L) QSD415
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) QSD585
• • • Quad Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 10mm(L) QSD510
• • • Quad Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) QSD511
• • • Quad Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 13mm(L) QSD513
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 5mm(D) x 15mm(L) QSD515
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 6mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) QSD685
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 6mm(D) x 10mm(L) QSD610
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 6mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) QSD611
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 6mm(D) x 13mm(L) QSD613
• • Quad Shaping Drill, 6mm(D) x 15mm(L) QSD615
• • Dense Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) NTAP3285
• • • Dense Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 10mm(L) NTAP3210
• • • Dense Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) NTAP3211
• • • Dense Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) NTAP3213
• • Dense Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 15mm(L) NTAP3215
• • Dense Bone Tap, 4mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) NTAP485
• • • Dense Bone Tap, 4mm(D) x 10mm(L) NTAP410
• • • Dense Bone Tap, 4mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) NTAP411
• • • Dense Bone Tap, 4mm(D) x 13mm(L) NTAP413
• • Dense Bone Tap, 4mm(D) x 15mm(L) NTAP415
• • Dense Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) NTAP585
• • • Dense Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 10mm(L) NTAP510
28
 Site Preparation Technologies
Tapered Surgical Kits Cont’d

SLIMKT SLIMKTE QNTSK20 QNTSK40U QNTSK40

Certain® Certain/External Hex Starter (Basic) Kit Upgrade Kit Premium Kit Description Item Numbers

• • • Dense Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) NTAP511

• • • Dense Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 13mm(L) NTAP513
• • Dense Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 15mm(L) NTAP515
• • Dense Bone Tap, 6mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) NTAP685
• • Dense Bone Tap, 6mm(D) x 10mm(L) NTAP610
• • Dense Bone Tap, 6mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) NTAP611
• • Dense Bone Tap, 6mm(D) x 13mm(L) NTAP613
• • Dense Bone Tap, 6mm(D) x 15mm(L) NTAP615
• • • Tapered Implant Dense Bone Tap Kit Tray NTAPKT
• • • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 3.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) 3ea. NTDI3285*
• • • • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 3.25mm(D) x 10mm(L) NTDI3210
• • • • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 3.25mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) NTDI3211
• • • • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 3.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) NTDI3213
• • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 3.25mm(D) x 15mm(L) NTDI3215
• • • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 4mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) 3ea. NTDI485*
• • • • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 4mm(D) x 10mm(L) NTDI410
• • • • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 4mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) NTDI411
• • • • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 4mm(D) x 13mm(L) NTDI413
• • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 4mm(D) x 15mm(L) NTDI415
• • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 5mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) 3ea. NTDI585
• • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 5mm(D) x 10mm(L) NTDI510
• • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 5mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) NTDI511
• • • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 5mm(D) x 13mm(L) NTDI513
• • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 5mm(D) x 15mm(L) NTDI515
• • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 6mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) 3ea. NTDI685
• • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 6mm(D) x 10mm(L) NTDI610
• • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 6mm(D) x 11.5mm(L) NTDI611
• • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 6mm(D) x 13mm(L) NTDI613
• • Tapered Implant Depth Indicator, 6mm(D) x 15mm(L) NTDI615
• • • • • Certain Countersink Drill, 4mm(D) ICD100
• • QSD/NTDI Surgical Tray w/Plastic Insert QNTSKT
• • • Open End Wrench CW100
• • Ratchet Wrench WR150
• • Hight Torque Indicating Ratchet Wrench H-TIRW
• • • • Ratchet Extension (Short), 6mm(L) RE100
• • Ratchet Extension (Long), 15mm(L) RE200

*One (1) each for SLIMKT and SLIMKTE.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
29
 Site Preparation Technologies
Tapered Surgical Kits Cont’d

SLIMKT SLIMKTE QNTSK20 QNTSK40U QNTSK40

Certain® Certain/External Hex Starter (Basic) Kit Upgrade Kit Premium Kit Description Item Numbers

• • Implant Depth Gauge, 20mm(L) DP020

• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• Narrow Posterior Hexed Driver, 17mm(L) PHD00N
• • Posterior Large Hexed Driver, 17mm(L) PHD02N
• Narrow Right Angle Large Hexed Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASH3N
• Direction Indicator, 2mm(D) x 10mm(L) 3ea. DI100
• • Handpiece Connector MDR10
• Implant Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 15mm(L) MMC15
• • ACT Pointed Starter Drill
®
ACTPSD
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x 10mm(L) ACT2010
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT2015
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT2020
• • ACT Drill Extension ACTDE
• • Certain Implant Placement Driver Tip (Short), 4.1, 5, 6mm(D) IIPDTS
• • Certain Implant Placement Driver Tip (Short), 3.4mm(D) IMPDTS
• • Certain Implant Placement Driver Tip (Long), 4.1, 5, 6mm(D) IIPDTL
• • Certain Implant Placement Driver Tip (Long), 3.4mm(D) IMPDTL
• • Certain Universal Ratchet Extension Driver (Short), 6mm(L) IRE100U
• • Certain Universal Ratchet Extension Driver (Long), 15mm(L) IRE200U
• • Certain Driver Replacement O-Rings, 10-pack IRORDR

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
30
 Site Preparation Technologies

Parallel Walled Surgical Kits PSKT40 Premium Kit

For Certain® Internal Connection Implants

PSKT01 PSKT35 PSKT40

Starter (Basic) Kit Certain Premium Kit Premium Kit Description Item Numbers

• • • Plastic Surgical Tray Organizer PTT300I

• Plastic Tray Organizer for PTT300I PTT100
• • ACT® Reusable Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x 10mm(L) ACT2010
• • • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT2015
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT2020
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x 10mm(L) ACT2710
• • • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT2715
• ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT2720
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x 10mm(L) ACT3010
• • • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT3015
• ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT3020
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 10mm(L) ACT3210
• • • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT3215
• ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT3220
• • • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3.85mm(D) x 10mm(L) ACT3810
• • • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3.85mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT3815
• • • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3.85mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT3820
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) ACT4285
• • • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) ACT4213
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x 18mm(L) ACT4218
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 4.85mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) ACT4885
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 4.85mm(D) x 13mm(L) ACT4813
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 4.85mm(D) x 18mm(L) ACT4818
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 5.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) ACT5285
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 5.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) ACT5213
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 5.25mm(D) x 18mm(L) ACT5218
• • • ACT Drill Extension ACTDE
• • Countersink Drill, OSSEOTITE XP 4/5, PREVAIL 4/5/4
® ®
CD4500
• • • Countersink Depth Indicator for CD4500 CDI4500
• • • Countersink/Pilot Drill, 5mm(D) CD500
• • Countersink Drill, OSSEOTITE XP 5/6, PREVAIL 5/6/5 CD5600

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
31
 Site Preparation Technologies
Parallel Walled Surgical Kits Cont’d

PSKT01 PSKT35 PSKT40

Starter (Basic) Kit Certain® Premium Kit Premium Kit Description Item Numbers

• • • Countersink Depth Indicator for CD5600 CDI5600

• • • Certain Countersink Drill, 4mm(D) ICD100
• • • Countersink Depth Indicator for ICD100 ICDI100
• • Countersink Drill, 4.1mm(D) CD100
• • Countersink/Pilot Drill, 6mm(D) CD600
• • • Pilot Drill, 2-3mm(D) PD100
• • Implant Dense Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 18mm(L) MTAP2
• • Implant Dense Bone Tap, 4mm(D) x 13mm(L) TAP413
• • Implant Dense Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 13mm(L) TAP53S
• Implant Dense Bone Tap, 6mm(D) x 13mm(L) TAP63S
• • OSSEOTITE 2 Dense Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 7-13mm(L)
®
XTAP53S
• OSSEOTITE 2 Dense Bone Tap, 6mm(D) x 7-13mm(L) XTAP63S
• • Certain Implant Driver Tip (Short), 3.4mm(D) IMPDTS
• • • Certain Implant Driver Tip (Long), 3.4mm(D) IMPDTL
• • • Certain Implant Placement Driver Tip (Short), 4.1, 5, 6mm(D) IIPDTS
• • • Certain Implant Placement Driver Tip (Long), 4.1, 5, 6mm(D) IIPDTL
• • • Certain Universal Ratchet Extension Driver (Short), 6mm(L) IRE100U
• • • Certain Universal Ratchet Extension Driver (Long), 15mm(L) IRE200U
• • Narrow Small Hexed Hand Driver, 17mm(L) PHD00N
• • • Narrow Large Hexed Hand Driver, 17mm(L) PHD02N
• • • Narrow Large Hexed Driver, Tip 24mm(L) RASH3N
• • Driver Tip Replacement O-Rings, 10-pack IRORDR
• • • Handpiece Connector MDR10
• • Open End Wrench CW100
• • • Ratchet Wrench WR150
• • Ratchet Extension (Short), 6mm(L) RE100
• • • Ratchet Extension (Long), 15mm(L) RE200
• • • Implant Depth Gauge, 20mm(L) DP020
• • Implant Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 15mm(L) MMC15
• • • Direction Indicator, 2mm(D) x 10mm(L) 3ea. DI100
• • • Stainless Steel Round Drill, 2mm(D) RD100

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
32
 Site Preparation Technologies
Parallel Walled Surgical Kits
For External Hex Connection Implants

PSKT10 PSKT20 PSKT30

Starter (Basic) Kit Standard Kit Premium Kit Description Item Numbers

• • • Plastic Surgical Tray Organizer PTT300I

• • Plastic Organizer Tray for PTT300I PTT100
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x 10mm(L)
®
ACT2010
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT2015
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT2020
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x 10mm(L) ACT2710
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT2715
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 2.75mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT2720
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x 10mm(L) ACT3010
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT3015
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT3020
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 10mm(L) ACT3210
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 15mm(L) ACT3215
• • ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 3.25mm(D) x 20mm(L) ACT3220
• ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) ACT4285
• ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) ACT4213
• ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 4.25mm(D) x 18mm(L) ACT4218
• ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 5.25mm(D) x 8.5mm(L) ACT5285
• ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 5.25mm(D) x 13mm(L) ACT5213
• ACT Reusable Twist Drill, 5.25mm(D) x 18mm(L) ACT5218
• • ACT Drill Extension ACTDE
• • Pilot Drill, 2-3mm(D) PD100
• • Countersink Drill, 4.1mm(D) CD100
• Countersink Drill, OSSEOTITE XP ® 4/5, PREVAIL® 4/5/4 CD4500
• Countersink/Pilot Drill, 5mm(D) CD500
• Countersink Drill, OSSEOTITE XP 5/6, PREVAIL 5/6/5 CD5600
• Countersink/Pilot Drill, 6mm(D) CD600
• • Implant Dense Bone Tap, 3.25mm(D) x 18mm(L) MTAP2
• • Implant Dense Bone Tap, 4mm(D) x 13mm(L) TAP413
• Implant Dense Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 13mm(L) TAP53S
• Implant Dense Bone Tap, 6mm(D) x 13mm(L) TAP63S
• OSSEOTITE® 2 Dense Bone Tap, 5mm(D) x 7-13mm(L) XTAP53S
• OSSEOTITE 2 Dense Bone Tap, 6mm(D) x 7-13mm(L) XTAP63S

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
33
 Site Preparation Technologies

Parallel Walled Surgical Kits Cont’d

PSKT10 PSKT20 PSKT30

Starter (Basic) Kit Standard Kit Premium Kit Description Item Numbers

• • • Narrow Small Hexed Hand Driver, 17mm(L) PHD00N

• • • Narrow Large Hexed Hand Driver, 17mm(L) PHD02N
• • • Narrow Large Hexed Driver Tip, 24mm(L) RASH3N
• • • Handpiece Connector MDR10
• • • Open End Wrench CW100
• • • Ratchet Wrench WR150
• • • Ratchet Extension (Short), 6mm(L) RE100
• • • Ratchet Extension (Long), 15mm(L) RE200
• • • Implant Depth Gauge, 20mm(L) DP020
• • Implant Mount, 3.4mm(D) x 15mm(L) MMC15
• • Direction Indicator, 2mm(D) x 10mm(L) 3ea. DI100
• • Stainless Steel Round Drill, 2mm(D) RD100

PTT100 Plastic Tray Organizer

NOTE: For use with PTT300I

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
34
 Site Preparation Technologies

ACT® Non-Irrigated Reusable Twist Drills

Implant Drill
Lengths Lengths 2mm(D) 2.3mm(D) 2.75mm(D) 3mm(D) 3.15mm(D) 3.25mm(D) 3.85mm(D) 4.25mm(D) 4.85mm(D) 5.25mm(D)

7 – 8.5mm 8.5mm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ACT4285 ACT4885 ACT5285
7 – 10mm 10mm ACT2010 N/A ACT2710 ACT3010 ACT3110 ACT3210 ACT3810 N/A N/A N/A
7 – 13mm 13mm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ACT4213 ACT4813 ACT5213
7 – 15mm 15mm ACT2015 N/A ACT2715 ACT3015 ACT3115 ACT3215 ACT3815 N/A N/A N/A
7 – 18mm 18mm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ACT4218 ACT4818 ACT5218
7 – 20mm 20mm ACT2020 N/A ACT2720 ACT3020 ACT3120 ACT3220 ACT3820 N/A N/A N/A

Surgical Drills
Drills
Description Disposable Reusable

Round Drill, 2mm DR100 RD100

ACT Pointed Starter Drill N/A ACTPSD
Pilot Drill, 2-3mm DP100 PD100
Countersink Drill - External Connection, 4.1mm DC100 CD100
Countersink Drill - Certain® Connection, 4.1mm N/A ICD100
Countersink Drill, 4/5mm N/A CD4500
Countersink/Pilot Drill, 5mm DC500 CD500
Countersink Drill, 5/6mm N/A CD5600
Countersink/Pilot Drill, 6mm DC600 CD600

Quad Shaping Drills

For Tapered Implants

Drill Lengths 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D) 6

8.5mm QSD3285 QSD485 QSD585 QSD685
10mm QSD3210 QSD410 QSD510 QSD610
11.5mm QSD3211 QSD411 QSD511 QSD611
13mm QSD3213 QSD413 QSD513 QSD613
15mm QSD3215 QSD415 QSD515 QSD615

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
35
 Site Preparation Technologies
Surgical Components
Handpiece Bone Profilers
Description Item Numbers

Bone Profiler, 3.4mm(D) x 3.8mm(P) BP340

Bone Profiler, 3/4, 4.1mm(D) x 5mm(P) BP450
Bone Profiler, 3/4, 4.1mm(D) x 6mm(P) BP460
Bone Profiler, 3/4, 4.1mm(D) x 7.5mm(P) BP475
Bone Profiler, 4/5, 5mm(D) x 5mm(P) BP550
Bone Profiler, 4/5, 5mm(D) x 6mm(P) BP560
Bone Profiler, 4/5, 5mm(D) x 7.5mm(P) BP575
Bone Profiler, 5/6, 6mm(D) x 6mm(P) BP660
Bone Profiler, 5/6, 6mm(D) x 7.5mm(P) BP675

Low Profile Abutment Bone Profilers

Low Profile Abutment Bone Profiler, 3.4mm(D) LPCBP3
Low Profile Abutment Bone Profiler, 4.1mm(D) LPCBP4
Low Profile Abutment Bone Profiler, 5mm(D) LPCBP5

Certain® Manual Bone Profilers

Certain Manual Bone Profiler, 3.4mm(D) x 4.1mm(P) IMMBP
Certain Manual Bone Profiler, 3.4mm(D) x 5mm(P) IMMBP35
Certain Manual Bone Profiler, 4.1mm(D) x 5mm(P) IMBP4
Certain Manual Bone Profiler, 5mm(D) x 6mm(P) IMBP5
Certain Low Profile Abutment Manual Bone Profiler, 3.4mm(D) ILPCMBP3
Certain Low Profile Abutment Manual Bone Profiler, 4.1mm(D) ILPCMBP4
Certain Low Profile Abutment Manual Bone Profiler, 5mm(D) ILPCMBP5

Bone Profiler Guide Pins

Bone Profiler Guide Pin, 3.4, 4.1, 5 & 6mm(D) BPGUIDE
Guide Pins are included in all External Connection Bone Profiler Components
and Kits. For Certain Internal Connections, please order the appropriate
Certain Bone Profiler Guide Pin listed below.
Certain Bone Profiler Guide Pin, 3.25mm(D) 3-pack IBPMGP
Certain Bone Profiler Guide Pin, 4.1, 5 & 6mm(D) 3-pack IBPGP

Bone Profiler Organizers & Kits

Bone Profiler Organizer Box, 4.1mm(D) BPKITB
Bone Profiler Organizer Box, 5 & 6mm(D) BPAKTB
Bone Profiler Organizer Kit BB001
Bone Profiler Kit - For use with 4.1mm(D) Implants BPKIT
Contains: BP450, BP460, BP475, BB001
Bone Profiler Kit - For use with 5mm(D) or 6mm(D) Implants BPAKT
Contains: BP550, BP560, BP575, BP660, BP675, BB001

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
36
 Site Preparation Technologies

Surgical Components
Bone Taps

Implant Lengths 3.25mm(D) 3.75mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

8.5 – 18mm MTAP1 (18mmL) N/A N/A N/A N/A
8.5 – 18mm MTAP2 (27mmL) N/A N/A N/A N/A
7 – 10mm N/A TAP10 TAP410 N/A N/A
7 – 13mm N/A TAP13 TAP413 N/A N/A
7 – 20mm N/A TAP20 TAP420 N/A N/A
7 – 8.5mm N/A N/A N/A TAP58S TAP68S
7 – 13mm N/A N/A N/A TAP53S TAP63S
7 – 18mm N/A N/A N/A TAP518S TAP618S

Bone Taps - &

6.5/7 – 8.5mm N/A N/A N/A XTAP58S XTAP68S
6.5/7 – 13mm N/A N/A N/A XTAP53S XTAP63S
6.5/7 – 18mm N/A N/A N/A XTAP518S XTAP618S

Dense Bone Taps For

Tapered Implants

Implant Lengths 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

8.5mm NTAP3285 NTAP485 NTAP585 NTAP685
10mm NTAP3210 NTAP410 NTAP510 NTAP610
11.5mm NTAP3211 NTAP411 NTAP511 NTAP611
13mm NTAP3213 NTAP413 NTAP513 NTAP613
15mm NTAP3215 NTAP415 NTAP515 NTAP615

NTAPK Dense Bone Tap Kit

NOTE: Kit includes all of the Dense Bone Taps listed above.

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
37
 Site Preparation Technologies

Surgical Components
Depth/Direction Indicators
For Tapered Implants

NTDIK Depth/Direction Indicator Kit

NOTE: Kit includes all of the indicators listed above.

Implant Lengths 3.25mm(D) 4mm(D) 5mm(D) 6mm(D)

8.5mm NTDI3285 NTDI485 NTDI585 NTDI685
10mm NTDI3210 NTDI410 NTDI510 NTDI610
11.5mm NTDI3211 NTDI411 NTDI511 NTDI611
13mm NTDI3213 NTDI413 NTDI513 NTDI613
15mm NTDI3215 NTDI415 NTDI515 NTDI615

Direction Indicators
DI100 2mm/3mm(D) x 10mm(L) DI2310 2.3mm/3mm(D) x 10mm(L) DI2315 2.3mm/3mm(D) x 15mm(L)
DI200 Anodized Blue Anodized Gold
2mm/3mm(D) x 15mm(L)
2.3
2

2.3
2

3 3
3 3

Mounts
IDIKT Certain Direction
® IC015 15mm(L) Implant MMKIT 3.4mm(D) Implant
Indicator Kit Mount Includes Mount Kit
IDI001 2 each of:
10mm(L) 3.1
ꅵ MMC03 3.1

IDIM01 4.8 3mm(L) 4.8

10mm(L) ꅵ MMC15
For 3.25mm(D) 15mm(L)
Implant 3.1

15 15
4.8

4.5 3.4 3.4

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
38
 Site Preparation Technologies

Surgical Components
Miscellaneous Instrumentation
H-TIRW High Torque Indicating Ratchet Wrench CW100 Open End Wrench
For use with External Connection Implants.

TST01 TF002 Titanium Forceps

Titanium Suction Tip

MALL1 Mallet TE003 Titanium Elevator

Stainless Steel

DP020 MIDTH Manual Interchangeable Driver Tip Handle

Implant Depth Gauge

Ratchet Extensions TMP80 Tissue Measuring Post

IRE100U RE100 6mm(L)

IRE200U RE200 15mm(L)
8mm
6mm
4mm
2mm

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
39
 Site Preparation Technologies

Surgical Components
Miscellaneous Instrumentation
ACTDE ACT® Drill Extension MDR10 Handpiece Connector

23

IC100 Surgical Index Coping SGT25 Stent Guide Tubes

2.39 x Stainless Steel (25-PK)
10mm(L)

IRORDR Certain® Implant Driver Replacement O-Rings TP001 Tissue Punch

(Qty: 10) 4.1mm
TP005
5mm
TP006
6mm

IIPDTL XDG00 Gelb Radiographic Depth Gauge Kit

Certain Implant Placement Driver Tip
Long Includes:
ꅵ XDG13
IIPDTS
2mm(D)x 13mm(L)
Short
ꅵ XDG20
IMPDTL 2mm(D)x 20mm(L)
3.4mm(D)
Long XDG01
2.3mm(D)
IMPDTS
Includes:
3.4mm(D)
ꅵ XDG2313
Short
2.3mm(D)x 13mm(L)
ꅵ XDG2320
2.3mm(D)x 20mm(L)

RMB30 Radiographic Marking Balls (30-PK)

5mm(D)

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
40
 Site Preparation Technologies

Site Preparation Components

Straight And Angled Osteotomes
Description Item Numbers

Straight OSSEOTITE Tapered

®
Osteotome Kit NTOST0
Angled OSSEOTITE Tapered Osteotome Kit NTOST0A
Straight OSSEOTITE Tapered, 3.25mm(D) Osteotome NTOST3
Straight OSSEOTITE Tapered, 4mm(D) Osteotome NTOST4
Straight OSSEOTITE Tapered, 5mm(D) Osteotome NTOST5
Straight OSSEOTITE Tapered, 6mm(D) Osteotome NTOST6
Angled OSSEOTITE Tapered, 3.25mm(D) Osteotome NTOST3A
Angled OSSEOTITE Tapered, 4mm(D) Osteotome NTOST4A
Angled OSSEOTITE Tapered, 5mm(D) Osteotome NTOST5A
Angled OSSEOTITE Tapered, 6mm(D) Osteotome NTOST6A
Straight OSSEOTITE Tapered Osteotome Tray NTOSTTRS
Angled OSSEOTITE Tapered Osteotome Tray NTOSTTRA

Summer Osteotomes
Description Item Numbers

Summers Osteotome Kit #1-4 OST00

Summers Osteotome Kit #1-5 OST10
Summers Osteotome Kit #1-5, FS OST20
Summers Osteotome #1 OST01
Summers Osteotome #2 OST02
Summers Osteotome #3 OST03
Summers Osteotome #4 OST04
Summers Osteotome #5 OST05
Summers Osteotome For Future Site OSTFS
Summers Osteotome System Tray OSTTR

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
41
 Site Preparation Technologies

Site Preparation Components

Sinus Elevation
Description Item Numbers

Sinus Elevation Kit SEKT1

Titanium Nitride Coated Bone Carrier TIBC1
Small Membrane Elevator ME100
Medium Membrane Elevator ME200
Large Membrane Elevator ME300
Large Titanium Plugger TIPL1
Small Titanium Plugger TIPS1
Sinus Elevation Tray SEKTR

Trephine Burs
Description Item Numbers

Trephine Bur, 2mm Inside Diameter/3mm Outside Diameter TRE02

Trephine Bur, 4mm Inside Diameter/5mm Outside Diameter TRE04
Trephine Bur, 5mm Inside Diameter/6mm Outside Diameter TRE05
Trephine Bur, 6mm Inside Diameter/7mm Outside Diameter TRE06
Trephine Bur, 8mm Inside Diameter/9.3mm Outside Diameter TRE08

TIBC1 ME100 ME200 ME300 TIPL1 TIPS1 TRE02 TRE04 TRE05 TRE06 TRE08

Sinus Elevators Trephine Burs

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
42
 Regenerative Technologies

Product Overview
RegenerOss® Allograft
The options you want. The results you expect.
• Cortical or cancellous bone: mineralized or demineralized
• Three particle ranges: 200–300, 300–500, 500–800 microns
• Consistency from lot-to-lot
• Packaging is designed for ease of handling and quick,
convenient reconstitution
• Aseptically processed and irradiated products available
• 5-year shelf-life
Manufactured By The University of Miami Tissue Bank

RegenerOss Allograft Putty Plus

Demineralized bone matrix and mineralized bone chips/mixture.
• Contains 48% by weight DBM (28% cortical and 20%
cancellous chips) for optimal handling and bone regeneration
• Moldable, non-toxic, lecithin carrier that is highly resistant
to irrigation
• Osteoinductivity of every lot is validated by a cell proliferation
assay
• Ergonomic design features a smaller diameter syringe with
a curved tip to treat hard-to-reach defects
• DBM only option also available
• 2-year shelf-life
Manufactured By LifeLink Tissue Bank (AATB Certified)

Endobon® Xenograft Granules

A RegenerOss® Product.
• Bovine-derived Hydroxyapatite
• Osteoconductive material for bony in-growth
• 500–1000µm and 1000–2000µm particle sizes for
dental applications
• High porosity with interconnecting macro and micropores
• Easy to use packaging
• 3-year shelf-life
Manufactured By Biomet France Sarl

OsseoGuard® Resorbable Collagen

Membrane
The protection you need to grow.
• Dental barrier for guided bone regeneration
• Type I collagen bovine tendon
• Strong enough to resist tearing when tacked or sutured, yet
pliable for easy placement
• Resorption profile of 6-9 months
• Does not require removal when exposed
• 3-year shelf-life
Manufactured By Collagen Matrix, Inc., Franklin Lakes, NJ

43
 Regenerative Technologies

Product Overview
OsseoGuard Flex® Resorbable
Collagen Membrane
Creating balance between flexibility and resorption profile.
• Same clinical benefits as OsseoGuard
• Flexible, yet won’t fold over onto itself
• Type I and III bovine dermis
• 2-year shelf-life
Manufactured By Collagen Matrix, Inc., Franklin Lakes, NJ

Biogran® Bioactive Glass

Bioactive glass for effective regeneration in most oral applications.
• Granules are the optimal size range, large enough not to pack too
densely, small enough to fully resorb
• Provides a unique protective environment needed for osteogenesis
• Completely resorbable through the Krebs cycle
• 100% synthetic
• Forms a cohesive mass when mixed with blood or sterile
saline, minimizing the potential for dry socket
• Pre-formed dappen dish or pre-formed dappen dish with
empty syringe
• 5-year shelf-life
Manufactured By BIOMET 3i

Safescraper® TWIST
Cortical bone scraper/collector.
• Unique design provides 160° cutting area and facilitates
access to difficult posterior regions
• Effectively harvests up to 5cc of bone
• Contains bone in a sterile exclusive chamber, which is
designed to protect patients from cross-contamination
• Shortens operating time and simplifies graft collection
• Lateral opening system provides device stability
• 3-year shelf-life
Manufactured By META® Advanced Medical Technology

44
 Regenerative Technologies

Allografts
Description Item Numbers

RegenerOss® Allograft
Demineralized Freeze Dried Bone Allograft (DFDBA)
& Freeze Dried Bone Allograft (FDBA) Manufactured By:

Cancellous, Partially Demineralized 0.5cc 200-300µm RDCA205

Cancellous, Partially Demineralized 1cc 200-300µm RDCA210
Cancellous, Partially Demineralized 0.5cc 300-500µm RDCA305
Cancellous, Partially Demineralized 1cc 300-500µm RDCA310
Cancellous, Partially Demineralized 0.5cc 500-800µm RDCA505
Cancellous, Partially Demineralized 1cc 500-800µm RDCA510
Cortical, Partially Demineralized 0.5cc 200-300µm RDCO205
Cortical, Partially Demineralized 1cc 200-300µm RDCO210
Cortical, Partially Demineralized 0.5cc 300-500µm RDCO305
Cortical, Partially Demineralized 1cc 300-500µm RDCO310
Cortical, Partially Demineralized 0.5cc 500-800µm RDCO505
Cortical, Partially Demineralized 1cc 500-800µm RDCO510
Cancellous, Mineralized 0.5cc 200-300µm RMCA205
Cancellous, Mineralized 1cc 200-300µm RMCA210
Cancellous, Mineralized 0.5cc 300-500µm RMCA305
Cancellous, Mineralized 1cc 300-500µm RMCA310
Cancellous, Mineralized 0.5cc 500-800µm RMCA505
Cancellous, Mineralized 1cc 500-800µm RMCA510
Cortical, Mineralized 0.5cc 200-300µm RMCO205
Cortical, Mineralized 1cc 200-300µm RMCO210
Cortical, Mineralized 0.5cc 300-500µm RMCO305
Cortical, Mineralized 1cc 300-500µm RMCO310
Cortical, Mineralized 0.5cc 500-800µm RMCO505
Cortical, Mineralized 1cc 500-800µm RMCO510
Cancellous, Mineralized 2cc 200-300µm RMCA220
Cancellous, Mineralized 2cc 300-500µm RMCA320
Cancellous, Mineralized 2cc 500-800µm RMCA520
Cortical, Mineralized 2cc 200-300µm RMCO220
Cortical, Mineralized 2cc 300-500µm RMCO320
Cortical, Mineralized 2cc 500-800µm RMCO520
Cancellous, Partially Demineralized 2cc 200-300µm RDCA220
Cancellous, Partially Demineralized 2cc 300-500µm RDCA320
Cancellous, Partially Demineralized 2cc 500-800µm RDCA520
Cortical, Partially Demineralized 2cc 200-300µm RDCO220
Cortical, Partially Demineralized 2cc 300-500µm RDCO320
Cortical, Partially Demineralized 2cc 500-800µm RDCO520

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
45
 Regenerative Technologies

Allografts (Cont’d)
Description Item Numbers

Cancellous, Partially Demineralized, Irradiated 0.5cc 300-500µm RDCA305r

Cancellous, Partially Demineralized, Irradiated 1cc 300-500µm RDCA310r
Cortical, Partially Demineralized, Irradiated 0.5cc 200-300µm RDCO205r
Cortical, Partially Demineralized, Irradiated 0.5cc 300-500µm RDCO305r
Cortical, Partially Demineralized, Irradiated 1cc 300-500µm RDCO310r
Cancellous, Mineralized, Irradiated 0.5cc 200-300µm RMCA205r
Cancellous, Mineralized, Irradiated 0.5cc 300-500µm RMCA305r
Cortical, Mineralized, Irradiated 0.5cc 300-500µm RMCO305r
Cancellous, Partially Demineralized, Irradiated 2cc 300-500µm RDCA320r
Cortical, Partially Demineralized, Irradiated 2cc 300-500µm RDCO320r
Cancellous, Mineralized, Irradiated 1cc 300-500µm RMCA310r
Cortical, Mineralized, Irradiated 1cc 300-500µm RMCO310r
Special Order Allograft Items: *Special order, allow up to 6 weeks.

Dura Mater Patch (Membrane) 4x5cm 0655*

Fascia Lata Patch (Membrane) 4x5cm 0716*
Right Hemi Mandible 0630*
Left Hemi Mandible 0631*
Full Mandible 0632*
Iliac Crest Strip Small 0055*
Iliac Crest Strip Medium 0473*
lliac Crest Strip Large 0056*
Mineralized Cancellous Powder 10cc 100-200µm 1454*
Demineralized Cancellous Powder 10cc 100-200µm 1462*
Demineralized Cortical Powder 10cc 100-200µm 1465*
Dental M&M Block Small 1507*
Dental M&M Block, Irradiated Small 1523*
Dental M&M Block Medium 1491*
Dental M&M Block, Irradiated Medium 1522*
Dental M&M Block Large 1508*
Dental M&M Block, Irradiated Large 1565*
RegenerOss Allograft Putty
®

Demineralized Bone Matrix In A Lecithin Carrier

Manufactured By BIOMET Interpore Cross
0.5cc Syringe ROAP05
1cc Syringe ROAP10
2cc Syringe ROAP20

RegenerOss Allograft Putty Plus

0.5cc Syringe ROAPM05
1cc Syringe ROAPM10
2cc Pack (4 x 0.5cc syringes) Value Pack! ROAPM20

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
46
 Regenerative Technologies

Xenografts
Description Item Numbers

Endobon Xenograft Granules

®

A RegenerOss® Product (Bovine-derived Hydroxyapatite Particulate)

Manufactured By Biomet France Sarl

500 – 1000µm 0.5ml ROX05

500 – 1000µm 1ml ROX10
500 – 1000µm 2ml ROX20
1000 – 2000µm 2ml ROXLG20
1000 – 2000µm 5ml ROXLG50
1000 – 2000µm 8ml ROXLG80

GBR Barriers
OsseoGuard® Membrane
Cross-linked Bovine Collagen
Manufactured By Collagen Matrix, Inc., Franklin Lakes, NJ

Resorbable Collagen Membrane 15mm x 20mm OG1520

Resorbable Collagen Membrane 20mm x 30mm OG2030
Resorbable Collagen Membrane 30mm x 40mm OG3040

OsseoGuard Flex® Membrane

Cross-linked Highly Purified Bovine Dermis Collagen
Manufactured By Collagen Matrix, Inc., Franklin Lakes, NJ

Resorbable Collagen Membrane 15mm x 20mm OGF1520

Resorbable Collagen Membrane 20mm x 30mm OGF2030
Resorbable Collagen Membrane 30mm x 40mm OGF3040

Alloplasts
Biogran®
100% Synthetic Resorbable Bone Graft Material
Mixing Cup (750mg) & Syringe 1-Pack 2100-0750
Mixing Cups (500mg) 7-Pack 2100-0003
Mixing Cups (750mg) 7-Pack 2100-0004
Mixing Cups (1500mg) 7-Pack 2100-0005

Autogenous
Safescraper ® TWIST
Disposable Cortical Bone Collector (3-pack) Curved 3987
Manufactured By META® Advanced Medical Technology Straight 3598

R. Quétin Bone-Mill
Stainless Steel Bone Grinder QBM001

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
47
 Patient Education Products

Description Item Numbers

Patient Ed Model - DIEM 2 (4-unit)

®
DIEM2-4UNIT
Patient Ed Model - DIEM 2 (6-unit) DIEM2-6UNIT
Patient Ed Model - OSSEOTITE® Implant EXHEXMOD
Patient Ed Model - LOCATOR® PEMODLOC
Patient Ed Model - Single/Multiple Teeth PEMODSM
Patient Ed Brochure - Bone Loss (25-pack) ART885
Patient Ed Brochure - Multiple Teeth (25-pack) ART887
Patient Ed Brochure - Implant Retained, Fixed (25-pack) ART888
Patient Ed Brochure - Implant Retained, LOCATOR (25-pack) ART889
Patient Ed Brochure - Implant Retained, Bar (25-pack) ART890
Patient Ed Brochure - Immediate Teeth Replacement, DIEM (25-pack) ART929
Patient Ed Care Card (25-pack) ART930
Patient Ed Flip Chart ART943
Patient Ed DVD - Multilingual Version ART951EUR
Patient Ed Brochure - Bone Loss (Spanish Version) ART957S
Patient Ed Awareness and Education Poster ART962
Patient Ed Quad-fold Brochure with Holder (25-pack) ART1154
Patient Ed General Brochure (25-pack) ART1157
Patient Ed Regenerative Brochure ART1178

Some products may not be available outside of the United States.

Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
48
 Important Product Information For
Instructions For Use:
For a detailed explanation of the osteotomy preparation and
implant placement guidelines, please refer to the appropriate
Surgical Manual(s).
Description:
BIOMET 3i Dental Implants are manufactured from biocompatible
titanium or titanium alloy. BIOMET 3i Dental Implants include
various surface treatments. For specific product descriptions,
please refer to individual product labels.
Indications For Use:
BIOMET 3i Dental Implants are intended for surgical placement
in the upper or lower jaw to provide a means for prosthetic
attachment in single tooth restorations and in partially or fully
edentulous spans with multiple single teeth utilizing delayed
loading, or as a terminal or intermediary abutment for fixed or
removable bridgework, and to retain overdentures. BIOMET 3i
T3®, NanoTite™ and OSSEOTITE® Dental Implants may also
utilize immediate loading for these indications.
BIOMET 3i T3, NanoTite and OSSEOTITE Dental Implants are
intended for immediate function on single tooth and/or multiple
tooth applications when good primary stability is achieved, with
appropriate occlusal loading, in order to restore chewing function.
Contraindications:
Placement of dental implants may be precluded by both patient
conditions that are contraindications for surgery as well as
hypersensitivity to commercially pure titanium or titanium alloy
(including vanadium, aluminum and calcium phosphate).
BIOMET 3i Dental Implants should not be placed in patients
where the remaining jaw bone is too diminished to provide
adequate implant stability.
Warnings:
Excessive bone loss or breakage of a dental implant may occur
when an implant is loaded beyond its functional capability.
Physiological and anatomical conditions may affect the
performance of dental implants.
Mishandling of small components inside the patient’s mouth
carries a risk of aspiration and/or swallowing.
Forcing the implant into the osteotomy deeper than the depth
established by the drills can result in damage to the implant,
driver or osteotomy.
For short implants, clinicians should closely monitor patients for
any of the following conditions: peri-implant bone loss, changes
to the implant’s response to percussion or radiographic changes
in bone to implant contact along the implant’s length. If the
implant shows mobility or greater than 50% bone loss, the
implant should be evaluated for possible removal. If a clinician
chooses a short implant, then the clinician should consider a
two-stage surgical approach, splinting a short implant to an
additional implant and placement of the widest possible fixture.
In addition, the clinician should allow longer periods for
osseointegration and avoid immediate loading.
49
Dental Implants
Reuse of BIOMET 3i Products that are labeled for single-use
may result in product contamination, patient infection and/or
failure of the device to perform as intended.
MRI Statement:
BIOMET 3i Dental Implants have not been evaluated for safety,
heating, migration, or compatibility in the Magnetic Resonance
Imaging (MRI) environment.
Precautions:
These devices are only to be used by trained professionals.
The surgical and restorative techniques required to properly
utilize these devices are highly specialized and complex
procedures. Improper technique can lead to implant failure,
loss of supporting bone, restoration fracture, screw loosening
and aspiration. When the clinician has determined adequate
primary stability is achieved, immediate functional loading can
be considered.
The following should be taken into consideration when placing
dental implants: bone quality, oral hygiene and medical
conditions such as blood disorders or uncontrolled hormonal
conditions. The healing period varies depending on the quality
of the bone at the implantation site, the tissue response to the
implanted device and the surgeon’s evaluation of the patient’s
bone density at the time of the surgical procedure. Proper
occlusion should be evaluated on the implant restoration to
avoid excessive force during the healing period on the implant.
It is recommended that implants less than 4mm diameter NOT
be placed in the posterior regions.
Sterility:
All dental implants are supplied sterile and are labeled “STERILE”.
All products sold sterile are for single-use before the expiration
date printed on the product label. Do not use sterile products
if the packaging has been damaged or previously opened.
Do not re-sterilize.
Storage And Handling:
Devices should be stored at room temperature. Refer to
individual product labels and the Surgical Manual for special
storage or handling conditions.
Potential Adverse Events:
Potential adverse events associated with the use of dental
implants may include: failure to integrate, loss of integration,
dehiscence requiring bone grafting, perforation of the maxillary
sinus, inferior border, lingual plate, labial plate, inferior alveolar
canal or gingiva, infection as reported by abscess, fistula,
suppuration, inflammation, or radiolucency, persistent pain,
numbness, paresthesia, hyperplasia, excessive bone loss
requiring intervention, implant breakage or fracture, systemic
infection, nerve injury and aspiration.
Caution:
U.S. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order
of a licensed dentist or physician.
 Important Product Information For
Instructions For Use:
For detailed information on the specific procedure for the
product you are using, please refer to the individual product
labels or the appropriate manual on the BIOMET 3i Website.
Description:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are manufactured from
biocompatible titanium, titanium alloy, gold, gold alloy,
zirconium, vanadium, stainless steel, polyetheretherketone
(PEEK), cobalt chromium alloy, and polyoxymethylene (Delrin).
Please refer to product guidelines for Use/Surgical Manual for
additional device information.
Indications For Use:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are intended for use as an
accessory to endosseous dental implants for placement in the
maxilla and mandible.
Provisional Abutments are intended for use as an accessory to
endosseous dental implants to support a prosthetic device in a
partially or fully edentulous patient. They are intended for use
to support a prosthesis in the mandible or maxilla for up to 180
days during endosseous and gingival healing, and are for non-
occlusal loading of provisional restorations. The prosthesis will
be either cement, mechanically or screw-retained to the
abutment system based on individual product design. For
compatibility of BellaTek® Patient Specific Abutments, please
refer to the compatibility table in the accompanying document.
Contraindications:
Placement of BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are precluded by
known patient hypersensitivity to any of the materials listed in
the Description section above.
Warnings:
Mishandling of small components inside the patient’s mouth
carries a risk of aspiration and/or swallowing. Fracture of a
restoration may occur when an abutment is loaded beyond its
functional capability. Reuse of BIOMET 3i Products that are
labeled for single-use may result in product contamination,
patient infection and/or failure of the device to perform as
intended.
PEEK components are intended for use to support single- or
multiple-unit provisional prostheses in the mandible or maxilla
for up to 180 days, at which time a definitive prosthesis should
be inserted.
Sterility:
Some BIOMET 3i Restorative Products are supplied sterile.
Refer to individual product labels for sterilization information; all
sterile products are labeled “STERILE”. All products sold sterile
are for single-use before the “use by” date printed on the
product label. Do not use sterile products if the packaging has
been damaged or previously opened. Products provided non-
sterile may need to be cleaned and sterilized prior to use.
Please refer to the individual product labels or Restorative
Manual for more information. For products provided non-sterile
50
Restorative Products
requiring sterilization prior to use, BIOMET 3i recommends the
following sterilization parameters for wrapped items:
Steam gravity sterilization method (gravity-displacement cycle) -
Minimum exposure of fifteen (15) minutes timing at a
temperature of 270ºF (132ºC)* or
Pre-vacuum sterilization method (dynamic-air-removal cycle) -
Minimum exposure of four (4) minutes, four (4) pulses timing at
a temperature of 270ºF (132ºC).*
*Post sterilization, devices should be thoroughly dried for 30 minutes. Please refer
to the Surgical and Restorative Manual or package insert for the remaining care
and cleaning instructions.
Do not re-sterilize or autoclave components except where
indicated on the individual product label, where instructions
have been provided in the Restorative Manual or in any
additional product literature for the given component.
MRI Statement:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products have not been evaluated for
safety, heating, migration, or compatibility in the Magnetic
Resonance Imaging (MRI) environment.
Precautions:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products should only be used by trained
professionals. The surgical and restorative techniques required
to properly utilize these products are highly specialized and
complex procedures. Improper technique can lead to implant
failure, loss of supporting bone, restoration fracture, screw
loosening and aspiration. Components made from PEEK
material are intended for use for up to 180 days.
Potential Adverse Events:
Potential adverse events associated with the use of restorative
products may include: failure to integrate; loss of integration;
dehiscence requiring bone grafting; infection as reported by:
abscess, fistula, suppuration, inflammation, radiolucency; gingival
hyperplasia; excessive bone loss requiring intervention; fracture;
and nerve injury.
Storage And Handling:
BIOMET 3i Restorative Products should be stored at room
temperature. Refer to the Surgical Manual for special storage or
handling conditions.
Caution:
U.S. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order
of a licensed dentist or physician.
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

0055 ILIAC CREST STRIP, SMALL 46 ART889 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMPLANT RETAINED, LOCATOR® (25-PACK) 48
0056 ILIAC CREST STRIP, LARGE 46 ART890 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMPLANT RETAINED, BAR (25-PACK) 48
0473 ILIAC CREST STRIP, MEDIUM 46 ART929 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMMEDIATE TEETH REPLACEMENT, DIEM® (25-PACK) 48
0630 RIGHT HEMI MANDIBLE 46 ART930 PATIENT ED CARE CARD (25-PACK) 48
0631 LEFT HEMI MANDIBLE 46 ART943 PATIENT ED FLIP CHART 48
0632 FULL MANDIBLE 46 ART951EUR PATIENT ED DVD - MULTILINGUAL VERSION 48
0655 DURA MATER-PATCH (MEMBRANE), 4X5CM 46 ART957S PATIENT ED BROCHURE - BONE LOSS (SPANISH VERSION) 48
0716 FASCIA LATA PATCH (MEMBRANE), 4X5CM 46 ART962 PATIENT ED AWARENESS AND EDUCATION POSTER 48
1454 MINERALIZED CANCELLOUS POWDER, 10CC, 100-200µm 46 BB001 BONE PROFILER ORGANIZER KIT 36
1462 DEMINERALIZED CANCELLOUS POWDER, 10CC, 100-200µm 46 BNES365 3i T3® W/DCD® PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7
1465 DEMINERALIZED CORTICAL POWDER, 10CC, 100-200µm 46 BNES385 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
1491 DENTAL M&M BLOCK, MEDIUM 46 BNES310 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
1507 DENTAL M&M BLOCK, SMALL 46 BNES311 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
1508 DENTAL M&M BLOCK, LARGE 46 BNES313 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
1522 DENTAL M&M BLOCK, IRRADIATED, MEDIUM 46 BNES315 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
1523 DENTAL M&M BLOCK, IRRADIATED, SMALL 46 BNES318 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 18MM(L) 7
1565 DENTAL M&M BLOCK, IRRADIATED, LARGE 46 BNES3765 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7
3598 SAFESCRAPER® TWIST, STRAIGHT (3-PACK) 47 BNES3785 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
3987 SAFESCRAPER TWIST, CURVED (3-PACK) 47 BNES3710 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
2100-0003 BIOGRAN® 500MG MIXING CUP (7-PACK) 47 BNES3711 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
2100-0004 BIOGRAN 750MG MIXING CUP (7-PACK) 47 BNES3713 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
2100-0005 BIOGRAN 1500MG MIXING CUP (7-PACK) 47 BNES3715 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
2100-0750 BIOGRAN 750MG MIXING CUP & SYRINGE (1-PACK) 47 BNES3718 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 18MM(L) 7
31-3100 BIOMET 2MM FIXATION SYSTEM 27 BNES465 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7
ACT2010 ACT® REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 2MM X 10MM 30,31,33,35 BNES485 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
ACT2015 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 2MM X 15MM 30,31,33,35 BNES410 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
ACT2020 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 2MM X 20MM 30,31,33,35 BNES411 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
ACT2710 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 2.75MM X 10MM 31,33,35 BNES413 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
ACT2715 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 2.75MM X 15MM 31,33,35 BNES415 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
ACT2720 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 2.75MM X 20MM 31,33,35 BNES418 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 18MM(L) 7
ACT3010 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3MM X 10MM 31,33,35 BNES565 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7
ACT3015 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3MM X 15MM 31,33,35 BNES585 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
ACT3020 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3MM X 20MM 31,33,35 BNES510 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
ACT3110 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3.15MM X 10MM 35 BNES511 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
ACT3115 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3.15MM X 15MM 35 BNES513 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
ACT3120 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3.15MM X 20MM 35 BNES515 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
ACT3210 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM X 10MM 31,33,35 BNES518 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 18MM(L) 7
ACT3215 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM X 15MM 31,33,35 BNES665 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7
ACT3220 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM X 20MM 31,33,35 BNES685 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
ACT3810 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3.85MM X 10MM 31,35 BNES610 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
ACT3815 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3.85MM X 15MM 31,35 BNES611 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
ACT3820 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 3.85MM X 20MM 31,35 BNES613 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
ACT4285 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 4.25MM X 8.5MM 31,33,35 BNES615 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
ACT4213 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 4.25MM X 13MM 31,33,35 BNES618 3i T3 W/DCD PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 18MM(L) 7
ACT4218 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 4.25MM X 18MM 31,33,35 BNET3285 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
ACT4885 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 4.85MM X 8.5MM 31,35 BNET3210 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
ACT4813 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 4.85MM X 13MM 31,35 BNET3211 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
ACT4818 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 4.85MM X 18MM 31,35 BNET3213 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
ACT5285 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 5.25MM X 8.5MM 31,33,35 BNET3215 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
ACT5213 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 5.25MM X 13MM 31,33,35 BNET485 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
ACT5218 ACT REUSABLE TWIST DRILL, 5.25MM X 18MM 31,33,35 BNET410 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
ACTDE ACT DRILL EXTENSION 30,31,33,40 BNET411 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
ACTPSD ACT POINTED STARTER DRILL 31,35 BNET413 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
ART1178 PATIENT ED REGENERATIVE BROCHURE 48 BNET415 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
ART885 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - BONE LOSS (25-PACK) 48 BNET585 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
ART887 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - MULTIPLE TEETH (25-PACK) 48 BNET510 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
ART888 PATIENT ED BROCHURE - IMPLANT RETAINED, FIXED (25-PACK) 48 BNET511 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
51
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

BNET513 3i T3® W/DCD® TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7 BNSS318 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNET515 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7 3.25MM(D) X 18MM(L)
BNET685 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7 BNSS385 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNET610 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)

BNET611 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7 BNSS410 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
4MM(D) X 10MM(L)
BNET613 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
BNSS411 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNET615 3i T3 W/DCD TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
BNPS4310 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS413 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
4/3 X 10MM(L)
4MM(D) X 13MM(L)
BNPS4311 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS415 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
4/3 X 11.5MM(L)
4MM(D) X 15MM(L)
BNPS4313 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS418 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
4/3 X 13MM(L)
4MM(D) X 18MM(L)
BNPS4315 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS485 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
4/3 X 15MM(L)
4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
BNPS4385 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS510 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
4/3 X 8.5MM(L)
5MM(D) X 10MM(L)
BNPS5410 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS511 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
5/4 X 10MM(L)
5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
BNPS5411 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS513 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
5/4 X 11.5MM(L)
5MM(D) X 13MM(L)
BNPS5413 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS515 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
5/4 X 13MM(L)
5MM(D) X 15MM(L)
BNPS5415 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS585 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
5/4 X 15MM(L)
5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
BNPS5485 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS610 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
5/4 X 8.5MM(L)
6MM(D) X 10MM(L)
BNPS6510 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS611 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
6/5 X 10MM(L)
6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
BNPS6511 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS613 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
6/5 X 11.5MM(L)
6MM(D) X 13MM(L)
BNPS6513 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS615 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
6/5 X 13MM(L)
6MM(D) X 15MM(L)
BNPS6515 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNSS685 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
6/5 X 15MM(L)
6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
BNPS6585 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BNST3210 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
6/5 X 8.5MM(L)
3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L)
BNPT4310 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 10MM(L) 1
BNST3211 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
BNPT4311 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 11.5MM(L) 1 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
BNPT4313 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 13MM(L) 1 BNST3213 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
BNPT4315 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 15MM(L) 1 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L)
BNPT4385 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 8.5MM(L) 1 BNST3215 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
BNPT5410 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 10MM(L) 1 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L)
BNPT5411 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 11.5MM(L) 1 BNST3285 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
BNPT5413 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 13MM(L) 1 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
BNPT5415 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 15MM(L) 1 BNST410 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
4MM(D) X 10MM(L)
BNPT5485 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 8.5MM(L) 1
BNST411 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
BNPT6510 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 10MM(L) 1
4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
BNPT6511 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 11.5MM(L) 1
BNST413 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
BNPT6513 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 13MM(L) 1
4MM(D) X 13MM(L)
BNPT6515 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 15MM(L) 1
BNST415 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
BNPT6585 3i T3 W/DCD PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 8.5MM(L) 1 4MM(D) X 15MM(L)
BNSS310 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 BNST485 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
BNSS311 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 BNST510 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 5MM(D) X 10MM(L)
BNSS313 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 BNST511 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
BNSS315 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L)
52
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

BNST513 3i T3® W/DCD® NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1 BOET411 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
5MM(D) X 13MM(L) BOET413 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
BNST515 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1 BOET415 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
5MM(D) X 15MM(L)
BOET585 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
BNST585 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
BOET510 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
BOET511 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
BNST610 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
BOET513 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
6MM(D) X 10MM(L)
BOET515 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
BNST611 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) BOET685 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7

BNST613 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1 BOET610 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
6MM(D) X 13MM(L) BOET611 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
BNST615 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1 BOET613 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
6MM(D) X 15MM(L) BOET615 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
BNST685 3i T3 W/DCD NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1 BOPS4310 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 10MM(L) 2
6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) BOPS4311 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 11.5MM(L) 2
BOES365 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7 BOPS4313 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 13MM(L) 2
BOES385 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7 BOPS4315 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 15MM(L) 2
BOES310 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7 BOPS4385 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 8.5MM(L) 2
BOES311 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7 BOPS5410 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 10MM(L) 2
BOES313 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7 BOPS5411 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 11.5MM(L) 2
BOES315 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7 BOPS5413 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 13MM(L) 2
BOES318 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 18MM(L) 7 BOPS5415 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 15MM(L) 2
BOES3765 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7 BOPS5485 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 8.5MM(L) 2
BOES3785 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7 BOPS6510 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 10MM(L) 2
BOES3710 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7 BOPS6511 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 11.5MM(L) 2
BOES3711 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7 BOPS6513 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 13MM(L) 2
BOES3713 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7 BOPS6515 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 15MM(L) 2
BOES3715 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7 BOPS6585 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 8.5MM(L) 2
BOES3718 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 18MM(L) 7 BOPT4310 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 10MM(L) 1
BOES465 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7 BOPT4311 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 11.5MM(L) 1
BOES485 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7 BOPT4313 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 13MM(L) 1
BOES410 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7 BOPT4315 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 15MM(L) 1
BOES411 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7 BOPT4385 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4/3 X 8.5MM(L) 1
BOES413 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7 BOPT5410 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 10MM(L) 1
BOES415 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7 BOPT5411 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 11.5MM(L) 1
BOES418 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 18MM(L) 7 BOPT5413 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 13MM(L) 1
BOES565 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7 BOPT5415 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 15MM(L) 1
BOES585 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7 BOPT5485 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5/4 X 8.5MM(L) 1
BOES510 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7 BOPT6510 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 10MM(L) 1
BOES511 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7 BOPT6511 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 11.5MM(L) 1
BOES513 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7 BOPT6513 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 13MM(L) 1
BOES515 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7 BOPT6515 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 15MM(L) 1
BOES518 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 18MM(L) 7 BOPT6585 3i T3 PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6/5 X 8.5MM(L) 1
BOES665 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 7 BOSS310 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BOES685 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L)
BOES610 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7 BOSS311 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BOES611 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
BOES613 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7 BOSS313 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BOES615 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L)

BOES618 3i T3 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6SMM(D) X 18MM(L) 7 BOSS315 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L)
BOET3285 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
BOSS318 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BOET3210 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
3.25MM(D) X 18MM(L)
BOET3211 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
BOSS385 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BOET3213 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
BOET3215 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7 BOSS410 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BOET485 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7 4MM(D) X 10MM(L)
BOET410 3i T3 TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
53
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

BOSS411 3i T3® NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 BP560 BONE PROFILER W/GUIDE PIN, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 36
4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) BP575 BONE PROFILER W/GUIDE PIN, 5MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) 36
BOSS413 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 BP660 BONE PROFILER W/GUIDE PIN, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) 36
4MM(D) X 13MM(L)
BP675 BONE PROFILER W/GUIDE PIN, 6MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) 36
BOSS415 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BPAKT BONE PROFILER KIT, 5 & 6MM(D) 36
4MM(D) X 15MM(L)
BPAKTB BONE PROFILER ORGANIZER BOX, 5 & 6MM(D) 36
BOSS418 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
BPGUIDE BONE PROFILER GUIDE PIN, 3.4, 4.1, 5 & 6MM(D) 36
4MM(D) X 18MM(L)
BPKIT BONE PROFILER KIT, 4.1MM(D) 36
BOSS485 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) BPKITB BONE PROFILER ORGANIZER BOX, 4.1MM(D) 36

BOSS510 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 C202-750 OSSEOCISION® TUBE CLAMP 20
5MM(D) X 10MM(L) C293-025 OSSEOCISION INTERNAL IRRIGATION TUBE 20
BOSS511 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 C823-752 OSSEOCISION Y-CONNECTOR 20
5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) CD100 COUNTERSINK REUSABLE DRILL, 4.1MM EXTERNAL CONNECTION 32,33,35
BOSS513 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 CD4500 COUNTERSINK REUSABLE DRILL, 4/5, 4/5/4MM 31,33,35
5MM(D) X 13MM(L) CD500 COUNTERSINK/PILOT REUSABLE DRILL, 5MM 31,33,35
BOSS515 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 CD5600 COUNTERSINK/PILOT REUSABLE DRILL, 5/6, 5/4/5MM 31,33,35
5MM(D) X 15MM(L)
CD600 COUNTERSINK/PILOT REUSABLE DRILL, 4.25–5.25MM 32,33,35
BOSS585 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
CS275 HEADLESS COVER SCREW, 4.1, 5, 6MM(D) 7,8,9,10
5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
CS375 IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 7,8,9,10
BOSS610 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
CS500 IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 5MM(D) X 1MM(H) 7,8,9,10
6MM(D) X 10MM(L)
CS600 IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 6MM(D) X 1MM(H) 7,8,9,10
BOSS611 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2
6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) CW100 OPEN END WRENCH 22,26,29,32,34,39

BOSS613 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 DC100 COUNTERSINK DISPOSABLE DRILL, 4.1MM EXTERNAL CONNECTION 35
6MM(D) X 13MM(L) DC500 PILOT/COUNTERSINK DISPOSABLE DRILL, 5MM 35
BOSS615 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 DC600 PILOT/COUNTERSINK DISPOSABLE DRILL, 6MM 35
6MM(D) X 15MM(L) DIEM2-4UNIT PATIENT ED MODEL - DIEM®2 (4-UNIT) 48
BOSS685 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 2 DIEM2-6UNIT PATIENT ED MODEL - DIEM 2 (6-UNIT) 48
6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) DI100 DIRECTION INDICATOR, 2MM(D) X 10MM(L), 3EA. 30,32,34,38
BOST3210 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1 DI200 DIRECTION INDICATOR, 2MM(D) X 15MM(L) 38
3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L)
DI2310 DIRECTION INDICATOR, 2.3MM(D) X 10MM(L) 38
BOST3211 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
DI2315 DIRECTION INDICATOR, 2.3MM(D) X 15MM(L) 38
3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
DP020 IMPLANT DEPTH GAUGE, 20MM(L) 29,32,34,39
BOST3213 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
DP100 DISPOSABLE PILOT DRILL, 2-3MM 35
3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L)
DR100 DISPOSABLE ROUND BUR 35
BOST3215 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1
3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) DS100J OSSEOCISION SURGICAL DRILL SYSTEM (100V) W/HANDPIECE 20
BOST3285 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 1 DS100RW OSSEOCISION SURGICAL DRILL SYSTEM (230V) W/HANDPIECE 20
3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) DS100US OSSEOCISION SURGICAL DRILL SYSTEM (120V) W/HANDPIECE 20
BOST410 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 1 DU1000US DU1000 SURGICAL DRILLING UNIT, 115 VOLT (USA) 19
BOST411 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 1 DU1000EU DU1000 SURGICAL DRILLING UNIT, 230 VOLT (EUROPE) 19
BOST413 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 1 DU1KFC DU1000 FOOT CONTROL 19
BOST415 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 1 DU1KH1 DU1000 HANDLE FOR FOOT CONTROL 19
BOST485 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 1 DU1KHS DU1000 MOTOR/HANDPIECE SUPPORT 19
BOST510 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 1 DU1KIT DU1000 DISPOSABLE IRRIGATION TUBING SET (6-PIECE) 19
BOST511 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 1 DU1KMC DU1000 MICROMOTOR WITH CABLE 19
BOST513 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 1 DU1KPCCH DU1000 ELECTRICAL POWER CORD (SWITZERLAND) 19
BOST515 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 1 DU1KPCDK DU1000 ELECTRICAL POWER CORD (DENMARK) 19
BOST585 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 1 DU9BG DU1000 BUR TESTING GAUGE 19
BOST610 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 1 DU9CL DU1000 IRRIGATION TUBE CLAMPS (5-PACK) 19
BOST611 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 1 DU9F DU1000 CIRCUIT FUSE 19
BOST613 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 1 DU9IBS DU1000 IRRIGATION BAG STAND 19
BOST615 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 1 DU9LP DU1000 LOCKING PIN 19
BOST685 3i T3 NON-PLATFORM SWITCHED TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 1 DU9NC DU1000 NOZZLE CLEANER 19
BP340 BONE PROFILER W/GUIDE PIN, 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) 36 DU9PCAU DU1000 ELECTRICAL POWER CORD (AUSTRALIA, NEW ZEALAND) 19
BP450 BONE PROFILER W/GUIDE PIN, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 36 DU9PCEU DU1000 ELECTRICAL POWER CORD (EUROPE) 19
BP460 BONE PROFILER W/GUIDE PIN, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) 36 DU9PCUK DU1000 ELECTRICAL POWER CORD (UNITED KINGDOM, IRELAND) 19
BP475 BONE PROFILER W/GUIDE PIN, 4.1MM(D) X 7.5MM(P) 36 DU9SC DU1000 SPRAY CAP WITH NOZZLE 19
BP550 BONE PROFILER W/GUIDE PIN, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) 36 DU9SP DU1000 MOTOR PROTECTIVE COVER 19
54
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

DU9WI75L DU1000 20:1 HANDPIECE 19 EHA566 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
DU9WS75 DU1000 20:1 HANDPIECE 19 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H)
DU9YC DU1000 Y-CONNECTOR (3-PACK) 19 EHA568 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
DU9PCUS DU1000 ELECTRICAL POWER CORD (USA, CANADA, JAPAN) 19 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H)

E211-001 OSSEOCISION® MICROMOTOR W/CORD 20 EHA663 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H)
E211-051 OSSEOCISION MOTOR CORD 20
EHA664 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
E211-701 OSSEOCISION AUTOCLAVE PLUG FOR MOTOR 20
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)
EHA343 BELLATEK® ENCODE® 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
EHA666 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 3MM(H)
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H)
EHA344 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
EHA668 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H)
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H)
EHA346 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
EXHEXMOD PATIENT ED MODEL - OSSEOTITE® IMPLANT 48
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H)
FNT3210 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
EHA348 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
FNT3211 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 8MM(H)
FNT3213 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
EHA353 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
3.4MM(P) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) FNT3215 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
EHA354 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FNT3285 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
3.4MM(P) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) FNT410 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
EHA356 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FNT411 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
3.4MM(P) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) FNT413 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
EHA358 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FNT415 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
3.4MM(P) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H) FNT485 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
EHA443 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FNT510 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 3MM(H)
FNT511 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
EHA444 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
FNT513 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 4MM(H)
FNT515 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
EHA446 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 6MM(H) FNT585 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7

EHA448 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FNT610 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 8MM(H) FNT611 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
EHA453 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FNT613 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) FNT615 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
EHA454 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FNT685 FULL OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) FOS307 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 7MM(L) 10
EHA456 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FOS310 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 10MM(L) 10
4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H)
FOS311 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10
EHA458 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
FOS313 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10
4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H)
FOS315 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10
EHA463 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
FOS385 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10
4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H)
FOS407 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 7MM(L) 10
EHA464 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) FOS410 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 10

EHA466 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FOS411 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10
4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) FOS413 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10
EHA468 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FOS415 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10
4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H) FOS485 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10
EHA553 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FOS507 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 7MM(L) 10
5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) FOS510 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 10
EHA554 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FOS511 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10
5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
FOS513 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10
EHA556 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
FOS515 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10
5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H)
FOS585 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10
EHA558 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
FOS607 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 7MM(L) 10
5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H)
FOS610 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 10
EHA563 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15
5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H) FOS611 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10
EHA564 BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 15 FOS613 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10
5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) FOS615 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10
FOS685 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10

55
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

FOSM307 FULL OSSEOTITE® PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 7MM(L) 10 IEHA468 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
FOSM310 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 10 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H)
FOSM311 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10 IEHA553 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
FOSM313 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H)

FOSM315 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10 IEHA554 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H)
FOSM385 FULL OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10
IEHA556 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
H-TIRW HIGH TORQUE INDICATING RATCHET WRENCH 39
5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H)
IBPGP CERTAIN® PROFILER GUIDE PIN (3-PACK), 4.1, 5 & 6MM(D) 36
IEHA558 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
IBPMGP CERTAIN BONE PROFILER GUIDE PIN (3-PACK), 3.25MM(D) 36 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H)
IC015 IMPLANT MOUNT, 15MM(L) 39 IEHA563 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
IC100 SURGICAL INDEX COPING 40 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H)
ICD100 CERTAIN COUNTERSINK DRILL, 4MM(D) 32,35 IEHA564 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
ICDI100 COUNTERSINK DEPTH INDICATOR FOR ICD100 32 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)
ICS375 CERTAIN IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 4.1MM(D) X 1MM(H) 1,2,3,4,5,6 IEHA566 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
ICS500 CERTAIN IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 5MM(D) X 1MM(H) 1,2,3,4,5,6 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H)
ICS600 CERTAIN IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 6MM(D) X 1MM(H) 1,2,3,5,6 IEHA568 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H)
ICSF41 CERTAIN FLAT IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 4.1MM(D) 1,2,3,4,5,6
IEHA663 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
ICSF50 CERTAIN FLAT IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 5MM(D) 1,2,3,4,5,6
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H)
ICSF60 CERTAIN FLAT IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 6MM(D) 1,2
IEHA664 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
IDI001 CERTAIN DIRECTION INDICATOR, 10MM(L) 38
6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IDIKT CERTAIN DIRECTION INDICATOR KIT 38
IEHA666 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
IDIM01 CERTAIN DIRECTION INDICATOR, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 38 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H)
IEHA343 CERTAIN BELLATEK® ENCODE® 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 IEHA668 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 3MM(H) 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H)
IEHA344 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 IIPDTL CERTAIN IMPLANT PLACEMENT DRIVER (LONG), 4.1, 5, 6MM(D) 30,32,40
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H)
IIPDTS CERTAIN IMPLANT PLACEMENT DRIVER (SHORT), 4.1, 5, 6MM(D) 30,32,40
IEHA346 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
ILPCMBP3 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT MANUAL BONE PROFILER, 3.4MM(D) 36
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H)
ILPCMBP4 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT MANUAL BONE PROFILER, 4.1MM(D) 36
IEHA348 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
ILPCMBP5 CERTAIN LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT MANUAL BONE PROFILER, 5MM(D) 36
3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 8MM(H)
IMBP4 CERTAIN MANUAL BONE PROFILER, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) 22,26,36
IEHA353 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) IMBP5 CERTAIN MANUAL BONE PROFILER, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) 22,26,36
IEHA354 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 IMCSF34 CERTAIN FLAT IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 3.4MM(D) 1,2,3,4,5,6
3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) IMHA32 CERTAIN EP® 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) 13
IEHA356 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 IMHA33 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 3MM(H) 13
3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) IMHA34 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 13
IEHA358 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 IMHA36 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H) 13
3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H) IMHA352 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 13
IEHA443 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 IMHA353 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) 13
4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 3MM(H)
IMHA354 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 13
IEHA444 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
IMHA356 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 13
4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X4MM(H)
IMMBP CERTAIN MANUAL BONE PROFILER, 3.4MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) 22,26,36
IEHA446 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
IMMBP35 CERTAIN MANUAL BONE PROFILER, 3.4MM(D) X 5MM(P) 36
4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 6MM(H)
IMMCS1 CERTAIN COVER SCREW, 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 1,2,3,4,5,6
IEHA448 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 8MM(H) IMPDTL CERTAIN IMPLANT PLACEMENT DRIVER TIP, 3.4MM(D) LONG 30,32,40
IEHA453 BELLATEK CERTAIN ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 IMPDTS CERTAIN IMPLANT PLACEMENT DRIVER TIP, 3.4MM(D) SHORT 30,32,40
4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) IRE100U CERTAIN UNIVERSAL RATCHET EXTENSION, 6MM(L) SHORT 30,32,39
IEHA454 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 IRE200U CERTAIN UNIVERSAL RATCHET EXTENSION, 15MM(L) LONG 30,32,39
4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) IRORDR CERTAIN DRIVER REPLACEMENT O-RINGS, QTY:10 30,32,40
IEHA456 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 ISHA42 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 2MM(H) 13
4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) ISHA43 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 3MM(H) 13
IEHA458 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 ISHA44 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 4MM(H) 13
4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H)
ISHA46 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 6MM(H) 13
IEHA463 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
ISHA48 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 8MM(H) 13
4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H)
ISMHA32 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) X 2MM(H) 13
IEHA464 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12
4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) ISMHA33 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) X 3MM(H) 13

IEHA466 CERTAIN BELLATEK ENCODE 2-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 12 ISMHA34 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) X 4MM(H) 13
4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) ISMHA36 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) X 6MM(H) 13
56
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

ISWHA52 CERTAIN® EP® 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 14 MSGIIML NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) - LONG 22
ISWHA53 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) 14 MSGIIMS NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) - SHORT 22
ISWHA54 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 14 MSGIIM1 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 1(L) 26
ISWHA56 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 14 MSGIIM2 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 2(L) 26
ISWHA58 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H) 14 MSGIIM3 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 3(L) 26
ISWHA62 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 14 MSGIIM4 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 4(L) 26
ISWHA63 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H) 14 MSGSD NAVIGATOR STARTER DRILL, 3.4MM(D) 25
ISWHA64 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 14 MSGTAP NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) 26
ISWHA66 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 14 MSGTCDL TAPERED NAVIGATOR COUNTERSINK DRILL, 3.4MM(D) - LONG 21
ISWHA68 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H) 14 MSGTCDS TAPERED NAVIGATOR COUNTERSINK DRILL, 3.4MM(D) - SHORT 21
ITHA52 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 13 MSGTD10L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 22
ITHA53 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) 13 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) - LONG
ITHA54 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 13 MSGTD10S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 21
ITHA56 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 13 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) - SHORT

ITHA58 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H) 13 MSGTD11L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 22
3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) - LONG
ITHA63 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H) 13
MSGTD11S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 21
ITHA64 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 13
3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) - SHORT
ITHA66 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 13
MSGTD13L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 22
ITHA68 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H) 13 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) - LONG
IWTH52 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 14 MSGTD13S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 21
IWTH53 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) 14 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) - SHORT
IWTH54 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 14 MSGTD15L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 22
IWTH56 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 14 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) - LONG
IWTH562 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 14 MSGTD15S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 21
IWTH563 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H) 14 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) - SHORT
IWTH564 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 14 MSGTD85L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 22
3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) - LONG
IWTH566 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 14
MSGTD85S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 21
IWTH568 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H) 14
3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) - SHORT
IWTH58 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H) 14
MSGTT10L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 10(L) - LONG 23
IWTH62 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 14
MSGTT10S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 10(L) - SHORT 23
IWTH63 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H) 14
MSGTT11L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5(L) - LONG 23
IWTH64 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 14
MSGTT11S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5(L) - SHORT 23
IWTH66 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 14
MSGTT13L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 13(L) - LONG 23
IWTH68 CERTAIN EP 1-PC HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H) 14
MSGTT13S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 13(L) - SHORT 23
LPCBP3 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT BONE PROFILER, 3.4MM(D) 36
MSGTT15L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 15(L) - LONG 23
LPCBP4 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT BONE PROFILER, 4.1MM(D) 36
MSGTT15S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 15(L) - SHORT 23
LPCBP5 LOW PROFILE ABUTMENT BONE PROFILER, 5MM(D) 36
MSGTT85L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5(L) - LONG 23
MALL1 MALLET, STAINLESS STEEL 39
MSGTT85S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5(L) - SHORT 23
MDR10 HANDPIECE CONNECTOR 22,26,30,32,34,40
MTAP1 DENSE BONE TAP FOR PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANTS, 3.25MM(D) - SHORT 37
ME100 SMALL MEMBRANE ELEVATOR 42
MTAP2 DENSE BONE TAP FOR PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANTS, 3.25MM(D) - LONG 32,33,37
ME200 MEDIUM MEMBRANE ELEVATOR 42
NIITP4310 NANOTITE™ TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL® IMPLANT, 3
ME300 LARGE MEMBRANE ELEVATOR 42
4MM(D) X 3MM(P) X 10MM(L)
MHA32 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 2MM(H) 16
NIITP4311 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3
MHA33 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 3MM(H) 16 4MM(D) X 3MM(P) X 11.5MM(L)
MHA34 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 4MM(H) 16 NIITP4313 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3
MHA36 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 3.4MM(D) X 3.8MM(P) X 6MM(H) 16 4MM(D) X 3MM(P) X 13MM(L)
MIDTH MANUAL INTERCHANGEABLE DRIVER TIP HANDLE 39 NIITP4315 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3
MMC03 IMPLANT MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 3MM(L) 38 4MM(D) X 3MM(P) X 15MM(L)
MMC15 IMPLANT MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 30,32,34,38 NIITP4385 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3
MMCS1 IMPLANT COVER SCREW, 3.4MM(D) X 1MM(H) 7,8,9,10 4MM(D) X 3MM(P) X 8.5MM(L)

MMKIT IMPLANT MOUNT KIT, 3.4MM(D) 38 NIITP5410 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3
5MM(D) X 4MM(P) X 10MM(L)
MSGIAM1 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 1(L)
®
27
NIITP5411 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3
MSGIAM2 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 2(L) 27
5MM(D) X 4MM(P) X 11.5MM(L)
MSGIAM3 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 3(L) 27
NIITP5413 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3
MSGIAM4 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) X 4(L) 27
5MM(D) X 4MM(P) X 13MM(L)
MSGIAML NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) - LONG 24
NIITP5415 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3
MSGIAMS NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 3.4MM(D) - SHORT 24 5MM(D) X 4MM(P) X 15MM(L)
57
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

NIITP5485 NANOTITE™ TAPERED CERTAIN® PREVAIL® IMPLANT, 3 NIOSM318 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
5MM(D) X 4MM(P) X 8.5MM(L) 3.25MM(D) X 18MM(L)
NIITP6510 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3 NIOSM385 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 10MM(L) 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
NIITP6511 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3 NIOSS410 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 11.5MM(L) 4MM(D) X 10MM(L)
NIITP6513 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3 NIOSS411 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 13MM(L) 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
NIITP6515 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3 NIOSS413 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 15MM(L) 4MM(D) X 13MM(L)
NIITP6585 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 3 NIOSS415 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8.5MM(L) 4MM(D) X 15MM(L)
NINT3210 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 3 NIOSS418 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
NINT3211 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 3 4MM(D) X 18MM(L)
NINT3213 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 3 NIOSS485 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
NINT3215 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 3 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)

NINT3285 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 3 NIOSS510 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
5MM(D) X 10MM(L)
NINT410 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 3
NIOSS511 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
NINT411 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 3
5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
NINT413 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 3
NIOSS513 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 5
NINT415 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 3
NIOSS515 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 5
NINT485 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 3
NIOSS585 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 5
NINT510 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 3
NIOSS610 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 5
NINT511 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 3
NIOSS611 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 5
NINT513 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 3
NIOSS613 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 5
NINT515 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 3
NIOSS615 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 5
NINT585 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 3
NNT3210 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
NINT610 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 3
NNT3211 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
NINT611 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 3
NNT3213 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
NINT613 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 3
NNT3215 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
NINT615 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 3
NNT3285 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
NINT685 NANOTITE TAPERED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 3
NNT410 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
NIIOS4310 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
NNT411 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
4MM(D) X 3.4MM(C) X 10MM(L)
NNT413 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
NIIOS4311 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
4MM(D) X 3.4MM(C) X 11.5MM(L) NNT415 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7

NIIOS4313 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4 NNT485 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
4MM(D) X 3.4MM(C) X 13MM(L) NNT510 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
NIIOS4315 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4 NNT511 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
4MM(D) X 3.4MM(C) X 15MM(L) NNT513 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
NIIOS4385 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4 NNT515 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
4MM(D) X 3.4MM(C) X 8.5MM(L) NNT585 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
NIIOS5485 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4 NNT610 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 7
5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 8.5MM(L) NNT611 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 7
NIIOS5410 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4 NNT613 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 7
5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 10MM(L)
NNT615 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 7
NIIOS5411 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
NNT685 NANOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 7
5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 11MM(L)
NOSM310 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 9
NIIOS5413 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 13MM(L) NOSM311 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 9

NIIOS5415 NANOTITE CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4 NOSM313 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 9
5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 15MM(L) NOSM315 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 9
NIOSM310 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5 NOSM318 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 18MM(L) 9
3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) NOSM385 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 9
NIOSM311 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5 NOSS407 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 7MM(L) 9
3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) NOSS410 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 9
NIOSM313 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5 NOSS411 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 9
3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L)
NOSS413 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 9
NIOSM315 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 5
NOSS415 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 9
3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L)
58
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

NOSS418 NANOTITE™ PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 18MM(L) 9 NTAPKT DENSE BONE TAP KIT TRAY FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS 29
NOSS485 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 9 NTDI3210 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 3.25MM X 10MM 29,38
NOSS507 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 7MM(L) 9 NTDI3211 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 3.25MM X 11.5MM 29,38
NOSS510 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 9 NTDI3213 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 3.25MM X 13MM 29,38
NOSS511 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 9 NTDI3215 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 3.25MM X 15MM 29,38
NOSS513 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 9 NTDI3285 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 3.25MM X 8.5MM 29,38
NOSS515 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 9 NTDI410 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 4MM X 10MM 29,38
NOSS518 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 18MM(L) 9 NTDI411 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 4MM X 11.5MM 29,38
NOSS585 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 9 NTDI413 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 4MM X 13MM 29,38
NOSS607 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 7MM(L) 9 NTDI415 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 4MM X 15MM 29,38
NOSS610 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 9 NTDI485 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 4MM X 8.5MM 29,38
NOSS611 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 9 NTDI510 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 5MM X 10MM 29,38
NOSS613 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 9 NTDI511 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 5MM X 11.5MM 29,38
NOSS615 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 9 NTDI513 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 5MM X 13MM 29,38
NOSS618 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 18MM(L) 9 NTDI515 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 5MM X 15MM 29,38
NOSS685 NANOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 9 NTDI585 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 5MM X 8.5MM 29,38
NT3210 OSSEOTITE® TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 8 NTDI610 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 6MM X 10MM 29,38
NT3211 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 8 NTDI611 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 6MM X 11.5MM 29,38
NT3213 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 8 NTDI613 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 6MM X 13MM 29,38
NT3215 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 8 NTDI615 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 6MM X 15MM 29,38
NT3285 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 8 NTDI685 OSSEOTITE TAPERED DEPTH INDICATOR, 6MM X 8.5MM 29,38
NT410 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 8 NTDIK OSSEOTITE TAPERED DIRECTION/DEPTH INDICATOR KIT 38
NT411 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 8 NTOST0 OSSEOTITE TAPERED OSTEOTOME SYSTEM KIT, STRAIGHT 41
NT413 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 8 NTOST0A OSSEOTITE TAPERED OSTEOTOME SYSTEM KIT, ANGLED 41
NT415 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 8 NTOST3 OSSEOTITE TAPERED STRAIGHT OSTEOTOME, 3.25MM 41
NT485 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 8 NTOST3A OSSEOTITE TAPERED ANGLED OSTEOTOME, 3.25MM 41
NT510 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 8 NTOST4 OSSEOTITE TAPERED STRAIGHT OSTEOTOME, 4MM 41
NT511 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 8 NTOST4A OSSEOTITE TAPERED ANGLED OSTEOTOME, 4MM 41
NT513 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 8 NTOST5 OSSEOTITE TAPERED STRAIGHT OSTEOTOME, 5MM 41
NT515 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 8 NTOST5A OSSEOTITE TAPERED ANGLED OSTEOTOME, 5MM 41
NT585 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 8 NTOST6 OSSEOTITE TAPERED STRAIGHT OSTEOTOME, 6MM 41
NT610 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 8 NTOST6A OSSEOTITE TAPERED ANGLED OSTEOTOME, 6MM 41
NT611 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 8 NTOSTTRA OSSEOTITE TAPERED OSTEOTOME TRAY, ANGLED 41
NT613 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 8 NTOSTTRS OSSEOTITE TAPERED OSTEOTOME TRAY, STRAIGHT 41
NT615 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 8 OG1520 OSSEOGUARD® RESORBABLE COLLAGEN MEMBRANE, 15MM X 20MM 47
NT685 OSSEOTITE TAPERED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 8 OG2030 OSSEOGUARD RESORBABLE COLLAGEN MEMBRANE, 20MM X 30MM 47
NTAP3210 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 28,37 OG3040 OSSEOGUARD RESORBABLE COLLAGEN MEMBRANE, 30MM X 40MM 47
NTAP3211 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 28,37 OGF1520 OSSEOGUARD FLEX® RESORBABLE COLLAGEN MEMBRANE, 15MM X 20MM 47
NTAP3213 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 28,37 OGF2030 OSSEOGUARD FLEX RESORBABLE COLLAGEN MEMBRANE, 20MM X 30MM 47
NTAP3215 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 28,37 OGF3040 OSSEOGUARD FLEX RESORBABLE COLLAGEN MEMBRANE, 30MM X 40MM 47
NTAP3285 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 28,37 OSM310 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 10
NTAP410 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 28,37 OSM311 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10
NTAP411 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 28,37 OSM313 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10
NTAP413 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 28,37 OSM315 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10
NTAP415 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 28,37 OSM318 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 18MM(L) 10
NTAP485 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 28,37 OSM385 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10
NTAP510 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 28,37 OSS310 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 6MM(L) 10
NTAP511 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 29,37 OSS311 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10
NTAP513 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 29,37 OSS313 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10
NTAP515 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 29,37 OSS315 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10
NTAP585 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 28,37 OSS318 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 18MM(L) 10
NTAP610 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 29,37 OSS320 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 20MM(L) 10
NTAP611 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 29,37 OSS385 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10
NTAP613 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 29,37 OSS410 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 6MM(L) 10
NTAP615 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 29,37 OSS411 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10
NTAP685 DENSE BONE TAP FOR TAPERED IMPLANTS, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 29,37 OSS413 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10
NTAPK DENSE BONE TAP KIT 37 OSS415 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10
59
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

OSS418 OSSEOTITE® PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 18MM(L) 10 QSD513 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 28,35
OSS420 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 20MM(L) 10 QSD515 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 28,35
OSS485 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10 QSD585 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 28,35
OSS507 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 7MM(L) 10 QSD610 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 28,35
OSS510 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 10 QSD611 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 28,35
OSS511 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10 QSD613 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 28,35
OSS513 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10 QSD615 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 28,35
OSS515 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10 QSD685 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 28,35
OSS518 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 18MM(L) 10 RASH3N NARROW RIGHT ANGLE LARGE HEXED DRIVER TIP, 24MM(L) 22,26,30,32,34
OSS585 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10 RDCA205 CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 200-300µm 45
OSS607 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 7MM(L) 10 RDCA210 CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 1CC, 200-300µm 45
OSS610 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 10 RDCA220 CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 2CC, 200-300µm 45
OSS611 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 10 RDCA305 CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 300-500µm 45
OSS613 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 10 RDCA305R CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 0.5CC, 300-500µm 46
OSS615 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 10 RDCA310 CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 1CC, 300-500µm 45
OSS618 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 18MM(L) 10 RDCA310R CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 1CC, 300-500µm 46
OSS685 OSSEOTITE PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 10 RDCA320 CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 2CC, 300-500µm 45
OST00 SUMMERS OSTEOTOME KIT #1-4 41 RDCA320R CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 2CC, 300-500µm 46
OST01 SUMMERS OSTEOTOME #1 41 RDCA505 CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 500-800µm 45
OST02 SUMMERS OSTEOTOME #2 41 RDCA510 CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 1CC, 500-800µm 45
OST03 SUMMERS OSTEOTOME #3 41 RDCA520 CANCELLOUS, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 2CC, 500-800µm 45
OST04 SUMMERS OSTEOTOME #4 41 RDCO205 CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 200-300µm 45
OST05 SUMMERS OSTEOTOME #5 41 RDCO205R CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 0.5CC, 200-300µm 46
OST10 SUMMERS OSTEOTOME KIT #1-5 41 RDCO210 CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 1CC, 200-300µm 45
OST20 SUMMERS OSTEOTOME KIT #1-5 AND FUTURE SITE 41 RDCO220 CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 2CC, 200-300µm 45
OSTFS SUMMERS OSTEOTOME FOR FUTURE SITE 41 RDCO305 CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 300-500µm 45
OSTTR SUMMERS OSTEOTOME SYSTEM TRAY 41 RDCO305R CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 0.5CC, 300-500µm 46
PD100 PILOT REUSABLE DRILL, 2-3MM 32,33,35 RDCO310 CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 1CC, 300-500µm 45
PEMODLOC PATIENT ED MODEL - LOCATOR® 48 RDCO310R CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 1CC, 300-500µm 46
PEMODSM PATIENT ED MODEL - SINGLE/MULTIPLE TEETH 48 RDCO320 CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 2CC, 300-500µm 45
PHD00N NARROW POSTERIOR SMALL HEX DRIVER, 17MM 30,32,34 RDCO320R CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 2CC, 300-500µm 46
PHD02N NARROW POSTERIOR LARGE HEX DRIVER, 17MM 22,26,30,32,34 RDCO505 CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 500-800µm 45
PSKT01 STARTER KIT 31,32 RDCO510 CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 1CC, 500-800µm 45
PSKT10 BASIC SURGICAL KIT - PLASTIC 33,34 RDCO520 CORTICAL, PARTIALLY DEMINERALIZED, 2CC, 500-800µm 45
PSKT20 STANDARD UNISYSTEM SURGICAL KIT - PLASTIC 33,34 RD100 STAINLESS STEEL ROUND DRILL, 2MM(D) 32,34,35
PSKT30 PREMIUM UNISYSTEM SURGICAL KIT 33,34 RE100 RATCHET EXTENSION - SHORT, 6MM(L) 22,26,29,32,34,39
PSKT35 CERTAIN® PREMIUM SURGICAL KIT 31,32 RE200 RATCHET EXTENSION - LONG, 15MM(L) 22,26,29,32,34,39
PSKT40 CERTAIN PREMIUM SURGICAL KIT FOR PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT 31,32 RMB30 RADIOGRAPHIC MARKING BALLS (30-PACK) 40
PTT100 PLASTIC TRAY ORGANIZER 31,33,34 RMCA205 CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 200-300µm 45
PTT300I PLASTIC SURGICAL TRAY ORGANIZER 31,33 RMCA205R CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 0.5CC, 200-300µm 46
QBM001 R. QUÉTIN BONE MILL 47 RMCA210 CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, 1CC, 200-300µm 45
QNTSK20 TAPERED IMPLANT STARTER (BASIC) KIT 28,29,30 RMCA220 CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, 2CC, 200-300µm 45
QNTSK40 TAPERED IMPLANT QUAD SHAPING DRILL, PREMIUM SURGICAL KIT 28,29,30 RMCA305 CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 300-500µm 45
QNTSK40U TAPERED IMPLANT QUAD SHAPING DRILL, PREMIUM UPGRADE KIT 28,29,30 RMCA305R CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 0.5CC, 300-500µm 46
QNTSKT QSD/NTDI SURGICAL TRAY 29 RMCA310 CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, 1CC, 300-500µm 45
QSD3210 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 28,35 RMCA310R CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 1CC, 300-500µm 46
QSD3211 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 28,35 RMCA320 CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, 2CC, 300-500µm 45
QSD3213 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 28,35 RMCA505 CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 500-800µm 45
QSD3215 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 28,35 RMCA510 CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, 1CC, 500-800µm 45
QSD3285 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 28,35 RMCA520 CANCELLOUS, MINERALIZED, 2CC, 500-800µm 45
QSD410 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 28,35 RMCO205 CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 200-300µm 45
QSD411 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 28,35 RMCO210 CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, 1CC, 200-300µm 45
QSD413 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 28,35 RMCO220 CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, 2CC, 200-300µm 45
QSD415 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 28,35 RMCO305 CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 300-500µm 45
QSD485 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 28,35 RMCO305R CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 0.5CC, 300-500µm 46
QSD510 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 28,35 RMCO310 CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, 1CC, 300-500µm 45
QSD511 QUAD SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 28,35 RMCO310R CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, IRRADIATED, 1CC, 300-500µm 46
60
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

RMCO320 CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, 2CC, 300-500µm 45 SGDPH2 NAVIGATOR DRILL POSITIONING HANDLE 2 26
RMCO505 CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, 0.5CC, 500-800µm 45 SGDPH3 NAVIGATOR DRILL POSITIONING HANDLE 3 26
RMCO510 CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, 1CC, 500-800µm 45 SGDPH4 NAVIGATOR DRILL POSITIONING HANDLE 4 26
RMCO520 CORTICAL, MINERALIZED, 2CC, 500-800µm 45 SGDPH5 NAVIGATOR DRILL POSITIONING HANDLE 5 26
ROAP05 REGENEROSS® ALLOGRAFT PUTTY, 0.5CC SYRINGE 46 SGIAM4L NAVIGATOR CERTAIN® ANALOG MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) - LONG 24
ROAP10 REGENEROSS ALLOGRAFT PUTTY, 1CC SYRINGE 46 SGIAM4S NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) - SHORT 24
ROAP20 REGENEROSS ALLOGRAFT PUTTY, 2CC SYRINGE 46 SGIAM5L NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 5MM(D) - LONG 24
ROAPM05 REGENEROSS ALLOGRAFT PUTTY PLUS, 0.5CC SYRINGE 46 SGIAM5S NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 5MM(D) - SHORT 24
ROAPM10 REGENEROSS ALLOGRAFT PUTTY PLUS, 1CC SYRINGE 46 SGIAM41 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) X 1(L) 27
ROAPM20 REGENEROSS ALLOGRAFT PUTTY PLUS, 2CC (4 X 0.5CC SYRINGES) 46 SGIAM42 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) X 2(L) 27
ROX05 ENDOBON® XENOGRAFT GRANULES, 0.5ML PACK 47 SGIAM43 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) X 3(L) 27
ROX10 ENDOBON XENOGRAFT GRANULES, 1ML PACK 47 SGIAM44 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) X 4(L) 27
ROX20 ENDOBON XENOGRAFT GRANULES, 2ML PACK 47 SGIAM51 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 5MM(D) X 1(L) 27
ROXLG20 ENDOBON XENOGRAFT GRANULES, 1000–2000µm, 2ML 47 SGIAM52 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 5MM(D) X 2(L) 27
ROXLG50 ENDOBON XENOGRAFT GRANULES, 1000–2000µm, 5ML 47 SGIAM53 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 5MM(D) X 3(L) 27
ROXLG80 ENDOBON XENOGRAFT GRANULES, 1000–2000µm, 8ML 47 SGIAM54 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN ANALOG MOUNT, 5MM(D) X 4(L) 27
SEKT1 SINUS ELEVATION KIT 42 SGIIM4L NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) - LONG 22
SEKTR SINUS ELEVATION TRAY 42 SGIIM4S NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) - SHORT 22
SGD275A NAVIGATOR® TWIST DRILL 2.75MM(D) X A(L) 25 SGIIM5L NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 5MM(D) - LONG 22
SGD275B NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2.75MM(D) X B(L) 25 SGIIM5S NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 5MM(D) - SHORT 22
SGD275C NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2.75MM(D) X C(L) 25 SGIIM41 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) X 1(L) 26
SGD275D NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2.75MM(D) X D(L) 25 SGIIM42 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) X 2(L) 26
SGD275E NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2.75MM(D) X E(L) 25 SGIIM43 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) X 3(L) 26
SGD275Y NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2.75MM(D) X Y(L) 26 SGIIM44 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 4.1MM(D) X 4(L) 26
SGD275Z NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2.75MM(D) X Z(L) 26 SGIIM51 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 5MM(D) X 1(L) 26
SGD2A NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2MM(D) X A(L) 25 SGIIM52 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 5MM(D) X 2(L) 26
SGD2B NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2MM(D) X B(L) 25 SGIIM53 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 5MM(D) X 3(L) 26
SGD2C NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2MM(D) X C(L) 25 SGIIM54 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN IMPLANT MOUNT, 5MM(D) X 4(L) 26
SGD2D NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2MM(D) X D(L) 25 SGISD5 NAVIGATOR CERTAIN STARTER DRILL, 5MM(D) 25
SGD2Y NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2MM(D) X Y(L) 26 SGKIT NAVIGATOR SURGICAL KIT 25,26
SGD2Z NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2MM(D) X Z(L) 26 SGLKIT NAVIGATOR LABORATORY KIT 27
SGD325A NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X A(L) 25 SGLTRAY NAVIGATOR LABORATORY TRAY 27
SGD325B NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X B(L) 25 SGQ-ER20H OSSEOCISION® 20:1 HANDPIECE 20
SGD325C NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X C(L) 25 SGSD34 NAVIGATOR STARTER DRILL, 3/4MM(D) 25
SGD325D NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X D(L) 25 SGSD4 NAVIGATOR STARTER DRILL, 4.1MM(D) 25
SGD325E NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X E(L) 25 SGSD45 NAVIGATOR STARTER DRILL, 4/5MM(D) 25
SGD325Y NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X Y(L) 26 SGT25 STENT GUIDE TUBE (25-PACK) 40
SGD325Z NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.25MM(D) X Z(L) 26 SGTAP4 NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) 26
SGD385A NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.85MM(D) X A(L) 25 SGTAP45 NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4/5MM(D) 26
SGD385B NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.85MM(D) X B(L) 25 SGTAP5 NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) 26
SGD385C NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.85MM(D) X C(L) 25 SGTCD4L TAPERED NAVIGATOR COUNTERSINK DRILL, 4.1MM(D) - LONG 21
SGD385Y NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.85MM(D) X Y(L) 26 SGTCD4S TAPERED NAVIGATOR COUNTERSINK DRILL, 4.1MM(D) - SHORT 21
SGD385Z NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3.85MM(D) X Z(L) 26 SGTCD5L TAPERED NAVIGATOR COUNTERSINK DRILL, 5MM(D) - LONG 21
SGD3A NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3MM(D) X A(L) 25 SGTCD5S TAPERED NAVIGATOR COUNTERSINK DRILL, 5MM(D) - SHORT 21
SGD3B NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3MM(D) X B(L) 25 SGTCP4L TAPERED NAVIGATOR CORTICAL PERFORATOR, 4.1MM(D) - LONG 21
SGD3C NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3MM(D) X C(L) 25 SGTCP4S TAPERED NAVIGATOR CORTICAL PERFORATOR, 4.1MM(D) - SHORT 21
SGD3D NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3MM(D) X D(L) 25 SGTCP5L TAPERED NAVIGATOR CORTICAL PERFORATOR, 5MM(D) - LONG 21
SGD3E NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3MM(D) X E(L) 25 SGTCP5S TAPERED NAVIGATOR CORTICAL PERFORATOR, 5MM(D) - SHORT 21
SGD3Y NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3MM(D) X Y(L) 26 SGTD19A TAPERED NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 1.9MM(D) X A(L) 21
SGD3Z NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 3MM(D) X Z(L) 26 SGTD19B TAPERED NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 1.9MM(D) X B(L) 21
SGD425A NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 4.25MM(D) X A(L) 25 SGTD19C TAPERED NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 1.9MM(D) X C(L) 21
SGD425B NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 4.25MM(D) X B(L) 26 SGTD19D TAPERED NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 1.9MM(D) X D(L) 21
SGD425C NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 4.25MM(D) X C(L) 26 SGTD19E TAPERED NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 1.9MM(D) X E(L) 21
SGD425Y NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 4.25MM(D) X Y(L) 26 SGTD19F TAPERED NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 1.9MM(D) X F(L) 21
SGD425Z NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 4.25MM(D) X Z(L) 26 SGTD19G TAPERED NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 1.9MM(D) X G(L) 21
SGD2E NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL, 2MM(D) X E(L) 25 SGTD410L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 10MM(L) - LONG 22
SGDPH1 NAVIGATOR DRILL POSITIONING HANDLE 1 26 SGTD410S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 10MM(L) - SHORT 21
61
Index
Item# Description Page#

SGTD411L TAPERED NAVIGATOR® SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) - LONG 22 TAP53S BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 7-13MM(L) 32,33,37
SGTD411S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) - SHORT 21 TAP58S BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 7-8.5MM(L) 37
SGTD413L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 13MM(L) - LONG 22 TAP618S BONE TAP, 6MM(D) X 7-18MM(L) 37
SGTD413S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 13MM(L) - SHORT 21 TAP63S BONE TAP, 6MM(D) X 7-13MM(L) 32,33,37
SGTD415L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 15MM(L) - LONG 22 TAP68S BONE TAP, 6MM(D) X 7-8.5MM(L) 37
SGTD415S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 15MM(L) - SHORT 21 TE003 TITANIUM ELEVATOR 39
SGTD485L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) - LONG 22 TF002 TITANIUM FORCEPS 39
SGTD485S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 4.1MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) - SHORT 21 THA42 EP® 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 2MM(H) 16
SGTD510L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) - LONG 22 THA43 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 3MM(H) 16
SGTD510S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) - SHORT 22 THA44 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 4MM(H) 16
SGTD511L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) - LONG 22 THA46 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 6MM(H) 16
SGTD511S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) - SHORT 22 THA48 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 8MM(H) 16
SGTD513L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) - LONG 22 THA52 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 16
SGTD513S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) - SHORT 22 THA53 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) 16
SGTD515L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) - LONG 22 THA54 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 16
SGTD515S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) - SHORT 22 THA56 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 16
SGTD585L TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) - LONG 22 THA58 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H) 16
SGTD585S TAPERED NAVIGATOR SHAPING DRILL, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) - SHORT 21 THA63 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H) 16
SGTDPHR TAPERED NAVIGATOR REDUCTION DRILL POSITIONING HANDLE 22 THA64 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 16
SGTDPHT TAPERED NAVIGATOR TWIST DRILL POSITIONING HANDLE 22 THA66 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 16
SGTLTRAY TAPERED NAVIGATOR LABORATORY TRAY 24 THA68 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H) 16
SGTP4 NAVIGATOR TISSUE PUNCH, 4.1MM(D) 25 THRC4 TEMPORARY HEALING RETENTION CYLINDER, 4.1MM(D) X 4MM(H) 16
SGTP5 NAVIGATOR TISSUE PUNCH, 5MM(D) 25 THRC6 TEMPORARY HEALING RETENTION CYLINDER, 4.1MM(D) X 6MM(H) 16
SGTRAY NAVIGATOR SURGICAL TRAY 25 TIBC1 TITANIUM NITRIDE COATED BONE CARRIER FOR SEKT1 42
SGTT410L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 10(L) - LONG 23 TIPL1 LARGE TITANIUM PLUGGER 42
SGTT410S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 10(L) - SHORT 23 TIPS1 SMALL TITANIUM PLUGGER 42
SGTT411L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 11.5(L) - LONG 23 TMP80 TISSUE MEASURING POST 39
SGTT411S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 11.5(L) - SHORT 23 TP001 TISSUE PUNCH, 4.1MM(D) 40
SGTT413L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 13(L) - LONG 23 TP005 TISSUE PUNCH, 5MM(D) 40
SGTT413S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 13(L) - SHORT 23 TP006 TISSUE PUNCH, 6MM(D) 40
SGTT415L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 15(L) - LONG 23 TRE02 TREPHINE BUR - 2MM INSIDE DIAMETER/3MM OUTSIDE DIAMETER 42
SGTT415S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 15(L) - SHORT 23 TRE04 TREPHINE BUR - 4MM INSIDE DIAMETER/5MM OUTSIDE DIAMETER 42
SGTT485L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 8.5(L) - LONG 23 TRE05 TREPHINE BUR - 5MM INSIDE DIAMETER/6MM OUTSIDE DIAMETER 42
SGTT485S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 4.1MM(D) X 8.5(L) - SHORT 23 TRE06 TREPHINE BUR - 6MM INSIDE DIAMETER/7MM OUTSIDE DIAMETER 42
SGTT510L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 10(L) - LONG 23 TRE08 TREPHINE BUR - 8MM INSIDE DIAMETER/9.3MM OUTSIDE DIAMETER 42
SGTT510S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 10(L) - SHORT 23 TST01 TITANIUM SUCTION TIP 39
SGTT511L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 11.5(L) - LONG 23 U198-013 OSSEOCISION® ELECTRICAL POWER CORD, 230V (AUSTRALIA) 20
SGTT511S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 11.5(L) - SHORT 23 U260-414 OSSEOCISION ELECTRICAL POWER CORD, 230V (EUROPE) 20
SGTT513L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 13(L) - LONG 23 U195-152 OSSEOCISION FUSES (100V/120V) 20
SGTT513S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 13(L) - SHORT 23 U197-152 OSSEOCISION FUSES (230V) 20
SGTT515L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 15(L) - LONG 23 U370-152 OSSEOCISION COOLANT SOLUTION HANGER POST 20
SGTT515S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 15(L) - SHORT 23 U370-003 OSSEOCISION CONTROL UNIT, 100V 20
SGTT585L TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 8.5(L) - LONG 23 U371-003 OSSEOCISION CONTROL UNIT, 120V 20
SGTT585S TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 8.5(L) - SHORT 23 U372-003 OSSEOCISION CONTROL UNIT, 230V 20
SGTTAPT TAPERED NAVIGATOR BONE TAP TRAY 23 U389-013 OSSEOCISION ELECTRICAL POWER CORD, 100V 20
SGTTP4 TAPERED NAVIGATOR TISSUE PUNCH, 4.1MM(D) 21 WR150 RATCHET WRENCH 22,26,29,32,34
SGTTP5 TAPERED NAVIGATOR TISSUE PUNCH, 5MM(D) 21 WTH52 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 2MM(H) 16
SGTTRAY TAPERED NAVIGATOR SURGICAL TRAY 21 WTH53 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 3MM(H) 16
SLIMKT SURGICAL SLIM KIT FOR TAPERED CERTAIN® IMPLANTS 28,29,30 WTH54 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 4MM(H) 16
SLIMKTE SURGICAL SLIM KIT FOR CERTAIN & EXTERNAL HEX IMPLANTS 28,29,30 WTH56 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 6MM(H) 16
TAP10 BONE TAP, 3.75MM(D) X 7-10MM(L) 37 WTH562 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 16
TAP13 BONE TAP, 3.75MM(D) X 7-13MM(L) 37 WTH563 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H) 16
TAP20 BONE TAP, 3.75MM(D) X 7-20MM(L) 37 WTH564 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 16
TAP410 BONE TAP, 4MM(D) X 7-10MM(L) 37 WTH566 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 16
TAP413 BONE TAP, 4MM(D) X 7-13MM(L) 32,33,37 WTH568 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H) 16
TAP420 BONE TAP, 4MM(D) X 7-20MM(L) 37 WTH58 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 5MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8MM(H) 16
TAP518S BONE TAP, 5MM(D) X 7-18MM(L) 37 WTH62 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 2MM(H) 16
62
Index
Item# Description Page# Item# Description Page#

WTH63 EP® 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 3MM(H) 16 XIFOSS511 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
WTH64 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 4MM(H) 16 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
WTH66 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 6MM(H) 16 XIFOSS513 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
WTH68 EP 1-PIECE HEALING ABUTMENT, 6MM(D) X 6MM(P) X 8MM(H) 16 5MM(D) X 13MM(L)
XDG00 GELB X-RAY DEPTH GAUGE KIT 40 XIFOSS515 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
XDG01 GELB X-RAY DEPTH GAUGE KIT, 2.3MM(D) 40 5MM(D) X 15MM(L)
XDG13 GELB X-RAY DEPTH GAUGE, 2MM(D) X 13MM(L) 40 XIFOSS585 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
XDG20 GELB X-RAY DEPTH GAUGE, 2MM(D) X 20MM(L) 40
XIFOSS610 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
XDG2313 GELB X-RAY DEPTH GAUGE, 2.3MM(D) X 13MM(L) 40
6MM(D) X 10MM(L)
XDG2320 GELB X-RAY DEPTH GAUGE, 2.3MM(D) X 20MM(L) 40
XIFOSS611 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
XFOS310 OSSEOTITE® 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 10MM(L) 9
6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
XFOS311 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 9
XIFOSS613 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
XFOS313 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 13MM(L) 9
6MM(D) X 13MM(L)
XFOS315 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 15MM(L) 9
XIFOSS615 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
XFOS365 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 9 6MM(D) X 15MM(L)
XFOS385 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.75MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 9 XIFOSS685 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
XFOS410 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 10MM(L) 9 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L)
XFOS411 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 9 XIIOS4310 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL® IMPLANT, 4
XFOS413 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 13MM(L) 9 4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) X 10MM(L)
XFOS415 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 15MM(L) 9 XIIOS4311 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOS465 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 9 4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) X 11.5MM(L)
XFOS485 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 9 XIIOS4313 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOS510 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 10MM(L) 9 4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) X 13MM(L)
XFOS511 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 9 XIIOS4315 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOS513 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 13MM(L) 9 4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) X 15MM(L)
XFOS515 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 15MM(L) 9 XIIOS4385 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOS565 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 9 4MM(D) X 3.4MM(P) X 8.5MM(L)

XFOS585 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 5MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 9 XIIOS5410 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 10MM(L)
XFOS610 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 10MM(L) 9
XIIOS5411 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOS611 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 9
5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 11.5MM(L)
XFOS613 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 13MM(L) 9
XIIOS5413 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOS615 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 15MM(L) 9
5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 13MM(L)
XFOS665 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 9
XIIOS5415 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOS685 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 6MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 9
5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 15MM(L)
XFOSM310 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 9
XIIOS5485 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOSM311 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 9 5MM(D) X 4.1MM(P) X 8.5MM(L)
XFOSM313 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 9 XIIOS6510 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOSM315 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) 9 6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 10MM(L)
XFOSM365 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 6.5MM(L) 9 XIIOS6511 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
XFOSM385 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED IMPLANT, 3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) 9 6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 11.5MM(L)
XIFOSM310 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN® IMPLANT, 6 XIIOS6513 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
3.25MM(D) X 10MM(L) 6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 13MM(L)
XIFOSM311 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6 XIIOS6515 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
3.25MM(D) X 11.5MM(L) 6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 15MM(L)
XIFOSM313 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6 XIIOS6585 OSSEOTITE 2 CERTAIN PREVAIL IMPLANT, 4
3.25MM(D) X 13MM(L) 6MM(D) X 5MM(P) X 8.5MM(L)
XIFOSM315 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6 XTAP518S OSSEOTITE 2 DENSE BONE TAP 5MM(D) X 7-18MM(L) 37
3.25MM(D) X 15MM(L) XTAP53S OSSEOTITE 2 DENSE BONE TAP 5MM(D) X 7-13MM(L) 32,33,37
XIFOSM385 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6 XTAP58S OSSEOTITE 2 DENSE BONE TAP 5MM(D) X 7-8.5MM(L) 37
3.25MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) XTAP618S OSSEOTITE 2 DENSE BONE TAP 6MM(D) X 7-18MM(L) 37
XIFOSS410 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6 XTAP63S OSSEOTITE 2 DENSE BONE TAP 6MM(D) X 7-13MM(L) 32,33,37
4MM(D) X 10MM(L)
XTAP68S OSSEOTITE 2 DENSE BONE TAP 6MM(D) X 7-8.5MM(L) 37
XIFOSS411 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
Y900-083 OSSEOCISION® IRRIGATION TUBE HOLDER 20
4MM(D) X 11.5MM(L)
Y900-114 OSSEOCISION IRRIGATION TUBES, DISPOSABLE (10-PACK) 20
XIFOSS413 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
Z095-102 OSSEOCISION MOTOR CRADLE 20
4MM(D) X 13MM(L)
Z103-101 OSSEOCISION HANDPIECE WRENCH 20
XIFOSS415 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
Z114-090 OSSEOCISION SPRAY LUBRICANT NOZZLE 20
4MM(D) X 15MM(L)
XIFOSS485 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6 Z144-095 OSSEOCISION NOZZLE CLEANING FINE WIRE 20
4MM(D) X 8.5MM(L) Z272-004 OSSEOCISION FOOT CONTROL (3.5M) 20
XIFOSS510 OSSEOTITE 2 PARALLEL WALLED CERTAIN IMPLANT, 6
5MM(D) X 10MM(L)
63
 Ordering Form
Customer Account#
Date: ____/____/____
___________________________
Representative taking order
Customer Name: Specialty:

Bill To:________________________________________________ Customer P.O. #:_______________________________________

______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________ Method of Shipment: _____FedEx _____UPS

Phone #: ( )______________________________________
_____Next Day by 8:30am
Ship To:______________________________________________ _____Next Day by 10:30am
______________________________________________________ _____Next Day - Afternoon
______________________________________________________ _____Two Day
Phone #: ( )______________________________________ _____Ground
_____Other_____________
Would you like to receive information via email about
BIOMET 3i Products, Services and Events?
Method of Payment:
n Yes n No n Credit Card: _____Visa _____MasterCard _____AMEX
Email Address: __________________________________ Card #:____________________________________________
Expiration Date:_____________________________________
Special Instructions:
n C.O.D.
Contact Name:
n Bill - Net 30

Product No. Quantity Description Discount Unit Price Total

Date: Order Number: Order Total: Customer Service Representative:

BIOMET 3i
4555 Riverside Drive
Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33410 Thank you for your patronage!
Phone: 800-342-5454 • Fax: 561-776-1272
Website: www.biomet3i.com 64
65
Ordering Information
Some products may not be available outside the U.S.A.
Algunos productos no se comercializan fuera de EE.UU.
Certains produits ne sont pas disponibles en dehors des États-Unis.
Einige Produkte sind außerhalb der USA nicht erhältlich.
To Place an Order:
Contact your local BIOMET 3i Representative or call:
BIOMET 3i Customer Service
Monday–Thursday 8am–8pm (EST)
Friday 8am–6:30pm (EST)
800-342-5454, Fax 561-776-1272
In Canada: 800-363-1980, Outside US: 561-776-6700
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE. The following are the terms and
conditions by which BIOMET 3i sells its products.
GOVERNING TERMS. Any shipment of products shall be deemed to be on
the terms and conditions stated herein. Any and all terms and conditions
submitted by Purchaser are hereby rejected.
TAXES. The prices set forth herein do not include any sales, use, excise,
ad valorem, property or other taxes applicable to the sale, use or delivery
of the products, all of which shall be paid by Purchaser separately or
added to the contract price and paid by Purchaser to BIOMET 3i.
PRICES. The prices set forth for the products are in United States Dollars.
DELIVERY. Products sold hereunder shall be delivered by BIOMET 3i,
F.O.B. Palm Beach Gardens, Florida.
PAYMENT. Payment terms shall be as set forth under the Terms section
on front of the invoice.
WARRANTY. BIOMET 3i nor any of its affiliates make any warranty,
express or implied, except that its products shall be free from defects in
material and/or workmanship. This warranty applies only to the original
Purchaser. In the event of a product defect, immediately notify BIOMET 3i
of the defect prior to returning the product. Devices shall be sterilized
prior to return. As its sole obligation and as Purchaser’s sole remedy
under this warranty, BIOMET 3i will, at its option, either repair, replace or
issue credit for such products. Purchaser assumes all risks and liability
resulting from the use of these products, whether used separately or in
combination with other products.
Except for the warranty expressly described in the warranty paragraph
above, neither BIOMET 3i nor any of its affiliates makes any other
warranty with respect to the BIOMET 3i Products, expressed or implied,
written or oral, including, without limitation, any implied warranty of
merchantability, or a warranty of fitness for a particular purpose.
EDUCATION; MODIFICATION OF PRODUCTS. BIOMET 3i reserves the
right to modify products, discontinue products and change specifications
of products.
RETURN POLICY. A Purchaser may return any BIOMET 3i Product within
90 days of the invoice date. BIOMET 3i Products returned within 60 days
of the invoice date will be accepted without any re-stocking fee to the
Purchaser. BIOMET 3i Products returned between 61 and 90 days of the
invoice date will be subject to a 15% restocking fee. A BIOMET 3i Product
will be accepted for return only if the BIOMET 3i Product is (1) returned in
its original, unopened package (including autoclavable products); (2)
received by BIOMET 3i within 90 days after the invoice date for that
product; and (3) returned freight prepaid to 4555 Riverside Drive, Palm
Beach Gardens, Florida 33410, (Attention: Returns Department)
accompanied by the BIOMET 3i Return Authorization Number provided by
the BIOMET 3i Customer Service Department. Purchaser should be
advised that BIOMET 3i Products not meeting the above criteria will not
be accepted for return.
EXCHANGE POLICY. BIOMET 3i Products may be exchanged within 180
days of the invoice date, without a re-stocking fee, for other BIOMET 3i
Products of equal or lesser value within the same product family as
determined by BIOMET 3i (ex. implant for implant, abutment
for abutment, membrane for membrane). BIOMET 3i Products may be
exchanged within 180 days of the invoice date for other BIOMET 3i
Products of greater value within the same product family as determined
by BIOMET 3i (ex. implant for implant, abutment for abutment, membrane
for membrane), with the price differential paid by the Purchaser. In both
cases, the exchanged BIOMET 3i Product must be (1) returned in its
original, unopened package (including autoclavable products); (2) a
currently offered BIOMET 3i Product (discontinued product not included);
and (3) returned freight prepaid to 4555 Riverside Drive, Palm Beach
Gardens, Florida 33410, (Attention: Returns Department) and
accompanied by the BIOMET 3i Products Return Authorization Number
provided by the BIOMET 3i Customer Service Department.
AVAILABILITY OF PRODUCTS. All products are not available in all areas.
Any offer or product void where prohibited by law.
EXPORT CONTROL. All products are subject to all applicable export
control and sanctions legislation.
FORCE MAJEURE. BIOMET 3i shall not be liable for any loss or damage
due to failure or delay arising out of any cause beyond the reasonable
control of BIOMET 3i. In the event of any failure or delay resulting from
such causes, an equitable adjustment of delivery and any other
appropriate terms and conditions shall be made. No such failure or delay
shall be the basis for an increase of obligation by BIOMET 3i nor any
termination by the Purchaser.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Under no circumstances shall BIOMET 3i nor
any of its affiliates be liable for business interruption, loss of profits,
special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages of any nature and
from any cause whether based in contract, warranty or tort (including
negligence) or other legal theory, even if BIOMET 3i has been advised of
the possibility of such damages.
VALIDITY. If any provision of these Terms and Conditions is found to be
illegal or unenforceable in any respect, such illegality or unenforcibility
shall not affect any other provision of these Terms and Conditions, all of
which shall remain enforceable in accordance with their terms.
GENERAL PROVISIONS. The purchase of the products and these Terms
and Conditions are governed by the laws of Florida without regard to
conflicts of law principles. This document incorporates all oral and written
representations between the parties and constitutes the entire agreement
and understanding of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof
and supercedes any and all other agreements either oral or written
between the parties with respect to such subject matter. No amendment or
modification may be made to this document unless made in writing and
duly executed by an authorized representative of BIOMET 3i.
CAUTION. Federal (U.S.) Law restricts these devices to sale by or on the
order of a licensed healthcare practitioner. Devices labeled STERILE are
certified to be sterile unless sterile package is opened or damaged.
EXPORT ORDERS. Require advance payment or letter of credit. Shipments
are made either by freight collect or paid by BIOMET 3i and added to the
invoice. Unless special instructions are received with an order, the
shipping method will be determined by BIOMET 3i, F.O.B. Palm Beach
Gardens, Florida.
DUNS #: 186127825
BIOMET 3i is listed in the SAM (U.S. System for Award Management)
Database.
©2014 BIOMET 3i LLC.
 Want More? Solutions Start Here
VISIT
www.biomet3i.com

For More Information, Please Contact Your Local BIOMET 3i Sales Representative

BIOMET 3i EC REP BIOMET 3i

4555 Riverside Drive Dental Iberica S.L.
Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33410 WTC Almeda Park, Ed. 1, Planta 1ª
1-800-342-5454 Pl. de la Pau, s/n Join Follow Watch Download
08940, Cornellà de Llobregat Us Us Us It
Outside The U.S.: +1-561-776-6700
Fax: +1-561-776-1272 (Barcelona) Spain
www.biomet3i.com Phone: +34-93-470-55-00
Fax: +34-93-371-78-49

3i T3, ACT, Advanced Cutting Technology, BellaTek, BellaTek design, Biogran, Bone Bonding, Certain, DCD, DIEM, Encode, Endobon, EP, GingiHue, Gold-Tite, Navigator, OSSEOCISION,
OsseoGuard, OsseoGuard Flex, OSSEOTITE, OSSEOTITE XP, PreFormance, PREVAIL, Provide, QuickSeat, RegenerOss and ZiReal are registered trademarks of BIOMET 3i LLC. 3i T3 design,
ICE, NanoTite, Providing Solutions – One Patient At A Time and Twist Lock are trademarks of BIOMET 3i LLC. ©2014 BIOMET 3i LLC.

Dolder is a registered trademark of Prof. Eugen Dolder, formerly the director of the School of Dentistry at the University of Zurich. Endobon is a registered
trademark of BIOMET Deutschland GmbH. LOCATOR is a registered trademark of Zest Anchors, Inc. Safescraper is a registered trademark of CGM S.p.A
Divisione Medicale META.

All trademarks herein are the property of BIOMET 3i LLC unless otherwise indicated. This material is intended for clinicians only and is NOT intended for patient
distribution. This material is not to be redistributed, duplicated, or disclosed without the express written consent of BIOMET 3i. For additional product information,
CATSUR
including indications, contraindications, warnings, precautions, and potential adverse effects, see the product package insert and the BIOMET 3i Website.
REV H 01/14
 Retentive systems for
implant-borne hybrid dentures

152.252.indd 1 06.04.16 11:19

 The ITI (International Team for Implantology) is academic partner of Institut Straumann AG

in the areas of research and education.

152.252.indd 2 06.04.16 11:19

 CONTENTS

Instructions for dentists and dental Planning 2

technicians Planning principles 2
Recall appointments 2

Bar-borne restorations 3
Introduction 3
Fabrication of cast and laser-welded bars 19
Fabrication of the definitive bar prosthesis 23
with metal reinforcement 23
Modification of an existing full lower denture in an
implant/bar-borne hybrid denture 25
Relining an implant-borne bar denture 27

Retentive Anchors 29
Introduction 29
Fabrication of a new full lower denture with a metal reinforcement and
two Elliptical Matrices 30
Fabrication of a new full lower denture with metal reinforcement and
two titanium matrices 35
Modification of an existing full lower denture in an implant-borne
Retentive Anchor denture 41
Relining of an implant-borne Retentive Anchor denture 43

LOCATOR ®­­­ 47
Introduction 47
Fabrication of a new full denture 49
Modification of an existing lower full denture into a denture fixed on
LOCATOR® Abutments with simultaneous relining 51
Modification of an existing lower full denture into a denture fixed on
LOCATOR® Abutments in the patient‘s mouth 53
Product overview 58

152.252.indd 1 06.04.16 11:19

 PLANNING

Planning principles
Implant-borne full dentures require thorough planning of the surgical and technical
procedures. The number and positions of the implants as well as the design of the
denture and occlusion should take account of the anatomical, functional and hygienic
aspects. The ­static/dynamic conditions govern the selection of the retentive units
­(Besimo, 1993). ­

Magnet and bar retention systems for ­implant-borne lower hybrid dentures ­subject the
­implant abutments to the ­lowest stress (Jäger and Wirz, 1993).

Recall appointments
Hybrid dentures with resilient retention units must be examined at intervals of approxi-
mately 3 months to ensure harmful excursions of the denture are e
­ liminated in their
early stages (possible methods: relining, activating/replacing the matrix, checking the
occlusion).

In cases of poor oral hygiene, the patient should undergo thorough scaling and pol-
ishing, as well as reinstruction and motivation to maintain the necessary high level of
oral hygiene. If the patient is co-operative, the interval between check-ups can be
increased.

152.252.indd 2 06.04.16 11:19

 BAR-BORNE RESTORATIONS

Introduction
The functions of a bar restoration:

• Stabilization and primary splinting of implants

• Countering the forces that would ­dislodge the denture
• Distribution of shear forces
• Resilience compensation through ­degrees of freedom

Description/Functioning
Most common types of bar:

Dolder ® Bar (egg-shaped cross-section), normal and mini versions

The Dolder® Bar is a retention unit allowing three degrees of freedom (translateral and
rotary movements).

Dolder ® Bar attachment, “U”-shaped cross-section

The bar attachment is a rigid retentive unit with no rotational freedom.

Round Bar
The Round Bar is a retention unit permit-
ting only one degree of freedom (trans-
lateral movements).

152.252.indd 3 06.04.16 11:19

 The following guidelines must absolutely be heeded when fab-
ricating implant-borne hybrid dentures

Freedom
“If riders are placed on more than one
bar segments, the denture is retained,
but has no degree of space freedom
regardless of the cross-section of the
bar” (Wirz, 1994).

”If a rider is placed on the anterior-most

bar segment only, a Round Bar creates
1 degree of space freedom, an egg-
shaped cross-section 3 degrees of
freedom and a bar attachment (or
milled bar) no freedom” (Wirz, 1994).

Bar positioning
The anterior bar is positioned perpen-
dicular to the median line of the two
halves of the alveolar ridge (Wirz,
1994).

The bar must be horizontal – even if the

ridge varies in height. The bar must
never be allowed to slope as this
would impede the correct functioning
of the bar attachment and create unde-
sirable horizontal forces (Wirz, 1994).

152.252.indd 4 06.04.16 11:19

 Planning the bar restoration

Primary loading of the implant or fabrication of the restoration once the

­h ealing period has elapsed
“If full lower dentures are to be retained on Straumann dental implants, the following
basic principle applies: Four implants are required if in the early period after implanta-
tion, for any reason whatsoever, the implant abutments are to be loaded with a den-
ture before ­osseointegration has been completed. This is often useful when one-part
implants are used, as the conditions of the temporary restoration are usually very
unfavourable. In such cases, it is imperative that the four implants are splinted with a
bar.

When used in the linear and front areas only, the Dolder® Bar joint, with its three
different degrees of space freedom, loads the abutments least of all regardless of the
number of abutments. If, however, the abutments are spaced regularly in the anterior
region, and the denture is ­retained on all bar segments using several riders – regard-
less of the cross-section of the bar – the dynamics of the denture are lost completely.
This is a purely rigid type of retention with no freedom whatsoever. If we are able to
allow at least three months for osseointegration of two-part implants – which should
usually be the case – we may limit ourselves to two relatively short implant abutments,
­assuming that the masticatory forces are absorbed by the denture bed and not by the
implant site” (Wirz, 1994).

152.252.indd 5 06.04.16 11:19

 Fabrication of an implant-borne bar in the lower jaw
using the synOcta ® prosthetics system

“Patient” – initial situation

Edentulous lower jaw, with 4 two-part
Straumann dental implants in positions
44–34.

Important: The synOcta® Abut-

ments can only be used in combina-
tion with implants with the internal
octagon.

Impression taking with s­ ynOcta ®­­­ prosthetics

Two versions are available for the i­mpression procedure: the “snap-on” ­version and
the “screw-retained” version. The snap-on version can be regarded as the standard
and can be used in the majority of cases. The screw-retained version is particularly
indicated where the implant shoulder lies very deep.

In order to prevent any risk of confusion, the transfer system is color-coded. The Posi-
tioning Cylinder, Analog and screw-­retained Impression Cap are color-coded red in
the synOcta®­­­ prosthetic system.

152.252.indd 6 06.04.16 11:19

 A. “Snap-on” impression
­p rocedure
All parts of the transfer system are sup-
plied non-sterile. They can be disinfect-
ed, as required, using standard
commercial disinfectants for plastic
products. (Please follow manufacturers’
directions).
Caution: The plastic parts are
­d esigned for single use only.
They must not be sterilised in the
autoclave.
The octagon on the Positioning Cylin-
der must be aligned with the internal
octagon on the implant and be inserted
into the Impression Cap until it is flush
with the top of the Impression Cap.
The impression should be taken using
an elastomeric impression material
­(polyvinylsiloxane or polyether rubber).

To prevent damage to the plastic com-

ponents (loss of elasticity, embrittle-
ment), they must be protected from heat
and light.

The implant shoulder and interior must

be thoroughly cleaned prior to the
impression procedure. The Impression Important: Due to its insuffi-
Cap (048.017V4) is pushed onto the cient tensile strength and inade-
implant until the shoulder clicks into quate elastic recoil, hydrocolloid is
not suitable for this application.
place. The Impression Cap is turned «click»
gently in order to check that it is in the
correct position. When the cap is in
the correct position, it can be rotated
on the implant.

Important: To avoid errors

during the impression procedure, it
must be ensured that the shoulder
and the margin of the Impression
Cap are not damaged.

152.252.indd 7 06.04.16 11:19

 B. “Screw-retained”
­i mpression procedure
A special tray with perforations is
required for this application.

The implant shoulder and interior must

be thoroughly cleaned prior to the
impression procedure.
The Impression Cap (048.010) is
placed on the implant and is tightened
with the integral Positioning Screw.
Precise ­positioning of the octagon of
the ­Impression Cap into the octagon of
the ­implant is important. Should only a
limited amount of space be available,
the occlusal aspect of the cap can be
reduced by one retention ring (once the
Positioning Screw has been removed).

Important: Only the integrated screw must be used! The margin and
octagon must not be damaged in order to prevent any errors during the
transfer process. For this reason, the Impression Caps are for single use
only.

The impression should be taken using an elastomeric impression material

­(polyvinylsiloxame or polyether rubber) in accordance with the manufacturer’s
­directions.

Once the material has set, the Positioning Screws are loosened, and the ­impression is
removed.

Important: Due to its insufficient tensile strength and inadequate elastic

recoil, hydrocolloid is not suitable for this a
­ pplication.

After impression taking, the Healing Caps are repositioned on the implants.

152.252.indd 8 06.04.16 11:19

 Fabricating the master cast

The “snap-on” version

The red Positioning Cylinder shows the
dental technician that the Analog with
the red marking that must be used. In
the ­laboratory, the Analog (048.124)
is repositioned in the impression, and
the shoulder must click audibly into
place.
The Analog must not be rotated in
the impression.

The “screw-retained” version

The Analog is secured in the impression
using the integral Positioning Screw.
The red Impression Cap shows the
dental technician that the Analog with
the red marking that must be used.

Important: When tightening the

s­ crew, grasp the retentive section
of the Analog in order to prevent
the Impression Cap from rotating.
This is especially important if the
Impression Cap has been
shortened.

152.252.indd 9 06.04.16 11:19

 Fabricating the working master cast in
the conventional way using Type 4
plaster.

The RN synOcta®­­­ 1.5 Screw-retained

Abutment (048.601) is placed in the
Analog and aligned in the octagon.
Note: The abutment must be
­ ositioned in the octagon before
p
the screw is tightened.

The screw is hand-tightened using the

SCS Screwdriver.

RN = Regular Neck (Ø 4.8 mm)

10

152.252.indd 10 06.04.16 11:19

 Fabrication of the joint Gold
Bar
The prefabricated Gold Coping Bar for
the synOcta®­­­ prosthetics system without
an ­internal octagon (048.204) consists
of a non-oxidizing, high-melting alloy
(Ceramicor®; Au 60%, Pt 19%, Pd
20%, Ir 1%; melting range 1400–
1490 °C, 2552°–2714 °F). It is
screwed onto the Analog/synOcta®
Abutment with the
4.4 mm SCS Occlusal Screw
(048.350V4). The Gold Coping is
6.0 mm high and can be shortened
1.5 mm occlusal.

The individual bar segments are placed

between the abutment units. Attention
should be paid to the space between
the bar and gingiva (min. 2.0 mm) to
facilitate adequate cleaning and so
prevent changes in the mucosa.

Important: To achieve a good

joint, the gap should be as small
as possible.

11

152.252.indd 11 06.04.16 11:19

 Type of joining
The prepared bar can now be soldered or laser-welded, as desired. A laser-
­assembled bar does not require soldering with non-precious ingredients and is
­therefore more biocompatible. Laser-­welding takes place directly on the ­plaster model
and therefore takes less work. Larger gaps are filled with wire made from the same
type of material (see also page 22, Fabrication of laser-­welded bars with titanium
components).

Soldered Gold Bar
The Gold Copings and prefabricated
bar segments are secured in place with
a ­residue-free, burn-out plastic. The
SCS Occlusal Screws must not be
covered.
Tip: Overwaxing of the plastic
­compounds ensures good access of the
flame later on in the soldering
investment.
Once the SCS Positioning Screws have They ensure that the Gold Copings are
been loosened, the bar framework is anchored accurately in the soldering
­carefully removed. Stabilization Pins ­investment during soldering.
(048.208V4) are available for retain-
ing the RN synOcta® Bar Gold Cop-
ings in the soldering investment and are
­screwed into place with the SCS
­Positioning Screws.

12

152.252.indd 12 06.04.16 11:19

 To prevent possible distortion of the bar
due to uneven preheating with
the ­flame, the hardened soldering
­investment is preheated to 500–600 °C,
932–1112 °F in a ­preheating furnace.

After the invested bar has been pre-

heated, it is ready for soldering. Once
­soldering has been completed, the
­investment should be cooled to room
­temperature.

The bar must be devested and cleaned Tip: To protect the margins, a Polishing
in an ultrasonic bath. The oxides and Protector (046.245) or an Analog can
­soldering flux residues are then re- be screwed on during polishing. This
moved in an acid bath. ­reduces the risk of damage to the mar-
gins. It is advisable to work under a
Important: Due to the high stereo-microscope.
precision of the prefabricated
caps, increased caution is required
during polishing. Therefore, under
no circumstances, should a sand-
blaster be used.

13

152.252.indd 13 06.04.16 11:19

 It must be possible to reposition the
cleaned bar without tension on the
Analogs, without it being secured with
the SCS Occlusal Screws when check-
ing its fit.

Important: The SCS Occlusal

Screws that were used for solder­
ing will be extre­m ely oxidized and
must not be used to secure the bar
in the mouth. The bar must be
­s ecured in place with new SCS
Occlusal Screws.

The finished synOcta® Bar on the plas-

ter model.

14

152.252.indd 14 06.04.16 11:19

 Insertion of the bar con-
struction in the mouth
The restoration is delivered to the den-
tist with the original abutments.

The Healing Caps are removed and

the ­interior of the implant is thoroughly
­cleaned and dried.

The superstructure is removed from the

master cast and the abutment is
­unscrewed from the Analog.

Torque = 35 Ncm! The cleaned RN synOcta ®­­­ 1.5

Screw-retained Abutment is posi-
tioned ­w ithout cement in the internal
octagon. The abutment screw is tight-
ened using the SCS Screwdriver, Ratch-
et (046.119) and Torque Control
Device (046.049).

Note: The abutment must be

positioned in the octagon before
the screw is tightened.

After osseointegration of the implants,

we recommend a tightening torque
of 35 Ncm when inserting the abut-
ment ­screws.
The SCS Occlusal Screws are tight-
ened with 15 Ncm on the RN synOc-
ta® Abutment.

The bar in situ with the new SCS Oc-

clusal Screws.

See also CD-ROM StraumannR Dental Implant System-Prosthetics,

150.538,
“Hybrid dentures: Screw-retained bar construction on RN synOcta ®­­­ 1.5
­S crew-retained Abutment˝

15

152.252.indd 15 06.04.16 11:20

 Varying the retention force of the
Bar Matrix
Only the appropriate Activator/
Deactivator may be used for activat-
ing/deactivating the Bar Matrix.

• To activate the matrix, press its walls

together with the Activator.

• To deactivate the matrix, press its

walls apart with the Deactivator.

Positioning the Bar Matrix

The matrix must make use of the entire length of the bar. This helps absorb ­horizontal
forces better (Wirz, 1994).

Important: Placing the matrix should always be carried out with the
Spacer before fabrication of the prosthesis. This is the only way to ensure
vertical translation of the prosthesis to the bar.

Activator set for all Bar Matrices Deactivator for Dolder® Bar, mini Deactivator for Dolder® Bar, standard
(046.150) (046.151) (046.152)

16

152.252.indd 16 06.04.16 11:20

 INITIAL SITUATION EDENTULOUS: BAR ON synOcta®­­­

Type of bar: soldered/laser-welded Gold Bar

Abutments and laboratory components Gold Copings Instruments

Insertion of abutment SCS Screwdriver:

RN synOcta®­­­ 1.5 Screw-retained Abutment, 048.601 Length 15 mm: 046.400

Length 21 mm: 046.401

Length 27 mm: 046.402

and/or SCS Screwdriver

for Handpiece Adapter:

Length 20 mm: 046.410

Length 26 mm: 046.411

Length 32 mm: 046.412

Impression procedure
Optional: Laboratory Handpiece
RN synOcta®­­­ Impression Cap with integral 046.085
Positioning Screw 048.010 for 046.410/411/412

or RN Impression Cap 048.017V4 with

RN synOcta®­­­ Positioning Cylinder 048.070V4

Production of master cast

RN synOcta® Analog 048.124

RN synOcta® Analog 048.108

(for bars with 048.601)

Production of superstructure
RN synOcta®­­­ Gold Coping, bar, 048.204

Dolder® Bar, egg-shaped cross-section,

mini, 048.411

Dolder® Bar Matrix, mini, 048.413

incl. Spacer

Dolder® Bar, egg-shaped cross-section,

standard, 048.412

Dolder® Bar Matrix, standard, 048.414

incl. Spacer

Stabilization Pin, 048.208V4

SCS Occlusal Screw, 048.350V4

17

152.252.indd 17 06.04.16 11:20

 Abutments and laboratory components Gold Copings Instruments

Insertion of final restoration

SCS Occlusal Screw, 048.350V4 Activator set, 046.150

Deactivator, mini, 046.151

Deactivator, standard, 046.152

Bar Set Gold 040.195

Contents:

2x RN synOcta®­­­ 1.5 Screw-retained Abutment,

048.601

2x RN synOcta® Analog,
048.124

2x RN synOcta®­­­ Gold Coping, bar,

048.204

4x SCS Occlusal Screw,

048.350

RN = Regular Neck (Ø 4.8 mm)

18

152.252.indd 18 06.04.16 11:20

 FABRICATION OF CAST AND LASER-WELDED BARS

Fabrication of bars using the

one-piece casting method
As an alternative to the laser-welded or
soldered Gold Bars, the dental techni-
cian now has a choice of RN
synOcta®­­­ Plastic Coping, bar
(048.227), and the bar ­variants stan-
dard (048.460) and mini (048.461)
in burn-out plastic for the ­fabrication of
a cast Titanium Bar (Wirz, 1997 and
Wirz et al., 1999).

The standard and mini Titanium Bar

Matrices which fit the Titanium Bar
(from left to right).

The bar, composed of plastic parts and

prepared for embedding.

The bar cast from pure titanium.

Note: The production of a Gold

Bar in the one-piece casting method is
also p
­ ossible.

19

152.252.indd 19 06.04.16 11:20

 Art.-No. Article Dimension Material

048.227 RN synOcta®­­­ Plastic Coping height 10.0 mm burn-out plastic

bridge/bar, for 048.601 shortenable

048.460 Plastic Bar, egg-shaped height 3.0 mm burn-out plastic

cross-section, standard length 80.0 mm

048.461 Plastic Bar, egg-shaped height 2.3 mm burn-out plastic

cross-section, mini length 80.0 mm

048.470 Titanium Bar Matrix, height 4.5 mm titanium

standard, incl. Spacer length 50.0 mm

048.471 Titanium Bar Matrix, height 3.5 mm titanium

mini, inkl. Spacer length 50.0 mm

Bar Set Plastic 040.197

Contents: 2x RN synOcta®­­­ 1.5 Screw-retained Abutment, 048.601

2x RN synOcta® Analog, 048.124

2x RN synOcta®­­­ Plastic Coping, bar, 048.227

2x SCS oclcusal screw, 048.350

RN = Regular Neck (Ø 4.8 mm)

20

152.252.indd 20 06.04.16 11:20

 Fabrication of laser-
welded bars with titanium
components
In addition to the gold variant, the bar
can also be composed of prefabricat-
ed titanium parts using a laser-welding
­technique.

A RN synOcta®­­­ Titanium Coping, bar

(048.214) and the Titanium Bar vari-
ants standard (048.465) and mini
(048.466) are available.

The standard and mini titanium matrices

which fit the Titanium Bar (from left to
right).

The bar segments are fitted to the

master cast, allowing a minimum
gap. Larger gaps are offset by the
addition of more titanium.

The segments are welded together with

adequate argon gas rinsing.

21

152.252.indd 21 06.04.16 11:20

 Important: The soldering points
must not show any blue discolor-
ation. This type of discoloration
indicates inadequate argon gas
ventilation and therefore oxygen
uptake by the metal. This makes
the weld brittle and therefore
weakens the bar construction. The
laser device operating instructions
must be followed. See also
­“ Positioning the Bar Matrix” on
page 16.

Art. No. Article Dimension Material

048.214 RN synOcta®­­­-Titanium Cop- height 6.0 mm titanium

ing, bar, für 048.601

048.465 Titanium Bar, egg-shaped height 3.0 mm titanium

cross-section, standard length 50.0 mm

048.466 Titanium Bar, egg-shaped height 2.3 mm titanium

cross-section, mini length 50.0 mm

048.470 Titanium Bar Matrix standard, height 4.5 mm titanium/brass

incl. Spacer length 50.0 mm

048.471 Titanium Bar Matrix mini, height 3.5 mm titanium/brass

incl. Spacer length 50.0 mm

Bar Set Titanium 040.196

Contents: 2x RN synOcta®­­­ 1.5 Screw-retained Abutment, 048.601

2x RN synOcta® Analog, 048.124

2x RN synOcta®­­­ Titanium Coping, bar, 048.214

2x SCS Occlusal Screw, 048.350

RN = Regular Neck (Ø 4.8 mm)

22

152.252.indd 22 06.04.16 11:20

 FABRICATION OF THE DEFINITIVE BAR PROSTHESIS
WITH METAL REINFORCEMENT

Once the bar has been tried in, the ­denture with metal reinforcement can
be ­fabricated. The teeth are set up ­according to modern full denture principles
(e.g., Gerber et al.).

Once the wax-up denture has been tried in, the teeth are secured in a plaster or
­silicone index. To enable the index to be repositioned accurately on the duplicate
model, grooves are made in the ground labial surface of the master model.

The bar is then blocked out for duplicating. In order to do so, the bar is fitted onto the
master model.

Important: Before the bar sleeve is p­ ositioned, the Spacer must be fixed
to the bar. This ensures vertical translation of the denture.

The bar is then coated with a 0.4 mm thick wax sheet, which acts as a Spacer.
­Labially and lingually, the wax is only ­extended to the mucosa. Stops of
­approximately 423 mm must be cut out to coincide with the height of the ­premolars
and the second molar.­

23

152.252.indd 23 06.04.16 11:20

 When the duplicating mould has been removed, the index can be fitted to the
­duplicate model. The plastic teeth are integrated into the ­index and matched to the
duplicate model.

The dimensions and thickness of the ­lingual surfaces of the teeth to be built up are
governed by the prevailing anatomical conditions. The retainers for the sleeve or rider
should also be positioned to provide good mechanical retention.

The areas of the bar rider and ­strengthener which contact the denture acrylic must be
silanized (e.g., Rocatec, Silicoater) or be pretreated with a primer.

Important: The bar sleeve and rider must not be soldered to the metal
framework as this would prevent them being r­ eplaced at a later date. Also,
any heat treatment would adversely affect the e
­ lastic properties of the
lamellae.

The finished metal-reinforced jointed bar.

24

152.252.indd 24 06.04.16 11:20

 MODIFICATION OF AN EXISTING FULL LOWER DENTURE IN AN
IMPLANT/BAR-BORNE HYBRID DENTURE

If the implant-borne anchorage of an existing full denture is necessary, this can be

fitted with a bar construction after implantation and the relevant healing time.

In this case, impression taking is carried out with the existing denture in combination
with one-part plastic Impression Caps (048.093V4).

Art. No. 048.093V4

Important: The caps are suitable only for impression taking of implants
with a shoulder diameter of 4.8 mm.

First, the Healing Caps are removed from the implants and the Impression Caps fitted
with a snap-on mechanism. The relevant part of the existing denture is hollowed out.

Important: It must be possible to fit the denture over the Impression

Caps without making contact.

After adjusting the denture, the impression is taken with the integrated caps, using an
elastomeric impression material ­(polyvinylsiloxane or polyether rubber).

To protect the implant shoulder,

the Healing Caps are screwed back onto the implants after the impression taking.

25

152.252.indd 25 06.04.16 11:20

 The master cast is fabricated using special hard plaster. One-part, RN synOcta® Ana-
logs (048.108) are available.

These are placed in the plastic Impression Caps situated in the denture, and the
­master cast is then fabricated in the ­con­ventional way using special hard ­plaster, type
4. It is ­important to fix the bite height, as is usual with, for ­example, a denture
relining.

After removing the denture and the ­im­pression material from the plaster master cast,
the bar construction procedure is ­decided, and the denture is hollowed out
accordingly.

The bar is fabricated as described on ­pages 11–14 and/or 20–23.

The Bar Matrices with the Spacer ­(denture resilience) are positioned on the ­finished
bar construction, and the ­undercut points and outside of the ­matrices are blocked out
with wax (to ensure that they can be activated/ deactivated). The denture is then
­adapted to the bar construction by ­polymerisation of the matrices. The ­denture is then
checked for surplus plastic in the region of the matrices and for function.

Important: This step is essential, b

­ ecause only in this way can the
­ ptimum function of the integrated Bar Matrices (incl. ability to activate/
o
deactivate them) be ensured. Unremoved plastic residue may damage the
bar construction/implants.

Before the bar is fitted, the RN synOcta®­­­ 1.5 Screw-retained Abutments (048.601)
are screwed into the ­implants with a force of 35 Ncm.

Art. No. 048.108

26

152.252.indd 26 06.04.16 11:20

 RELINING AN IMPLANT-BORNE BAR DENTURE

Hybrid dentures with resilient retention units should be examined at intervals of ap-
proximately 3 months to enable ­harmful excursions of the denture to be ­eliminated in
their early stages.
If the alveolar ridge resorbs after a ­prolonged wearing time, the bar-borne denture
sinks. This leads to a loss of ­resilience of the matrices and so to greater stress on the
retentive elements/implants. Relining then becomes necessary.

Relining is carried out with the bar in ­position.

Art. No. 048.108

First, the occlusal screws (048.350V4) are replaced by Fixation Pins (048.073V4).
These Fixation Pins are made from plastic and have a snap-on mechanism. They are
used only to secure the bar on the implants when taking a ­relining impression with the
denture. The Fixation Pins are intended for single use only.

Important: To preserve the resilience of the denture, the corresponding

Spacer must be inserted between the bar and matrix before impression
taking. After impression taking, the bar stays in the denture, and the dental
technician ­inserts the one-part RN synOcta ® Analog (048.108) into the bar
caps.

The master cast is fabricated and ­prepared for relining in the conventional way.

Before relining, the bar is secured to the master cast with the SCS Occlusal Screws,
the undercut points are blocked out with wax, and the corresponding Spacer is ­fixed
in the Bar Matrix. Relining is then carried out in the conventional way.

After relining, the Spacer is removed and the matrices are checked for surplus ­plastic
and for function.

Important: This step is essential, b

­ ecause only in this way can the
­ ptimum f­ unction of the relined, implant-borne bar denture be ensured.
o
­Interference with the functioning of the joint mechanism may damage the
­implant or bar construction.

Art. No. 048.073V4

27

152.252.indd 27 06.04.16 11:20

 REFERENCES
Besimo C.
Implantatauslenkung bei unter-
schiedlicher Verankerung abnehm-
barer Suprastrukturen
Implantologie 3, 213–223 (1993)
Carisch H.
Zahntechnische Aspekte bei der
Herstellung einer implantatgetra-
genen Unterkiefer-Totalprothese
Quintessenz Zahntech 9, 913–925
(1987)
Dolder E., Wirz J.
Die Steggelenkprothese
Quintessenz Verlag, Berlin (1982)
Jäger K., Wirz J.
In-vitro-Spannungsanalysen an
Implantaten in Abhängigkeit von
den hybridprothetischen
Suprakonstruktionen
Z Zahnärztl Implantol 9: 42–49
(1993)
Lang N.P., Brägger U.,
Hämmerle C.H.F., Mombelli A.,
Lehmann B., Weigel C.
Das ITI ®­­­ DENTAL IMPLANT SYSTEM:
Behandlungsstrategie
Basisinformation, Institut Straumann AG
(1994)
Mericske-Stern R.
Force distribution on implants sup-
porting overdentures: the effect of
distal bar extentions. A 3-D in vivo
study
Clin Oral Implants Res. 1997 Apr;
8 (2): 142–51. PMID: 9758965;
UI: 98431129
28
152.252.indd 28
Mericske-Stern R.
Implantate im zahnlosen
Unterkiefer
Schweiz Monatschr Zahnmed, 102:
1215–1224 (1992)
Mericske-Stern R., Belser U., Taylor T. D.
Management of the edentulous
Patient
ITI Consensus Paper, 138–155 (1997)
Merz B., Mericske-Stern R., Lengsfeld
M., Schmitt J.
Dreidimensionales FE-Modell eines
zahnlosen, mit Implantaten ver-
sorgten Unterkiefers
Biomedizinische Technik 41: Ergän-
zungsband 1, 34–35 (1996)
Spiekermann H.
Die prothetische Behandlung Be-
handlungskonzept 1
In: Rateitschak K.H., Wolf H.F. (Hrsg):
Farbatlanten der Zahnmedizin 10,
Implantologie, Thieme Stuttgart/
New York, S. 150 (1994)
Tilse M., Dietrich P., Weingart D.
Stegretinierte Hybridprothesen auf
Bonefit-Implantaten unter Verwen-
dung des Octa-Systems
Implantologie 1: 39–49 (1994)
Wirz J., Jäger K.
Stegverankerungen implantat-
getragener Hybridprothesen
Quintessenz 42, 2007–2014 (1991)
Wirz J.
Hybridprothese im atrophierten
Unterkiefer
In: Foitzik Ch. (Hrsg): Das ITI®­­­ DENTAL
IMPLANT SYSTEM. Schlütersche
Verlagsanstalt,
Hannover, S. 129 (1994)
Wirz J., Schmidli F., Schaardt S.
Werkstoffkundliche Aspekte der
Hybridprothesen
Quintessenz 45; 1131–1142 (1994)
Wirz J., Jungo M., Isaak M.
Renaissance der Stegprothetik mit
neuen Werkstoffen und
Technologien
Teil 1:
Quintessenz 50, 611–617 (1999)
Teil 2:
Quintessenz 50, 719–739 (1999)
Wirz J.
Titan – der Werkstoff für die Teil-
und Hybridprothetik mit und ohne
Implantate
Wirz J. u. Bischoff H. (Hrsg.): Titan in
der Zahnmedizin S. 312–332, Quint-
essenzverlag, Berlin (1997)
06.04.16 11:20
 RETENTIVE ANCHORS

Introduction

Purposes of anchors
––Securing the prosthesis against ­excursive forces and those which would dislodge the
saddles
––Distribution of shear forces
––To transfer the masticatory forces as ­axially as possible from the denture to the
implant

Description/Function
The Retentive Anchor is assigned to the movable attachments. Retentive units that
permit rotary movement of the denture in one or more directions and/or vertical trans-
lational movements are termed ­mobile units.

The mobile connector shortens the lever arm of the tilting forces exerted on the
­implant. The implants must always be ­placed at an angle of 90° to the occlusal plane
to ensure that they are loaded ­axially. Precisely designed occlusal surfaces – bal-
anced occlusion with freedom-in-centric (Geering et al., 1993) – and ­optimum design
of the denture fitting ­surface also influence the stability of the denture and the distribu-
tion of the ­masticatory forces (Worthington et al., 1992). We recommend that a new
­denture always be fabricated as part of the treatment plan or after the provision of
implants (Mericske-Stern, 1988).

Indications for Retentive Anchors

––Use with Standard Implants Ø 4.1 mm or Ø 4.8 mm with Ø 4.8 mm shoulder
––Resilient anchorage in the edentulous maxilla and mandible in conjunction with two
implants to ­ensure the degrees of freedom
––Insufficient space available (in such ­cases, bars often cause the anterior ­section to
be extended too far lingually thus restricting the space available for the tongue and
impeding its ­functioning)
––In cases of severely tapering anterior ­arches and/or jaws (Geering et al., 1993)
––Single Retentive Anchors allow for ­designs which are gentle on the ­periodontium
(hygienic)

Contraindications for Retentive Anchors

––Combined tooth-/implant-borne restorations
––Use of more than two implants per jaw
––In conjunction with attachments ­exhibiting a different degree of resilience
––If the implants are not vertical to the occlusal plane
––In cases where the implants have been positioned in the arch in such a way as to
prevent a tangential axis of rotation
––In unfavourable ridge situations

29

152.252.indd 29 06.04.16 11:20

 FABRICATION OF A NEW FULL LOWER DENTURE WITH A METAL REINFORCE-
MENT AND TWO ELLIPTICAL MATRICES
«Patient» initial situation
Edentulous lower jaw with two implants
replacing the canines with Retentive
Anchors (048.439).
Important: To ensure that the
Retentive Anchors function perfect-
ly over a long period of time, the
implants must be placed as paral-
lel as possible to one another and
vertical to the occlusal plane to
create a tangential axis of
rotation.

The Retentive Anchor has a square

neck to accommodate the Driver, and
can be changed if necessary. It is
inserted into the implant with a force
of 35 Ncm. Measured from the upper
edge of the implant shoulder, it is
3.4 mm high.

Taking an impression of the Retentive Anchor

The impression is taken with an elastomeric impression material (polyvinylsiloxane or
polyether rubber) directly over the anchor, without any aids.

Important: In view of its low resistance to tearing, a hydrocolloid is not

suitable for this application.

Driver (046.069) with “R.A”. marking

(“Retentive Anchor”), Retentive Anchor
(048.439), and Transfer Pin (048.109)
(from left to right).

30

152.252.indd 30 06.04.16 11:20

 Producing the model
Transfer Pins are positioned in the
­impression and the model is produced
in special, type-4 hard ­plaster. The
impression of the Retentive Anchor,
provides the square/spherical stud of
the Transfer Pin with sufficient ­retention
in the impression.

To ensure stability, the production and

­integration of a metal reinforcement in
the full lower denture is recommended.
­Sufficient space must be left for secur-
ing the matrices.

The teeth should be set up using the

occlusal concept for full dentures.

31

152.252.indd 31 06.04.16 11:20

 The principle of function of
the Elliptical Matrix
The Elliptical Matrix is used for the
fixation of removable resilient full den-
tures on Straumann implants in conjunc-
tion with the Retentive Anchor. It
consists of a ­titanium housing (pure
titanium Grade 4) into which a gold
Lamella Retention Insert is screwed
(Elitor®­­­; Au 68.6%, Ag 11.8%, Cu
10.6%, Pd 4.0%, Pt 2.5%, Zn 2.5%, Ir
< 1%).
Elliptical Matrix

Titanium housing
Lamella Retention Insert

Retentive Anchor

When there is insufficient space, the wings of the titanium housing can be m
­ odified
individually. However, a minimum diameter of 3.6 mm must be maintained in order to
ensure the retention of the ­housing in the resin.

32

152.252.indd 32 06.04.16 11:20

 Adjusting the retentive force
The Screwdriver (Art. No. 046.154) is
required for activating, deactivating,
and removing the Lamella Retention
Insert. The instrument is pushed with the
correct alignment into the Lamella Re-
tention Insert as far as it will go. The
retentive force is adjusted by rotation
(increased by turning clockwise and
reduced in the opposite direction). The
Screwdriver, Art. No. (046.154)
initial retention force is approxi-
mately 200 g, which is also the mini-
mum that can be set.
The maximum retention force is approx-
imately 1400 g. The Lamella Retention
Insert must not project out of the
housing.

Important: The retentive force

should only be adjusted when
trying in the finished denture.

Unscrewed Lamella Retention Insert

The connection between tightening angle and retention force:

Tightening angle 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°

360° Tightened as Condition

0° far as it will on delivery
go

90° 270°

180°

Retention force **1400 g **700 g **500 g **300 g **200 g

** S
 light deviations from these average values are possible due to the unavoidable manufacturing tolerances of the retention
lamellas and of the retention sphere. If signs of wear are apparent on the Retentive Anchor, these values no longer apply and
the Retentive Anchor must be exchanged.

33

152.252.indd 33 06.04.16 11:20

 Important:
When trying the denture in the
patient, a ­ lways start with the low-
est r­ etention ­f orce. The retention
force is adjusted by rotating the
Lamella Retention Insert and must
be done in small increments until
the desired retention force is ob-
tained. O ­ therwise, excessive reten-
tion forces may cause difficulties
when removing the d ­ enture from
the mouth.

Finished denture

34

152.252.indd 34 06.04.16 11:20

 FABRICATION OF A NEW FULL LOWER DENTURE WITH METAL REINFORCE-
MENT AND TWO TITANIUM MATRICES
«Patient» initial situation
Edentulous lower jaw with two implants
replacing the canines with Retentive
Anchors (048.439).

Model starting situation (procedure

identical as described in chapter “Fab-
rication of a full lower denture with
metal reinforcement and two Elliptical
Matrices”).

The Titanium Matrix (048.450) consists

of a titanium alloy (Ti-6Al-4V), hardness
HV5 Vickers 350–385. Individual
­components: threaded ring-spring-
housing with retainer (from left to right).

35

152.252.indd 35 06.04.16 11:20

 Unlike the Elliptical Matrix, the Titanium
Matrix makes use of a Spring with a
­d efined extraction force of 700–
1100 g. If retention is lost, the Spring
can be replaced.

To replace the Spring, the thread on

the ­Titanium Matrix is unscrewed anti-
clockwise using a special Screwdriver
(048.452) and the Spring is changed.

The threaded ring is then screwed back

in place hand-tight.

36

152.252.indd 36 06.04.16 11:20

 The titanium matrices can be
polymerised into place as
­f ollows:

Method A
Before positioning the matrices on the
Transfer Pins on the model, the original
threaded ring is unscrewed and re-
placed with a plastic threaded ring
(048.454V4). The undercuts are
blocked out with ­plaster. The plastic
ring is 3/100 mm ­wider in diameter
than the Titanium Matrix and acts as a
Spacer for it. This prevents too tight a
fit of the titanium threaded ring on the
polymerised acrylic. After
­polymerisation, the threaded ring is
­replaced by the titanium ring once
more.

37

152.252.indd 37 06.04.16 11:20

 Method B
The denture is polymerised with special
acrylic Spacers only (048.451V4).
First, the undercuts are blocked out with
plaster. Once the denture is ready, the
Spacers are removed and the dentist
can ­polymerise the titanium matrices
into place directly in the patient’s
mouth. The Spacers are also used to
produce the model for the metal
reinforcement.

38

152.252.indd 38 06.04.16 11:20

 Method C
Before being positioned on the edge of
the threaded ring, the Titanium Matrix
is coated with a thin film of die Spacer.
This ensures that the threaded ring can
be released later on without excessive
force having to be exerted.

Important: With all three meth-

ods, the titanium matrices (or
Spacers) must also a ­ lways be posi-
tioned on the Transfer Pins with
their axes a­ ligned (parallel to the
path of insertion) and the under-
cuts blocked out.

The finished denture with titanium matri-

ces integrated in the metal framework.

Important: Once the denture is

complete, it must be checked to
ensure no acrylic has penetrated
the matrix. To do this, the threaded
ring should be removed and the
inner configuration with the Spring
should be cleaned.

39

152.252.indd 39 06.04.16 11:20

 Removal of Titanium Matrix
from an existing denture
To replace an entire Titanium Matrix,
the threaded ring and spring must first
be ­removed. The tip of a special Ex-
tractor (048.453) is then heated over
a Bunsen burner and screwed into the
matrix ­housing. The housing can then
be withdrawn from the acrylic denture.

40

152.252.indd 40 06.04.16 11:20

 MODIFICATION OF AN EXISTING FULL LOWER DENTURE IN AN IMPLANT-BORNE
RETENTIVE ANCHOR DENTURE
Polymerisation of the Ellipti-
cal m
­ atrix in the patient’s
mouth after i­mplantation
and ­o sseointegration
The existing full lower denture prior to
­modification.

The Retentive Anchors are inserted into

the implants with a force of 35 Ncm.
The ­existing denture is then h­ ollowed
out in the region of the anchor. The
opening created allows the acrylic to
flow in. The Elliptical Matrices posi-
tioned on the anchor must not touch the
denture after ­hollowing.

41

152.252.indd 41 06.04.16 11:20

 After positioning on the Retentive An-
chors, a small piece of rubber dam is
placed over the matrices. This prevents
the acrylic from flowing into the internal
­matrix configuration.

Important: The matrices must

be a­ ligned (parallel to the path of
­i nsertion).
The prepared denture is then fixed in
the mouth and the acrylic is flowed
through the perforation.

The modified denture with the

­polymerised Elliptical Matrices.

42

152.252.indd 42 06.04.16 11:20

 RELINING OF AN IMPLANT-BORNE RETENTIVE ANCHOR DENTURE

Hybrid dentures with Retentive Anchors should be checked at approximately three-

month ­intervals, to eliminate ­damaging denture movements by ­appropriate measures
at an early stage. If the alveolar ridge resorbs after a ­prolonged wearing time, the
denture may sink. This leads to a loss of resilience of the matrices and so to greater
stress on the Retentive Anchor/ implants. Relining then becomes necessary.

Relining is carried out directly over the Retentive Anchors. Care should be taken to
ensure that the denture is sitting correctly (Retentive Anchor/matrix connection). The
dental technician then positions the Transfer Pins (048.109) in the matrices (titanium or
Elliptical Matrix) in the denture and produces the relining model (see also page 31,
Producing the model).

After relining, the matrices should be checked for acrylic that may have flowed into
them and for their functionality. It must also be possible to activate/deactivate the
matrices. After polymerisation, the Elliptical Matrix and Titanium Matrix are opened
with the relevant Screwdriver and the internal ­configuration is cleaned.

Important: These measures are vital, because only in this way is the
optimum function of the relined, implant-borne anchor denture ensured. If
the function of the matrix is impeded, this can damage the implant/anchor.

43

152.252.indd 43 06.04.16 11:20

 EDENTULOUS: RETENTIVE ANCHOR

Retentive Anchor with Elliptical matrix Retentive Anchor with Titanium Matrix

Choice of implant Solid screw implant Ø 4.1 mm, 4.8 mm; shoulder Ø 4.8 mm

Abutments and laboratory

Abutments and laboratory parts Instruments Instruments
parts

Insertion of abutments
Retentive Anchor Driver for Retentive Anchor Retentive Anchor Driver for Retentive Anchor

048.439 046.069 048.439 046.069

Impression
Transfer Pin Transfer Pin

048.109 048.109

Production of denture
Elliptical matrix Screwdriver Titanium Matrix Screwdriver

048.456 046.154 048.450 048.452

Spacer

048.451V4

Threaded mounting
ring
048.454V4

Insertion of
final restoration

Screwdriver Spring Screwdriver

046.154 048.455V4 048.452

Extractor

048.453

44

152.252.indd 44 06.04.16 11:20

 RETENTIVE ANCHORS

Art. No Article Dimension Material

048.439 Retentive Anchor height 3.4 mm Ti

046.069 Retentive Anchor Driver length 19.0 mm stainless steel

048.109 Transfer Pin for length 18.0 mm stainless steel

Retentive Anchor

Elliptical matrix, activable

048.456 Elliptical matrix height 3.2 mm Elitor®­­­/Ti

Ø 3.6 mm

048.457 Spare Lamella Retention Insert height 2.6 mm Elitor®­­­

046.154 Screwdriver length 37.0 mm stainless steel

Titanium Matrix with defined extraction force

048.450 Titanium Matrix for height 3.1 mm Ti

Retentive Anchor

048.451V4 Spacer for height 3.5 mm POM

Titanium Matrix

048.452 Screwdriver length 60.0 mm stainless steel/

Titanium Matrix AI, anodised

048.453 Extractor for length 100.0 mm stainless steel

Titanium Matrix

048.454V4 Threaded Mounting Ring height 2.2 mm POM

for Titanium Matrix

048.455V4 Spacer for Titanium Matrix stainless steel

45

152.252.indd 45 06.04.16 11:20

 REFERENCES
Besimo Ch., Graber G., Schaffner Th.
Hybridprothetische implantatgetra-
gene Suprastrukturen im zahn-
losen Unterkiefer
ZWR, 100. Jahrg., Teil 1, Fallplanung,
Nr. 1 und 2 (1991)
Cendres&Métaux SA, CH-Biel-Bienne
Konstruktionselemente für die
Prothetik
Produktekatalog, Klasse 4 (1993)
Geering A. H., Kundert M.
Total- und Hybridtechnik
Farbatlanten der Zahnmedizin,
G. Thieme Verlag, Stuttgart,
2. Auflage (1993)
Lang N.P., Brägger U., Hämmerle C.
H.F., Mombelli A., Lehmann B.,
Weigel C.
Das ITI DENTAL IMPLANT SYSTEM:
®­­­
Behandlungsstrategie
Basisinformation, Institut Straumann AG
(1994)
Mericske-Stern R., Geering A.H.
Die Implantate in der
Totalprothetik
Die Verankerung der Totalprothese
im zahnlosen Unterkiefer durch
zwei Implantate mit
Einzelattachments.
Schweiz Monatsschr Zahnmed, Vol.
98:8 (1988)
Mericske-Stern R.
Eine klinische Longitudinalstudie
mit Ergebnissen nach vier Jahren
Schweiz Monatsschr Zahnmed, Vol.
98:9 (1988)
46
152.252.indd 46
Mericske-Stern R.
Clinical Evaluation of Overdenture
Restorations
Supported by Osseointegrated
Titanium Implants: A Retrospective
Study
Int J Oral Maxillofac Implants 5:
375– 383 (1990)
Mericske-Stern R.
Implantate im zahnlosen Unterkiefer
Schweiz Monatsschr Zahnmed 10:
1215–1224 (1992)
Mericske-Stern R.
Forces on Implants Supporting
Overdentures: A Preliminary Study
of Morphologic and Cephalometric
Considerations
Int J Oral Maxillofac Implants 8: 254–
263 (1993)
Mericske-Stern R., Steinlin-Schaffer T.,
Marti P., Geering A. H.
Periimplant Mucosal Aspects of ITI
Implants supporting Overdentures.
A 5 year longitudinal study
Clinical Oral Implants Research 5:
9–18 (1994)
Worthington P., Brånemark P.-I.
Advanced Osseointegration
Surgery: Applications in the Maxil-
lofacial Region
Quintessence Publishing Co, In, Illinois,
USA (1992)
06.04.16 11:20
 LOCATOR®­­­

Introduction
Optimal connection is provided by dual retention.
Excellent long-term performance thanks­to the high wear resistance of the components.

The self-locating design of the LOCATOR®­­­ components allows patients to easily seat
their dentures.
The LOCATOR®­­­ Retention Inserts can be easily placed and removed with the
LOCATOR®­­­ Core Tool.

The LOCATOR®­­­ components can accommodate up to 40° divergence between two

implants.
Even where occlusal space is limited, re-storations are possible thanks to the small
vertical dimension of the components.

Indications
The LOCATOR®­­­ components are intended for use with dentures that are retained
sole-ly by endosteal implants in the mandible or maxilla.

Contraindications
The LOCATOR®­­­ components are not suitable for combined tooth- and implant-support-
ed respective-anchored dentures.
The LOCATOR®­­­ components cannot be used with implant divergences greater
than 40°.

47

152.252.indd 47 06.04.16 11:20

 USING PLAN LOCATOR® ABUTMENTS

1. Selecting the right LOCATOR ® Abutment 1a

Open the Plan Set, pick up a Plan LOCATOR Abutment and secure it with the SCS
®

Screwdriver (empty mold for instruments built in).

Place the Plan LOCATOR® Abutment on the implant (intraoral use) or Implant Analog
(extraoral use). This will help in checking dimensions (rings on Plan LOCATOR® Abut-
ments indicate gingiva height), axial alignment and screw axis of the potential
restoration.

1b

2. Ordering the stock abutment

Once the best fitting Plan LOCATOR® Abutment is determined, the corresponding
stock abutment can be ordered using the allocation chart on the Plan Set inlay card.

Cleaning and sterilizing Plan Abutments

––Clean the Plan Abutments thoroughly with water or ethanol after intraoral use.
––After cleaning, sterilize Plan Abutments with moist heat (autoclave) for 18 minutes
at 134 °C (273 °F).
––Refer to the manufacturer’s specifications for the heat-sterilization device.
––Do not sterilize the Plan Cassette or its inserts.
––Replace non-functional Plan Abutments.

Note: Do not sterilize Plan Abutments more than 20 times.

Do not gamma-sterilize Plan Abutments.
Do not sterilize the Plan Cassette or its components.

48

152.252.indd 48 06.04.16 11:20

 FABRICATION OF A NEW FULL DENTURE

1. The implant shoulder should not be covered by the gingiva. Select the height of the 1
LOCATOR Abutment by ­determining the height of the gingiva.
®

2. The top margin of the abutment should be 1.0 mm above the mucosa. 2
Inserting the prosthesis is easier for the patient if the LOCATOR® Abutments are on the
same horizontal level.

3. First, screw the abutment into the 3 4

­implant hand-tight, using the
­LOCATOR® Driver.

4. Then torque the abutment to 35 Ncm

­using the Straumann Ratchet, with the
­Torque Control Device attached, and
the LOCATOR® Driver.

5. A white Spacer ring (not pictured) is ­placed on the abutments. The Spacer ring 5
prevents plastic from penetrating the ­region below the matrix housing. To take the
impression, place the ­LOCATOR®­­­ ­Impression Copings on the LOCATOR® Abutments.

6. Take the impression utilizing the 6 7

mucodynamic technique (vinyl polysi-
loxane or polyether rubber).

7. It is sent to the dental laboratory.

Then, to make the master cast, insert­­
t­­he LOCATOR®­­­ Female Analogs into
the ­LOCATOR®­­­ Impression Copings.

49

152.252.indd 49 06.04.16 11:20

 8. Fabricate the master cast in the usual way, using special hard plaster, Type 4. 8
The Denture Caps with the black Processing Analogs are then put on the LOCATOR ®

Analogs. The proces-sing male serves to fix the Denture Cap on the Analog, giving
optimal stability.

9. The denture is fabricated using the conventional technique. The polymerised pros- 9
thesis with the Denture Caps and black Processing Analogs.

10. After finishing and polishing the ­denture, remove the black Processing Analogs
from the Denture Caps using the LOCATOR®­­­ Core Tool, and insert appropriate
LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement Males in their place. Refer also to “Using the LOCATOR®
Core Tool˝ on page 55 and “Selecting the R­ eplacement Males˝ on page 56.

11. To insert LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement 11 12

Males, the tip of the LOCATOR® Core
Tool must be unscrewed.

12. The exposed end of the Replace-

ment Male is pressed into the Denture
Cap. The Replacement Male clicks
audibly into place.

13. Then insert the finished denture 13

and check the occlusion.

50

152.252.indd 50 06.04.16 11:20

 MODIFICATION OF AN EXISTING LOWER FULL DENTURE INTO A DENTURE
FIXED ON LOCATOR® ABUTMENTS WITH SIMULTANEOUS RELINING

1. The implant shoulder should not be 1 2

covered by the gingiva. Select the
height of the LOCATOR® Abutment by
determining the height of the gingiva.

2. The upper border of the abutment

should be 1.0 mm above the mucosa.

3. First, screw the abutment into the 3 4

­implant hand-tight, using the
LOCATOR® Driver.

4. Then torque the abutment to

35 Ncm ­using the Straumann Ratchet,
with the ­Torque Control Device at-
tached, and the LOCATOR® Driver. A
white Block-out Spacer ring is put on
the abutments (not illustrated). The
Block-out Spacer ring prevents resin
from flowing into the region below the 5. Place the Denture Caps, with the 5
Denture Cap. black Processing Analogs, onto the
LOCATOR® Abutments.

6. Then hollow out the existing denture 6 7

base in the areas of the LOCATOR ®­­­

­Denture Caps.

7. Insert the denture into the patient’s

mouth and check the fit. The Denture
Caps fixed on the abutments must not
touch the denture.

8+9. The impression for the relining is 8 9

­taken ­using the conventional technique.

51

152.252.indd 51 06.04.16 11:20

 10. Subsequently, to fabricate the master cast, insert the LOCATOR®­­­ Female Analogs 10
into the Denture Caps, which are located in the impression material.

11. Fabricate the master cast in the usual way using special hard plaster, Type 4. 11
Then place the Denture Caps onto the LOCATOR Female Analogs. The Processing
®­­­

Analog serves to fix the Denture Cap on the Analog, giving optimal stability.
Note: The Denture Caps with the black Processing Analogs must be securely
seated on the Analogs. Then the denture is relined using the conventional technique.

12. After finishing and polishing the ­denture, remove the black Processing Analogs
from the Denture Caps using the LOCATOR®­­­ Core Tool, and insert appropriate Re-
placement Males in their place. Refer also to “Using the LOCATOR® Core Tool˝ on
page 55 and “Selecting the ­Replacement Males˝ on page 56.

13. To insert LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement Males, the tip of the LOCATOR® Core Tool 13
must be unscrewed. The exposed end of the Replacement Male is pressed into the
Denture Cap. The Retention Insert clicks audibly into place.

14. Then insert the finished denture and check the occlusion. 14

52

152.252.indd 52 06.04.16 11:20

 MODIFICATION OF AN EXISTING LOWER FULL DENTURE INTO A DENTURE
FIXED ON LOCATOR® ABUTMENTS IN THE PATIENT‘S MOUTH

1. Four implants with screwed (35 Ncm) LOCATOR® Abutments in the mandible. 1

2. LOCATOR® Abutments with white Block-out Spacer rings attached. 2

3. Denture Caps with attached black Processing Analogs on LOCATOR® Abutments. 3

4. Hollow-ground prosthesis with connecting holes for filling with prosthesis resin. 4
Important: When checking fit in the mouth, the Denture Caps fixed on
the abutments must not touch the prosthesis.

53

152.252.indd 53 06.04.16 11:20

 Polymerizing the Denture Caps into the denture 5
5. The connecting holes are now filled with prosthetic resin from lingual, and the caps
are thus anchored in the denture. For this purpose, use a lightcure or self-curing resin.
After curing, remove any excess resin and polish the denture.

Note: If the white LOCATOR®­­­ Block-out Spacers do not completely fill the space
between the gingiva and the Denture Caps, any remaining undercuts must be blocked
out to prevent resin flowing under the caps. This can be accomplished by, for exam-
ple, stacking two or more ­LOCATOR®­­­ Block-out Spacer.

Once the resin has cured, remove the denture from the mouth and discard the white
LOCATOR®­­­ Block-out Spacer. Remove any excess resin.

6.+7. After polishing the denture base, remove the black Processing Analogs and 7
insert ­appropriate LOCATOR Replacement Males in their place. Refer also to “Using
®­­­

the LOCATOR® Core Tool˝ on page 55 and “Selecting the R­ eplacement Males˝ on
page 56.

8. Then insert the finished denture and check the occlusion. 8

Photographs courtesy of
Dr. Robert C. Vogel

54

152.252.indd 54 06.04.16 11:20

 Determining the angulation of LOCATOR ® Abutments in
the mouth

Snap the LOCATOR®­­­ Parallel Posts onto

the LOCATOR® Abutments. Use the
­LOCATOR angle measurement guide
®­­­
to determine the respective angulation
of the LOCATOR® Abutments in relation
to each other. To do this, hold the an-
gle measurement guide behind the
placed Parallel Posts and read off the
angle for each abutment.
Two instruments are available for
checking the angulation of the
­LOCATOR® Abutments that have
been screwed into the implants:
LOCATOR ®­­­ Parallel Post
(048.199V4)

Important: Choose the appro-

priate LOCATOR ®­­­ Replacement
Males according to the angulation
measured.

Caution: Tie dental floss to the LOCATOR ®­­­ Angled Measurement

­lateral holes of the angle measure- Guide (048.200)
ment guide to prevent aspiration.

Impression procedure at implant shoulder level

It is also possible to take the impression at the level of the implant shoulder without
­LOCATOR® Abutments.
To do this, the impression is taken with Straumann impression components (snap-on or
­screwed impression, see page 6–9). The master cast is made with Straumann Ana-
logs (Art. No. 048.124).
The LOCATOR® Abutments are selected in the dental laboratory. The upper border of
the abutment should be 1.0 mm above the mucosa. Further procedure is the same as
when LOCATOR® Analogs are used.

55

152.252.indd 55 06.04.16 11:20

 Using the LOCATOR ® Core
Tool

The LOCATOR® Core Tool is a three-

piece multifunction instrument.

The tip is used for removing Replacement Males from the Denture Caps. To do this,
the tip must be unscrewed by two full turns. A gap is visible between the tip and the
middle section.

Gap

The tip is passed in a straight line into the Denture Cap with a Replacement Male.
The sharp edges of the tip hold the Replacement Male while it is being removed. The
instrument is drawn out of the Denture Cap in a straight line.

To remove the Replacement Male from the instrument, the tip must be screwed clock-
wise completely onto the middle section. This activates the loosening pin inside the
tip, which releases the Replacement Male.

The middle section of the LOCATOR® Core Tool is used for inserting Replacement
Males into the Denture Caps. To do this, the tip is unscrewed. The exposed end of the
Replacement Male is pressed into the Denture Cap. The Replacement Male is fixed
firmly in the cap when a click is heard.

The LOCATOR® Abutment Holder Sleeve makes it easier to deliver a LOCATOR®

Abutment, and it retains the abutment while threading it into the implant. The LOCA-
TOR® Abutment Holder Sleeve can be autoclaved.

56

152.252.indd 56 06.04.16 11:20

 The end (gold-colored) of the LOCATOR® Core Tool is used by the d
­ ental technician
for screwing and ­unscrewing the LOCATOR® Abutments ­to the Analogs.

Using the black Processing Analog

Both the LOCATOR®­­­ Female Analog and the LOCATOR®­­­ Denture Cap are supplied
with a preassembled black Processing Analog. The black Processing Analog is used
as a Spacer for the various LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement Males.
In the case of underlining of a LOCATOR®­­­-anchored prosthesis, the LOCATOR®­­­ Re-
placement Males must be removed from the Denture Caps and be exchanged for
black Processing Analogs. The black Processing Analogs keep the prosthesis in a
stable vertical position with the Denture Caps during the impression procedure and
working. When underlining and working of the prosthesis is finished, the black Pro-
cessing Analogs are exchanged for the corresponding new LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement
Males.

Selecting the LOCATOR ®­­­ Replacement Males

To enable patients to insert and remove their LOCATOR®­­­ retained dentures simply and
­reliably, the divergence of the path of insertion of the individual LOCATOR® Abut-
ments must not exceed 10° per jaw (or 20° in the case of two abutments).
If several (3 or more) LOCATOR® Abutments are used in the same jaw, we
­recommend ­using pink LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement Males, Art. No. 048.191V4, with
light retention (3.0 lbs/1.36 kg), or blue, Art. No. 048.192V4, with extra-light
­retention (1.5 lbs/0.68 kg).
In the case of implant divergences of more than 10° to 20° (or up to 40° in the case
of two abutments), the LOCATOR®­­­ extended range Replacement Males in green with
normal retention (4 lbs/1.82 kg), Art. No. 048.193V4, can be used or orange,
with light retention (2.0 lbs/0.91 kg), Art. No. 048.188V4, or red, with e
­ xtra-light
retention (1 lbs/0.45 kg), Art. No. 048.194V4.

Caution: We recommend using the loosest retention elements first (blue,

Art. No. 048.192V4) with the prosthetic restoration. If the patient feels that
they are too loose, elements with a greater retention force may be used.

57

152.252.indd 57 06.04.16 11:20

 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Art.-No Article Dimensions Material

Plan LOCATOR® Abutments

048.275V4 RN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 1.0 mm POM

048.276V4 RN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 2.0 mm POM

048.277V4 RN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 3.0 mm POM

048.278V4 RN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 4.0 mm POM

048.279V4 RN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 5.0 mm POM

048.280V4 RN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 6.0 mm POM

048.283V4 WN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 1.0 mm POM

048.284V4 WN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 2.0 mm POM

048.285V4 WN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 3.0 mm POM

048.286V4 WN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 4.0 mm POM

048.287V4 WN Plan LOCATOR® Abutment height 5.0 mm POM

For information about the NNC LOCATOR® Abutment, please refer to Prosthetic Procedures for the Narrow Neck CrossFitR Implant –
Straumann® Narrow Neck CrossFit® Implant Line, 152.808.

58

152.252.indd 58 06.04.16 11:20

 Art.-No Article Dimensions Material

LOCATOR® Abutments

048.175/048.183 RN/WN LOCATOR® Abutment height 1.0 mm titanium alloy/Ti-N•

048.176/048.184 RN/WN LOCATOR® Abutment height 2.0 mm titanium alloy/Ti-N•

048.177/048.185 RN/WN LOCATOR® Abutment height 3.0 mm titanium alloy/Ti-N•

048.178/048.186 RN/WN LOCATOR® Abutment height 4.0 mm titanium alloy/Ti-N•

048.179/048.187 RN/WN LOCATOR® Abutment height 5.0 mm titanium alloy/Ti-N•

048.180 RN LOCATOR® Abutment height 6.0 mm titanium alloy/Ti-N•

LOCATOR®­­­ Components

048.189V2 LOCATOR® male processing package, titanium/nylon

contents: Denture Cap (Ø 5.5 mm,
height 2.5 mm) with black Processing
Analog (height 1.9 mm), Block-out Spac-
er (048.196), clear Replacement Male
(048.190), pink Replacement Male
(048.191) and blue Replacement Male
(048.192)

048.190V4 LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement Male, clear, height 1.7 mm nylon

0°–10°*, 5 lbs, 2.27 kg**

048.191V4 LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement Male, pink, height 1.7 mm nylon

light retention, 0°–10°*, 3 lbs, 1.36
kg**

048.192V4 LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement Male, blue, height 1.7 mm nylon

extra-light retention, 0°–10°*,
1.5 lbs, 0.68 kg**

048.182V2 LOCATOR® male processing package, titanium/nylon

extended range, contents: Denture Cap
(Ø 5.5 mm, height 2.5 mm) with
black Processing Male (height 1.9 mm),
Block-out Spacer (048.196),
green Replacement Male (048.193),
orange Replacement Male (048.188),
red Replacement Male (048.194)

048.193V4 LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement Male, green, height 1.7 mm nylon

extended range, 10°–20°*, 4 lbs, 1.82
kg**

048.188V4 LOCATOR® Replacement Male, orange, height 1.7 mm nylon

light retention, extended range, 10°–
20°*, 2 lbs, 0.91 kg**

048.194V4 LOCATOR®­­­ Replacement Male, height 1.7 mm nylon

red, extra-light retention, extended
range, 10°–20°*, 1 lbs, 0.45 kg**

59

152.252.indd 59 06.04.16 11:20

 Art.-No Article Dimensions Material

LOCATOR®­­­ Components

048.181V4 LOCATOR ® Replacement Male, gray, height 1.7 mm nylon

zero (0) retention

048.198V4 LOCATOR®­­­ Female Analog length 10.0 mm aluminium

Ø 5.0 mm

048.218V4 LOCATOR® processing Spacer POM

046.413V4 LOCATOR® Abutment Holder Sleeve PSU

048.197V4 LOCATOR®­­­ Impression Coping height 4.0 mm aluminum housing

with LDPE insert

048.196V20 LOCATOR®­­­ Block-out Spacer thickness 0.4 mm silicone rubber

048.195V4 LOCATOR®­­­ black Processing Analog height 1.9 mm LDPE

Components

046.415 LOCATOR® Core Tool length 100.0 mm stainless steel

046.416 LOCATOR® Driver short length 15.0 mm stainless steel

for Ratchet

046.417 LOCATOR® Driver long length 21.0 mm stainless steel

for Ratchet

048.199V4 LOCATOR®­­­ Parallel Post length 8.0 mm LDPE

048.200 LOCATOR®­­­ angle length 5.0 mm stainless steel

measurement guide width 15.0 mm

• = Titanium Nitride-coated
V2 = Pack of 2
V4 = Pack of 4
V20 = Pack of 20
LDPE = Low Density Polyethylene
* = For the correction of angle divergences
** = Retentionforce

LOCATOR®­­­ is a registered trademark of Zest Anchors, Inc., USA.

0473

Manufacturer Distributor Institut Straumann AG is the sole distributor of the LOCATOR®­­­

Zest Anchors, Inc. Institut Straumann AG products listed in this brochure for the Straumann®­­­ Dental
Escondido, CA 92029 4002 Basel Implant System.
USA Switzerland

60

152.252.indd 60 06.04.16 11:20

 IMPorTAnT GUIDELInES

Please note Explanation of the symbols on labels and instruction leaflets

Practitioners must have appropriate knowledge and instruction in the
handling of the Straumann CADCAM products or other Straumann Batch code
products (“Straumann Products”) for using the Straumann Products
safely and properly in accordance with the instructions for use.
Catalogue number

The Straumann Product must be used in accordance with the

instructions for use provided by the manufacturer. It is the practitioner’s Sterilized using irradiation
responsibility to use the device in accordance with these instructions
for use and to determine, if the device fits to the individual patient
situation.
Lower limit of temperature
…min.
The Straumann Products are part of an overall concept and must be
used only in conjunction with the corresponding original components
and instruments distributed by Institut Straumann AG, its ultimate …max.

parent company and all affiliates or subsidiaries of such parent

company (“Straumann”), except if stated otherwise in this document Upper limit of temperature
or in the instructions for use for the respective Straumann Product.
If use of products made by third parties is not recommended by
Straumann in this document or in the respective instructions for use,
…max.
any such use will void any warranty or other obligation, express or
implied, of Straumann. Temperature limitation
…min.

Availability
Some of the Straumann Products listed in this document may not be
available in all countries. Caution: Federal law restricts this device
to sale by or on the order of a dental
Caution professional.
In addition to the caution notes in this document, our products must
be secured against aspiration when used intraorally.
Do not re-use
Validity
Upon publication of this document, all previous versions are
superseded.
non-sterile
Documentation
For detailed instructions on the Straumann Products contact your
Straumann representative. Caution, consult accompanying documents

Copyright and trademarks

Straumann® documents may not be reprinted or published, in whole
Use by
or in part, without the written authorization of Straumann.
Straumann® and/or other trademarks and logos from Straumann®
mentioned herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
Straumann Holding AG and/or its affiliates. Keep away from sunlight

Straumann Products with the CE mark fulfill

the requirements of the Medical Devices
Directive 93/42 EEC

0123

Consult instructions for use

61

152.252.indd 61 06.04.16 11:20

 International Headquarters
Institut Straumann AG
Peter Merian-Weg 12
CH-4002 Basel, Switzerland
Phone +41 (0)61 965 11 11
Fax +41 (0)61 965 11 01
www.straumann.com
 152.252/en/A/00 03/16

Ceramicor® is a registered trademark of Cendres + M étaux SA, Switzerland. LOCATOR® is a registered trademark of Zest IP Holdings LLC,
USA. Dolder® is a registered trademark from Prof. Eugen Dolder, exclusively licenced to Cendres + M étaux Holding SA, Switzerland. IPS
e.max® and IPS Empress® are registered trademarks of Ivoclar Vivadent AG, Liechtenstein.

© Institut Straumann AG, 2016. All rights reserved.

Straumann® and/or other trademarks and logos from Straumann® mentioned herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
Straumann Holding AG and/or its affiliates.

152.252.indd 62 06.04.16 11:20

 Straumann® Variobase® Family

Basic information on
Straumann® Variobase®

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 1 09.06.15 17:29

 The ITI (International Team for Implantology) is academic partner of Institut Straumann AG
in the areas of research and education.

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 2 09.06.15 17:29

 CONTENT

1 INTRODUCTION 2
1.1 Purpose of this guide 2

2 GENERAL INFORMATION 3
2.1 Introduction to the Straumann® Variobase ®3
2.2 Technical requirements 3
2.3 System overview 4
2.4 Product characteristics 6

3 RESTORATION, DESIGNING AND FINISHING 7

3.1 Preparation 7
3.2 Design and fabrication of the prosthetic restoration 7
3.3 Bonding 12
3.4 Insertion (dentist’s office) 14

4 AUXILIARIES AND INSTRUMENTS 15

4.1 SCS Screwdrivers 15
4.2 Ratchet 15
4.3 Polishing aids and analog holder 15

5 IMPORTANT GUIDELINES 16

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 1 09.06.15 17:29

 1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 PURPOSE OF THIS GUIDE

This guide was created for dental technicians and dentists working with the Straumann®
Variobase ® for designing screw-retained or cement-retained customized prosthetic recon-
structions, such as copings, crowns, bridges or over-dentures. It provides complementary
step-by-step information on working with the Straumann® Variobase ®.

Failure to follow the procedures outlined in these instructions may harm the patient and/
or lead to any or all of the following complications:
pp Aspiration or swallowing of a component
pp Breakage
pp Infection

Note:
Implant-borne superstructures require optimal oral hygiene on the part of the patient.
This must be considered by all involved parties when planning and designing the
restoration.

Consult the brochures:

- Basic Information on the Surgical Procedures – Straumann® Dental Implant System,
152.754, for information on indications and contraindications of Straumann implants such
as the required minimum number of implants, implant type, diameter and loading protocols.
- Instructions for use: Straumann® CARES® Variobase® portfolio, 701158, and Straumann®
Variobase® prosthetic components for bridge/bar, 701627.
- Instructions for use: Straumann® Variobase® Abutment, 701593.

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 2 09.06.15 17:29

 2 GENERAL INFORMATION

2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE STRAUMANN ® VARIOBASE ®

The Straumann® Variobase ® prosthetic components provide dental laboratories with the flexibility to create
customized prosthetic restorations with their chosen in-lab workflow of either pressing, casting or in-lab milling.
In addition, Variobase ® Abutments come with the benefit of the original Straumann connection and the unique
Straumann engaging mechanism.

For intended use and instructions for use, please refer to the Instructions for use: Straumann® Variobase® Abutments,
701593 and Straumann® Variobase® prosthetic components for bridge/bar, 701627.

2.2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Straumann® Variobase ® Implant Kit

To facilitate the precise design of the interface between the
Variobase ® prosthetic component and the relevant prosthetic res-
toration (coping, crown, bridge, over-denture), a specific digital
Variobase ® Implant Kit can be used. It consists of an open STL
file containing the required milling template for the inner geo-
metry of the prosthetic restoration.

Note:
The Variobase ® Implant Kit only provides the inner geometry of the prosthetic restoration for the Variobase ®
prosthetic components. CAM specific parameters need to be defined by the dental laboratory according to
the milling equipment manufacturer’s instructions.

Software
In order to use the Variobase ® in digital workflows, CAD software containing the Variobase ® Implant Kit can
be used. Please contact Straumann for more information regarding availability. Please follow the instructions
of the CAD software provider.

Milling system
Use any milling system that has the ability to mill the precise geometry of the Variobase ® prosthetic components.
A precise milling of the geometry requires drills of 1mm in diameter or smaller.

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 3 09.06.15 17:29

 2.3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The Variobase ® prosthetic components cover the following Straumann implant platforms:

IMPLANT-LEVEL PROSTHETICS ABUTMENT-LEVEL PROSTHETICS

NC RC NNC RN WN NC RC

Analogs

023.2754 (0°, D 3.5 mm)

023.4756 (0°, D 4.6 mm)
025.2101 025.4101 048.127 048.124 048.171 023.4756 (0°, D 4.6 mm)
023.4757 (angled, D 4.6 mm)
023.4757 (angled, D 4.6 mm)

Reposition-
able Implant
Analogs

025.0007 (D 3.5 mm)
025.2102 025.4102 - 048.129 048.172 025.0008 (D 4.6 mm)
025.0008 (D 4.6 mm)

Scanbodies

025.0001 (D 4.6 mm)
025.2915 025.4915 048.173 048.168 048.169 025.0001 (D 4.6 mm)
025.0000 (D 3.5 mm)

Variobase ®
for crown,
abutment
height
3.5 mm

025.2921 025.4921 048.709 048.710 048.711 - -

Variobase ®
for crown,
abutment
height
5.5 mm
022.0027 022.0026 022.0021 022.0022 022.0023 - -

Burn-out
Copings for
Variobase ®
for crown,
abutment
height 023.2756/ 023.4759/
3.5 mm 048.267/ 048.268/ 048.269/
023.2756- 023.4759- - -
048.267V41 048.268V41 048.269V41
041 041

4 1
Article numbers ending in V4 or in -04 contain 4 burn-out copings in one pack.

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 4 09.06.15 17:29

 IMPLANT-LEVEL PROSTHETICS ABUTMENT-LEVEL PROSTHETICS

NC RC NNC RN WN NC RC

Burn-out Copings
for Variobase ® for
crown, abutment
height 5.5 mm

023.0018/ 023.0017/ 023.0014/ 023.0015/ 023.0016/

- -
023.0018V41 023.0017V41 023.0014V41 023.0015V41 023.0016V41

Auxiliary Screws
for Variobase ® for
crown

025.2900 025.4900 048.313 048.356 048.356 - -

Variobase ® for
bridge/bar

023.0000 (D 3.5 mm)
022.0000 022.0001 022.0002 022.0003 022.0004 023.0001 (D 4.6 mm)
023.0001 (D 4.6 mm)

Burn-out Copings
for Variobase ® for
bridge/bar

023.0004/
023.0004V41
023.0005/
023.0006/ 023.0007/ 023.0008/ 023.0009/ 023.0010/ (D 3.5 mm)
023.0005V41
023.0006V41 023.0007V41 023.0008V41 023.0009V41 023.0010V41 023.0005/
(D 4.6 mm)
023.0005V41
(D 4.6 mm)

Auxiliary screws
for Variobase ®
for bridge/bar,
Basal Screws for
implant level and
Occlusal Screw
on abutment level
for Straumann ®
Screw-retained 025.2926 048.356 023.4763
Abutments

1
Article numbers ending in V4 or in -04 contain 4 burn-out copings in one pack. 5

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 5 09.06.15 17:29

 2.4 PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS

Maximum Design Freedom

pp Variobase ® for crown for single-unit restorations available in 3.5 mm
and 5.5 mm* abutment height.
pp Variobase ® for bridge/bar for multi-unit restorations of straight and
tilted** Straumann implants.
pp Minimal abutment height providing maximum design flexibility.
pp Strong retention of the coping on the abutment.
pp Save time by skipping the sandblasting process.

Choose the procedure you prefer

pp Pressing and casting techniques – Easily and accurately wax up the
prosthetic restoration with the Burn-out Copings.
pp Digital produced restorations – accessible through three options:
pp Access the desired Variobase ® prosthetic components with the
CARES ® System.
pp Access the Variobase ® STL data through a leading CAD/CAM
software with the constantly developing CARES ® App or CARES ®
Plug-in.
pp Access the digital offering with the CARES ® Scan & Shape Service.

Justified trust
pp Rely on perfect design harmony with the original Straumann® implant-
abutment connection.

* For the digital workflow the abutment height cannot be reduced.

** Variobase® can be used to compensate up to 30° divergence between two implants; Variobase® copings
6 can be used in combination with Straumann® screw-retained Abutment to compensate larger divergence.

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 6 09.06.15 17:29

 3 RESTORATION, DESIGNING AND FINISHING

3.1 PREPARATION

Prerequisites
pp The tooth shade has been identified and noted (via color chart or digital measuring device).
pp The impression has been taken.

Both, shade information and impression have been sent to the dental lab.

3.1.1 FABRICATION OF THE MASTER CAST

Fabricate the master cast using standard methods and type-4
dental stone (ISO 6873). To ensure high-quality restorations, con-
sider the following requirements:
pp Only use new, undamaged and original
Straumann implant analogs.
pp Embed the implant analogs in the stone;
the implant analogs must not move in the model.
pp Always use a gingival mask to ensure the emergence profile
is optimally contoured.
pp Preferably use scannable material for the gingival mask.

3.2 DESIGN AND FABRICATION OF THE PROSTHETIC RESTORATION

3.2.1 CONVENTIONAL CASTING AND PRESSING

­WORKFLOW

Step 1 – Placing the Variobase ® prosthetic component

Place the Variobase ® prosthetic component and hand-tighten
the screw (maximum 15 Ncm). Only use the Straumann® SCS
Screwdriver to fix the abutment in the analog or to fix the cop-
ings on the Straumann® Screw-retained Abutments. Check again
for proper fit and for any rotational or vertical movement when
using the Variobase ® for crown.

If a Variobase ® with a longer chimney is used, you can custom-

ize the chimney according to the anatomical situation.

Note:
The Variobase® Abutments with adjustable chimney height must not
be cut lower than the mark to assure the abutment stability.

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 7 09.06.15 17:29

 Step 2 – Assembling and shortening of the Burn-out Coping
Attach the Burn-out Coping to the Variobase ® prosthetic compo-
nent and check for proper fit.

Note:
pp Working with the Burn-out Coping supports a clean and
sharp-edged finish of the screw channel and a good fit to the
Variobase ® prosthetic components.
pp With its tight fit, the Burn-out Coping for Variobase ® for crown
should be free of any rotational or vertical movement.
pp The Burn-out Copings for Variobase® for bridge/bar shall be
placed on the Variobase® prosthetic components and then turned
clockwise to be free of any rotational or vertical movement.

Shorten the Burn-out Coping to the height of the occlusal plane

according to the individual circumstances.

Note:
Ensure that the shortened Burn-out Coping still covers the com-
plete metal part of the Variobase ®.

Contour a wax-up shape according to the individual anatomical

situation.

Note:
pp You can make a reduced anatomic design or a full-contour
design depending on the indications of the dental material
used.
pp Make sure that the wax layer on the abutment is sufficiently
thick (at least 0.15 mm) to provide space for the Burn-out Cop-
ing to expand during heating.
pp Respect the minimal wall thickness of the respective dental
material used according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 8 09.06.15 17:29

 Step 3 – Fabrication of the prosthetic restoration (e.g. coping,
crown, bridge, over-denture)
Use standard procedure to either press or cast the framework
(reduced anatomic design) or the full-contour crown (full ana-
tomic design).

Note:
For optimal results, it is recommended to avoid speed investment
material and processes for pressing procedures. The plastic of the
Burn-out Coping requires sufficient time to completely burn out.

If necessary, make also an individual crown using standard pro-

cedure.

Finalize the prosthetic restoration before bonding.

Note:
If you veneer the framework, ensure that the veneering material's
thermal expansion coefficient matches the coping material’s ther-
mal expansion coefficient.

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 9 09.06.15 17:29

 3.2.2 DIGITAL WORKFLOW (CADCAM)
3.2.2.1 Scanning and designing

Option A: Scanning and designing – with a scanbody

Import the Straumann® Variobase ® Implant Kit into the design software ac-
cording to the software manufacturer’s instructions.

Step 1 – Assembling
Check for proper fit of the scanbody in the analog and hand-
tighten the self-retaining screw (maximum 15 Ncm). Only use the
Straumann® SCS Screwdriver to fix the post in the analog. Check
again for proper fit and for any rotational or vertical looseness.
If a single-tooth restoration is planned, orient the angled surface
of the scanbody buccally (not adjacent to the approximal tooth).
Avoid any contact of the scanbody to the proximal teeth.

Step 2 – Scanning and modelling

Follow the software provider’s instructions on how to scan and
recognize the scanbody. Model the coping or crown following
the software provider’s instructions.

10

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 10 09.06.15 17:29

 Option B: Scanning and designing – without a scanbody
If the implant kit is not embedded in your software, you cannot
use a scanbody.

Step 1 – Scanning
Scan the Variobase ® prosthetic component.

Note:
pp Scan spray may be applied.
pp If the software does not allow virtual blocking out of undercuts, these
and the screw channel must be blocked out with wax before scanning.
pp If the software allows the scan to be saved as a template, future blocking
out is no longer required. The template can be matched with the scan
of the Variobase ® prosthetic component model via a matching process.
Otherwise, the Variobase ® prosthetic component blocked out with wax
can be kept for future scans.
pp If a Variobase ® with a customized longer chimney is used, the modified
abutment has to be sprayed and scanned.

Step 2 – Modelling
Model the framework or the full-contour restoration following the software
provider’s instructions.

The diameter of the screw channel is: RC = 2.3 mm / NC = 2.2 mm / WN =

2.7 mm / RN = 2.7 mm / NNC = 2.2 mm

3.2.2.2 Milling

Step 1 – Preparation for milling

Transfer your design data to your milling machine following the instructions
of your CAD software and milling equipment provider.

Note:
pp Use the proper settings per material following the instructions of your
CAD software and milling equipment provider.
pp Use a drill of maximal 1 mm diameter to precisely mill the four cams of
the engaging mechanism of the Variobase ® for crown.

Step 2 – Milling
Mill the prosthetic restoration according to the instructions of your milling
equipment provider.

11

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 11 09.06.15 17:29

 3.2.3 FINALIZATION OF THE PROSTHETIC RESTORATION IN THE DENTAL LABORATORY

Step 1 – Finalization of the prosthetic restoration

Use standard procedure to finalize the prosthetic restoration (coping, crown,
bridge or over-denture).

Note:
The prosthetic restoration bonded to the Variobase ® must be completely
finalized before the bonding step.

3.3 BONDING

Step 1 – Fixing on master model

Fix the abutments to the implant analogs by tightening the Basal Screws
hand-tight or fix the copings on the abutment analogs by tightening the
Occlusal Screws hand-tight. Seal the screw channel with wax to prevent
excess cement from flowing into the screw channel.

Note:
pp It is not necessary to sandblast the Variobase® for obtaining a strong bond.
pp To ensure precise seating of the prosthetic restoration on the Variobase ®,
always bond on the master model.
pp For Variobase ® for crown, due to the symmetrical nature of the four
cams, confirm the position of the crown according to the actual patient
anatomy prior to bonding.

12

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 12 09.06.15 17:29

 Step 2 – Bonding
Apply self-adhesive dental cement ² on the Variobase ®. Follow the cement
manufacturer’s instructions. Bond the prosthetic restoration to the Variobase ®.

Note:
pp Immediately remove excess cement from the Variobase ® prosthetic
component. Polish the lower margin of the prosthetic restoration after
the cement has dried.
pp Always use a polishing aid to protect the abutment’s prosthetic
­connection.
pp Do not fire the abutment after bonding.

² Tested with Panavia™ F2.0 resin cement by Kuraray and a zerion® (zirconium dioxide) coping by Straumann.
Recommended cement: 3M™ RelyX™ self-adhesive cement. 13

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 13 09.06.15 17:29

 3.4 INSERTION (DENTAL PRACTICE)

The final restoration is fixed on the master cast before it is delivered to the dentist.

Step 1 – Preparation
pp Remove the healing cap or temporary restoration.
pp Remove the superstructure from the master cast and unscrew the Variobase ® prosthetic components from the analog.
pp Clean and dry the interior of the implant and the abutment thoroughly.

Note:
Always ensure that surfaces of threads and screw heads are clean and that a new screw is used for the final restoration.

Step 2 – Final insertion

Option A: Screw-retained final restoration

pp Position the sterilized Variobase ® prosthetic components with
the prosthetic restoration in the implant. Tighten the screw to
35 Ncm using the SCS Screwdriver together with the Ratchet
and the Torque Control Device.
pp Close the SCS screw channel with cotton and sealing com-
pound (i.e. gutta-percha). This allows for later removal of the
Variobase ® in case a crown, bridge or over-denture replace-
ment should be required.

Option B: Variobase ® for crown – cement-retained final

restoration
pp Position the sterilized Variobase ® in the implant. Tighten the
screw to 35 Ncm using the SCS Screwdriver together with the
Ratchet and the Torque Control Device.
pp Close the SCS screw channel with cotton and sealing com-
pound (i.e. gutta-percha). This allows for later removal of the
Variobase ® in case a crown replacement should be required.
pp Cement the superstructure to the abutment.
pp Remove excess cement.

14

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 14 09.06.15 17:29

 4 AUXILIARIES AND INSTRUMENTS

4.1 SCS SCREWDRIVERS

Art. No. Article Dimensions Material

SCS Screwdriver
046.400 Length 15 mm Cronidur ® 30
for ratchet, extra short

SCS Screwdriver
046.401 Length 21 mm Cronidur ® 30
for ratchet, short

SCS Screwdriver
046.402 Length 27 mm Cronidur ® 30
for ratchet, long

4.2 RATCHET

Art. No. Article Dimensions Material

Ratchet
046.119 Length 84 mm Stainless steel
includes service instrument

4.3 POLISHING AIDS AND ANALOG HOLDER

Art. No. Article Dimensions Material

Polishing protector
046.245 for RN synOcta ® Copings, Length 15 mm Stainless steel
transocclusal screw-retained

025.2920
NC Polishing aid Length 16 mm Stainless steel
025.2920-04

025.4920
RC Polishing aid Length 16 mm Stainless steel
025.4920-04

046.239 Analog holder Length 105 mm Al/Steel

15

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 15 09.06.15 17:29

 5 IMPORTANT GUIDELINES
IMPorTAnT GUIDELInES

Please note Explanation of the symbols on labels and instruction leaflets

Practitioners must have appropriate knowledge and instruction in the
handling of the Straumann CADCAM products or other Straumann Batch code
products (“Straumann Products”) for using the Straumann Products
safely and properly in accordance with the instructions for use.
Catalogue number

The Straumann Product must be used in accordance with the

instructions for use provided by the manufacturer. It is the practitioner’s Sterilized using irradiation
responsibility to use the device in accordance with these instructions
for use and to determine, if the device fits to the individual patient
situation.
Lower limit of temperature
…min.
The Straumann Products are part of an overall concept and must be
used only in conjunction with the corresponding original components
and instruments distributed by Institut Straumann AG, its ultimate …max.

parent company and all affiliates or subsidiaries of such parent

company (“Straumann”), except if stated otherwise in this document Upper limit of temperature
or in the instructions for use for the respective Straumann Product.
If use of products made by third parties is not recommended by
Straumann in this document or in the respective instructions for use,
…max.
any such use will void any warranty or other obligation, express or
implied, of Straumann. Temperature limitation
…min.

Availability
Some of the Straumann Products listed in this document may not be
available in all countries. Caution: U.S. federal law restricts this
device to sale by or on the order of a dental
Caution professional.
In addition to the caution notes in this document, our products must
be secured against aspiration when used intraorally.
Do not re-use
Validity
Upon publication of this document, all previous versions are
superseded.
non-sterile
Documentation
For detailed instructions on the Straumann Products contact your
Straumann representative. Caution, consult accompanying documents

Copyright and trademarks

Straumann® documents may not be reprinted or published, in whole
Use by
or in part, without the written authorization of Straumann.
Straumann® and/or other trademarks and logos from Straumann®
mentioned herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
Straumann Holding AG and/or its affiliates. Keep away from sunlight

Straumann Products with the CE mark fulfill

the requirements of the Medical Devices
Directive 93/42 EEC

0123

Consult instructions for use

16

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 16 09.06.15 17:29

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 17 09.06.15 17:29
 International Headquarters
Institut Straumann AG
Peter Merian-Weg 12
CH-4002 Basel, Switzerland
Phone +41 (0)61 965 11 11
Fax +41 (0)61 965 11 01
www.straumann.com
490.062/en/B/01 06/15

Panavia™ is a trademark of Kuraray Co, LTD, JP.

3M™ and RelyX™ are trademarks of 3M or 3M Deutschland GmbH. Used under license in Canada.

© Institut Straumann AG, 2015. All rights reserved.

Straumann® and/or other trademarks and logos from Straumann® mentioned herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks
0123

of Straumann Holding AG and/or its affiliates.

490.062_SbS_Variobase.indd 18 09.06.15 17:29

 Technical Information

Straumann® synOcta® Prosthetic System

Basic Information

15X.255.indd 1 26/05/2017 09:38

 About this guide
The Basic Information on the Straumann® synOcta® Prosthetic System provide dental
practitioners and related specialists with the essential steps required for the fabrication and
insertion of prosthetic restorations for Straumann® Soft Tissue Level Implants.

It is assumed that the user is familiar with placing dental implants. For further information,
please see the Basic Information on the Surgical Procedures - Straumann® Dental Implant
System, 152.754, and other existing Straumann procedure manuals that are referred throughout
this document.

15X.255.indd 2 26/05/2017 09:38

 Contents
1 Introduction 2

2 Advantage 3

3 synOcta® Abutments – Overview 6

4 Impression procedure with the synOcta® prosthetic system 7

4.a Closed-tray impression procedure “Screwed” 8

4.b C
 losed-tray impression procedure “Snap-on” 10

4.c O
 pen-tray impression procedure “Screwed” 12

5 Bite registration 14

6 Temporary restorations 15

7 Fabricating the master cast 18

8 Case planning with the Prosthetic Planning Kit 20

9.a synOcta® 1.5 Screw-retained 23

Abutments for transocclusal screw-retained crowns and bridges 23

9.b synOcta® Cemented 30

Abutments for cement-retained crowns and bridges 30

9.c synOcta® Angled for RN 35

15° and 20° Angled Abutments for screw-retained and cement-retained crowns and bridges 35

9.d synOcta® Angled for WN 40

15° Angled Abutment for cement-retained crowns and bridges 40

9.e synOcta® Transversal (TS for RN) 44

Abutment for Transversal Screw-retained crowns and bridges 44

9.f Straumann® CARES® Implant-borne prosthetics 53

Customized implant prosthetics 53

10 synOcta® Gold Abutment for RN and WN 54

The customizable one-piece solution for anterior zone esthetics 54

11 Processing instructions 64

12 Important guidelines 75

15X.255.indd 1 26/05/2017 09:38

 1 Introduction
The synOcta® concept was introduced worldwide in 1999 with the addition of an
octagon to the Morse taper section of the abutment and implant.
8° Morse
taper
The symmetrical fit of the octagons of the abutment and the inside of the implant
allows synOcta® abutments to be repositioned in the implant. This feature is
unique within the Straumann® Dental Implant System and is possible only with
the synOcta® Abutments. The capacity for repositioning allows the clinician to
Octagon on the abutment
take an impression over the implant shoulder without an abutment. The possi-
bility of selecting the abutment with the aid of the Planning Set with the resulting
flexibility is one of the factors in the success of the synOcta® prosthetic system.
Besides the increased flexibility of the system, the 8° Morse taper connection
represents one of the most secure implant-abutment connections in implantology.

Screw-retained and cement-retained solutions for implants with

shoulder diameter of 4.8 mm RN and 6.5 mm WN Implant with RN synOcta® 1.5 screwed
abutment
With the synOcta® prosthetic system you have a choice between screw-retained
or cement-retained crown and bridge restorations for implant shoulders of both
∅ 4.8 mm RN (Regular Neck) and ∅ 6.5 mm WN (Wide Neck).

RN Implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm WN Implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm

Standard and Tapered Effect Standard and Tapered Effect

Standard Plus Implants RN Standard Plus Implants WN
Implants RN Implants WN

Important: The octa, cone and Important: The WN Solid

Solid Abutments can be used Abutments and the WN synOcta®
with implants with or without the Abutments can only be used with
internal octagon. The RN synOcta® implants with shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm.
Abutments can only be used with
implants with shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm
and implants with the internal
octagon.

15X.255.indd 2 26/05/2017 09:38

 2 Advantage
Reliable. Simple. Flexible.
The synOcta® prosthetic system offers you the advantages of a reliable, simple
and flexible prosthetic solution.

The secret of synOcta®’s success exists in the connection between the abutment
and the implant. The precise fit of the abutment octagon in the implant octagon
allows the abutment to be repositioned.

Reliable
ѹѹ The 8° cone of the Morse taper offers an ideal combination between cold
welding and reliable vertical positioning.
ѹѹ The rates of loosening of the Straumann Morse taper are practically going
towards 0 %.

Simple
ѹѹ Simple impression taking without the abutment

Flexible
ѹѹ Abutments can be repositioned
ѹѹ Abutment selection on the model
ѹѹ Optimal planning options for every indication

The prosthetic superstructures that are

screwed onto the synOcta® Abutments
distribute the acting forces onto the 45°
shoulder of the implant and thus relieve the
Occlusal Screw.

Important: Please note the description of the indication for each implant type. You will find this in the
current product catalog, in the brochure Basic Information on the Surgical Procedures – Straumann® Dental
Implant System, 152.754 and in the instructions for use enclosed with the implants.

RN = Regular Neck
WN = Wide Neck

15X.255.indd 3 26/05/2017 09:38

Straumann® RN (Regular Neck)
Dental Implant System ∅ 4.8 mm

System Overview

TISSUE LEVEL
PROSTHETICS
Transfer parts synOcta®

Impression Posts Open-tray Closed-tray Analog Open-tray Closed-tray An

Impression Caps
Implant Analogs
Implant Level Abutment Level
Forming/Fixing Matrices

048.090 048.010 048.070V4 048.017V4 048.862 048.124 048.866 048.864 048

Digital Impression Posts

Scanbodies and
Repositionable Analogs
048.129 048.068 048.168

Temporary Restorations
Protective Caps

•048.715 ••048.716 •048.664

incl. screw 049.181 incl. screw 049.181 incl. screw 048.356

Prosthetic Restoration Screw-retained Screw-retained or Cement-retained Ce

CAD/CAM
Wax-up

048.088     Tit
048.088-04 ZrO2 CAD/CAM1) 2) 3)

Titanium Abutments

 A
15° A

 B
15° B

20 °

20 °
     
synOcta® Angled
048.612/613/617/618
synOcta® 1.5 synOcta® Transversal H 5.7 mm, also in
048.601 048.620 H 6.7 mm available

Gold Copings
Gold Abutments
   
synOcta® Gold Copings synOcta® Gold Abutment
•048.633 048.634 •048.642
••048.632 excl. screw ••048.802
excl. screw 048.350 049.154, 048.672 incl. screw 048.356

Plastic Copings

 
•048.229 048.665
••048.227 excl. screw 049.154,
excl. screw 048.350 048.672 049.670 048.676V4 ••0

Auxiliary Parts
Screws

049.354 048.350
only for
048.350 049.154 048.672 048.356 ceramic

-04 Pack of 4 1) Straumann® CARES® Abtuments can be ordered • Crown

AH Abutment height via the Straumann® CARES® Visual Software or at •• Bridge
H Height www.cares.straumann.com ••• Bar
V2 Pack of 2 2) manufactured at the Straumann® CADCAM production center
V4 Pack of 4 3) also via Straumann® CARES® Scan & Shape Service Product images are not to scale.
WN Wide Neck  

15X.255.indd 4 26/05/2017 09:38

 WN
∅ 6.5 mm

synOcta®

-tray Analog Open-tray Closed-tray Analog Open-tray Closed-tray Analog

Implant Level Abutment Level

864 048.108 048.091 048.095 048.013 048.870 048.171 048.869 048.871 048.872

048.172 048.069 048.169

•048.717 ••048.718 •048.242

incl. screw 049.181 incl. screw 049.181 incl. screw 048.356

Cement-retained Screw-retained Screw-retained or Cement-retained Cement-retained

   
Titanium CAD/CAM1) 2) 3) 048.089 Titanium CAD/CAM1) 2) 7)
) 2) 3) incl. screw 048.356 048.089-04 incl. screw 048.356

15° A

15° B
 B
20 °

 
ed synOcta® synOcta® 1.5 synOcta®
/618 Cementable Angled Cementable
in 048.605 synOcta® 1.5 048.608 048.606
ble incl. screw 048.603 048.609

   
synOcta® gold coping synOcta® gold coping
•048.639 •048.644
••048.638 ••048.803
excl. screw 048.350 incl. screw 048.356

   
•048.667  
••048.666 048.678 •048.243
676V4 ••048.662 •048.663 excl. screw 048.350 ••048.244

8.350

048.356 048.350 048.356 048.356

15X.255.indd 5 26/05/2017 09:38

 3 synOcta® Abutments – Overview

Application range for abutments for implant shoulders 4.8 mm and 6.5 mm

Implant shoulder-∅ 4.8 mm RN

RN synOcta® 1.5 RN synOcta® RN synOcta® Angled, 15° and 20°, type RN synOcta® Transversal (TS) WN synOcta®
Screw-retained Cemented A and B Cemented

15° 20°
Art. No. 048.601 Art. No. 048.605 Art. No. 048.612 Art. No. 048.617 Art. No. 048.620 Art. No. 048.642
Transversal screw-retained crowns
Transocclusal screw-
and bridges. The RN synOcta® TS
Cement-retained Cement-retained or screw-retained retained crowns and
Abutment has two transversal open-
crowns and crowns and bridges. In the case of Angled for the production
Transocclusal ings. One screw opening is aligned
bridges. The abut- Abutments, two types are available for of a meso structure
screw-retained with the flat wall of the octagon,
ment can be shor- each angle (A+B). This allows the angle to for cement-retained
crowns and while a second screw opening is
tened as necessary be corrected in 16 different alignments crowns and bridges.
bridges. aligned with the apex. This enables
by a maximum of (in steps of 22.5°). These abutments are The Gold Abutment
the Transversal Screw to be aligned
2.0 mm. available in a short and a long version. is a combination of
in 16 different directions (in steps of
coping and abutment.
22.5°).

Implant shoulder-∅ 6.5 mm WN

WN synOcta® 1.5 Screw-retained WN synOcta® Cemented WN synOcta® Angled, 15°, WN synOcta® Gold Abutment
type A and B

Art. No. 048.603 Art. No. 048.606
Cement-retained crowns
and bridges.
Transocclusal screw-retained
The abutment can be shortened
crowns and bridges.
as necessary by a maximum of
2.0 mm.
Art. No. 048.608 Art. No. 048.644
Cement-retained crowns and
Transocclusal screw-retained
bridges. The WN synOcta® Angled
crowns and for the production
Abutment, 15°, is available in
of a meso structure for cement-
2 types (A and B). This allows
retained crowns and bridges. The
the angle to be corrected in
Gold Abutment is a combination
16 different alignments
ofcoping and abutment.
(in graduations of 22.5°).

15X.255.indd 6 26/05/2017 09:38

 4 Impression procedure with the synOcta®
prosthetic system

Closed-tray Open-tray

Screwed Screwed
RN WN RN WN

Implant level Implant level

048.862 048.870 048.090 048.010 048.091

Abutment level Abutment level

048.864 048.871 048.866 048.869

Snap-on
RN WN

Implant level

048.070V4 048.017V4 048.095 048.013

Analogs

RN WN

Implant level

048.124 048.171

RN WN

Abutment level

048.108 048.872

There are three options available for taking an impression on implant shoulder-∅ 4.8 mm RN
and implant shoulder-∅ 6.5 mm WN:
• the closed-tray technique “screwed”
• the closed-tray technique “snap-on”
• the open-tray technique “screwed”

The closed-tray “screwed” option can be regarded as the standard version.

Extra care should be taken to identify implant and abutment level impression positions in case
of mixed level impressions in the same patient.

15X.255.indd 7 26/05/2017 09:38

 4.a Closed-tray impression procedure “Screwed”

Implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN Implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN

Art. No. 048.862 Art. No. 048.124 Art. No. 048.870 Art. No. 048.171

The impression-taking procedures for implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN and implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN are identical.

All parts of the transfer system are supplied non-sterile. The parts can be disinfected as required using standard commercial
disinfectants that are suitable for plastic products. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Caution: The plastic components are for single use only. They must not be sterilized. In order to prevent damage to the plastic
components (loss of elasticity or embrittlement), they must be protected from strong light and heat.

1a
Step 1 – Positioning the Impression Post
ѹѹ Ensure sufficient access to the implant site in order to avoid
pinching in the gingival tissue.
ѹѹ Clean the internal configuration of the implant thoroughly from
blood, tissue, etc. prior to the impression procedure.
ѹѹ Place the impression post accurately into the implant and
tighten the guide screw hand-tight (using the SCS screwdriver)

Note: Ensure that the lateral planar areas of the post are facing
1b mesial and distal.

ѹѹ Place the polymer impression cap on top of the fixed impression

post. Ensure that the color of the cap corresponds to the color
of the positioning screw in the post and that the arrows are
aligned with the oral-vestibular direction.
ѹѹ Push the impression cap in apical direction until it clicks. The
impression cap is now firmly seated on the impression post.

15X.255.indd 8 26/05/2017 09:38

 2a Step 2 – Impression taking
ѹѹ Take the impression using an elastomeric impression material
(polyvinyl siloxane or polyether rubber).

Note: Due to its low tensile strength, hydrocolloid is not suitable

for this application.

ѹѹ Once the material is cured, carefully remove the tray. The

impression cap remains in the impression material and there-
2b
fore is automatically pulled off from the impression post with
the removal of the tray.
ѹѹ Unscrew and remove the impression post and send it together
with the impression tray to the dental technician.

2c

15X.255.indd 9 26/05/2017 09:38

 4.b Closed-tray impression procedure “Snap-on”

Implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN Implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN

Art. No. 048.070V4 Art. No. 048.017V4 Art. No. 048.124 Art. No. 048.095 Art. No. 048.013 Art. No. 048.171

The impression-taking procedures for implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN and implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN are identical.

All parts of the transfer system are supplied non-sterile. The parts can be disinfected as required using standard commercial
disinfectants that are suitable for plastic products. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Caution: The plastic components are for single use only. They must not be sterilized. In order to prevent damage to the plastic
components (loss of elasticity or embrittlement), they must be protected from strong light and heat.

Step 1 – Positioning of the Impression Cap

Both the implant shoulder and the internal configuration must be
cleaned (of blood and tissue) prior to the impression procedure. Push
"click" the RN Impression Cap (048.017V4) onto the implant shoulder until
it clicks into place. Gently turn the Impression Cap to ensure that it
is in the correct position. When the cap is in the correct position, it
can be rotated on the implant.

Important: The shoulder and the margin of the Impression Cap must
not be damaged to ensure accuracy of the impression procedure.

Step 2 – Insertion of the positioning cylinder

The octagon of the RN synOcta® Positioning Cylinder must be prop-
erly aligned with the octagon in the implant and pushed into the
Impression Cap as far as it will go.

10

15X.255.indd 10 26/05/2017 09:38

 3a Step 3 – Impression taking
The impression is taken using an elastomeric impression material
(polyvinyl siloxane or polyether rubber).

Important: Due to its low tensile strength, hydrocolloid is not suit-

able for this application.

3b

11

15X.255.indd 11 26/05/2017 09:38

 4.c Open-tray impression procedure “Screwed”

Implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN Implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN

Art. No. 048.010 Art. No. 048.090 Art. No. 048.124 Art. No. 048.091 Art. No. 048.171

The open-tray impression-taking procedure is identical for implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN and implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN.

For this impression procedure a custom-made tray with perforations is needed.

Important: Only the integral screw must be used. The margin and the octagon must not be damaged to ensure accuracy of
the transfer procedure. For this reason, the Impression Caps are intended for single use only.

1 Step 1 – Positioning of the Impression Cap

Both the implant shoulder and the internal configuration must be
cleaned (of blood and tissue) prior to the impression procedure.
Place the RN synOcta® Impression Cap (048.010) onto the implant
shoulder and tightened it with the Integral Guide Screw. It is
important to accurately position the octagon in the implant before
the screw is tightened.

Option: If space is adequate, the impression can also be taken with

the open-tray RN synOcta® Impression Cap with built-in handle
(048.090).

2a
Step 2 – Impression taking
The custom-made tray (light-cured resin) contains perforations for
the Guide Screws.

12

15X.255.indd 12 26/05/2017 09:38

 2b The impression is taken using an elastomeric impression material
(polyvinyl siloxane or polyether rubber).

3a Step 3 – Once cured, the Guide Screw is loosened and the impression
is removed.
Important: Due to its low tensile strength, hydrocolloid is not suit-
able for this application.

3b

13

15X.255.indd 13 26/05/2017 09:38

 5 Bite registration

For implant shoulders: ∅ 4.8 mm RN and ∅ 6.5 mm WN To simplify bite registration after taking an impression, plastic Bite
Registration Aids are available in heights of 8.0 mm (048.940V4) and
12.0 mm (048.941V4). The diameter is 5.0 mm. For repositioning on
the master cast, the Bite Registration Aids have a flat side laterally.

Art. No. 048.940V4 Art. No. 048.941V4

1 Step 1 – The components are each fitted with a snap-in mechanism

that holds them in the internal configuration of the implant.

Important: Protect against aspiration when using these compo-

nents (e.g. use of a throat pack is recommended).

2 Step 2 – To ensure the repositioning from the mouth to the master

cast, the occlusal area and the lateral flat side of the Bite Registration
Aids must be adequately surrounded by bite registration material.

3a Step 3 – To transfer the bite, the Bite Registration Aids are then put
in the analogs on the master cast, the bite wax model is fixed, and
the maxilla and mandible casts are mounted on the articulator.

Note: Bite Registration Aids must be shaped outside of the mouth.

If they need to be shortened occlusally due to lack of space, ensure
that the lateral flat side is not ground off.

3b

14

15X.255.indd 14 26/05/2017 09:38

 6 Temporary restorations
Until the definitive superstructure has been made, the implants can be restored with temporary
crowns and bridges. There are two possible options:

6.1 Restoration with the RN/WN synOcta® Temporary Meso Abutment

Implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN
Art. no. 048.664 Art. no. 048.242
RN synOcta® Temporary Meso Abutment,
crown, including screw*.
*Screw available separately under Art. No. 048.356.
Temporary restoration with the RN synOcta® Temporary Meso
Abutment is suitable espcially for soft tissue conditioning in the
anterior esthetic region. Resin veneering on the Temporary Meso
Abutment can be done easily by the dentist during surgery. The RN
synOcta® Temporary Meso Abutment consists of a polymer abut-
ment that is reinforced with a titanium inlay that covers the implant
shoulder. It is placed directly on the implant or analog and is fixed
with the corresponding screw.

Chairside fabrication
The Temporary Meso Abutment is customized individually. To make it easy to loosen the Basal Screw, the occlusal opening
is sealed with cotton wool or wax prior to veneering.

The temporary denture is fabricated as follows, using standard techniques:

Direct veneering using the vaccum-formed foil technique

As in conventional fabrication of a temporary, strip crowns can optionally be filled with resin and attached.
After biting down, the excess is removed; and after curing the crown is removed, polished and the occlusal screw channel
is opened again.

15

15X.255.indd 15 26/05/2017 09:38

 Temporary cementing of a pre-fabricated crown

Fabrication of a resin crown over the modified Temporary Abutment using standard technique.

When inserting the Temporary Meso Abutment, we recommend a tightening torque of 15 to 35 Ncm.
Important: the RN synOcta® Temporary Meso Abutment must not remain in situ for more than 6 months, and the restoration
must always be under-occluded in order to reduce lateral forces.

Restorations made from VITA CAD-Temp® can be pre-polished with a suitable silicone polisher and a small goat hair brush.
Standard acrylic polishing agents that are also suitable for intraoral use are used for high luster polishing. Avoid creating
excessive heat.

Important: Careful polishing is absolutely necessary to achieve a natural looking result and to avoid plaque accumulation
as well as related negative effects on the shade. Use a Polishing Aid or Implant Analog to protect the implant configuration
while polishing the temporary restoration.

Modification of abutments – How far to reduce the dimensions

Area of possible Area of possible

reduction reduction The Temporary Abutment height can be shortened with standard
tools and techniques, but should not be reduced beyond the metal
core. The width must not be reduced by more than 1 mm at the
thickest part (NNC, NC) or further than the metal margin (RN, WN,
RC).

RN WN

Red line indicates the area of maximum reduction

16

15X.255.indd 16 26/05/2017 09:38

 6.2 Restoration with the synOcta® Posts for temporary restorations (for RN and WN)

Implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN Implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN Fabrication of the temporary restoration on implant
shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN and implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm
WN is identical.

This temporary restoration can be fabricated option-

Art. No. 048.715 • Art. No. 048.716 •• Art. No. 048.717 • Art. No. 048.718 •• ally by the dentist directly during surgery or by the
•• crown dental technician in the laboratory. The synOcta®
•• bridge Posts are made of titanium and are screwed directly
to the implant or analog with the integral screw.

Chairside fabrication:
The posts are shortened below the occlusion level and the occlusal
openings are sealed with wax or cotton wool. To avoid the titanium
showing through the resin, coating the posts with opaquer prior to
veneering is recommended.

The temporary restoration is fabricated with the usual standard

techniques. For instance vacuum-formed foil or, as in conventional
fabrication of temporaries, with strip crowns filled with resin which
are attached to the post. After biting down, the excess is removed
and after curing, the crown/bridge is removed, polished and the
occlusal screw channels are opened again.

Fabrication in the laboratory:

The posts can be veneered by grinding ready-made acrylic teeth
or by direct modelling with resin. This option is suitable especially
if there is a silicone index of the wax-up. The titanium posts are
silanised to ensure better adhesion of the resin. To avoid the tita-
nium showing through the resin, coating the posts with opaquer
prior to veneering is recommended. The temporary is made with
veneering resin. Integration of a metal reinforcement between the
posts is recommended for bridge constructions.

Important: the prefabricated titanium posts cannot be used for the

casting technique.

When inserting the posts, we recommend a tightening torque of

between 15 and 35 Ncm.

Important: the synOcta® Posts must not remain in situ for more
than 6 months and the restoration must always be under-occluded
in order to reduce lateral forces.

17

15X.255.indd 17 26/05/2017 09:38

 7 Fabricating the master cast
Analogs for:

Implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN Implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN The fabrication of the master cast for implant shoulder
∅ 4.8 mm RN and implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN is
identical.

Important: To avoid inaccuracies when taking the

impression, the analog in both versions must be
Art. No. 048.124 Art. No. 048.171 connected exactly with the octagon of the impression
components (before snapping it on or screwing it in).
Color coding

RN synOcta® impression components on implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm red

WN synOcta® impression components on implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm white

Closed-tray technique (screwed):

Mount the impression post on the analog using the guide screw.
To avoid inaccuracies when connecting, the analog must be posi-
tioned exactly in line with the grooves of the impression post before
screwing it in.

Note: Ensure that the color code of the guide screw corresponds to
the color code of the analog and that the color code of the analog
corresponds to the color code of the polymer cap in the impression
material.
ѹѹ Reposition the impression post in the tray.
ѹѹ Smoothly push the impression post until you feel the tactile
response of engagement. It is now firmly seated on the impres-
sion cap in the impression tray.

Closed-tray technique (snapped):

In the laboratory the RN synOcta® Analog (048.124) is repositioned
in the impression. The shoulder must click audibly into place. The red
RN synOcta® Positioning Cylinder indicates to the dental technician
that the RN synOcta® Analog with the red line must be used.

18

15X.255.indd 18 26/05/2017 09:38

 Open-tray technique (screwed):
The RN synOcta® Analog is fixed in the impression using the Integral
Guide Screw. The red RN synOcta® Impression Cap indicates to the
dental technician that the RN synOcta® Analog with the red line
must be used.

Important: When tightening the screw, grasp the retentive section

of the analog in order to prevent the Impression Cap from rotating.
This is especially important if the cap has been shortened.

Fabrication of working model

Tip: A gingival mask should always be used to ensure that the emer-
gence profile of the crown is contoured optimally. This is essential
for restorations in esthetically demanding regions and with subgin-
gival crown margins.

Conventional fabrication of the working model using special hard

plaster type 4

19

15X.255.indd 19 26/05/2017 09:38

 8 Case planning with the Prosthetic Planning Kit
Intended use
ѹѹ Intraoral and extraoral planning of prosthetic restoration

Characteristics

Simple
ѹѹ Color-coded and easily identifiable Plan Abutments
ѹѹ Comprehensive Plan Set containing all Plan Abutments clearly
arranged

Reliable
ѹѹ Proper seating of Plan Abutments verified through the clear-cut
response from the prosthetic connection
ѹѹ Plan Abutments made of sterilizable polymer material

Note: After intraoral use clean and sterilize Plan Abutments with
moist heat. Do not sterilize the cassette or its inserts. Replace
non-functional Plan Abutments.

Soft Tissue Level Plan Set/Plan Abutment selection

The Straumann® Soft Tissue Level Plan Set (048.904) allows for
optimal planning of the restoration in the mouth and on the model.
This gives the dentist and the dental technician greatest flexibility
in cooperative planning and minimizes the number of abutments
that need to be stocked.

This kit contains plastic abutments for crown and bridge resto-
rations that can be placed on the analogs in order to check the
height, axial alignment and screw axis.

This also makes it easy to determine which of the Angled Abutments

(type A or B) offers the best solution.

20

15X.255.indd 20 26/05/2017 09:38

 RN synOcta® Plan Abutments for implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm

Art. No. 048.929 Art. No. 048.921 Art. No. 048.916 Art. No. 048.917 Art. No. 048.918 Art. No. 048.919

Art. No. 048.922 Art. No. 048.923 Art. No. 048.924 Art. No. 048.925 Art. No. 048.930

Color coding

RN synOcta® Plan Abutments for implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm red

WN synOcta® Plan Abutments for implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm

Art. No. 048.931 Art. No. 048.933 Art. No. 048.934 Art. No. 048.932

Color coding

WN synOcta® Plan Abutments for implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm grey

21

15X.255.indd 21 26/05/2017 09:38

 A) Selecting the right abutment
Open the Plan Set. Use a pair of tweezers or the SCS Screwdriver
to transfer the Plan Abutments from and to the mouth or model.

If using intraorally, take care to prevent aspiration of the parts.

Place the Plan Abutment on the implant (intraoral use) or Implant

Analog (extraoral use). This will help in checking dimensions (rings
on Plan Abutments indicate gingiva height), axial alignment and
screw axis of the potential restoration.

B) Ordering the stock abutment

Once the best-fitting Plan Abutment is determined, the corre-
sponding stock abutment can be ordered using the allocation chart
on the Plan Set inlay card.

Cleaning and sterilizing Plan Abutments

Clean the Plan Abutments thoroughly with water or ethanol after
intraoral use.
After cleaning, sterilize Plan Abutments with moist heat (autoclave)
for 18 minutes at 134 °C (273 °F). Refer to the manufacturer’s speci-
fications for the heat-sterilization device.

Note: Do not sterilize Plan Abutments more than 20 times. Do not

gamma-sterilize Plan Abutments. Do not sterilize the cassette or its
components.

22

15X.255.indd 22 26/05/2017 09:38

 9.a synOcta® 1.5 Screw-retained
Abutments for transocclusal screw-retained crowns and bridges
Implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN
Art. No. 048.601
Art. No. 048.632
RN synOcta® Gold Coping
without internal octagon for
bridge, for use with 048.601
Art. No. 048.638
WN synOcta® Gold Coping
without internal octagon for
bridge, for use with 048.603
(includes Modeling Aid)
15X.255.indd 23
Implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN
Art. No. 048.603
Art. No. 048.633
RN synOcta® Gold Coping
with internal octagon for
crown, for use with 048.601
Art. No. 048.639
WN synOcta® Gold Coping
with internal octagon for
crown, for use with 048.603
(includes Modeling Aid)
A) Fabrication of the superstructure
Inserting of the abutment
The original abutment is put on the analog and
aligned in the octagon.
Important: The abutment must be properly posi-
tioned in the octagon before the screw is tightened.
The screw is tightened by hand using the SCS
Screwdriver.
B) P
 rocess of the copings
Version 1: synOcta® Gold Copings for the cast-on technique
The Gold Copings are made of a non-oxidizing high-fusing alloy
(Ceramicor®: Au 60 %, Pt  19  %, Pd 20  %, Ir 1%; melting range
1400 – 1490 °C, 2552 – 2714 °F). With these copings, the Modeling
Aid (burn-out plastic) is already in place. The Modeling Aid can be
shortened if necessary.
Tip: Never cast without the Modeling Aid. Otherwise the metal-­
ceramic alloy will not flow at all or will be too thin at the upper edge
of the coping (screw seating on the coping), leading to a risk of cracks
appearing in the ceramic because of different heat expansion coef-
ficients. The Modeling Aid also ensures that the end of the screw
channel is clean and sharp-edged.
23
26/05/2017 09:38
 1 Step 1 – Position the selected Gold Coping or Plastic Coping, then
secure with an SCS Occlusal Screw or SCS Guide Screw. Depending
on the individual circumstances, the Modeling Aid, Plastic Coping
and/or the Guide Screw may need to be shortened to the height
of the occlusal plane.

2 Step 2 – Wax up the framework in the conventional manner for

veneers (plastic/porcelain). Use the silicone key of the wax-up to
check the framework shape.
The modeling is carried out on a scaled-down tooth shape.
The crowns must be premolarized in size to reduce the risk of nonaxial
loading and prevent plaque accumulation due to overcontouring.

3 Step 3 – When waxing up the framework, ensure that those

areas of the prefabricated Gold Copings that are to be veneered
with porcelain are coated with wax (at least 0.7 mm). As the Gold
Coping consists of a non-oxidizing alloy, the porcelain cannot be
bonded directly onto it (no oxidation for bonding).

Important: Do not cover the delicate margin of the copings with

wax. The use of investment material for rapid heating methods
(speed investment methods) is not recommended. Do not use
wetting agents.

Tip: Before investment, it is recommended that the delicate margin

is cleaned with a cotton bud (dipped in alcohol) as even minimal wax
residue here can lead to overflow of the cast-on alloy onto the edge
or into the interior of the coping.

24

15X.255.indd 24 26/05/2017 09:38


Art. No. 048.227
RN synOcta® Plastic Coping
without internal octagon for
bridge, for use with 048.601
Art. No. 048.666
WN synOcta® Plastic Coping
without internal octagon for
bridge, for 048.603
15X.255.indd 25
Version 2: synOcta® Plastic Copings for the burn-out technique
The Plastic Copings are made of a fully burn-out plastic and can be
shortened if required.
Note: A cast component can never achieve the perfection of
Art. No. 048.229
RN synOcta® Plastic Coping
a prefabricated component, which is first rolled and drawn, then
with internal octagon for machined to provide excellent mechanical strength.
crown, for use with 048.601
Important: When using Plastic Copings, the occlusal or Guide Screw
should be tightened gently. When modeling on Plastic Copings, the
screw seating and the 45° shoulder may be deformed if the screw on
the analog is screwed too tightly since plastic is elastic.
Art. No. 048.667
WN synOcta® Plastic Coping
with internal octagon for
crown, for 048.603
Reamer for version 2
1. 2. 3.
The following items are required:
1. synOcta® Guide Pin, 046.241, 2. Finishing Instrument for 45°‚
shoulder, 046.243, 3. Handle, 046.240
If there are small casting beads on the 45° shoulder of the cast Plastic
Coping, the shoulder area can be smoothed using the Finishing
Instrument. The synOcta® Guide Pin is inserted in the Handle, the
Finishing Instrument is put over the Guide Pin and the Guide Pin
is then positioned carefully in the cast coping. The 45° shoulder of
the coping is smoothed by rotating the Finishing Instrument slowly
and evenly.
Important: The Finishing Instrument has no stop. Abrade only as
much as necessary to remove the casting beads. Working under a
stereo microscope is recommended. Serious casting defects and
extreme unevenness cannot be corrected with the Finishing Instru-
ment. In these cases, the procedure must be repeated.
25
26/05/2017 09:38

5.5 mm
4.5 mm
Art. No. 048.571
RN synOcta® Meso Milling
Cylinder, with internal
octagon, crown edge
∅ 8.0 mm, for 048.601
Version 3: synOcta® Meso Milling Cylinder
8.0 mm
The prefabricated synOcta® Meso Milling Cylinders are made of tita-
nium and were developed for cement-retained crown restorations
on implants that are placed more than 3.0 mm subgingival.
In the cervical area, the cylinders exhibit a height of 4.5 mm and a
diameter of 8.0 mm for RN respectively 10.0 mm for WN and can be
customized to provide an optimal emergence profile (anatomical
neck shape). The cylinders feature an internal octagon to prevent
them from rotating.
RN synOcta® 1.5
Art. No. 048.601 Note: synOcta® titanium Meso Milling Cylinders are not suitable for
direct ceramic veneering with titanium ceramics.
10.0 mm

5.5 mm

4.5 mm

Art. No. 048.573

WN synOcta® Meso Milling
Cylinder, with internal
octagon, crown edge
WN synOcta® 1.5
∅ 10.0 mm, for 048.603
Art. No. 048.603

1a Step 1 – The RN synOcta® Meso Milling Cylinder consists of titanium

and can be modified as needed. It has an internal octagon as an
anti-rotation safeguard, and is used by the dental technician on the
working cast.

1b

26

15X.255.indd 26 26/05/2017 09:38

 To maintain proper stability of the
Meso Milling Cylinder on the abutment,
Max. 2.0 mm a minimum height of 2.0 mm must be
Maintain at least 2.0 mm maintained occlusally in the cervical
in the cervical region.
region.

For reasons of hygiene, the cement

margin must lie no deeper than 2.0 mm
below the gingiva.

2
Step 2 – The superstructure is fabricated on the modified Meso
Milling Cylinder using the usual modeling, casting, and veneering
methods.

3 Step 3 – The synOcta® Meso Milling Cylinder is screwed (utilizing

an SCS Occlusal Screw, 048.350V4) onto the synOcta® 1.5 Abutment
and tightened with a torque of 15 Ncm.

27

15X.255.indd 27 26/05/2017 09:38

 C) Fitting the final restoration

The restoration is delivered to the dentist with the original abut-

ment on the master cast.

Remove the Healing Cap or temporary restoration. Thoroughly clean

and dry the interior of the implant.

Remove the superstructure from the implant and the abutment

from the analog.

Position the cleaned synOcta® 1.5 Abutment (RN and WN) in the
internal octagon without the use of cement. Then tighten the
abutment screw with the SCS Screwdriver along with the Ratchet
(046.119) and Torque Control Device (046.049).

A tightening torque of 35  Ncm when inserting the abutments is

recommended.

Tightening torque =
35 Ncm! Important: The abutment must be properly positioned in the
octagon before the screw is tightened.

28

15X.255.indd 28 26/05/2017 09:38

 Tighten the superstructure on the synOcta® 1.5 Abutment with a
torque of 15 Ncm. The following options are available for securing
the superstructure:

Version 1: Securing with the SCS Occlusal Screw:

With this option, cover the screw heads with a little wax or gutta-
percha and then seal the transocclusal screw channels (e.g. with
SCS Occlusal Screw
Art. No. 048.350 composite).

Tightening torque = 15 Ncm!

Version 2: Securing with the SCS Guide Screw:

With this option, shorten the SCS Guide Screw intra-orally to the
occlusal plane.
SCS Guide Screw
Art. No. 048.361/
363/364 Tightening torque = 15 Ncm!

29

15X.255.indd 29 26/05/2017 09:38

 9.b synOcta® Cemented
Implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN
Art. No. 048.605
Abutments for cement-retained crowns
and bridges
Implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN
In situations where a screw-retained solution is
contraindicated, the dental technician can fabricate
a cement-retained superstructure directly with this
abutment without further impression-taking by the
dentist. Cement-retained bridge constructions in
combination with implant shoulders of ∅ 4.8 mm RN
and ∅ 6.5 mm WN are also possible. The abutment
can be shortened on the master cast by a maximum
Art. No. 048.606
of 2.0 mm.

A) Fabrication of the superstructure

Insert the abutment in the octagon of the synOcta® Analog using
an SCS Screwdriver.

Important: The abutment must be properly positioned in the

octagon before the screw is tightened.

The screw is tightened by hand using the SCS Screwdriver

30

15X.255.indd 30 26/05/2017 09:38

 1 B) Process of the copings
Step 1 – Where occlusal space is limited, the abutment can be short-
ened by a maximum of 2.0 mm.

Important: The abutment must not be ground laterally but only

shortened occlusally to maintain proper stability.

2
Step 2 – To facilitate the working procedure, prefabricated synOcta®
Plastic Copings for 048.605 are available to the dental technician.
The copings are made from completely burn-out plastic.

The Plastic Copings are equipped with a snap-on mechanism, which

makes them easier to fix onto the synOcta® Analog. The snap-on
mechanism must be removed after casting.

3 Step3 – The Plastic Copings can also be shortened and are adjusted
to the height of the shortened abutment.

The occlusal opening is sealed temporarily with wax or plastic.

Waxing up then takes place directly over the Plastic Coping.

Art. No. 048.662 Art. No. 048.663

RN synOcta® Plastic Coping RN synOcta® Plastic Coping
without internal octagon for with internal octagon for
bridge, for use with 048.605 crown, for use with 048.605

Art. No. 048.243 Art. No. 048.244

WN synOcta® Plastic Coping WN synOcta® Plastic Coping
with internal octagon for crown, without internal octagon for
for use with 048.606 bridge, for use with 048.606

31

15X.255.indd 31 26/05/2017 09:38

 4 Step 4 – Invest the framework (see pages 62 – 63). The investment
material must be matched to the casting alloy used (follow the
manufacturer’s directions and recommendations).

Important: Burn-out plastics are characterized by the fact that they

swell up when they are burned out. For this reason it is important
that the outside of the Plastic Coping is completely covered with
wax. The wax burns off and therefore creates sufficient space in
the mold for expansion when burned out in the oven. There must
be a wax layer of at least 0.3 mm in the marginal region (do not
wax above the delicate margin). If there is insufficient waxing in the
marginal region of the coping, there is a risk that the frustum will
break in the interior of the invested coping, due to the effects of the
expansion of the plastic in the mold.

1. 2. 3.

The following items are required:

1. synOcta® Guide Pin, 046.246 for RN respectively synOcta® Guide
Pin, 046.247 for WN, 2. Finishing Instrument for 45°‚ shoulder,
046.243, 3. Handle, 046.240

5
Reamer
Step 5 – The snap-on mechanism can be removed under a micro-
scope using the Finishing Instrument or polishing rubber.

Important: The snap-on mechanism must be removed completely

after casting. Otherwise it will not be possible to position the
construction exactly on the analogs and implants.

Tip: When trimming the cast coping, do not grind into the corners
in the interior, as this leads to rotatory movements of the coping on
the abutment.

32

15X.255.indd 32 26/05/2017 09:38

 Important: The Finishing Instrument has no stop. Abrade only as
much as necessary to remove the casting beads. Working under a
stereo microscope is recommended.

6
Step 6 – The construction can now be veneered in the conventional
way. The veneering materials must be matched to the alloy used
(follow the manufacturer’s directions and recommendations).

C) Transfer Aids
To ensure correct transfer of the position of the RN synOcta® Abut-
ment from the master cast to the patient, an individual index can be
Art. No. 048.059V4, Art. No. 048.054V4, fabricated on the cast using the Transfer Aid (048.059V4) and plastic.
for 048.605, RN for 048.606, WN Simply place the Transfer Aid on the abutment situated in the cast.
In the case of single crowns, the index is secured with support from
the adjacent teeth, and in the case of bridges the abutments are
splinted to one another.

Important: The occlusal screw opening must not be covered with

plastic. Ensure that no plastic gets into the interior of the abutment,
otherwise it will not be possible to loosen the integral abutment
screw.

33

15X.255.indd 33 26/05/2017 09:38

 D) Fitting the final restoration
The restoration is delivered to the dentist with the original abut-
ments on the master cast.

Remove the Healing Cap or temporary restoration. Thoroughly clean

and dry the interior of the implants.

Remove the screws of the abutments from the master cast using an
SCS Screwdriver and place the Transfer Aid in the patient’s mouth.
Use the SCS Screwdriver for the transfer.

Important: Properly position the cleaned RN synOcta® Abutments

in the internal octagon without the use of cement.

Tighten the abutment screws with the SCS Screwdriver along with
the Ratchet (046.119) and Torque Control Device (046.049).

Important: The abutment must first be properly positioned in the

octagon of the implant before the screw is tightened.

A tightening torque of 35  Ncm is recommended for inserting the

abutments.

Tightening torque =
35 Ncm!

34

15X.255.indd 34 26/05/2017 09:38

 9.c synOcta® Angled for RN
15° and 20° Angled Abutments for screw-retained and
cement-retained crowns and bridges
RN Angled Abutments allow prosthetic restorations to be performed
while equalizing the implant axis at the same time. The angles of 15°
and 20° mean that the angle of insertion required for each situa-
tion can be determined and the necessary axis correction made. The
Angled Abutment allows removable (transocclusal screw-retained)
and cement-retained crowns and bridges to be fabricated.
15° 20°

Important: RN Angled Abutments must not be used with 15° angled

hollow cylinder implants.

Due to their design, Angled Abutments must not be trimmed or

individually modified.

The RN synOcta® Angled Abutments are available in a short

version (Art. No. 048.612/613/617/618) and a long version (Art. No.
048.610/611/615/616). The handling of both versions is identical. The
difference in height is 1.0 mm.

Selecting the correct abutment

Two types of RN synOcta® Angled Abutments are available for each
angle. This enables the axis to be corrected in 16 different align-
ments (in 22.5° graduations).
The use of the Prosthetic Planning Kit (048.901) is recommended to
22.5° help determine the most suitable abutment.

Type A Type B

Art. No. 048.612 Art. No. 048.617 Art. No. 048.613 Art. No. 048.618
15° 20° 15° 20°

A = angle to the apex B = angle to the flat wall

35

15X.255.indd 35 26/05/2017 09:38

 Option: Plastic Shoulder for RN synOcta® 15°
and 20° Angled Abutments
A special Plastic Shoulder with a snap-on mechanism (048.676V4) is
available for modelling the framework. The Modeling Aid is made of
a burn-out plastic. Simply put the shoulder on the Plastic Shoulder
of the analog until the snap-on mechanism clicks audibly into place.
Modeling can be carried out using wax or plastic, and can be used
for transocclusal screw-retained and cement-retained crowns and
bridges.

Art. No. 048.676

A-1) Fabricating a transocclusal screw-retained single crown

1a 1b Step 1 – Align the abutment on the working model and hand-tighten
the abutment screw using the SCS Screwdriver.
Important: The abutment must be properly positioned in the
octagon of the implant before the screw is hand-tightened.
Tip: Once the correct position has been determined, it is recom-
mended that the position on the model is marked with a felt-tip
pen to ensure that the original position is immediately recognizable
when the abutment is removed.
During the modeling process, the lateral opening must be sealed
with a material that can be easily removed (wax, gutta-percha,
modeling resin, silicone).
Important: This seal must be removed once the crown is completed.

2 Step 2 – Attach the plastic Extension Shell (048.670) to the abut-

ment with an SCS Occlusal Screw and shorten occlusally or adapt
individually. The screw head should always be out of occlusion in
order to prevent any possible riveting of the screw head. The Exten-
sion Shell must always be used since this contains the screw seating
and is required for screw retention.

3a 3b Step 3 – Model and cast the framework.

The snap-on mechanism of the Plastic Shoulder must be removed
after casting (for example carefully with a polishing rubber under
the microscope).
Carry out veneering in accordance with the anatomical guidelines
and allow for the premolarization in the lateral region. The “freedom
in centric” concept should be used for the occlusion (see page 69).

36

15X.255.indd 36 26/05/2017 09:38

 A-2) Fabricating a cemented single crown
1 Step 1 – In this case, the occlusal opening must also be sealed (e.g.
composite, gutta-percha, silicone), in addition to the lateral opening.

2 Step 2 – Positioning the Plastic Shoulder with snap-on mechanism

(048.676V4), for RN synOcta® 15° and 20° Angled Abutments.

3a Step 3 – Model and cast the framework. Carry out veneering in

accordance with the anatomical guidelines and allowing for the
premolarization in the lateral region.

The “freedom in centric” concept should be used for the occlusion

(see page 69).

Important: Before delivery of the work to the dentist, the lateral seal
of the screw opening must be removed, to ensure that no residue is
left, and the abutment must be cleaned.
3b 3c

37

15X.255.indd 37 26/05/2017 09:38

 B) Transfer Aids
To ensure correct transfer of the position of the RN synOcta® Angled
Abutments from the master cast to the patient, the Transfer Aid can
be used. It is made from polymerizable plastic.

Art. No. 048.000V4 for RN Art. No. 048.002V4 for RN

synOcta® angled, short, synOcta® angled, long,
Art. No. 048.612/613/617/618 Art. No. 048.610/611/615/616

It can be placed on the RN synOcta® Angled Abutment and secured

with the SCS Occlusal Screw (048.350).

An index is fabricated using plastic. In the case of a bridge, the

Transfer Aids can be splinted. Support from adjacent teeth is then
not required. If space is tight, the retention elements of the Transfer
Aid can be shortened.

38

15X.255.indd 38 26/05/2017 09:38

 C) Fitting the final restoration
The restoration is delivered to the dentist with the original abut-
ment on the master cast. Loosen the abutment using the SCS Screw-
driver and remove it from the analog. Then place the abutment
in the patient’s mouth using the Transfer Aid. Finally, remove the
Transfer Aid and fit the superstructure.

Important: The cleaned RN synOcta® abutment is properly posi-

tioned in the internal octagon without the use of cement.

The abutment screw is tightened with the SCS Screwdriver along

with the Ratchet (046.119) and Torque Control Device (046.049).

Important: The abutment must be properly positioned in the

octagon of the implant before the screw is tightened.

A tightening torque of 35 Ncm is re-commended for inserting the

abutments.

Tighten the crown with a torque of 15 Ncm using an SCS Occlusal

Screw or an SCS Guide Screw shortened to occlusal level.

Important: If the superstructure is cemented, the lateral and the

occlusal openings must be re-sealed with wax or gutta-percha.

39

15X.255.indd 39 26/05/2017 09:38

 9.d synOcta® Angled for WN
15° Angled Abutment for cement-retained crowns and
bridges
The WN synOcta® 15° Angled Abutment allows prosthetic resto-
rations to be performed while equalizing the implant axis at the
same time. Only cement-retained crowns and bridges can be fabri-
cated with the WN Angled Abutment.

15°
Art. No. 048.608

Selecting the correct abutment

Two types of WN synOcta® 15° Angled Abutments are available.
This enables the axis to be corrected in 16 different alignments (in
22.5° graduations).
The use of the Prosthetic Planning Kit (048.901) is recommended to
help determine the most suitable abutment.
22.5°

Type A Type B

Art. No. 048.608 Art. No. 048.609

A = angle to the apex B = angle to the flat wall

1
A) Fabricating a cement-retained single crown
Step 1 – Align the abutment on the working model and tighten the
abutment screw using the SCS Screwdriver.
Important: The abutment must be properly positioned in the
octagon of the implant before the screw is tightened.
Tip: Once the correct position has been determined, it is recom-
mended that the position on the model is marked with a felt-tip pen
in order to ensure that the original position is immediately recogniz-
able when the abutment is removed.

40

15X.255.indd 40 26/05/2017 09:38

 2 Step 2 – During the modelling process, the lateral opening must be
sealed with a material that can be easily removed (e.g. wax, gutta-
percha, modelling resin, silicone).

Important: This seal must be removed once the crown is completed!

Option: Plastic Shoulder for WN synOcta® 15° Angled Abutment

There is a special Plastic Shoulder with a snap-on mechanism
(048.678) for modeling the framework. The Modeling Aid is made
Art. No. 048.678 of a burn-out plastic.

3
Step 3 – Simply place the shoulder on the WN analog shoulder until
the snap-on mechanism clicks audibly into place.

4a 4b
Step 4 – Simply place the shoulder on the WN analog shoulder until
the snap-on mechanism clicks audibly into place.

5
Step 5 – This is followed by casting of the framework. The snap-on
mechanism of the Plastic Shoulder must be removed after casting
(for example carefully with a polishing rubber under the microscope).
Important: Before delivery of the work to the dentist, the lateral seal
of the screw opening must be removed, ensuring that no residue is
left, and the abutment must be cleaned.

41

15X.255.indd 41 26/05/2017 09:38

 B) Transfer Aid
To ensure correct transfer of the position of the WN synOcta®
Angled Abutment from the master cast to the patient, the Transfer
Aid (048.032) can be used.
It is made from polymerizable plastic.

Art. No. 048.032

The Transfer Aid is placed on the abutment.

Fabricate an index using plastic. In the case of a bridge, the Transfer

Aids can be splinted. Support from adjacent teeth is then not
required. If space is tight, the retention elements of the Transfer
Aid can be shortened.

42

15X.255.indd 42 26/05/2017 09:38

 C) Fitting the final restoration
The restoration is delivered to the dentist with the original abut-
ment on the master cast. Loosen the WN synOcta® Angled Abut-
ment using the SCS Screwdriver and remove from the analog. Place
the abutment in the patient’s mouth using the Transfer Aid. Finally,
remove the Transfer Aid and fit the superstructure.

Important: Properly position the cleaned abutment in the internal

octagon without the use of cement.

Tighten the abutment screw with the SCS Screwdriver along with
the Ratchet (046.119) and Torque Control Device (046.049).

Important: The abutment must be properly positioned in the

octagon of the implant before the screw is tightened.

A tightening torque of 35 Ncm is re-commended for inserting the

abutment.

Tightening torque =
35 Ncm!

Important: Before cementing the superstructure, the lateral

opening must be re-sealed with wax or gutta-percha.

43

15X.255.indd 43 26/05/2017 09:38

 9.e synOcta® Transversal (TS for RN)
Abutment for Transversal Screw-retained crowns and
bridges
Transversal Screw retention is used in cases where occlusal/incisal
screw retention is contraindicated due to reasons of esthetics and/
or construction (axial alignment of the screw).

Art. No. 048.620

A) Fabrication of the superstructure

Inserting of the abutment
Put the original abutment on the RN synOcta® Analog and align in
the octagon.

Important: The abutment must be properly positioned in the

octagon before the screw is tightened.

The abutment screw is tightened by hand using the SCS Screwdriver.

The transversal opening can be aligned in 16 different positions.

One screw opening is aligned with the flat wall, while a second screw opening is aligned with the apex. View from above

44

15X.255.indd 44 26/05/2017 09:38

 Tip: Once the correct position has been determined, it is recom-
mended that the position on the model is marked with a felt-tip
pen to ensure that the original position is immediately recognizable
when the abutment is removed.

B) Processing of the copings

The following copings are available for the RN synOcta® Trans-
versal (TS) Abutment:

Version 1: Gold Coping for the cast-on technique

The Gold Coping is made of a non-oxidizing high-fusing alloy
(Ceramicor®: Au 60 %, Pt 19 %, Pd 20 %, Ir 1 %; melting range
1400 – 1490 °C, 2552 – 2714 °F).

Art. No. 048.634

RN synOcta® TS Gold Coping

Version 2: Plastic Coping for the burn-out technique

The Plastic Coping is made of a burn-out plastic with a cast-on high
gold content screw housing (Ceramicor®: Au 60 %, Pt 19 %, Pd 20 %,
Ir 1 %; melting range 1400 – 1490 °C, 2552 – 2714 °F).

Art. No. 048.665

RN synOcta® TS Plastic Coping
with cast‑on threaded housing

45

15X.255.indd 45 26/05/2017 09:38

 1a Step 1 – Position the selected coping and then carefully tightened
with a Transversal Screw (049.154) and the TS Hexagonal Screw-
driver (046.420).

Important: The lingual/palatal part of the Gold Coping or the

lingual/palatal edge of the threaded housing must not be modified
prior to casting. Otherwise, the margin of the Thread Protection
Screw will no longer fit.

1b

2 Step 2 – Wax up the framework in the conventional manner for

veneers (plastic/porcelain). Use the silicone key of the wax-up to
check the framework shape.

The modeling is carried out on a scaled-down tooth shape. The

crowns must be premolarized in size to reduce the risk of nonaxial
loading and prevent plaque accumulation due to overcontouring.

Important: Do not cover the delicate margin of the copings with

wax!

3 Step 3 – When waxing up the framework, ensure that those areas

of the prefabricated Gold Copings that are to be veneered with
porcelain are coated with wax (at least 0.7 mm). As the Gold Coping
consists of a non-oxidizing alloy, the porcelain cannot be bonded
directly onto it (no oxidation for bonding).

46

15X.255.indd 46 26/05/2017 09:38

 4a Step 4 – The screw thread must be protected during the casting
phase. In order to do so, the Transversal Screw must be removed and
replaced by the RN synOcta® TS Thread Protection Screw (048.672)
prior to investment.

4b Important: Coat the thread of the Thread Protection Screw and

coping with graphite before tightening it. This will allow the Thread
Protection Screw to be removed more easily after the casting
process.

5 Step 5 – Invest the modeled superstructure.

Tip: When investing a RN synOcta® TS Plastic Coping or Gold Coping,

ensure that the Thread Protection Screw is facing sideways or down-
wards (see picture above). That way, the investment material can
flow better into the inner thread channel and avoid bubbles. See
casting tips on pages 64–66.

The investment material must be matched to the alloy used (refer to

the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations).

Important: Prior to investment, the inside and outside of the circular

gold or plastic margin must be cleaned of insulating material and
wax particles. The use of investment material for rapid heating
methods (speed investment methods) is not recommended. Do not
use wetting agents.

47

15X.255.indd 47 26/05/2017 09:38

 6 Step 6 – Cast-on technique for prefabricated Gold Copings:
Since casting is always involved with the RN synOcta® TS Copings
(casting to the screw housing in the case of Plastic Copings), the
guidelines on cast-on technique on pages 64 – 66 must be followed.

Once the model has slowly cooled to room temperature, carefully

remove the investment compound.

7 Step 7 – The following are suitable for devesting:

Ultrasound, water, pickling or a glass fiber brush.

Important: Never use sand-blasting for devesting.

This will destroy the margins and adversely affect the accuracy of
the fit.
Casting defects inside the Gold Copings are due to differences in the
expansion behavior between Ceramicor® and the investment mate-
rial. They considerably affect the precision of the prefabricated parts
and jeopardize the entire restoration (follow investment material
manufacturer’s directions).

If there is a small amount of metal or casting defects on the thread,

the thread can be worked smooth with the Tap for TS (044.570).

Tip: If the thread of the Thread Protection Screw breaks during

removal because of the metal, the remainder of the thread can be
loosened in an acid bath containing 32 % concentrated hydro-chloric
acid (over night, for instance).
If there are small casting beads on the shoulder of the Plastic
Copings, the shoulder area can be smoothed using the Finishing
Instrument. Position the Guide Pin and Finishing Instrument in the
cast coping and smooth the margin by rotating the Finishing Instru-
ment slowly and evenly.

1. 2. 3.

The following items are required:

1. synOcta® Guide Pin, 046.241, 2. Finishing Instrument for 45°‚
shoulder, 046.243, 3. Handle, 046.240

Serious casting defects and extreme unevenness cannot be

corrected with the Finishing Instrument and Tap. In these cases, the
procedure must be repeated.
Important: The Finishing Instrument has no stop. Abrade only as
much as necessary to remove the casting beads. Working under a
stereo microscope is recommended.

48

15X.255.indd 48 26/05/2017 09:38

 8a 8b Step 8 – When trimming the framework, ensure that the burn-out
alloy is not ground off or perforated. Exposed areas of the prefab-
ricated Gold Coping or threaded housing may cause the porcelain
to crack (no oxide layer for bonding and differences in the thermal
expansion behavior of Ceramicor® and porcelain).

8c

9a 9b
Step 9 – Carry out veneering in accordance with the anatomical
guidelines and allow for the premolarization in the lateral region.
The “freedom in centric” concept should be used for the occlusion
(see page 69).

9c

49

15X.255.indd 49 26/05/2017 09:38

 Note: As the prefabricated copings are extremely precise, the
margins must be finished and polished with extreme care. Working
under a stereo microscope is recommended.

Tip: A RN synOcta® Analog can be attached to protect the margins

during polishing. This reduces the risk of damage to the margins.

C) Transfer Aid
To ensure correct transfer of the position of the RN synOcta®
Transversal (TS) Abutment from the master cast to the patient, the
Transfer Aid (048.003V4) can be used.

Art. No. 048.003V4

It is made from polymerizable plastic and is placed on the RN

synOcta® Transversal (TS) Abutment.

Fabricate an index using plastic. In the case of a bridge, the Transfer

Aids can be splinted. Support from adjacent teeth is then not
required.

If space is tight, the retention elements of the Transfer Aid can be

shortened.

50

15X.255.indd 50 26/05/2017 09:38

 D) Fitting the final restoration
The restoration is delivered to the dentist with the original abutment on the
master cast.

Remove the Healing Cap or temporary restoration. Thoroughly clean and dry the
interior of the implant.

Remove the RN synOcta® Transversal (TS) Abutment from the master cast using
the SCS Screwdriver.

Fit the abutment intraorally using the Transfer Aid.

Then remove the Transfer Aid and fit the superstructure.

51

15X.255.indd 51 26/05/2017 09:38

 Important: Properly position the cleaned RN synOcta® Transversal
(TS) Abutment in the internal octagon without the use of cement.

Tighten the abutment screw with the SCS Screwdriver along with
the Ratchet (046.119) and Torque Control Device (046.049).

Tightening torque = Important: The abutment must be properly positioned in the

35 Ncm!
octagon before the screw is tightened.

A tightening torque of 35  Ncm is recommended for inserting the

abutments.

Insert the superstructure using the Transversal Screw, and tighten

carefully by hand using the TS Hexagonal Screwdriver (046.420).

Art. No. 046.420

52

15X.255.indd 52 26/05/2017 09:38

 9.f Straumann® CARES® Implant-borne prosthetics
Customized implant prosthetics
Straumann® CARES® CADCAM offers you a range of implant-borne
prosthetic solutions in order to achieve high-quality dental implant
restorations. Straumann® CARES® implant-borne elements are
designed for high reliability and predictability.

All implant-borne prosthetic solutions can be ordered via Straumann®

CARES® Visual software. Straumann® CARES® Abutments can also
be ordered via the Straumann® CARES® Scan & Shape service.

Straumann® CARES® Abutments

For customized patient solutions
ѹѹ For cement-retained crowns and bridges via mesostructure
ѹѹ For screw-retained crowns (ceramic abutments only)
ѹѹ Available in two different materials: titanium and ceramic

ѹѹ Characteristics
ѹѹ Customized shape and emergence profile
ѹѹ Control over cement gap
ѹѹ Proven Straumann precision fit

Straumann® CARES® Screw-retained Bridges and Bars

For complex customized patient solutions
ѹѹ For screw-retained bridges
ѹѹ For bars (Dolder®, MP-Clip®, Ackermann®, round)
ѹѹ In two different materials: titanium Grade 4 and cobalt-chro-
mium alloy (coron®)

ѹѹ Characteristics
ѹѹ Direct connection to the implant, no additional abutment
needed
ѹѹ High precision

For further information regarding Straumann® CARES® Implant-

borne prosthetics, please see brochure Basic Information on
the Straumann® CARES® Implant-borne Prosthetic Procedures –
Straumann® CARES® Implant-borne Prosthetic, 152.822

53

15X.255.indd 53 26/05/2017 09:38

 10 synOcta® Gold Abutment for RN and WN
The customizable one-piece solution for anterior zone esthetics

Indication and product overview

As an easy-to-process one-piece solution, the synOcta® Gold Abutment for direct cast-on procedures simplifies production
by substantially reducing required handling steps. With the option to create a screw or cement-retained restoration, the
synOcta® Gold Abutment offers the prosthetic versatility needed to achieve individual and esthetic results.

Modeling Aid made

of burn out plastic

Smooth margin

One-piece abutment,
made of Ceramicor®

RN synOcta® Abutment-to-implant WN synOcta®

Gold Abutment connection Gold Abutment
Art. No. 048.642 Art.-Nr. 048.644

The synOcta® Gold Abutment has an octagon in the basal portion that joins with the octagon of the Straumann dental
implant to prevent it from rotating. It is intended for use with screw-retained single-crown restorations or as a customized
meso structure for cementretained crowns and bridges. The Gold Abutment is not suitable for direct splinting to another
Gold Abutment. Single restorations with a screw access hole through the occlusal/cingulum surface may be fabricated. The
screw channel of burn-out plastic is attached to the Gold Abutment to optimize any modification. The use of a synOcta® 1.5
Screw-retained Abutment (048.601 or 048.603) is not necessary.

Straumann® RN synOcta® Straumann® WN synOcta®

Gold Abutment Gold Abutment

1.80 mm 2.35 mm
4.30 mm 4.75 mm 4.20 mm

2.40 mm

with Gold Coping with Gold Abutment with Gold Coping with Gold Abutment

The use of the WN synOcta® Gold Abutment (048.644) is equivalent to the RN synOcta® Gold Abutment (048.642).

For detailed instructions refer to the following step-by-step procedure of the RN synOcta® Gold Abutment.

54

15X.255.indd 54 26/05/2017 09:38

 A) Production of the meso structure
Inserting of the abutment
The RN synOcta® Gold Abutment is placed on the analog and aligned
in the internal octagon.

Important: The abutment must be positioned in the internal

octagon before the internal screw is tightened. The screw is tight-
ened by hand using a SCS Screwdriver.

Tip: A gingival mask should always be used to ensure that the emer-
gence profile of the crown is optimally contoured. This is essential
for restorations in esthetically demanding regions and with subgin-
gival crown margins.

55

15X.255.indd 55 26/05/2017 09:38

 1a Processing of the Gold Abutment
Step 1 – Depending on the individual circumstances, the Modeling
Aid can be shortened to the height of the occlusal plane.

1b

Tip: For easier handling of the abutment the use of an additional

analog is recommended for manipulation outside the model.

56

15X.255.indd 56 26/05/2017 09:38

 2a Step 2 – For optimal esthetic planning, a wax-up can be modeled.

2b

3 Step 3 – Then a silicone key will be made over the wax-up to define
the optimal wax modelation for the customized abutment.

57

15X.255.indd 57 26/05/2017 09:38

 4a Step 4 – A wax modelation is contoured according to the anatomical
circumstances of the individual case.

4b The silicone key shows exactly the space for the cement-retained
crown, which will be made over this customized abutment.

4c Note: The modeling on the abutment must be sufficiently thick

(wax layer of at least 0.7 mm). Do not cover the delicate margin
of the abutment with wax. The Modeling Aid ensures a clean and
sharp-edged finish of the screw channel.

The picture shows an optimal design for fabrication of the custom-

ized abutment for contouring of an ideal emergence profile and
adaptation of the margin to the gingival contour.

For reasons of hygiene, the cement margin must lie no deeper than
2.0 mm below the gingiva.

Max. 2.0 mm

58

15X.255.indd 58 26/05/2017 09:38

 5a Step 5 – Invest the customized abutment in the usual method
without the use of wetting agents.

In order to avoid overflow of the cast-on alloy on the delicate circular

edge and interior of the abutment, it is recommended to thoroughly
clean the abutment prior to investment (removal of wax particles,
insulating agents with a cotton pellet and/or brush moistened with
5b
alcohol).

Warning: Ensure that there is no wax on the delicate margin! The

use of investment materials for rapid heating methods (speed
investment materials) is not recommended! When processing the
investment material, follow the investment material manufac-
turer’s instructions. Observe the recommended mixing ratio and
preheating time exactly!

Tip: Always do the cast with the Modeling Aid. Otherwise the dental
casting alloy will not or only too thinly flow out at the upper coping
rim.

6a Step 6 – Casting the customized abutment. Gentle devestment with

ultrasound, water jet, pickling acid or glass fiber brush.

6b Note: Intruded casting metals and casting pearls cannot be removed

from the shoulder part of the Gold Abutment with the reamer
instrument for the 45° shoulder due to design reasons.

Warning: Never use sand-blasting for devestment, as it will destroy

the abutment.

59

15X.255.indd 59 26/05/2017 09:38

 Casting errors and incorrect handling
Ground down to abutment level.
If the cast-on alloy is trimmed through, the Ceramicor® surface
cannot be covered with ceramic veneer and the cast has to be
redone. Ceramicor® is a non-oxidizing alloy and allows no ceramic
bonding.

Note: If you choose to veneer directly onto the RN synOcta® Gold

Abutment, you have to ensure that you have a sufficient metal
thickness of the dental casting alloy.
Failed casting.

In the case of casting errors like insufficient mold fill, casting beads
or casting defects in the interior, the procedure must be repeated.
The long-term success of the implants depends greatly on the preci-
Insufficiently
cleaned sion of fit of the restoration.
margin,
overflow of
alloy on the
45° shoulder.

Casting
beads and
overflow of
alloy on the
45° shoulder.

7a
Step 7 – After trimming, the finished customized abutment is
polished and ready for the fabrication of the cement-retained single
crown.

7b

60

15X.255.indd 60 26/05/2017 09:38

 B) Fabricating the cement-retained single crown
1a Step 1 – After blocking out the screw channel the framework is
waxed directly over the customized abutment.

1b

2 Step 2 – The silicone key shows the spatial relations for the
restoration.

3 Step 3 – Cast the framework in the conventional manner.

61

15X.255.indd 61 26/05/2017 09:38

 4a 4b Step 4 – After the trimming of the cast, the metal crown fits precisely
on the customized abutment.

4c

5 Step 5 – The silicone key shows the spatial relations for the veneering.

6a 6b
Step 6 – The final cement-retained crown on the individualized
abutment.

62

15X.255.indd 62 26/05/2017 09:38

 C) Fitting the final restoration
The restoration is delivered to the dentist with the customized abut-
ment on the master cast. The cleaned customized abutment must
be positioned in the internal octagon of the implant without the use
of cement. The Basal Screw of the RN synOcta® Gold Abutment is
Tightening torque =
35 Ncm! then tightened to 35 Ncm on the implant using an SCS Screwdriver,
Ratchet (046.119) and Torque Control Device (046.049).

Before cementing the crown, the SCS configuration of the occlusal

screw should be closed with cotton and sealing compound (gutta-
percha). This allows the possibility of later removal of the custom-
ized abutment in case a crown replacement becomes necessary.

Then the final restoration will be definitively cemented on the

customized abutment.

63

15X.255.indd 63 26/05/2017 09:38

 11 Processing instructions
Investing and casting

Casting tips for burn-out Plastic Copings

For implant shoulder ∅ 4.8 mm RN For implant shoulder ∅ 6.5 mm WN

Casting the framework

The success of work carried out with prefabricated plastic components depends
on the attention paid to the following points:

ѹѹ Burn-out plastics are characterized by the fact that they swell up when they
are burned out. For that reason it is important that the outside of the Plastic
Coping is completely covered with wax. The wax burns off and therefore
creates sufficient space in the mold for expansion when burned out in the
oven. There must be a wax layer of at least 0.3 mm in the marginal region
(Caution: Do not wax above the delicate margin). If there is insufficient
waxing in the marginal region of the coping, there is a risk that the frustum
will break in the interior of the invested coping (screw channel), due to the
effects of the expansion of the plastic in the mold.

ѹѹ To avoid casting errors due to wax particles, insulating agents, etc., careful
cleaning of the interior and the inside and outside of the delicate edge of
the coping prior to investment (e.g. with a cotton bud soaked in alcohol) is
recommended.

ѹѹ The sprues must encourage elimination of the wax and plastic and must not
impede the direction of flow of the alloy (i.e. there should be no sharp angles
and edges). Follow the investment material manufacturer’s recommendations
on the selection and positioning of sprues.

64

15X.255.indd 64 26/05/2017 09:38

 ѹѹ Do not use wax wetting agents, if possible. The plastic is so smooth that
the investment material will fill all the fine contours of the coping’s interior
very well during investment (with the aid of a fine blunt instrument or a fine
brush). However, if wetting agents are utilized, ensure that no aggressive
wetting agents are used which could attack the surface of the Plastic Copings.
Then blow-dry the copings carefully with compressed air. Wetting agent
residues can lead to a reaction with the investing material and thus to casting
errors.

ѹѹ To avoid air bubbles or casting beads in the case of occlusal screw-retained

Plastic Copings, ensure that the investment material flows through the screw
channel into the interior of the coping. If it flows directly into the interior, this
can lead to the formation of bubbles.

ѹѹ The use of phosphate-bonded investment materials that allows a staged

burn-out is recommended. These must be matched with the alloy used.

ѹѹ When processing the investment material, follow the investment material

manufacturer’s instructions. Observe the recommended mixing ratio and
preheating times exactly.

ѹѹ The use of investment material for rapid heating methods (speed investment
methods) is not recommended.

ѹѹ Use only high gold content alloys, and refer to the alloy manufacturer’s alloy
tables.

65

15X.255.indd 65 26/05/2017 09:38

 Casting tips for prefabricated Gold Copings (Ceramicor®)

For implant shoulder For implant shoulder

∅ 4.8 mm RN ∅ 6.5 mm WN

Casting the framework

ѹѹ Do not use wax wetting agents, if possible. The fine film of the wax wetting
agent on the surface of the gold during casting can result in metal on the 45°
shoulder or in the interior (also see casting tips for burn-out plastics, pages
64 – 65). In this case, the work has to be repeated, as the long-term success of
the implants greatly depends on the accurate fit of the prosthetic work.

ѹѹ In order to avoid overflow of the cast-on alloy on the delicate circular edge
and interior of the gold/Plastic Copings, it is advisable to clean them prior to
investment (removal of wax particles, insulating agents, for instance, with a
cotton bud soaked in alcohol).

ѹѹ The sprues must encourage elimination of the wax and plastic and must not
impede the direction of flow of the alloy (i.e. there should be no sharp angles
and edges). Follow the investment material manufacturer’s recommendations
on the selection and positioning of the sprues.

ѹѹ The use of phosphate-bonded investment materials is recommended. These

must be matched to the alloy used.

ѹѹ When processing the investment material, follow the investment material

manufacturer’s instructions. Observe the recommended mixing ratio and
preheating times exactly.

ѹѹ The use of investment materials for rapid heating methods (speed investment
materials) is not recommended.

66

15X.255.indd 66 26/05/2017 09:38

 Guidelines for creating reliable cast-on joints

Cast on properly
Alloy remarks concerning castable Ceramicor® components: The cast-on alloy has fused with the
Ceramicor® coping.
No ceramic can be bonded directly to cast-on Ceramicor® components as this alloy
does not form bonding oxides. Ceramicor® is only suitable for cast-on procedures.

Recommendation: When selecting the casting or bonding alloy, ensure that it

is compatible with the high-fusing alloy of the Ceramicor® components. The
melting range of this casting alloy must not exceed a liquidus temperature of
1350 °C/2462 °F.
Suitable dental casting alloys:
 
ѹѹ High noble alloys
Ceramicor® coping Cast-on alloy
ѹѹ Precious metal alloys with a minimum content of gold and platinium group
metals of 25 %
ѹѹ Palladium based alloys with a minimum content of palladium of 50 %
Cast on inadequately
The inadequate diffusion and variable
solidification are clearly visible
Ceramicor® must not be cast on with base metal casting alloys, because gold
in combination with nickel or cobalt causes destruction of the components!

Alloys in accordance with ISO 9693, 1562 und 8891 are suitable for casting proce-
dures with prefabricated Ceramicor® components.

The alloy manufacturer’s recommendations must be followed. Due to “diffusion”

at the alloy/Gold Coping interface, components made from an unsuitable alloy
may form phases with low strength, reduced corrosion resistance or a lower  
Ceramicor® coping Cast-on alloy
melting range.

Compression/contraction, casting stresses:

The spur angles and casting ratios must be such that the fusion temperature of the
metals is attained. This should be ensured particularly in the case of large-volume
solid casts (e.g. WN cast objects).

67

15X.255.indd 67 26/05/2017 09:38

 General casting tips for all copings (Plastic Copings and Gold Copings)

Casting Procedure
The mold must be transferred to the casting machine in the shortest time possible.

Careful devesting
Once the mold has slowly cooled to room temperature, carefully remove the
investment material from the cast object. The following are suitable for devesting:
ultrasound, water jet, pickling or a glass fiber brush.
Never use sand-blasting for devesting.
This would destroy the fine margins and the internal configuration (octagon),
which would lead to reduced accuracy of the fit (poor marginal fit and rotation
of the copings).

If casting errors occur, such as insufficient discharge, casting beads or casting

defects in the interior, the procedure must be repeated, as the long-term success
of the prosthetic work depends greatly on the accurate fit of the restoration.

Important: Casting defects considerably affect the precision of the prefabricated

parts and jeopardize the long-term success of the restoration. The work then has
to be repeated.

68

15X.255.indd 68 26/05/2017 09:38

 Trimming the cast

When using prefabricated Gold Copings, ensure that the bonding alloy is not
ground off or perforated when trimming the framework. Exposed areas of the
prefabricated Gold Coping may cause the porcelain to crack (no oxide layer for
bonding and differences in the thermal expansion behaviour of Ceramicor® and
ceramic).

Carry out veneering in accordance with the anatomical guidelines and allow for
the premolarization. When building up the porcelain, the framework should be
fixed to the master cast with the SCS Guide Screws. This allows the porcelain to
be stacked around the screw. The “freedom in centric” concept should be used
for the occlusion.

Natural teeth are elastically connected to the alveolar bone via the periodontium.
In contrast, implants are held rigidly as they undergo ankylosis with the bone.
Loads exerted on implant-borne crowns and bridges are transmitted directly to the
bone. Wherever possible, these loads should be transmitted during physiological
movement, i.e. by correct occlusion, as the integrated implants may be disturbed
by an inadequate occlusal surface.

The “freedom in centric” concept therefore affords an ideal solution to occlusion

with implant borne bridgework. “Freedom in centric” involves the creation of an
area of approximately 1.0 mm2, which permits lateral freedom of approximately
1.0 mm in habitual intercuspidation. This surface allows the cusps to glide smoothly
between the retruded contact position and maximum intercuspidation. The posi-
tion of maximum intercuspidation is considered to be the centric occlusion.

The possibility of performing masticatory movements with the described toler-

ance allows certain regulatory movements to be made in the restored dentition.
This, together with premolarization, prevents overloading. Extreme cusp forma-
tion must be avoided as this may lead to severe interlocking and consequently to
overloading.

Vertical masticatory forces must be exerted as physiologically as possible on the

implant-antagonist axis. Crowns on single tooth implants should not perform
guide functions. The degree to which this is possible should be decided at the
treatment planning (diagnostic wax-up) stage.

As the prefabricated copings are extremely precise, the margins must be finished
and polished with great care. Working under a stereo microscope is recommended.

Tip: A Polishing Protector (046.245) or an analog can be attached to protect the

margins during polishing. This reduces the risk of damage to the margins.

69

15X.255.indd 69 26/05/2017 09:38

 Material Information

Alloy Ceramicor®
Color White

Composition Au % 60.0
Pt % 19.0
Pd % 20.0
Ag %
Cu %
Ir % 1.0
other + = <1%

Melting range °C 1400 – 1490 °C

°F 2552 – 2714 °F

Heat expansion coefficient WAK °C 25 – 500 °C = 11.9 μm/m 2 °C

25 – 600 °C = 12.2 μm/m 2 °C
°F 77 – 932 °F = 11.9 μm/m 2 °F
77 – 1112 °F = 12.2 μm/m 2 °F

Hardness condition (by delivery) HV5 220

Hardness after casting or soldering HV5 205

Self-hardening

Hardened HV5 205

0.2 % proof stress (Rp 0.2 %) N/mm2 780

condition as delivered

0.2 % proof stress (Rp 0.2 %) N/mm2 635

after casting or soldering

Possibilities for metal bonding Casting or soldering

Technical information Non-oxidizing alloy for casting-on with

Applications precious metal alloys or for soldering
with precious metal and non-precious
metal alloys.

Sterilization
Straumann abutments and components are not sterile when delivered. Please use the following procedure for sterilization
prior to use.

Material Method Conditions

Ti, Ti alloy, PEEK, PEEK with Ti inlay Autoclave, moist heat 134 °C (273°F), 5 min

Note: Parts that have been modified or altered from their original state may require different sterilization procedures.

70

15X.255.indd 70 26/05/2017 09:38

 Patient recall
Implant-borne superstructures require optimal oral hygiene on the part of the
patient. This must be considered by all involved when planning and designing the
superstructure.

The following points require special attention:

ѹѹ precise marginal fit between implant and superstructure
ѹѹ open accessible interdental spaces (to encourage oral hygiene)
ѹѹ self-cleaning posterior pontics, if possible
ѹѹ the use of a gingival mask on the master cast assists the dental technician
when designing the critical areas of the superstructure
ѹѹ avoid excessive contouring (e.g. a “ridge lap”) which would impede hygiene
procedures and/or expose the implant/restoration to stress

Implant-borne superstructures must undergo regular check-ups to detect any

damage or loosening of screws at an early stage.

If oral hygiene is poor, the patient should be re-instructed and motivated at

the next scaling and polishing session. The interval between check-ups can be
extended for cooperative patients with good oral hygiene.

References
References are available upon request.
Please contact your Straumann representative.

71

15X.255.indd 71 26/05/2017 09:38

 Documentation

For more information, please refer to the following brochures:

ѹѹ Straumann Product Catalog, 452.200/en
ѹѹ Cement-retained Crowns and Bridges with the Solid Abutment System, 152.254/en
ѹѹ Retentive Systems for Implant-borne hybrid dentures, 152.252/en
ѹѹ Prosthetic Procedures for the Narrow Neck CrossFit® Implant, 152.808/en

72

15X.255.indd 72 26/05/2017 09:38

 Courses and training

Courses
Please ask your Straumann representative for information about Straumann®
Dental Implant System training courses. For further information, please visit our
homepage at www.straumann.com.

Training ensures long-term success!

Custom-made products
Under certain circumstances, custom-made products can be supplied for special
indications or cases, which cannot be treated with standard p
­ roducts.

A custom-made product is defined according to EC guideline 93/42 (Article 1, § d)

as being any product fabricated specifically for a specific patient ­according to
specific characteristics and prescribed in writing by a properly qualified doctor,
who assumes the responsibility.

If you require a custom-made product, please contact your customer service

representative.

73

15X.255.indd 73 26/05/2017 09:38

 Quality at the customer´s service

“We want our customers, rather than our products, to come back.”
Although we did not coin this phrase (unfortunately!), it does provide an a
­ ccurate
description of our quality a
­ ssurance policy.

Directives
93/42/EEC
All production stages carried out by Institut Straumann AG are subject to the stan-
dards laid down in the EN ISO 9001 quality assurance system. This European stan-
dard e
­ stablishes in detail the criteria which, in order to be recognized, a company
must fulfil regarding comprehensive quality assurance d
­ uring its manufacturing
processes.

Medical products have to meet extremely strict requirements, and with good
reason. These requirements are defined in the European standard ISO 13485, which
we also fulfill. This ensures that the quality of our products and services meets our
customer´s expectations and can be reproduced and traced at any time.

Our products comply with all the basic requirements defined in the Medical
Devices Directive 93/42/EEC. Our medical products therefore carry the CE mark.

Institut Straumann AG fulfills the stringent requirements of the European Directive

93/42/EEC for medical devices as well as the EN ISO 9001 and ISO 13485 standards.

74

15X.255.indd 74 26/05/2017 09:38

 12 Important guidelines
Please note
Practitioners must have appropriate knowledge and instruc- Explanation of the symbols on labels and instruc-
tion in the handling of the Straumann CADCAM products or tion leaflets
other Straumann products (“Straumann Products”) for using the
Straumann Products safely and properly in accordance with the Batch code
instructions for use.
Catalogue number
The Straumann Product must be used in accordance with the
instructions for use provided by the manufacturer. It is the prac- Sterilized using irradiation
titioner’s responsibility to use the device in accordance with these
instructions for use and to determine, if the device fits to the indi-
vidual patient situation. Lower limit of temperature
…min.

The Straumann Products are part of an overall concept and must …max.

be used only in conjunction with the corresponding original Upper limit of temperature
components and instruments distributed by Institut Straumann
AG, its ultimate parent company and all affiliates or subsidiaries …max.

of such parent company (“Straumann”), except if stated otherwise Temperature limitation

…min.

in this document or in the instructions for use for the respective

Straumann Product. If use of products made by third parties is not
recommended by Straumann in this document or in the respective Caution: Federal law restricts this device
instructions for use, any such use will void any warranty or other to sale by or on the order of a dental
obligation, express or implied, of Straumann. professional.

Availability Do not re-use

Some of the Straumann Products listed in this document may not
be available in all countries.
Non-sterile
Caution
In addition to the caution notes in this document, our products must Caution, consult accompanying documents
be secured against aspiration when used intraorally.

Validity Use by
Upon publication of this document, all previous versions are
superseded.
Keep away from sunlight
Documentation
For detailed instructions on the Straumann Products contact your
Straumann representative. Straumann Products with the CE mark
0123 fulfill the requirements of the Medical
Copyright and trademarks Devices Directive 93/42 EEC
Straumann® documents may not be reprinted or published, in whole
or in part, without the written authorization of Straumann. Consult instructions for use
Straumann® and/or other trademarks and logos from Straumann®
mentioned herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
Straumann Holding AG and/or its affiliates.

75

15X.255.indd 75 26/05/2017 09:38

 International Headquarters
Institut Straumann AG
Peter Merian-Weg 12
CH-4002 Basel, Switzerland
Phone +41 (0)61 965 11 11
Fax +41 (0)61 965 11 01
www.straumann.com
  152.255/en/C/00 05/17

MP-Clip® is a registered trademark licenced to Cendres + Métaux Holding SA, Switzerland. Dolder® is a registered trademark from Prof.
Eugen Dolder, exclusively licenced to Cendres + Métaux Holding SA, Switzerland. Ackermann Bar® is a registered trademark licenced to
Cendres + Métaux Holding SA, Switzerland. Ceramicor® is a registered trademark of Cendres + Métaux SA, Switzerland. IPS e.max® is
a registered trademark of Ivoclar Vivadent AG, Liechtenstein. VITA CAD-Temp® is a registered trademark of VITA Zahnfabrik H. Rauter
GmbH & Co. KG.

© Institut Straumann AG, 2017. All rights reserved.

Straumann® and/or other trademarks and logos from Straumann® mentioned herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
Straumann Holding AG and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

15X.255.indd 76 26/05/2017 09:38